research paper

Hisham
allarticleswillbeuesed.zip

all articles will be uesed/2. ptfe properties and structure .pdf

2 Polytetrafluoroethylene: Properties and Structure

O U T L I N E

2.1 Introduction 9

2.2 Impact of F and CeF Bonds on the Properties of Polytetrafluoroethylene 9

2.3 Crystalline Structure of Polytetrafluoroethylene 12

2.4 Branched Tetrafluoroethylene Chains: Perfluorinated EthyleneePropylene Copolymer 12 2.4.1 Perfluorinated EthyleneePropylene

Copolymer 13

2.5 Reaction Mechanisms 14

2.6 Impact of Solvents on Fluoropolymers 15

2.7 Molecular Interaction of Polytetrafluoroethylene: Low Friction and Low Surface Energy 16

2.8 Conformations and Transitions of Polytetrafluoroethylene 18 2.8.1 Images of the Polytetrafluoroethylene

Molecule 19

2.9 Microstructure and Fracture of Polytetrafluoroethylene 20

References 22

2.1 Introduction

The main ingredient of an overwhelming majority of expanded polytetrafluoroethylene (ePTFE) pro- duced in the world, as the name indicates, is poly- tetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) resin. This chapter examines the important properties of PTFE, including the extreme properties exhibited by PTFE, and focuses on the significant impact of replacing hydrogen with fluorine in hydrocarbon macromole- cules. This substitution enhances a number of PTFE’s properties, including thermal stability, chemical resistance, electrical characteristics, and the coeffi- cient of friction.

Another critical area this chapter considers is the mechanical behavior of PTFE under various stress/strain conditions. This is important because the unique mechanical response of PTFE at high strain rates is foundational for ePTFE products.

Expanded PTFE Applications Handbook. http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/B978-

Copyright © 2017 Elsevier Inc. All rights reserved.

Understanding the role fluorine plays in altering the properties of a polymer will result in a more in- depth appreciation of, and deeper insight into, the characteristics of fluorinated polymers.

2.2 Impact of F and CeF Bonds on the Properties of Polytetrafluoroethylene

Fluorine is a highly reactive element with the highest electronegativity of all the elements (4 Pauling on a relative scale of 0.7e4) [1]. The change in the properties of compounds where fluorine has replaced hydrogen can be attributed to the differ- ences between CeF and CeH bonds.

A simple way to frame the issue is to explore the differences between linear polyethylene (PE) and PTFE. The two chemical structures appear to be

1-4377-7855-7.00002-X

9

similar on paper, yet in PTFE replacing H with F results in the distortion of the geometry of PE:

Let us compare the CeF and CeH bonds. Table 2.1 [1,5] summarizes the key differences in the electronic properties and sizes of F and H. In comparing fluorine and hydrogen, several relevant differences are noted:

1. Fluorine is the most electronegative of all elements

2. Fluorine has unshared electron pairs

3. F is more easily converted to its ionic F�

4. The CeF bond is stronger than the CeH bond

5. Fluorine is larger than hydrogen

The electronegativity of carbon (2.5 Paulings) is somewhat higher than that of hydrogen (2.1 Paul- ings) and significantly lower than that of fluorine (4 Paulings). These electronegativity values imply that the polarity of the CeF bond is opposite to that of

Polyethylene

H H H H

C C C C

H H H H

Polytetrafluoroethylene

F F F F

C C C C

F F F F

10

the CeH bond, and the CeF bond is more highly polarized (see Fig. 2.1). In other words, fluorine has a higher electron density it pulls the shared pair of electrons closer to itself relative to the center point of the CeF bond. Conversely, in the CeH bond the electron pair is closer to carbon, which has a higher electron density.

The difference in polarity of CeH and CeF bonds affects the relative stability of the its conformations of the two polymer (PTFE and PE) chains. Crystal- lization of PE takes place in a planar and trans conformation.

The crystal structure of PTFE, e(CF2)ne, is un- usual because it has a number of crystal forms (Fig. 2.2) and because there is substantial molecular motion within the crystal well below its melting point. PTFE can only be forced into a planar conformation (form or phase III) at extremely high pressures [6]. In contrast, at below 19�C, PTFE crystallizes as an incommensurate helix with approximately 0.169 nm per repeat distance [30], thus requiring 13 carbon atoms for a 180-degree turn to be completed. At above 19�C, the repeat distance increases to 0.195 nm, which means that 15 carbon atoms will be required for a 180-degree turn to be completed [7]. At temperatures above 19�C the chains are capable of angular displacement, and this angular displacement increases at temperatures above 30�C until the melting point is reached (342�C).

Substitution of F for H in the CeH bond increases the bond strength from 99.5 kcal/mol for the CeH bond to 116 kcal/mol for the CeF bond, which is substantial. Consequently, PTFE’s thermal stability and chemical resistance are much higher than those

EXPANDED PTFE APPLICATIONS HANDBOOK

Table 2.1 Electronic Properties of Hydrogen and Halogens [1,5]

Element (Preferred Ionic Form)

Electronic Configuration

Electronegativity (Pauling)

Ionization Energy

(kcal/g atom) XD D ee > X

Electron Affinity

(kcal/g atom) X D ee > Xe

CeX Bond Energy in

CX4 (kcal/mol)

CeX Bond Length in CX4 (Å)

H (Hþ)

1s1 2.1 315.0 17.8 99.5 1.091

F (F)

1s1

2s22p5 4.0 403.3 83.5 116 1.317

Cl (Cl)

1s1

2s22p5

3s23p53d0

3.0 300.3 87.3 78 1.766

X ¼ H, F or Cl.

of PE because more energy is required to break the CeF bond. Additionally, the size of the F atom and the length of the CeF bond (Table 2.1) are such that the carbon backbone of PTFE is blanketed with fluorine atoms, thus rendering the CeF bond impervious to solvent attack. The polarity and strength of the CeF bond rule out an F atom abstraction mechanism for formation of chain branches in PTFE. Instead, fully and partially fluo- rinated comonomers with pendent groups are poly- merized with tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) to produce copolymers.

In contrast, highly branched PE (>8 branches per 100 carbon atoms) can be synthesized with relative ease [8]. The branching mechanism is a tool used to reduce the crystallinity of PE to produce polymers with differing properties.

Most of the properties of PE and PTFE differ significantly. The following four properties in particular are vastly altered in PTFE:

1. PTFE has one of the lowest surface energies among the organic polymers

2. PTFE is the most chemically resistant organic polymer

3. PTFE is one of the most thermally stable among the organic polymers

4. PTFE’s melting point and specific gravity are more than double those of PE

Table 2.2 lists the properties of PTFE and PE. Commercial PE melts at 100e140�C, depending

on the extent of branching, as compared to PTFE, which melts at 327�C (first melting point 342�C). One could expect that weak intermolecular forces in PTFE should result in a lower melting point, or at most in a somewhat higher melting point because of the extremely high molecular weight of PTFE. On the contrary, however, PTFE’s melting point is significantly higher than that of PE. Why?

The nature of the intermolecular forces in PTFE, which are responsible for its high melting point, is not fully understood. The answer may lie in the differ- ences between the molecular structure conformation and the crystalline structure of PE and PTFE. Because fluorine atoms are much larger than hydrogen atoms, there is less chain mobility in PTFE than in PE. Steric repulsion, due to the size of the fluorine atoms, pre- vents the PTFE from forming a PE-like planar zigzag conformation. Instead, its conformation is helical and steric repulsion is minimized.

PTFE is insoluble in common solvents. The replacement of H with the highly electronegative F renders PTFE immiscible with protonated material. Conversely, PE can be plasticized and dissolved above its melting point much more easily than PTFE. PTFE absorbs only small amounts of per- halogenated solvents such as perchloroethylene and carbon tetrachloride. The insolubility of PTFE in solvents is one of its most important characteristics in many applications, such as in lined pipe and other lined equipment for processing corrosive chemicals.

In summary, the characteristics of F and CeF bonds give rise to the high melting point, low solu- bility, high thermal stability, low friction, and low surface energy of PTFE.

δ α

Center Point of the C—H Bond

Center Point of the C—F Bond

C-2αH+α

C+2δF-δ F-δ

H+α

Shared Pair of Electrons

Shared Pair of Electrons

Shared Pair of Electrons

Shared Pair of Electrons

Figure 2.1 The comparative polarization of CeH and

CeF bonds.

III

II

I IV

280 300 320 340 360 380 Temperature (K)

0.2

0.4

0.6

P re

ss ur

e (G

P a)

Figure 2.2 Phase diagram of polytetrafluoroethylene

[31].

2: POLYTETRAFLUOROETHYLENE: PROPERTIES AND STRUCTURE 11

2.3 Crystalline Structure of Polytetrafluoroethylene

Bunn and Howells first reported the crystalline structure of PTFE in 1954 [32]. As Fig. 2.2 illus- trates, PTFE has two atmospheric pressure crystal- line transitions, at 19�C [32] and at 30�C [33]. Substantial molecular motion within the crystal is observed well below the melting point of 327�C in once-melted PTFE and of 342�C in the as- polymerized PTFE. PTFE has a and g glass-like transitions at �80�C and 126�C [34]. The first-order

transition at 19�C between phases II and IV is unraveling in the helical conformation from a well-ordered triclinic structure with 13 atoms/180 degrees turn to a partially ordered hexagonal phase with 15 atoms/180 degrees turn [1,8,12,30,34e36].

Further rotational disordering and untwisting of the helices occur above 30�C, giving way to phase I to form a pseudohexagonal structure with dynamic conformational disorder and long-range positional and orientational order [1,2]. There also exists a fourth phase (III) at high pressure, as seen in Fig. 2.2 [37].

Fig. 2.3 shows PTFE crystallites, which appear as striations throughout the micrograph. The extent of crystallization, the size of the crystallites, and the packing order increase with the decrease in the cooling rate from the molten state. PTFE molecules crystallize in an accordion style in which the chain folds back and forth on itself. The uniformity of the width of the crystals indicates the regularity of the structure of PTFE molecules.

The crystal model, in which the chain folding is regular and sharp with a uniform fold period is called adjacent reentry model (Fig. 2.4). The chains reenter through the adjacent neighbor, with only a few exceptions due to multiple nucleation and chain-end defects. This is a very idealized visuali- zation of the chain-folding process and not appli- cable to the majority of polymers. There are sharp boundaries between the crystal and the amorphous phases.

2.4 Branched Tetrafluoroethylene Chains: Perfluorinated EthyleneePropylene Copolymer

TFE polymerization allows an overwhelming majority of the chains to crystallize, despite their very large molecular weight. This high degree of crystallization is important to the development of properties such as high modulus, low coeffi- cient of friction, and high heat-deflection tem- perature. Crystallinity of virgin PTFE (never melted) is in the range of 92e98% [9], which is consistent with an unbranched chain structure. Properties of PTFE are altered by the inducement of branching or substitution of a different atom for fluorine. An example is described in this section.

Table 2.2 A Comparison of Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and Polyethylene Properties [2e4]

Property PTFE Polyethylene

Density 2.2e2.3 0.92e1

Melting temperature (�C)

342 (first) 327 (second)

105e140

Dielectric constant (1 kHz)

2.0 2.3

Dynamic coefficient of friction

0.04 0.33

Surface energy (dynes/g)

18 33

Resistance to solvents and chemicals

Excellent, no known solvent

Susceptible to hot

hydrocarbons

Thermal Stabilitya

T1/2 ( �C) 505 404

K350 (%/min) 0.000002 0.008

Eact (kJ/mol) 339 264

Melt creep viscosityb (Poise)

1010e1012 e

Refractive index 1.35 1.51

Chain branching propensity

No Yes

a T1/2 is the temperature at which 50% of the polymer is lost after

heating in a vacuum for 30 min; K350 is the rate of volatilization, ie,

weight loss, at 350�C; Eact is the activation energy of thermal degradation. b Melt creep viscosity for PTFE at 380�C. Please see S. Ebnesajjad, Fluoroplastics, Vol. 1: Non-Melt Processible Fluoroplastics, second

ed., Plastics Design Library, Elsevier, Oxford, UK, 2014, for the

definition and procedure to measure melt creep viscosity, which is

specific to PTFE.

12 EXPANDED PTFE APPLICATIONS HANDBOOK

2.4.1 Perfluorinated EthyleneePropylene Copolymer

Perfluorinated ethyleneepropylene copolymer (FEP), a copolymer of TEF and hexafluoropropylene,

contains a tertiary carbon at the branch point bonded to a pendent CF3. This carbon should have less thermal stability than primary carbons and, to a lesser extent, than secondary carbons that constitute the rest of the backbone of the polymer chain. This decreased

Figure 2.3 Crystalline structure of polytetrafluoroethylene cooled down from 355�C to 200�C at 4.6�C per hour (image formed by scanning electron microscopy) [38].

Figure 2.4 Schematic diagram of three chain-folding model in polymer crystals: (A) adjacent reentry with sharp

folds; (B) adjacent reentry with loose folds; and (C) random reentry or switchboard model [39].

2: POLYTETRAFLUOROETHYLENE: PROPERTIES AND STRUCTURE 13

stability is due to a steric effect in which the chain departs from a helix at the branch point. Fig. 2.5 shows the results of thermogravimetric analysis of PTFE and FEP after 1 h of heating in the air. The lines in Fig. 2.5 start at a degradation rate of 0.02% weight loss/hour at 300�C for FEP and 0.03% weight loss/hour at 425�C for PTFE.

Table 2.3 provides a comparison of the properties of FEP and PTFE. Melting point, processing tem- perature, degradation temperature, and upper continuous use temperature are all significantly lower for FEP. The most important of these properties is the use temperature. The reason for lower thermal sta- bility in FEP lies in the greater susceptibility of the tertiary carbon bonded to the pendent per- fluoromethyl group to oxidation. FEP has about half the crystallinity of PTFE, even though its molecular weight is an order of magnitude lower. CF3 side chains disrupt the crystallization sufficiently to reduce the crystalline content. The melt viscosity of FEP is almost 100 million times lower than that of PTFE, which places it among the melt-processible thermoplastic polymers.

2.5 Reaction Mechanisms

Perfluoroolefins such as PTFE are generally, in spite of broad chemical resistance, more vulnerable to attack by nucleophiles than electrophiles, which is the opposite of the case of hydrocarbon olefins. Nucleophilic attacks occur on the fluoroolefins by the scheme proposed in Fig. 2.6. The nucleophile (Nuc) approaches the carbon side of the double bond (I) searching for a positive charge, which leads to the formation of a carbon ion (II). For example, if the nucleophilic compound was methoxy sodium, the CH3eOe side of the molecule would be approaching TFE. The carbon ion (II) is unstable and will give off a F� ion and generate reaction products. The nature of the reaction medium determines which product is generated. In the example of methoxy sodium, in the absence of a proton donor such as water, F� would combine with Naþ to produce NaF and per- fluorovinyl methyl ether (III).

Reactions of TFE oligomers and nucleophiles have been reported, such as the pentamer (1) of TFE with alkoxide nucleophiles (see Fig. 2.7), sulfur- containing nucleophiles and amines. The presence of a mobile double bond in the pentamer molecule renders it susceptible to attack by nucleophiles. It can either replace a fluorine atom at a vinyl position or attack the double bond, causing rearrangement towards a terminal position. When the pentamer was reacted with alkoxide nucleophiles such as

Figure 2.5 Comparison of thermal degradation of

perfluorinated ethyleneepropylene copolymer (FEP)

and polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) by thermogravi-

metric analysis [10].

Table 2.3 A Comparison of the Properties of FEP and PTFE [10]

Property FEP PTFE

Melting point (�C) 265 327

Processing temperature (�C)

360 400

Thermogravimetric analysis loss temperature of 1%/h (�C)

380 465

Upper continuous use temperature (�C)

200 260

MV (380�C) (Poise) 10 4e105 1011e1012

Crystallinity of virgin polymer (% wt)

40e50 92e98

FEP, perfluorinated ethyleneepropylene copolymer; PTFE,

polytetrafluoroethylene.

FEP

F F F F F F

C C C C C C

F F F F F F C F

F

14 EXPANDED PTFE APPLICATIONS HANDBOOK

allylic alcohol, methanol, and ethanol at low tem- peratures (�30�C to �40�C), kinetically controlled products (2) were obtained as the main products. At room temperature, however, the main products were thermodynamically controlled (3) and accompanied by small amounts of degradation products (4) [40,41].

Generally, PTFE is not susceptible to nucleophilic attack because of the absence of double bonds. It is still susceptible to loss of fluorine by electrophilic attack, particularly under heat and over long periods of exposure. Alkali metals, which are highly reactive elements such as cesium, potassium, sodium, and lithium, are among the most likely candidates for abstraction of fluorine from PTFE by an electrophilic mechanism. Certain other metals, such as magne- sium, can attack PTFE if they are highly activated by etching or other means.

Loss of fluorine destabilizes PTFE’s structure. As the fluorine-to-carbon ratio decreases, the color of

PTFE changes from white to brown and then to black. The black layer is normally comprised of carbon, some oxygen, and small amounts of other elements.

2.6 Impact of Solvents on Fluoropolymers

Earlier in this chapter, the structure of PTFE was likened to a carbon rod completely blanketed with fluorine atoms, which render the CeF bond imper- vious to solvent attack. Testing the effects of nearly all solvents on this polymer has proved this postulate. There are no known solvents for PTFE below its melting point. PTFE is attacked only by molten alkali metals, chlorine trifluoride, and gaseous fluorine. Attacks by alkali metals result in defluorination and surface oxidation of PTFE parts, which is a conve- nient route to render them adherable.

Small molecules can penetrate the structure of fluoropolymers. Tables 2.4 and 2.5 provide a sum- mary of room-temperature sorption of hydrogen- containing and nonhydrogenated solvents into films of PTFE and FEP. Table 2.4 describes the charac- teristics of the films used in these experiments. Most

→ → →

Nucleophile

Nuc+—CF2—CF2- I

II F- Reaction Products

EXAMPLE: Nuc = CH3—O—Na [No proton donor like water is present]

+

CH3—O—Na NaF III

CF2—CF2—

CF2—CF2—

[Nuc]δ+ [CF2—CF2]δ-—

[Nuc ]δ+ [CF2—CF2]δ-—

CH3—O—CF—CF2—+ +

TFE

Figure 2.6 Proposed reaction scheme for nucleophilic attack on fluoroolefins [2].

RF C C F

CF3 CF3

RF C C

OR

F

CF2 CF3

RF RFCH2COORC C OR +

CF3 CF3 r.t.

NaOR F113

NaOR

-30 - - 40 °C

F113 r.t.

Et 3 N

RF = C(C2F5)2CF3

R = (a) CH2CH CH2 = (b) C2H5 = (c) CH3

1

2

3 4

r. t. = Room temperature Et3N:

H3C

H3C

CH3N

Figure 2.7 Reaction of the pentamer of tetrafluoro-

ethylene with alkoxide nucleophiles [41].

Table 2.4 Characteristics of Films in Sorption Studies [11]

PTFE FEP

Thickness (mm) 50 50

Preparation Cast from aqueous dispersion

Melt extruded

Crystallinity (%) 41 42

FEP, perfluorinated ethyleneepropylene copolymer; PTFE,

polytetrafluoroethylene.

2: POLYTETRAFLUOROETHYLENE: PROPERTIES AND STRUCTURE 15

hydrogen-containing solvents are absorbed into PTFE and FEP at less than 1%. In their case, the extent of swelling does not depend on the solubility parameter. In contrast, halogenated nonhydrogenated solvents penetrate these polymers as a strong func- tion of the solubility parameter. Maximum swelling (11%) takes place at a solubility parameter of 6, and it drops to less than 1% swelling at a solubility parameter of 10.

A useful rule of thumb is that little hydrogen- containing solvent is taken up by perfluoropolymers, irrespective of the solubility parameter. The amount will increase as temperatures increase. One way to envision this process is to imagine that the solvent molecules are increasingly energized at higher tem- peratures and the polymer structure becomes more open. Both effects lead to more swelling. With nonhydrogen-containing solvents, swelling decreases when the solubility parameter of the solvent increases. More swelling occurs at higher temperatures, as with the hydrogen-containing solvents. “The more the solvent chemical structure resembles the fluoropol- ymer structure, the greater the swelling,” is the rule of thumb for this group.

2.7 Molecular Interaction of Polytetrafluoroethylene: Low Friction and Low Surface Energy

Coefficient of friction and surface energy (critical surface tension) are very low for fluoropolymers (see Table 2.6). Both characteristics are essential for many applications of these plastics, such as bridge

Table 2.5 Sorption of Various Compounds by Perfluorocarbon Polymers at Room Temperature [11]

Compound

Solubility Parameter

(cal/cm3)1/2

Wt Gain%

PTFE

FEP

Resin

Compounds Containing Hydrogen

Isooctane 6.85 0.8 0.4

n-Hexane 7.3 0.7 0.5

Diethyl ether 7.4 0.8 0.6

n-Octane 7.55 1.2 0.5

Cyclohexane 8.2 1.1 0.4

Toluene 8.9 0.4 0.3

1,1-Dichloroethane 9.1 1.5 0.6

Benzene 9.15 0.4 0.3

CHCl3 9.3 1.4 1.4

CH2Cl2 9.7 0.5 0.6

1,2-Dichloroethane 9.8 0.8 0.4

CHBr3 10.5 0.5 0.2

Average 0.8 0.5

Standard

deviation

0.4 0.3

Compounds Without Hydrogen

FC-75a 10.6 11.0

Perfluorokerosene 6.2 11.2 6.1

Perfluorodimethyl- cyclohexane

6.1 10.1 10.4

C6F12 b 9.1 8.4

1,2-Br2 TFE 6.5 7.2

SiCl4 7.6 5.2 3.6

CCl4 8.6 2.4 1.8

SnCl4 8.7 3.4 2.0

TiCl4 2.2 1.3

Table 2.5 Sorption of Various Compounds by

Perfluorocarbon Polymers at Room Temperature [11]

(Continued)

Compound

Solubility

Parameter (cal/cm3)1/2

Wt Gain%

PTFE

FEP

Resin

9.0

CCl2]CCl2 9.3 1.9 1.4

CS2 10.0 0.4 0.2

Br2 11.5 0.7 0.7

FEP, perfluorinated ethyleneepropylene copolymer; PTFE,

polytetrafluoroethylene; TFE, tetrafluoroethylene.a Structure:

CF2 CF2

CF2 CF2 CF3CF2CF2CF O

b Cyclic dimer of hexafluoropropylene:

F2 F2 F2F2

F2

F2

16 EXPANDED PTFE APPLICATIONS HANDBOOK

expansion bearings (low friction) and nonstick cookware (low surface energy). This section relates these properties to the intermolecular forces of PTFE and other materials. To help the reader, definitions of the forces are briefly discussed.

Over a century ago (in 1879), Johannes Diderik Van der Waals postulated the existence of attractive intermolecular forces. His framework for the dis- cussion of these forces was a modified form of the ideal gas law. Other researchers after Van der Waals have classified the intermolecular forces into four components:

1. Dispersion (or nonpolar) force

2. Dipoleedipole force

3. Dipole-induced-dipole (induction) force

4. Hydrogen bonding

These forces are referred to as Van der Waals forces [13e20]. The focus in this section is on short- range forces between two molecules which are fairly close to each other. Van der Waals forces can exist between any pair of molecules. A second class of repulsive forces acts in opposition to the Van der Waals forces. The net result of two forces is the actual repulsive force present between two molecules.

All four forms of attractive energy are propor- tional to 1/r6, therefore allowing the Van der Waals forces to be expressed by Eq. (2.1). Repulsive energy for two neutral molecules that get close to each other is conventionally expressed by Eq. (2.2). The total energy between the two molecules is the sum of the

attractive repulsive energies, shown in Eq. (2.3), which is known as Lennard-Jones potential [21].

Ea ¼ A � r6 (2.1)

Er ¼ B � r12 (2.2)

Et ¼ A � r6 þ B�r12 (2.3)

where r is the distance between two molecules, A, B are constants.

PTFE molecules have little propensity for polari- zation or ionization, which minimizes the nonpolar energy, or force, between PTFE molecules and between PTFE and other molecules. Neither are there any permanent dipoles in its structure, which is not the case for polymers such as polychlorotrifluoroethylene and polyvinylfluoride, minimizing dipoleedipole energy and force in PTFE. A low polarizability coef- ficient minimizes dipole-induced-dipole energy. The neutral electronic state of PTFE and its symmetric geometry rule out hydrogen bonding. Consequently, PTFE is very soft and easily abraded. The molecules slip by and slide against each other [22]. The absence of any branches or side chains eliminates any steric hindrance, which could constrain the slipping of PTFE molecules past each other. In PTFE (and fluo- ropolymers in general) relative to engineering poly- mers, this characteristic gives rise to properties like:

Low coefficient of friction

Table 2.6 Coefficient of Friction and Surface Energy of Unfilled Fluoropolymers

Fluoropolymers Formula

Coefficient of Friction

(Dynamic)

Critical Surface Tension [12] (dyne/cm)

Surface Tension [21] (Harmonic- Mean Method)

(dyne/cm)

Polyethylene eCH2eCH2e 0.33 31 36.1

Polyvinylfluoride eCHFeCH2 0.3 28 38.4

Polyvinylidenefluoride eCF2eCH2e 0.3 25 33.2

Polytrifluoroethylene eCF2eCHFe 0.3 22 e

Polytetrafluoroethylene eCF2eCF2e 0.04 18 22.5

Polyvinylchloride eCHCleCH2e 0.5 39 41.9

Polyvinylidenechloride eCCl2eCH2e 0.9 40 45.4

2: POLYTETRAFLUOROETHYLENE: PROPERTIES AND STRUCTURE 17

Low surface energy

High elongation

Low tensile strength

High cold flow

The electronic balance and neutrality of the PTFE molecule result in:

High chemical resistance

Low polarizability

Low dielectric constant

Low dissipation factor

High volume and surface resistance

These properties serve as the foundation of the applications of this plastic.

2.8 Conformations and Transitions of Polytetrafluoroethylene

The special size and electronic relationship of fluorine and carbon atoms set the conformational and transitional arrangement of PTFE apart from seem- ingly similar molecules such as PE. Polymerization of TFE produces a linear molecule without branches or side groups. Branching would require removal of fluorine from CeF bonds, which does not occur during the polymerization. The linear chain of PTFE does not have a planar zigzag conformation, as is the case with PE. Only under extreme pressure (5000 atm) does the chain adopt a zigzag confor- mation [23e25]. Under this pressure the chain

assumes a helical conformation to accommodate the large atoms of fluorine.

In 1956, E.S. Clark et al. presented an unusual room temperature transition for PTFE that occurs at 19�C between forms II and IV, as seen in Fig. 2.2 [42]. It was interpreted as an untwisting in the helical conformation of the molecule from a 13/6 confor- mation to a 15/7 conformation.

Below 19�C, a helix forms with a 13.8-degree angle of rotation around each carbonecarbon bond. At this angle, repeat units of 13 CF2 are required to complete a 180-degree twist of the helix. At above 19�C, the number of CF2 groups needed to complete a 180-degree twist increases to 15. The crystalline structure of PTFE changes at 19�C, which is signif- icant due to its proximity to the ambient temperature: the repeat distance is 1.69 nm and the separation of chain axes is 0.562 nm [26]. Above 19�C, the repeat distance increases to 1.95 nm and the separation of chain axes decreases to 0.555 nm. In the phase III (zigzag) crystal state, at a pressure of 12 kbar, density increases to 2.74 g/cm3 and crystal dimensions are a ¼ 0.959 nm, b ¼ 0.505 nm, c ¼ 0.262 nm, and g ¼ 105.5 degrees [26].

The helical conformation of the linear PTFE molecules causes the chains to resemble rod-like cylinders [22] which are rigid and fully extended. The crystallization of PTFE molecules occurs in a banded structure depicted in Fig. 2.8. The length of the bands is in the range of 10e100 mm, while the range of the bandwidth is 0.2e1 mm, depending on the rate of the cooling of the molten polymer [27]. Slowing the cooling rates generates larger crystal bandwidths. There are striations on the bandwidths that correspond to crystalline

Crystalline ‘slice’

Crystalline

Disordered region

200 Å

c.4–9 Å

c.5–7 Å

100 µm

1 µm

Figure 2.8 Crystalline structure of polytetrafluoroethylene [28].

18 EXPANDED PTFE APPLICATIONS HANDBOOK

slices, which are produced by the folding over, or stacking, of the crystalline segments. These segments are separated by amorphous polymer at the bending point. The thickness of a crystalline slice is 20e30 nm [28].

PTFE has several first- and second-order transition temperatures (Table 2.7) [9]. The actual quantity of minor transitions is somewhat dependent on the experimental method used. From a practical stand- point, the two first-order transitions that occur at 19�C and 30�C are most important. Fig. 2.2 shows the phase diagram of PTFE. It can be seen from this figure that the only phase that cannot be present at atmospheric pressure is phase III. Phase III requires elevated pressure under which the polymer molecule assumes a zigzag conformation.

Below 19�C, the crystalline system of PTFE is a nearly perfect triclinic. Above 19�C, the unit cell changes to a hexagonal conformation. In the range of 19e30�C, the chain segments become increasing disorderly; and the preferred crystallographic direc- tion disappears. Between 19�C and 30�C, there is a large expansion in the specific volume of PTFE, approaching 1.8% [29], which must be considered in measuring the dimensions of articles made from this plastic.

2.8.1 Images of the Polytetrafluoroethylene Molecule

There has been an interest in studying the char- acteristics of the unidirectionally oriented PTFE chain. Samples of PTFE transferred to glass surfaces have been studied by atomic force microscopy (AFM). AFM is a powerful scanning probe technique for surface analysis of a variety of materials with nanometer-scale and is a very effective tool for analyzing nonmetallic materials. The technique does

not require special interactions between the probe tip and the surface being analyzed such as conducting current, tunneling current, or magnetic forces. Therefore, AFM investigations of thin films and crystals of polymers and polymer-related compounds have been conducted successfully [43e45].

AFM studies of PTFE film thickness and molecular structure [46e48] have yielded important results. The image resolution from these studies, however, was insufficient to clearly distinguish the individual fluorine atoms from the PTFE macromolecular chains. A study by the National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) in 2000 provided the first direct obser- vations of individual fluorine atoms, and the first measurements of the fluorine-helix and carbon-

Table 2.7 Transitions of Polytetrafluoroethylene [9]

Temperature (8C) Order Region Affected Type of Disorder

19 First order Crystalline Angular displacement

30 First order Crystalline Crystal disorder

90 First order Crystalline

�90 Second order Amorphous Onset of rotational motion around CeC bond

�30 Second order Amorphous 130 Second order Amorphous

Figure 2.9 Atomic resolution image, taken with a

50-Å field of view, shows the chain-like structure of

the polytetrafluoroethylene macromolecules with

intermolecular spacing of 5.72 Å [54].

2: POLYTETRAFLUOROETHYLENE: PROPERTIES AND STRUCTURE 19

helix radii from highly oriented PTFE films using AFM [49].

A thin PTFE film was mechanically deposited onto a smooth glass substrate at specific temperatures using a friction-transfer technique. Atomic resolution images of these films show that the chain-like helical

structures of the PTFE macromolecules are aligned parallel to each other with an intermolecular spacing of 5.72 Å (Figs. 2.9 and 2.10), and individual fluorine atoms are clearly observed along these twisted mo- lecular chains with an interatomic spacing of 2.75 Å. Furthermore, the first direct AFM measurements for the radius of the fluorine helix and of the carbon helix in sub-Angstrom scale are reported as 1.7 and 0.54 Å, respectively (Table 2.8).

2.9 Microstructure and Fracture of Polytetrafluoroethylene

PTFE is a semicrystalline polymer used in a large number of challenging mechanical applications where its chemical resistance and broad temperature resistance are often required. Voids in PTFE structure interact with crystallinity in the microstructure development and failure (fracture) of parts. Whether it is used in aerospace or in an implanted medical device, understanding the mechanism of PTFE’s fracture failure is quite important.

Researchers from Los Alamos National Labora- tory and the US Naval Academy conducted an extensive study of the mechanical properties of PTFE and began publishing the results in 2004. A comprehensive review of past studies and new works

Figure 2.10 Atomic resolution image, taken with a

30-Å field of view, showing the unique twisted

character of the polytetrafluoroethylene macromole-

cules [54].

Table 2.8 X-ray Diffraction and Atomic Force Microscopy (AFM) Measurements Comparison for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Molecules [54]

PTFE Molecular Configuration

X-ray [67] Diffraction (Å)

AFM Data NASA Study (Å) AFM Data [68] (Å) AFM Data [47] (Å)

PTFE intermolecular spacing

5.54 5.72 5.80 5.30

Bragg spacing along chain axis

1.29 1.43 e e

Fluorine atomic spacing

2.60 2.75 e e

Period length (13- atom chain)

16.8 16.9 11.4 e

CF2 group helix spacing

2.0e2.4 2.36 e e

Fluorine-helix radius

1.64 1.70 e e

Carbon-helix radius 0.42 0.54 e e

20 EXPANDED PTFE APPLICATIONS HANDBOOK

by Rae, Dattelbaum, Brown, Joyce, and their asso- ciates has shed new light on the behavior and failure modes of PTFE under compressive and tensile stress [37,50e57].

Brown and Dattelbaum [40] studied the effects of the crystalline phase on the fracture and micro- structure evolution of PTFE, which is unique because of its three ambient pressure crystalline phases near room temperature. The aim of their study was to uncover the effects of temperature-induced phase transitions on the fracture mechanisms of PTFE.

Brown and Dattelbaum’s study is superior to pre- vious research for a number of reasons. There are a significant number of investigations of the chemical structure of PTFE, of crystalline phase transitions, and of the percent of crystallinity. Most studies of the mechanical behavior of PTFE have either focused on a single temperature [58,59] or overlooked the tran- sitions of the crystalline phase over the temperature range investigated [55,60,61,65,66]. Studies by McCrum [62], Vincent [63], and Kisbenyi et al. [64] take phase transitions into account by correlating changes of the modulus and loss factor with phase transitions. They do not, however, consider and report the characteristics of PTFE. Because PTFE crystals completely melt during sintering and recrystallization occurs during cooling, crystallinity is an important component of fabrication process variables.

Due to the nonlinear mechanical behavior of PTFE, studied by Rae and Brown [51] extensively, the fracture behavior cannot be captured by linear elastic fracture mechanics. Hence, a J-integral analysis [65] was performed to measure the nonlinear elasticeplastic strain energy fracture toughness using the single compact tension normal- ization technique outlined in ASTM E1820.

Brown and Dattelbaum used molded/sintered bil- lets of Teflon® PTFE 7C for machining fracture specimens as defined in ASTM E1820. Two sets of fracture specimens were machined such that the crack propagation would occur either parallel to, or perpendicular to, the compaction direction of PTFE, as illustrated in Fig. 2.11. Tests were performed at �75�C, �50�C, �15�C, 15�C, 25�C, 50�C, and 100�C. These test temperatures encompass the three ambient pressure crystalline phases of PTFE. At 25�C the crystalline structure of PTFE consists of phase IV that converts to phase I at higher tempera- tures (50�C and 100�C).

Crack propagation in PTFE was found to be strongly phase dependent, with a brittle-to-ductile transition associated with the room temperature phase transitions. Above 19�C, extensive crack tip blunting and plastic deformation were observed and crack tip positions were measured optically. Increases in frac- ture toughness resulted from the onset of stable fibril formation bridging the crack plane and the increased plastic deformation. The stability of drawing fibrils was primarily determined by temperature and crys- talline phase with additional dependence on loading rate and microstructure anisotropy.

While fracture toughness values associated with the initiation of crack growth have nominal depen- dence on orientation, crack propagation perpendic- ular to the pressing direction is far less stable than when it is parallel to the pressing direction. This work demonstrated that although PTFE has been consid- ered highly resistant to crack propagation due to its behavior at room temperature, the onset of brittle fracture below room temperature caused by the temperature-induced phase transition necessitates consideration of brittle fracture during service at lower temperatures.

PTFE is heterogeneous because of the mingling of its crystalline domains in an amorphous matrix. It provides a mechanism for the formation of micro- voids in the high-stress region near a crack tip, as illustrated in Fig. 2.12. The mechanisms by which crystalline domains in PTFE orient themselves under uniaxial loading are dependent on the phase. PTFE in phase II has limited material mobility, and the crys- talline domains deform and orient out of the principle stress direction. Here, fracture either occurs as cleavage (Fig. 2.12A) or microvoid coalescence (Fig. 2.12B) which results in brittle crack growth with a low resistance to fracture. PTFE crystalline domains in phase IV initially deform and orient out of

Pressing direction

PTFE billet

Parallel (II) Perpendicular (⊥)

Figure 2.11 Compact tension orientation relative to

billet pressing direction [40]. PTFE,

polytetrafluoroethylene.

2: POLYTETRAFLUOROETHYLENE: PROPERTIES AND STRUCTURE 21

the principle stress direction but rotate into the principle stress direction with additional extension, and crystalline domains in phase I preferentially orient into the primary stress direction [66].

Therefore, PTFE in phases IVor I is able to deform locally in the vicinity of microvoids to initiate the stable formation of fibrils. Once initiated, the for- mation of fibrils is an efficient mechanism to dissi- pate energy through localized plastic deformation (Fig. 2.12C). Moreover, as the fibrils are drawn they become oriented and thus stronger and stiffer. As the fibrils bridge the crack plane, they slow down the crack growth and shield the material ahead of the crack. The irreversible formation of fibrils pro- vides a significant mechanism for plastic deformation of PTFE in phase IV and phase I. Additionally, fibril formation is an orientation process and significantly increases the elastic strength of PTFE. The ability of fibrils to bridge the fracture plane retards the rapid crack propagation.

Joyce and Joyce [55e57] reached more or less similar conclusions: “Testing this polymer using multi-specimen procedures at standard laboratory testing rates and ambient temperatures would result in missing most interesting features. Use of the normalization procedure allows observation of the complex transition from creep-crack-growth behavior, to viscous blunting, through the run/arrest

or pop-in behaviors, to the smooth ductile-like J-R curve behavior observed here only at the higher loading rates and/or higher test temperatures.”

The key variable in determining fracture tough- ness and mode is temperature. Other variables, such as orientation, rate, and even adding fillers to PTFE, have less pronounced impact on the fracture tough- ness of PTFE. The crystalline structure of PTFE undergoes two transitions in a narrow temperature range at atmospheric pressure, which is the root cause of a wide variation of fracture toughness in a narrow temperature band.

References

[1] L. Pauling, The Nature of the Chemical Bond and the Structure of Molecules and Crystals: An Introduction to Modern Structural Chemistry, third ed., Cornell University Press, Ithaca, NY, 1960.

[2] R.D. Chambers, Fluorine in Organic Chemis- try, first ed., John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1973.

[3] M. Hudlicky, Chemistry of Fluorine Com- pounds, first ed., Macmillan, New York, 1962.

[4] D.W. Van Krevelen, Properties of Polymers: Their Estimation and Correlation with Chemical

Figure 2.12 Schematic of the primary fracture mechanisms observed in polytetrafluoroethylene: (A) cleavage,

(B) microvoid coalescence, and (C) ductile fibril formation [40].

22 EXPANDED PTFE APPLICATIONS HANDBOOK

Structure, second ed., Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1976.

[5] C.R. Patrick, Advan. Fluorine Chem. 3 (1) (1961).

[6] D.C. England, et al., in: Proceedings ofRobertA. Welch Conference on Chemical Research XXVI, R.A. Welch Foundation, 1982, pp. 193e243.

[7] Clark, L.T. Muus, Z. Krist (1962) 117e119. [8] R.A. Raff, K.W. Doak, Crystalline Olefin Poly-

mers, Interscience, 1965, pp. 678e680. [9] S.V. Gangal, Polytetrafluoroethylene, homo-

polymers of tetrafluoroethylene, in: Encyclo- pedia of Polymer Science and Engineering, second ed. vol. 17, JohnWiley, NewYork, 1989, pp. 577e600.

[10] B.B. Baker, D.J. Kasprzak, Thermal degradation of commercial fluoropolymer in air, Polym. Degrad. Stab. 42 (1994) 181e188.

[11] H.W. Starkweather Jr., The sorption of chemicals by perfluorocarbon polymers, Macromolecules 10 (5) (1977) 1161e1163.

[12] W.A. Zissman, Influence of construction on adhesion, Ind. Eng. Chem. (1963) 18e38.

[13] H. Margenau, N. Kestner, Theory of Intermo- lecular Forces, third ed., Pergamon Press, London, 1971.

[14] J.O. Hirschfelder (Ed.), Intermolecular Forces, Interscience, New York, 1967.

[15] Intermolecular Forces. Discussion, Faraday Society, 1965, p. 40.

[16] J.N. Israelachvilli, D. Tabor, Prog. Surf. Mem- ber. Sci. 7 (1) (1973).

[17] J.N. Israelachvilli, Quart. Rev. Biophys. 6 (4) (1974) 341.

[18] J.N. Israelachvilli, in: Yearbook of Science and Technology, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1976, pp. 23e31.

[19] H.Krupp,Adv.Colloid InterfaceSci. 1 (1967) 111. [20] J.O. Hirschfelder, C.F. Curtiss, R.B. Bird, Mo-

lecular Theory ofGases andLiquids,Wiley,New York, 1954.

[21] S.Wu, Polymer Interface andAdhesion, first ed., Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, 1982.

[22] T.A. Blanchet, Polytetrafluoroethyelne, in: Handbook of Thermoplastics, first ed., Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, 1997.

[23] R.G. Brown, Vibrational spectra of polytetra- fluoroethylene: effects of temperature and pres- sure, J. Chem. Phys. 40 (1964) 2900.

[24] R.I. Beecroft, C.A. Swenson, Behavior of poly- tetrafluoroethylene (Teflon®) under high pres- sures, J. Appl. Phys. 30 (1959) 1793.

[25] T.W. Bates, W.H. Stockmayer, Conformational energies of perfluoalkanes. III. Properties of polytetrafluoroethylene, Macromolecules 1 (1968) 17.

[26] C.A. Sperati, H.W. Starkweather Jr., Adv. Polym. Sci. 2 (1961) 465.

[27] C.J. Speerschneider, C.H. Li, Some observations on the structure of polytetrafluoroethylene, J. Appl. Phys. 33 (1871) 1962.

[28] K.R. Makinson, D. Tabor, The friction and wear of polytetrafluoroethylene, Proc. R. Soc. 281 (1964) 49.

[29] N.G. McCrum, An internal friction study of pol- ytetrafluoroethylene, J. Polym. Sci. 34 (1959) 355.

[30] E.S. Clark, The molecular conformations of polytetrafluoroethylene: forms II and IV, Poly- mer 40 (1999) 4659e4665.

[31] R.K.Eby,E.S.Clark,B.L.Farmer,G.J. Piermarini, S. Block, Polymer 31 (1990) 2227.

[32] C.W. Bunn, E.R. Howells, Structures of mole- cules and crystals of fluorocarbons, Nature 174 (4429) (1954) 549e551.

[33] C.A. Sperati, H.W. Starkweather Jr., Fluorine- containing polymers. II. Polytetrafluoro- ethylene, Adv. Polym. Sci. 2 (1961) 465e495. Springer, Berlin.

[34] C.A. Sperati, Physical constants of polytetra- fluoroethylene, in: J. Brandrup, G.H. Immergut (Eds.), Polymer Handbook, second ed., John Wiley, New York, 1975, pp. V29eV36.

[35] C.W. Bunn, A.J. Cobbold, R.P. Palmer, The fine structure of polytetrafluoroethylene, J. Polym. Sci. 28 (117) (1958) 365e376.

[36] J.J. Weeks, I.C. Sanchez, R.K. Eby, C.J. Poser, Order-disorder transitions in polytetrafluoro- ethylene, Polymer 21 (3) (1980) 325e331.

[37] E.N. Brown, D.M. Dattelbaum, The role of crystalline phase on fracture and microstructure evolution of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), Polymer 46 (2005) 3056e3068.

[38] A.E. Woodward, Atlas of Polymer Morphology, Hanser Publishers, New York, 1989.

[39] R.J. Young, P.A. Lovell, Introduction to Polymers, third ed., CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2011, p. 411.

[40] L.F. Chen, J.H. Wang, Acta Chim. Sinica 41 (1983) 375.

2: POLYTETRAFLUOROETHYLENE: PROPERTIES AND STRUCTURE 23

[41] L.F. Chen, Nucleophilic substitution reactions of tetrafluoroethylene pentamer and tetramer and transformations of the reaction products, J. Fluorine Chem. 67 (1994) 95e101.

[42] R.H.H. Pierce Jr., E.S. Clark, J.F. Whitney, W.M.D. Bryant, in: Abstract of Papers, 130th Meeting of the American Chemical Society, September 1956, p. 9S.

[43] S.N. Magonov, K. Qvarnstrom, V. Elings, H. Cantow, Atomic force microscopy on poly- mers and polymer related compounds, Polym. Bull. 25 (1991) 689.

[44] W. Stocker, G. Bar, M. Kunz, M. Moller, Atomic force microscopy on polymers and polymer related compounds, Polym. Bull. 26 (1991) 215.

[45] G. Meyer, N.M. Amer, Optical-beam-deflection atomic force microscopy: the NaCl (001) surface, Appl. Phys. Lett. 56 (1990) 2100.

[46] H. Hansma, F. Motamedi, P. Hansma, C. Wittmann, Molecular resolution of thin, highly oriented poly(tetrafluoroethylene) films with the atomic force microscopy, J. Polym. 33 (1992) 647.

[47] S.N. Magonov, S. Kempf, M. Kimmig, H. Cantow, Atomic force microscopy on poly- mers and polymer related compounds, Polym. Bull. 26 (1991) 715.

[48] S.N. Magonov, Characterization of polymer surfaces with atomic force microscopy, Ann. Rev. Mater. Sci. 27 (1997) 175e222.

[49] J.A. Lee, Observation of Individual Fluorine Atoms from Highly Oriented Poly(tetrafluoro- ethylene) Films by Atomic Force Microscopy, 2000. NASA Report NASA/TMd2000e 209962, http://ntrs.nasa.gov/archive/nasa/casi. ntrs.nasa.gov/20000032164_2000025512.pdf.

[50] P.J. Rae, D.M. Dattelbaum, The properties of poly(tetrafluoroethylene) (PTFE) in compres- sion, Polymer 45 (2004) 7615e7625.

[51] P.J. Rae, E.N. Brown, The properties of poly(- tetrafluoroethylene) (PTFE) in tension, Polymer 46 (2005) 8128e8140.

[52] E.N. Brown, P.J. Rae, E.B. Orler, G.T. Gray III, D.M. Dattelbaum, The effect of crystallinity on the fracture of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), Mater. Sci. Eng. C 26 (2006) 1338e1343.

[53] J.J. Jordan, C.R. Siviour, J.R. Foley, E.N. Brown, Compressive properties of extruded polytetrafluoroethylene, Polymer 48 (2007) 4184e4195.

[54] E.N. Brown, P.J. Rae, C. Liu, Mixed-mode-I/II fracture of polytetrafluoroethylene, Mater. Sci. Eng. A 468e470 (2007) 253e258.

[55] J.A. Joyce, Polym. Eng. Sci. 43 (10) (2003) 1702.

[56] P.J. Joyce, J.A. Joyce, Int. J. Fract. 127 (4) (2004) 361.

[57] J.A. Joyce, P.J. Joyce, Eng. Fract. Mech. 71 (16e17) (2004) 2513.

[58] J.G. Williams, J.M. Hodgkinson, Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A 375 (1761) (1981) 231.

[59] A. Khan, H.Y. Zhang, Int. J. Plast. 17 (9) (2001) 1167.

[60] S. Fischer, N. Brown, J. Appl. Phys. 44 (10) (1973) 4322.

[61] F.J. Zerilli, R.W. Armstrong, AIP Conf. Proc. 620 (1) (2002) 657.

[62] N.G. McCrum, J. Polym. Sci. 34 (127) (1959) 355.

[63] P.I. Vincent, Impact strength and mechanical losses in thermoplastics, Polymer 15 (2) (1974) 111e116.

[64] M. Kisbenyi, M.W. Birch, J.M. Hodgkinson, J.G. Williams, Correlation of impact fracture toughness with loss peaks in PTFE, Polymer 20 (10) (1979) 1289e1297.

[65] J.R. Rice, A path independent integral and the approximate analysis of strain concentration by notches and cracks, J. Appl. Mech. 35 (1968) 379e386.

[66] S.M. Wecker, T. Davidson, D.W. Baker, Preferred orientation of crystallites in uniaxially deformed polytetrafluoroethylene, J. Appl. Phys. 43 (11) (1972) 4344e4348.

[67] C.W. Bunn, E.R. Howells, Structures of mole- cules and crystals of fluorocarbon, Nature 18 (1954) 549.

[68] P. Dietz, P.K. Hansma, K.J. Ihn, F. Motamedi, Molecular structure and thickness of high ori- ented poly(tetrafluoroethylene) films measured by atomic force microscopy, J. Mater. Sci. 28 (1992) 1372.

24 EXPANDED PTFE APPLICATIONS HANDBOOK

  • 2. Polytetrafluoroethylene: Properties and Structure
    • 2.1 Introduction
    • 2.2 Impact of F and CF Bonds on the Properties of Polytetrafluoroethylene
    • 2.3 Crystalline Structure of Polytetrafluoroethylene
    • 2.4 Branched Tetrafluoroethylene Chains: Perfluorinated Ethylene–Propylene Copolymer
      • 2.4.1 Perfluorinated Ethylene–Propylene Copolymer
    • 2.5 Reaction Mechanisms
    • 2.6 Impact of Solvents on Fluoropolymers
    • 2.7 Molecular Interaction of Polytetrafluoroethylene: Low Friction and Low Surface Energy
    • 2.8 Conformations and Transitions of Polytetrafluoroethylene
      • 2.8.1 Images of the Polytetrafluoroethylene Molecule
    • 2.9 Microstructure and Fracture of Polytetrafluoroethylene
    • References

all articles will be uesed/A Review of Transfer Films 2016.pdf

lubricants

Review

A Review of Transfer Films and Their Role in Ultra-Low-Wear Sliding of Polymers

Jiaxin Ye 1,2, David L. Burris 2 and Ting Xie 1,*

1 Institute of Tribology, Hefei University of Technology, 230009 Hefei, China; yejx@hfut.edu.cn 2 Department of Mechanical Engineering, University of Delaware, Newark, DE 19716, USA;

dlburris@udel.edu * Correspondence: txie@hfut.edu.cn; Tel.: +86-551-6290-1359

Academic Editors: Werner Oesterle and Ga Zhang Received: 16 January 2016; Accepted: 16 February 2016; Published: 26 February 2016

Abstract: In dry sliding conditions, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) composites can form thin, uniform, and protective transfer films on hard, metallic counterfaces that may play a significant role in friction and wear control. Qualitative characterizations of transfer film morphology, composition, and adhesion to the counterface suggest they are all good predictors of friction and, particularly, wear performance. However, a lack of quantitative transfer film characterization methods and uncertainty regarding specific mechanisms of friction and wear control make definitive conclusions about causal relationships between transfer film and tribological properties difficult. This paper reviews the state of the art in the solid lubricant transfer film literature and highlights recent advances in quantitative characterization thereof.

Keywords: PTFE composite; transfer film; morphology; adhesion; friction and wear

1. Introduction

Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and its composites are attractive for use in tribological applications due to low friction coefficients [1,2], high melt temperature, and chemical inertness of the parent polymer. These materials are often mated against a metallic counterface to form friction pairs, such as guides, bushings, seals, and valve seats, to name a few. An important advantage of the PTFE composite–metal counterface sliding system is its ability to provide low friction and low wear in dry sliding conditions. The self-lubricating properties of this system are thought to be largely attributable to its ability to deposit a thin and protective layer of polymer onto the counterface, the so-called transfer film [3]. Contrary to the conventional wisdom that PTFE resists adhesion, Tabor et al. showed that PTFE readily transfers to surfaces it contacts [4,5]. Low friction, it turns out, is due to easy shear between PTFE lamellae or fibrils, not poor adhesion to the opposing surface, as originally thought [4]. Unfortunately, however, the same attributes that yield low friction also enable subsurface cracks to easily propagate, which results in large, plate-like debris, poorly adhered transfer films, and unacceptably high wear rates (K~10´3 mm3/Nm) at speeds greater than ~10 mm/s [4,6].

Incorporation of micro-scaled fillers has been shown to reduce wear rates of PTFE typically by ~100ˆ with >20 wt % filler loading [3,6–11]. Early on, the wear-mitigating effect of these particles was attributed to preferential support of the normal load by the filler and disruption of subsurface crack propagation [6,12]. In each case, significant wear reductions accompanied smaller wear debris and thinner, more complete, and seemingly adherent transfer films. Improved transfer films are believed to cause reduced wear by shielding the composite from the hard counterface asperities [8]. However, it has also been argued that improved transfer films are the consequence of reduced debris size [9,13].

Lubricants 2016, 4, 4; doi:10.3390/lubricants4010004 www.mdpi.com/journal/lubricants

Lubricants 2016, 4, 4 2 of 15

The cause-effect relationship between wear rate, debris size, and transfer film quality remains an open question and is likely system-specific.

Large, hard fillers tend to abrade the transfer films and roughen the surface, which limits overall potential for friction and wear reduction [8]. Smaller fillers on the other hand have the potential to reduce wear, while polishing the transfer films and the counterface. Tanaka and Kawakami were the first to study sub-micron filler particles in PTFE; they performed poorly relative to the microparticles in the field and the authors concluded that nanoscale fillers were too small to disrupt large-scale destruction of the banded structure [14]. It was not appreciated at the time, however, that the combination of large loadings (20 wt %) and small particles (300 nm) are likely to lead to agglomeration, ineffective sintering, and a substantially weakened polymer composite. Interest in PTFE nanocomposites returned decades later after several studies independently demonstrated similar wear reductions of 100ˆ with smaller loadings (5–10 wt %) of nanoscale zinc, carbon nanotubes, and alumina [15–17]. In each study, the authors reported transfer films that were thinner, more uniform, more complete, and less obviously damaged by sliding than those previously observed for PTFE-based materials.

In 2006, Burris and Sawyer discovered a unique alpha-phase alumina nanoparticle that reduced PTFE wear by 1000ˆ with as little as 0.5 wt % filler [18]; this was the first demonstration of ultra-low-wear of PTFE (K < 5 ˆ 10´7 mm3/Nm) with less than 5% fillers. This particular system soon became the subject of many follow up studies [19–34]. More recently, Kandanur et al. found other nanofillers (graphene, carbon, etc.) that can also reduce wear of PTFE up to four to five orders of magnitude at a fraction of the loadings [34,35]. The extreme wear reductions and the scarcity of fillers in these systems suggested a mechanism other than those previously envisioned. As in previous studies, the reduction in wear rate was accompanied by decreased debris size and improved transfer film attributes, like thickness and uniformity.

2. Transfer Films and Their Link to Low Wear

Despite the clear protective role of the transfer film and the close observed relationship between transfer film characteristics and wear rate, it remains unclear if improved transfer films are the cause or the consequence of reduced wear rates. Briscoe first suggested transfer film adhesion is the dominant wear-reducing factor in polymer composites and is caused by filler-induced polymer degradation [8]. Bahadur and Gong concluded that filler chemistry was critical because decomposition enabled the filler to form a link between the transfer film and the counterface [3]. Schwartz and Bahadur attempted to make the first direct measurements of transfer film bond strength by gluing a copper tab to the transfer film formed by a PPS nanocomposite against steel. The peel strength increased with increased wear resistance, which is consistent with the hypothesis that well-adhered transfer films help cause reduced wear [36].

The strong correlation between transfer film attributes and wear rate makes conclusions of causation tempting. Bahadur and Tabor [9] attempted to directly test this relationship by measuring the wear rate of PTFE against a bare counterface, a PTFE transfer film, and transfer films of low wear PTFE composites. They found that the wear rate of PTFE was virtually independent of the condition of the transfer film upon which it slid. Furthermore, they interrupted the experiments and found that in every case, the pre-deposited transfer film was almost immediately removed by the passing pin. The apparent persistence of transfer films, they determined, reflects the immediate replenishment by new debris. They determined that the high-quality transfer films that accompany low-wear bond primarily through mechanical interlocking of small debris and concluded that high-quality films must be the consequence of low wear and not the cause.

Although Bahadur and Tabor found no evidence that transfer films persist during sliding contact, Bahadur and Gong found that wear rate correlated strongly with evidence of chemical reactions in the transfer films [3]. They suggested that reactive fillers help increase transfer film adhesion and thereby reduce wear relative to inert fillers. Interestingly, alumina, an inert filler, has proven to be one of the most successful fillers for reducing PTFE wear to date [18]. This fact is especially interesting because

Lubricants 2016, 4, 4 3 of 15

different types of alumina fillers have been shown to yield orders of magnitude variations in wear rates of identically-prepared PTFE nanocomposite [13,37].

3. The Effects of Filler Characteristics on Transfer Films and Wear Rates

Figure 1 illustrates the transfer film of a typical PTFE composite; in this case, the PTFE was filled with 15 wt % 76 µm particles of Ni. The optical image (Figure 1a) shows a thick, but coherent, film; profilometry (Figure 1b) highlights obvious heterogeneity in the thickness over the observation window. Two line scans demonstrate that the film is as thick as 10 µm and as thin as 2 µm. The measured wear rate of this system was K ~10´5 mm3/Nm, which represents a 40ˆ improvement over unfilled PTFE.

Figure 1. Morphology of the transfer film of a Ni/PTFE microcomposite (unpublished): (a) the optical image of the transfer film; (b) the height distribution mapping of the transfer film; (c) the cross-section profile of the transfer film along line A indicated in (b); and (d) the cross-section profile of the transfer film along line B indicated in (b).

The transfer film morphology of the Ni-PTFE microcomposite in Figure 1 is very different from those of the alumina–PTFE nanocomposites in Figure 2. The mixing, sintering, and testing procedures of these nanocomposite samples were identical; the only reported differences are the phase of the alumina and the size of the particle. The 44 nm ∆ : γ phase alumina produced moderate wear rates on the order of 5 ˆ 10´5 mm3/Nm. The transfer film contains discernable patches of 100 µm length scale (Figure 2b). The fillers have clearly reduced debris size, improved the transfer film and reduced wear by comparison to unfilled PTFE whose transfer films contain platelets on the 1–5 mm size scale [6,31,32]. However, the 80 nm α phase alumina filled PTFE was more than 100ˆ more wear resistant under the same conditions. The transfer film is clearly thinner (~1 µm) and more continuous (Figure 2c) [13,18].

In addition to producing thinner and more uniform transfer films, low-wear alumina–PTFE transfer films are obviously discolored [13,18,20,23–27,29,31,32,37–39], which suggests chemical reactions had taken place and possibly enhanced adhesion of the transfer film. In 2013, Ye and Burris used optical microscopy to determine the degree to which transfer films persist during sliding [20]. During run-in, wear rates were on the order of those of the ∆ : γ composites, transfer films were relatively patchy and were removed and replaced each cycle as described by Bahadur and Tabor [9]. However, as Figure 3b illustrates, there is an abrupt (and repeatable) transition at which the wear rate decreases by orders of magnitude. At this point, the debris generation is no longer detectable and the transfer film becomes difficult to see optically. Atomic force microscopy revealed that nanoscale debris fragments were present and that continued sliding caused visual darkening as the fragments became denser across the surface.

Lubricants 2016, 4, 4 4 of 15

Figure 2. Two types of transfer films of PTFE composites. (a) Wear rates plotted versus alumina loadings of two types of filler phase and morphology; (b) transfer film of the moderate wear system (44 nm ∆ : γ alumina); and (c) transfer film of the ultra-low-wear system (80 nm α alumina).

Figure 3. Images of transfer film development in an ultra-low-wear alumina–PTFE nanocomposite: (a) images illustrating the evolution of the steady state transfer film as a function of distance slid; (b) wear volume as a function of distance slid; and (c) steady-state transfer film morphology. Reprinted with permission from [20].

Following the transition period of virtually wear-free sliding, debris generation resumes, but the debris produced after the transition are markedly different than those produced before the transition.

Lubricants 2016, 4, 4 5 of 15

The initiation and evolution of the steady state transfer film are illustrated in Figure 3a. Most of the visible debris at 485 m of sliding were sub-micron in the lateral dimension. As sliding progressed, there is clear evidence that these fragments persist, enlarge as they scavenge new material from the pin, merge together to form larger domains, and eventually develop a thickened and homogenized (Figure 3c) transfer film. These studies provide direct insight into the formation mechanisms of transfer films and demonstrate, despite prior evidence to the contrary [9], that adhesion and persistence do occur and are likely critical for achieving ultra-low-wear rates.

4. Quantifying Properties of Transfer Films

Transfer film quality has been difficult to quantify historically. Typically, the literature uses visual cues that include a convolution of thinness, coverage, and uniformity as indicators of quality and even adhesion. To date, however, our ability to answer basic questions about the cause-effect relationship between transfer film properties and wear rate is largely attributable to the difficulty in actually quantifying these transfer film attributes. Here, we outline recent advancements in efforts to quantify the relevant morphological, chemical, mechanical, and adhesive properties of transfer films and integrate those properties into our understanding of transfer film–wear causation.

4.1. Transfer Film Morphology

Early researchers of PTFE nanocomposite wear discovered that high-wear transfer films were always thick, patchy, and non-uniform and low-wear films were thin, continuous, and uniform [15–17]. Burris and Sawyer found that wear rates of PTFE and its composites tended to increase with the cube of the measured transfer film thickness over three orders of magnitude of change in wear rate [13]. Pitenis et al. found similar trend during in vacuo wear tests of PTFE composites [25]. Blanchet et al. [35] proposed that wear is likely related to the transfer film coverage of the wear track. Laux and Schwartz measured the thickness and coverage fraction of unfilled polyether ether ketone (PEEK) transfer films but found neither was a reliable predictor of wear rate [40]. Similarly, transfer film coverage did not correlate to the wear rate of the polyethylene terephthalate (PET) nanocomposites [41].

Figure 4. Free-space length model of transfer film. Reprinted with permission from [42].

Ye et al. [21] proposed that the polymer interacts more strongly with regions of exposed counterface and that the size of these uncovered regions should be a quantitative predictor of future debris size. Since the wear volume is proportional to the amount of debris and the cube of the debris size [43], the wear rate should be more sensitive to the characteristic size of the uncovered areas than the uncovered area fraction (Figure 4). The authors defined the free-space length as the characteristic size of the uncovered areas and developed a method to quantify this metric. The method is based on the iteration of a fixed-size overlaying box pixel-counting algorithm as explained in detail in [21]. The free-space length for representative images of the run-in, transition, and steady state transfer films of low-wear alumina–PTFE nanocomposites are represented by the length of the associated red boxes

Lubricants 2016, 4, 4 6 of 15

in Figure 5a. As shown in Figure 5b, the free-space length appears to be a relatively good predictor of wear rate; the results also suggest there is a lower bound associated with full coverage and an upper bound associated with no coverage. The free-space length is also closely related to the visual cues that typically motivate adjectives like “uniform”, “coherent”, “continuous”, and “complete” in the transfer film literature [15–17,37,44]. To date, however, there remain relatively few quantitative studies of transfer film morphology and the community has yet to agree on a single metric by which transfer film quality should be evaluated.

Figure 5. (a) Free-space lengths of representative transfer films of alpha alumina filled PTFE nanocomposite; and (b) free-space lengths plotted against the in situ wear rates of the composite. Reprinted with permission from [21].

4.2. Chemistry of the Transfer Film

It is reasonable to expect quantitative changes in transfer film morphology and wear resistance using fillers of different chemical reactivity like C and CuS [10]. It is less obvious why such differences would emerge between different alumina–PTFE nanocomposites (Figure 2). These particular systems do, however, present an interesting degree of control for elucidating the effect of transfer film chemistry since many of the other variables associated with different fillers can be eliminated.

Some of the earliest studies of these materials suggested that ultra-low-wear rates had chemical origins [45]. As wear rates decreased, transfer films not only become thinner and more coherent, but they became increasingly discolored. Burris et al. [46] found a new XPS peak at 288 eV in transfer films formed during ultra-low-wear sliding by PTFE and suggested that this “new tribochemical species” may help explain wear resistance of this system. Unfortunately, the XPS observation provided no direct insight into what the tribochemical species was or why it formed. Krick et al. [23] and Pitenis et al. [25] both found the removal of environmental moisture caused increased wear rates (from K~10´7 to K~10´5 mm3/Nm), reduced transfer film quality, severe counterface abrasion, and loss of transfer film discoloration. The remarkable effects of water removal alone strongly suggested a wear reduction mechanism of tribochemical origins.

To help elucidate the effect of water vapor on the wear of PTFE nanocomposites, Onedera et al. [47,48] used computational tools to identify possible tribochemical reactions between PTFE and environmental moisture during sliding; based on the results, they proposed that PTFE end-chain carboxyl groups formed to help bond PTFE transfer films to the counterface. In 2015, Pitenis et al. [29] and Harris et al. [27] conducted spectroscopic studies on transfer film chemistry of the same low wear alumina PTFE nanocomposite. After one cycle, they found peaks typically associated with PTFE (Figure 6a). However, after periods long enough to cause discoloration of the transfer film, they found significant evidence of metal chelate salts of perfluorinated carboxylic acids (Figure 6b); the magnitude of the signal increased as the transfer film became increasingly discolored and as the wear rate decreased with increased sliding. They proposed that these metal chelate salts represent the bond between the polymer (perfluorinated

Lubricants 2016, 4, 4 7 of 15

carboxylic acid) and the counterface (metal). Harris et al. [27] found evidence showing that PTFE chain ends not only chelate to the steel surface under the transfer film, but also to the surface of the alumina filler particles. Thus, tribochemistry in this system appears to stabilize the transfer film and the sliding surface of the solid lubricant, thus compartmentalizing damage and reducing wear [39].

Figure 6. Infrared reflectance results from the metal surface after (a) one cycle of sliding; (b) 100 k (gray line) and 1 M (black line) cycles. Reprinted with permission from [27,29].

As a group with unprecedented expertise in tribology and fluoropolymer chemistry, Harris et al. [27] proposed a likely tribochemistry-based wear reduction mechanism in PTFE-related systems with the following essential steps: (1) PTFE chains break during sliding and form perfluoroalkyl radicals at new chain ends; (2) the perfluoroalkyl radicals react with atmospheric oxygen to form acyl fluoride end groups; (3) the acyl fluoride end groups hydrolyze in ambient humidity to form carboxylic acids; and (4) the perfluorinated carboxylic acids chelate to metals (Fe in the steel counterface and Al in the alumina fillers), thus stabilizing the transfer film and near surface of the pin. This hypothesis explains the observed environmental dependence of the PTFE nanocomposite’s wear performance and represents a breakthrough in our understanding of ultra-low-wear PTFE.

Although chemistry certainly drives the wear reduction significantly in the low-wear PTFE composites, numerous evidence suggest it is the coupling of chemical and mechanical effects that enable the formation of a thin, continuous and adhesive transfer film that can survive millions of sliding cycles. Changes in load [49], velocity [6,49] and counterface roughness [13,28,32,50] can all change the system’s wear performance by affecting the transfer film’s mechanical and adhesive strength.

4.3. Mechanical Properties of the Transfer Film

Apart from transfer film morphology, improved mechanical properties of the transfer film have been suggested as an important contributor of wear reduction in PTFE and other polymer systems. Gong et al. [51] considered the transfer films as surface protective coatings and proposed that fillers reduce wear by mechanically strengthening the transfer film itself. Friedrich et al. [52,53] measured polymer transfer film hardness using microindentation, but the results were confounded by increasing contributions from the substrate with decreasing transfer film thickness. Randall et al. [54,55] used a nanoindenter and limited penetration depths to 10% film thickness in an effort to eliminate substrate effects. They found transfer films in the lowest wear system were ~30% harder and

Lubricants 2016, 4, 4 8 of 15

stiffer than either counterpart material and suggested that this was the result of mechanical alloying. McCook et al. [56] conducted similar measurements on the wear surface of a PTFE-epoxy composite. Whereas the composite contained clear regions of high and low hardness from the epoxy and PTFE, respectively, the wear surface exhibited uniformly low hardness, suggesting that a running film of PTFE was preferentially drawn over the entire surface; these PTFE running films were thought to substantially decrease friction and wear by preventing adhesion between the epoxy phase and the counterbody. Xie et al. [57,58] measured two particle-filled PTFE microcomposite transfer films using nanoindentation and found the lower wear system has a slightly softer and more adhesive transfer film. The fact that transfer films can become harder or softer than either constituent reflects the complicated and yet uncertain role of transfer films in friction and wear control.

Krick et al. [24] used nanoindentation to study the mechanical properties of ultra-low-wear alumina–PTFE running films (on the composite’s running surface). They found that running film hardness and modulus increase with increased sliding distance and decreased wear rates [24]. They suggested that changes in mechanical properties reflect filler accumulation and tribochemical degradation of PTFE, which is consistent with their more recent papers on the evolution of interface chemistry [27,29] and particle enrichment [30]. Ye [42] conducted similar measurements on transfer films from the same system. The transfer films had the same mechanical properties as the bulk composite during the run-in, but hardness and modulus both increased significantly following the transition to ultra-low-wear sliding, as shown in Figure 7a,b. Both figures share the same trend as the mechanical evolution of running films reported by Krick et al. [24]. Furthermore, there were strong correlations between transfer film mechanical properties and the system wear rater (Figure 7c,d), although the causal relationship remains uncertain; improved transfer film cohesive strength may simply be the consequence of the friction-induced polymer degradation and the accumulation of filler at the sliding interface [27,29,42].

Figure 7. (a) Transfer film hardness versus sliding distance of transfer film development; (b) transfer film modulus versus sliding distance of transfer film development; (c) system wear rate versus transfer film hardness; and (d) system wear rate versus transfer film modulus. All error bars represent a 95% confidence interval. Reprinted with permission from [42].

Lubricants 2016, 4, 4 9 of 15

4.4. Adhesion of the Transfer Film

The adhesion strength between transfer films and counterfaces is among the most frequently discussed mechanisms of wear reduction for polymeric solid lubricants [3,8–10,58–62]. Adhesion is often thought of in terms of bonding and may have physical or chemical origins [44,63–67]. Briscoe [8] first proposed that filler-induced polymer degradation helps improve transfer film adhesion. Bahadur and Tabor [9] suggested that transfer film adhesion was primarily due to mechanical interlocking of debris into the valleys of the rough surface. Bahadur and Gong [3] hypothesized that filler decomposition rather than polymer degradation improves the link between the transfer film and the counterface. Gong et al. [67] and Blanchet et al. [44] showed that fillers had no effect on the chemistry of the film-counterface interface of PTFE composites. More than two decades later, Harris et al. [27,29] revealed that strong adhesion in the ultra-low-wear alumina PTFE nanocomposite (Figure 6) system is likely to have chemical origins. This is the only system we know of that has demonstrated adherence and persistence over the course of a typical experiment [20].

Despite the ubiquity of adhesion in discussions of wear resistance, the magnitude of adhesive strength has proven difficult to measure. Schwartz and Bahadur [36] bonded copper tabs onto PPS nanocomposite transfer films and measured the peeling force as a function of filler loading. They found film wear rate decreased as adhesion strength increased. Unfortunately, it is difficult to completely rule out the potentially confounding effects of the bonding agent. In an effort to remove the bonded material from the measurement, Ye et al. [22] used thin film failure theory from Agrawal and Raj [68,69] to measure adhesive strength. Although this method eliminates the need for a second bonded interface, it provides the adhesive shear strength relative to the tensile strength of the film, which is unknown. The relative adhesive strength of the transfer film is plotted as a function of the sliding distance in Figure 8 for the ultra-low-wear alumina–PTFE system. It is interesting to note that a value of 1 represents the point at which the film–counterface interface has the same strength as the film material. In the run-in period of high wear rate, the interface bond is weaker than the film itself and delamination is the most likely failure mode; this is consistent with the fact that films were removed on each pass of the pin during this period. At steady state when wear rates are very low and transfer films very stable, the bonded interface is actually stronger than the film, which suggest that failure is most likely to occur within the film. This suggests that the film will persists indefinitely, which is consistent with direct observation [20]. This remarkable interface strength is very likely the result of the advantageous chemical processes described by Harris et al. [27].

Figure 8. Transfer film strength ratio versus sliding distance of transfer film development. Reprinted with permission from [22].

The transfer film is essentially a tribological coating and, as a result, there is interest in directly assessing their tribological properties. Using bare steel balls against predeposited transfer films, Wang et al. [70–72] also found that PTFE composite transfer films were more wear resistant than those

Lubricants 2016, 4, 4 10 of 15

of unfilled PTFE. Li et al. [49] conducted similar experiments with Si3N4 balls and found the wear life of transfer films was sensitive to the sliding conditions (load, velocity and counterface roughness, e.g.,) under which transfer films were originally formed. In 2015, Urueña et al. [73] used the same ball-on-flat configuration to test the wear resistance of the ultra-low-wear alumina–PTFE transfer films. They found the transfer film wear rate decreased with a decreased bulk wear rate during sliding, as would be expected. Surprisingly, however, wear rates of the transfer film were far greater (>100ˆ) than the wear rate of the system during the formation of that film [73]; a simple control volume analysis requires that the wear rate of the transfer film can be no greater than the system wear rate, which implies that the transfer film had a different higher wear rate during control testing than it did during formation.

Burris et al. [37] measured the wear resistance of another ultra-low-wear PTFE composite transfer film and reported no signs of wear in post-test analysis after thousands of sliding cycles; in this case, however, films were self-mated. Thus, it appears that wear rates of transfer films depend strongly on the conditions used to make the measurement.

To better understand the potential effects of factors like contact pressure, shear stress, and friction coefficient on the wear rate of the film, Ye et al. [22] measured the wear rate of alumina–PTFE transfer film as a function of the spherical counterface material. As shown in Figure 9a, the wear rate of the same steady state film varied by five orders of magnitude by simply changing the counterface material. Interestingly, wear rate did not correlate to contact pressure, shear stress, or friction coefficient, but showed an abrupt transition from extremely high wear to extremely low wear at a critical surface energy. The transfer films only had exceptionally low wear rates when slid against PTFE and HDPE; this makes sense since PTFE is the mated material in the parent system.

Figure 9. (a) Surface energies of the probes versus ultra-low-wear Al2O3/PTFE transfer film wear rates in microtribometry experiments. Error bars represent the 95% confidence interval; and (b) three-body wear model involving a pin (A), transfer film (B), and counterface (C). Reprinted with permission from [22].

The transfer film wear rate is plotted against the accumulated sliding distance used to create the film in Figure 10a using a low surface energy probe (HDPE) intended to simulate the parent conditions. During the run-in period, the transfer film wear rate greatly exceeded the parent system. Wear rate decreased with increased sliding distance, which agrees with the results from Urueña et al. [58]. In contrast to their results, however, the wear rates of steady-state films were well below those of the parent system. In general, the wear rate of the transfer film mirrored the wear rate of the parent system (Figure 10b).

Combining these results with adhesion strength measurements suggests that wear of these transfer film systems boils down to the location and relative strength of the weak interface. During run-in and in many other systems at steady state, the transfer film-counterface interface is weak and films are simply removed by the pin. As shown by Figure 8, some systems like the ultra-low-wear alumina–PTFE system at steady state develop sufficient bond strength that delamination becomes unfavorable. In this case, the weak interface must be (1) within the film; (2) between the film and the pin; or (3) within the

Lubricants 2016, 4, 4 11 of 15

pin (Figure 9b). Sliding is permitted with a virtual absence of wear if the pin and transfer film are both strong relative to their interface; this was clearly the case when HDPE was tested against steady state transfer films of alumina–PTFE. Pins with higher surface energy significantly increased the strength of this interface until the film contained the weak interface; in this case progressive film wear on each pass led to relatively rapid failure. The transfer film tends to deposit its own transfer film for the same reason a transfer film formed in the first place.

Figure 10. (a) Wear rates of the polymer pin (K) and the transfer film (Kfilm) versus distance of transfer film development in macrotribometry experiment; and (b) polymer pin wear rate versus transfer film wear rate. A least squares power law fit is shown for reference. All error bars represent a 95% confidence interval. Reprinted with permission from [22].

5. Summary

For many decades, observations of varied wear rates have corresponded to systematic changes in the appearances and physical characteristics of transfer films. The ubiquitous trend that reduced wear corresponds to improved transfer film quality has motivated strong suspicions that improved transfer films cause reduced wear by protecting the solid lubricant from the inherently damaging counterface.

The review of the literature shows that the answer to this chicken-and-egg question of causation depends on the system. For many systems, transfer films are worn away during sliding, which limits their ability to protect the solid lubricant against contact with the counterface. In these cases, the wear reduction mechanism may be due to more traditional reinforcement mechanisms such as mechanical reinforcement, preferential load support, crack arresting, and energy dissipation; transfer film quality appears to be improved when debris are smaller.

A particular alumina–PTFE system has demonstrated an unusual degree of wear reduction at remarkably low filler loadings. The transfer films of this unusual system are persistent, surviving for the entirety of a typical experiment. Recent studies using variable moisture environments have revealed a unique wear reduction mechanism of tribochemical origins. The chemical changes initiated via sliding create direct bonds between the polymer/filler and polymer/counterface, which stabilizes the near surface of each while bonding the transfer film to the counterface; ultra-low-wear sliding is permitted when the polymer and transfer film are sufficiently dissimilar to set up a weak sliding interface between them.

These ultra-low wear rates cannot persist without stable and persistent transfer films. This explains why wear rates increase when low-wear pins are tested against fresh counterfaces and why transfer film wear rates become unexpectedly high when tested against steel spheres; the high surface energy of the new counterface effectively scavenges the opposing surface, which disrupts the system. Bulk polymers

Lubricants 2016, 4, 4 12 of 15

simply deposit a new transfer film and re-establish ultra-low-wear sliding; transfer films fail because they lack sufficient material to set up a new equilibrium.

Acknowledgments: The authors are very grateful for the financial supports from the National Natural Science Foundation of China (Grant No. 51275144 and 51505117) and the Air Force Office of Scientific Research (AFOSR YIP FA9550-10-1–0295) of USA.

Author Contributions: The authors contributed equally to the overall organization, the associated research, the writing and the editing of this review article.

Conflicts of Interest: The authors declare no conflict of interest.

References

1. Friedrich, K.; Malzahn, J.C. Abrasive wear and fracture properties of short fiber/thermoplastic matrix composites. In Wear of Materials; ASME: New York, NY, USA, 1983; pp. 604–609.

2. Evans, D.C. The influence of abrasive fillers on the wear properties of polytetrafluoroethylene(PTFE)-based composites. In ASLE Proceedings—2nd International Conference on Solid Lubrication, Denver, CO, USA, 15–18 August 1978.

3. Bahadur, S.; Gong, D. The action of fillers in the modification of the tribological behavior of polymers. Wear 1992, 158, 41–59. [CrossRef]

4. Makinson, K.R.; Tabor, D. Friction and transfer of polytetrafluoroethylene. Nature 1964, 201, 464–466. [CrossRef] 5. Pooley, C.M.; Tabor, D. Transfer of PTFE and related polymers in a sliding experiment. Nature 1972, 237,

88–90. [CrossRef] 6. Blanchet, T.A.; Kennedy, F.E. Sliding wear mechanism of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and PTFE composites.

Wear 1992, 153, 229–243. [CrossRef] 7. Lancaster, J.K. Polymer-based bearing materials: The role of fillers and fibre reinforcement. Tribology 1972, 5,

249–255. [CrossRef] 8. Briscoe, B. Wear of polymers: An essay on fundamental aspects. Tribol. Int. 1981, 14, 231–243. [CrossRef] 9. Bahadur, S.; Tabor, D. The wear of filled polytetrafluoroethylene. Wear 1984, 98, 1–13. [CrossRef] 10. Bahadur, S.; Gong, D.; Anderegg, J.W. The role of copper compounds as fillers in transfer film formation and

wear of nylon. Wear 1992, 154, 207–223. [CrossRef] 11. Burroughs, B.R.; Kim, J.-H.; Blanchet, T.A. Boric acid self-lubrication of b2o3-filled polymer composites.

Tribol. Trans. 1999, 42, 592–600. [CrossRef] 12. Blanchet, T.A. A model for polymer composite wear behavior including preferential load support and

surface accumulation of filler particulates. Tribol. Trans. 1995, 38, 821–828. [CrossRef] 13. Burris, D.L.; Sawyer, W.G. Tribological sensitivity of PTFE/alumina nanocomposites to a range of traditional

surface finishes. Tribol. Trans. 2005, 48, 147–153. [CrossRef] 14. Tanaka, K.; Kawakami, S. Effect of various fillers on the friction and wear of polytetrafluoroethylene-based composites.

Wear 1982, 79, 221–234. [CrossRef] 15. Li, F.; Hu, K.-A.; Li, J.-A.; Zhao, B.-Y. The friction and wear characteristics of nanometer zno filled polytetrafluoroethylene.

Wear 2001, 249, 877–882. [CrossRef] 16. Chen, W.X.; Li, F.; Han, G.; Xia, J.B.; Wang, L.Y.; Tu, J.P.; Xu, Z.D. Tribological behavior of

carbon-nanotube-filled PTFE composites. Tribol. Lett. 2003, 15, 275–278. [CrossRef] 17. Sawyer, W.G.; Freudenberg, K.D.; Bhimaraj, P.; Schadler, L.S. A study on the friction and wear behavior of

PTFE filled with alumina nanoparticles. Wear 2003, 254, 573–580. [CrossRef] 18. Burris, D.L.; Sawyer, W.G. Improved wear resistance in alumina-PTFE nanocomposites with irregular

shaped nanoparticles. Wear 2006, 260, 915–918. [CrossRef] 19. Burris, D.L.; Zhao, S.; Duncan, R.; Lowitz, J.; Perry, S.S.; Schadler, L.S.; Sawyer, W.G. A route to wear resistant

PTFE via trace loadings of functionalized nanofillers. Wear 2009, 267, 653–660. [CrossRef] 20. Ye, J.; Khare, H.S.; Burris, D.L. Transfer film evolution and its role in promoting ultra-low wear of a

PTFE nanocomposite. Wear 2013, 297, 1095–1102. [CrossRef] 21. Ye, J.; Khare, H.S.; Burris, D.L. Quantitative characterization of solid lubricant transfer film quality. Wear

2014, 316, 133–143. [CrossRef] 22. Ye, J.; Moore, A.C.; Burris, D.L. Transfer film tenacity: A case study using ultra-low-wear alumina–PTFE.

Tribol. Lett. 2015, 59, 1–11. [CrossRef]

Lubricants 2016, 4, 4 13 of 15

23. Krick, B.A.; Ewin, J.J.; Blackman, G.S.; Junk, C.P.; Gregory Sawyer, W. Environmental dependence of ultra-low wear behavior of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and alumina composites suggests tribochemical mechanisms. Tribol. Int. 2012, 51, 42–46. [CrossRef]

24. Krick, B.A.; Ewin, J.J.; McCumiskey, E.J. Tribofilm formation and run-in behavior in ultra-low-wearing polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and alumina nanocomposites. Tribol. Trans. 2014, 57, 1058–1065. [CrossRef]

25. Pitenis, A.A.; Ewin, J.J.; Harris, K.L.; Sawyer, W.G.; Krick, B.A. In vacuo tribological behavior of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and alumina nanocomposites: The importance of water for ultralow wear. Tribol. Lett. 2014, 53, 189–197. [CrossRef]

26. Sawyer, W.G.; Argibay, N.; Burris, D.L.; Krick, B.A. Mechanistic studies in friction and wear of bulk materials. Annu. Rev. Mater. Res. 2014, 44, 395–427. [CrossRef]

27. Harris, K.L.; Pitenis, A.A.; Sawyer, W.G.; Krick, B.A.; Blackman, G.S.; Kasprzak, D.J.; Junk, C.P. PTFE tribology and the role of mechanochemistry in the development of protective surface films. Macromolecules 2015, 48, 3739–3745. [CrossRef]

28. Harris, K.L.; Curry, J.F.; Pitenis, A.A.; Rowe, K.G.; Sidebottom, M.A.; Sawyer, W.G.; Krick, B.A. Wear debris mobility, aligned surface roughness, and the low wear behavior of filled polytetrafluoroethylene. Tribol. Lett. 2015, 60, 1–8.

29. Pitenis, A.A.; Harris, K.L.; Junk, C.P.; Blackman, G.S.; Sawyer, W.G.; Krick, B.A. Ultralow wear PTFE and alumina composites: It is all about tribochemistry. Tribol. Lett. 2015, 57. [CrossRef]

30. Krick, B.A.; Pitenis, A.A.; Harris, K.L.; Junk, C.P.; Sawyer, W.G.; Brown, S.C.; Rosenfeld, H.D.; Kasprzak, D.J.; Johnson, R.S.; Chan, C.D.; et al. Ultralow wear fluoropolymer composites: Nanoscale functionality from microscale fillers. Tribol. Int. 2016, 95, 245–255. [CrossRef]

31. McElwain, S.E.; Blanchet, T.A.; Schadler, L.S.; Sawyer, W.G. Effect of particle size on the wear resistance of alumina-filled PTFE micro- and nanocomposites. Tribol. Trans. 2008, 51, 247–253. [CrossRef]

32. Blanchet, T.A.; Kandanur, S.S.; Schadler, L.S. Coupled effect of filler content and countersurface roughness on PTFE nanocomposite wear resistance. Tribol. Lett. 2009, 40, 11–21. [CrossRef]

33. Kandanur, S.S. The Role of Filler Size & Content and Countersurface Roughness in the Wear Resistance of Alumina-PTFE Nano-Composites. Ph.D. Thesis, Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, New York, NY, USA, 2010.

34. Kandanur, S.S.; Schrameyer, M.A.; Jung, K.F.; Makowiec, M.E.; Bhargava, S.; Blanchet, T.A. Effect of activated carbon and various other nanoparticle fillers on PTFE wear. Tribol. Trans. 2014, 57, 821–830. [CrossRef]

35. Kandanur, S.S.; Rafiee, M.A.; Yavari, F.; Schrameyer, M.; Yu, Z.-Z.; Blanchet, T.A.; Koratkar, N. Suppression of wear in graphene polymer composites. Carbon 2012, 50, 3178–3183. [CrossRef]

36. Schwartz, C.J.; Bahadur, S. Studies on the tribological behavior and transfer film–counterface bond strength for polyphenylene sulfide filled with nanoscale alumina particles. Wear 2000, 237, 261–273. [CrossRef]

37. Burris, D.L.; Boesl, B.; Bourne, G.R.; Sawyer, W.G. Polymeric nanocomposites for tribological applications. Macromol. Mater. Eng. 2007, 292, 387–402. [CrossRef]

38. Burris, D.L. Wear-Resistance Mechanisms in Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Based Tribological Nanocomposites; University of Florida: Gainesville, FL, USA, 2006.

39. Khare, H.S.; Moore, A.C.; Haidar, D.R.; Gong, L.; Ye, J.; Rabolt, J.F.; Burris, D.L. Interrelated effects of temperature and environment on wear and tribochemistry of an ultralow wear PTFE composite. J. Phys. Chem. C 2015, 119, 16518–16527. [CrossRef]

40. Laux, K.A.; Schwartz, C.J. Effects of contact pressure, molecular weight, and supplier on the wear behavior and transfer film of polyetheretherketone (peek). Wear 2013, 297, 919–925. [CrossRef]

41. Bhimaraj, P.; Burris, D.; Sawyer, W.G.; Toney, C.G.; Siegel, R.W.; Schadler, L.S. Tribological investigation of the effects of particle size, loading and crystallinity on poly (ethylene) terephthalate nanocomposites. Wear 2008, 264, 632–637. [CrossRef]

42. Ye, J. Characterizing PTFE Transfer Film Properties to Elucidate Transfer Film’s Role in Ultra-Low Wear Sliding of Polymer Nanocomposites. Ph.D. Thesis, University of Delaware, Newark, DE, USA, 2014.

43. Rabinowicz, E. Friction and Wear of Materials; Wiley: New York, NY, USA, 1995. 44. Blanchet, T.A.; Kennedy, F.E.; Jayne, D.T. Xps analysis of the effect of fillers on PTFE transfer film development

in sliding contacts. Tribol. Trans. 1993, 36, 535–544. [CrossRef] 45. Jintang, G. Tribochemical effects in formation of polymer transfer film. Wear 2000, 245, 100–106. [CrossRef]

Lubricants 2016, 4, 4 14 of 15

46. Burris, D.L.; Santos, K.; Lewis, S.L.; Liu, X.; Perry, S.S.; Blanchet, T.A.; Schadler, L.S.; Sawyer, W.G. Polytetrafluoroethylene matrix nanocomposites for tribological applications. Tribol. Polym. Nanocompos. 2008, 55, 403–438.

47. Onodera, T.; Kawasaki, K.; Nakakawaji, T.; Higuchi, Y.; Ozawa, N.; Kurihara, K.; Kubo, M. Chemical reaction mechanism of polytetrafluoroethylene on aluminum surface under friction condition. J. Phys. Chem. C 2014, 118, 5390–5396. [CrossRef]

48. Onodera, T.; Kawasaki, K.; Nakakawaji, T.; Higuchi, Y.; Ozawa, N.; Kurihara, K.; Kubo, M. Effect of tribochemical reaction on transfer-film formation by poly (tetrafluoroethylene). J. Phys. Chem. C 2014, 118, 11820–11826. [CrossRef]

49. Li, H.; Yin, Z.; Jiang, D.; Jin, L.; Cui, Y. A study of the tribological behavior of transfer films of PTFE composites formed under different loads, speeds and morphologies of the counterface. Wear 2015, 328–329, 17–27. [CrossRef]

50. Xie, T.; Yang, H.; Xu, Z.X.; Yang, H.P.; Cui, A.L. Influence of steel surface texture direction on the formation of friction transfer film of sio2/PTFE composites. J. Hefei Univ. Technol. 2014, 37, 513–515.

51. Deli, G.; Qunji, X.; Hongli, W. Physical models of adhesive wear of polytetrafluoroethylene and its composites. Wear 1991, 147, 9–24. [CrossRef]

52. Friedrich, K.; Flöck, J.; Váradi, K.; Néder, Z. Experimental and numerical evaluation of the mechanical properties of compacted wear debris layers formed between composite and steel surfaces in sliding contact. Wear 2001, 251, 1202–1212. [CrossRef]

53. Chang, L.; Zhang, Z.; Ye, L.; Friedrich, K. Tribological properties of epoxy nanocomposites: Iii. Characteristics of transfer films. Wear 2007, 262, 699–706. [CrossRef]

54. Randall, N.X.; Bozet, J.L. Nanoindentation and scanning force microscopy as a novel method for the characterization of tribological transfer films. Wear 1997, 212, 18–24. [CrossRef]

55. Randall, N.X.; Harris, A. Nanoindentation as a tool for characterising the mechanical properties of tribological transfer films. Wear 2000, 245, 196–203. [CrossRef]

56. McCook, N.L.; Burris, D.L.; Bourne, G.R.; Steffens, J.; Hanrahan, J.R.; Sawyer, W.G. Wear resistant solid lubricant coating made from PTFE and epoxy. Tribol. Lett. 2005, 18, 119–124. [CrossRef]

57. Xie, T.; Zhou, Z.H.; Xu, Z.X.; Yu, J.W.; Jiao, M.H. Characteristics of the Transfer Film and Tribological Properties of Oxide/PTFE Composites; Trans Tech Publications Inc.: Pfaffikon, Switzerland, 2013; pp. 172–175.

58. Xu, Z.X. Performances of Different Fillers in Polymer Composites during Frictional Transfer; University of Technology: Hefei, China, 2012.

59. Bahadur, S. The development of transfer layers and their role in polymer tribology. Wear 2000, 245, 92–99. [CrossRef]

60. Bahadur, S.; Sunkara, C. Effect of transfer film structure, composition and bonding on the tribological behavior of polyphenylene sulfide filled with nano particles of tio2, zno, cuo and sic. Wear 2005, 258, 1411–1421. [CrossRef]

61. Xie, T.; Zhou, Z.H.; Xu, Z.X.; Yu, J.W.; Jiao, M.H. Characteristics of the transfer film and tribological properties of oxide/PTFE composites. Adv. Mater. Res. 2013, 631–632, 172–175. [CrossRef]

62. Xie, T.; Wan, Y.Y.; Miao, P.; Wen, D.D.; Jiao, M.H.; Yu, J.W.; Yin, Y.G. Dynamic transfer of PTFE three-layer composite materials during friction. Lubr. Eng. 2010, 2, 3.

63. Buckley, D.H.; Johnson, R.L. Friction, Wear, and Decomposition Mechanisms for Various Polymer Compositions in Vacuum to 10–9 Millimeter of Mercury; National Aeronautics and Space Administration: Washington, DC, USA, 1963; Volume 2073.

64. Pocock, G.; Cadman, P. The application of differential scanning calorimetry and electron spectroscopy to PTFE-metal reactions of interest in dry bearing technology. Wear 1976, 37, 129–141. [CrossRef]

65. Cadman, P.; Gossedge, G.M. The chemical nature of metal-polytetrafluoroethylene tribological interactions as studied by x-ray photoelectron spectroscopy. Wear 1979, 54, 211–215. [CrossRef]

66. Jintang, G.; Hongxin, D. Molecule structure variations in friction of stainless steel/PTFE and its composite. J. Appl. Polym. Sci. 1988, 36, 73–85. [CrossRef]

67. Deli, G.; Qunji, X.; Hongli, W. Esca study on tribochemical characteristics of filled PTFE. Wear 1991, 148, 161–169. [CrossRef]

68. Agrawal, D.C.; Raj, R. Measurement of the ultimate shear strength of a metal-ceramic interface. Acta Metall. 1989, 37, 1265–1270. [CrossRef]

Lubricants 2016, 4, 4 15 of 15

69. Agrawal, D.C.; Raj, R. Ultimate shear strengths of copper-silica and nickel-silica interfaces. Mater. Sci. Eng. A 1990, 126, 125–131. [CrossRef]

70. Wang, Y.; Yan, F. Tribological properties of transfer films of PTFE-based composites. Wear 2006, 261, 1359–1366. [CrossRef]

71. Wang, Y.; Yan, F. A study on tribological behaviour of transfer films of PTFE/bronze composites. Wear 2007, 262, 876–882. [CrossRef]

72. Wang, Y.; Wang, H.; Yan, F. Investigation of transfer film of PTFE/bronze composites on 2024al surface. Surf. Interface Anal. 2009, 41, 753–758. [CrossRef]

73. Urueña, J.M.; Pitenis, A.A.; Harris, K.L.; Sawyer, W.G. Evolution and wear of fluoropolymer transfer films. Tribol. Lett. 2015, 57. [CrossRef]

© 2016 by the authors; licensee MDPI, Basel, Switzerland. This article is an open access article distributed under the terms and conditions of the Creative Commons by Attribution (CC-BY) license (http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/).

  • Introduction
  • Transfer Films and Their Link to Low Wear
  • The Effects of Filler Characteristics on Transfer Films and Wear Rates
  • Quantifying Properties of Transfer Films
    • Transfer Film Morphology
    • Chemistry of the Transfer Film
    • Mechanical Properties of the Transfer Film
    • Adhesion of the Transfer Film
  • Summary

all articles will be uesed/A study of the trobological behavior[49]2015.pdf

A study of the tribological behavior of transfer films of PTFE composites formed under different loads, speeds and morphologies of the counterface

HuLin Li, ZhongWei Yin n, Dan Jiang, LiYong Jin, YuQing Cui Shanghai Jiao Tong University, State Key Laboratory of Mechanical Systems and Vibration, Shanghai 200240, China

a r t i c l e i n f o

Article history: Received 2 November 2014 Received in revised form 12 January 2015 Accepted 17 January 2015 Available online 28 January 2015

Keywords: Polymer–matrix composite Surface topography Sliding wear Bearings

a b s t r a c t

PTFE/copper composites were prepared by compression molding at room temperature and subsequent heat treatment in the atmosphere. Transfer films were prepared on a GCr15 disc using different loads, speeds and morphologies of the counterface. The tribological behavior, thickness and morphology of these transfer films were studied. A scanning electron microscope, a laser microscopic 3D and profile measurement apparatus and an energy-dispersive X-ray spectrometer were used for analysis of the morphology, thickness and elemental content of the transfer film, respectively. The results showed that sliding speed, contact pressure and morphology of the counterface have significant effects on the thickness and tribological behavior of the transfer film. Low speed, light load and isotropic surface morphology are highly conducive to the formation of a transfer film with excellent tribological properties.

& 2015 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved.

1. Introduction

Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)-based composites are one of the most commonly used self-lubricating materials because of their excellent self-lubrication properties. When a PTFE-based composite rubs against metallic engineering surfaces, a portion of the compo- site is transferred to the counterface and forms a transfer film [1–5]. Many studies show that different transfer films incur different tribology properties [2,6–10]. Burris and Sawyer reported that PTFE and composites that deposit thicker transfer films similarly experi- ence higher rates of wear, presumably the thinner transfer films are more strongly adhered to the counterface [7]. Ye et al. observed transfer film evolution and found three unique transfer film morphologies and that different transfer film morphologies have different tribology properties [6]. Cho studied material transfer during the sliding of polymer composites against steel counterfaces and observed polymer transfer to the steel counterface as well as back-transfer of the steel counterface material to the polymer pin surface [9]. Generally, the formation of a coherent uniform and continuous transfer film on the counterface is associated with low friction and wear, whereas a lumpy and non-coherent transfer film is associated with high friction and wear. The mechanisms

proposed for adhesion of the polymer to the counterface are van der Waals forces of attraction, bonding resulting from chemical reac- tions, Coulomb electrostatic forces, and mechanical interlocking generated by sliding of polymer into the crevices of the counterface surface asperities [4,5,11–15].

Many researchers have shown that fillers have a great effect on the tribological properties of polymer and theirs transfer film [1,6,12,16–29]. Tanaka et al researched the PTFE-based composites and found the load-supporting action and the prevention of large- scale destruction of the banded structure of the PTFE matrix at frictional surfaces contribute to the wear-reducing action of the fillers [25–28]. Briscoe et al studied the tribological behavior of lead oxide and copper oxide filled high density polythene and found that fillers may help to reduce the wear of the polymer by increasing the adhesion of the first transfer layer to the counter- face [29]. Gong et al researched the effect of tribochemial reaction of PTFE-based composites and found that chemical reaction occurred in rubbing, and these new metal fluorides appeared to be very strongly bonded at interface between the transfer film and the substrate [5]. Bahadur and Tabor studied the wear of filled PTFE composites and found that fillers produced a uniform and coherent film on the steel surfaces [24]. Frictional heating and the thermal properties play an important role on the material's mechanical strength and tribological behavior [30,31]. Conte et al studied the role of crystallinity on wear behavior of PTFE composites and presented that fillers content and type have an

Contents lists available at ScienceDirect

journal homepage: www.elsevier.com/locate/wear

Wear

http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.wear.2015.01.028 0043-1648/& 2015 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved.

n Corresponding author. E-mail address: yinzw@sjtu.edu.cn (Z. Yin).

Wear 328-329 (2015) 17–27

effect on the crystallinity and thermal properties of PTFE compo- sites and then influence on the formation and regeneration of transfer film [32]. Brown et al found that crack propagation in PTFE is strongly phase dependent [33].

The tribological conditions and content of fillers have an important influence on the morphology and adhesive strength of transfer film [23,34–41]. Shyam Bahadur studied the transfer of material during sliding between different polymers under differ- ent experimental conditions and found that a transfer film devel- ops because of adhesion and interlocking of the fragments of material into metal asperities [35]. Laux and Schwartz investigated the effects of contact pressure, molecular weight, and supplier on the wear behavior and transfer film of polyetheretherketone and found that films with a mean thickness of less than 4 μm correlated with materials that showed the lowest wear [36]. These same researchers also studied the influence of linear reciprocating and multi-directional sliding on PEEK wear and transfer film formation and found that wear behavior was dependent on the motion profile. The lowest wear configuration resulted in a quantifiably thinner and more continuous transfer film [37]. Wang and Yan investigated the tribological properties of the transfer films of PTFE-based composites and found that the introduction of fillers yielded corresponding transfer films with longer wear lives. These researchers also studied the tribological behavior of transfer films of PTFE/bronze composites and found that the thickness of the transfer film slightly increased together with increases in the bronze content of the composites. Higher bronze contents in the composite reduced the friction coefficient and prolonged the wear life of the corresponding transfer film [38,39].

The formation of a high-quality transfer film on a counterface plays a highly important role in the tribological behavior of self- lubricating bearings. However, a high-quality transfer film does not always form under various conditions. In other words, the tribological property of the transfer film is significantly affected by the load, speed and morphology of the counterface. In addition, a transfer film that forms under suitable conditions produces excellent anti-friction and wear-resistance. Therefore, for a self- lubricating bearing, if the run-in stage is able to form a high- quality transfer film on the bearing surface, the layer of high- quality transfer film not only reduces the wear rate of the self- lubricating materials but the transfer film itself also can provide long extra wear life, thereby prolonging the service life of the bearing. Unfortunately, few studies have been performed to investigate this topic. Therefore, this paper focuses on investigat- ing the tribological behavior of the transfer film formed under different loads, speeds and morphologies of the counterface. The goal is to obtain parameters for excellent wear resistance transfer film production parameters that can be used as a reference for selection of the running parameters of a bearing at the run- in stage.

2. Experimental section

2.1. Materials and transfer film preparation

The polymer material and fillers used in this study are PTFE and copper, respectively, and both are commercially available. The material properties are listed in Table 1.

The PTFE powder and copper powder were mixed using a mechanical mixer, and the mass content of copper in the compo- sites was 45 wt%. After mixing, the mixture was placed in a die and subjected to a pressure of 50 MPa in a hydraulic press and maintained at that level for 15 min. Next, cylindrical samples of Ф8 mm�40 mm were extruded from the mold, and the samples were heat treated at 380 1C. After heat treatment, the samples

were processed to final dimensions of Ф6�30 mm2 and were used as pins in preparation of transfer films. Bearing steel discs (GCr15, HRC58-62) 50 mm in diameter and 10 mm thick were used for the counterfaces. The disc surface was processed to produce five types of surface morphology. The properties of the different surfaces are listed in Table 2.

The PTFE/copper composite samples were used as pins to prepare the transfer films on a pin-on-disc tribometer (RTEC MFT-5000, made in the USA) under dry friction conditions, and the sliding distance was 0.5 km. All of the experiments were performed under laboratory conditions (temperature, T¼25 1C, relative humidity �50%). Fig. 1(a) shows the schematics of the transfer film preparation assembly. In the pin-on-disc tester, a stationary PTFE/copper composite pin slides against a rotating steel disc. The flat-ended PTFE/copper composite pin (diameter of 6.0 mm) is secured to the load arm with a chuck. The distance between the center of the pin and the center of the disc is 16 mm.

To study of the tribological behavior of the transfer film formed under different loads, speeds and morphologies of the counter- faces, different types of transfer films were prepared. Further details on the different types of transfer films prepared are given in Table 3.

2.2. Transfer film thickness measurement

The thickness of the transfer film was obtained by measuring the cross-sectional area of the transfer film using the KEYENCE VK- X200 laser microscopic 3D and profile measurement apparatus (accuracy of 0.012 μm, made in Japan). To ensure statistically relevant results, each experiment was repeated three times, and three measurements were collected from each sample on an equally spaced area distributed along the transfer film (For the transfer film formed on the surface morphology II, all measuring points are located in the region that the transfer film completely covered.) to determine the general average of the thickness [42]. Additionally, to reduce the influence of the initial surface char- acteristics on the measurement accuracy, the average heights of the initial surface were used as the measuring datum (base line). A schematic diagram of the measurement technique is shown in Fig. 2.

2.3. Tribological test

Tribological tests were performed using a pin-on-disc trib- ometer (RTEC MFT-5000, made in the USA) under dry friction conditions. All of the experiments were performed under labora- tory conditions (temperature, T¼25 1C, relative humidity �50%). Fig. 1(b) shows the schematics of the test assembly. In the pin-on- disc tester, a stationary Si3N4 ceramic ball (diameter of 9.525 mm) slides against a rotating steel disc transfers the PTFE/copper transfer film. The average distance between the center of the ball and the center of the disc is 16 mm. The ball remained over the disc with two degrees of freedom; the vertical direction was used for normal load application by direct contact with the disc, and the horizontal direction was used for friction measurement.

Table 1 Properties of PTFE and copper.

Materials PTFE Copper

Particle size (μm) 40 1–3 Purity (%) 100 99.0 Tap density (g/cm3) 2.17 3.0 Shape Irregular particle Spherical particle Color White Brown

H. Li et al. / Wear 328-329 (2015) 17–2718

The sliding was performed under dry friction conditions at a sliding speed of 1 m/s and a normal load of 50 N. In all testing, the friction coefficient held stable with notably little fluctuation for a period and subsequently increased abruptly; the sliding distance at this moment (the friction coefficient reached 0.3) was recorded as the wear life of the transfer films. The normal load and friction force were measured using a normal force sensor (range: 50–5000 N, resolution: 0.25 N) and a friction force sensor (range: 1–100 N, resolution: 0.005 N), and the frequency of sampling was 1000 Hz. The friction coefficients m of the specimen were calculated from the relationship m¼F/P, where F is the friction force (N), and P is the normal load (N). To ensure statistically relevant results, three measurements were collected from each sample along the radius of R14.5 mm, R16 mm and R17.5 mm to determine the general average of the friction coefficients.

Each experiment used a new Si3N4 ceramic ball. To ensure statistically relevant results, each experiment was repeated several times. Thus, every data point in the diagrams represents an average of three repeated tests.

The surfaces of the transfer films were examined with a scanning electron microscope (SEM) and a laser microscopic 3D and profile measurement apparatus. In addition, energy dispersive X-ray spectroscopy (EDS) was used for determination of the elemental distribution and content in the transfer films.

3. Results and discussion

3.1. Thickness of transfer film

The transfer film thickness, quality and adhesion strength are often credited with improved tribological performance of solid lubricants. To quantity these transfer films, the KEYENCE VK-X200 laser microscopic 3D and profile measurement apparatus (accu- racy: 0.012 μm, made in Japan) was used to measure the transfer film thickness.

Fig. 3(a) shows the variation of the transfer film thickness with different experimental loads (surface morphology: grinding, speed: 0.335 m/s). It can be observed from the figure that the transfer film thickness of the PTFE/copper composites decreases with increases in the applied load, except for the transfer film thickness at 6.0 MPa. Fig. 3(b) shows the variation of the transfer film thickness with different experimental speeds (surface mor- phology: grinding, load: 2.0 MPa). It is obvious that the transfer film thickness is influenced by the sliding speed, and the thickness increases with the increases in the sliding speed. Transfer film formation is a viscous process, and thus, as sliding speed is increased, the friction forces are also increased, and with the high friction forces, the film pulled out from the PTFE/copper compo- sites surface becomes thick and slab-like. Another reason for the

Table 2 Properties of disc surface.

Disc surface morphology Processing methods Surface roughness (μm)

Surface morphology I Grinding and finishing Ra¼0.015–0.030 Surface morphology II Grinding Ra¼0.45–0.65 Surface morphology III Grinding, sandblasting and finishing Ra¼0.65–0.80 Surface morphology IV Grinding, sandblasting and finishing Ra¼0.80–1.10 Surface morphology V Grinding and sandblasting Ra¼1.20–1.40

Fig. 1. Schematics of the transfer film preparation and test assembly: (a) preparation, and (b) test.

H. Li et al. / Wear 328-329 (2015) 17–27 19

increase in the thickness of the transfer film with increasing sliding speed is increased adhesion from the temperature rise; the transfer film thickness may be decreased with increasing load because of greater compaction and the likelihood of loose material becoming detached from the surface [3]. For the influence of counterface morphology on the transfer film thickness, it can be observed from Fig. 3(b) that counterface morphology has a remarkable influence on the thickness of the transfer film (load: 2 MPa, speed: 0.335 m/s). Surface morphology V exhibits the thickest transfer film, and surface morphology III exhibits the thinnest transfer film.

3.2. Surface morphology of transfer film

Fig. 4 and Fig. 5(a)–(e) show digital camera photos and laser microscopic images of the transfer films formed on different surface morphologies of the disc (load: 2.0 MPa, speed: 0.335 m/s). It can be observed from these figures that the disc surface morphology has a significant effect on the surface morphology of the transfer film. For the grinding sample, the transfer film does not completely cover the friction area. For surfaces with the ground direction perpendicular to sliding direction, the transfer films are uniform and completely cover the friction zone. For surfaces with the ground direction

parallel to the sliding direction, the transfer films are lumpy and do not cover the counterfaces completely; these observations might indicate that the transfer film is not strongly bonded to the counterface in this area. The transfer film is likely peeled off in the form of wear debris during the sliding process. Fig. 4(b) shows the transfer film formed on a finishing disc, and it can be observed from the figure that the transfer film formed on this morphology surface is thin and discontinuous. In contrast, the transfer film formed on the sandblasting and sandblasting-finished surfaces are uniform and continuous. These results indicate that the main mechanism of polymer adhesion to the counterface is mechanical interlocking of the polymer generated during sliding into the crevices of the counterface surface asperities.

Fig. 5(f)–(j) show laser microscopic images of the transfer film formed at different experimental speeds (surface morphology: grinding, load: 2.0 MPa). It can be observed that with changes in the test speed, the transfer film morphology is also altered. As shown in Fig. 5(f)–(j), the transfer film exhibited the best

Table 3 Summary of the different types of transfer film prepare condition.

Number Load of transfer film prepared (MPa)

Speed of transfer film prepared (m/s)

Disc surface morphology

1 2.0 0.335 Surface morphology II

2 3.0 0.335 Surface morphology II

3 4.0 0.335 Surface morphology II

4 5.0 0.335 Surface morphology II

5 6.0 0.335 Surface morphology II

6 2.0 0.167 Surface morphology II

7 2.0 0.502 Surface morphology II

8 2.0 0.670 Surface morphology II

9 2.0 0.837 Surface morphology II

10 2.0 0.335 Surface morphology I

11 2.0 0.335 Surface morphology III

12 2.0 0.335 Surface morphology IV

13 2.0 0.335 Surface morphology V

Fig. 2. Schematic diagram of the measurement technique.

Fig. 3. Variation of the transfer film thickness and standard deviation for different conditions of transfer film formation: (a) 0.335 m/s and surface morphology II, (b) 2.0 MPa and surface morphology II, and (c) 2.0 MPa and 0.335 m/s.

H. Li et al. / Wear 328-329 (2015) 17–2720

Fig. 4. Digital camera photo of the transfer film formed on different counter surfaces: (a) Surface morphology II, (b) Surface morphology I, (c) Surface morphology III, (d) Surface morphology V.

Fig. 5. 3D and profile views of the transfer film formed under different conditions: (a)–(e) 2.0 MPa and 0.335 m/s, and (f)–(o) Surface morphology II.

H. Li et al. / Wear 328-329 (2015) 17–27 21

surface quality at a speed of 0.335 m/s. Therefore, this speed was selected to investigate the effects of the load and morphology of the counterface on the tribological properties of transfer films of PTFE/copper composites.

Fig. 5(k)–(o) show laser microscopic images of the transfer film formed under different experimental loads (surface morphology: grinding, speed: 0.335 m/s). It can be observed that with the increase in the load, the transfer film formed on the counterface becomes lumpy and discontinuous. As mentioned previously, with increasing normal load the likelihood of loose material becoming detached from the surface and the morphologies of transfer film becomes discontinuous.

3.3. Friction and wear properties

The mechanisms proposed for adhesion of polymer to the counterface are van der Waals forces of attraction, bonding resulting from chemical reactions, Coulomb electrostatic forces, and mechanical interlocking of polymer generated during sliding into the crevices of the counterface surface asperities. To study the tribological behavior of the transfer film formed under different loads, speeds, and morphologies of the counterface, a pin-on-disc tribometer (RTEC MFT-5000, made in the USA) was used to test the tribological properties of the transfer film that formed under different experimental conditions.

Fig. 6(a) shows the variation of the friction coefficient and the sliding distance of the transfer film formed at different experimental loads (surface morphology: grinding, speed: 0.335 m/s). All of the tribological tests of the transfer films were performed under dry friction conditions at a sliding speed of 1 m/s and at a normal load of 50 N. It can be observed from the figure that the transfer films formed under low loads show better wear resistance. Additionally, the wear resistance of the transfer film was sharply decreased with the increase in the load that formed the transfer films. As mentioned previously, the thickness of the transfer film decreased with the increase in the load of transfer formation, and increases in the load of the transfer film formation increased the surface morphology deterioration. This result indi- cates that the surface morphology of the transfer film has a highly important effect on its wear resistance. At the same time, the friction coefficient also increased with the increase in the load of transfer film formation. The same result showed that transfer films formed under low speeds have better wear resistances and lower friction coefficients. As mentioned previously, the thickness of the transfer film increased with increasing sliding speed. However, as the thickness of the transfer film increased, the wear resistance of transfer film worsened, which indicates that a low sliding speed during transfer film formation is helpful in producing a strongly adhered transfer film on the counterface. Fig. 6(c) shows the variation of the friction coefficient and the sliding distance of the transfer film formed under different surface morphologies of the disc (load: 2.0 MPa, speed: 0.335 m/s). It can be observed from this figure that the disc surface morphology has a significant effect on the tribology behavior of the transfer film. For the transfer film formed on a finished disc, it can be observed from the figure that this type of transfer film has rather poor tribology properties. The sliding distance is the shortest, and the friction coefficient is a maximum. The transfer film formed on the sandblasting surface shows the best wear resistance; the sliding distance is 9436 m, and the value of the friction coefficient is 0.142. The thickness of the transfer film that formed on surface morphology III is the thinnest. However, the wear resistance is far better than those of the transfer films formed on surface morphologies I and II. These results indicate that under these experimental conditions, the main mechanism of transfer film formation on the counterface is mechanical interlocking.

3.4. SEM and EDS analysis of the transfer films

It is well known that achieving the appropriate character- istics of the transfer film is a highly important factor that affects the tribological properties of polymer composites. To better understand the tribological behavior of the transfer film formed under different loads, speeds and morphologies of the counter- face, SEM was used to explore the morphologies of the transfer films formed under different experimental conditions. In addi- tion, an energy-dispersive X-ray spectrometer (EDS) was used for analysis of the elemental distribution and content in the transfer films.

The SEM images of the transfer films formed on the disc's surface at different speeds are shown in Fig. 7. For the area that is ground in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction, it can be observed that the transfer film formed on the disc's surface at high speed is thick and lumpy. According to previous research, this type of transfer film was easily scaled off of the counterface and formed debris during the wear process, which resulted in poor wear resistance. However, a uniform and thin transfer film forms on the disc sliding at low speed. The thin and uniform transfer film firmly adheres onto the counterface and is not easily scaled off

Fig. 6. Variation of the friction coefficient/sliding distance and standard deviation for different transfer films: (a) 0.335 m/s and surface morphology II, (b) 2.0 MPa and surface morphology II, and (c) 2.0 MPa and 0.335 m/s.

H. Li et al. / Wear 328-329 (2015) 17–2722

during sliding. For the area that is ground in the direction parallel to the sliding direction, it can be observed from the figure that there is no integrity of the transfer film formed on the disc surface at all speeds. A similar result can be observed in the SEM image of the transfer film formed on the disc's surface at different loads. For the area ground in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction, it can be observed from Fig. 8 that at low load, the transfer film formed on the disc's surface is uniform and thin, but a thick and lumpy transfer film is formed on the disc sliding at high load. For the area ground in a direction parallel to the sliding direction, it can be observed from the figure that there is no

integrity of the transfer film formed on the disc surface at all loads. The SEM images of the transfer films formed on the different surface morphologies of the disc are shown in Fig. 9. It can be observed from the figure that the transfer film formed on surface morphology III is the thinnest and most uniform. These transfer films strongly adhere to the disc surface by mechanical interlock- ing action, which can prevent direct contact between the steel disc and self-lubrication materials, thereby significantly reducing the wear rate of the self-lubrication materials. Therefore, for a self-lubricating bearing, if the run-in stage is able to form this type of transfer film on the bearing surface, the layer of high-quality

Fig. 7. Scanning electron micrographs of the transfer films formed under different speeds and sliding directions (surface morphology II and 2.0 MPa): (a1) 0.167 m/s and ground direction perpendicular to sliding direction, (a2) magnification of (a1), and (a3) 0.167 m/s and ground direction parallel to sliding direction, (b1) 0.335 m/s and ground direction perpendicular to sliding direction, (b2) magnification of (b1), and (b3) 0.335 m/s and ground direction parallel to sliding direction, (c1) 0.502 m/s and ground direction perpendicular to sliding direction, (c2) magnification of (c1), and (c3) 0.502 m/s and ground direction parallel to sliding direction, (d1) 0.670 m/s and ground direction perpendicular to sliding direction, (d2) magnification of (d1), and (d3) 0.670 m/s and ground direction parallel to sliding direction, (e1) 0.837 m/s and ground direction perpendicular to sliding direction, and (e2) magnification of (e1), and (e3) 0.837 m/s and ground direction parallel to sliding direction.

H. Li et al. / Wear 328-329 (2015) 17–27 23

transfer film not only reduces the wear rate of the self-lubricating liner but the transfer film itself can provide long extra wear life and prolong the service life of the bearing. However, for the finished disc, most of the steel counterfaces are not covered with integrity of the transfer film. The lack of a continuous transfer film suggests that adhesion between the transfer film and the disc surface was weak in this case.

The results of the EDS elemental analysis are shown in Fig. 10. The F, O and Cu elements were found in all types of transfer films. These findings indicate that transfer of PTFE and Cu occurred during sliding [43,44]. The Fe element was detected in transfer

films formed on surface morphology I and surface morphology III. Especially for the transfer film formed on the finished disc (surface morphology I), the content of Fe reached as high as 80%, whereas the content of fluorine was only 4.2%. This observation might suggest that the coverage and consistency of the transfer film formed on surface morphology III (Grinding, sandblasting and finishing) are better than those of the transfer film formed on surface morphology I (Grinding and finishing). It is also observed from Fig. 10 that the F element and Cu element contents in the transfer film for the sandblasting disc are greater than those of all other transfer films.

Fig. 8. Scanning electron micrographs of the transfer films formed under different loads and sliding directions (surface morphology II and 0.335 m/s): (a1) 2.0 MPa and ground direction perpendicular to sliding direction, (a2) magnification of (a1), and (a3) 2.0 MPa and ground direction parallel to sliding direction, (b1) 3.0 MPa and ground direction perpendicular to sliding direction, (b2) magnification of (b1), and (b3) 3.0 MPa and ground direction parallel to sliding direction, (c1) 4.0 MPa and ground direction perpendicular to sliding direction, (c2) magnification of (c1), and (c3) 4.0 MPa and ground direction parallel to sliding direction, (d1) 5.0 MPa and ground direction perpendicular to sliding direction, (d2) magnification of (d1), and (d3) 5.0 MPa and ground direction parallel to sliding direction, (e1) 6.0 MPa and ground direction perpendicular to sliding direction, and (e2) magnification of (e1), and (e3) 6.0 MPa ground direction parallel to sliding direction.

H. Li et al. / Wear 328-329 (2015) 17–2724

4. Conclusions

This work presents investigations of the tribological behavior of transfer films formed under different loads, speeds and morphol- ogies of the counterface. The following conclusions can be drawn from the current study:

(a) Sliding speed has a significant effect on the thickness and tribological behavior of the transfer film. The lower the speed is, the thinner the transfer film is and the better the wear resistance is.

(b) Contact pressure also has a highly important effect on the thickness, surface morphology and tribological behavior of the transfer film. The thickness of the transfer film decreases with

increases in the contact pressure, except for the transfer film thickness at 6.0 MPa. The lower the contact pressure is, the better the surface quality and the wear resistance of the transfer film will be.

(c) A directional texture and a highly smooth surface are not conducive to the formation of a strongly bonded transfer film. Therefore, the wear resistance of the transfer film and its surface quality are quite poor. However, the adhesion strength of the transfer film formed on the counterface with an isotropic morphology and sandblasted counterface is rather good, and thus, the wear resistance is also good.

(d) Low speed, light load and an isotropic surface morphology are highly conducive to formation of a transfer film with excellent tribological properties.

Fig. 9. Scanning electron micrographs of discs and the transfer films (0.335 m/s and 2.0 MPa): (a1) transfer film formed on surface morphology I, (a2) magnification of (a1), and (a3) surface morphology I, (b1) transfer film formed on surface morphology II, (b2) magnification of (b1), and (b3) surface morphology II, (c1) transfer film formed on surface morphology III, (c2) magnification of (c1), and (c3) surface morphology III, (d1) transfer film formed on surface morphology IV, (d2) magnification of (d1), and (d3) surface morphology IV, (e1) transfer film formed on surface morphology V, and (e2) magnification of (e1), and (e3) surface morphology V.

H. Li et al. / Wear 328-329 (2015) 17–27 25

Acknowledgments

The authors gratefully acknowledge financial support from the National Project 863 (Grant no. 2014BAF08B00). The authors also thank Edison Wu of Keyence (China) Co. Ltd for technical support with the KEYENCE VK-X200 laser microscopic 3D and profile measurement apparatus operation.

References

[1] W.G. Sawyer, K.D. Freudenberg, B. Praveen, L.S. Schadler, A study on the friction and wear behavior of PTFE filled with alumina nanoparticles, Wear 254 (2003) 573–580.

[2] S.K. Biswas, K. Vijayan, Friction and wear of PTFE-a review, Wear 158 (1992) 193–211.

[3] K.R. Makinson, D. Tabor, The friction and transfer of polytetrafluoroethylene, Proc. R. Soc. A: Math. Phys. Eng. Sci. 281 (1964) 49–61.

[4] T.A. Blanchet, F.E. Kennedy, D.T. Jayne, XPS analysis of the effect of fillers on PTFE transfer film development in sliding contacts, Tribol. Trans. 36 (1993) 535–544.

[5] D. Gong, Q. Xue, H. Wang, Effect of tribochemical reaction of the transferred film with the substrate on its adhesion and wear behavior, Controlled Interphases Compos. Mater. (1990) 185–193.

[6] J. Ye, H.S. Khare, D.L. Burris, Transfer film evolution and its role in promoting ultra-low wear of a PTFE nanocomposite, Wear 297 (2013) 1095–1102.

[7] D.L. Burris, W.G. Sawyer, Tribological sensitivity of PTFE/alumina nanocompo- sites to a range of traditional surface finishes, Tribol. Trans. 48 (2005) 147–153.

[8] M. Conte, A. Igartua, Study of PTFE composites tribological behavior, Wear 296 (2012) 568–574.

[9] M.H. Cho, The role of transfer film and back transfer behavior on the tribological performance of polyoxymethylene in sliding, J. Mech. Sci. Technol. 23 (2010) 2291–2298.

[10] D.L. Burris, B. Boesl, G.R. Bourne, W.G. Sawyer, Polymeric nanocomposites for tribological applications, Macromol. Mater. Eng. 292 (2007) 387–402.

[11] G. Jintang, Tribochemical effects in formation of polymer transfer film, Wear 245 (2000) 100–106.

[12] C.J. Schwartz, S. Bahadur, Studies on the tribological behavior and transfer film–counterface bond strength for polyphenylene sulfide filled with nanos- cale alumina particles, Wear 237 (2000) 261–273.

[13] J.V. Voort, S. Bahadur, The growth and bonding of transfer film and the role of CuS and PTFE in the tribological behavior of PEEK, Wear 181–183 (1995) 212–221.

[14] S. Bahadur, C. Sunkara, Effect of transfer film structure, composition and bonding on the tribological behavior of polyphenylene sulfide filled with nano particles of TiO2, ZnO, CuO and SiC, Wear 258 (2005) 1411–1421.

[15] Z. Zuo, Y. Yang, X. Qi, W. Su, X. Yang, Analysis of the chemical composition of the PTFE transfer film produced by sliding against Q235 carbon steel, Wear 320 (2014) 87–93.

[16] Q.J. Xue, Q.H. Wang, Wear mechanisms of polyetheretherketone composites filled with various kinds of SiC, Wear 213 (1997) 54–58.

[17] H.L. Li, Z.W. Yin, D. Jiang, Y.J. Huo, Y.Q. Cui, Tribological behavior of hybrid PTFE/Kevlar fabric composites with nano-Si3N4 and submicron size WS2 fillers, Tribol. Int. 80 (2014) 172–178.

[18] R.K. Goyal, M.Yadav, Study on wear and friction behavior of graphite flake- filled PTFE composites, J. Appl. Polym. Sci. 10 (2013) 3186–3191.

[19] D.L. Burris, W.G. Sawyer, Improved wear resistance in alumina-PTFE nano- composites with irregular shaped nanoparticles, Wear 260 (2006) 915–918.

[20] R. Sebastian, A. Noll, G. Zhang, T. Burkhart, B. Wetzel, Friction and wear of PPS/ CNT nanocomposites with formation of electrically isolating transfer films, Tribol. Int. 64 (2013) 187–195.

[21] F. Li, K.A. Hu, J.L. Li, B.Y. Zhao, The friction and wear characteristics of nanometer ZnO filled polytetrafluoroethylene, Wear 249 (2002) 877–882.

[22] B.A. Krick, J.J. Ewin, G.S. Blackman, C.P. Junk, W.G. Sawyer, Environmental dependence of ultra-low wear behavior of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and alumina composites suggests tribochemical mechanisms, Tribol. Int. 51 (2012) 42–46.

[23] T.A. Blanchet, S.S. Kandanur, L.S. Schadler, Coupled effect of filler content and countersurface roughness on PTFE nanocomposite wear resistance, Tribol. Lett. 40 (2009) 11–21.

[24] S. Bahadur, D. Tabor, The wear of filled polytetrafluoroetyhylene, Wear 98 (1984) 1–13.

[25] D. Gong, Q. Xue, H. Wang, Study of the wear of filled polytetrafluoroethylene, Wear 134 (1989) 283–295.

[26] T.A. Blanchet, F.E. Kennedy, Sliding wear mechanism of poltetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and PTFE composites, Wear 153 (1992) 229–243.

[27] K. Tanaka, S. Kawakami, Effect of various fillers on the friction and wear of PTFE-based composites, Wear 79 (1982) 221–234.

[28] J.K. Lancaster, The effect of carbon fibre reinforcement on the friction and wear of polymers, BRIT, J. Appl. Phys. 1 (1968) 549–559.

Fig. 10. EDS analysis of the transfer films formed on different surface morphologies of the disc: (a) Surface morphology II, (b) Surface morphology I, (c) Surface morphology III, and (d) Surface morphology V.

H. Li et al. / Wear 328-329 (2015) 17–2726

[29] B.J. Briscoe, A.K. Pogosian, D. Tabor, The friction and wear of high density polythene: the action of lead oxide and copper oxide fillers, Wear 27 (1974) 19–34.

[30] M. Conte, B. Pinedo, A. Igartua, Frictional heating calculation based on tailored experimental measurements, Tribol. Int. 74 (2014) 1–6.

[31] J. Blumm, A. Lindemann, M. Meyer, C. Strasser, Characterization of PTFE using advanced thermal analysis techniques, Int. J. Thermophys. 31 (2008) 1919–1927.

[32] M. Conte, B. Pinedo, A. Igartua, Role of crystallinity on wear behavior of PTFE composites, Wear 307 (2013) 81–86.

[33] E.N. Brown, D.M. Dattelbaum, The role of crystalline phase on fracture and microstructure evolution of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), Polymer 46 (2005) 3056–3068.

[34] S.E. Franklin, A. de Kraker, Investigation of counterface surface topography effects on the wear and transfer behaviour of a POM–20% PTFE composite, Wear 255 (2003) 766–773.

[35] S. Bahadur, The development of transfer layers and their role in polymer tribology, Wear 245 (2000) 919–925.

[36] K.A. Laux, C.J. Schwartz, Effects of contact pressure, molecular weight, and supplier on the wear behavior and transfer film of polyetheretherketone (PEEK), Wear 297 (2013) 919–925.

[37] K.A. Laux, C.J. Schwartz, Influence of linear reciprocating and multi-directional sliding on PEEK wear performance and transfer film formation, Wear 301 (2013) 727–734.

[38] Y. Wang, F. Yan, Tribological properties of transfer films of PTFE-based composites, Wear 261 (2006) 1359–1366.

[39] Y. Wang, F. Yan, A study on tribological behaviour of transfer films of PTFE/ bronze composites, Wear 262 (2007) 876–882.

[40] Y. Wang, H. Wang, F. Yan, Investigation of transfer film of PTFE/bronze composites on 2024Al surface, Surf. Interface Anal. 41 (2009) 753–758.

[41] I. Tzanakis, M. Conte, M. Hadfield, T.A. Stolarski, Experimental and analytical thermal study of PTFE composite sliding against high carbon steel as a function of the surface roughness, sliding velocity and applied load, Wear 303 (2013) 154–168.

[42] R.S. Colbert, B.A. Krick, A.C. Dunn, J.R. Vail, N. Argibay, W.G. Sawyer, Uncer- tainty in Pin-on-Disk wear volume measurements using surface scanning techniques, Tribol. Lett. 42 (2011) 129–131.

[43] S.Q. Lai, T.S. Li, X.J. Liu, R.G. Lv, A study on the friction and wear behavior of PTFE filled with acid treated nano-attapulgite, Macromol. Mater. Eng. 289 (2004) 916–922.

[44] M. Yamane, T.A. Stolarski, S. Tobe, Influence of counter material on friction and wear performance of PTFE–metal binary coatings, Tribol. Int. 41 (2008) 269–281.

H. Li et al. / Wear 328-329 (2015) 17–27 27

  • A study of the tribological behavior of transfer films of PTFE composites formed under different loads, speeds and...
    • Introduction
    • Experimental section
      • Materials and transfer film preparation
      • Transfer film thickness measurement
      • Tribological test
    • Results and discussion
      • Thickness of transfer film
      • Surface morphology of transfer film
      • Friction and wear properties
      • SEM and EDS analysis of the transfer films
    • Conclusions
    • Acknowledgments
    • References

all articles will be uesed/Assessing Quantative 2017.pdf

Wear 380-381 (2017) 78–85

Contents lists available at ScienceDirect

Wear

http://d 0043-16

n Corr Delawar

E-m

journal homepage: www.elsevier.com/locate/wear

Assessing quantitative metrics of transfer film quality as indicators of polymer wear performance

D.R. Haidar a, J. Ye b, A.C. Moore c, D.L. Burris a,c,n

a Department of Mechanical Engineering, University of Delaware, Newark, DE, United States b Institute of Tribology, Hefei University of Technology, Hefei, Anhui, China c Department of Biomedical Engineering, University of Delaware, Newark, DE, United States

a r t i c l e i n f o

Article history: Received 24 October 2016 Received in revised form 9 March 2017 Accepted 12 March 2017 Available online 14 March 2017

keywords: Polymer tribology Transfer film Wear rate

x.doi.org/10.1016/j.wear.2017.03.012 48/& 2017 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved.

esponding author at: Department of Mechani e, Newark, DE, United States. ail address: dlburris@udel.edu (D.L. Burris).

a b s t r a c t

Reduced wear rates of filled polymeric tribomaterials consistently accompany improvements in the appearance of the transfer film, a protective layer of debris that adheres to the counterface. As a result, wear reductions are often attributed to the favorable effects of the filler on transfer film quality. However, the cause-effect relationship between fillers, transfer film quality, and polymer wear performance re- mains uncertain due, in part, to a lack of standard metrics for assessing transfer film quality. Methods for quantifying transfer film thickness and area fraction have been proposed previously; although some studies show strong correlations between these parameters and wear rate, others have demonstrated a lack of general applicability. In a more recent study, it was proposed that the characteristic size of the gaps in the transfer film (free-space length) may better reflect visual differences in transfer film quality and more directly relate to debris size and wear rate. In this paper, a representative collection of common tribological polymers and composites were subjected to wear testing and transfer film topology char- acterization to better generalize the link between polymer wear performance and transfer film topology (thickness, coverage, and domain size-scales). The free-space length provided the best correlation with steady state wear rates of the tribopolymers in this study and prediction of wear rates from previous studies. The results suggest that, among the metrics considered, the free-space length provides the best independent measure of transfer film quality in the context of polymer wear.

& 2017 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved.

1. Introduction

Tribological polymers are typically composite materials designed to provide low friction and wear under unlubricated or otherwise challenging sliding conditions [1,2]. The inevitable wear of these materials generates debris that may either stick to the counterface or exit the tribological contact. When debris stick, they form a transfer film that protects the tribological polymer from further damage by the counterface [3–5]. Transfer films can be thick or thin, patchy or coherent, hard or soft, persistent or sacrificial [6–8]. If the transfer film is coherent and persistent, it becomes the relevant surface with which the tribological polymer interacts [2].

The hypothesis that improved transfer films better protect the polymer and thereby reduce wear is consistent with many observa- tions in the literature. In 1996, Wang et al. [9] found that nanoscale ZrO2 significantly reduced the wear of polyetheretherketone (PEEK). Post-test scanning electron microscopy revealed that the transfer film

cal Engineering, University of

of unfilled PEEK was ‘thick, lumpy, and incoherent’while that of ZrO2- PEEK nanocomposite was ‘thin, uniform, and coherent’. The group made similar observations in a study with nanoscale SiC in PEEK [10]; in this case they described the transfer films as ‘thin, uniform, and tenacious’ based on similar visual post-test observations of transfer films. In these and a series of other papers with nanofillers in PEEK, the authors attributed the tribological benefits of the nanofillers to improvements in the quality of the protective transfer films. Similarly, Li et al. [11] found that the addition of nanoscale ZnO to polytetra- fluoroethylene (PTFE) reduced its wear rate while improving transfer film ‘uniformity and tenacity’. Sawyer et al. [12] described the transfer films of lowwear nanoscale alumina reinforced PTFE as ‘well adhered, smooth, and continuous’ and Bhimaraj et al. [13] found that filling polyethylene terephthalate (PET) with alumina reduced wear rates and produced more ‘coherent and uniform’ transfer films; Bahadur and Sunkara [14] described the transfer films of 2 vol% nanoscale CuO filled and TiO2 filled polyphenylene sulphide (PPS) as ‘thin and uni- form’. Finally, McCook et al. [15] showed that more ‘uniform’ transfer films accompanied reduced wear of epoxy nanocomposites.

Although most previous studies characterize transfer films using qualitative descriptions of visual attributes (e.g. thick vs.

D.R. Haidar et al. / Wear 380-381 (2017) 78–85 79

thin, incoherent vs. coherent, etc.) [2], a number of more recent studies have attempted to define, quantify, and correlate mor- phological properties of transfer films to wear resistance of poly- mers or polymer composites. Burris and Sawyer [16] used profi- lometry to measure maximum transfer film thickness of different PTFE composites on surfaces of varying roughness and texture; they showed that the wear rate increased roughly with the cube of the transfer film thickness. Bhimaraj et al. [13] used optical mea- surements to quantify the area fraction of alumina-PET transfer films as a function of filler loading; not surprisingly, the area fraction tended to increase with increased filler loading and de- creased wear rate. During dry sliding wear studies of PEEK in various configurations, Laux and Schwartz [17] showed that the testing configuration that produced the lowest wear rates also produced quantifiably thinner transfer films of greater area frac- tions. Finally, Rodriguez et al. [5] used dimensional analysis of transfer films for correlation to wear rates of PEEK-based composites.

Studies relating transfer films to polymer wear have been limited to steady state sliding using materials with a common polymer matrix with only a few exceptions. Ye et al. studied the evolution of an alumina-PTFE composite transfer film from run-in (high wear) to steady state (low wear) [18]. In their subsequent study, quantitative assessments showed that the 1,000x reduction in wear rate from run-in to steady state was accompanied by systematic changes in transfer film thickness, area fraction, and free-space length, which they defined as the characteristic size of the gaps in the films [19]. Thus, it appears that these relationships are not necessarily limited to steady state sliding conditions. However, under steady state conditions, Laux and Schwartz found that the correlation between wear rate and transfer film thickness [20] vanished when they varied the molecular weight and supplier of unfilled PEEK. To date, no single metric has emerged as an ob- vious choice for the general assessment of polymer transfer film quality. This paper attempts to test the link between wear rate and common measures of transfer film quality more generally using the broadest possible range of representative solid lubricant polymers.

2. Material and methods

2.1. Materials

PTFE-based materials were made from Teflon™ 7C resin (30 mm reported diameter particles) from DuPont. PEEK-based materials were made from 450PF molding resin (10 mm reported diameter particles) from Victrex. Epoxy was prepared using Epon 828 resin fromMomentive and 40 series anhydride curing agent from Lindride. Virgin polyethylene terephthalate (PET) from Ensinger's TECA- PET®PET product line and polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) from Quad- rant's Techtron®PPS product line were machined from bulk stock.

The α-phase aluminum oxide filler had a reported diameter range of 27–43 nm but recent studies have revealed that the powders consisted primarily of relatively stable micron-scale ag- glomerates [21]. The γ-phase aluminum oxide nanoparticles were approximately equal to their reported size of 44 nm [22]. Both fillers were obtained from Nanostructured & Amorphous Materials Inc. PTFE and PEEK nanocomposites contained 5 wt% of either filler and were fabricated as described previously [16,21,23–25]. The polymer matrix and nanofiller were pre-massed to prescribed amounts before being combined. One part of the powder en- semble was then added to two parts (volume) anhydrous ethanol and dispersed using an ultrasonic horn with 460 W power applied for two out of every three seconds over five total minutes. The powder mixture was then dried under rough vacuum at 100 °C

and then cold compacted in a cylindrical mold at 100 MPa of pressure. The green sample was removed from the mold and he- ated in a nitrogen backfilled furnace using a ramp to 365 °C in 3 h, a 10 h hold at 365 °C, and a ramp to 50 °C in 3 h.

Neat epoxy samples were fabricated using a resin to curing agent ratio of 54:46 wt%. The mixture was hand-stirred for 5 min and then poured into a rectangular 12 mm � 12 mm � 50 mm mold. The filled mold was kept in ambient conditions for 4 days before being placed into a furnace at 71 °C for 3 h, then at 93 °C for 1 h, and finally at 177 °C for 1.5 h at which point the sample was left to cool to room temperature within the oven.

These materials were chosen to reflect the most general pos- sible cross-section of common tribological polymers within the literature including very high wear rate (PTFE [16]) and very low wear rate (PEEK-PTFE [26]) materials, a thermoplastic (PEEK [27]) and a thermoset (epoxy [15]) of comparable wear rates, and a range of relevant processing conditions (compression molding vs. extrusion for bulk stock).

2.2. Wear rate quantification

Each specimen was machined into a rectangular pin of 6.4 mm � 6.4 mm � 10 mm height. A flat counterface of 304 stainless steel 38 mm x 25 mm x 3 mm was prepared by polishing and lapping to 15 nm 7 5 nm Ra. Wear tests were conducted on a linear reciprocating pin-on-flat tribometer previously reported in literature [18]. Before testing, each pin surface was pre-condi- tioned with 50 N of normal force (1.2 MPa pressure) against 600 grit SiC paper over 3 reciprocation cycles to remove machining marks, clean the surface mechanically, and align the surfaces within the tribometer as described by Ye et al. [18]. For each cycle a fresh region of grit paper was used and no subsequent cleaning was performed. Following abrasion, the dimensions and mass of the sample were measured with uncertainties of 70.05 mm and 70.05 mg, respectively.

Wear experiments were performed at a normal force of 250 N (6.3 MPa), a sliding speed of 50.8 mm/s, and a reciprocation length (half-cycle) of 25.4 mm in ambient laboratory conditions of �30% relative humidity and �25 °C. Testing was interrupted periodically to determine mass loss throughout each experiment [28]. The test was stopped when the sliding distance reached 8 km or when the volume lost exceeded 12 mm3. The steady state wear rate of the sample, k (mm3/Nm), was determined as described by Sawyer and Burris [28].

2.3. Transfer film quantification

A representative transfer film is shown in Fig. 1. Images of each transfer film were collected at five locations (center and four corners) in the middle 50% of the wear track (to eliminate effects of reversal zones) to obtain relevant statistics for transfer film attributes. A pixel was treated as polymer (transfer film) if there was clear evidence that it was the result of debris creation rather than film-drawing. This criterion is justified by the fact that PTFE, the standard for high wear, produces a thin, continuous, and likely persistent film (Fig. 5a) beneath the thick and patchy debris-like transfer films described in the literature [29–31]. In most cases, pixel intensity thresholding was used to convert images into a binary image, i.e. black (polymer film) and white (free-space ex- posing counterface). In some cases, the distinction between transfer film and free-space was less obvious. In these cases, manual conversion was necessary using scanning electron micro- scopy (SEM) and optical microscopy (OM) to distinguish regions of polymer and counterface.

A custom MATLABs code from Ye et al. [19] was used to assess three distinct metrics of transfer film quality. First, the area fraction (X) was determined as the ratio of black pixels to total pixels (20% in

Fig. 1. a) Optical image of a representative polymer transfer film illustrating regions of transferred polymer (dark) and bare counterface (light). b) Converted black and white image. In most cases, pixel intensity thresholding can be used to convert images into a processed black (polymer) and white (free-space) image. In some cases, manual conversion was required after complimentary tools (SEM and OM) were used to distinguish between polymer and free-space. Once converted, the images were used to determine the free-space length using a custom code that determined the most likely number of intersecting black pixels in a randomly placed box of given size. The free- space length is the largest box size for which the most probable number of intersecting black pixels is zero. c) Illustrative histograms for this image for box widths of 200, 100, and 30 μm; 30 μm is the free-space length of this image. Image adapted from [19] with permission.

D.R. Haidar et al. / Wear 380-381 (2017) 78–8580

Fig. 1). The code then determines the free-space length (Lf), which is defined as the characteristic size of the voids in the transfer film [19]. The code performs a Monte Carlo simulation to determine the probability of finding one or more pixels of transfer film within a randomly placed square of any fixed length; the free-space length is the length of the largest square for which the most probable outcome is zero intersecting transfer film pixels. The process is illustrated by Fig. 1c. The debris-space length (Ld), which we define here as the characteristic size of continuous regions of transfer film, assesses the spatial characteristics of the transfer film rather than its gaps; this metric was included here to test a prevailing hypothesis that reduced wear and improved transfer film morphology are both natural con- sequences of debris size reduction [3,16]. The debris-space length was determined using the same procedure described above after inverting black and white colors of processed images. In other words, the free- space and debris-space lengths are the characteristic sizes of white and black domains in Fig. 1b, respectively. The code and user's manual

Fig. 2. Schematic of the average transfer film thickness measurement using stylus profi perpendicular to the wear test sliding direction. The cantilever beam had a calibrated s tification [17] applied to N¼5 scans of the 5 wt% α-phase alumina filled PTFE transfer fi

describing best practices can be obtained at: http://research.me.udel. edu/�dlburris/publicationsOther.html.

Measurements of film thickness used 1-D stylus profilometry with a soft (HDPE) large radius (3.18 mm) probe mounted to a 0.15 mN/μm cantilever as shown in Fig. 2a. After leveling the counterface to 071 μm per mm travel, the z-stage was used to apply a nominal initial contact force of 4 mN. The z-stage was then fixed and the reciprocating stage was used to translate the sample at a speed of 0.3 mm/s. A calibrated displacement sensor (10070.014 μm) tracked the deflections of the probe as a function of position. Five 8 mm-wide line scans were made across each 6.4 mm-wide wear track at 0 mm (center), 73 mm, and 76 mm. Each line scan was individually tilt-corrected to the bare coun- terface on the sides of the wear track. Thickness was determined from these measurements using the method described by Laux and Schwartz [17]. All five tilt-corrected line scans for each sample were combined into a single 50-bin histogram and fit with a bi-

lometry. (a) A 6.35 mm diameter HDPE sphere was used to scan the transfer films tiffness of 0.15 mN/μm. (b) The histogram method of transfer film thickness quan- lm.

Table 1 Glass transition temperature (Tg), melting temperature (Tm), and crystallinity (Xc) of the polymer samples used in this study based on differential scanning calori- metry. PTFE has no thermally-detectable glass transition and epoxy does not melt. The glass transition of the PEEK-PTFE material was due to contributions from the PEEK.

material Tg (⁰C) Tm (⁰C) Xc (%)

PTFE N/A 330 45 5 wt% γ-Al2O3þPTFE N/A 330 45 5 wt% α-Al2O3þPTFE N/A 330 50 32 wt% PEEKþPTFE 165 330 60 PEEK 155 345 35 5 wt% γ -Al2O3þPEEK 150 355 40 5 wt% α-Al2O3þPEEK 155 340 40 PET 80 250 25 PPS 110 280 60 Epoxy 130 N/A N/A

D.R. Haidar et al. / Wear 380-381 (2017) 78–85 81

Gaussian curve as shown in Fig. 2c [17]. The reported transfer film thickness is the difference between the modes of the distributions; the uncertainty is the root sum square of the standard deviations (Table 1).

The non-traditional approach described above was needed to overcome several challenges we encountered during preliminary studies with more familiar methods. First, the histogram-based subtraction method, unlike the more typical ‘inside versus outside’ subtraction method [24,25,32,33], is independent of area fraction. Second, although the large range of 1D profilometry ensures suffi- cient counterface for effective subtraction, purely 1D measurements (with a sharp probe) of sparse 2D debris fields are unlikely to detect the representative peaks of interest (they mostly detect debris edges when they detect anything). Likewise, although 2D profilo- metry (e.g. SWLI and AFM) is ideal for sparse 2D debris fields, range limitations make counterface sampling difficult, especially in cases of high film coverage. We found that the hybrid approach taken here (large, soft 2D contact with 1D scan) largely solved these issues without the need for significant compromises. The large contact diameter (�50 μm) swept a wider sampling area and increased the likelihood of detecting the particle peaks rather than edges. The long span ensured detection of bare counterface on both ends of every scan regardless of coverage while maximizing leverage for leveling purposes. Because the deformation was dominated by the

Fig. 3. (a) Wear volume against sliding distance of all materials tested. Note that axes w rates. (b) Steady state wear rates of all materials.

probe and not the film, there was no preferential deformation of the soft film relative to the hard counterface. Even with a permissible variation of 2 mN (50% the pre-load; due to tilt and film height), it can be shown that the resulting deformation-driven measurement error is less than 1%; this error was far less than the control errors we observed when attempting to control load. Lastly, the low contact stress (�1 MPa) and low surface energy of the HDPE probe virtually eliminated any potential for film damage; our previous study revealed that HDPE probes increased transfer film survival by �6 orders of magnitude compared to probes of steel, glass, and other higher surface energy polymers under 1 N of load [8].

3. Results

The wear testing results are shown in Fig. 3. Not surprisingly, PTFE had the highest wear rate of all polymers tested with k¼6�10�4 mm3/Nm. PPS had the next highest wear rate with k¼1�10�4 mm3/Nm. The 5 wt% γ-phase alumina filled PTFE had a wear rate of k¼5�10�5 mm3/Nm and γ-phase alumina filled PEEK had a nearly identical wear rate of k¼4�10�5 mm3/Nm. The wear rates of unfilled PEEK and epoxy were also nearly identical with k¼1�10�5 mm3/Nm. The α-phase alumina filled PEEK had the fourth lowest wear rate of k¼1�10�6 mm3/Nm. PET was the most wear resistant unfilled polymer in the study with k¼8�10�7 mm3/ Nm. The 5 wt% α-phase alumina filled PTFE had the second lowest wear rate of k¼1�10�7 mm3/Nm and the 30 wt% PEEK filled PTFE had the lowest wear rate in this study with k¼4�10�8 mm3/Nm.

Representative images of the steady state transfer films pro- duced by the tribological polymers in this study are shown in Fig. 4; neat polymers are shown on the left and polymer compo- sites are shown on the right, descending in order of decreasing wear rates. The visual morphologies of these transfer films are vastly different even among neat polymers ranging from thick and patchy (PTFE) to thin and patchy (epoxy) to thin and streaky (PEEK). Qualitatively speaking, decreasing wear rates were ac- companied by increased area fractions and decreased debris size, thickness, and free-space length. These general trends agree well with the observations from more tightly controlled studies of single polymer systems [9–11,15,16,34–36].

Quantitative transfer film morphology data for each steady state film in this study are provided in Table 2; mean values are

ere necessarily logarithmically-scaled due to the wide variation in measured wear

Fig. 4. Representative images of all transfer films in the study with the corresponding image conversions. Neat polymers are shown on the left and polymer composites are shown on the right; samples in each column descend in order of decreasing wear rate. A square representing the mean free-space length of each transfer film is provided on each converted image to visually illustrate its relationship to the visual attributes of the transfer film.

D.R. Haidar et al. / Wear 380-381 (2017) 78–8582

reported 7 twice the uncertainty (95% confidence interval). The remarkably high wear rate of unfilled PTFE was associated with quantifiably thick transfer films (tave¼2 mm) of low coverage (X¼15%), large free-space length (Lf¼2 mm), and large debris- space length (Ld¼0.5 mm). Transfer films from PPS, the next highest wear rate material in the study, had an average thickness of 0.5 mm, an area fraction of 1%, a free-space length of 1.4 mm, and a much smaller debris-space length of 40 mm. Transfer films from 5 wt% γ-phase alumina-PTFE had an average thickness of 1.3 mm, an area fraction 17%, a free space length of 110 mm, and a debris-space length of 30 mm. Despite performing comparably in wear testing, the transfer films of 5 wt% γ-phase alumina PEEK were thinner (t¼0.2 mm) and less complete (X¼4%) with larger gaps (Lf¼1600 mm) and debris size (Ld¼90 mm). The epoxy trans- fer film had an average thickness of 0.5 mm, an area fraction of 0.3%, a free-space length of 50 mm, and a debris-space length of 1 mm. The similarly wear resistant PEEK had a transfer film with an

average thickness of 0.3 mm, an area fraction of 40%, a free-space length of 30 mm, and a debris-space length of 12 mm. Transfer films of 5 wt% α-phase alumina-PEEK, the next lowest wear rate ma- terial in the study, had an average thickness of 0.6 mm, an area fraction of 40%, a free-space length of 100 mm, and a debris-space length of 11 mm. Transfer films of PET, the neat polymer in the study with the lowest wear rate, were 0.6 mm thick, covered 40% of the area, contained 15 mm gaps, and 20 mm debris. The two low wear materials in the study (5 wt% α-phase alumina and 30 wt% PEEK filled PTFE) produced quantitatively comparable transfer films with an average thickness of 300 nm, 470% coverage, o20 mm gaps, and o50 mm debris.

Wear rate is plotted against transfer film area fraction, thickness, free-space length, and debris-space length in Fig. 5. Despite the large variation in properties of the materials included in this study, the expected relationships were generally maintained; wear rate tended to decrease with decreased thickness, increased area fraction,

Table 2 The complete dataset from the study. The wear rate (k), average thickness (tave), transfer film area fraction (X), free-space length (Lf), and debris-space length (Ld) are provided for each material. All values are reported as the mean 7 the standard deviation based on N¼5 measurement locations for each sample.

Material k (10�6 mm3/Nm) tave (μm) X (%) Lf (μm) Ld (μm)

PTFE 610783 1.970.4 1574 20007 260 580781 PPS 97711 0.570.3 0.870.2 14007 260 41710 5 wt% γ-Al2O3þPTFE 4773 1.371.0 1772 110716 3174 5 wt% γ -Al2O3þPEEK 4272 0.270.2 473 16007110 94719 Epoxy 1270.5 0.570.2 0.370.1 48713 170.1 PEEK 1170.7 0.370.2 4277 3479 1275 5 wt% α-Al2O3þPEEK 1.470.1 0.670.3 3673 96714 1172 PET 0.7670.09 0.670.3 3975 1573 1876 5 wt% α-Al2O3þPTFE 0.1270.01 0.370.3 72710 1375 42714 30 wt% PEEKþPTFE 0.0470.01 0.370.4 72718 1776 48729

D.R. Haidar et al. / Wear 380-381 (2017) 78–85 83

decreased free-space length, and decreased debris size. For the pur- pose of assessing fit quality, a difference in wear rate from 1 to 5�10�4 was treated equivalently to a difference in wear rates from 1 to 5�10�7. Because the coefficient of determination (R2), the more common measure of correlation strength, gives the former 1,000,000 times more weight than the latter, we assess correlation strength based on the ratio (max/min) between measured values and model predictions. The grey region on each plot represents the best-fit 7 the uncertainty (standard deviation of the ratio). Wear rate cor- related best with free-space length, with an uncertainty of 3.5x, and next-best with area fraction, with an uncertainty of 5.5x. The corre- lation between wear rate and thickness produced an uncertainty of

Fig. 5. Wear rate versus transfer film: (a) area fraction (X), (b) thickness (tave), (c) free-sp the best-fit trendlines to the data from this study (dashed line), and the mean variatio Results extracted from prior studies of varying materials and testing conditions have been each metric [9,11,16,19,34,35,37,38].

15x and the correlation between wear rate and debris-space length produced an uncertainty of 50x.

4. Discussion

Numerous studies have drawn conclusions about the likely causal relationship between transfer film quality and wear rate based purely on the visual appearance of transfer films following steady state sliding [9–11,15,16,36]. Quantitative studies of transfer film mor- phology generally support these relationships, but they are often limited to a specific system of interest [5,13,14,16,17]. The variability

ace length (Lf), and (d) debris-space length (Ld). Results from Table 2 (black circles), n of these data from the trendline (grey shaded region) are shown in each image. included in the background to test trend generality and trendline predictability for

D.R. Haidar et al. / Wear 380-381 (2017) 78–8584

within the system of interest is important. Laux and Schwartz showed that the apparent correlation betweenwear rate and transfer film thickness vanished when the molecular weight of their PEEK samples varied [20]. To our knowledge, the present study is the first to quantitatively test the link between wear rate and common transfer film morphology metrics for various representative poly- mers and polymer composites. Given the wide range of materials, properties, and wear rates of materials in this study, it is encouraging that the best-fits to wear rate based on the free-space length and area fraction were within �6x of the measured values.

The usefulness of these results depends on their ability to predict independent outcomes. A sampling of independent mea- surements from the literature has been included in Fig. 5 to test predictability. One particularly interesting point of comparison is the study from Ye et al. [19], which involved the same 5 wt% α- phase alumina-PTFE sample from this study during the transition from run-in to steady state. As Fig. 5 shows, the data from Ye et al. are well-represented by those of this study, which suggests that these relationships aren’t entirely limited to steady state sliding. Applying the best-fits from this study to their results only slightly increases the uncertainties (from 3.5x to 8x and from 5.5x to 14x for free-space length and area fraction, respectively). The other data in Fig. 5 are truly independent datasets with varying mate- rials and tribological conditions; the best fits from this study ap- plied to the independent results from the literature increases uncertainties to 24x (free-space length) and 305x (area fraction). The results consistently demonstrate that the free-space length is the best predictor of wear rate among the metrics considered in this study and, thus, provides the best independent measure of transfer film quality in the context of polymer wear.

The wear rate of all polymers should not be a single universal function of transfer film topology based on limit analysis. In the complete absence of a transfer film, such as during sliding in a single direction on a straight line, unfilled PTFE would be expected to produce far higher wear rates than the other unfilled polymers in this study; hence, these polymers should all have unique upper limits (zero thickness, zero debris-space length, zero area fraction, infinite free-space length). Likewise, a similar system-dependent limit ought to exist at full transfer film coverage; the data from Ye et al. [19] in Fig. 5c hints at such a lower limit near 10�7 mm3/Nm. With this in mind, the degree to which the transfer film free-space length appears to reflect wear rates of different polymer system under varying testing conditions is striking.

There is a relatively direct theoretical link between wear rate and free-space length. The free-space length governs the size of the mean adhesive zone, which limits the size of the resulting debris. Furthermore, as the size of the adhesive zone shrinks, debris particle formation becomes less likely based on the com- petition between elastic energy and work of adhesion [39]. The area fraction is also directly related to wear rate since, at a given free-space length, the area fraction governs the number of ad- hesive zones. Although the free-space length tends to decrease with increased area fraction, the fact that the two are technically independent helps explain variations in measured wear rates about the trendlines based on these metrics. Although both me- trics produced good fit quality based on our data, area fraction proved to be a less reliable predictor of wear rate based on in- dependent measurements from the literature.

Interestingly, there are equally sound theoretical reasons why thickness and debris-space length ought to correlate strongly with wear rate. Thickness and debris-space length depend on debris size and shape. Decreased debris size implies smaller wear volumes and improved transfer film tenacity (due to the same competition be- tween elastic energy and work of adhesion [8,39]). Nonetheless, wear rate measurements from this study were relatively poorly correlated to transfer film thickness and debris-space length. Results from Ye

et al. [19] help reconcile the situation. They showed that transfer films of α-phase alumina-PTFE developed through the growth and coales- cence of debris fragments deposited early in the transition from run-in to steady state; in other words, observable thickness and debris-space length at any point during steady do not necessarily reflect the size of shape of the debris. Based on their results, the two low wear samples in the study likely produced debris fragments that were far smaller than the reported debris-space length of 50 μm; based on the study from Ye et al. [18] the debris size is probably closer to 100–500 nm, in which case, the correlation between wear rate and debris size be- comes vastly improved. Nonetheless, the results suggest that the vi- sual attributes of the areas devoid of transfer film (free-space and area fraction) provide a more direct link to polymer wear rates than the visual attributes of the film itself.

5. Conclusion

1. At steady state, wear rates of the 10 polymers and polymer com- posites included in this study spanned more than four orders of magnitude under moderate speed (50mm/s) and pressure (6 MPa) conditions; the wear rate of unfilled PTFE ranked among the highest in the literature (6�10�4 mm3/Nm) and the wear rate of 30 wt% PEEK filled PTFE ranked among the lowest (4�10�8 mm3/Nm).

2. As wear rates decreased, transfer films became qualitatively thinner and better covered with domains of decreasing length- scale; these observations are consistent with those in many prior studies of the relationship between wear rate and the visual attributes of transfer films.

3. The transfer film free-space length provided the best correlation with wear rates from this study; the characteristic error be- tween the fit and the data was 3.5x. The area fraction provided similar fit quality with a characteristic error of 5.5x. By com- parison, thickness and debris-space length were poorly corre- lated with wear rate; the characteristic errors between best-fit and data were 15x and 50x, respectively.

4. The free-space length was the most reliable independent predictor of wear rates. The best-fit based on free-space length predicted wear rates from independent studies in the literature with an uncertainty of �24x. The uncertainty increased to �300x when the best-fit based on area fraction was used to predict the same wear rates.

5. To our knowledge, this is the first study to test the general re- lationships between polymer wear rates and transfer film morphology using a wide range of representative polymers and polymer composites. The results suggest that the free-space length provides the best independent measure of transfer film quality in the context of polymer wear.

Acknowledgements

The authors gratefully acknowledge financial support from the AFOSR (YIP FA9550-10-1-0295), the National Science Foundation Graduate Research Fellowship (124d7394), and the National Nat- ural Science Foundation of China (51505117). The authors also thank Dr. Jing Qu for conducting the DSC measurements for polymer thermal characterization.

References

[1] W.G. Sawyer, N. Argibay, D.L. Burris, B.A. Krick, Mechanistic studies in friction and wear of bulk materials, Annu. Rev. Mater. Res. 44 (2014) 395–427, http://dx.doi. org/10.1146/annurev-matsci-070813-113533.

[2] D.L. Burris, B. Boesl, G.R. Bourne, W.G. Sawyer, Polymeric Nanocomposites for

D.R. Haidar et al. / Wear 380-381 (2017) 78–85 85

Tribological Applications, Macromol. Mater. Eng. 292 (2007) 387–402, http://dx. doi.org/10.1002/mame.200600416.

[3] S. Bahadur, D. Tabor, The wear of filled polytetrafluoroethylene, Wear 98 (1984) 1–13, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/0043-1648(84)90213-8.

[4] E.E. Nunez, A.A. Polycarpou, The effect of surface roughness on the transfer of polymer films under unlubricated testing conditions, Wear 326–327 (2015) 74–83, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.wear.2014.12.049.

[5] V. Rodriguez, J. Sukumaran, A.K. Schlarb, P. De Baets, Reciprocating sliding wear behaviour of PEEK-based hybrid composites, Wear 362–363 (2016) 161–169, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.wear.2016.05.024.

[6] Y. Wang, F. Yan, Tribological properties of transfer films of PTFE-based com- posites, Wear 261 (2006) 1359–1366, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j. wear.2006.03.050.

[7] Y. Wang, F. Yan, A study on tribological behaviour of transfer films of PTFE/ bronze composites, Wear 262 (2007) 876–882, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j. wear.2006.08.026.

[8] J. Ye, A.C. Moore, D.L. Burris, Transfer film tenacity: a case study using ultra- low-wear alumina–PTFE, Tribol. Lett. 59 (2015) 1–11, http://dx.doi.org/ 10.1007/s11249-015-0576-4.

[9] Q. Wang, Q. Xue, H. Liu, W. Shen, J. Xu, The effect of particle size of nanometer ZrO2 on the tribological behaviour of PEEK, Wear 198 (1996) 216–219, http: //dx.doi.org/10.1016/0043-1648(96)07201-8.

[10] Q.-H. Wang, J. Xu, W. Shen, Q. Xue, The effect of nanometer SiC filler on the tribological behavior of PEEK, Wear 209 (1997) 316–321, http://dx.doi.org/ 10.1016/S0043-1648(97)00015-X.

[11] F. Li, K. Hu, J. Li, B. Zhao, The friction and wear characteristics of nanometer ZnO filled polytetrafluoroethylene, Wear. 249 (2001) 877–882, http://dx.doi. org/10.1016/S0043-1648(01)00816-X.

[12] W.G. Sawyer, K.D. Freudenberg, P. Bhimaraj, L.S. Schadler, A study on the friction and wear behavior of PTFE filled with alumina nanoparticles, Wear 254 (2003) 573–580, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S0043-1648(03)00252-7.

[13] P. Bhimaraj, D.L. Burris, J. Action, W.G. Sawyer, C.G. Toney, R.W. Siegel, L. S. Schadler, Effect of matrix morphology on the wear and friction behavior of alumina nanoparticle/poly(ethylene) terephthalate composites, Wear 258 (2005) 1437–1443, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.wear.2004.09.077.

[14] S. Bahadur, C. Sunkara, Effect of transfer film structure, composition and bonding on the tribological behavior of polyphenylene sulfide filled with nano particles of TiO2, ZnO, CuO and SiC, Wear 258 (2005) 1411–1421, http://dx.doi. org/10.1016/j.wear.2004.08.009.

[15] N.L. McCook, B. Boesl, D.L. Burris, W.G. Sawyer, Epoxy, ZnO, and PTFE nano- composite: friction and wear optimization, Tribol. Lett. 22 (2006) 253–257, http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s11249-006-9089-5.

[16] D.L. Burris, W.G. Sawyer, Tribological sensitivity of PTFE/alumina nano- composites to a range of traditional surface finishes, Tribol. Trans. 48 (2005) 147–153, http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/05698190590923842.

[17] K.A. Laux, C.J. Schwartz, Influence of linear reciprocating and multi-directional sliding on PEEK wear performance and transfer film formation, Wear (2013), http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.wear.2012.12.004.

[18] J. Ye, H.S. Khare, D.L. Burris, Transfer film evolution and its role in promoting ultra- lowwear of a PTFE nanocomposite, Wear. 297 (2013) 1095–1102, http://dx.doi.org/ 10.1016/j.wear.2012.12.002.

[19] J. Ye, H.S. Khare, D.L. Burris, Quantitative characterization of solid lubricant transfer film quality, Wear 316 (2014) 133–143, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j. wear.2014.04.017.

[20] K.A. Laux, C.J. Schwartz, Effects of contact pressure, molecular weight, and sup- plier on the wear behavior and transfer film of polyetheretherketone (PEEK), Wear 297 (2013) 919–925, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.wear.2012.11.013.

[21] B.A. Krick, A.A. Pitenis, K.L. Harris, C.P. Junk, W.G. Sawyer, S.C. Brown, H. D. Rosenfeld, D.J. Kasprzak, R.S. Johnson, C.D. Chan, G.S. Blackman, Ultralow

wear fluoropolymer composites: nanoscale functionality from microscale fil- lers, Tribol. Int. 95 (2016) 245–255, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j. triboint.2015.10.002.

[22] D.L. Burris, W.G. Sawyer, Improved wear resistance in alumina-PTFE nano- composites with irregular shaped nanoparticles, Wear 260 (2006) 915–918, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.wear.2005.06.009.

[23] S.E. McElwain, T.A. Blanchet, L.S. Schadler, W.G. Sawyer, Effect of particle size on the wear resistance of alumina-filled PTFE micro- and nanocomposites, Tribol. Trans. 51 (2008) 247–253, http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/ 10402000701730494.

[24] B.A. Krick, J.J. Ewin, G.S. Blackman, C.P. Junk, W. Gregory Sawyer, Environ- mental dependence of ultra-low wear behavior of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and alumina composites suggests tribochemical mechanisms, Tribol. Int. 51 (2012) 42–46, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.triboint.2012.02.015.

[25] A.A. Pitenis, J.J. Ewin, K.L. Harris, W.G. Sawyer, B.A. Krick, In vacuo tribological behavior of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and alumina nanocomposites: the importance of water for ultralow wear, Tribol. Lett. 53 (2014) 189–197, http: //dx.doi.org/10.1007/s11249-013-0256-1.

[26] D.L. Burris, W.G. Sawyer, A low friction and ultra low wear rate PEEK/PTFE composite, Wear 261 (2006) 410–418, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j. wear.2005.12.016.

[27] N.L. McCook, M.A. Hamilton, D.L. Burris, W.G. Sawyer, Tribological results of PEEK nanocomposites in dry sliding against 440C in various gas environments, Wear 262 (2007) 1511–1515, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.wear.2007.01.036.

[28] D.L. Burris, W.G. Sawyer, Measurement uncertainties in wear rates, Tribol. Lett. 36 (2009) 81–87, http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s11249-009-9477-8.

[29] K.R. Makinson, D. Tabor, The friction and transfer of polytetrafluoroethylene, Proc. R. Soc. Math. Phys. Eng. Sci. 281 (1964) 49–61, http://dx.doi.org/10.1098/ rspa.1964.0168.

[30] K. Tanaka, S. Kawakami, Effect of various fillers on the friction and wear of poly- tetrafluoroethylene-based composites, Wear 79 (1982) 221–234, http://dx.doi.org/ 10.1016/0043-1648(82)90170-3.

[31] T.A. Blanchet, F.E. Kennedy, Sliding wear mechanism of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and PTFE composites, Wear 153 (1992) 229–243, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/ 0043-1648(92)90271-9.

[32] J.M. Urueña, A.A. Pitenis, K.L. Harris, W.G. Sawyer, Evolution and wear of fluoropolymer transfer films, Tribol. Lett. (2015), http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/ s11249-014-0453-6.

[33] A.A. Pitenis, K.L. Harris, C.P. Junk, G.S. Blackman, W.G. Sawyer, B.A. Krick, Ul- tralow wear PTFE and alumina composites: it is all about tribochemistry, Tribol. Lett. (2015), http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s11249-014-0445-6.

[34] P. Bhimaraj, D. Burris, W.G. Sawyer, C.G. Toney, R.W. Siegel, L.S. Schadler, Tribological investigation of the effects of particle size, loading and crystal- linity on poly(ethylene) terephthalate nanocomposites, Wear 264 (2008) 632–637, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.wear.2007.05.009.

[35] G. Zhang, R. Sebastian, T. Burkhart, K. Friedrich, Role of monodispersed na- noparticles on the tribological behavior of conventional epoxy composites filled with carbon fibers and graphite lubricants, Wear 292–293 (2012) 176–187, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.wear.2012.05.012.

[36] Q. Zhao, S. Bahadur, A study of the modification of the friction and wear be- havior of polyphenylene sulfide by particulate Ag2S and PbTe fillers, Wear 217 (1998) 62–72, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S0043-1648(98)00155-0.

[37] T.A. Blanchet, S.S. Kandanur, L.S. Schadler, Coupled effect of filler content and countersurface roughness on PTFE nanocomposite wear resistance, Tribol. Lett. 40 (2010) 11–21, http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s11249-009-9519-2.

[38] S. Bahadur, D. Gong, J.W. Anderegg, The role of copper compounds as fillers in transfer film formation and wear of nylon, Wear 154 (1992) 207–223, http://dx. doi.org/10.1016/0043-1648(92)90155-2.

[39] E. Rabinowicz, Friction and Wear of Materials, Wiley, New York, 1995.

  • Assessing quantitative metrics of transfer film quality as indicators of polymer wear performance
    • Introduction
    • Material and methods
      • Materials
      • Wear rate quantification
      • Transfer film quantification
    • Results
    • Discussion
    • Conclusion
    • Acknowledgements
    • References

all articles will be uesed/effect of temp on waer of unfilled and filled liguid crystal polymers.pdf

Wear, 162-164 (1993) 656-661 656

Effect of temperature on the wear of unfilled and filled liquid crystal polymers

Yoshitaka Uchiyama and Yutaka Uezi Faculty of Technology, Kanazawa University, Kanazawa, Ishikawa 920 (Japan)

Atsushi Kudo and Takeshi Kimura Starlite Co., Ltd., Tsurumi-ku, Osaka 538 (Japan)

Abstract

The friction and wear properties of unfilled and filled liquid crystal polymers (LCPs) (polyester derived from terephthalic acid, P-hydroxybenzoic acid and P,P-biphenol) were examined in the longitudinal (L), transverse (T) and normal (N) directions of the polymer molecules. When rubbed against an abrasive paper, the wear rate of the unfilled LCP depended on the sliding direction. The maximum wear rates were observed in the T direction, the minimum wear rates in the N direction and medium wear rates in the L direction. The wear rates steeply increased above 100 “C. In the LCPs filled with graphite only, or graphite in combination with polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), the orientation was minimized but there was no minimizing effect on the wear rates. When rubbed against a chromium-plated disk at room temperature, the wear rates of the unfilled LCP were of the order of lo-’ mm3 N-’ m-l. The wear rates steeply increased above room temperature and reached a figure of the order of 10m4 mm3 N-’ m-l at 100 “C. The filled LCPs in the N direction showed very low wear rates of the order of 10e8 mm3 N-’ m-l at room temperature. However, the wear rates in the L and T directions were of the order of lo-’ mm3 N-* m-’ at room temperature. The wear rates for the graphite-filled LCP steeply increased beyond room temperature and maximum wear rates of the order of 10e5 mm3 N-’ m-l occurred at 120 “C in the temperature range examined. At 160 “C, the wear rates were much lower than those at 120 “C. The wear rates for the LCP filled with graphite in combination with PTFE also steeply increased above room temperature. However, the wear rates at temperatures from 60 to 160 “C were lower than those of the graphite-filled LCP. The friction coefficients for the filled LCPs were relatively high at room temperature but tended to decrease above 60 “C. The filled graphite and PTFE had obvious reducing effects on the wear rates at elevated temperatures.

1. Introduction

Liquid crystal polymers (LCPs) can form partially ordered solutions or melts. When they are properly processed, they are expected to produce materials with high degrees of molecular orientation and order, which should result in superior mechanical strength [l]. In particular, the thermal expansion is one order of mag- nitude less than ordinary polymers. These polymers have good heat resistance and are easily molded in fast cycles because of their high melt flow. Therefore, these polymers can be used as precise journal bearings and gears.

At room temperature, LCPs show superior wear resistance and their wear rates are lower than those of polyamide when rubbed against abrasive paper [2]. Very low specific wear rates of the order of 1O-8-1O-7 mm3 N-’ m-’ also are observed when the filled LCPs are rubbed against a chromium-plated brass disk [2]. The wear rates of LCPs tend to increase monotonously,

reaching their heat deflection temperatures. The tem- perature dependence of LCPs, such as polyester derived from 6-hydroxy-1-naphthonic acid (Vectra) and co- polyester of polyethyleneterephthelate and hydroxy- benzoic acid (Rodrun), were examined in a previous study [2]. The wear rates of the LCPs are very low at room temperature. However, they steeply increased, reaching their heat deflection temperatures. Even the wear rate of the LCP examined, which shows a rather higher heat deflection temperature of 180 “C, tends to increase above 100 “C. Therefore, the LCPs are usable as low temperature bearings but they are not suitable for higher temperature applications.

LCPs which have higher heat deflection temperature are expected to show more higher wear resistance at elevated temperature. In this study, the affect of tem- perature and orientation on the abrasive and adhesive wear of an unfilled LCP (polyester derived from ter- ephthalic acid, P-hydroxybenzoic acid and P,P-biphenol (Xydar); deflection temperature 337 “C) and LCPs filled

0043-1648/93/%6.00 0 1993 - Elsevier Sequoia. All rights reserved

I’. Uchiyama et al. / Effect of temperature on wear of LCPs 657

with graphite only, or graphite in combination with polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) are investigated. The potential of the LCPs as bearing materials is also discussed in this paper.

2. Experimental details

In our experiments, an automatic temperature-con- trol-type wear apparatus was used as reported elsewhere [3]. Two pins 2 mm in diameter are arranged to rotate against either #O/O emery paper on a chromium-plated brass disk or a chromium-plated brass disk in a circular motion with a mean diameter of 5 cm. The chromium- plated brass disk is 6 mm thick and is a good thermal conductor. It was finished by buffing using abrasives 1 pm in diameter and the center-line average roughness R, of the surface was 0.02 pm. The surface temperature is measured by a thermocouple inserted in a hole in the disk situated 3 mm below the friction track and it is automatically controlled by regulating the heater under the disk holder. The friction force and wear depth are measured simultaneously. Experiments were carried out at a load W of 4.34 N (this load gives a contact pressure p of 1.38 MPa) and various temper- atures from room temperature to 160 “C. The sliding speed adopted was 5 cm s-l or 30 cm s-’ when rubbed against #O/O emery paper or chromium-plated brass disk respectively.

The LCP specimens were made by cutting from dumb- bell-shaped specimens or bending-test specimens which were made by injection molding. Experiments were performed employing three sliding directions; namely, molecules parallel to the sliding surface but oriented normal to the sliding direction (T direction), molecules parallel to the sliding surface and oriented in the sliding direction (L direction), and molecules oriented per- pendicular to the counterface (N direction). A schematic representation of these three configurations is given in Fig. 1. The specimen codes and compositions of the LCPs examined are given in Table 1. (The supplier of specimen C (Xydar SRT500) was Amoco Performance Products, Inc.). For the experiments, specimens C/Gr and C/Gr/PTFE were molded to investigate the effect of the fillers.

Fig. 1. Three different sliding directions: T, molecules parallel to the sliding surface but perpendicular to the sliding direction; L, molecules parallel to both sliding surface and sliding direction; N, molecules perpendicular to sliding surface.

3. Results and discussion

3.1. Abrasive wear of LCP specimens Figures 2(a), 2(b) and 2(c) show the variation of the

specific wear rate and the coefficient of friction of specimens C, C/Gr and C/Gr/PTFE, respectively, with the temperature at the initial stage of rubbing. The wear rates of specimens C and C/Gr in the N direction tended to be less than those in the T and L directions. However, the effect of the orientation was not as large for specimen C/Gr/PTFE. The wear rates of specimens C, C/Gr and C/Gr/PTFE are of the order of 10e3 mm3 N-’ m-’ at room temperature. It is interesting to note that these wear rates are about one order of magnitude less than those of Nylon 6 and high density polyethylene

PI. The frictional coefficients in the N direction for

specimen C/Gr tended to be larger than those in the T and L directions. However, for specimens C and C/ Gr/PTFE the friction coefficients in the N direction were comparable with those in the L direction.

With an increase in temperature, the wear rates for specimen C in all three directions increased and showed a peak around 60 “C (Fig. 2(a)) and then decreased to reach a minimum at around 80 “C. After this, the wear rate steeply increased with an increase in tem- perature and reached higher values. It is known that abrasive wear rates of polymers exhibit a minimum at around the polymer glass transition temperatures [4]. The variation in the wear rates for these LCPs resembles the results for polymethyl methacrylate [4] and other LCPs [2]. The thermal properties of specimen C were examined by thermal analysis. A distinguishable tran- sition was not observed in the temperature range from 50 to 80 “C. However, a weak sign of a glass transition was reported at around 50 “C in the previous research [5]. Therefore, the minimum wear rate for specimen C may arise from the transition.

The effect of the molecular orientation was not as noticeable for specimen C/Gr filled with graphite and specimen C/Gr/PTFE filled with graphite and PTFE compared with unfilled specimen C. The trend seems to arise from the decrease in their orientation, similar to the case of Vectra (Polyplastics Co., Ltd., Technical Information, No. 4M, 2nd (l-2) PA), upon adding the fillers. As shown in Figs. 2(b) and 2(c), the specific wear rates of the filled LCPs tend to lose their dis- tinguishable peaks and minima which were identified for specimen C.

For steady state rubbing, the coefficient of friction and specific wear rate of specimens C, C/Gr and C/ Gr/PTFE are shown in Figs. 3(a), 3(b) and 3(c) re- spectively. Below 100 “C, the wear rates under steady state rubbing were about a factor of five less than those at the initial stage of rubbing.

658 Y. lJch&ama et al. I Effect of temperature on wear of LCPs

TABLE 1. Specimen codes and compositions of the liquid crystal polymers

Specimen code

Base polymer Filler (wt.%) Deflection temperature under load (1.82 MPa) (“C)

Remarks

C Polyester derived from terephthalic acid, P-hydroxybenzoic acid and P,P-biphenol

None 337 Xydar SRTJOO

C/Gr Polyester derived from terephthalic acid, P-hydroxybenzoic acid and P,P-biphenol

Graphite 25 - Experimental

C/Gr/PTFE Polyester derived from terephthalic acid, P-hydroxybenzoic acid and P,P-biphenol

Graphite 15 +pTFE10

Experimental

(b) C/Or

Fig. 2. Variation of the coefficient of friction and specific wear Fig. 3. Variation of the coefficient of friction and specific wear

rate for specimens (a) C, (b) C/Gr and (c) C/Gr/PTFE with rate for specimens (a) C, (b) C/Gr and (c) C/Gr/PTFE with

temperature at the initial stage of rubbing. LCP pin 2 mm in temperature at the steady state of rubbing. LCP pin 2 mm in

diameter; mating surface #O/O emety paper; W=4.34 N @ = 1.38 diameter; mating surface #O/O emery paper; W= 4.34 N @ = 1.38

MPa); u =5 cm s-r. MPa); v=5 cm s-‘.

As shown in Fig. 3(a), the wear rate of unfilled specimen C in each sliding direction increased mo- notonously with an increase in temperature. The wear rate in the N direction was less than those in the T and L directions. At room temperature the maximum rate was observed in the T direction, whereas a medium

(b) C/Gr

‘A__ ‘O 0 20 LO 60 80 100 120 KO 160

TWlQWdLT~.‘C

(c) CIGrIPTFE

wear rate was obtained in the L direction. However, above 80 “C there was no difference between the wear rates in the T and L directions. The coefficient of friction increased with increasing temperature from room temperature to 80 “C. At 160 “C the coefficient of friction decreased only in the T direction.

Y. Uchiyama et al. / Effect of temperature on wear of LCPs 659

The coefficients of friction and specific wear rates for specimens C/Gr and C/Gr/PTFE have a tendency to be slightly affected by the orientation. Their wear rates were at their minimum in the N direction. At high temperature from 120 to 160 “C the wear resistance also was improved when the LCP was filled with graphite only or graphite with PTFE. As shown in Fig. 3(c), the coefficient of friction for specimen C/Gr/PTFE was about 0.5 in the temperature range examined.

On the worn surfaces of specimen C, fine scratch scars were found. However, small protuberances were observed on the worn surface rubbed only in the N direction. These protuberances seem to be the projected polymer molecules normal to the worn surface.

3.2. Friction and wear of LCPs rubbed against chromium-plated brass

3.2.1. Effect of temperature on fiction and wear of LCPS Figure 4 shows the variations of the coefficients of

friction and wear rates of the LCPs with temperature

lo.‘1 0 20 40 60 so 10012014016c

Temperature ‘C

(a) c

/

1

1

0. 0 0. 0.

0

Terrperatm'C (b) C/Gr

Terrpmtue,'C

(c) CIGVPTFE

Fig. 4. Variation of the coefficient of friction and specific wear rate for specimens (a) C, (b) UGr and (c) C/Gr/PTFE with temperature at the steady state of rubbing. LCP pin 2 mm in diameter; mating surface chromium-plated brass; W=4.34 N @=1.38 MPa); v=30 cm s-l.

when rubbed against a chromium-plated brass disk. The heat deflection temperature for specimen C is 337 “C. Nevertheless, the specific wear rates increased steeply above 80 “C, as shown in Fig. 4(a). The coefficient of friction in the T and L directions tended to decrease with increasing temperature. However, the coefficient of friction in the N direction was lower than those in the T and L directions below 60 “C. Above 100 “C the highest coefficient of friction was observed in the N direction.

Figures 4(b) and 4(c) show the variations of the coefficients of friction and the specific wear rates for specimens C/Gr and C/Gr/PTFE with temperature re- spectively. The specific wear rate of specimen C/Gr/ PTFE was about one order of magnitude less than that of unfilled specimen C in three sliding directions at room temperature. A specific wear rate of the order of lo-* mm3 N-’ m-l also was experienced for spec- imens C/Gr and C/Gr/PTFE in the N direction. The specific wear rates for specimens C/Gr and C/Gr/PTFE increased steeply in the range from room temperature to 60 “C. However, the increment in the specific wear rates was moderate from 60 to 80 “C. The specific wear rate of lop5 mm3 N-l m-l was observed in the three sliding directions at 80 “C for specimen C/Gr and at 120 “C for specimen C/Gr/PTFE.

The coefficients of friction for specimens C/Gr and C/Gr/PTFE were higher than those for unfilled specimen C at room temperature. However, it is interesting to note that the coefficients of friction decreased with increasing temperature in the three sliding directions above room temperature.

As shown in Fig. 4(c), PTFE was effective in reducing the coefficient of friction and the specific wear rate of specimen C/Gr/PTFE, as reported previously [6]. Fur- thermore, these fillers have a minimizing effect on the orientation, and differences in the wear rates and friction coefficients in the three sliding directions were small.

In this way, the wear resistance of specimen C was improved at elevated temperatures around 100 “C when adding PTFE together with graphite.

3.2.2. Transferred films on the mating surfaces Figure 5 shows the chromium-plated brass mating

disks which were rubbed by a pin of unfilled specimen C in the sliding direction N at various temperatures. On the mating surfaces, thin transferred films were observed from room temperature to 160 “C.

When the C/Gr pin was rubbed against the chromium- plated disk in the L direction, thin transferred films also were observed on the mating surfaces at room temperature. At 60 “C small fragments also were ob- served on the thin films, while at 80 “C lumps and thick films appeared on the mating surfaces. On in-

660 Y. Uchiyama et al. I Effect of temperature on wear of LCPs

(a) Room temperature f

(c) 80 % 2

(b) 60 %

(e) 120 %

f (f) 160 %

2 Pin 100pm -I

Fig. 5. Rubbing surfaces of a chromium-plated brass disk when rubbed against the specimen C pin in the sliding direction N from room temperature to 160 “C.

creasing the temperature, thick films tended to cover all the mating surfaces.

When the C/Gr/PTFE pin was rubbed against the mating disk in the L direction, thin transferred films were observed at room temperature, as shown in Fig. 6(a). In the temperature range from 60 to 100 “C relatively thick films were observed together with the thin films (Figs. 6(b), 6(c) and 6(d)). At 120 and 160 “C thick films were lengthened in the sliding direction, as shown in Figs. 6(e) and 6(f).

From the observation of the mating surfaces, specimen C has the potential to form uniform films on the mating surfaces. When specimen C was filled with graphite, uniform thin films were observed, even at 60 “C. When specimen C was filled with graphite together with PTFE, uniform thin films were observed at higher temperature of 100 “C. When the uniform thin films were seen on the mating surfaces, the wear rates of the filled LCPs were less than 10e5 mm3 N-’ m-‘. Also, when thick films appeared on the mating surfaces at elevated temperature, the wear rates tended to increase.

(a) Room temperature 1

(e) 120 % (f) 160 ‘C

Fig. 6. Rubbing surfaces of a cli~otiium-plated brass disk when rubbed against the specimen C/Gr/PTFE pin in the sliding direction L from room temperature to 160 “C.

4. Conclusions

Unfilled and filled LCPs (polyester derived from terephthalic acid, P-hydroxybenzoic acid and P,P-bi- phenol) were rubbed against emery paper or chromium- plated disks to examine their abrasive and adhesive wear properties. The friction and wear properties were examined in the L, T and N directions to the polymer molecules. The effect of the temperature and fillers, such as graphite or graphite in combination with PTFE, on the friction and wear properties also were inves- tigated. From the results, the following conclusions were drawn.

(1) When rubbed against emery paper at room tem- perature, the unfilled and filled LCPs showed specific wear rates of the order of lop3 mm3 N-’ m-l and 10e4 mm3 N-’ m-l at the initial stage and steady state of rubbing respectively. The wear rates are lower than those of Nylon 6 and HDPE. In general, the maximum abrasive wear rates tended to be observed in the T

Y Uchjama et al. I Effect of temperature on wear of LCPs 661

direction, because of easy cutting and detachment of the LCP molecules. The wear rates in the N direction were half the’ value of those in the T direction. The wear rates in the L direction were slightly lower than those in the T direction.

The unfilled and filled LCPs also showed very low wear rates of the order of 10-8-10-6 mm3 N-’ m-’ at the steady state of rubbing when rubbed against chromium-plated brass disks at room temperature. In particular the lowest wear rates were observed in the N direction.

The effect of the orientation of the filled LCPs on the abrasive and adhesive wear was not large compared with the effect of the unfilled LCP. This tendency seems to come from the decrease in their orientation upon adding the fillers.

(2) The abrasive wear rates of the LCPs tended to increase with increasing temperature. At the initial stage of rubbing, the minimum wear rates were observed at around 80 “C. However, at the steady state of rubbing, the minimum was not observed and the wear rates steeply increased above 100 “C. The increment in the wear rates was gentle when the fillers were added in the LCP. Furthermore, the increment in the wear rates was not as steep as those for other LCPs, which showed lower heat deflection temperatures.

When rubbed against chromium-plated disks, the wear rates of the unfilled LCP steeply increased with increasing temperature from room temperature to 100 “C. The wear rate of the filled LCPs also steeply increased from room temperature to 60 “C. However,

the increment was moderate from 60 to 80 “C. Graphite had the effect of minimizing the wear rate below 100 “C. Assuming that plastic bearings are usable below a specific wear rate of 10e5 mm3 N-l m-l, the tem- perature limits for specimens C, C/Gr and C/Gr/PTFE are 60 “C, 80 “C and 100 “C respectively. When filled with graphite together with PTFE, obvious effects on the reduction of the wear rates occurred at elevated temperature. These low wear rates were realized when uniform transferred the mating surfaces.

thin films could be observed on

Acknowledgments

The authors are indebted to M. Takeuchi, R. Sugimoto and A. Morimoto for their assistance in the experiments. Thanks are extended to Starlite Co., Ltd. for manu- facturing the LCP specimens.

References

1 J.-I. Jin, S. Antoun, C. Ober and R. W. Lenz, Br. Polym. J., 12 (December 1980) 132.

2 Y. Uchiyama, T. Ogawa, Y. Uezi, A. Kudo and T. Kimura, Proc. Jpn. Int. ConjI, Nagoya, 1990, p. 1359.

3 Y. Uchiyama and K. Tanaka, Wear, 58 (1980) 223. 4 S. B. Ratner, I. I. Faberova, 0. V. Radyukevich and E. G.

Lur’e, Abrasion of Rubber, MacLaren, 1967, p. 145. 5 N. Koide, Plastics, 37 (3) (1986) 86 (in Japanese). 6 Y. Uchiyama, Y. Yamada and H. Miura: J. JSLE Int. Ed.,

10 (1985) 5, 11.

all articles will be uesed/Effect of transfer film structure.pdf

Wear 258 (2005) 1411–1421

Effect of transfer film structure, composition and bonding on the tribological behavior of polyphenylene sulfide filled with nano

particles of TiO2, ZnO, CuO and SiC

S. Bahadur∗, C. Sunkara Mechanical Engineering Department, Iowa State University, Ames, IA 50011, USA

Received 5 February 2004; accepted 5 August 2004 Available online 8 December 2004

Abstract

The tribological behavior of polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) filled with inorganic nano particles was studied. The fillers investigated were TiO2, ZnO, CuO and SiC whose sizes varied from 30 to 50 nm. The polymer composites were compression molded with varying proportions of these fillers. Wear and friction tests were performed in a pin-on-disk configuration at a sliding speed of 1.0 m/s, nominal pressure of 0.65 MPa, a r films of t ectroscopy ( the wear rate o nce was o e wear b s observed f esistance. ©

K

1

s a s c p n c e p s

ical oly- the

rial uld

icro

any d are r ad-

per- ngth r mild ear

ence

0 d

nd counterface roughness of 0.10�m Ra. The polymer composite pins slid against hardened tool steel counterfaces. The transfe he composite materials formed on the counterfaces during sliding were studied by optical microscopy and X-ray photoelectron sp XPS) and the adhesion between the transfer film and counterface was measured in terms of the peel strength. It was found that f PPS decreased when TiO2 and CuO were used as the fillers but increased with ZnO and SiC fillers. The optimum wear resista btained with 2 vol.% CuO or TiO2. These filled composites had the coefficients of friction lower than that of the unfilled PPS. Th ehavior of the composites is explained in terms of the topography of transfer film and adhesion of transfer film to the counterface a

rom peel strength studies. There is a good correlation observed between the transfer film–counterface bond strength and wear r 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved.

eywords: Friction; Wear; Transfer film; Bonding; Polyphenylene sulfide; XPS analysis

. Introduction

The incorporation of fillers into a polymer matrix has hown tremendous promise in increasing longevity and chieving the desired mix of tribological properties in dry liding. It is also attractive from processing consideration be- ause the same processing methods as applicable to unfilled olymers can be used for filled polymers as well. A large umber of tribological studies have been performed with mi- ro filler particles. Nano particles have been reported[1] to xhibit properties different from their microscale counter- arts. Since they have higher percentages of atoms on their urfaces, they are expected to be more active. In view of

∗ Corresponding author. Tel. +1 515 294 7658; fax: +1 515 294 3261. E-mail address:bahadur@iastate.edu (S. Bahadur).

this, they would be expected to provide different tribolog properties, hopefully beneficial. The wear resistance of p mer composites filled with micro particles depends on modification of transfer film by the particulate filler mate [2,3]. Because of their high reactivity, nano particles sho influence the transfer film more proactively than the m particles.

The studies have indicated that micro fillers improve m physical and some mechanical properties of polymers an usually beneficial in increasing the wear resistance unde hesive wear conditions. Sole and Ball[4] indicated that rigid fillers have a positive influence on stiffness and creep formance but exhibit a deleterious effect on tensile stre and ductility. These researchers also observed that unde wear, where the applied load per particle was low, the w behavior of filled polypropylene showed some depend on the size and shape of the filler particles.

043-1648/$ – see front matter © 2004 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved. oi:10.1016/j.wear.2004.08.009

1412 S. Bahadur, C. Sunkara / Wear 258 (2005) 1411–1421

Bahadur and coworkers[3,5–7] extensively investigated the actions of various microscale fillers on the modification of friction and wear behaviors of filled polytetrafluoroethy- lene, high-density polyethylene, polyamide, polyester, PEEK and polyphenylene sulfide (PPS). From the X-ray photoelec- tron spectroscopy (XPS), EDXA, AES and SIMS analyses of transfer films, they concluded that in case of wear reduction the filler decomposed and formed the reaction products by interaction between the composite and Fe in the steel coun- terface. On the other hand, when wear increased with the addition of filler to polymer; no decomposition of the filler was detected. In addition to this, the filler that decreased wear rate promoted the development of a thin and uniform transfer film.

Using microscale inorganic fillers, Bahadur et al.[8–13] found that wear was considerably reduced by the addition of CuO and CuS to PTFE, CuS, CuF2, CaO and PbS to nylon 11, and CuO, CuS and CuF2 to PEEK. Contrary to the above observations, they also found that wear rate increased when the polymers were filled with particulate materials such as BaF2, CaF2, ZnF2, SnF2, ZnS, SnS, ZnO and SnO[11,12,14]. Briscoe et al.[15] reported considerable reduction in the wear rate of high-density polyethylene (HDPE) and PTFE by the addition of PbO and CuO fillers. Tanaka[16] reported that ZrO2 and TiO2 micro particles were very effective in reducing t

with n t al. [ r ticle s es of S ear o bove o a be- h nd t O n e t t when t her p ch a b to t ansfe fi

ided t ano p ork.

2

2

and T id- e and

nylon composites made with microsized CuO and ZnO fillers were available and so could be used for comparison with the composites made with nano fillers. The other two fillers, SiC and TiO2, were used because of their high hardness. They would not be suitable fillers in microsize because of the abra- sive behavior due to their high hardness and angularity. They were considered to be suitable in nanosize because angularity decreases significantly with the decrease in particle size and so their ability to abrade the counterface would be greatly diminished.

The filled composite specimens were compression molded using PPS powder in 100�m size. The polymer was dried at 150◦C for 5 h. The polymer powder and the filler were blended mechanically. The mixture was placed in a die and subjected to a pressure of 38 MPa in a hydraulic press. The temperature of the mixture was increased to 310◦C and main- tained at that level for half an hour. This melted the polymer and so the pressure dropped to 10 MPa. The pressure was then again increased to 18 MPa and the mold was cooled slowly to room temperature. The size of the molded composite slabs was approximately 35 mm× 35 mm× 8 mm.

From the molded slab, rectangular pins of size 5 mm× 6 mm in cross-section and 25 mm long were cut and used as the specimens for wear and friction tests. Before test- ing, the pins were abraded against a 320-grade emery paper m o en- s faces d

m t s oil h then g mery p d o ainst 3

disk w tone. T

2

p were s end- t m/s u load r ngth. E lue of fl ngth f

2

ma- c d si- m tical

he wear rate of PTFE. There are some observations that have been made

ano particle filled polymer composites as well. Wang e 17] reported that the nano particles of ZrO2 was effective in educing the wear rate of filled PEEK only when the par ize was below 15 nm. They also found that nano particl i3N4 were also effective in reducing the friction and w f PEEK[18]. These researchers merely reported the a bservations but did not investigate the reasons for such avior. Shi et al.[19] reported reduction in both wear rate a

he coefficient of friction of epoxy with the addition of Zn ano particles. Schwartz and Bahadur[20] investigated th

ribological behavior of PPS filled with nanoscale Al2O3 par- icles. They found that the wear rate of PPS decreased he filler content was 1–2 vol.% but increased with hig roportions of it. They investigated the reasons for su ehavior and attributed it to the bonding of transfer film

he counterface, based on the measurements of the tr lm–counterface bond strengths.

In order to develop further understanding, it was dec o investigate the tribological behavior of PPS filled with n articles of SiC and the oxides of Ti, Cu, and Zn in this w

. Experimental details

.1. Material selection and specimen preparation

The fillers used in this study were CuO, ZnO, SiC iO2. They were selected in view of the following cons rations. The data on the tribological behavior of PEEK

r

ounted on a rotating flat disk surface. This was done t ure a better contact between the pin and the disk sur uring sliding.

For the counterface, a tool steel (AISI 02) disk of 5 m hickness and 75 mm diameter was used. The disk wa ardened and tempered to a hardness of 58 RC. It was round and polished by abrasion against 320-grade e aper to a surface roughness of about 0.100�m Ra. At the en f a sliding test, the disk was refinished by abrasion ag 20-grade emery paper for use in a subsequent test.

After the above finishing operations, the pin and the ere cleaned with soap and water, and flushed with ace he pin was also dried by storage in a desiccator.

.2. Flexure testing

Test specimens of the size 40 mm× 7 mm× 6 mm were repared from the molded slabs for bend tests. They upported at two points 25 mm apart in a three-point b est fixture and loaded at the midpoint at the rate of 0.42 m ntil fracture of the specimen occurred. The maximum ecorded in the test was used to calculate flexure stre ach test was repeated three times and the mean va exure strength is reported. The variation in flexure stre rom test to test was about 5%.

.3. Friction and wear testing

Sliding experiments were performed in a pin-on-disk hine with four stations so that multiple specimens coul ultaneously be tested for friction and wear under iden

S. Bahadur, C. Sunkara / Wear 258 (2005) 1411–1421 1413

conditions. The disk counterface rotated at 296 rpm, which re- sulted in a sliding speed of 1.0 m/s in the wear track. The poly- mer pin was loaded with 19.6 N so that the normal pressure on the 6 mm× 7 mm contact surface of pin was 0.65 MPa. It was held in a specimen holder secured to a loading arm. Friction force was measured in terms of the output of strain gages mounted on the loading arm. Wear loss was measured by weighing the pin at regular intervals in a precision balance to an accuracy of 10−5 g. For each test condition, a minimum of three specimens were tested and the mean data are plot- ted. The variation in wear from specimen to specimen was about 5–10%. The steady-state wear rate was calculated from the slope of the steady-state portion of the wear loss versus sliding distance curve.

2.4. Transfer film

The micrographs of the transfer films formed on steel counterfaces were obtained by optical microscopy. XPS anal- ysis was done to study the chemical reactions, if any, be- tween the transfer film and the counterface. It was performed in an AEI ES 200 electron spectrometer where the excita- tion source was Mg K� radiation (withhv= 1253.6 eV). The spectrometer was calibrated to give Cu(2p3/2) at 932.6 eV and Au(4f7/2) at 84.0 eV. The positions of the XPS peaks w car- b eV. T racy o

into a slid- i The t disk f re- v heet a tests s sim-

ilar. Therefore, we can reasonably assume that the XPS re- sults from the thin sheets are representative of the original tests.

2.5. Transfer film bond strength measurement

The tangential shear stress needed to peel the transfer film from the counterface was measured using a setup described elsewhere[20]. The setup for measuring the transfer film bond strength uses a thin, square copper tab of dimensions 3.2 mm× 3.2 mm, which was soldered to a copper strip. The free end of the strip was connected to a strain gauge load cell prior to loading. The regions with continuous transfer film on the wear track were identified by an optical microscope. The flat 3.2 mm× 3.2 mm surface of the tab was attached to one such region using a quick-setting cyanoacrylate adhesive. For this purpose, the disk surface was wetted with isopropyl alcohol, which acted as a catalyst and a thin layer of adhesive was applied to the tab. The tab was then positioned on a location of continuous transfer film and light pressure was applied for 30 s. The curing time for the adhesive was 5 min. The counterface disk with the tab attached was held rigidly in a tensile testing machine. The tab was pulled parallel to the plane of the disk at the cross-head speed of 0.42 mm/s and the maximum load was recorded. This provided a measure of the f ence t was t e was m ured v f the a scope t the t s no a bility o the e eeling o rea.

T S compo

F ady-st n

N 4

C 3 8 1 6

T 2 2 5 6

Z 2 9 3

S 8 0

ere determined with reference to the contaminated on peak (referred to as the C(ls) peak) at 284.8 he binding energies were measured with an accu f 0.2 eV.

Since the steel disks were too big to be admitted n XPS chamber, thinner steel sheets were used in

ng tests to get the transfer films for XPS analysis. hin sheet was mounted directly over the thick steel or sliding test. Optical examination of transfer films ealed that the film topographies on both the thin s nd the thick disk were basically the same. Wear howed that the wear behavior in both cases was also

able 1 teady-state wear rates and the coefficients of friction of PPS and its

iller Filler proportion (vol.%) Ste

o filler 0 0.32

uO 1 0.08 2 0.07 3 0.16

10 0.19

iO2 1 0.27 2 0.16 3 0.44 5 0.72

nO 1 0.92 2 1.08 5 1.56

iC 2 0.62 5 0.98

orce needed to peel the transfer film from the disk and h he bond strength. The area of the peeled transfer film hen measured. Since the shear strength of the adhesiv uch greater than that of the transfer film bond, the meas

alue of the shear force was not affected by the strength o dhesive. The peeled area was also examined in a micro

o ensure that there were no remnants of transfer film in ested area. Furthermore, it was verified that there wa dhesive on the counterface. This eliminated the possi f bonding directly between a portion of the tab area and xposed counterface surface. It was also ensured that p f the transfer film did not occur from outside the tab a

sites filled with different proportions of nano particles of filler materials

ate wear rate (mm3/km) Steady-state coefficient of frictio

0.43

0.41 0.39 0.37 0.34

0.35 0.37 0.45 0.49

0.39 0.42 0.46

0.41 0.47

1414 S. Bahadur, C. Sunkara / Wear 258 (2005) 1411–1421

The data was rejected if error from any of the above sources was suspected.

3. Results and discussion

3.1. Wear

Sliding tests were performed on PPS and its composites made with nanoscale TiO2, CuO, SiC and ZnO fillers. In order to investigate the effect of filler proportion on wear, varying proportions of the fillers were used. The wear loss versus sliding distance curves were plotted and are shown inFig. 1. Fig. 1(a) shows the wear loss versus sliding distance curves for PPS and its composites made with 1–10 vol.% nanoscale

CuO fillers. The curves exhibit two states, the first one being the transient state where wear rate is high, and another steady state where wear rate is much lower. With the addition of CuO filler, steady-state wear rate decreased. As seen fromTable 1, steady-state wear rate was the lowest for PPS with 1–2 vol.% filler proportion. With 3 vol.% filler the wear rate became twice that of 1 vol.% filler, and with 10 vol.% filler it became ever higher.

The wear behavior of PPS with nanosized TiO2 filler is shown inFig. 1(b). In this case, there was a significant re- duction in steady-state wear rate with 2 vol.% TiO2 and the reduction with 1 vol.% TiO2 was smaller, as seen inTable 1. With the increase in filler content to 3 vol.%, the wear rate obtained was higher than that of the unfilled PPS, and with further increase in the filler content it increased even more.

F 0

ig. 1. Wear loss vs. sliding distance plots for PPS filled with nano particles o .65 MPa pressure, 0.10�m counterface roughness.

f (a) CuO, (b) TiO2, (c) ZnO and (d) SiC. Sliding conditions: 1 m/s sliding speed,

S. Bahadur, C. Sunkara / Wear 258 (2005) 1411–1421 1415

Contrary to the above two cases, nanoscale ZnO and SiC fillers increased the wear rate of PPS considerably as shown in Fig. 1(c and d). With ZnO filler wear loss increased almost linearly with sliding distance throughout the entire period of sliding. This indicates that the conditions favorable for a transition from transient state to steady-state wear did not develop. With nanoscale SiC as the filler, transient state was exhibited but the steady-state wear rate obtained was much higher than that of the unfilled PPS. The wear rate values for these two fillers are also given inTable 1.

3.2. Friction

Fig. 2shows plots of the coefficient of friction versus slid- ing distance for varying proportions of the above fillers. From Fig. 2(a), it is seen that for all the proportions of CuO, the

coefficient of friction started with a low value but increased gradually to a higher steady-state value. The coefficient of friction was lower for any filled composition than that for the unfilled PPS. The higher the proportion of CuO, the lower was the steady-state coefficient of friction, as seen fromTable 1. The coefficient of friction decreased from 0.43 in the case of unfilled PPS to 0.34 with 10 vol.% CuO. The steady-state coefficient of friction for 2 vol.% TiO2 was lower than that of the unfilled PPS but higher for 3 and 5 vol.% TiO2 (Fig. 2(b)). The coefficient of friction plots for ZnO and SiC were also of the same type as for CuO and TiO2 in terms of the coefficient of friction values in transient and steady states, as seen in Fig. 2(c and d). The steady-state coefficient of friction values were about equal or lower than that of the unfilled PPS for up to 2 vol.% of ZnO and SiC but greater for higher filler contents (Table 1).

F F

ig. 2. Coefficient of friction vs. sliding distance for PPS filled with nano par ig. 1.

ticles of (a) CuO, (b) TiO2, (c) ZnO and (d) SiC. Sliding conditions same as in

1416 S. Bahadur, C. Sunkara / Wear 258 (2005) 1411–1421

Fig. 3. Flexure strength of PPS composites filled with varying proportions of nano fillers.

3.3. Effect of filler on strength

The effect of filler on the composites in terms of me- chanical strengthening was investigated by flexure tests. The flexure strength data provided an indication of bonding of the filler particles to the polymer as well as overall mechanical strengthening, if any.Fig. 3 gives the flexure strengths of PPS composites filled with varying proportions of nanoscale TiO2, CuO, ZnO and SiC fillers. In all the

cases, flexure strength decreases initially because of the weakening introduced from the presence of a heterogeneous phase but increases with higher proportions of the filler due to mechanical strengthening from the presence of a harder phase. For the fillers TiO2 and CuO, the minimum in flexure strength is observed for 1 and 2 vol.% proportions, respec- tively. These filler proportions correspond to the wear rates which were the lower than that of the unfilled PPS (Table 1). This indicates that mechanical strength is not the main factor governing the wear behavior. Instead, there are other factors such as the transfer film development and its bonding to the counterface (discussed below) that affect the wear process.

3.4. Transfer film

It is well known that the transfer film formed on a coun- terface during sliding plays an important role in the tribo- logical behavior of polymers. As such the transfer films for different sliding pairs were studied. The transfer film of unfilled PPS developed well during sliding, as seen in Fig. 4(a). The transfer film coverage is good and it appears to be thick and grainy. The examination of the film at higher magnification showed small pores in discrete locations on the wear track. This raised the possibility that some uncov- e with t g to h

had f PS. F PPS fi be s and m PS. T ilar. W ame n tely. T unt of fi ng s is for P was e

nd 5 est w n w een i case w t and i A this c

was fi ses a t

red counterface surface was coming in direct contact he softer polymer surface during sliding and contributin igh wear.

The transfer film of PPS filled with nanoscale CuO eatures that were different from those of the unfilled P ig. 4(b and c) show the steady-state transfer films of lled with 2 and 10 vol.% of CuO, respectively. It can een that the transfer film for 2 vol.% CuO is thinner ore uniform that the transfer film formed with unfilled P he transfer films for 1 and 3 vol.% CuO were also sim hen CuO vol.% increased to 10%, the transfer film bec

on-uniform and it did not cover the counterface comple hus, it so appears that the presence of an excess amo ller hinders the formation of a uniform transfer film. Duri liding tests, it was observed that the size of wear debr PS filled with 1 and 2 vol.% CuO was very fine, and it ver finer than for the unfilled PPS.

Fig. 5 shows the transfer films for PPS filled with 2 a vol.% TiO2 which correspond to the lowest and high ear rates, respectively (Table 1). When the filler proportio as 2 vol.%, the transfer film was thin and uniform, as s

n Fig. 5(a). The size of the wear debris produced in this as also very small. With the increase in TiO2 proportion

o 5 vol.%, the transfer film became thick and lumpy, t also did not cover the counterface completely (Fig. 5(b)). s a result of this, wear rate increased considerably for omposition and exceeded that of the unfilled PPS.

As indicated earlier, wear rate increased when PPS lled with ZnO or SiC. The transfer films for these two ca re shown inFig. 6. The transfer film inFig. 6(a) is similar

o that of unfilled PPS, and inFig. 6(b) it is thick and lacks in

S. Bahadur, C. Sunkara / Wear 258 (2005) 1411–1421 1417

Fig. 4. Optical micrographs of transfer films formed during sliding on steel counterface for (a) unfilled PPS, (b) PPS filled with 2 vol.% CuO and (c) 10 vol.% CuO. Arrow shows sliding direction.

covering the counterface in some locations. As opposed to the small and equiaxed wear particles generated in the cases of CuO and TiO2, the wear particles in the cases of ZnO and SiC were in the form of large and elongated fragments. The latter were generated by bulk peeling of the transfer film from the counterface. Thus, the cause for high wear rate in these cases was the lack of adhesion of transfer film to the counterface.

3.5. Bonding strengths of transfer films

Fig. 7 shows the comparison of transfer film bond strengths for PPS and its composites filled with varying pro-

Fig. 5. Optical micrographs of transfer films formed during sliding on steel counterface for PPS filled with (a) 2 vol.% TiO2 and (b) 5 vol.% TiO2. Arrow shows sliding direction.

portions of the nano particles of fillers. The bond strengths were measured in terms of the tangential shear stress needed to strip the transfer film from the counterface, as described in the experimental section. From Fig.7(a), it is seen that in- creased bonding is achieved by the addition of CuO to PPS. The increased bonding obviously made it more difficult for separation of the transfer film from the wear track during slid- ing which helped to reduce wear in two ways: by virtue of the reduced loss of transfer film, and by providing good coverage over the counterface asperities. With CuO proportions higher than 2 vol.%, the bond strengths decreased and so did the wear resistance.

Fig. 7(b) provides the bond strength comparison for PPS filled with varying proportions ofTiO2. It is seen that in- creased bonding is achieved by the addition of 1 and 2 vol.% TiO2 to PPS. With further increases in TiO2 proportion, the bond strength decreased even below that of the unfilled PPS. The wear resistance followed the pattern of the bond strength (Table 1).

It is seen fromFig. 7(c and d) that for PPS composites with any proportion of ZnO or SiC the bond strength was lower than that of the unfilled PPS. The wear rates in these cases were also higher.

1418 S. Bahadur, C. Sunkara / Wear 258 (2005) 1411–1421

Fig. 6. Optical micrographs of transfer films formed during sliding on steel counterface for PPS filled with (a) 2 vol.% ZnO and (b) 5 vol.% SiC. Arrow shows sliding direction.

3.6. XPS analysis of transfer films

The transfer films of the composites with 2 vol.% each of CuO, TiO2 and ZnO were analyzed by XPS. All of the sam- ples used in XPS analyses were from the steady-state wear portion corresponding to 20 km sliding. In order to detect the possible chemical changes close to the interface between transfer film and steel substrate, the top layer of the transfer film was gently removed with a razor blade prior to analysis. The compositions were identified with the help of the data in XPS handbook[21].

The identified compositions along with their binding en- ergies in the XPS spectra of the transfer film of PPS filled with 2 vol.% CuO are listed inTable 2. From these results, it is found that some chemical reactions occurred during slid- ing. These include the reactions of the counterface metal Fe with PPS and the filler CuO in the composite. FeSO4 is the product of reaction between the counterface element Fe and the S in PPS. Fe2O3 is the product of reaction between the counterface metal Fe and the filler CuO in the composite. Such a reaction would be expected to produce elemental Cu. Because of the close binding energies, it is difficult to tell elemental Cu apart from Cu in Cu2O in the Cu(2p) spectrum, as the binding energy for both Cu and Cu2O listed in the XPS

handbook is 929.8 eV. It is, however, perceived that elemental Cu was most likely present as a result of the chemical reaction between CuO and Fe because earlier studies of the transfer films with copper compounds formed in sliding against a steel counterface have reported the presence of elemental Cu [9,22].

The identified compositions in the XPS spectra of the transfer film of PPS filled with 2 vol.% TiO2 are listed in Table 3. The results here are similar to those obtained in the case of PPS filled with CuO. From these results, it is found that counterface metal Fe reacted with TiO2 to produce Fe2O3 and Ti. Fe in the counterface also reacted with PPS to give FeSO4.

The identified compositions in the XPS spectra of the transfer film of PPS filled with 2 vol.% ZnO are listed in Table 4. Here, unlike the cases of CuO and TiO2, no reduced Zn was detected. This shows that ZnO did not decompose

Table 2 Identified compositions in the XPS spectra of the transfer film of 2 vol.% CuO-filled PPS

Binding energies of peaks (eV)

Compositions C(ls) O(ls) S(2p) Fe (2p) Cu(2p)

Contaminated C 284.8 C in PPS 284.8 S F F F C C C

T I ol.% T

B

C p)

C C S F F T

Table 4 Identified compositions in the XPS spectra of the transfer film of 2 vol.% ZnO-filled PPS

Binding energies of peaks (eV)

Compositions C(ls) O(ls) S(2p) Fe (2p) Zn

Contaminated C 284.8 C in PPS 284.8 S in PPS 163.7 Fe 707.0 Fe2O3 530.2 710.9 ZnO 530.4 1021.8

in PPS 163.7 e 707.0 eSO4 532.4 168.8 712.1 e2O3 530.2 710.9 u, Cu2O 529.8 929.8 uO 526.8 932.3 u(OH)2 528.6 933.3

able 3 dentified compositions in the XPS spectra of the transfer film of 2 v iO2-filled PPS

inding energies of peaks (eV)

ompositions C(ls) O(ls) S(2p) Fe (2p) Ti (2

ontaminated C 284.8 in PPS 284.8 in PPS 163.7

e2O3 530.2 710.9 eSO4 532.4 168.8 712.1 i 454.1

S. Bahadur, C. Sunkara / Wear 258 (2005) 1411–1421 1419

Fig. 7. Transfer film bond strengths for PPS composites filled with varying proportions of (a) CuO, (b) TiO2, (c) ZnO and (d) SiC.

Table 5 Identified compositions in the XPS spectra of the transfer film of unfilled PPS

Binding energies of peaks (eV)

Compositions C(ls) O(ls) S(2p) Fe (2p)

Contaminated C 284.8 C in PPS 284.8 S in PPS 163.7 Fe2O3 530.2 710.9

during sliding. However, Fe2O3 was detected which might have been formed as a result of the reaction between Fe and atmospheric oxygen. Furthermore, no FeSO4 was detected indicating that PPS did not react with counterface metal. XPS analysis was also conducted on the transfer film of PPS with no filler and no FeSO4 was detected in this case as well (Table 5).

4. Discussion

The coefficient of friction for unfilled PPS was initially 0.38 but it gradually increased during the transient state to a final value of 0.43, and it remained at that value as the steady state was attained (Fig. 2). Since the transfer film developed in the transient state, the area of real contact increased and so

did the coefficient of friction. The increase also occurred be- cause with the development of transfer film sliding occurred between polymer and polymer and so there was increased cohesion.

The coefficient of friction would be expected to change with the addition of fillers because fillers affect the forma- tion of transfer film. With the addition of filler particles, both the transfer film and the polymer pin became heteroge- neous which reduced adhesion between the two. Since CuO nanoscale particles were not hard enough to plow the counter- face, the deformation component of friction was not affected. Thus, the coefficient of friction decreased with the increase in the content of CuO, which provided greater heterogeneity.

When TiO2 and ZnO were used as the fillers, the coef- ficient of friction decreased for the composites containing small proportions of the filler materials because of the het- erogeneity. But as the filler content increased, the coefficient of friction increased too. It is so because these filler parti- cles are fairly hard and so plowing by these particles could have contributed to friction. The increase in friction here was greater than the reduction realized from non-homogeneity of the contact surfaces and so the net effect was the increase in friction.

When SiC was used as the filler, the change in the co- efficient of friction was minimal with 2 vol.% SiC but the f his w r the

riction increased with higher proportion of the filler. T as so because in this case the transfer film did not cove

1420 S. Bahadur, C. Sunkara / Wear 258 (2005) 1411–1421

counterface completely and since SiC particles were hard, they plowed the counterface, which resulted in increased friction.

It is known that the wear resistance of filled polymer com- posites depends on the ability of the composite to form a thin, uniform and adherent transfer film on the counterface [3,5,7,8]. The transfer film prevents direct contact between the polymer pin and the metal counterface which avoids abra- sive action and thus results in reduced wear. With CuO as the filler up to 2 vol.%, the transfer film formed was thin, uniform and continuous. Here, the transfer of material occurred ini- tially in the form of thick lumps. Because of sliding and tem- perature increase, these lumps spread out thereby covering more or less the entire sliding track with a thin and uniform film. As the peel strength of the filled composite was much greater than that of the unfilled PPS, the film adhered well to the counterface. It was thus only the fragments of the transfer film that were occasionally detached and contributed to the wear debris. Although a transfer film was formed even in the case of unfilled PPS, its adhesion to the counterface was not good and so it was detached easily. Since the film was thick, it contributed significantly to wear. The lower wear rate with up to 2 vol.% TiO2 filler was obtained for the same reasons as above. The wear rate increased with increasing filler content for both fillers. This is so because, as the filler proportion i film a r film d ther- m the t ed it. T face e

lled w PS. T frag- m eing p rmed b

and T ably b l Cu a there w ents a highly r r film, t un- t t the c

oun- t a very s s a g bond s e w that o This w

Fig. 8. Wear rate vs. transfer film bond strength for all the composites.

5. Conclusions

1. The wear resistance of PPS increased when it was filled with specific proportions of nano particles of CuO and TiO2 but decreased with SiC and ZnO fillers.

2. In case of the fillers that were effective in reducing wear, the optimum wear resistance was obtained with 2 vol.% filler. The steady-state wear rate of 2 vol.% CuO–PPS was lower than that of 2 vol.% TiO2–PPS com- posite.

3. The coefficients of friction of PPS filled with 2 vol.% CuO or TiO2 filler were lower than that of the unfilled PPS. The coefficients of friction with 2 vol.% ZnO or SiC were about the same as of PPS but increased slightly with higher proportions of the fillers.

4. The flexure strength of PPS decreased with 1 vol.% filler, but increased gradually with the increase in filler content. It seemed to have no correlation with the tribological be- havior.

5. The transfer film was affected by the presence of fillers in PPS. In particular, the transfer film with 2 vol.% CuO or TiO2 filler was thin and uniform and it was also strongly adherent to the counterface.

6. The wear particles formed in the case of fillers that reduced wear were fine and equiaxed. In the case of fillers that

long film

7 sfer nce.

gher also

ncreased, the number of filler particles in the transfer lso increased, and this caused the disruption of transfe ue to the increase in the number of hard particles. Fur ore, the increase in the filler content initially increased

ransfer film–counterface bond strength but later decreas he latter made peeling of transfer film from the counter asier and hence the increased wear.

Contrary to the above two fillers, the wear rate of PPS fi ith ZnO and SiC was higher than that of the unfilled P he wear particles in these cases were in the form of ented films. This indicated that the transfer film was b eeled easily from the counterface. This was also confi y the transfer film–counterface bond strength studies.

A strong adhesion between the transfer films of CuO- iO2-filled PPS and steel counterface occurred presum ecause of the reduction of these fillers into elementa nd Ti, as verified by the XPS analyses. It is so because ould be attraction between the nascent Cu or Ti elem nd the steel surface because of these elements being eactive. Since these elements are locked in the transfe hey in turn provide bonding of the transfer film to the co erface in addition to mechanical bonding. This was no ase with ZnO where no elemental Zn was detected.

The bond strength between the transfer film and the c erface, as determined experimentally, seemed to have trong effect on the wear behavior. In fact, there wa ood correlation obtained between wear resistance and trength, as shown inFig. 8. For any filler proportion, th ear resistance of the filled composite was higher than f the unfilled PPS if the bond strength was also greater. as also the case with different fillers.

increased wear, wear particles were in the shape of fragments formed presumably by peeling of transfer from the counterface.

. There was a good correlation between the tran film–counterface bond strength and wear resista When the bond strength of the filled composite was hi than that of the unfilled PPS, its wear resistance was higher and vice versa.

S. Bahadur, C. Sunkara / Wear 258 (2005) 1411–1421 1421

References

[1] M.R. Scanlon, R.C. Cammrata, Mechanical properties of nano com- posite granular metal thin films, J. Appl. Phys. 76 (6) (1994) 3387–3393.

[2] Z.P. Lu, K. Friedrich, On sliding friction and wear of PEEK and its composites, Wear 181–183 (2) (1995) 624–631.

[3] J. Vande Voort, S. Bahadur, The growth and bonding of transfer film and the role of CuS and PTFE in the tribological behavior of PEEK, Wear 181–183 (1) (1995) 212–221.

[4] B.M. Sole, A. Ball, On the abrasive behavior of mineral filled polypropylene, Tribol. Int. 29 (6) (1996) 457–465.

[5] S. Bahadur, D. Gong, J.W. Anderegg, The investigation of the action of fillers by XPS studies of the transfer films of PEEK and its composites containing CuS and CuF2, Wear 160 (1993) 131–138.

[6] S. Bahadur, D. Gong, J.W. Anderegg, Studies of worn surfaces and the transfer film formed in sliding by CuS-filled and carbon fiber-reinforced nylon against a steel surface, Wear 181–183 (1995) 227–235.

[7] S. Bahadur, L. Zhang, J.W. Anderegg, The effect of Zinc and cop- per oxides and other zinc compounds as fillers on the tribological behavior of thermosetting polyester, Wear 203–204 (1997) 464–473.

[8] S. Bahadur, D. Gong, The role of copper compounds as fillers in the wear behavior of polyetheretherketone, Wear 154 (1992) 151–165.

[9] S. Bahadur, D. Gong, The transfer and wear of nylon and CuS- nylon composites: filler proportion and counterface characteristics, Wear 162–164 (1993) 397–406.

[10] S. Bahadur, D. Tabor, The wear of filled polytetrafluoroethylene, Wear 98 (1984) 1–13.

[11] S. Bahadur, D. Gong, J.W. Anderegg, The role of copper compounds 154

[12] S. Bahadur, A. Kapoor, The effect of ZnF2, ZnS2 and PbS fillers on the tribological behavior of nylon 11, Wear 155 (1992) 49– 61.

[13] S. Bahadur, D. Gong, J.W. Anderegg, Investigation of the influence of CaS CaO and CaF2 fillers on the transfer and wear of nylon by microscopy and XPS analysis, Wear 197 (1996) 271–279.

[14] L. Zhang, The role of particulate Inorganic fillers on the tribological behavior of Polyester, MS Thesis, Iowa State University, 1995.

[15] B.J. Briscoe, A.K. Pogosian, D. Tabor, The friction and wear of high-density polyethylene: the action of lead oxide and copper oxide fillers, Wear 27 (1974) 19–34.

[16] K. Tanaka, Effect of various fillers on the friction and wear of PTFE- based composites, in: K. Friedrich (Ed.), Friction and Wear of Poly- mer Composites, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1986, pp. 137–174.

[17] Q. Wang, Q. Xue, H. Liu, W. Shen, J. Xu, The effect of particle size of nanometer ZrO2 on the tribological behavior of PEEK, Wear 198 (1–2) (1996) 216–219.

[18] Q.H. Wang, J.F. Xu, W.C. Shen, W.M. Liu, An investigation of the friction and wear properties of nanometer Si3N4 filled PEEK, Wear 196 (1–2) (1996) 82–86.

[19] G. Shi, M. Zhang, M. Rong, B. Wetzel, K. Freidrich, Friction and wear of low nanometer Si3N4 filled epoxy composites, Wear 254 (2003) 784–796.

[20] C.J. Schwartz, S. Bahadur, Studies on the tribological and transfer film–counterface bond strength of polyphenylene sulfide filled with nanoscale alumina particles, Wear 237 (2000) 261–273.

[21] J.F. Moulder, W.F. Stickle, P.E. Sobol, K.D. Bomben (Eds.), Hand- book of X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy, Perkin-Elmer Co., Eden Prairie, MN, 1992.

[22] S. Bahadur, D. Gong, J.W. Anderegg, Tribochemical studies by XPS ning

as fillers in the transfer film formation and wear of nylon, Wear

(1992) 207–223.

analysis of transfer films of Nylon 11 and its composites contai copper compounds, Wear 165 (1993) 205–212.

  • Effect of transfer film structure, composition and bonding on the tribological behavior of polyphenylene sulfide filled with nano particles of TiO2, ZnO, CuO and SiC
    • Introduction
    • Experimental details
      • Material selection and specimen preparation
      • Flexure testing
      • Friction and wear testing
      • Transfer film
      • Transfer film bond strength measurement
    • Results and discussion
      • Wear
      • Friction
      • Effect of filler on strength
      • Transfer film
      • Bonding strengths of transfer films
      • XPS analysis of transfer films
    • Discussion
    • Conclusions
    • References

all articles will be uesed/effects of hydrogen.pdf

all articles will be uesed/Fluoropolymer Surface Studies. II.pdf

Fluoropolymer Surface Studies. 11.

David W. Dwight D epartm ent o f C h em istry V ir g in ia P o ly te c h n ic I n s t i t u t e and S t a t e U n i v e r s i t y B la c k sb u rg , V ir g in ia 24061

Fluoropolymers are known for their unique surface properties, but it is not generally recognized that these properties can vary appreciably, depending upon the specifics of preparation. This report highlights the surface characterization of films (1) cast from aqueous PTFE dispersion, (2) skived from a sintered PTFE billet, and (3) sprayed, using a "Teflon" FEP/ epoxy enamel. ESCA revealed changes in the fluorocarbon/ hydrocarbon ratio with variations in process conditions, and SEM showed effects on roughness. The receding contact angle was most sensitive to changes in high surface-energy fraction. A remarkable, new surface - long fibers composed of '"VSOOO parallel PTFE molecules - was obtained by annealing the PTFE samples.

INTRODUCTION Combinations of x-ray photoelectron spectroscopy (ESCA), con-

tact-angle hysteresis and scanning electron microscopy (SEM) provide detailed analysis of the chemical and physical nature of solid surfaces. The fundamentals of these techniques, and their appli­ cation to sodium-etched and gold-crystallized fluoropolymers were the subjects of our first report1. Briefly, all three techniques analyze only the outer tens of Angstrom units of the sample; ESCA provides elemental analysis, distinguishing between fluorocarbon and other types of carbon by distinct chemical shift, SEM provides a view of the surface at high magnification and depth-of-field, and contact angles reflect both chemical and physical effects. Correla­ tions emerge when two or three techniques are used on the same sample, allowing a detailed perception of surface structures and processes.

Other reports of surface measurements on fluoropolymers, especially contact-angle data, are numerous, but the earlier

313

314 David W. Dwight

results scatter significantly. The situation was clarified by Allan and Roberts2 in a study of the wettability of "Teflon" PTFE and FEP resins, and the effects of several methods of preparation designed to vary roughness of the polymer surfaces. Similar results showing a relationship between roughness, stretching and anisotropic wettability, have been reported in later work3'4 and SEM was used to determine the microtopography. Johnson and Dettre5 show correlations between theory and experiment for the effects of both roughness and hydrocarbon surface fraction on contact-angle hysteresis of some fluorocarbons. ESCA data on fluoropolymers reported by Clark et al.6 '7 and Ginnard and Riggs8, indicate the possibility of quantitative surface analysis. In a recent symposium, there were several reports of the use of ESCA and contact angles to characterize fluorocarbon films deposited by glow discharge or plasma polymerization9'10. Our earlier work1 demonstrated that characterization of some treated "Teflon" surfaces by the combin­ ation of ESCA, SEM, and contact-angle hysteresis helped elucidate the behavior of these systems. This report completes our character­ ization of the chemical and physical nature of the most common fluoropolymer surfaces.

The most common fluoropolymer film is "Teflon" FEP (Type A), i.e. poly-(tetrafluoroethylene/hexafluoropropylene) extruded from the melt. This copolymer is also blended with thermosetting resins and solvents to give a hard, durable enamel with a lubricated, release surface. Poly-(tetrafluoroethylene) homopolymer cannot be extruded, thus films are formed either by skiving a billet of sintered PTFE molding powder or sintering a film of aqueous PTFE dispersion. A variety of chemical and physical structures arise from these diverse materials and processes.

EXPERIMENTAL Materials and Procedures

Films of aqueous PTFE dispersion (DuPont "Teflon" T-30, stabilized with 6% surfactant) were prepared on fiber glass cloth, using a continuous process shown schematically in Figure 1. Two pairs of samples were studied, representing constant conditions in all but one process variable. For one pair of samples, an increase in dispersion viscosity was used to obtain twice the weight pick-up of dispersion per pass through the dip tank. Thus, the same weight of PTFE was applied in four passes on one sample and eight passes on the other. For the second pair of samples, eight passes were used (thinner coats), but the temperature of the sintering oven was lowered stepwise on the seventh pass until the coated fabric would no longer retain a uniform film of dispersion after the subsequent pass through the dip tank. (This is termed "poor re-wetting" in commercial practice.)

Fluoropolymer Surface 315

DISPERSION

DIP TANK

Fig. 1. Schematic diagram of the dip-coating process used to produce "Teflon"-coated fiber glass cloth by drying and sintering a film of aqueous PTFE dispersion.

The pair of samples was taken after the seventh pass through the oven, one above and one below the temperature at which the onset of poor rewetting occurred.

Also PTFE films were prepared by skiving (shaving with a sharp blade in a lathe) from a billet of free-sintered molding powder, a procedure known to give anisotropic and variable wettability2. A new surface on both skived and dispersion-cast films appeared after annealing by the following procedure (ASTM D-1457-69): samples were placed in a preheated sintering oven at 300°C, then heated at 2°/min to 380°C, maintained at that temperature for 30 min, and then cooled at l°/min to 295°C. The temperature was maintained at 295°C for 25 min. after which the samples were removed from the oven and allowed to cool to room temperature.

One form of poly-(tetrafluoroethylene/hexafluoropropylene) film was prepared from a blend of epoxy and "Teflon" FEP resins, known to give a surface with fluoropolymer properties11. One set of samples utilized standard 954-line "Teflon-S" enamel (DuPont, Fabrics & Finishes Dep't), which was reduced approximately 20% by volume with methyl ethyl ketone and filtered through cheese cloth

316 David W. Dwight

into a standard air-spray paint gun. Using 40 psi air pressure at the gun, the enamel was sprayed for a few seconds onto aluminum foil panels from a distance of about three feet, resulting in a dry film thickness of 0.5 to 1.0 mil. The panels were allowed to air dry for at least ten minutes. Identical panels were heated for 15 min. in an air oven at 350°, 450° or 500°F. A second set of samples was prepared in the same way, except a proprietary form of poly-(tetrafluoroethylene/hexafluoropropylene) having low- molecular weight and functional species extracted, was used.

Surface Analysis

Experimental details have been described for collecting the ESCA data and for water contact angles by the goniometer technique1 Scanning electron micrographs were obtained at 25 kV on a Jeolco JSM-3, and observation of small surface features was enhanced by tilting the sample at approximately 45° to the electron beam. To provide conductivity for fluoropolymer samples, a coating (̂ 200A) of gold-palladium was applied in a vacuum evaporator.

The goniometer technique was used to obtain water and hexa- decane contact angles on the PTFE and "Teflon-S" samples. The alkane was obtained from Burdick and Jackson Laboratories and percolated through silica (Fisher, 28-200 mesh) and alumina (Woelm, Neutral Grade). Its surface tension was 27.2 ± 0.2 dynes/cm at 25°C. Precision was reduced by the anisotropic roughness of the skived films: while liquid was being added, the drop would often move easily to one side and not at all to the other, or move in jumps. Therefore we also used the wetting balance technique described by Johnson and Dettre5. Film samples were fastened around a cylindrical sample holder, giving rigidity to the portion of the film protruding below the sample holder, and a beaker con­ taining water or hexadecane was moved automatically, advancing and retracting the liquid at 0.1 inches per minute. During immersion the contact angle builds up to a steady state value, 0 a, with a corresponding decrease in force. When Θ reaches 0a, the force-vs- depth curve becomes a straight line with a slope due to buoyancy. Extrapolation of the linear portion of the buoyancy slope to zero depth-of-immersion allows calculation of the advancing contact angle. Similarly, the receding contact angle was calculated from the buoyancy slope obtained while the film was being withdrawn from the probe liquid.

The reason for low precision of contact-angle data on rough surfaces is obvious from inspection of Figure 2, which compares plots of force vs depth-of-immersion for skived "Teflon" film parallel and perpendicular to the skiving direction. When the liquid moves perpendicular to the skive marks, the plot shows a pronounced saw-tooth pattern, corresponding to the "jumping forward of the drop front observed during the goniometer measurements.

Fluoropolymer Surface 317

FORCE

Fig

DEPTH OF IMMERSION (inches)

A. PARALLEL

DEPTH OF IMMERSION ( inches)

B. PERPENDICULAR

. 2. Recorder traces of force (relative) vs depth-of-immersion obtained from the wetting balance with skived "Teflon". A. Water advanced parallel to skive marks. B. Water advanced perpendicular to skive marks.

318 David W. Dwight

These results corroborate the work of Johnson and Dettre12, who used a model in which rugosities are energy barriers that must be surmounted by the moving liquid front.

Another feature of the wetting balance traces in Figure 2 deserves comment: The advancing buoyancy line on the first immersion shows a lower slope, while subsequent immersions have a slope roughly parallel to the receding slope. These results suggest that some of the test liquid is left behind on the fluoro- polymer surface after immersion. If enough time elapses before re-immersion, the original, lower slope is obtained again. Advancing angles were calculated on the first immersion.

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

Poly-(tetrafluoroethylene)

Dispersion-Coated Fiber Glass Cloth. Analysis by ESCA, SEM and contact-angle hysteresis gave essentially identical results from both the sample prepared with thicker coats per pass through the PTFE dispersion and the sample sintered at the lower oven temperature. Likewise, the other pair of samples (thinner coats or higher oven temperature) showed similar surface characteristics. The results indicate that the surfactant in the PTFE dispersion must diffuse to the surface of the film deposited on the fiber glass cloth and then volatilize or pyrolyze. Apparently, thicker coatings and lower oven temperatures do not allow the complete removal of surfactant residues.

The evidence for these conclusions is presented in Figures 3 and 4. Only a fluorocarbon peak at ^291 eV appears in the C ± s ESCA spectra (Figure 3) when either higher temperatures or thinner coats are used in the coating process. On the other hand, with lower temperatures or thicker coats, a significant hydrocarbon peak appears at ^284 eV, and the fluorocarbon peak is diminished. Also, the ESCA spectra of the latter samples showed an 0^s peak at ^532 eV, which was absent in the former pair of samples. The hydrocarbon and oxygen peaks must derive from a residue of the surfactant used to stabilize the aqueous PTFE dispersion against settling. Unfortunately, a more detailed analysis of the structure of this hydrocarbon fraction is impossible because the sample is too small (a fraction of a surface layer <50A thick) for any of the routine techniques.

Typical scanning electron micrographs representative of the pair of samples (higher temperature or thinner coats) that gave only a fluorocarbon peak in the Cis ESCA spectra, are shown in Figure 4A (top). The surface appears as a uniform, dense packing of ridges about 0.1 by 0.5 microns in size. The unusually high molecular weight and crystallinity of poly-(tetrafluoroethylene)

Fluoropolymer Surface 319

295 290 285 280

B INDING ENERGY (eV)

Fig. 3. Carbon Is ESCA spectra from typical pairs of PTFE dispersion-coated fiber glass cloth samples. Different parameters employed during the coating process are indicated beside the spectra.

gives rise to a "stacked" lamellar morphology responsible for the observed surface structure. Transmission electron micrographs of fracture surface replicas of PTFE crystallized slowly from the melt13 show a correspondence to our results.

The natural roughness of the PTFE surface lowers the receding contact angle so that the aqueous dispersion will cling as an unbroken film during its traverse through the drying oven. The residual surfactant (detected by ESCA as a hydrocarbon Cis peak

320 David W. Dwight

Fig. 4. SEM photomicrographs (2,500X and ΙΟ,ΟΟΟΧ) of the surface of PTFE film cast from aqueous dispersion. A. Ridge­ like structure of homogeneous PTFE obtained when thinner coats of dispersion or higher oven temperatures were used during the coating procedure. B. Smooth surface of sur­ factant residue filling in between the PTFE ridges, representative of 30-50% of the samples for which thicker coats of dispersion or lower oven temperatures were used in the coating procedure.

Fluoropolymer Surface 321

on the thicker sample and the lower temperature sample) has the effect of filling in the spaces between the PTFE ridges, as illus­ trated in Figure 4B. An estimated 30-50% of the surface of those samples was covered with the relatively smooth areas shown, while the remainder of the surfaces showed the same "unfilled" ridge structure seen in Figure 4A. Note that the crude estimate by SEM of hydrocarbon surface fraction is in agreement with the value of 39% calculated from ESCA peak intensities.

Fluoropolymer samples showing a hydrocarbon surface fraction would be expected to be more wettable than the homogeneous fluoro- polymer surface, and also to exhibit greater hysteresis, by analogy with sodium-etched fluoropolymer films1. However, the contact- angle data in Table 1 show that it is the decrease in roughness illustrated in the photomicrographs that is the governing factor. Receding angles increase and advancing angles (and hysteresis) decrease on the samples with the smooth hydrocarbon fraction. These observations correspond to the theoretical predictions of Johnson and Dettre12 of the effect on contact angles of an energet­ ically (chemically) homogeneous surface. Apparently, the physical effect of the hydrocarbon fraction is the governing factor, dominat­ ing the tendency for its chemical nature to increase hysteresis. The delicate balance of surface forces in this system may be unique: a reduction of less than 5 dyne/cm in the surface tension of the aqueous PTFE dispersion (by the addition of surfactant) facilitates "re-wetting" by lowering the receding contact angle on the smoother surface to zero. It should be emphasized that the advancing contact angle is relatively unimportant in the coating process because the film is submerged in the liquid, eliminating the requirement for spontaneous spreading of the dispersion on the film. However, if the equilibrium receding angle is much greater than zero, there will be a tendency for the liquid film to rupture and form islands or beads, i.e. "poor re-wetting" in the practical situation.

Skived Film and Annealing. The surface structures on PTFE films prepared by skiving a rotating billet are much larger and anisotropic compared with dispersion-cast films. When either type of film is annealed, striking new surface features develop. A comparison between dispersion-cast film before and after annealing is made in the photomicrographs in Figure 5. As described earlier, at higher magnification the as-cast film (Figure 5A, top) shows a ridge-like structure in the 0.2 to 0.8y range. At the level of 1-3μ, there appears to be a regular pattern of small, rounded mounds and depressions. The dark striations or mars that appear on this sample (A) at lower magnification are marks caused by handling, illustrating how easily PTFE is deformed. After anneal­ ing, the surface structure undergoes a remarkable transformation. The lower magnification view in Figure 5B shows an array of closely packed bumps about 5y in size. At higher magnification, the surface appears to be an intertwined mass of very long fibers, 0.5 to l.Oy

322 David W. Dwight

Contact-Angle Hysteresis on PTFE Dispersion-Coated Fiber Glass Cloth

Table 1

Contact Angles (deg) at 24. 5°C

Sample Water Hexadecane

°a 0r °a-er 0a 0r Θ -Θ a r

Thin coats or High temperature

117 88 29 48 0 48

Thick coats or Low temperature

113 98 15 42 8 34

in diameter. At regular intervals, groups of fibers bend into loops projecting up from the surface creating "corrugated knobs" or what appear to be bumps at lower magnification. Apparently, the crystallizing forces operate during annealing in such a way as to organize groups of PTFE molecules into parallel alignment, while surface tension forces dictate a range of about 3,000 to 8,000 molecules to minimize the surface free energy of the system. Annealing appears to have increased the surface area considerably, indicating the magnitude of the crystallizing forces driving the system into a configuration that has excess surface energy.

As might be expected, the skiving process creates a rough, anisotropic PTFE surface with pronounced grooves and orientation in the skiving direction, seen clearly in the lower magnification photomicrograph, Figure 6A. On the right-hand side of the figure, the highly oriented nature of the surface is illustrated by the minute (Ή).1μ) fibers drawn between two lumps of PTFE that appear to be polymer transferred by the skiving process.

When samples were prepared by annealing skived film, a looped, fiber-like topography appeared (Figure 6B), but the fibers are not quite as thick as seen previously in the dispersion-cast film (Figure 5B). The fibers make a sharper bend and form smaller, denser and more closely spaced knobs on the skived film. At lower magnification, the grosser effects of skiving are still apparent, and the knobs even seem to be aligned along the skiving direction, suggesting nucleation. This would be consistent with the greater number and smaller size of the surface features. At the level of <20μ, the new surface structures completely dominate the effects of skiving.

Fluoropolymer Surface 323

Fig. 5. SEM photomicrographs (300X and 3,000X) of the surface of a homogeneous PTFE film cast from aqueous dispersion. A. before, and B. after annealing.

324 David W. Dwight

This series of samples provides a unique set of homogeneous (i.e. only fluorocarbon and fluorine peaks in the ESCA spectra) PTFE surfaces of varying roughness. Water and hexadecane contact- angle hysteresis data were obtained on these samples by the gonio­ meter method and are listed in Table 2. Note that these samples represent far more complicated forms of roughness than accounted for by theoretical models12. However, comparison of wettability before and after annealing reflects increased roughness: advancing contact angles and hysteresis increase markedly. As probed by water, some samples exhibited high receding contact angles indica­ tive of a composite surface, where the liquid is no longer able to penetrate to the base of the rugosities — a reasonable result in view of the fiber/knob topography of those samples. The other samples in this group showed the lowest receding angles with water, probably corresponding to the minimum in the theoretical curve of receding angle v s_ roughness, at the point where the composite surface first forms5. The dispersion-cast films after annealing showed an intermediate receding angle. A decrease in surface energy accompanies the introduction of perfluoromethyl side chains on the PTFE backbone, and should increase the advancing contact angle15. However, roughness effects predominate, so the smooth, extruded FEP film actually has the lowest advancing water contact angle and hysteresis.

Table 2

Contact-Angle Hysteresis on Dispersion-Coated and Skived PTFE Films Before and After Annealing

Contact Angles (deg) at 24.5°C

Sample Water Hexadecane

°a 0r 0a 0r °a 0r °a-°r

Dispersion-coated 117 88 29 48 0 48

Dispersion-coated, after annealing

146 92 54 60 0 60

Skived 112 80 32 39 0 39

Skived, after annealing

148 76 & 120

72 & 28

60 0 60

Extruded FEP film 109 93 16 57 43 14

Fluoropolymer Surface 325

Fig. 6. SEM photomicrographs (300X and 3,000X) of a homogeneous PTFE film skived from a rotating billet. A. before, and B. after annealing.

326 David W. Dwight

Poly-(tetrafluoroethylene/hexafluoropropylene)

Our previous report1 described the most common form (extruded film) of the perfluorinated copolymer "Teflon" FEP. Also this copolymer is blended into a spray enamel with thermosetting resins and solvents. After application to a substrate and baking, "that portion of film at the substrate interface is composed predominately of the auxiliary material, while the other surface is either fused or particulate TFE/HFP copolymer11". This process is depicted schematically in Figure 7.

/ / / /m™l / / Fig. 7. Schematic diagram of the stratification thought to occur

when a "Teflon-S' enamel is heat-cured.

We have obtained more detail on the cure mechanism in this system by ESCA and contact-angle analysis of two enamels using different types of FEP, each cured at three temperatures. To facilitate presentation of the ESCA data, peak intensity values were standardized with Wagner's sensitivity values14 and listed in Table 3 as ratios to the fluorine concentration, a technique that effectively provides internal standardization, aiding semi- quantitative interpretation of the ratios.

The ratio of fluorocarbon to fluorine increases, suggesting a decreasing proportion of (-CF3) side chains in the surface film as cure-temperature increases. The amine-cured epoxy ratios stay relatively constant at about C/O/N - 1.0/0.25/0.18.

The proportion of components in the surface region can be estimated from the fluorocarbon/hydrocarbon ratio calculated

Fluoropolymer Surface 327

Variation in Atom Ratios Calculated from ESCA Peak Heights

for "Teflon-S" Enamels Cured 15 min at Three Temperatures

Table 3

ESCA Binding Energy (eV) and Atom Ratios

Sample Cure

Temp.,°F 689eV F

293eV C-F

284eV C-H, 0

532eV 0

400eV N

"Teflon-S"

Standard 350

1.0 0.34 0.54 0.14 0.10 Extracted 1.0 0.31 4.93 1.16 0.91

Standard 450

1.0 0.40 0.15 0.03 0.02 Extracted 1.0 0.39 0.40 0.09 0.11

Standard 500

1.0 0.43 0.07 0.01 0 Extracted 1.0 0.43 0.15 0.03 0.02

Extruded FEP Film

-- 1.0 0.40 --- --- ---

from ESCA peak intensities. For clarity, these results are plotted vs cure temperatures in the histogram in Figure 8 . Two results are clear: the fluorocarbon surface fraction increases rapidly with cure temperature, and standard FEP contains more surface-film- forming fluorocarbons, especially apparent at lower temperatures.

Further detail on cure mechanism is provided by the trends in the peak widths-at-half-height, listed in Table 4. The fluorocarbon and fluorine peaks are significantly broader (0.4 to 1.1 eV) in the "Teflon-S" systems than in the FEP film, suggesting a wider distri­ bution of fluorinated species in the former case. Peak widths are a maximum at the 450° bake, implying that the broadest distribution of fluorinated species populates the surface region under these conditions. At 500°F, the epoxy resin discolored and showed other signs of thermal-oxidative degradation or burning, and this probably explains the strongly broadening trend of the 0 ^s peak width.

The contact-angle hysteresis measurements (Table 5) allow further conclusions to be drawn about the surface processes during the cure of this blend. By comparison with the results on extruded FEP film, it appears that a complete fluorocarbon surface layer forms only with the standard "Teflon-S" composition after 450° and

328 David W. Dwight

CURE T E M P E R A T U R E °F

Fig. 8 . Histogram illustrating the use of ESCA intensity ratios to follow the formation of fluorocarbon surface films from a blend of fluoropolymer and epoxy resins.

500°F. Although the ESCA data show reasonably strong fluorine and fluorocarbon signals from the "extracted" sample, the contact-angle data indicate that some patches of epoxy resin still occupy the surface even after the 500° cure. This series of experiments provides a good example of the danger of characterizing surfaces by the use of only advancing contact angles. Judging from those data alone would lead to the conclusion that most of the samples were essentially identical and composed entirely of perfluorinated material. Simply measuring the receding contact angles leads to the correct description.

The combined results indicate that this polymer blend acts like a chromatographic system during the cure: As the "Teflon" FEP component stratifies to the air interface, a separation occurs in the distribution of fluorinated species that comprise the

Fluoropolymer Surface 329

ESCA Peak Width at Half-Height (eV) for "Teflon-S" Enamels Cured 15 min at Three Temperatures

Table 4

Sample Cure

Temp.,°F F C-F C:-h ,o 0 N

"Teflon-S"

Standard Extracted

350 2.9 2.6

2.9 3.6 3.0

2.7 2.5

2.8

2.6

Standard Extracted

450 3.3 3.6

3.2 3.5

3.9 3.6

3.5 3.3

3.2 3.3

Standard Extracted

500 3.0 3.0

2.6

2.5 4.0 3.3

5.0 4.8

3.1 3.2

Extruded FEP Film --- 2.2 2.2 — — --

Table 5

for "Teflon-S" Contact-Angle Hysteresis Enamels Cured 15 min at Three Temperature s

Contact Angles (deg) at 24.5°C

Sample Cure Temp,°F

Water 0r

Hexadecane

°a 0r

"Teflon-S"

Standard Extracted

350 117 91

68

61 54 10

0

0

Standard Extracted

450 112

107 92 78

55 48

40 25

Standard Extracted

500 109 108

93 87

55 50

40 37

Extruded FEP Film — 109 93 57 43

°a

330 David W. Dwight

fluoropolymer, and the fluorocarbon molecules that are most mobile in the hydrocarbon matrix reach the surface first. Apparently, the ability to diffuse to the surface and form a film is related to low molecular weight and functionality, because the extracted fluoropolymer was much less effective, failing to form a complete surface layer even at temperatures that degrade the epoxy resin.

CONCLUSIONS

This paper presented the highlights of our characterization of the physics and chemistry of some common fluoropolymer film surfaces. A comprehensive view of the current state of the art is supplemented by our other reports1'16. Combinations of ESCA, SEM and contact-angle hysteresis data demonstrate exceptional power to elucidate subtle changes in the nature of minute surface layers in these systems. Significant changes (functions of time and temperature during preparation) were observed in the top few Angstrom units of the films. The importance of measuring the receding contact angle for surface characterization was clearly demonstrated; it was most sensitive to the presence of a high surface-energy fraction.

Residual surfactant remains on the surface of PTFE film cast from aqueous dispersion, unless the film is sintered at high temperatures or for long times. The surfactant residue has a leveling effect on surface topography, filling in between ridges that appear on the "uncontaminated" fluoropolymer surface. Annealing dispersion-cast or skived film produces a remarkable surface structure: an intertwined mass of very long, 'MD.Sp-wide fibers that form loops projecting up from the surface in a regular array of knobs. Comparison of contact-angle hysteresis on rough vs smooth fluoropolymer surfaces shows trends that agree quali­ tatively with the predictions of the Johnson-Dettre theory.

Stratification of fluorocarbons to the air surface occurs during cure of a blend of fluoropolymer and epoxy resins, and there were indications that low molecular weight, functional species are the primary film formers. Contact-angle hysteresis distinguishes between patchy and uniform fluorocarbon surface layers, even though the latter are less than ^25A thick (ESCA signal still visible from underlying elements).

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Experimental assistance of several co-workers at the DuPont Experimental Station, permission by the company to publish the data, and NASA support (Grant No. NSG-1124) during preparation of the manuscript are all gratefully acknowledged.

Fluoropolymer Surface 331

REFERENCES

1. D. W. Dwight and W. M. Riggs, J. Colloid and Interface Sei. 47(3), 650 (1974).

2. A. J. G. Allan and R. Roberts, J. Polym. Sei., 39, 1 (1959). 3. R. J. Good, J. A. Kvikstad and W. O. Bailey, J. Colloid and

Interface Sei., 3_5 (2) , 314 (1971). 4. E. H. Cirlin and D. H. Kaelble, J. Polym. Sei., 11, 785 (1973). 5. R. E. Johnson, Jr. and R. H. Dettre, Advan. Chem. Series No.

43, 112 (1964), published by American Chemical Society. 6 . D. T. Clark and D. Kilcast, Nature (Physical Science), 233,

77 (1971). 7. D. T. Clark, W. J. Feast, I. Ritchie, and W. K. R. Musgrave,

J. Polymer Sei. (Chemistry), _12, 1049 (1974). 8 . C. R. Ginnard and W. M. Riggs, Anal. Chem., 44̂, 1310 (1972). 9. M. M. Millard and A. E. Pavlath, Polymer Preprints, 16̂, 84

(1975). 10. D. F. O'Kane and D. W. Rice, Polymer Preprints, 16, 92 (1975). 11. J. C. Fang, (to DuPont) U.S. Patent 3,661,831 (May 9, 1972). 12. R. E. Johnson, Jr. and R. H. Dettre, in S u r f a c e a n d C o l l o i d

S c i e n c e , Vol. 2, E. Matijevic, ed., Wiley-Interscience, New York, 1969, p. 121.

13. L. Melillo and B. Wunderlich, Kolloid-Z. u. Z. Polymere 250, 417 (1972).

14. C. D. Wagner, Anal. Chem. 4£(6), 1050 (1972). 15. M. K. Bernett and W. A. Zisman, J. Phys. Chem. 64, 1292 (1960). 16. D. W. Dwight, "Surface Analysis and Adhesion in Fluoropolymers",

Kendall Award Symposium, New York, April 1976, to be published in J. Colloid and Interface Sei.

all articles will be uesed/Friction and Molecular Structure The Behaviour of Some Thermoplastics .pdf

Friction and Molecular Structure: The Behaviour of Some Thermoplastics Author(s): Christine M. Pooley and D. Tabor Source: Proceedings of the Royal Society of London. Series A, Mathematical and Physical Sciences, Vol. 329, No. 1578 (Aug. 22, 1972), pp. 251-274 Published by: Royal Society Stable URL: https://www.jstor.org/stable/78198 Accessed: 27-04-2020 15:32 UTC

JSTOR is a not-for-profit service that helps scholars, researchers, and students discover, use, and build upon a wide

range of content in a trusted digital archive. We use information technology and tools to increase productivity and

facilitate new forms of scholarship. For more information about JSTOR, please contact support@jstor.org.

Your use of the JSTOR archive indicates your acceptance of the Terms & Conditions of Use, available at

https://about.jstor.org/terms

Royal Society is collaborating with JSTOR to digitize, preserve and extend access to Proceedings of the Royal Society of London. Series A, Mathematical and Physical Sciences

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A. 329, 251-274 (1972)

Printed in Great Britain

Friction and molecular structure: the behaviour of some

thermoplastics

BY CHRISTINE M. POOLEY AND D. TABOR, F.R.S.

Surface Physics, Cavendish Laboratory, University of Cambridge

(Received 21 February 1972)

[Plates 15 to 20]

This paper describes an experimental study of the friction and transfer of some thermo- plastic polymers sliding over clean surfaces. With PTFE and high density polyethylene sliding at low speeds on smooth surfaces of glass or polished metals there is a marked dif-

ference between static and kinetic friction. The static friction is of the order of /a = 0.2 and is accompanied by transfer of lumps of polymer several hundred angstroms thick. This frictional behaviour is 'normal' and may be explained in terms of the bulk properties of the polymers. However, once sliding has commenced and the slider acquires a preferred orienta- tion the friction falls to a much lower value (A < 0.1) and the transfer is either in the form of an extremely thin film (PTFE) or discrete streaks less than 10 nm thick (PE). This behaviour does not depend on the degree of crystallinity or on the crystalline texture of the polymer.

If the molecular structure is changed by introducing an appreciable number of bulky side groups (e.g. TFE-HFP copolymers, PCTFE or low density PE) the kinetic friction remains the same as the static value. The friction and transfer are those of 'normal' polymers and resemble polypropylene and amorphous polymers such as PMMA and PVC in their be- haviour. The results suggest that the low friction and light transfer of PTFE and high density PE during sliding are essentially due to their smooth molecular profiles.

1. INTRODUCTION

It is generally accepted that the friction between clean surfaces is mainly the

result of adhesion: the frictional force is indeed the force required to shear the

adhesive junctions formed at the regions of real contact and is given by F = As where A is the real area of contact and s is the shear strength of the junctions

(Bowden & Tabor I964). The type of adhesion depends on the nature of the sliding bodies. With metals the adhesion may be referred to as cold welding; with ionic solids the adhesion forces are ionic; with polymers they arise from van der Waals

interactions. In rare cases for clean surfaces the adhesion junctions formed may

be weaker than the solids themselves and in that case sliding occurs truly at the interface. In most cases however the junctions are stronger than one or both of

the solids. When sliding occurs shearing takes place at a short distance from the interface within the weaker body and a fragment, large on an atomic scale remains

attached to the other surface. This is the origin of adhesive wear. Under these conditions the frictional force may be expressed in terms of the bulk shear strength of the softer myiaterial. However, the strength properties of solids are determined by defects, dislocations and cracks at least as much as by intrinsic strength of

i6 [ 251 ] Vol. 329. A. (22 August r972)

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

252 Christine M. Pooley and D. Tabor

interatomic bonds. For this reason although the adhesion is basically the result

of atomic forces it does not seem helpful to describe the frictional process in terms of atomic mechanisms.

Nevertheless in the work described in this paper we shall show that, with some clean semicrystalline polymers, there is a fairly direct influence of molecular

structure on frictional behaviour. It is not a molecular theory of friction, but the

connexion between friction and molecular shape appears to be fairly direct and

surprisingly simple.

With polymers, as with metals, the shear strength of the junctions is comparable

with the bulk shear strength of the weaker of the two sliding bodies (Shooter &

Tabor I952). Although quantitative agreement between these two strength

properties is not particularly close, and various refinements have been suggested

to the friction mechanism (see, for example, Adams I963; West & Senior I972)

these strength properties do appear to vary in the same way with temperature. Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) is exceptional in its frictional behaviour. The

friction is usually given as less than 0.1, compared with It = 0.3 to 0.6 for most other polymers, and the interfacial shear strength s is very much less than the bulk

shear strength. Initially it was thought that the low friction was due to lack of

adhesion between PTFE and substrate, sliding occurring truly at the interface.

It is indeed true that in most practical situations it is very difficult to stick PTFE

to any substrate without first treating the PTFE surface in such a way that the

structure and mechanical properties of the surface are altered (Schonhorn &

Ryan I969). However, Makinson & Tabor (I964) showed that strong adhesion

could occur between PTFE and substrate in a friction experiment, leading to

transfer of the polymer even though the friction remained low. During sliding the PTFE transferred to a glass substrate as a very thin, highly oriented film. The

film was measured by interference techniques to be 10-40 nm thick, and from

diffraction studies the molecular chains were shown to be oriented in the sliding direction.

Makinson & Tabor (I964) suggested that the low friction and thin film transfer

of PTFE were due to easy shear in units of the PTFE crystallite. The work de- scribed in this paper shows that there is a more satisfactory explanation in terms of molecular structure. Broadly speaking, the results suggest that a semicrystalline polymer which has a smooth molecular profile gives behaviour typical of PTFE, whereas those with bulky side groups behave like 'normal' polymers. The study described in this paper is concerned with the friction and transfer of polymers possessing both 'smooth' and 'rough' molecular profiles.

2. EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDIURES

The friction measurements were carried out on a modified form of the Eldredge apparatus (Eldredge & Tabor I955; Cohen & Tabor I966). To minimize the plough-

ing term (Tabor & Wynne-Williams I96I) and to facilitate observation of the

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Friction and molecular structure 253

transferred material most experiments were carried out with the polymer in the

form of a rod with a hemispherical tip sliding over a flat glass substrate. The normal

force was applied as a dead load (between 0.5 and 5 kgf) and the frictional force, rmeasured by the deflexion of a pair of leaf springs, recorded on sooted glass. The

lower flat surface was clamped on to a brass platform which could be heated. The

polymer slider was moved relative to the lower surface by a lathe traverse at speeds ranging from 0.02 to 2 mm S-2.

A

polymer FIGuRE 1. Apparatus for measuring bulk shear strengths. A, clamping screw.

The glass substrates were in the form of microscope slides. They were cleaned

by washing thoroughly with detergent and rinsing well firstlin running water and finally in distilled water. They were then stored in a desiccator and flamed briefly before use. The polymers used will be described in the relevant sections of the

paper. They were cleaned by washing in isopropyl alcohol before being fixed into a degreased brass holder. Cleaning was not so important here however as in the case of the substrate because the polymer surface was constantly renewed during

sliding.

A series of tracks were made on a glass slide under known conditions of load,

speed and temperature. The transfer was first studied optically by means of a metallographic microscope, the Leitz Metallux, with reflected light. It was often necessary to evaporate a thin film of carbon on to the glass to increase the re- flectivity. A Zeiss photomicroscope I (Pol) was used for studies in polarized light, when measuring the thickness and birefringence of the transferred material. The transferred material was then removed from the glass by a modification of standard

replica techniques (Kay i965) for further observation in the electron microscope. The glass slide was vacuum-coated with carbon and shadowed with gold/palladium for bright field work. A drop of plastic solution (Bedacryl 122X in benzene) was allowed to harden on top of this and then this composite film could quite easily be stripped from the glass, removing with it the tranferred material. An A.E.I. EM6 microscope was used for the electron optical studies.

The bulk shear strengths of the polymers were measured in a simple jig (figure 1) which sheared cylindrical specimens. The axis of the cylinders was perpendicular

I6-2

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

254 Christine M. Pooley and D. Tabor

to the direction of pulling and the specimen sheared simultaneously across two

parallel planes. The jig fitted on to a Tensometer testing machine and specimens were sheared at 1 mm s- over a range of temperatures.

3. THE FRICTION OF PTFE

(a) Ambient temperature

In PTFE, the planar zigzag backbone characteristic of hydrocarbon polymers is twisted into a gentle helix to accommodate the bulky fluorine atoms (Bunn & Howells 1954; Clark & Muus i962). This helical structure leads to a very rigid

rod-like molecule which has a very smooth profile. The type of PTFE used in

this first study was a granular polymer, about 70 0 crystalline, supplied by I.C.I. Plastics Ltd. Friction measurements were carried out at a sliding speed of 1 mm s- and a normal load of 1 kgf (1 kgf ; 9.8 N).

Makinson & Tabor (I964) described two friction regimes, a low friction regime, u < 0.1, under usual conditions, and a high friction regime, u = 0.1 to 0.3, under special conditions of high speeds or low temperatures. The two regimes were

characterized by different transfer. Our experiments show that even at ambient

temperature and moderate speeds the two friction regimes may exist if conditions are carefully set.

When a fresh- slider of PTFE without any residual orientation is slid over the

glass substrate the static friction value, It,, is high, 1as 0.2. This value falls quickly as soon as sliding begins to the usual kinetic value of jak -0.06 (figure 2a). If this PTFE slider is moved to a clean piece of glass and slid again parallel to

the first track the initial static friction, 4a8, is never greater than about I,u 0.07, i.e. not more than 10 to 20 0 higher than the subsequent low 4ak value: the first high value (as , 0.2) is not repeated. This behaviour is reproducible however many times the slider is moved parallel to the first track, either in the forward or backward direction (figure 2b).

However, if the slider is rotated about its axis through 900 and then a fresh track made parallel to the others the very high static friction is again given (figure 2c). The friction drops to the kinetic value as soon as sliding begins. And

if the slider is rotated out of its previous orientation before each new track is made, or if a track is made at 90? to the previous one, the high static friction always occurs. This behaviour, which is also observed on other smooth substrates, suggests that PTFE can only behave as a low friction material after it has been suitably oriented. It is important to an understanding of the friction behaviour of PTFE to make a sharp distinction between the two regions and to treat each region as a separate process.

In its high friction behaviour PTFE behaves almost 'normally', that is, like other polymers. The frictional shear strength, s, as calculated from 3 = FPA is of the same order of magnitude as the bulk shear strength. We conclude, by analogy with other polymers, that the bulk properties of PTFE are governing

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Friction and molecular structure 255

the friction in this region. However, this explanation cannot account for the low

friction value w:hich is the usual behaviour as soon as sliding begins, nor for the

low static friction values on second and subsequent traversals when the orientation

0.2 -, (a)

0.1

0 10 20 x/MM

0.2 (b)

0.1 .

0 10 20

(c)

0.2-

0.1

0 10 20

FIGuRE 2. High and low friction in PTFE. Coefficient of friction It plotted against dis- tance x travelled along glass slide. (a) first traversal; high static friction followed by low kinetic value. (b) Second traversal parallel to first; static friction is about the same as the kinetic value. (c) Another traversal after slider has been turned through 900 about its axis. High static friction again.

is not changed. The results suggest that the low friction represents very easy

sliding between the PTFE chains once they have been aligned and results from the rigidity and smooth profile of the molecule. The rest of this paper will be concerned with presenting further evidence on PTFE and other polymers to support this model. All references to the 'stick region' henceforth mean the high

static friction region, unless otherwise stated, and 'static friction' means the values given in this region.

(b) The effect of temperature

The effect described at room temperature of high static friction followed by low kinetic friction is observed over quite a wide temperature range (table 1).

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

256 Christine M. Pooley and D. Tabor

The frictional shear strengths ss and Sk, calculated from s = 41aW/-nd2 where W is the load and d the track width, are also given in this table. The frictional shear

strength in the static region is compared with the measured bulk shear strength

at each temperature.

The static friction value does not vary much with temperature in this range.

This small change corresponds to the fact that as the shear strength ss diminishes

the area of contact increases, and suggests that bulk properties are important in

determining s8. The quantitative agreement between ss and the bulk shear strength

TABLE 1. THE FRICTION OF PTFE: EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE

Load 1 kgf, speed 1 mm s-1. bulk

slhear

strength, ratio

temperature pu, dk d Ss Sk Sb Sb/S, 0C mm kgf mm-2 kgf mm-2 kgf mm-2

ambient 0.17 0.060 0.6 0.61 0.210 2.32 3.8 50 0.15 0.040 0.7 0.38 0.107 1.20 3.2 100 0.14 0.030 0.9 0.22 0.048 0.86 3.9

150 0.14 0.024 1.0 0.18 0.031 0.60 3.3

Sb is not very good. However, the ratio Sb/Ss is nearly constant over the whole temperature range, and suggests that the bulk properties of PTFE are controlling the friction behaviour in this region despite the difference in absolute values. The

discrepancy could arise from a number of factors: 1. The use of an apparent area of contact 4-rcd2 instead of the real area of contact

in calculating ss.

2. The different test conditions in the two cases. Although macroscopically the

same shear mode was used in each test and they were carried out at the same speed, we have no information about the conditions in the failure zone itself where

localized stresses and high strains would cause large differences in yield values.

A similar ratio is also found in other polymers (see below) which suggests that the

different geometries of the tests are the main reason for the discrepanlcy. Tn a dif- ferent geometrical arrangement Towle (I97I) has recently found a much closer agreement between s3 and Sb.

We can also see the importance of bulk properties by plotting the yield pressure 4W/7rd2 as a function of temperature and comparing this with the variation of bulk shear strength with temperature (figure 3). The curves vary in a very similar manner.

The kinetic friction changes much more rapidly with temperature. The dif-

ferences in the two frictional shear strengths is best seen by plotting lg s against

1/T for each process (figure 4). Activation energies can be calculated from the slopes of the curves and have the values of 15.5 kJ/mol in the kinetic region and 10 kJ/mol in the static region. The physical significance of these energies is not

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Friction and molecular 8tructure 257

3 \

0 50 100 150

temperaturel0C

FIGUiRE 3. The variation of bulk shear strength (o) and yield pressure (n) with temperature for PTFE.

10.0 _

1.0

0.1 _

0.01 l I 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5

103 T-1/K-1

FIGUR?E 4. Arrhenius plots s so exp (QIRT) for the variation of shear strengths with temperature. o, Shear strength calculated from kinetic friction, Q = 15.5 kJImol; ., shear strength calculated from static friction, Q = 10 kJ/mol; a, bulk shear strength, Q = 10 kJ/mol.

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

258 Christine M. Pooley and D. Tabor

clear; the important point is that the values are different for each process which suggests that each region is characterized by separate temperature-dependent

processes. The temperature dependence of the bulk shear strength is also given in

figure 4; the activation energy is the same as that for shear in the static region.

4. THE TRANSFER OF PTFE

(a) Optical observations

When the friction track is studied optically in reflected light the transfer in the

stick region shows up very easily. Tt consists of lumps and slabs up to 20 Pan across, and streaky fibres pulled out into the sliding direction (figure 5a, plate 15).

This transfer is similar to that which Mlakinson & Tabor (I964) described in their

high friction regime. The thickness of this material was measured subsequlently by

interference techniques and found to vary in the range 50 to 500 nm thick. (At

higher loads the lumps tend to be both larger and thicker.)

This is all that is visible initially. However, if the glass slide is dipped into dis-

tilled water very briefly and then allowed to dry it can be seen that the lumps and

streaks are interspersed in a more coherent film (figure 5b). The film is extremely

thin; interference measurements suggest a value of less than 10 nm. lIt is onily seen after this water treatment because it has been loosened from the glass and

begins to break and curl over onto itself.

This high transfer region covers only one diameter of the contact area, and all

changes in orientation occur in this area. As soon as sliding begins the high transfer

tails off very rapidly over another half of a contact area diameter, and in the slip regioni usually nothing is visible optically until the water treatment has been

carried out. In the slip region the film that previously was interspersed with lumps

and streaks is seen on its own all along the track, and even under the slider at the

end of the track when movement has stopped (figure 6a, plate 16). It is very

split and striated so that the main impression is one of fibres running parallel to the sliding direction, (figure 6b). There is some ambiguity here as to how much of

the splitting has been caused by the water treatment. A more coherent example

of film is shown in figure 6c, but the earlier example is more usual at room temper-

ature. This point is discussed again later. The films are highly birefringent; the higher refractive index is along this sliding direction, indicating that the molecular

chains are parallel to the direction of sliding.

(b) Electron microscope observations

A better method of studying the transfer is provided by the electron microscope.

This eliminates any ambiguity of the effect of water on the transferred films and

provides a better means of measuring the thickness. Figure 7, plate 17, is a series of electron micrographs of the transferred film. lIt can be seen more positively than the optical pictures showed, that we are observing a broken film which has sometimes curled at the edges and not just a series of pulled-out fibres. The film

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Pooley & Tabor Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A, volume 329, plate 15

w __~~~~~~~~lo

_.4

FIGURE 5. The transfer of PTFE in the static region. Room temperature. (a) No water treatment; lumps only visible. (b) Water treatment; lumps with underlying film rendered visible. Here and elsewhere an arrow indicates sliding direction.

FIGURE 8. Electron diffraction pattern from films such as those showni in figure 7.

(Facing p. 258) This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC

All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Pooley & Tabor Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A, volume 329, plate 16

-C- .. m ~~~~~~~'m

A- 4Opm

. _ _~~~~~~~~~si

FIGURE 6. The transfer of PTFE in the kinetic region. All water treated. (a) Area under slider at end of traversal. (6) Part of a very split film. (c) A more coherent film.

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Pooley & Tabor Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A, volume 329, plate 17

The~~~. thicnes 0scluae.rmte uldeg saot2 n.(bt oo emeatr

11 X. 4%-., .

.44

* ..

FIGURE 7. Electron micrographs of the transfer of PTFE in the kinetic region. (a) Water- treated film at room temperature. The two pieces of film on the carbon are show-n by F. The thickness is calculated from the curled edge as about 2 nm. (b) Room temperature film (F) which has not been water-treated. Note fine structure on the film. (c) Film trans- ferred at 150 ?C which is covering most of the area shown here. Not water treated, but note curled edge at bottom left. (d) Gap in carbon bridged by PTFE film.

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Pooley & Tabor Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A, volume 329, plate 18

_I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~_

FIGURE 9. Replicas of fracture surfaces of PTFE (a) Sintered and cooled slowly; band

width % 300nm or 3.3 t?m. (b) Sintered and quenched; the bands are not as clearly defined as in (a) and several are marked by arrows; band with % 50 nm. or 0.05 t?m (c) Non- sintered; particle size 0.2 ,um.

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Pooley & Tabor Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A, volume 329, plate 19

.:'t~~~~~~~~N

' *s~~~~

(a),

FIGURE 10. The transfer of Teflon-FEP. (a) Optical micrograph showing broken film; this is far more lumpy than the PTFE film. (b) Electron micrograph showing one such lump

about 100 nm thick and the underlying thin film x 30 000. (c) Electron diffraction pattern from the transferred material.

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Pooley & Tabor Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A, volume 329, plate 20

FIGURE 12. Electron micrographs of polyethylene transfer on clean glass. (a) Low density polyethylene, showing one thick lump about 100 nm thick which is characteristic of high transfer and high friction. (b) High density PE, showing very thin streaks (5 nm thick) in low friction regime. (c) extended chain PE, with transfer similar to high density PE in low friction regime. All micrographs at same magnification.

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Friction and molecular structure 259

in figure 7 a has been water-treated, that in figure 7b was not treated, but is still

very split, probably owing to the stresses in the film when it is first drawn being

released as the slider moves on. This particular example does not show any

curling at the edges whereas treated films often curl. Usually, however, the brief water treatment does not much disrupt the film and often helps in delineating

the boundaries.

The main point brought out by this electron microscope study is that the

transferred film is much thinner than previously thought. (The thicknesses were

calculated from shadow lengths.) In untreated films such as that in figure 7b the

thickness is not measurable. The film is only visible because it splits so very easily

and the shadowing material granulates differently on the PTFE and on the carbon

background giving a characteristic fine structure to the film. Estimates of the film

thickness can only be obtained when the film has curled at the edges, as in figure 7 a.

This curled edge is about 5 nm thick. If the curled edge represents a double layer

of film, the film will be 2.5 nm thick. The diameter of the PTFE molecule is

0.566 nm (Clark & Muus I962); the film is therefore only a few molecules thick.

There is some ambiguity in interpreting film thicknesses from curled edges because

it is not known how much the curled edge stands proud from the surface; this

must be regarded as the best estimate that can be achieved at present. The first

two pictures are representative of the behaviour of PTFE in the slip region at

room temperature. At higher temperatures the same type of transfer occurs, but

the film is more coherent and covers much more of the track (figure 7c).

The film in the slip region occasionally contains some thicker streaks. These are

never greater than 10 nm thick and could possibly represent very curled material

and not genuine streaks. However an upper limit of 10 nm is probably a realistic

figure for the thickness of the film in the slip region and the presence of these

streaks helps to give the film its fibrous texture. This figure accounts for the values

obtained in optical measurements where there was a natural tendency to view only

the thicker material on which realistic measurements could be made.

The method used for removing the PTFE film from the glass is very similar

to techniques used in replicating other surfaces. However this method actually

removes the PTFE and does not solely replicate the surface. This can be seen in

figure 7 d where the carbon film has split and the PTFE has been drawn across the

gap. Also electron diffraction patterns were obtained from the transferred films

(figure 8, plate 15). These are identical to that given by Makinson & Tabor (I964)

and confirm that the polymer chains lie along the sliding direction.

The transfer in the stick region, the high friction region, was seen optically to consist of lumps and streaks interspersed with a thin film. In the electron micro-

scope the film is shown to be the same as that occurring in the slip region. It has the

same fine structure and the thickness may be as low as 2 nm. The difference is that,

whereas in the slip region this film is the only transfer, in the stick region it is never seen on its own, but is always interspersed with thicker material.

These observations suggest that the high static friction and lumpy transfer are

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

260 Christine M. Pooley and D. Tabor

due to strong interfacial adhesion and shearing within the bulk of the polymer. This

shearing alines the chains in the slider. When further sliding occurs in the same

direction more material is drawn from the slider in the form of thin film only a few

molecules thick, by slip between the alined chains. This is an easy process and is

responsible for the low kinetic friction observed.

5. PTFE: REPEATED TRAVERSALS

Experiments so far have been carried out with a PTFE slider on a glass sub-

strate, which is the best geometry for the observation of the two processes in

PTFE and for studying the thin film transfer. The results have shown that good

adhesion can occur between PTFE and glass and that the adhesion is stronger than

the force required to draw out the thin film. When a glass slider is used on a PTFE

substrate the high static friction is given only on the first traversal, and some PTFE is transferred to the glass slider. On all subsequent tracks the static friction

is only about 20 % higher than the kinetic value, even though the slider has been turned out of its previous orientation. It appears that the adhesion between PTFE

and PTFE-covered glass is not strong enough to allow this bulk shear, high transfer

process to continue.

A study of repeated sliding of the PTFE slider over the same track on a glass

substrate supports this conclusion. In this case the behaviour depends on the

temperature. At room temperature a high static friction value is given on each

repeated traversal over the first thin film if the slider is turned out of its previous

orientation each time. Further high transfer occurs on each occasion. At 100 0C

there is no high static friction on subsequent traversals of the first thin film, and

there is no high transfer. The difference in behaviour is due to the coverage of the

glass by the PTFE film on the first traversal. At room temperature the coverage

is low (see figure 7a), and there is still enough free glass surface after one traversal

for good adhesion between the PTFE slider and glass to occur on subsequent

traversals. So further large lumps are pulled out and a high friction value given.

At 100 0C the coverage is much better, the first PTFE film is more coherent and the adhesion between the PTFE slider and the PTFE film on the glass is not strong enough to allow further large lumps to be pulled out. Therefore no further high

static friction values are given. (If the first track is made at 100 0C and then a second track made at room temperature on top of this, high static values still do not

occur.) In all these cases high friction in PTFE is only possible when transfer corresponding to bulk shear can occur.

It is difficult to determine whether the thin film in the kinetic region builds

up on repeated traversals of the same track. At room temperature there seems to

be very little building up. It may be that the adhesion between the PTFE and the

film formed after the first traversal is such that the force to draw further films

is of the same order of magnitude as the adhesion. At 100 ?C the force to draw

further films is reduced and some further transfer does occur. On subsequent

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Friotion and molecular 8tructure 261

traversals the gaps in the first film are filled so that eventually no free glass surface

is visible. But we have not found it possible to build up thick films in this way.

6. PTFE: THE RELATION BETWEEN FRICTION AND

CRYSTAL TEXTURE

When a sample of PTFE is fractured in liquid nitrogen the fracture surface is

seen to be covered with bands several ,m long and about 0.5 ,m wide. The surface

of each band is covered with striations about 20 nm apart, which are perpendicular

to the length of the band (Bunn, Cobbold & Palmer I958). Speerschneider & Li

(I962) suggested that the striations represented alternate crystalline and amor-

phous layers in one crystallite. Using this model, Makinson & Tabor (I964) sug-

gested that in a friction experiment shear may occur in the amorphous regions of

the bands. The individual crystal slices would then slide over one another and be

laid down on the surface rather like a pack of cards being spread on a table. This

mechanism seemed probable because the 20 nm distance between the striations

was in!good agreement with their measured film thickness. The present experiments show however that the usual film thickness is of the order of 2 nm and not 20 nm.

Further evidence which discounts this mechanism is presented below.

First, Symons (I963) and Sherratt (I966) have offered an alternative explanation

of this band structure. They suggest that the fracture surface represents a cross-

section of one crystallite and the striations are the result of a random fracture

process through the crystal, with the amorphous material located between the

bands. This model is more plausible than the first one as it is more in keeping

with the known crystal structures of other polymers (Geil I963). Low angle X-ray work in this laboratory (H. D. Flack, unpublished) showed no evidence of a re-

flexion characteristic of a 20 nm spacing, which suggests that the striations are

artefacts due to the fracture process, and not a molecularly significant parameter.

Secondly, the crystal texture can be altered by changing the fabrication con- ditions (Speerschneider & Li I962). In this study we took three samples of granular PTFE which had had different treatments. The first sample was sintered, then

slowly cooled from the melt and it had a band width of 300 nm (figure 9a, plate 18). The second was sintered, then quenched (band width, 50 nm) (figure 9b). The

third sample was preformed under pressure but not sintered. It does not have the

characteristic band structure but details of the polymerization particles 0.2 Vm in diameter can be seen on the surface (figure 9c) (Sperati & Starkweather I96I).

Although friction values varied a little due to difference in the hardness of the samples, all three samples showed the same behaviour of high static friction followed by low kinetic friction, and all three showed the same high and low transfer characteristics. There were no differences in the properties of the thin film; all

gave identical diffraction patterns. The crystalline texture is therefore not im- portant in determining the friction of PTFE.

To ensure that the type of PTFE used was not affecting the behaviour three

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

262 Christine M. Pooley and D. Tabor

samples of dispersion grade PTFE comparable in crystalline texture with the three granular samples were also tested. Again, they all showed the same behaviour

and there were no differences between granular and dispersion polymer in the friction and transfer.

7. THE BEHAVIOUTR OF OTHER FLUOROCARBON POLYMERS

A range of copolymers of tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) with hexafluoropropylene

(HFP) with different mole%0 of HFP were studied. The range included the com- mercial copolymer, Teflon-FEP. In these copolymers a bulky perfluoromethyl (CF3) group replaces a fluorine atom at intervals along the carbon chain. The

molecules still have a helical structure (Bolz & Eby (I965) studied the com-

TABLE 2. THE FRICTION OF SOME FLUOROCARBON POLYMERS

Load 1 kgf; speed 1 mm s-- bulk shear ratio

polymer temperature It,, /k Ss strength Sb/ss ?C kgf/mm2 kgf/mm2

PTFE ambient 0.17 0.060 0.61 2.32 3.8 150 0.14 0.024 0.18 0.60 3.3

Teflon-FEP (9.0 nole % ambient 0.22 0.19 0.69 1.80 2.6 EFP) 50 0.22 0.20 0.46 1.44 3.1

100 0.23 0.21 0.27 0.77 2.8 150 0.24 0.21 0.14 0.44 3.1

Other TFE-EFP copo- lymers (mole % EFP)

0.4 ambient 0.12 0.04 0.61 150 0.13 0.02 0.16

2.4 ambient 0.18 0.09 0.70 150 0.17 0.04 0.20

12.0 ambient 0.25 0.19 0.75 150 0.25 0.20 0.22

PCTFE ambient 0.28 0.28 1.40 50 0.42 0.40 1.40 100 0.50 0.48 1.25 150 0.36 0.36 0.45

mercial copolymer) but the bulky CF3 group spoils the smooth profile of the molecule. Polychlorotrifluoroethylene (PCTFE) was also included in this study. In this polymer one chlorine atom replaces one fluorine to give the repeat unit -CFCI-CF2-. This molecule also has a helical structure (Ermolina, Markova & Kargin 1957) but chlorine, being larger than fluorine, again breaks up the ileat symmetry characteristic of the PTFE molecule. The friction values for these polymers are given in table 2. All friction measurements were carried out over a range of temperatures between ambient and 150 'C. Some representative values are given in the table and some PTFE values are given again for comparison purposes.

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Friction and molecular structure 263

We first compare the commercial copolymer, Teflon-FEP, with PTFE. The

difference in behaviour is remarkable for such a small difference in structure. In

contrast to PTFE there is no significant difference between static and kinetic

friction, and this behaviour is found over a wide temperature range. The frictional

shear strength (s = F/A) is comparable with the bulk shear strength, at each

temperature. The ratio Sb/Ss is the same over the whole temperature range and very similar to that found with PTFE in its high-friction regime. Further there

are no differences between the transfer in the static and kinetic regions. The

transfer consists of large lumps and streaks interspersed with a thin film all along

the track (figure 1Oa, plate 19). The transfer is very similar to the high transfer

region in PTFE but here the behaviour is not limited to the stick region. The

average thickness of the transferred material is about 100 nm but thicker lumps

also occur at higher loads. The underlying film is indistinguishable in bright field

-from that given with PTFE (figure lOb). It has a similar thickness (about 2 nm)

and shows the same fine structure. The diffraction pattern from the transfer

(figure lOb) is slightly different, showing an expanded unit cell (a = 0.575 nm as

opposed to a = 0.565 nm in PTFE) and a less well-defined helical structure along

lbhe molecule. This is in agreement with the X-ray fibre pattern of Bolz & Eby

(i965). The results suggest that when the molecular structure is modified to destroy

ibhe smooth profile of the molecule, slip between the chains (giving the thin film) iLs always accompanied by more severe plucking and transfer. The kinetic friction

ibherefore remains high, and characteristic of a bulk shear process.

A study of the other copolymers shows that the process of inhibiting the easy

slip mechanism is gradual, and comes into play as the number of side chains is

increased. The copolymer with 0.4 mole % HFP is identical with PTFE in its transfer behaviour and the friction values are very similar. The copolymer with

12 mole % HFP is identical with FEP. In the intermediate copolymer (2.4 mole % HFIFP) there is a difference between static and kinetic friction but it is not so great

as that with PTFE. Similarly there is a difference in the transfer in the two regions Fbut the kinetic region contains some thick lumps.

Results with PCTFE are consistent with this general picture though the

lbransfer is only high above 100 'C. In this polymer the smooth profile is destroyed lby the presence of the larger chlorine atoms. We conclude that for a sequence of

semi-crystalline polymers which are chemically and crystallographically similar, ibut vary in their molecular profiles, the molecular structure appears to play an iimportant role in controlling the friction and transfer.

8. THE BEHAVIOUR OF THE FLUOROCARBON POLYMERS

ON ROUGH SUBSTRATES

Shooter & Tabor (I952) reported that the friction of PTFE was independent of the nature of the substrate. This is only true as long as smooth substrates (e.g.

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

264 Christine M. Pooley and D. Tabor

glass, polished metals) are used. When PTFE is slid on rough surfaces (abraded steel and polyester diffraction gratings with a saw-tooth profile) both the friction and the transfer change considerably (figure 11). As the roughness increases the

lowv friction is inhibited the friction remains at the static value even during sliding

and large lumps of polymer are pulled out and deposited all along the track. The

rough surface digs deeply into the softer polymer and so prevents the easy drawing in the surface layers of the slider.

0.3,

_2~~~~~~~~~~~~~

0.2 - _O._

0.o

;~ 0.

0.01 0.1 1.0

mean height of s'urface rouighness/ttm FiGunE II. The variation of kinetic friction with suLbstrate roughness. 0, PTFE on glass;

EI1, PTFE on diffraction grating replicas; *, PTFE on abraded steel; El1, Teflon-FEP on all surfaces; IM2, PCTFE on all1 surfaces.

When Teflon-PEP and PCTFE are slid on a rough surface the fricetion and transfer do not change because easy slip has already been inhibited by alterations to the molecular structure.

9. TILE FRICTION AND TRANSFER OF SOME IIYDROCARBON POLYMERS

We shall now compare the behaviour of the fluorocarbons with that of a seconid group of semi-crystalline thermoplastic polymer, the polyethylenes. The poly- ethylenes have a different molecular structure from the fluorocarbons in that the chamn conformation is a planar zigzag. Three polyethylenes of different densities were studied. They were, a low density polyethylene, p ==0.92, which has about 30 si'de groups every 1000 carbon atoms, a high density polyethylene, p =0.96, with about 3 side chains every 1000 carbon atoms, and a so-called extended chain polyethylene, p =0.99 (Wunderlich & Arakawa, i964). This was studied because it has the same crystal texture as PTFE. Polypropylene was also inceluded in the study for comparison purposes.

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Friction and molecular 6tructure 265

The friction values of these polymers on rough and smooth substrates and at

-various temperatures are given in table 3. The pattern of behaviour that was found

for the fluorocarbons also applies to the polyethylenes. Low density PE has the

most bulky molecule with a side chain every 30 carbon atoms. It is comparable

in this respect to Teflon-FEP (although the side chains are longer) and its friction

TABLE 3. THE FRICTION OF SOME POLYETHYLENES

Load 1 kgf; sliding speed 1 mm s-I bulk

sub- shear ratio

polymer strate temperature ft8 u Ss Sk strength 8bls8 ?C kgf mm-2 kgf mm-2 kgf mm-2

low density glass 20 0.30 0.30 0.38 0.38 1.17 3.1 PE 50 0.36 0.36 0.27 0.27 0.73 2.8

80 0.32 0.32 0.17 0.17 0.47 2.8 steel 20 0.28 0.28 (abraded)

high density glass 20 0.13 0.08 0.65 0.41 2.45 3.8 PE 50 0.18 0.11 0.46 0.28 1.81 3.9

100 0.20 0.125 0.30 0.19 1.09 3.7 steel 20 0.15 0.15 (abraded)

extended chain glass 20 0.12 0.07 0.60 0.36 PE 50 0.17 0.10 0.43 0.25

100 0.20 0.12 0.30 0.17

polypropylene glass 20 0.27 0.27 1.5 50 0.33 0.33 1.5 100 0.34 0.34 1.2

lbehaviour is similar. That is, there is no difference between the static and kinetic friction over the whole temperature range, and the frictional shear strength,

= F/A, is the same order of magnitude as the bulk shear strength. We conclude

lbhat bulk properties control the friction of low density PE. The transfer also

supports a bulk shear mechanism (figure 12a, plate 20). Large lumps are pulled out of the polymer slider and deposited all along the track.

The other two polyethylenes have much more streamlined molecules and are comparable with PTFE in this respect. These two polymers are very similar in their friction. Although the effect is not as marked as with PTFE, they both show

ibhe behaviour first noted in PTFE of a high static friction followed by low kinetic friction. (The high value is only obtained as long as the slider is turned out of its previous orientation before sliding. When a fresh track is made parallel to the others without first altering the orientation the static friction is less than 10% higher than the sliding value.) It appears that, as with PTFE, the friction of the linear polyethylenes is controlled by bulk properties in the static region. Bulk shear in the static region involves some orientation of the chains so that in the kinetic region easy slip between the alined chains can occur. It has already been

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

266 Christine M. Pooley and D. Tabor

noted that high density PE and the extended chain polymer have very few side chains. Low density PE on the other hand has many side chains which will

inhibit an easy slip mechanism. A study of the friction of these polymers on rough steel substrates supports this model (table 3). The friction is virtually unchanged

in low density PE but in high density PE the kinetic friction stays at its static value.

With high density polyethylenes, the high friction is generally accompanied by high transfer, low friction by limited transfer. In the static region the transfer can be seen optically and consists mainly of long streaks, about 100 nm thick. The transfer in the kinetic region is so limited that it can only be seen in the electron microscope (figures 12b, c). The track is covered with streaks of polymer

about I V,m long, several 10 nm wide and less than 10 nm thick. They are oriented in the sliding direction. The particles are quite discrete; they appear the samne both

before and after water treatment and there is no evidence to suggest that they were originally part of a curled film.

The high density polyethylenes are therefore similar to PTFE in that high

transfer accompanies the high friction in the static region. They are similar in that low friction can occur once the chains have been oriented, and this is accompanied

by limited transfer. They differ from PTFE in the nature of this limited transfer. In both cases the transfer is confined to a surface region less than 10 nm thick but

in PTFE it takes the form of a thin film whereas in the polyethylenes there is -no detectable film, and the transfer takes the form of discrete streaks.

(a) Friction and crystal texture

As with PTFE, no relation has been found between low friction values and crystal texture. There is a large difference between the crystalline texture of high density PE and extended chain PE. The former has the well-known spherulitic

structure (Geil I963) whereas the latter has a band structure very similar to that found in PTFE (Geil, Anderson, Wunderlich & Arakawa 1964). However they are almost identical in their friction and transfer behaviour.

Bely, Savkin & Sviridvouok (197I) reported that the friction of polypropylene increased with increase in spherulite size. In this work high density polyethylene

was heat treated to produce spherulites between 20 and 200 Vm in diameter. There were very small differences in the friction of these samples, due to change3s in the hardness, but there were no differences in the transfer. We conclude that the spherulite size is not controlling the transfer and only governs the friction inasmuch as it causes small changes in strength properties.

10. OTHER POLYMERS

We have so far considered only a limited range of semi-crystalline polymers and these polymers have shown some simple relations between friction, transfer, and molecular structure. A series of amorphous polymers were also studied in an

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Friction and molecular structure 267

attempt to make the above findings of more general application. The results are

shown in table 4. The static and kinetic friction values are identical for these

jpolymers, the friction value is high and it does not vary much with temperature. These results are similar to those given with several crystalline polymers, and with

-PTFE in its static region. The main difference is that the high friction is not

accompanied by the transfer of large fragments in these amorphous polymers.

O3nly at temperatures where marked softening occurs and the frictional shear

strength drops sharply (ca. 100 ?C) does the transfer become noticeable.

TABLE 4. THE FRICTION OF SOME AMORPHOUS POLYMERS

Load 0.5 kgf; speed 1 mm s-'

polymer temperature /t b d s = 41tWfrd2 0C mm kgf mm-2

polystyrene ambient 0.30 0.45 0.95 50 0.35 0.50 0.90

100 0.75 2.30 0.09 150 0.45 4.50 0.01

PMMA ambient 0.30 0.5 0.76 50 0.32 0.5 0.76 100 0.20 1.2 0.09 150 0.40 2.4 0.04

PVC ambient 0.30 0.5 0.76 50 0.38 0.6 0.70

100 0.30 1.2 0.13 150 0.20 2.0 0.03

11. DisCUSSION

(a) Friction and transfer

The results described in this paper show that in the sliding of thermoplastics,

the frictional properties and transfer behaviour fall into a number of fairly simple patterns. These are determined basically by two factors: the strength of adhesion a,t the interface between the sliding bodies and the shear strength of the polymer.

For convenience in what follows we shall define the interfacial shear strength as si, the bulk shear strength as Sb. Clearly if si > Sb shearing will occur in the bulk of t,he polymer at a short distance from the interface: if Si < Sb shearing should

occur truly at the interface. The interfacial adhesion for all the polymers studied is due to van der Waals

forces. For thermoplastics, where there is no chemical crosslinking between the rnolecular chains, these forces must be comparable with the cohesive forces existing within the bulk of the polymer itself. Consequently the transfer depends on two

strength properties, si and Sb which are of the same order of magnitude. The fric- tion is determined by the smaller of these shear strengths; but it also depends on the hardness of the polymer since this determines the area of contact. Usually, however, the hardness is closely related to Sb. The detailed behaviour varies from

one polymer to another.

I7 VoI. 329. A.

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

268 Christine M. Pooley and D. Tabor

(i) Amorphous and semi-crystalline polymers

With amorphous materials (table 4) the interfacial adhesion is strong but at room temperature is not as strong as the bulk (si < Sb). Consequently although the coefficient of friction is high there is no bulk transfer of the polymer. Minute

transfer on a molecular scale may occur but it has not been detected. Sliding

(a) (b) nobulk (c) g 1.5 1.5 - transfer 1.5 v

R no bulk

transfer

.o4 no bulk 0 1.0 transfer 1.0 \ 1.0

0~~

x 5X\bulk

0 bulktransfer transfer bulk

transfer ,

bulk

transfer

0 50 100 150 0 50 100 150

T/?C T/?C room temp.

FIGURE 13. Variation of frictional shear strength with temperature for both static and kinetic friction. (a) Amorphous polymers: A, polystyrene; 0, PMMA; Q-I, PVC. (b) Semi- crystalline polymers: I, polypropylene; *, PCTFE; @, TFE-HFP; M, low density PE; x, high density PE; +, PTFE (x, +, static friction only). (c) Summary of results at room temperature for all polymers. For a frictional shear strength greater than ca. 0.75 kgf mm-2 there is no bulk transfer. Sliding in all cases on clean glass.

appears to occur at the interface. If the temperature is raised the bulk strength of the polymer decreases and near the glass transition temperature there is a sudden

onset of wear. Lumps of polymer are transferred to the hard substrate presumably because now si > Sb. The behaviour is shown in figure 13a. The friction depends on a balance between the increase in area of contact due to softening and the

decrease in Sb. Consequently with some polymers it increases whilst with others it decreases.

The transfer behaviour of semicrystalline polymers which contain many bulky side groups (low density PE, TFE-HIFP copolymer, PCTFE and polypropylene) is summarized in figure 13b. For these materials the static friction and the kinetic friction are equal (of order , = 0.2 to 0.4). It is interesting to note that their friction and transfer behaviour resemble the static friction and transfer observed with PTFE and high density PE. As figure 13c indicates we can generalize for all these materials and state that, at room temperature, if the shear strength in

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Friction and molecular structure 269

the friction junctions is greater than about 0.75 kgf mm-2 no bulk transfer occurs:

if less than this bulk transfer does occur. We note that the interfacial shear strengths

for the amorphous polymers, for PCTFE and polypropylene are above this value.

(ii) Semi-crystalline polymers without side groups

A new factor emerges if the long chain molecules contain no side groups or

very few. The behaviour is exemplified by PTFE and high density PE. With

PTFE the static friction at room temperature is of order It - 0.2; the shear strength of the junctions is about 0.6 kgf mm-2. This is less than si and bulk transfer occurs. However, as soon as sliding begins the friction falls by a factor of 3 or 4 and the

transfer is of a completely different nature. It consists of very thin filaments

of PTFE which are drawn out over the surface with the molecular chains oriented

in the sliding direction. These filaments form a rather tenuous film about 2 nm thick (i.e. a few molecular chains in thickness). At higher temperatures the film

is more continuous but its thickness is about the same. The frictional shear strength at room temperature is now about 0.2 kgf mM-2 and is sufficient to draw out a very

thin film from the slider on to the glass surface. Repeated sliding over the same

track gives the same low friction and scarcely any increase in thickness of the

transferred film. We deduce that the adhesion between an oriented slider and an

oriented film is able to transmit a shear stress just equal to that required to draw

a film (0.2 kgf mm-2). Consequently sliding in this case may occur truly at the

interface between slider and film or it may involve a little extra drawing of polymer without any perceptible change in friction.

We may quote three other friction experiments. First, if a worn slider is slid over a clean surface in a direction parallel to its original low friction direction, the friction is low and the transfer continues to consist of a thin transferred

oriented film (figure 2 b). Secondly, if a worn slider is slid at right angles to its

original low friction direction on a clean surface the initial static friction is high and the transfer lumpy (figure 2c). Thirdly, if a worn slider is slid at right angles

to its original low friction direction on an oriented film there is no high static friction and no further transfer. We conclude that strong adhesion in a favourable

orientation leads to film formation and low friction - this is the feature which makes PTFE unusual. Strong adhesion in an unfavourable orientation produces

high friction and transfer. Weak adhesion in any orientation leads to low friction and very little transfer.

The low friction regime in PTFE involves an interfacial shear strength s which

-is both temperature and speed dependent. If the temperature is increased from 20 to 150 ?C, s decreases by a factor of almost 7. It is possible to plot lg s against

I/T and deduce an activation energy (see figure 4), though its physical significance iis not obvious. Similarly if the sliding speed is reduced by a factor of 50 the value

of s is reduced by a factor of 2 (Pooley I97I). We should therefore expect that if ibhe speed is increased by a factor of 100, s should increase by a corresponding ifactor. A simple experiment was carried out in which the slider in its low friction

17-2

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

270 Christine M. Pooley and D. Tabor

condition was slid manually over a thin transferred film at a speed of about 10 cm s-1. Because of inertia it was not possible to measure the friction but it

was possible to observe that lumpy transfer now occurred on top of the thin

oriented film. The shear strength between slider and film is now sufficient to

pluck out polymer fragments from the slider. This confirms Mrs Makinson's

observation that at high speeds (or low temperatures) the friction of PTFE is high and the transfer relatively large.

Broadly speaking a similar pattern of behaviour is observed with the poly- ethylenes which contain few or no side groups. The initial static friction is of the

order pa = 0.15 and is accompanied by the transfer of long streaks about 100 nm

thick (at room temperature 8s 0.7 kgf mm-2). Thereafter the sliding is smooth, the friction about one half the static value and the transfer very slight. Some

very thin streaks less than 10 nm thick are observed. If there is a film it is too thin to be detected but electron diffraction studies show that the thin streaks

consist of material in which the molecular chains are oriented parallel to the direction of sliding.

(b) Interfacial shear strengths and surface energy

It is interesting to compare the interfacial shear strength in the low friction regime for PTFE and high density PE. The results are plotted in figure 14. It is seen that over the temperature range 20 to 100 ?C the shear strength for PTFE is about one half that of PE.

In a completely different type of experiment Dr B. Scruton (I97I) has carried out measurements in our laboratory on the shear strength of monolayers or multi- layers of long chain fatty acids deposited on a smooth glass surface. By using fired glass sliders of different radii of curvature, and loads ranging from a few milligrams to several grams he has been able to vary the contact pressure over a wide range. At low pressures the shear strength is constant: at contact pressures above about 10 kgf mm-2 it begins to rise rapidly with pressures. (Similar effects have recently

been observed with bulk polymer (Towle 1971) and polymer films (Bowers I97I).) The shear strength also varies with film thickness but not markedly so. For a con- tact pressure between I and 10 kgfmm-2, which corresponds to the contact pressures occurring in the polymer friction experiments, his shear strengths are of order 0.2 kgf mm-2 and decrease as the temperature is raised. The results for stearic acid films deposited from a Langmuir trough are shown in figure 14 and it is seen that they are of the same order as those deduced from those polymer friction experiments in which sliding is occurring in a surface region only a few molecules thick with the molecular chains aligned in the direction of sliding. This resemblance suggests that the lubricating action of long chain fatty acids is not associated with the CH3 'heads' sliding over one another but with the sliding of molecules bent over so that the chains are oriented in the sliding direction.

Bowden & Young (I971) have recently studied the shear properties of high density polyethylene specimens where by suitable treatment all the crystallites

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Friction and molecular structure 271

are oriented parallel to one another. They show that shearing occurs by the sliding

oDf chains over one another in the individual crystallites. The critical resolved shear stress at room temperature is 1.5 kgf mm-2. This is somewhat higher than the shear strength we observe in the low friction regime of high density poly-

ethylene (0.4 kgf mm-2) but the ratio is similar to that observed between the measured bulk shear strength and the bulk shear strength calculated from the

~0.2 - 140

0 50 100 150

temperaturej0C

FiGaE 14. Variation of frictional shear strength with temperature for kinetic friction. x, High density PE; +, PTFE; 0, 5 monolayers of stearic acid deposited from Lang- muir trough by the use of a 5 x 10-4 M solution of CaC12 at a pH of 9.

sLtatic friction value (table 3). It may be that in the friction experiments the sliding interface contains many imperfections not present in bulk samples. Alternatively the true area being sheared may be appreciably less than the

geometric area deduced from the track width. Either factor would make the calculated frictional shear stress less than its true value.

In the preceding discussion of figure 13 we noted that for the amorphous

polymers and for polypropylene and PCTFE no bulk transfer occurred at room temperature, presumably because the interfacial adhesion between polymer and glass substrate was less than the bulk strength of the polymer. This adhesion is cLue to van der Waals forces between the polymer and the glass. A simple measure

of this interaction is the critical wetting tension ('y,) of the polymer (Zisman I962) which, within certain limitations, is a measure of its surface energy. For example, Bowers, Clinton & Zisman (I953) found that increasing the amount of chlorine i:n a series of copolymers of tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) and chlorotrifluorethylene (CTFE) produced an increase in yc (from 19 to 31 MJ m-2) which was accompanied by an increase in friction from Jtk = 0.05 to Jtk = 0.3.

The comparable quantities relevant to the polymers used in the present work are given in table 5. It is evident that over this range of materials there is no simple correlation between yc and the frictional shear strength. For example with

the amorphous polymers where ,c is between 33 and 39, s is of order 0.8 to 0.9. For PCTFE where yc is lower (31) the value of s is appreciably higher (1.4). Si4milarly, Teflon-FEP with the lowest value of yc (17) gives bulk transfer so

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

272 Christine M. Pooley and D. Tabor

that it must have an interfacial shear strength greater than 0.7 kgf mm-2 which is

comparable with that of the amorphous polymers. Finally PTFE and high density

PE show two friction regimes, which as far as one knows, are not reflected in

different values of yc. On the other hand some correlations may be meaningful. For example in the low friction regimes, where sliding is essentially between

TABLE 5. FRICTION PROPERTIES AND CRITICAL WETTING TENSION Ye

Y_ coefficient s

polymer mJ m-2 of friction kgf mm--2

PTFE 18.5 P, I 0.2 0.6 18.5 0.06 0.2

Teflon-FEP 17 - 0.2 0.7

PCTFE 31 I-t/Pk O 0-3 1.4 PE low density 31 I5 - 0.3 0.4

PE high density 31 U 0.13 0.65 31 A/k 0.08 0.4

polypropylene 29 0.3 1.5

polystyrene 33 0.3 0.9

PMMA 39 0.3 0.8

PVC 39 0.3 0.8

polymer and polymer, the value of s for PTFE is about half that for high density

PE and yc is in roughly the same ratio. The coefficients of friction themselves do not show so large a difference because for a specified load the area of contact with PTFE is larger than for high density PE. Indeed at room temperature the co- efficients of friction are very similar.

In tnis connexion we may remark that in the 1950s the only polyethylenes that

were commercially available were the low density, highly branched materials.

At that time PTFE was the only generally available linear polymer without bulky

side groups and its low friction was outstanding. With the advent of the high density polyethylenes the frictional properties of PTFE can no longer be considered unique. In fact the transfer with high density PE is generally less than with PTFE and it should therefore prove superior to PTFE as a friction material operating at moderate temperatures. On the other hand in engineering applications the high melting point of PTFE (ca. 320 00) compared with that of polyethylene (ca. 120 0C) offers certain advantages.

(c) The infuence of molecular profile

It is evident that in the low friction regimes of PTFE and high density poly-

ethylene the interaction forces are small and appear to be comparable with those necessary to produce drawing of polymer molecules. If bulky side groups are present in the polymer molecule, the polymer loses its low-friction properties and

becomes a typical 'normal' polymer. If the side groups are fairly long and straggly as with low density polyethylene, the influence of these groups is easy to envisage.

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

Friction and molecutar structure 273

It is more surprising to find that so small a change as a CFF3 group in place of one

fluorine atom can convert PTFE into a relatively high friction material. It is

possible that the catalytic process involved in the formation of FEP produces

fairly long side chains. This would make the influence of the side group more

plausible but there is no evidence to show that this is, in fact, so. Again it is possible that the introduction of side groups may affect the surface

energy of the polymer and in this way influence its frictional properties. However

a survey of the main results in table 5 shows that no such direct correlation exists.

Finally, detailed experiments with PTFE specimens of very different degrees

of crystallinity and morphology produce no substantial changes in frictional be-

haviour and transfer properties. Similarly changes in spherulite size have no

influence on the low friction behaviour of high density polyethylene. The only

modification which transforms the polymer into a polymer of relatively high friction is the introduction of a bulky side group which 'roughens' the molecular

profile. We are led to the conclusion that the low friction of PTFE and high-density

polyethylene is essentially due to their smooth molecular profiles.

We wish to express our thanks to Dr H. Browning at I.C.I. (Plastics Division)

for making and characterizing the PTFE specimens, to Dr C. A. Sperati of E.I. du Pont de Nemours & Company for supplying the fluorocarbon copolymers and to Professor Wunderlich for samples of extended chain polyethylene. Mr D. Hemsley and his group at I.C.I. (Plastics Division) gave invaluable assistance in the use of their interference microscope. One of us (C.M.P.) wishes to thank

Midland Silicones Ltd (now Dow Corning) for a research grant.

REFERENCES

Adams, N. I963 J. Appl. Polymer Sci. 7, 2075. Andrews, E. H. & Voigt-Martin, I. G. I972 Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A 327, 251. Bely, V. A., Savkin, V. G. & Sviridvouok, A. I. I 97i Wear, 18, 11. Bolz, L. H. & Eby, R. K. I965 J. Res. Nat. Bur. Std. 69A, 481. Bowden, F. P. & Tabor, D. I964 The friction and lubrication of solids, part II. Oxford:

Clarendon Press. Bowden, P. B. & Young, R. J. I97I Nature Lond. (Phys. Sci.), 229, 23. Bowers, R. C. I97I J. Appl. Phys. 42, 4961. Bowers, R. C., Clinton, W. C. & Zisman, W. A. I953 Lub. Eng. 9, 204. Bunn, C. W., Cobbold, A. J. & Palmer, R. P. 1958 J. Polymer Sci. 28, 365. IBunn, C. W. & Howells, E. R. 1954 Nature, Lond., 174, 549. (Clark, E. S. & Muus, L. T. I962 Z. Krist. 117, 119. Cohen, S. C. & Tabor, D. I966 Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A 291, 186. Eldredge, K. R. & Tabor, D. I955 Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A 229, 181. Ermolina, A. V., Markova, G. S. & Kargin, V. A. I957 Soviet Phys. Crystallography 2, 615. Geil, P. H. I963 Polymer single crystals. New York: Interscience. Geil, P. H., Anderson, F. R., Wunderlich, B. & Arakawa, T. I964 J. Polymer Sci. A 2,

3707.

'Kay, D. H. (ed.) I965 Techniques for electron microscopy (2nd ed.). Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications.

,Makinson, K. R. & Tabor, D. I964 Proc. B. Soc. Lond. A 281, 49.

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

274 Christine M. Pooley and D. Tabor

McLaren, K. G. & Tabor, D. I965 Wear 8, 3. Pooley, C. M. I971 Ph.D. Thesis, University of Cambridge.

Schonhorn, H. & Ryan, F. W. I969 J. Adhesion 1, 43. Scruton, B. I97I Ph.D. Thesis, University of Cambridge. Sherratt, S. I966 Kirk-Othmer encyclopedia of chemical technology, 9, 805. New York:

Interscience. Shooter, K. V. & Tabor, D. 1952 Proc. Phys. Soc. B 65, 661. Speerschneider, C. J. & Li, C. H. i962 J. Appl. Phys. 33, 1871. Sperati, C. A. & Starkweather, H. W. I96I Adv. Polymer Sci. 2, 465. Symons, N. K. J. I963 J. Polymer Sci. A 1, 2843. Tabor, D. & Wynne-Williams, D. E. I96I Wear 4, 391. Towle, L. C. I97I J. Appl. Phys. 42, 2368. West, G. H. & Senior, J. M. 1972 Wear, 19, 37. Wunderlich, B. & Arakawa, T. I964 J. Polymer Sci. A 2, 3697. Zisman, W. A. i962 Adhesion and cohesion (ed. P. Weiss). New York: Elsevier.

NYote added in proof, 10 July 1972. Later experiments on high density PE which

had been subjected to y-irradiation tn vacuo have shown that if the irradiation

exceeded 10 Mrad the kinetic friction was as high as the static over the whole

temperature range 20 to 100 'C. This observation may be compared with some

experiments of Andrews & Voigt-Martin (Iy972) who found that 'the introduction into simple polythene crystals of cross-links by y-irradiation produces hardening

by the inhibition of slip processes'. Similar changes in the frictional behaviour

of P.T.F.E. were observed earlier by MeLaren & Tabor (I965) using neutron

irradiation.

This content downloaded from 192.132.64.101 on Mon, 27 Apr 2020 15:32:00 UTC All use subject to https://about.jstor.org/terms

  • Contents
    • 251
    • 252
    • 253
    • 254
    • 255
    • 256
    • 257
    • 258
    • [unnumbered]
    • [unnumbered]
    • [unnumbered]
    • [unnumbered]
    • [unnumbered]
    • [unnumbered]
    • 259
    • 260
    • 261
    • 262
    • 263
    • 264
    • 265
    • 266
    • 267
    • 268
    • 269
    • 270
    • 271
    • 272
    • 273
    • 274
  • Issue Table of Contents
    • Proceedings of the Royal Society of London. Series A, Mathematical and Physical Sciences, Vol. 329, No. 1578 (Aug. 22, 1972), pp. 251-359
      • Front Matter
      • Friction and Molecular Structure: The Behaviour of Some Thermoplastics [pp. 251-274]
      • Photoelectron Spectra of Compounds Containing Thionyl and Sulphuryl Groups [pp. 275-282]
      • Dispersion of Flexural Waves in Circular Cylindrical Shells [pp. 283-297]
      • Orientation and Growth of Hawaiian Volcanic Rifts: The Effect of Regional Structure and Gravitational Stresses [pp. 299-326]
      • Electron Microscopy of Biological Specimens by Means of an Electrostatic Phase Plate [pp. 327-359]
      • Back Matter

all articles will be uesed/Highly oriented polytetrafluoroethylene films a force microscopy study-annotated.pdf

ELSEVIER Thin Solid Films 286 (1996) 98-106

Highly oriented polytetrafluoroethylene films: a force microscopy study

P. Bed6 1, M. Schott Groupe de Physique des Solides. Unit~ Associ~e au CNRS n° l 7. Universitds Paris 7 and Paris 6, ? PSace Ju.~'sieu. 75251 Paris. Cedea 05, France

Received 7 August 1995; accepted 15 December 1995

Abstract

Highly oriented polytetrafluoroethylene (FIFE) thin films might be useful as substrates for oriented growth of well-organized layers of organic materials. In this study, such PTFE films were deposited onto oxide-covered Si wafers by sliding of a PTFE rod at constant speed under controlled conditions of deposition temperature T,, and load W. The morphology of these films was studied down to molecular resolution by atomic force microscopy, and the amount of deposited polymer was measured by nuclear reaction analysis; dependence on Td and W was investigated. For T,~ > 150 °C these films consist of straight and very long ( > 100 pm) ribbons parallel to the sliding direction. Their width and their height, i.e. the amount of FI'FE, are increasing with T,j and W, so that the substrate can be almost completely covered. These ribbons are crystalline, being bundles of polymer chains with the helix axis parallel to the ribbon length. Known properties of PTFE and our results suggest that the final film formation and the resulting morphology are dependent on crystallization upon cooling and not only on deposition parameters.

Keyword.v: Atomic force microscopy; Deposition process; Polymers; Surface morphology

I. Introduction

Thin, highly oriented and crystalline films of polytelra- fluoroethylene (PTFE) can be deposited onto a smooth sub° strate by friction and transfer from a solid i~TFE piece sliding on the surface [ 1,2 l. This system provides an interesting case for the experimental study of friction and adhesion [3,41. Highly oriented PTFE films also allow studies of physical and chemical properties of PTFE itself. For instance, the assignment of PTFE vibrational modes is still not completely clear [5 ]; a high resolution electron energy loss spectroscopy (HREELS) and polarized IR absorption study of these modes, that was made possible by the existence of these films, is reported in the following paper [61. Surface chemical modification of PTFE, a subject of long standing technolog- ical interest [71, can also be studied in new ways using such films [ 8 ].

Interest into the study of highly oriented PTFE films has been recently revived by Wittmann and Smith [ 9 ]. Wittmann and eoworkers have in particular demonstrated the potenti- alities of such films to serve as a substrate for the oriented growth of organic materials and other polymers [9-111.

Several organic materials have unique combinations of electronic, optical and mechanical properties, and are pro-

' Permanent address: IMC. Teknikringen 3, S-583 30 Link6ping, Sweden,

0040-6090/96/$15.00 © 1996 Elsevier Science S.A, All rights reserved SSD! 0040-6090 ( 95 ) 08529-7

cessible. Tl~ese properties are often very anisotropic at the molecular scale, so optimization of tile response requires highly ordered materials. From a device applieatio,~ point of view, as well as Ibr many thndame,~tal studies, these materials have to be prepared as thin films. C mscquently, it is ol'imporo tance to study materials which m~,y be used as substrales for controlled and oriented film growth of organic materials. These PTFE films may be such substrates, as suggested by recent work [9-121.

A good characterization of the microscopic morphology of such PTFE films, and of the influence of deposition con- ditions, is needed if they are to be used tbr studying PTFE properties or for achieving controlled oriented deposition of small molecules or polymers. This paper reports results of such a characterization. PTFE films were deposited onto oxide-covered Si wafers under controlled condition~, and studied by atomic force microscopy (AFM) both in the con- tact mode and the tapping mode, down to molecular reso::m tion, and by nuclear reaction analysis (NRA). Particularly, the effect of using different sets of load (i.e. pressure of the PTFE rod onto the substrate surface) and deposition temper- ature was examined for two sliding speeds. Si wafers were chosen as substrates because their surfaces are very smooth and very reproducible. Since PTFE is deposited onto the thin oxide layer of wafers, it may be expected that the results obtained here will apply to glass or quartz surfaces as well,

P. Bod~i. M. Schott /Thin Solid Fihns 286 (1996) 98-106 99

provided they are smooth enough. A few experiments using sputtered Pt films as substrates yielded very similar results, so it is likely that the morphologies described here are inde- pendent from the substrate material used, and are properties of PTFE itself only. Our results are to be compared to those obtained by Fenwick et al. [ 13 ] on PTFE films on glass, and to similar but less systematic studies of PTFE on highly ori- ented pyrolytic graphite (HOPG) and Pt by scanning tun- neling microscopy (STM) [ 14], and on glass by AFM in the contact mode [ 15-17].

Some basic structural information about PTFE bulk poly- mer is in order: PTFE is a crystalline polymer, different sam- ples containing different, often minor, amounts of amorphous phase. Although, there are many studies of PTFE crystal structure and morphology, these properties, and in particular their temperature dependence are not completely understood yet [ 18,19]. Crystalline PI'FE shows two first-order transi- tions at 19 and 30 °C, respectively. In the low-temperature phase, conventionally named phase II, the chains form 136 helices packed in a nearly hexagonal 3D arrangement, with interchain distance = 0.559 nm at 0 °C, the repeat distance (one half turn) along the helix being 1.69 nm. In phase IV between 19 and 30 °C the chains unwind slightly into 15 7 helices of repeat distance 1.95 nm, interchain distance

0.565 nm at 25 °C and a 3D hexagonal packing. This phase is already less well ordered than phase II, and helix-reversal defects appear [18,19]. Phase I above 30 °C is less well understood: it may be that various kinds of defects proliferate as the temperature is increased, the chains seem to be planar on the average above ~ 120 °C [20], and longitudinal order is lost above ~ 150 °C [21 ]. Above ~ 150 °C shearing of the material becomes increasingly easier [ 22 ]. Indeed, easy plas- tic flow under pressure occurs near tile melting point, "I'.~, allowing fasl high temperature extrusion in the solid state ! 23]. In this study, PTFE was deposited in phase I and studied ia phase IV.

2. Experimental

2.1. PTFE

Two PTFE cylindrical rods, diameter 15 mm, were used. One was of Teflon®, and the other of Fluon® kindly pro- vided by Prof. D.T. Clark from I.C.I.. Such rods are made from premelted PTFE, which is mostly crystalline with a melting temperature Tm= 327 °C. The average molecular weight is not known, but is usually in such material of the order of Mw > 107, corresponding to a chain contour length of several tens of microns.

2.2. Substrates

PTFE films were deposited onto 10x 10 mm 2 substrates cut from Si wafers having a thin ( --- 1.5 nm thick) amorphous oxide layer. Such surfaces are very stable in air up to = 300

°C, and very smooth: the local rugosity over a surface of the order of square microns was measured by AFM to be less than I rim. No extended defects, such as steps at the Si surface that could interfere with the deposition process were ever detected during the AFM observations. In some cases the substrates were rinsed in ethanol to remove eventual dust particles, but this rinsing had no effect on the PTFE films. It is a good approximation to assume that the films were depos- ited onto a smooth and homogeneous substrate, still rigid at the highest deposition temperature used. In all cases, the substrate was equilibrated at the deposition temperature, Td > 140 °C, before PTIZE transfer. The deposition experi- ments were performed in a clean room environment to min- imize incorporation of dust particles in the PTFE films.

2.3. Film deposition

PTFE transfer from a polymer rod to the substrate was carried out using a simple home-made apparatus, allowing precise control of three key deposition parameters: tempera- ture To, load W, and sliding speed. Rod and substrate were equilibrated at the deposition temperature before transfer, so the deposition occurs in truly isothermal conditions, which was not the case in other work. The end to be brought into contact with the substrate was bevelled so that the apparent contact area was a 1 × 10 mm 2 rectangle, so a ribbon of 10 mm width was deposited. In some experiments a contact area of 1 × 3 mm 2 was used instead. This rectangular fiat end geometry was chosen in preference to those used in some previous work, sphere or hemisphere [ 1,21, fiat end of a rod or pin 119,16,24,251 or bar edge [ 141, with the hope that it might ensure more uniform rod-substrate interaction over a larger surface. A possible drawback of the chosen bevel geometry is that plou?~hing may be easier [26], but no such effect was observed. Tile chosen values of the deposition parameters are comparable to those used in previous work [ 1,2,9,10,16,171.

Td was varied from 140 to 270 °C. In that temperature range, at least above 150 °C, the material is disordered and easily sheared [22]. The load was varied from 180 to 2425 g. Assuming contact between the rod and the substrate over the whole bevelled tip area of either 3 mm 2 or 10 mm :, this would correspond to pressures between 1.8 and 80 kg c m 2 (0.18-8 MPa). Sliding speed was either 0.4 or 2 mm s-~. Such speeds are in the "low-speed limit" previously inves- tigated [ 1,2]. A commonly used value in other work was I mm s " t [2,9-11,14,16,17]. Sliding was regular with no evi- dence of stick-slip, but the friction forces were not measured in our case.

However, this is not enough to completely define the dep- osition conditions: it is known that deposition of smooth and regular PTFE films requires a kind of prior "conditioning" of the PTFE surface in contact with the substrate during deposition [2]. Before deposition the PTFE surface must have been used previously for sliding on a substrate in the same direction. In an effort to ensure reproducible deposition

I00 P. BodiL M. Schott / Thin Solid bThns 286 (1996) 98-106

conditions in that respect, the rod was always preconditioned before starting a series of depositions, and in addition each sliding was started on a glass plate placed alongside the sili- con substrate, so that the rod would first deposit a film over a distance of at least 2 cm on the glass before getting into contact with the Si.

2.4. Film surface study

Surfaces were observed using a commercial atomic force microscope (Nanoscope III from Digital Instruments, Santa Barbara, Ca. USA) operating in air. This instrument is equipped with both the relatively new tapping mode and the normal contact mode. In the contact mode the probe tip is "dragged" over the surface. This implies that, even though the force is low, soft surfaces or weakly bonded species on a surface can often not be imaged without being affected by the tip while scanning. The tapping mode, in which the tip is vibrating and touching the surface once during each vibration period, thereby "tapping" over the surface, is assumed to have less influence on the surface morphology than the con- tact mode. This was clearly observed for the PTFE films, especially thin ones of poor coverage, as matter was moved when working in the contact mode, and the tapping mode was therefore preferentially used in this study. With few exceptions, surfaces could be repetitively imaged without any apparent damage, and appeared to be indefinitely stable dur- ing scanning. However, the force acting on the sample surface in the tapping mode depends of course on the vibrati,3n ampli- tude of the lever and the damping set point used for the feed° back control. This means that sensitive samples may be mod- ified even in the tapping mode if the settings are not optimized in l.bat sense, On IYl'FE films of high coverage the contact mode could be applied, and the polymer chains could be resolved. This was hardly believed to be possible in the tap- ping mode, but during this study, molecular resolution was achieved also in tke tapping mode tbr the first time.

2.5. Nuclear reaction analysis

The transferred PTFE film thickness was inferred from measured number densities (in atoms cm ~°2) of F and C atoms obtained by nuclear reaction analysis (NRA) [ 27 ], using the crystalline PTFE bulk density p-,, 2.3 g cm - 3. For C, the well known S"C(d,p) t3C reaction was used at 970 keV deuteron energies, in conditions that provide excellent abso- lute accuracy by comparison with an t60 standard [ 28 ]. For F, the tgF(p.o~o)tCio nuclear reaction was used at an incident proton energy of 1340 keV at which the cross-section has a maximum corresponding to a nuclear resonance [ 291. At the scattering angle used 0= 14& in the laboratory frame, the differential cross-section is d o ' / d / 2 - 3 mbarn sr -I [29]. Although this is not a very large value, that resonance is useful for F-content measurement since there is no other interfering nuclear reaction, i.e. no ot particle count in the absence of F.

For all PTFE films studied, the variation with depth of the incident d or p particle energy, hence that of the reaction cross-section, could be neglected. Absolute atomic densities were obtained by comparison with known standard films, Ta205 for C and CaF z for F. While use of the former allows determination of C densities to -I- 5% [28], the latter was not so accurately known, since it ages (i.e. loses F) under irra- diation; hence F densities were probably underestimated by up to 30%. But, in the comparison of different PTFE samples, only the statistical uncertainty in counting (5-10% depend- ing on the measurement) is relevant.

A recurrent problem in NRA studies on polymers is their instability under ion beam irradiation [30--32]. PTFE was found to lose C and F atoms quite rapidly during the NRA measurements, so the total doses were kept __< 10 IxC cm- 2, corresponding to a F loss of about i %; good accuracy then implied scanning the 1 mm 2 ion beam over a larger area, so the quoted results are averages over> 10 mm 2. Observed variations of the densities for different I mm 2 areas on the same film were almost always within the statistical counting errors, indicating that there was no gross inhomogeneity of the films at that scale.

NRA has been used for study of PTFE in a tew previous studies [33,34]. In all cases the 340 keV resonance of the reaction t9F(p; oL'y) t60 was used, with detection of the emit- ted 7. The corresponding cross section is about 10 times smaller than that of the reaction used in our study [ 29], but this is in part compensated by the possibility of using a larger solid angle for y detection than tbr particle detection. Eval- uation of the relative merits of the two methods is beyond the scope of the present work.

3. Results

3. I. Typical observed morphologies

The basic building block of transfer deposited films con- sists in all cases of a very long, straight, fairly regular ribbon with a smooth upper surface. It is lying flat onto the substrate surface, and has an approximately rectangular or trapezoidal cross-section, width 100-300 nm and height 2-10 nm. Depending on the deposition parameters used, the obtained results can be generalized into three different types of PTFE transfer films: 1. irregular ribbons and low coverage, less than = 20%; 2. long, straight, and parallel ribbons of incomplete

coverage; 3. long, straight, and parallel ribbons covering near 100%.

"Coverage" of the substrate by PTFE was estimated as follows. A section showing the height variations along a line perpendiculax to the ribbon's direction was studied. Usually, it shows several regions or points between ribbons, which are the lowest of the section all in the same plane. These regions were taken to be the substrate surface, and the total length of these regions, divided by the overall length of the section,

01

Hisham Shaldhom

02

Hisham Shaldhom

Note
Note

P. BodiJ. M. Schott / Thin Solid Fihns 286 (1996) 98-106 I 01

was taken as the fraction of the surface not covered by PTFE. Obviously, this value can only be approximate, and the pro- cedure is valid only if these low regions are indeed bare Si or almost so. Hence, the interest of also using NRA to measure the total amount of PTFE deposited.

The first type of morphology was obtained at deposition temperatures below ~ 150 °C, which appears to be somewhat of a critical temperature. The ribbons are not straight and sometimes branched. They are not very high, most of them 2-4 am, and typical widths are < 100 nm. The coverage is usually very poor.

The second type was obtained at temperatures > 150 °C, loads < 600 g, and sliding speed 2 mm s- t. Fig. 1 shows an image of a sample prepared at 160 °C with a load of 600 g over a 10 mm 2 surface, and sliding speed 2 mm s-~. The coverage is low and the ribbons are not perfectly oriented, but most of the ribbons are running straight in the sliding direction. In a few cases the ribbons have remarkable well defined local curvatures, which are not due to any sideways jumping of the rod, since neighboring ribbons are straight as shown in Fig. 1. These curvatures always occur in pairs of opposite orientations, or in some cases in groups of four, such that the sum of bendil~g angles becomes zero. Hence, the ribbon on either side of the curvatures runs parallel to the general deposition direction. The bending angles are not ran- dom, and were in most observations measured to be close to 30 °. This suggests the following explanation. PTFE chains are helices; in a helix, all C--C bonds will be either trans + or trans-, the two configurations being at + 15 ° from the planar zigzag conformation 1 351. Inversion of the sense of turn then corresponds to a rotation of the helix axis by 30 °. In a bend, all thai,as of the ribbon show a collective inversion, such that the bend is the result of a twin boundary. To align the ribbon with the deposition direction on either side of the defect two twin boundaries consisting of opposite inversions ale neces- sary. Rotation reversal defects are indeed invoked to explain the progressive disordering of the PTFE crystal structure above the 19 °C, and especially above the 30 °C phase tran-

sitions, and they are supposed to appear in pairs there too [18,191.

Films of the third type, almost completely covering the substrate surface, were obtained in a series of depositions with loads > 600 g, Ta between 220 and 270 °(2, and a sliding speed of 0.4 mm s-~. The average height of the ribbons increases with increasing load from about 4 up to 10 nm. The particular film shown in Fig. 2 was prepared at 250 °C using a load of 1725 g and bevel area of 3 mm 2. The coverage can be estimated to -~ 98%, the heights of ribbons are estimated to be typically 7 rim, and ribbons as high as 17 n'-a were observed. The widths of ribbons are difficult to define and measure since ribbons are close together covering the entire surface. However, the widths of the very high ribbons was measured to be lt~0-200 nm. At the very highest load used, .2425 g over 3 mm 2, the coverage decreased remarkably to -- 76%. However, in this case the typical ribbon heights were very high, --20 nm, and the highest ones --50 nm. This indicates that the amount of matter increased even if the coverage decreased, and that was also confirmed by NRA.

No ribbon end is seen in Figs. 1 and 2, neither in any other similar image. At lower coverage, ribbons can sometimes be seen to splil or merge, but not terminate. Yet, the total length of all ribbons on such an image is several hundreds of micrometers. By manually translating the AFM sample stage, it is possible to record the image of a single ribbon over more than 100 p,m. At high coverage, it is straight and unchanged

throughout. Therefore, the length of a ribbon is much larger than that of any macromolecule present in tile material, even if totally extended (ca 10 Ixm). In fact, our results are com-

patible with ribbons extending along Ihc whole deposition

length.

7.50

5.00

2 . 5 0

Fig. I. 4 ::< 4 p,m 2 tapping mode image showing typical low PTFE coverage. This fihn was prepared using a load of 600 g/10 mm 2 at To = 160 °C, and a sliding speed of 2 mm s- i. z range: black-to-white corresponds to 50 am.

~o o 2.5o 5.00 /.rio

vM

Fig. 2.7.5 × 7.5 p.m 2 tapping mode image of a salnple with very high PTFE coverage, obtain by using a load of 1725 g/3 mm 2 at Td= 250 °C. z range: black-to-white corresponds to 50 ran.

102 P. Bodli, M. Schott / Thin Solid Films 286 (1996) 98-106

3.2. Film thickness

A better estimate of the overall thickness of the films can be obtained by NRA measurements of the number density of F atoms cm -2. For calculating a thickness, a PTFE density of 2.3 g c m -3 was assumed. Mainly films with relatively large coverage, prepared at 220 °C or higher, were studied, yielding the following results: the local film thickness (aver- aged over I ram2), measured at several positions on a given film is constant to + 20%. The averages of local thickness, that is the total amount of deposited PTFE, are measured to + 8% or better. These averages may differ by 20% or more for two films prepared in nominally identical conditions. Thus, there are still uncontrolled parameters in the deposition procedure, possibly related to the conditioning of the rod.

Such an overall average thickness of films prepared under moderate load ( ~ 1000 g) are only weakly increasing with deposition temperature, if at all, at least for Td > 220 °C. The measured thickness is 3.5 + 0.5 nm. Overall average thick- ness increases with load. A few representative values are compared in Table 1 with those deduced from AFM images. The absolute thickness values differ somewhat between NRA and AFM measurements. This is probably due to the crude estimate in determining the coverage and bundle heights with AFM, as well as the approximation made in calculating the thickness as coverage times half the ribbon height. However, the relative thickness values are more reliable attd show that the amount of deposited P'I'FE increases with load, even if the observed coverage has decreased for the highest load used.

These results are in lair agreement with those reported by Fenwick et al. [13] which were obtained using completely different melhods.

On one film, C and F atoms number densities were both measured by NRA, This measurement yielded the expected CF~ stoichiometry of PTFE, showing that organic contami- nants, which would contain C but no F, were pre,~ent in minute amounts only, a monolayer at most. it would therefore bc possible to measure in that way the amount of an organic overlayer deposited onto a PTFE film, for example in an epitaxy experiment.

3,3, Tip-ribbon bueractions

In cases where the PTFE film was not completely covering the substrate surface, narrow ribbons could be displaced by the tip during scanning in the contact mode. At very low coverage with irregular and thin ribbons, the image changed

Table I Comparison between AI.~M and NRA measurenlents of PTFE thickness

8 , 0 0

6. O0

4 , 0 0

i . O0

0 2.0O 4 .00 G. 00 8 .00 ~H

Fig. 3. 10× lO ixm 2 contact mode image illustrating moved FIFE ribbons in the previously scanned 5X5 pan 2 square in the centre of the image, z range: black-to-white conesponds to 75 nm.

rapidly. Even on samples with straight ribbons and higher coverage the tip displaced the ribbons to some extent. Fig. 3 show the first scan of an area in which a smaller 5 × 5 p,m 2 square had previously been scanned several times before the shown 10 X 10 p,m 2 area was imaged. The ribbons have been moved perpendicular to their elongation such that they are packed together to form fewer but wider ribbons. There is no indication that the tip did pick up any matter, since the total amount of matter remains the same as determined on the ~mage by ribbon cross-section measurements, Alter some time of scanning the image becomes stable and ribbons are not further moved by the scanning tip, At that moment when the ribbons have reached some critical size the Ibrce exerted by the scanning tip will not be large enough to move the ribbon. This behavior may result from at least two factors. First, to move a ribbon the tip has to bend it to some extent, and the force needed to bend will increase with the width of the ribbon. Second, the force to overcome the adhesion increases with the contact area and the mass of the ribbon. Together at some critical size these forces will exceed the force exerted by the scanning tip and the system will become stable. This observation might provide a mean of measuring, or at least comparing, the adhesion of the PTFE ribbons to different substrate surfaces.

In the tapping mode there is in principle only a negligible horizontal force acting on the surface if proper imaging par-

7' (°C) Load (g) h -- AFM average Hbbon height (nm) C= AFM coverage AFM thickness C(h/2 ) (nm) NRA thickness (ran)

234 I I05 8 0.8 3.2 3.2 270 1105 8 0.9 3.5 3.7 270 2425 20 0.75 7.5 6

03

Hisham Shaldhom

04

Hisham Shaldhom

5-6 2 notes:

07

Hisham Shaldhom

08

Hisham Shaldhom

Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note

P. Bodo. M. Schott / Thin Solid Fibns 286 (1996) 98-106 103

ameters are used, and indeed the PTFE morphology remained unchanged during repetitive scanning.

3.4. PTFE chaht orientation within the ribbons

A cross-section parallel to the ribbon direction shows that their tops are atomically smooth, with occasional steps of 0.6 nm height, measured in the contact mode. Incidentally, this observation, as well as the regular shape of ribbons over macroscopic distances, indicate ~be absence of stick-slip behavior under these deposition conditions [ 1,2]. High-res- olution imaging of such smooth regions was then attempted. Molecular resolution showing the aligned polymer chains on PTFE transfer films has been obtained previously by AFM in the contact mode [ 16,17], This was also achieved in this work to confirm that the ribboas consist of bundles of polymer chains running parallel to the direction of the ribbons. Fig. 4 shows such an image, which has not been treated with any image processing. The averag, e period obtained is 0.57 + 0.02 nm, which agrees well with the interchain distance of 0.565 A. in PTFE [ 151. Electron diffraction experiments [ 181 also have shown that chains are aligned parallel to the ribbon direction. However, AFM and electron diffraction both yield information on the film order at ~ 100 nm scale, and it has not been shown directly that films are macroscopically ordered in that way. Still, strong indirect evidence is given by th~ fact that AFM images always show identical extended ribbon geometry everywhere and at all scales. No internal structure on the chains, helix turn [ 17,29] or F atoms ! 151, is visible on such images. Some structure does appear on liltering, but one should beware of artefacts thus produced.

Molecular resolution was also obtained in the tapping mode, wlfich is a more difficult task than in the contact mode, and has to our knowledge ~lot been achieved before. To obtain such resolution we experienced Ihat high cantilever response to the drive piezo and the use of relatively low vibration amplitude are two basic requirements. As the polymer chains were imaged, different settings of scan rate, size and angle were used to ensure that no artefacts or noise were generating the obtained pattern shown in Fig. 5. The distance between the rows appearing in the image is 0.6 5:0.02 nm, which is close to but somewhat larger than the expected interchain distance in PTFE. In Fig. 5 there is also another periodic

Fig. 4.20 × 20 nm 2 contact mode imago at molecular resolution, showing the periodic structure corresponding to the PTFE polymer chains, z range: black-to-white corresponds to 2 nm.

Fig. 5.20 × 20 n m 2 tapping mode image at molecular resolution, showing the periodic structure corresponding the PTFE polymer chains, with an interchain distance of 0.6 + 0.02 rim. z range: black-to-white corresponds to 0.5 rim.

structure of "steps" along the polymer chain direction. The step heights are about 0.08 nm, and the distance between them is typically 6 nm or approximately three intrahelix turns [18,19]. Such steps have never been observed using the contact mode, However, the contrast mechanisms and the observed corrugations are rather different in the two modes, and one should be careful with vertical distance measure- ments on tapping mode images in the nm range: this is clearly shown by the different z ranges used in Figs. 4 and 5, 2 and 0.5 nm respectively.

4. Discussion

4. !. Film morphology

The studied deposition conditions in this work are mostly high temperatures, low to moderate loads and low speed, similar to most conditions used in the published works to date 1 ! ,2,9,10, ! 3,16,17 ]. Transferred films are Ihen thin and may altnost completely cover the substratc. However, formation of a perfectly smooth continuous lilm wi|h complete substrate coverage was never observed. The overall conclusions of this work as regards tilm morphology are in agreement with those attained long ago by Tabor and coworkers I 1,2], but AFM now yields a better description of the microscopic structure of these films, which may lead to a better understanding of the mechanisms of film formation.

PTFE transfer fihns are made of individual building blocks, which are fiat ribbons being 2 to 10 nm thick (sometimes isolated ribbons may be much thicker), 100 to 300 nm wide, and very straight over long distances of more than 100 ~m. Such ribbons are bundles of fully extended, parallel, PTFE chains. Even though the chains appear fully extended in the ribbons, the latter are much longer than any individual chain. The interchain distance within a ribbon is similar to that in the crystalline extended lamellae in the bulk polymer: the distance observed in AFM may be s~ightly larger than in the bulk, but this may be a calibration problem at very small scale; alternatively, it is also possible that surface relaxation occurs. This is a task for further more detailed studies of the molecular structure at the surface. Recent electron diffraction 09

Hisham Shaldhom

Note

104 P. Bluh~, M, Schott / ThbJ Solid Films 286 {1996) 98-106

results on similar thin films [ 18,19] indicate high crystallinity and a succession of phases similar to that of bulk PTFE. Comparison with images published in other work [ 10,11,14- 17] as well as our own studies of PTFE films deposited onto sputtered platinum surfaces, indicate that this morphology is a general property of these PTFE transfer films.

These building blocks of ribbons certainly do not a!ready exist as such in the bulk polymer from which the films are laid onto the substrate. What comes nearest to them are the lamellae, in which however the chains, albeit parallel, are folded. Thus, the ribbons are produced during or after PTFE film deposition. In fact, several of our results are indicative of that the ribbons are indeed formed after deposition upon cooling. But, this is at least valid Ibr deposition temperatures above -- 150 °C, where orientationai long-range order do not exist in PTFE. However, the technique of sliding a PTFE rod in a specific direction produces an alignment of chains which is the principal origin of ribbons. Immediately after deposi- tion the film consists of a layer of weakly interacting aligned polymer chains, which is an ideal starting point for the for- mation of a highly ordered system. The final film morphology is then determined by the rate of crystallization upon cooling. Since we in this work always used more or less the same cooling rate for all samples, the ribbon dimensions do not vary much within the deposition conditions range investi- gated here. Only the coverage and the film thickness are dependent on the investigated parameters temperature, pres- sure and sliding speed, This implies that one actually, to some extent, may control film thickness and morphology separately by deposition and cooling conditions, respectively.

Another possibility to control the morphology is based on the observation that sliding and coalescence of narrow rib° bons can be induced at room temperature by the lateral force exerted by the tip in the contact mode: smaller fibrils are merged into wider ribbons, and the process stops as the rib- bons reach the typical width of 100-300 nm. This implies that FIFE films might be further modified b~ controlled annealing after deposition,

In some previous work, oriented PTFE film,: were depos- ited by pressing by hand a PTFE rod onto a he ated substrate. In such cases, the load is usually larger anJ variable, thus leading to large thickness variations especiahy along the slid- lug direction, resulting in some places having much larger film thickness. One such sample was made and investigated by NRA. The measured thickness averaged over ! mm 2 var- ied from a fraction of a nm to ~ 50 nm from place to place. Therefore, well controlled loads and speed seem necessary to obtain homogeneous films.

4.2. Film formation

Coverage of the substrate surface by PTFE is never con- tinuous. At the micrometer scale, the film is formed by long fibrils or ribbons, all running parallel to the direction of rod drawing, with narrow bare regions in between, yielding a local coverage which can be nearly 100%. At much larger

scales however, say 100 Ixm, large variations of the local coverage value may occur, and bare regions, tens oflxm wide, where no ribbon is present, may be observed. These variations are more important at lower deposition temperatures Ta and loads W, and they disappear at the higher T and W (see also Ref. [ 36] ).

It is quite likely that the macroscopic coverage variations correspond to variations of the rod-substrate contact, due to topographic variations of the rod tip, and the empty spaces are then regions where no contact occurred. Absence of these variations at high To and Wmay then be explained by plastic deformation (flow) of the bevel extremity under load, occur- ring until there is contact everywhere with the surface. That flow may be part of the necessary "conditioning" of the rod mentioned above.

The occurrence of fibrils in the regions of high coverage cannot, however, be explained in the same way. It is quite unlikely that such features pre-exist in the PTFE rod. One could imagine that they are generated by the forces exerted on the chains at the end of the rod while it is rubbed against the substrate surface. But we propose instead that the observed fibrils result from PTFE crystallization after depo- sition. It is known that interchain interactions weaken pro- gressively in PTFE as temperature increases, so that above ca. 150 °C any long-range order perpendicular to the chain direction is lost [21 ], and the chains themselves become on the average planar zig-zag [20]. The material can be made to flow under pressure, PTFE is shaped by extrusion in the solid state, [23]. The same should apply to the deposited PTFE layer, which at the deposition temperature may locally be a continuous film, of average thickness increasing with T,t and W, the only order being that chains are all extended parallel to the rod sliding direction. This film would then crystallize upon cooling into the form o1" extended ribbons. In such a model, the final film structure and the formation of ribbons are not solely determined by the deposition parame- ters, but also by the way the temperature is decreased to below 150 *C after deposition. A study of the effect of the rate of cooling would have required a much more elaborate deposi- tion set-up than the one used here. In the present study, all samples were cooled in the same way, and in fact all samples deposited above 150 °C showed very similar morphologies, for instance the measured dimensions of the ribbons did not vary much with deposition parameters.

Two above-mentioned observations support this model of ribbon formation by crystallization after deposition. The first is the observation of kinks in some ribbons, occurring mostly in pairs, so that the average ribbon direction is the same on both sides of the pair (Fig. 1). It is very unlikely that such a shape was directly transferred from the rod during deposition. Such kinks may instead arise upon cooling for a variety of reasons. It is a natural way of accommodating extra length of a formed ribbon; also, during cooling, kinks or reversal defects may become quenched and line up in regions similar to twin boundaries to minimize the system energy. Interest-

10-11 2 notes:

12-14 3 notes:

15

Hisham Shaldhom

16

Hisham Shaldhom

Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note

P. Bodih M. Schott / Thin Solid Fihns 286 (1996) 98-106 105

ingly, no such curvatures are observed in regions of high local coverage in films deposited at high temperatures.

Another observation is that of merging ribbons. Crystalli- zation may proceed by merging of chains into small ribbons, which in turn merge into larger ones to minimize surface energy, until the strength of the ribbon adhesion to the sub- strate surface becomes too large. Indeed, imperfect ribbon merging is observed in films deposited not too much above 150 °C (see Fig. 3). On the other hand, it is possible to force small ribbons to merge into larger ones at room temperature by the effect of tip-ribbon interaction in the contact mode (see Fig. 3); here again, this process seems to stop or become altogether much slower when a critical ribbon width is reached.

In this model, three types of morphologies are expected, dependent on the deposition temperature. For T< 150 °C, the deposited material, which is in small amount only, cannot order into straight bundles after deposition, and indeed only irregular and very narrow fibrils are observed. Above 150 °C, larger amounts of PTFE are deposited, and ribbons can form. As long as the average thickness of this initial film is smaller than the average thickness of the finally formed ribbons, the latter all have, statistically, the same geometry, only the cov- erage varies and increases with T. Finally, when T is large, so that the average thickness of the initial film is larger than typical ribbon thickness, higher features must be formed and indeed do. The coverage may even decrease, although the average thickness is now large, pointing to a different crys- tallization regime.

4.3. Consequences for overlayer orientation

The preparation of oriented organic overlayers by deposi- lion onto highly oriented substrates is a major motivation Ibr the present interest in transfer deposited PTFE iihns. The morphologies described above have several consequences for the possible orientation o1' such overlayers. And with the potential ability to control and modify these morphologies a PTFE film substrate could be prepared to optimize the con.- ditions for oriented overlayer growth of specific material.

The ribbon tops are highly regular arrangements of PTFE helices. A first possible orientation process is therefore con- ventional epitaxy relative to the corresponding repeat dis- tances, especially the 0.565 nm interchain distance. This is how Meyer et al. account for the formation of oriented over- layers of the diacetylene 4BCMU [37].

The regions between ribbons may also play a role. Orien- tation of crystallites by parallel lines of various types of grat- ings has been observed, but this is still a poorly understood process coined "graphoepitaxy" [ 38 ]. The long parallel rib- bon borders could have a similar function in growing oriented overlayers.

The very low surface energy of PTFE may interfere in two ways with overlayer deposition processes. First, when layers are to be grown from solution, drops will move by dewetting to bare substrate areas if there is any, so large capillary forces

may be present and the ribbon sides will act as nucleation regions favoring graphoepitaxy if it may occur. Second, the surface mobility of molecules deposited from the vapor phase may be large. Surface diffusion of thiophene oligomers well below room temperature has indeed been observed in our laboratory [39]. There are already in the literature many studies of chemical or physical surface modifications aimed at increasing the surface energy of PTFE (for a recent exam- ple see Ref. [40] ); it would be interesting to try and see if oriented PTFE films modified in that way would retain their ability of orienting organic overlayers.

5. Conclusion

Highly oriented crystalline PTFE transfer deposited films of various coverage can be achieved at temperatures above --- 150 °C. The amount of deposited PTFE increases with deposition temperature and load, but the structure of such films, as observed by AFM, does not show any systematic dependence on deposition parameters. This together with sev- eral other results indicate that the final formation of the films takes place after film deposition, while the temperature is still high, and that they stabilize upon cooling.

Acknowledgements

This research was performed within the European Union Science Contract 0661 "Polysurf", together with the Uni- versities of Link6ping (Sweden) and Mons (Belgium), and Daresbury Laboratory (UK). It is a pleasure to acknowledge the help ot' P. Uzan in the early stages of this work, and the assistance of Prof. F. Abel with the NRA measurements. We also would like to thank Dr J.C. Wittmann for fruitful discussions.

References

[ [ ] K.R. Makinson and D. Tabor, Proc. R. So,:., A281 (1964) 49. 12] C.M. Pooley and D. Tabor, Proc. R. Sot.. A329 (1972) 251. [3] F.P. Bowden and D. Tabor, The Fri,'tim, and Lubrication of SolMs,

Part I, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1950; Part II, Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1964.

[4] K.L. J~hnson, Ctmtact Mechanic:s, Cambridge Oniversity Press, Cambridge, 1985.

15] D.I. Bower and W.F. Maddams, The Vibratimml Spectroscol~y of PolymeP;~, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1989.

[6] P. Dannetun, M. Rei Vilar and M. Schott. "1 hi,z Solid Films, in press. [71J. Kastner, H. Kuzmany, L. Kavan, F.P. Dousek and J. Kiirli,

Macromolecules. 28 ( 1995 ) 344: S. Tasker, R.D. Chambers and J.PS. Badyal, J. Phys. Chem., 98 (1994) 12442.

[8] M. Schott, Synth. Met., 67 (1994) 55. [9] J.C. WiUmann and P. Smith, Nature. 352 ( 1991 ) 414.

[ 101 H. Frey, S. Sheiko, M. M~511er, J.C. Wittmann and B. Lotz, Adv. Mawr.,

5 (1993) 917. l I 1 ] LK. Kruger, M. Prechl, P. ~qmith, M. Meyer and J.C. Wittmann. J.

Polym. Sci. Phys., B30 (1992) 1173.

17

Hisham Shaldhom

Note

106 P. BodiJ, M. Schott / Th#z Solid Films 286 (1996) 98-106

[ 12] M. Fahlman, ,L Rasmasson, K, Kaeriyama, D+T. Clark, G Beamson and W.R. Salaneck, Synth, Met,, 66 (1994) 123,

[ 13] D. Fenwick, K,.L Ihn, F. Motamedi, .L-C. Wittmann and P. Smith, J. Appl. Polym. S:i., 50 (1993) 1151.

[ 14] P, Bod~, C. Ziegler, LR. Rasmusson, W.R. Salaneck and D.T. Clark, Synth, Met., 35-57 (1993) 329.

[ 15] S.N. Magonov, S. Kempf, M. Kimmig and H.-J. Cantow, Polym. Bllil., 26 (1991) 715.

[ 16] H. Hansma, F. Motamedi, P. Smith, P. Hansma and L-C. Wittmann, Polymer, 33 (1992) 647.

[ 17] . . Dietz, P.K. Hansma, K.J. lhn, F. Motamedi and P. Smith, J. Mater. Sci, 28 ~ 1993) 1372.

[ 18 ] M. Kimmig, G. Strohl and B, Stiihn, Macromolecules, 27 ( 1994 ) 2481. [19] C.A, Sperati and H.W. Starkweather, Jr., Adv. Polym. Sci., 2 ( 1961 )

465. [20] K. Matsushige et al,, Jpn. J. Appl. Phys,, 16 (1977) 681. [21 ] L.T, Muus and E.S. Clark, Polym. Prep., 5 (1964) 17. [22] CJ. Speerschneider and C.H, Li, J. Appl. Phys., 34 (1963) 3004, [23] LP, Tordella, Trans. Soc, Rheol., 7 (1963) 231. [24l E.H. Yang.J. Mater. Res., 7 (1992) 3139. [25] E. Yang and J.-P, Hirvonen, Thin Solid Films, 226 (1993) 224. [26] D. Tabor and D. '~ynne-Williams, Wear, 4 ( 1961 ) 391+ [27] L.C, Feldman and J.W. Mayer, Fundawaentats of Surface and Thia

Film Analysis, Noah-Holland. New York, 1986.

[28] V. Quillet, F. Abel and M. Schott, Nucl. lnstrmn. Meth. Phys. Res.. B83 (1993) 47.

[29] D. Dieumegard, B. Maurel and G. Amsel, Nucl. lnstrum. Meth., 168 (1980) 93.

[30] F. Abel, V. Quillet and M. Schott, Nucl. bzstrum. Meth. Phys. Res. B, 105 (1995) 86.

[31 ] T. Venkatesan, L. Calcagno, B+S. EIman and G. Foti, in P. Mazzoldi and G.W. Arnold (eds.), lot. Beam Modification of insult+tots, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1987.

[32] .I. Davenas, in A. Dunlop et al. (eds.), Materials ,ruder Irradiation,, Solid State Phenomena, Vol. 30-31, Trans Tcch Publications, Aedermannsdorf, 1993, pp. 317-354.

[33] J.-P. Hirvonen and I~,.-L. Yang, Mater. Lett., 8 (1989) 197. [ 34] J. Rickards, Nucl. lnstrum. Meth. Phys. Res., B55-57 ( 1991 ) 812. [35] T.W. Bates and W.H. Stockmayer, Macromolecules, i (1968) 17. [36] G. Beamson, D.T. Clark, D.B. Deegan, N.W. Hayes, D.S,-L. Law, J,

Rasmusson and W.R. Salaneck, S,.rrf blter]~lce A~Jal.. 24 (1996) 204. [ 37 ] S. Meyer, P. Smith and J.C. Wittm~n, J. Appl. Phys., 77 ( 1995 ) 5655. [38] H.I. Smith, MW. Gels, C.V. Thompson and H.A. ,~water, J. Cryst.

Growth, 63 (1983) 527. [39] J.L. Fare, private communication. [40] BJ. Tan, M. Fessehaie and S.L. Suib, Langmair, 9 (1993) 740.

Annotations

Highly oriented polytetrafluoroethylene films: A force microscopy study Bodö, P.; Schott, M.

01 Hisham Shaldhom Page 3

20/4/2020 17:30

02 Hisham Shaldhom Page 3

20/4/2020 17:31

03 Hisham Shaldhom Page 5

20/4/2020 17:32

04 Hisham Shaldhom Page 5

20/4/2020 17:33

05 Hisham Shaldhom Page 5

20/4/2020 17:34

06 Hisham Shaldhom Page 5

20/4/2020 17:34

07 Hisham Shaldhom Page 5

20/4/2020 17:34

08 Hisham Shaldhom Page 5

20/4/2020 17:34

09 Hisham Shaldhom Page 6

20/4/2020 17:39

10 Hisham Shaldhom Page 7

20/4/2020 17:35

11 Hisham Shaldhom Page 7

20/4/2020 17:36

12 Hisham Shaldhom Page 7

20/4/2020 17:38

13 Hisham Shaldhom Page 7

20/4/2020 17:38

14 Hisham Shaldhom Page 7

20/4/2020 17:36

15 Hisham Shaldhom Page 7

20/4/2020 17:37

16 Hisham Shaldhom Page 7

20/4/2020 17:37

17 Hisham Shaldhom Page 8

20/4/2020 17:38

all articles will be uesed/Influence of serpentine 2009.pdf

I c

J a

b

a

A R R 2 A A

K P T C F

1

fi t B v i p c s

o p fi p a i p a o

s T

0 d

Wear 268 (2010) 996–1001

Contents lists available at ScienceDirect

Wear

journa l homepage: www.e lsev ier .com/ locate /wear

nfluence of serpentine content on tribological behaviors of PTFE/serpentine omposite under dry sliding condition

ia Zhi-ninga,b,∗, Yang Yu-lina, Chen Jin-jianga, Yu Xiao-jinga

College of Mechanical Engineering, Yanshan University, Qinhuangdao 066004, PR China Chengde Petroleum College, Chengde 067000, PR China

r t i c l e i n f o

rticle history: eceived 2 June 2009 eceived in revised form 7 November 2009 ccepted 7 December 2009 vailable online 12 January 2010

a b s t r a c t

This paper presents a PTFE/serpentine solid lubricant composite that exhibits low friction coefficient and low wear rate. It is postulated that synergistic effect alters the dominant wear mechanism of PTFE matrix. In order to examine the influence of serpentine content on tribological properties of PTFE/serpentine composite, six blends of PTFE with serpentine (in the range of 0–30 wt.%) were evaluated using a MMU- 5G friction and wear tester. Tests were carried out in standard laboratory conditions with a nominal

eywords: TFE/serpentine composite ransfer film onfocal laser scanning microscope riction and wear

contact pressure of 2.85 MPa and a sliding speed of 0.48 m/s. The friction coefficient of the composite, which was weakly dependent on serpentine content, was stable roughly from � = 0.10 to 0.12 during steady friction. Compared with the wear rate of unfilled PTFE, the wear resistance of PTFE/serpentine composite increased 24 times. However, the content of serpentine (5–30 wt.%) had little effect on wear rate of composite. The images of confocal laser scanning microscope (CLSM) revealed that the hybrid transfer film generated on the surface of mating pair is likely responsible for the lower wear rate obtained

in these experiments.

. Introduction

Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) polymer exhibits a low coef- cient of friction and retains useful mechanical properties at emperature from −260 to 260 ◦C for continuous operation. ecause of its resistance to chemical attack in a wide variety of sol- ents and solutions, high melting point and biocompatibility, PTFE s commonly used in bearing and seal applications as a popular olymer solid lubricant. However, pure PTFE is subjected marked old flow under stress and reveals higher wear rate than other emi-crystalline polymers.

In order to avoid the disadvantages and utilize its advantages f PTFE, many researchers have developed polymer-based com- osites for tribological applications by considering the traditional llers, such as glass fibers, carbon fillers and nonferrous metallic owers, as well as some metal oxides, etc. [1–4]. A noticeable char- cteristic of PTFE is that the increasing of wear resistance when filler

s incorporated is much greater than in any other semi-crystalline olymer. There are many kinds of PTFE-based composite for sliding pplications because various fillers are incorporated into PTFE and ne or more materials can be used simultaneously [5–9].

∗ Corresponding author at: College of Mechanical Engineering, Yanshan Univer- ity, 438, Hebei Avenue, Qinhuangdao 066004, Hebei Province, PR China. el.: +86 0335 8057062; fax: +86 0335 8057062.

E-mail address: ysujia@163.com (Z.-n. Jia).

043-1648/$ – see front matter © 2009 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved. oi:10.1016/j.wear.2009.12.009

© 2009 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved.

Micro–nano-particles incorporated into polymers are effective to better friction and wear properties of polymer [10,11]. Perhaps such composites will provide a new family of less-abrasive and wear-resistant solid lubricant because of excellent transfer film on mating surface [12–15]. A low content of particles is effective in reducing the wear rate and friction coefficient of a polymeric mate- rial in some occasions. Formation of layers of compacted debris or adherence of transfer film to the counterpart face tightly is believed to be the mechanism responsible for the beneficial action of these micro–nano-fillers. Moreover, the reinforcing effect of particle- fillers has also been considered as an important factor for the enhanced resistance.

Modern society expects less maintenance achieved through potential approaches such as low or zero wear, smarter systems or self-repairing ones [16]. Serpentine is potentially interesting in ameliorating the friction and wear of metal–metal friction pair, which is stoichiometrically represented by the chemical formula of magnesium silicate hydroxide, Mg6Si4O10(OH)8 [17,18]. Tradition- ally, complex inorganic silicates could be used as solid lubricants. This is attributable to the four-member-ring stacked layers in cer- tain silicates that are formed from the structural skeleton of silicon and oxygen, [Si4O10]n. As sketched in Fig. 1, the plane-to-plane

cross-linkage between the Si–O tetrahedron and the Mg–O/OH octahedron yields the layered structure of Mg6Si4O10(OH)8.

Under the condition of multibody fiction, the serpentine partic- ulates could generate an auto-recondition film on contact surfaces to prevent substrate from being damaged [19,20]. The objective

Z.-n. Jia et al. / Wear 268 (2010) 996–1001 997

o a t u f i

2

2

P g o i p l o t

c s ( a i s m P f o

Fig. 3. Sketch of preparing composite.

Fig. 1. Layered configuration of platy Mg6Si4O10(OH)8.

f the present work was to investigate the tribological properties nd protective layer generated on mating surface. As a comparison, he friction and wear properties of neat PTFE were also evaluated nder identical test conditions. This work was believed to be help- ul for understanding the function of serpentine as filler into PTFE n improving tribological behaviors of PTFE.

. Experiment details

.1. Samples preparation

The PTFE and serpentine were acquired in powder form. The TFE powder (type: CGM031) was supplied by Zhonghao Chen- uang Research Institute of Chemical Industry with a particle size f approximately 200 mesh number. The serpentine powder (Fig. 2 s CLSM image of serpentine particles after being milled and dis- ersed in ultrasonic) used in this study has an average diameter

ess than 0.5 �m. Powder mixtures with serpentine mass fractions f 0–30 wt.% were prepared and blended in a high-speed mixer raditionally used to make powers mix uniform and dispersive.

After mixing, the mixture was compressed and molded in a ylindrical cavity. A laboratory pressure of 40 MPa was used to con- olidate the mixture at room temperature in a cylindrical chamber Fig. 3) made of Gr. D steel. This molding pressure was held for pproximately 10–15 min. Then, the discoid samples were sintered n an electric heating furnaces equipped with a temperature control ystem. Last, the sintered samples were machined into final speci-

ens (� 44 mm × 4 mm), as shown in Fig. 4. The density of different

TFE/serpentine composites were calculated, which is based on the ormula m = �V (m: mass of PTFE/serpentine composite; V: volume f composite; �: density of composite). The experimental results

Fig. 2. CLSM image of milled serpentine (14,400×).

Fig. 4. Sketch of composite specimen.

are presented in Table 1. As expected, the densities of the compos- ites are higher than that of pure PTFE because serpentine are much denser than the matrix.

2.2. Tribological tests

2.2.1. Friction testing Sliding friction experiments were carried out under laboratory

condition using MMU-5G friction and wear tester. Fig. 5 shows the schematic representation of the friction and wear pair. Upper sam- ple is AISI-1045 steel (main components: 0.42–0.50% C, 0.17–0.37% Si and 0.50–0.80% Mn) which has a hardness of 23–26HRC and roughness of 0.11 �m Ra. Lower sample is PTFE/serpentine com- posite material. The shape of “unguis” on upper sample is beneficial to release friction heat occurring in contact process and also is convenient for increasing contact pressure.

During sliding friction operation, instantaneous friction force of PTFE and PTFE/serpentine composites against AISI-1045 steel was calculated by friction torque formula. And friction coefficient–time curve was recorded automatically by a personal computer. In our work, the average coefficient of friction was reported during

Table 1 The density of different PTFE/serpentine composites.

Designation A B C D E F

Content of serpentine (wt.%)

0 5 10 15 20 30

Density of composite (mg/mm3)

2.138 2.162 2.226 2.282 2.334 2.383

998 Z.-n. Jia et al. / Wear 268 (2010) 996–1001

Table 2 All experimental parameters for tribological teats.

Parameter Contact pressure Sliding velocity Sliding time Contact area Ambient temperature

Values 2.85 MPa 0.48 m/s 30 min 70.24 mm2 20–35 ◦C

Fig. 5. Sketch of end-face friction and wear pair. (1) Spindle; (2) upper specimen; ( p p

s c w t t

2

a w m b w c d

w

w g t e

Fig. 7. Friction coefficient for the composites plotted as a function of serpentine content.

3) lower specimen; (4) abrasive dust container; (5) lower specimen base; (6) tem- erature thermocouple; (7) fixing screw; (8) upper torque pin; (9) lower torque in.

teady sliding period in which the instantaneous friction coefficient hanged in small range. Meanwhile, three replicate friction tests ere performed in order to ensure the accuracy of data. The fric-

ion coefficient of the composite was stable roughly from � = 0.10 o 0.12 friction with increasing of serpentine content.

.2.2. Wear testing Prior to testing, the surfaces of specimens were cleaned with

cetone followed by drying. At the end of each test, the specimens ere also cleaned with acetone followed by drying. Mass measure- ents are used to quantify wear rather than volume measurements

ecause of sample creep and thermal expansion. Wear loss �m as measured in a precision balance (accuracy of 0.1 mg) and cal-

ulated according to initial mass and post-test mass. Finally, the imensionless wear rate (w) was calculated by following equation:

= �m �LA

here �m is wear mass in g, � is the density of composite in /mm3, L is the sliding distance in mm and A is apparent con- act area between upper and lower specimens in mm2. Some major xperimental parameters are shown in Table 2.

Fig. 8. Dimensionless wear rate for the composites plotted as a function of serpen- tine content.

Fig. 6. Confocal laser scanning microscope images (2400×). (a) and (b) are composites filled with 15 and 30 wt.% serpentine, respectively.

Z.-n. Jia et al. / Wear 268 (2010) 996–1001 999

Fig. 9. CLSM micrographs of the worn surface for the neat PTFE sample. (a) Indicates worn surface 480×; (b) describes 3D surface topography 480×.

Fig. 10. CLSM micrographs of the worn surface for PTFE/serpentine composites. (a), (c) and (e) denote worn surfaces of composite B, D and F, respectively; (b), (d) and (f) indicate 3D morphology of composite B, D and F, respectively.

1000 Z.-n. Jia et al. / Wear 268 (2010) 996–1001

F prote s

3

3

i o 3 fi s a a c b s t r

3

c i fi 0 n � i t f a P

ig. 11. CLSM micrographs of the protective layer of upper specimen. (a) Denotes pecimen; (c) was the surface optical micrograph of untested upper specimen.

. Results and discussion

.1. Distribution of serpentine particulates in composite

Examinations on the morphology of PTFE/serpentine compos- te specimens were conducted. Fig. 6 presents two typical examples f the confocal laser scanning microscope (CLSM: OLYMPUS OLS- 100, made in Japan) taken from the 15 and 30 wt.% serpentine lled into PTFE-based composites. Although average diameter of erpentine particulates is about 1.5 �m and serpentine particles re seen to disperse homogeneously in the PTFE matrix, showing no pparent agglomeration (Fig. 6a), the increase of serpentine content aused a small amount of agglomeration (Fig. 6b). However, it can e seen that there are clearly networked regions of PTFE containing erpentine particles from the images. Such a complex microstruc- ure with synergistic effect plays an important role to reduce wear ate of PTFE.

.2. Friction coefficient

Fig. 7 presents the variation of time–average friction coeffi- ient for all of tested samples as a function of serpentine content n PTFE/serpentine composite. It can be seen that friction coef- cient of all materials tested varied in the range from 0.10 to .12 during the steady-state sliding. The friction coefficient of eat PTFE sample is � = 0.110. The lowest friction coefficient is = 0.107 with 10 wt.% serpentine and the largest friction coefficient

s � = 0.117 with 20 and 30 wt.% serpentine. It is noted that serpen- ine content in PTFE/serpentine composite has little influence on riction coefficient. In other words, the antifriction properties of ll PTFE/serpentine composites depend on the characterization of TFE.

ctive layer generated on upper specimen; (b) indicates 3D morphology of upper

3.3. Dimensionless wear rate

The results presented in Fig. 8 show that the addition of serpen- tine particulates could cause a dramatic improvement in the wear resistance of PTFE. Amongst all materials, composite sample filled with serpentine 30 wt.% (material F) exhibited the lowest dimen- sionless wear rate of 52 × 10−8, while the unfilled PTFE (material A) shows the highest dimensionless wear rate of 1259 × 10−8. Com- posite F exhibited relatively high wear resistance (relative wear resistance improved 24 times) compared to the unfilled PTFE.

Comparing the wear rate of composites B, C and D, it can be seen that increasing the percentage of the serpentine particulates in the PTFE increased the dimensionless wear rate, that is, decreased the wear resistance. On the contrary, when the content of ser- pentine particulates in composite exceeds 15 wt.%, dimensionless wear rate of composites E, F reduced compared to composite D. A possible reason is that wear mechanism changed with the increas- ing of serpentine content in PTFE/serpentine composite during sliding. Furthermore, it can be concluded that serpentine content (5–30 wt.%) has little effect on wear rate of PTFE/serpentine com- posite. Maybe, it is related with the property of serpentine which is easily to adhere to the metal surface [19,20]. Serpentine particles are removed from the wear surface together with the PTFE film transferred to the counterface quickly in the initial stage of opera- tion. And then, the direct contact between the hybrid transfer film and composite surface occurs. Therefore, the coherent and steady transfer film plays an important role to reduce wear.

3.4. Wear traces of PTFE/serpentine composites

To understand wear mechanism, the confocal laser scanning microscope was utilized to examine the composite microstructure

r 268

a w t p o a t r s d

c ( t c c a t w a s F D i c t P fi f f m f b

3

s F i s u m v fi i t t

4

p

p w t

a

[

[

[

[

[

[

[

[

[ wear properties of metal surfaces, Journal of the Chinese Ceramic Society 36

Z.-n. Jia et al. / Wea

nd study the modes of failure. Fig. 9 is CLSM micrographs of the orn surface for the unfilled PTFE. From Fig. 9(a), it can be seen

hat the adhesive wear is major wear form associated with slight loughing effect. Large-scale adhesion caused long-train structure f PTFE was pulled out from the matrix during the repetitive sliding ction. This is why the unfilled PTFE exhibited very poor wear resis- ance. The observation is in agreement with that of some earlier esearchers [1,2]. Although severe wear rate, worn surface was very mooth and high peaks and deep valleys were formed obviously uring sliding as shown in Fig. 9(b).

CLSM micrographs of the worn surface for the PTFE/serpentine omposites B (5 wt.% serpentine), D (15 wt.% serpentine) and F 30 wt.% serpentine) are shown in Fig. 10. The addition of serpen- ine causes the worn surfaces of PTFE/serpentine composite great hanges. Evidence of adhesive wear and ploughing effect could be learly seen in Fig. 10(a) and harshly accidented peaks and valleys re also obvious on worn surface. This indicates that the proper- ies of PTFE play an important role on friction and wear mechanism hen serpentine content is less. As a hard phase, besides supporting

pplied load, the deciduous serpentine particles give rise to abra- ive wear. With the increasing of serpentine content, as shown in ig. 10(c) and (e), micro-cutting effect on worn surface of composite and F is weakened gradually and worn surface becomes smooth

nchmeal as shown in Fig. 10(d) and (f). The increasing of serpentine ontent in PTFE/serpentine composite means that more serpen- ine particles support applied load. And direct contact between TFE matrix and mating pair is avoided. Meanwhile, the transfer lm generated on metal substrate is effective to prevent composite

rom being damaged. Serpentine particles close to the worn sur- ace might have disengaged from contact surface when sliding and

ultibody friction occurred. The small size of wear debris produced or composite D and F demonstrates the role of the filler in holding ack the large-scale adhesion and micro-cutting process.

.5. Transfer film generated on upper specimen

CLSM micrographs of the transfer film generated on upper pecimen against 15 wt.% serpentine composite are shown in ig. 11. Compared with the surface of upper specimen, as shown n Fig. 11(c), the transfer film covered on steel substrate of upper pecimen can be seen from Fig. 11(a). The surface morphology of pper specimen can be observed in Fig. 11(b), whose surface is ore slippy and smooth than untested upper specimen. From the

iew of processing, such surface is conventionally processed with nish machining, polishing and fine grinding. Over all the tests,

mmeasurable wear rates of upper specimens were observed. So, he hybrid transfer film generated on upper specimen is very effec- ive to prevent metal substrate from being damaged.

. Conclusions

Based on the analysis of test results and worn surface topogra- hy of PTFE/serpentine composites, some conclusions as follows:

A relatively stable friction coefficient of PTFE/serpentine com-

osite was obtained and the friction coefficient of this composite as the same with neat PTFE in a certain range for all every sample

ested. The addition of serpentine particles filled into PTFE remark-

bly improved wear rate of PTFE. This behavior was attributed to

[

[

(2010) 996–1001 1001

the presence of the serpentine particulates, which acts as effective barriers to prevent large range adhesive wear of PTFE. The fine ser- pentine particulates might act as effective dispersion reinforcing elements.

The friction coefficient and wear rate of PTFE/serpentine, which were weakly dependent on serpentine content, were observed to change in a small range with the increasing of serpentine content (5–30 wt.%). It is more than likely due to the property of hybrid transfer film which is easily to adhere to the metal surface quickly.

Acknowledgements

The paper is based upon work supported by Key Laboratory of Fundamental Science of Mechanical Structure and Material Science under Extreme Condition for National Defense and State Key Labo- ratory of Metastable Materials Science and Technology of Yan Shan University. Special thanks are given to Prof. Zhang Rui-jun for his tireless effort in support of the microscopy related portions of this work.

References

[1] J. Khedkar, I. Negulescu, et al., Sliding wear behaviour of PTFE composites, Wear 252 (2002) 361–369.

[2] W. Gregory Sawyer, K.D. Freudenberg, et al., A study on the friction and wear behaviour of PTFE filled with alumina nanoparticles, Wear 254 (2003) 573–580.

[3] D. Xiang, C. Gu, A study on the friction and wear behaviour of PTFE filled with ultra-fine kaolin particulates, Material Letters 60 (2006) 689–692.

[4] N.V. Klaas, K. Marcus, et al., The tribological behaviour of glass filled polyte- trafluoroethylene, Tribology International 38 (2005) 824–833.

[5] T. Tevrüz, Tribological behaviours of bronze-filled polytetrafluoroethylene dry journal bearings, Wear 230 (1999) 61–69.

[6] T. Tevrüz, Tribology behaviour of carbon filled polytetrafluoroethylene(PTFE) dry journal bearings, Wear 221 (1998) 61–68.

[7] A. Khoddamzadeh, R. Liu, X. Wu, Novel polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) compos- ites with newly developed Tribaloy alloy additive for sliding bearings, Wear 266 (2009) 646–657.

[8] P. Samyn, J. Quintelier, et al., Sliding behaviour of pure polyester and polyester- PTFE filled bulk composites in overload conditions, Material Letters 60 (2006) 689–692.

[9] X.H. Cheng, Y.J. Xue, et al., Tribological investigation of PTFE composite filled with lead and rare earths-modified glass fiber, Material Letters 57 (2003) 2553–2557.

10] F. Li, K. Hu, J. Li, B. Zhao, The friction and wear of nanometer ZnO filled polyte- trafluoroethylene, Wear 249 (2002) 877–882.

11] Q. Wang, Q. Xue, W. Liu, J. Chen, The friction and wear characteristics of nanometer SiC and polytetrafluoroethylene-filled polyetheretherketone, Wear 243 (2000) 140–146.

12] X. Lu, K.C. Wong, et al., Surface characterization of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) transfer films during rolling-sliding tribology tests using X-ray photo- electron spectroscopy, Wear 262 (2007) 876–882.

13] Y. Wang, F. Yan, A study on behaviour of transfer films of PTFE/bronze compos- ites, Wear 262 (2007) 876–882.

14] Y. Wang, F. Yan, Tribological properties of transfer films of PTFE-based com- posites, Wear 261 (2006) 1359–1366.

15] J. Gao, Tribochemical effects in formation of polymer transfer film, Wear 245 (2000) 100–106.

16] H. Spikes, Tribology research in the twenty-first century, Tribology Interna- tional 34 (2001) 789–799.

17] Y.-Z. Gao, H.-C. Zhang, et al., Mechanical analysis of formation of auto- restoration coating on the worn surface of the GCr15 balls, Journal of Dalian Maritime University 31 (2005) 61–65.

18] W.-G. Chen, Y.-Z. Gao, et al., Influence of heat-treatment serpentine powder on

(2008) 30–34. 19] Y. Jin, S. Li, et al., In situ mechanochemical reconditioning of worn ferrous

surfaces, Tribology International 37 (2004) 561–567. 20] C.F. Higgs III, E.Y.A. Wornyoh, An in situ mechanism for self-replenishing pow-

der transfer films: experiments and modeling, Wear 264 (2008) 131–138.

  • Influence of serpentine content on tribological behaviors of PTFE/serpentine composite under dry sliding condition
    • Introduction
    • Experiment details
      • Samples preparation
      • Tribological tests
        • Friction testing
        • Wear testing
    • Results and discussion
      • Distribution of serpentine particulates in composite
      • Friction coefficient
      • Dimensionless wear rate
      • Wear traces of PTFE/serpentine composites
      • Transfer film generated on upper specimen
    • Conclusions
    • Acknowledgements
    • References

all articles will be uesed/Mechanical Properties of polymers.pdf

4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

4.1 Fundamental Principles of Mechanical Behavior

The mechanical properties of polymers often play a key role for their application. The demands placed on test methodology are correspondingly high. They can be fulfilled only if the fundamentals of mechanical behavior are given due consideration from the perspective of both continuum mechanical and materials science when test strategies are being worked out.

Numerous extensive studies are available that describe the behavior of materials in general and polymers in particular [1.16, 4.1 – 4.3]. By ‘mechanical behavior’ we mean the reaction of any material under mechanical loading. When a force acts on a body, deformation is the result. Just how the body is deformed depends on its mechanical behavior and geometry, as well as on load value and loading direction. To describe material behavior under mechanical loading, it is useful to consider the influence of geometry by introducing loading parameters in the form of stress and strain.

4.1.1 Mechanical Loading Parameters

4.1.1.1 Stress

By stress we mean the force F per unit area acting on a plane in the material. Two principal cases can be distinguished depending on the loading direction. If the normal of the reference plane and loading direction lie parallel to each other, we refer to the resulting stress as normal stress . Normal stresses occur, for example, in the cross-sectional area of prismatic rods under uniaxial loading. For the simple example in Fig. 4.1a it holds that:

0A

F (4.1)

A0 represents the cross-sectional area of the undeformed specimen and is used as a reference quantity.

74 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

L

F

F

L 0

L

F

F

A0

a b

L 0

Fig. 4.1: Diagram of deformation (a) under normal stress loading and (b) under shear stress loading

If the loading direction and the normal of the reference plane are perpendicular to each other, as in Fig. 4.1b, the resulting stress is termed shear stress . By analogy to Eq. 4.1, then:

0A

F (4.2)

Generally speaking, when the stress vector (force vector per unit area) and the normal of the reference plane are oriented neither parallel nor perpendicular to one another, the rules of vector analysis can be used to break the stress down into a normal stress component zz and two perpendicular shear stress components xz and yz. This is shown in Fig. 4.2.

Under complex loading conditions, it is necessary to describe the spatial stress state independently of any concrete reference plane. To do so, nine stress components are required that act on the interfaces of an infinitesimally small cubic volume element, as shown in Fig. 4.3. Equal stresses act on the facing surfaces of the volume elements to uphold the balance of forces, but in opposing directions.

z

x

y

��zz

�yz

�xz

A

C

D

B Fig. 4.2: Breakdown of stress acting on reference plane ABCD into normal stress component zz

and shear stress components xz and yz

4.1 Fundamental Principles of Mechanical Behavior 75

� �

y

zz

xz yz

yy

zy

xy

xx

zx

yx

x

z

Fig. 4.3: Three-dimensional stress state

The stress components can be represented in matrix form as elements of a second order tensor:

zzzyzx

yzyyyx

xzxyxx

iij (4.3)

Due to the symmetry properties of the tensor ( ij = ji), the number of independent stress components reduces to six.

Using coordinate transformation, the size of the stress components can be calculated with reference to variously oriented coordinate systems x, y, z. The coordinate system in which stress tensor all shear stress components disappear ( ij = 0 for all i j) is of particular importance. The axes of this coordinate system are termed principal axes 1, 2, 3, the remaining normal stresses ( ij with i = j) being principal stresses 1, 2, 3. Based on the invariants I1, I2 and I3 of the stress tensor, the stress state can be described independently of the selected coordinate system:

2 xyzz

2 zxyy

2 yzxxzxyzxyzzyyxx3

2 zx

2 yz

2 xyxxzzzzyyyyxx2

zzyyxx1

2I

I

I

(4.4)

With regard to the effects of the stresses, we can distinguish between volume and shape changes. Correspondingly, the stress tensor can be divided into a hydrostatic (dilatational component) p

3

I )(

3

1 p 1zzyyxx (4.5)

76 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

and a deviatoric component (shape-change component) ij .

)p(

)p(

)p(

zzzyzx

yzyyyx

xzxyxx

ij (4.6)

4.1.1.2 Strain

Due to the effect of stresses, relative shape changes called strains (normal strains) and shear strains (normal shear strains), respectively, are induced in mechanically loaded bodies. For a simple case of uniaxial loading, as illustrated in Fig. 4.1a, the normal strain is a non-dimensional function of the length change L = L – L0 and initial length L0 of an unloaded body:

0

0

0 L

LL

L

L (4.7)

Alternatively, draw ratio and true strain (Hencky strain) w are often used as strain values to describe relatively large deformations:

1 L

L

0

(4.8)

1lnln L

L ln

L

dL

0

L

L w

0

(4.9)

Thus, in cases of simple shear loading (Fig. 4.1b), it holds for shear strain that:

tan L

L

0

. (4.10)

Under more complex loading conditions, the relative displacements of adjacent mass points must be precisely analyzed in order to describe the deformation state. As the result of such an analysis, the deformation state is described by a strain tensor ij whose components are arranged in the form of a symmetric matrix analogous to a stress tensor (Eq. 4.3):

zzzyzx

yzyyyx

xzxyxx

ij (4.11)

4.1 Fundamental Principles of Mechanical Behavior 77

Relative length changes of the system in terms of the x, y, z axes of the coordinate system are described by normal strains xx, yy and zz. By contrast, angle changes result in shear components xy, yz and zx.

The strain tensor exhibits properties formally similar to those of the stress tensor. Thus it is possible to assume a system of principal axes 1, 2, 3 relative to which shearing disappears and only the principal strains 1, 2 and 3 exist. Furthermore, it is possible to determine three invariants as well as to distinguish a hydrostatic volume change component from a deviatoric (shape change) component.

4.1.2 Material Behavior and Constitutive Equations

The relationship between the mechanical loading parameters stress and strain is determined by material behavior and described by constitutive equations. It occurs in an enormous variety of combinations depending on the structural state of the investigated material, as well as the loading conditions. In the area of polymers alone, its spectrum ranges from brittle glassy solidified amorphous polymers to ductile semicrystalline thermoplastics to soft elastomers all the way to fluid-like polymer melts. Due to the multiplicity of observable phenomena, a uniform description is scarcely possible. Instead, basic types of mechanical behavior are defined using simplified assumptions that allow us to approximate a description of the stress–strain relationship within a narrow range of validity.

4.1.2.1 Elastic Behavior

The mechanical behavior of a material is called elastic as long as there is a bijective relationship between its stress and deformation states, i.e., entirely reversible in the mechanical as well as thermodynamic sense. With respect to different thermodynamic causes, we distinguish between energy elasticity and entropy elasticity.

Energy Elasticity

The structural cause of energy-elastic behavior is a change in median interatomic distances and bond angles under the influence of mechanical loading. The required mechanical work is stored in the form of potential energy (increase in internal energy) and entirely regained when loading is removed (first law of thermodynamics). Due to its structural causes, energy-elastic behavior remains limited to relatively small deformations. Here we can observe a linear relationship

78 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

between stress and strain as described by Hooke’s law. In a simple case of uniaxial tensile loading (see Fig. 4.1a), it holds that:

E (4.12)

The proportionality constant between stress and strain is called the modulus of elasticity E. It is related to the bonding forces in the material. Alternatively, compliance C can also be determined:

C (4.13)

In addition to length change, a tensile loaded specimen simultaneously undergoes reduction in cross-section. The magnitude of this cross-sectional change is described by Poisson’s ratio . It expresses the relationship between strains in the latitudinal ( y,

z) and longitudinal ( x) directions. In cases of uniaxial loading, it holds that:

x

z

x

y (4.14)

For the general case of multiaxial loading, energy-elastic behavior is described by the generalized Hooke’s law. It is based on the assumption that each of the six components of the stress tensor ij is linear-dependent on the six components of the deformation tensor kl:

klij ijklC (4.15)

klij ijklD (4.16)

The proportionality constants between the components of the stress and deformation tensors form a forth order tensor, also called the elasticity tensor Cijkl or compliance tensor Dijkl. This tensor consists of 81 components of which, however, only 21 are independent of one another in static equilibrium. Symmetry properties of the material can lead to a further reduction in the number of independent components. Two components are required in order to completely describe the elasticity and/or compliance tensor of an isotropic material. The relationship between stress and deformation state of an isotropic material can be vectorially expressed as follows [4.4]:

4.1 Fundamental Principles of Mechanical Behavior 79

zx

yz

xy

zz

yy

xx

1211

1211

1211

111212

121112

121211

zx

yz

xy

zz

yy

xx

2

CC 00000

0 2

CC 0000

00 2

CC 000

000CCC

000CCC

000CCC

(4.17)

The elastic constants C11 and C12 stand in relation to the modulus of elasticity E and Poisson’s ratio of an isotropic material:

)21)(1(

)1(E C11 (4.18)

)21)(1(

E C12 (4.19)

From the modulus of elasticity E and Poisson’s ratio , further material parameters can be calculated such as shear modulus G and compression modulus K:

2

CC

)1(2

E G 1211 (4.20)

3

C2C

)21(3

E

VV

p K 1211

0

(4.21)

Energy elasticity dominates the behavior of polymer materials for relatively small deformations, especially at low temperatures and high loading rates. Here, energy elasticity theory contributes strongly to our understanding of the deformation behavior. Moreover, it provides workable approximating solutions for a quantitative description of the stress–strain relationship.

Entropy Elasticity

By entropy elasticity we mean the tendency of macromolecules to return to their entropically most advantageous, i.e., coiled, state subsequent to deformation. If a flexible-chained polymer material is subjected to mechanical loading, its macromolecules orientate in the stress field. The state of molecular order is accompanied by a reduction in system entropy. If irreversible chain slip can be prevented, for example by crosslinking, the molecules tend to maximize entropy

80 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

upon being released (second law of thermodynamics). They assume a permanent unordered state of equilibrium.

Entropy-elastic behavior up to strains of several hundred percent can be observed, whereby the relationship between stress and deformation is non-linear. Simple continuum mechanical considerations, as well as molecular statistical models [4.5] in the case of uniaxial load, lead to the following relation:

)( 3

E 2 (4.22)

The material’s parameter modulus of elasticity E is determined by the crosslink density N or average molecular weight between the crosslinking points of the polymer MC . Moreover, it is dependent on temperature T as well as on the Boltzmann number k or the universal gas constant R and density :

RT M

3 NkT3E

C

(4.23)

Using Eq. 4.22, essential phenomena of mechanical behavior of vulcanized rubber can be illustrated. Their quantitative validity often remains limited to strains of less than 100 %. For this reason, the simple rubber elasticity theory has undergone a series of further developments which are covered in [4.6], for example.

Entropy elasticity is not limited to covalent crosslinked polymers. It also plays an important role above the glass transition temperature in amorphous and semicrystalline thermoplastics of sufficiently high molecular weight. Here, molecular entanglements assume the role of temporary crosslinking points [4.7 – 4.9].

4.1.2.2 Viscous Behavior

In contrast to elastic behavior, viscous behavior is characterized by the total irreversibility of deformation processes. Therefore,

1. Once deformation has been effected, it remains in place even after unloading; the relationship between stress and strain is unambiguous only with respect to prehistory; however, it is no unique reversible relationship.

2. Work expended on deformation is entirely dissipated by the material.

Structurally speaking, viscous behavior is characterized by relative displacement among adjacent structure units (molecules and/or molecule sequences in polymer materials). Any frictional forces to be overcome are dependent on deformation velocity. When the relationship observed between stress and deformation velocity is

4.1 Fundamental Principles of Mechanical Behavior 81

linear, we speak of Newtonian material behavior. This is characterized by the material parameter viscosity . In cases of simple shear loading (shear flow) it holds that:

dt

d (4.24)

By analogy in cases of elongational flow under normal stress loading, it holds that:

TT

dt

d (4.25)

The viscosity T is called elongational viscosity or Trouton viscosity. At low shear rates, it is three times greater than shear viscosity (Trouton ratio T/ = 3) [4.10].

Newtonian behavior is found in polymer melts. Here, however, it is generally limited to low shear rates. At higher shear rates, shear softening, also called pseudoplasticity, often occurs . More rarely observed is shear hardening (dilatancy). As it deviates from Newtonian behavior, viscosity becomes a function of deformation rate. Various rheological methods are available to describe the occurring non-linearities [4.10].

A viscosity theory focusing on structural consideration has been developed by Eyring [4.11] (Rate Theory). It describes the irreversible deformation process resulting from local interchange of sites by stress-aided thermal activation. The relationship between shear rate and shear stress depends on the characteristic material parameters of

the energy barrier height to be overcome during site change (activation enthalpy H0), the activation volume v and a pre-exponential factor 0 , as well as on the

Boltzmann number k and temperature T. This relationship can be expressed as:

Tk

v sinh

Tk

H exp 00 (4.26)

To overcome potential barriers in polymer melts, the proportion of mechanical energy is generally small compared to that of thermal energy (v << kT). Thereby Eq. 4.26 becomes a borderline case of Newtonian behavior ( ~ ). By analogy with Eq.

4.24, the resulting viscosity is:

Tk

H exp 00 (4.27)

with

82 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

v

Tk

0

0 (4.28)

Equation 4.27 describes the temperature dependence of viscosity in the form of an Arrhenius relationship. A relationship of this type has been demonstrated in experiments with melts of semicrystalline thermoplastic (far from glass transition temperature). For amorphous polymer melts near glass transition temperature, it is often more advantageous to use the Vogel/Fulcher/Tammann equation (Eq. 4.29) which is related to the free volume theory with the constants A and B as well as

temperature 0T [1.16].

0TT

B expA (4.29)

4.1.2.3 Viscoelastic Behavior

Viscosity and elasticity are the characteristic properties of fluids and solid bodies in the area of low-molecular materials. For polymers they represent merely the limits of a broad spectrum of properties that are characterized by the simultaneous occurrence of viscous and elastic effects called viscoelasticity. The characteristic feature of viscoelastic behavior is the time dependence of material properties. This is expressed, for example, by relaxation and retardation phenomena under static loading. A detailed presentation and interpretation of viscoelastic properties of polymers can be found in the works of Ferry [4.12] or Aklonis and MacKnight [4.13].

Linear Viscoelasticity

When material properties depend only on time, but not on the level of mechanical loading, the material’s behavior is called linear-viscoelastic. Linear viscoelasticity is exactly defined only for the range of infinitesimally small loads. In practice, the validity for solid polymers is limited to strains less than 1 %, but for polymer melts it can reach 100 % [4.14].

Linear-viscoelastic behavior can be expressed by a combination of linear-elastic and linear-viscous processes (laws of Hooke and Newton). Mechanical models can be used for illustration, in which elastic behavior is symbolized by a spring and viscous behavior by a dashpot. In the simplest case, both basic elements are arranged either in series or parallel, as shown in Fig. 4.4.

4.1 Fundamental Principles of Mechanical Behavior 83

Maxwell Voigt Kelvin- Fig. 4.4: Analogy model for describing viscoelastic behavior

The spring and dashpot series is called the Maxwell model. It describes the phenomenon of stress relaxation (reaction to a sudden change of deformation). One characteristic of this model is the additivity of elastic and viscous deformation segments:

ve (4.30)

By substituting Eq. 4.12 and 4.25 in Eq. 4.30, we obtain differential equation Eq.4.31. Its solution in the case of stress relaxation ( 0 ) results in a temporally exponentially falling stress (t) (Eq. 4.32), or as a material function in a temporally exponentially falling relaxation modulus E(t) (Eq. 4.33).

1

E

1 (4.31)

t expt

E exp)t( 0T0 (4.32)

t expt

E exp

)t( )t(E

0

0

0

0

0

(4.33)

The quotient /E represents the model time constant, also called relaxation time . Once a relaxation time has to be considered, the Maxwell model is incapable of describing the complex relaxation behavior of real polymers. Correspondence between model and experiment can be achieved by introducing a discrete relaxation time spectrum. This can be illustrated in the analogy model by several Maxwell elements arranged in parallel, as is shown in Fig. 4.5.

The relaxation modulus E(t) of this generalized Maxwell model results from the sum of individual relaxation moduli Ei(t):

84 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

E 1

� 1

E 2

2

E 3

3

E∞

�1 �2 �3

E i

i

� i Fig. 4.5: Generalized Maxwell model

t expEE)t(E

n

1i i (4.34)

As n , transition takes place to a continuous relaxation time spectrum H( ):

)(lnd t

exp)(HE)t(E (4.35)

In contrast to the Maxwell model, the parallel arrangement of spring and dashpot known as the Voigt-Kelvin model characterizes retardation behavior (reaction to a sudden change of stress). Analogous to the procedure described above, compliance C(t) can be calculated as a characteristic value function.

t exp1

)t( )t(C

0

0

0

(4.36)

Introduction of the retardation time spectrum L( ) results in:

)(lnd t

exp1)(LJ)t(C (4.37)

Besides the Maxwell and Voigt-Kelvin models, rheology uses numerous other rheological models to describe linear-viscoelastic behavior. Regardless of the approach used, its mathematical description leads to a linear differential equation with the form

constb,a

...bbbb...aaaa

ii

32103210 (4.38)

4.1 Fundamental Principles of Mechanical Behavior 85

which forms the basis for linear viscoelasticity theory. It is the theoretical foundation for a series of rules whose applicability has contributed to the acceptance of the theory.

Boltzmann Superposition Principle

The Boltzmann superposition principle describes the influence of mechanical prehistory on material behavior. It states that the time-dependent effects of sequential changes in the loading state combine linearly to the overall effect. Figure 4.6 illustrates this with a creep recovery experiment.

0

0

� (t) 1

time tt t

� (t)

� (t) 2

� (t) 1

� (t) 2

� (t) = � (t) + � (t)1 2

21

s tr

a in

� s tr

e s s

Fig. 4.6: Linear overlapping of strains 1(t) and 2(t) occurring as a result of sudden stress changes 1

and 2 using a creep recovery experiment as an example

At time t1, stress change 1 is generated, effecting a time-dependent deformation change 1(t). Any further stress change 2 = – 1 at time t2 has the same effect. However, 2(t) lags behind and has an opposite direction. The total effect (t) of sequential stress changes results from the sum of individual effects 1(t) + 2(t). For n stress steps, it holds that:

n

1i ii

n

1i i )tt(C)tt()t( (4.39)

From this and by transition to differentially small load changes, the Boltzmann superposition integral results

d d

d )t(C)t(

t

(4.40)

86 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

or

d d

d )t(E)t(

t

(4.41)

which describes the behavior for any given loading history and which can be regarded as a constitutive equation for linear-viscoelastic materials.

Time–Temperature Superposition Principle

Viscoelastic material properties exhibit strong temperature dependence in addition to their pronounced time dependence, because molecular motion and transformation processes determine the relaxation and/or retardation spectrum of the material. These molecular processes are thermally activated and proceed more rapidly as temperature increases. During the process, the relaxation and retardation time spectrum shifts to shorter times. If, in dependence on temperature, only the speed, but not the type or number of molecular processes changes, the relaxation and/or retardation spectrum is maintained, and along with it, the shape of viscoelastic functions along the logarithmic time axis. Their temporal position, however, changes in accordance with the temperature. Such behavior is usually defined as thermorheologically simple. As a consequence of this behavior time-temperature equivalence, applied as a time-temperature superposition principle, has gained great practical significance for predicting long-term behavior. If the progression of a viscoelastic parameter, e.g., modulus E(log t), is known for a certain time interval at varying temperatures, then individual curves, such as in Fig. 4.7, can be horizontally shifted to coincide with curve E0(log t) acquired at reference temperature T0. The

T

lo g E

effective

master

log (t) log tlog (t )0

0

T 3

T 1

T 2

log aT

range

curve

Fig. 4.7: Master curve drawn using time-temperature superposition (diagram)

4.1 Fundamental Principles of Mechanical Behavior 87

result is a master curve illustrating material behavior over a wide time range. The shift function log aT = log t – log t0 is temperature-dependent. In many cases it can be described using an Arrhenius approach:

00

T T

1

T

1

k3.2

H

t

t logalog (4.42)

In the glass transition temperature range, however, it often follows the Williams/ Landel/Ferry (WLF) equation:

02

01

0

T TTC

)TT(C

t

t logalog (4.43)

with universal constants C1 and C2 [4.15].

Correspondence Principle

Practical work with linear-viscoelastic constitutive equations can be considerably simplified using Laplace’s transformation. That means that a function y(t) is transformed into a function y with the new variable s according to the following rule:

dt)st(expyy 0

(4.44)

If, for example, this procedure is applied to Boltzmann’s superposition integral (Eq. 4.41) it results in:

)s(Es (4.45)

Formally this corresponds to Hooke’s law (Eq. 4.12), by analogy with which Eq. 4.45 can be modified according to normal rules of algebra, thus leading to the results known from linear elasticity theory. After inverse transformation, it provides a solution to the loading problem for viscoelastic material behavior.

Non-Linear Viscoelasticity

Once the limit of validity of linear viscoelasticity is exceeded, the time and temperature-dependent viscoelastic properties are additionally influenced by load magnitude. Therefore, mechanical behavior can now no longer be described in the form of a linear differential equation. Because the solution of the resulting non-linear differential equations is mathematically extremely complicated and cannot be solved without simplifications, it did not become standard practice. For simple applications,

88 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

the Leadermann approach [4.16] has often proved satisfactory. It supplements the Boltzmann superposition integral (Eq. 4.41) with the load-dependent empirical function f( ).

d d

)(df )t(E)t(

t

(4.46)

For stress relaxation as an example, it results in:

)(f)t(E)t( (4.47)

In addition to the procedure described by Leadermann, the literature provides numerous additional mathematical approaches for treating non-linear viscoelastic problems [4.10]. Since the introduction of Fourier transform rheology, considerable progress has been made in describing non-linear viscoelastic behavior under oscillating loading [4.17].

4.1.2.4 Plastic Behavior

Similar to viscoelastic behavior, a combination of reversible and irreversible processes characterizes plastic behavior. However, in contrast to viscoelastic behavior, they do not occur simultaneously, but are separated from each other by a yield point F. Below the yield point, material behavior is elastic; above it irreversible flow processes take place (see Fig. 4.8a). Using the equations of Hooke (Eq. 4.12) and Newton (Eq. 4.25), the stress–strain relationship can be formulated as follows:

FF T

F

for

forE (4.48)

Plastic deformation behavior is detected in many amorphous and semicrystalline polymers. Under uniaxial tensile loading, as illustrated in Fig. 4.8b, it takes the form of yield stress s, characterized by a local maximum in the stress–strain curve and usually observed for elongations ranging from 5 to 25 %.

Instances of yield strain are accompanied by reduction in local cross-section of the specimen also known as necking. In the necking zone, irreversible deformations of several hundred percent occur. Due to this inhomogeneity, considerable discrepancies arise between nominal and true stress and/or strain. By establishing true stress–strain diagrams, it could be shown that the stress reduction after yield stress has been exceeded often is only an apparent geometry effect [4.18].

4.1 Fundamental Principles of Mechanical Behavior 89

� S

1

2

strain �

F

a b

strain �

s tr

e s s

s tr

e s s

Fig. 4.8: Relationship between stress and strain in plastic material behavior: Model (a) and polymer

material (b) (1: nominal (engineering) stress–strain curve; 2: (true stress–strain curve)

The level of yield stress required for plastic flow processes to start depends on the stress state as well as on temperature and loading rate. The influence of stress state can generally be described by the yield criteria of classical mechanics [4.19]. The temperature and velocity dependence of yield flow allows for the thermally active nature of the underlying deformation processes. For amorphous as well as semicrystalline polymers, it often conforms to the Eyring equation (Eq. 4.26). With respect to the occuring deformation mechanisms, however, amorphous and semicrystalline polymers exhibit considerable differences. In amorphous polymers, plastic deformation occurs in the glassy state where local molecular motion under the effect of stress forms plasticized microdomains whose growth and conjunction on the macroscopic scale lead to plastic deformation in the form of shear bands or crazes. [4.20, 4.21]. In semicrystalline polymers, plastic deformation generally occurs above the glass temperature of the amorphous phase. Here, crystallographic slip processes represent the decisive step in deformation [4.22 – 4.24] as a result of which the lamellar structure is transformed into a fibrillar structure [4.25, 4.26]. Observation of the deformation mechanisms makes clear that the microscopic processes leading to plastic deformation begin to occur far below the yield point. They can often be identified as early as during loading in the linear-viscoelastic range, so that relationships can be established between relaxation time spectrum and plastic behavior [4.27].

An orientation of the macromolecules takes place as a result of plastic deformation. The achievable changes in properties are the focus of numerous polymer processing technologies. Due to molecular orientation, entropy-elastic restoring forces are triggered that resist plastic deformation and cause strain hardening that are observed with large deformations. If loading is increased further, breaking occurs in overloaded polymer chains, preceding the macroscopic fracture of the material.

90 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

4.2 Mechanical Spectroscopy

One characteristic feature of polymer materials is the pronounced time dependence of their mechanical properties. This is caused by the different relaxation times of a wide spectrum of molecular relaxation processes. The relationship between relaxation time spectrum H( ) and modulus of elasticity E(t) can be established on the basis of linear viscoelasticity theory using Eq. 4.35. For the sake of simplicity, Alfery’s approximation solution [4.28] can often be used:

ttlnd

)t(dE )(H (4.49)

The determination and analysis of the relaxation time spectrum on the basis of mechanical investigations is the subject of mechanical spectroscopy. More specifically, a type of absorption spectroscopy is involved that determines the energy- absorption in the material due to internal friction as a function of the frequency and duration of mechanical loading. The position of an absorption process on the frequency or time axis, as well as its intensity, provides information on the type of underlaying molecular rearrangement as well as on the magnitude and number of structural elements involved. Thus, mechanical spectroscopy is an effective tool for characterizing the structure and explaining molecular relaxation processes.

4.2.1 Experimental Determination of Time Dependent Mechanical Properties

Mechanical spectroscopy is primarily oriented to investigations involving small loads where there is no irreversible structural change in the material, and linear viscoelasticity theory is valid. It is based on experimental data acquirable within a time span of approx. 10-8 s to 108 s. A combination of various testing methods is required to characterize mechanical behavior over such a wide time span. For long- term loading times lasting more than a minute, static test methods (stress relaxation, retardation) are used. The short-term, however, is dominated by dynamic test methods with oscillating loading that fall into the category of dynamic–mechanical analysis. Relationships between statically and dynamically determined values can be established on the basis of linear viscoelasticity theory [1.16, 4.12].

4.2 Mechanical Spectroscopy 91

4.2.1.1 Static Testing Methods

Static testing methods are based on the analysis of material behavior subsequent to a sudden change in mechanical loading. We can make a principal distinction between two cases as illustrated by the diagrams in Fig. 4.9.

In stress relaxation (Fig. 4.9a), the change of stress with time (t) at 0 = const. caused by a sudden change in deformation is measured. From this we obtain the material parameter called time-dependent modulus of elasticity E(t):

0

)t( )t(E (4.50)

By analogy in the retardation or creep test (Fig. 4.9b), the change of deformation (t) with time to the value 0 = const. as a result of a sudden change in stress is used to determine compliance value C(t):

0

)t( )t(C (4.51)

Static tests can extend over very long time periods. They therefore place strong demands on the constancy of test conditions, especially temperature and humidity. In addition, structural changes such as chemical reactions and physical ageing can influence material behavior. During relatively short loading times, experimental results are influenced by the loading velocity.

time ttime t

s tr

e s s

s tr

a in

0� = const.

time t

s tr

e s s

� (t)

� (t)

s tr

a in

� 0� = const.

time t

Fig. 4.9: Stress relaxation and retardation (creep) for characterizing viscoelastic behavior at long

loading times

92 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

4.2.1.2 Dynamic–Mechanical Analysis (DMA)

In dynamic–mechanical analysis, specimens are subjected to oscillating loading. The time dependence of material behavior can be characterized by varying the frequency. For the relation between loading time t and frequency f or angular frequency , the rule is:

1

f2

1 t (4.52)

DMA is especially useful since only relatively short test times are required to acquire viscoelastic values over a wide frequency range. Moreover, dynamic–mechanical– thermal analysis (DMTA) makes it relatively easy to investigate material behavior as a function of temperature.

A number of procedures are available for performing DMA that differ with respect to the achievable frequency range, type of mechanical loading and magnitude of measurable material properties. These procedures can be classified according to the type of vibrational excitation, such as forced vibrations, freely damped vibrations and resonant vibrations. In higher frequency ranges, the propagation of sonic and ultrasonic waves is also used to determine characteristic values. The various methods of DMA are standardized by ISO 6721.

Tests Using Forced Vibrations

When forced vibrations are used to characterize viscoelastic properties, specimens are subjected to sinusoidal alternating mechanical loading at constant frequency and constant amplitude. In cases of linear-viscoelastic material behavior, steady-state changes of stress and deformation with time exhibit the same frequency, but varying phase positions. For cases of normal stress loading, the rule is:

tsin)t( 0 (4.53)

)tsin()t( 0 (4.54)

This is illustrated in Fig. 4.10.

Due to the phase shift between stress and strain, its modulus has to be introduced as the complex modulus E* to describe the stress–strain relationship.

EiEE* (4.55)

4.2 Mechanical Spectroscopy 93

0

� (t)

s tr

a in

time ts tr

e s s

1/f ���/

� � (t)

0

Fig. 4.10: Change in stress and strain with time in dynamic–mechanical analysis using forced

vibrations

This complex modulus can be regarded as a vector in the complex plane (Fig. 4.11) whose direction is given by the phase angle and its amount by the ratio of stress and strain amplitudes:

0

0*E (4.56)

E’’

E’

i

j

E

Fig. 4.11: Diagram of modulus E* in the complex plane

Using simple trigonometric relations, a real part E and an imaginary part E can be distinguished:

coscosEE 0

0* and (4.57)

sinsinEE 0

0* (4.58)

The real part E is called the storage modulus. It is a measure of the energy storable during the oscillation period Wrev. By contrast, the imaginary part E of the complex modulus is related to the energy dissipated during the oscillation period Wirrev. For this reason, it is called the loss modulus.

2 0rev E

2

1 W (4.59)

94 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

2 0irrev EW (4.60)

From the ratio of loss and storage moduli, we obtain the loss factor tan that characterizes the damping behavior of the material:

rev

irrev

W

W

2

1

E

E tan (4.61)

The forced vibration procedure is limited to frequencies below specimen resonance frequency. Commercial devices have a range of approx. 10-2 Hz to 102 Hz. Measurement can be controlled by monitoring both strain and stress, thus enabling the determination of complex modulus E* and complex compliance C*. Using axial and torsional testing equipment and an appropriate specimen adapter, various loading types (tensile, compression, bending, shear, torsion) can be employed. This enables the acquisition of complex elasticity and shear moduli over a wide stiffness range from 10-3 MPa to 106 MPa. The most significant disadvantage of this procedure lies in its lack of sensitivity when measuring relatively low damping (tan < 0.01).

Thanks to their wide application range, test methods with forced vibrations play a dominant role in the dynamic–mechanical analysis of polymer materials.

Tests Using Free Damped Vibrations (Torsion Pendulum)

When a specimen is deflected from its state of equilibrium by pulsed deformation, it returns to its state of equilibrium in free damped vibrations. The natural frequency of vibration, as well as the decrease of vibration amplitudes with time, depends on the viscoelastic properties of the material.

a b

2

1

3

2

1

3

4

Fig. 4.12: Diagram of a torsion pendulum setup without counterweighting (a) and with

counterweighting (b)

4.2 Mechanical Spectroscopy 95

The principle of free damped vibrations has its practical application in torsion pendulum testing as standardized in ISO 6721-2. The basic setup of the torsion pendulum is illustrated in Fig. 4.12.

Usually a prismatic specimen (1) is firmly clamped at one end (2). At the other end it is connected to an oscillating weight (3) that influences the moment of inertia and thereby the eigenfrequency of the entire system. In order to eliminate longitudinal normal stresses in the specimen, a counterweight (4) can be applied. The specimen is excited to freely decreasing torsional oscillations by pulsed deformation of the oscillating weight as shown in Fig. 4.13.

time t

1/f

l0

0

A n

A n

+ 1

d e fle

ct io

n

l

Fig. 4.13: Freely decaying damped vibration

The storage modulus G can be determined from vibration eigenfrequency. According to ISO 6721-2:

g 2 0d

2 d FfFfI4G (4.62)

Here fd is the eigenfrequency of the pendulum with, and f0 the eigenfrequency of the pendulum without the specimen (if work without counterweighting, then f0 = 0). Additional influencing factors to be considered include the moment of inertia I of the oscillation weight with clamping, as well as the damping correction Fd and the geometry factor Fg. When prismatic specimens are used (clamping length L, width b, thickness h), with h/b 6 and a geometry correction factor Fc = 1 – 0.63 h/b, then:

c 32

d0 22

d 2 FbhLff21If12G (4.63)

The logarithmic decrement characterizes system damping. It is determined from the ratio of sequential vibration amplitudes:

1n

n

A

A ln (4.64)

96 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

Using logarithmic decrement, the loss modulus G can be calculated as

g0 2 d FIf4G (4.65)

For work without counterweighting, the logarithmic decrement of the pendulum without specimen 0 is 0. For specimens with square cross-sections and small h/b ratio and with counterweighting at low internal damping of the pendulum ( 0 << ), the loss modulus can be calculated as:

c 32

d FbhLIf12G (4.66)

With the storage and loss moduli, the complex modulus G* and the loss factor tan can be determined analogous to Eqs. 4.57, 4.58 and 4.61.

The torsion pendulum works at frequencies ranging from 0.1 to 10 Hz. It is preferred for investigating materials with low damping (tan 0.1). When investigating with temperature dependence, a change takes place in system eigenfrequency due to modulus changes (see, e.g., Eq. 4.62). Modulus temperature curves are therefore generally measured at sliding frequency. To be sure, the frequency changes can be compensated in principle via changes in the moment of inertia of the oscillating weight. Basic advantages of the torsion pendulum are the simplicity of its setup and measurement, as well as its high level of sensitivity.

Tests Using Forced Resonant Oscillation

When forced oscillations are generated at a frequency whose wave length approaches the dimensions of the specimen, resonant phenomena occur. If the specimen is excited in the range of resonance at constant force amplitude, the amplitude of deflection follows a peaked curve (Fig. 4.14). Resonant frequency fi and width at half maximum fi are related to the viscoelastic properties of the material being investigated.

frequeny f

f i

0

1

0.707

fi

a m

p lit

u d

e A

/A m

a x

Fig. 4.14: Resonance curve of a viscoelastic material

4.2 Mechanical Spectroscopy 97

from generator

to amplifier

specimen

clamp

method A method B

specimen

to a m

p li fi e

r

fr o

m g e n e ra

to r

textile filaments

Fig. 4.15: Test setup for acquiring viscoelastic properties with forced resonant oscillation

Forced resonant oscillations are applied to determine the complex modulus by the flexural vibration-resonance-curve method (ISO 6721-3). A prismatic rod is used as specimen and clamped either on one side (procedure A) or hung on textile fibers at the vibration nodes (procedure B). The diagram in Fig. 4.15 illustrates both arrangements. Non-contacting excitation and measurement are performed via electromagnetic transducers connected to the polymer material via thin metal tabs glued to the specimen surface. Using a frequency synthesizer, the excitation frequency can be continuously varied over a range from approx. 101 Hz to 103 Hz.

While scanning this frequency range, the detector registers several peaks in oscillation amplitude corresponding to different order resonances i (i = 1, 2, 3,…). The real part of the complex elasticity modulus E can be determined from resonance frequency fi at the i-th resonance point, density of the investigated material and specimen dimensions (free length L, thickness h):

2 i

i 22

k

f

h

L 34'E (4.67)

The numerical value ki 2 depends on the order number i of the resonance point and

clamping conditions (see Table 4.1).

Table 4.1: Numerical value ki 2 for determining storage modulus E with the flexural vibration test

Order number

i

ki 2

(Method A)

ki 2

(Method B)

1

2

> 2

3.52

22.0

(i –1/2)2 2

22.4

61.7

(i –1/2)2 2

98 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

The additional parameter loss factor tan can be calculated from the width at half- maximum of resonance curve fi and resonance frequency fi :

i

i

f

f tan (4.68)

For materials with low internal damping (tan < 0.01) and resonance frequency, the analysis of freely decreasing vibrations after the exciter has been shut off can be recommended as an alternative. Here, the falling amplitudes of sequential vibrations is observed (see Fig. 4.13), from which the loss factor can be determined using the logarithmic decrement :

1n

n

A

A ln

1 tan (4.69)

The flexural vibration test is especially suited for characterizing rigid materials whose loss factor does not significantly exceed the value tan = 0.1. A decisive disadvantage of this procedure lies in the fact that relatively few resonance points are available and that the position of resonance points can be influenced only by altering specimen dimensions. During temperature-dependent measurements, changes take place in resonance frequency so that it is impossible to acquire values at constant frequency. Based on the achievable frequency range, the characterization of structure-borne sound insulating materials is the preferred application area for flexural vibration tests.

Tests Based on Wave Propagation (Ultrasonic Technique)

Above resonance frequency, the wave length of oscillating mechanical loading is short compared to specimen dimensions. That makes it possible to use the wave propagation characteristic of a material to determine its viscoelastic properties. Such investigations are generally performed using an ultrasonic (f > 20 kHz) pulse-echo or pulse-transmission technique [4.29, 4.30]. Sound velocity v and sound absorption coefficient are obtained from acoustic path length l and the corresponding pulse transit time, as well as from pulse amplitudes I1 and I2 at various path lengths l1 and l2.

t

l v (4.70)

2

1

12 I

I ln

ll

1 (4.71)

4.2 Mechanical Spectroscopy 99

When the density of the material is known, longitudinal wave modulus L and shear modulus G can be determined using longitudinal waves (vl , l) and transverse waves (vt , t) respectively. At low damping ( /2 << 1), we can approximate that [4.31]:

3 ll2

l v2

''Landv'L (4.72)

3 tt2

t v2

''Gandv'G (4.73)

According to elasticity theory, the modulus of elasticity E can be calculated from longitudinal wave modulus and shear modulus. It depends on the ratio of propagation velocities of transverse and longitudinal waves:

2 lt

2 lt2

t vv1

vv75.0 v4

1'G'L

'G4'L3 'E (4.74)

Ultrasonic methods have gained great importance for determining the properties of oriented polymers and polymer composites. All components of the stiffness matrix can be acquired from a single specimen by varying the polarization direction and propagation direction of the ultrasonic waves.

Ultrasonic measurements are typically made at frequencies between 100 kHz and 100 MHz. The top end of the frequency range is defined by the strong increase in damping. Various vibration exciters have to be used when working in this wide frequency range. Relatively large frequency ranges can be covered following broadband excitation by applying Fourier analysis [4.32].

4.2.2 Time and Temperature Dependence of Viscoelastic Properties

The time and temperature dependence of viscoelastic properties is quite significant for polymer material engineering. That is why it provides the basis for classification into elastomers, thermoplastic elastomers, thermoplastics and thermosets. The diagram in Fig. 4.16 illustrates the dependence of the viscoelastic properties storage modulus E , loss modulus E and loss factor tan on loading time t for an amorphous thermoplastic.

Based on the discontinuous curve of the storage modulus E , viscoelastic behavior can be divided into four characteristic regions. Under short-term loading (t << ), the material exists in its glassy state. Here, at values between 109 Pa and 1010 Pa, the storage modulus is only slightly time-dependent. In the glass transition region

100 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

g la

s s

tr a n s it io

n10 10

108

106

104

102

log t

glassy state E

‘‘ (P

a )

� � �� � �

10-1

100

101

ru b b e r-

e la

s ti c

p la

te a u

fl o w

r e g io

n

ta n

E ‘ (P

a )

Fig. 4.16: Time dependence of viscoelastic properties of an amorphous thermoplastic

(t ), a drastic reduction of the storage modulus by 3 to 4 decades occurs over a relatively short time span. This is followed by a more or less pronounced rubber- elastic plateau where the material is soft and deformable like rubber. At very long loading times, viscous properties dominate mechanical behavior in the flow region.

The time dependence of the storage modulus is calculated according to Eq. 4.35 using a relaxation time spectrum H( ) whose structural cause is a spectrum of molecular relaxation processes. The discontinuous changes in curve shape are due to changes in the dominant relaxation mechanism. At the same time, the mechanical losses (E , tan ) pass through a local maximum due to molecular friction.

The most significant relaxation process in amorphous thermoplastics is the glass transition, also called primary relaxation or process. It is related to the activation of micro Browninan motion. By this we mean cooperative rearrangements of rather long sections of polymer chains (approx. 50 to 100 CH2 units). In the glassy state of amorphous polymers, additional secondary relaxation processes ( , process) can occur that are caused by molecular motion of substituents, side chains, or short mainchain segments. A simultaneous increase in relaxation time can generally be observed that is on the order of the structural units partaking in the relaxation process. Secondary relaxation processes have relatively little influence on the storage modulus E of the material; however, they can effect sometimes distinct partial change in toughness [4.33].

4.2 Mechanical Spectroscopy 101

1010

108

106

104

E ‘‘

(P a )

-1

0

1

ta n

E ‘ (P

a )

T (°C)

10

10

10

10 -2

-150 -100 -50 0 50 100 150

T �

Tg

Fig. 4.17: Modulus–temperature curves and mechanical loss factor dependent on temperature for polyvinylbutyrate (frequency f = 1 Hz)

After passing through the glass transition region, entropy elasticity (see Section 4.1.2.1) dominates mechanical behavior in the rubber-elastic plateau. In this region, entanglements act as temporary crosslinks in a flexible-chained polymer network. Disentanglement processes lead, after very long loading times, to a loosening of the network crosslinks. Thereby, irreversible flow processes are enabled.

The changes in viscoelastic properties presented in Fig. 4.16 take place in amorphous thermoplastics over a time span of 15 to 20 decades. Since this large area can only be partially covered experimentally, investigations to characterize viscoelastic behavior are often performed on the basis of temperature dependence. According to the time– temperature equivalence (see Section 4.1.2.3), it is possible to acquire the entire spectrum of viscoelastic properties at constant loading time or frequency in one temperature run. As a result of such measurements, Fig. 4.17 shows the temperature dependence of storage modulus E , loss modulus E , as well as loss factor tan for amorphous thermoplastic polyvinylbutyrate. The tests were performed at 1 Hz constant frequency under dynamic tensile loading in the range of – 120 °C T +120 °C. Glassy state, glass transition, rubber-elastic plateau and flow region can be clearly distinguished. The dynamic glass transition temperature Tg is an important engineering parameter and can be determined in practice by the maximum of the loss factor. However, the peak of the storage modulus shifted to lower temperatures is sometimes used as a reference point. In contrast to the results of static testing methods (calorimetry, dilatometry), glass temperature under dynamic loading

102 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

10

8

7

E ‘ (P

a )

1/T (1000/K)

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6

10

10

10

10

10

f (Hz)

effective

0.1 ... 50 Hz

T = 0 °C

T = 50 °C

master curve

T = 25 °C0

ln (

a )

T

9

6

3.1

-5

5

15 Arrhenius-plot

H = 430 kJ/mol

3.3 3.5 3.7 -15

range

Fig. 4.18: Master curve of the storage modulus of polyvinylbutyrate for reference temperature

T0 = 25 °C

is generally observed at higher temperatures due to the time dependence of viscoelastic properties.

If temperature-dependent measurements of viscoelastic properties are performed at various frequencies, a master curve can be constructed using the time-temperature superpositon principle (see Section 4.1.2.3) that provides for an estimation of visco- elastic behavior beyond the experimentally covered time period for a reference temperature T0. Such a master curve is illustrated in Fig. 4.18.

Based on experimental data acquired at temperatures from 0 °C to 50 °C over a frequency range of 0.1 Hz to 50 Hz (effective range) in the glass transition range, mechanical behavior can be estimated over a time span of more than 10 decades.

4.2.3 Structural Factors Influencing Viscoelastic Properties

Relationships between chemical structure, molecular relaxation processes and viscoelastic properties are of great practical interest for characterizing and developing materials. That is why they are the object of intensive theoretical [4.34, 4.35] and experimental studies [4.36 – 4.38].

From the time and temperature dependence of the viscoelastic properties of amorphous polymers, information can be acquired as to their chain stiffness (chemical structure of backbone chains and substituents), molecular interactions

4.2 Mechanical Spectroscopy 103

lo g

E

T

increasing molecular weight

increasing crystallinity

increasing crosslink density

Fig. 4.19: Influence of molecular weight, crosslink density and degree of crystallinity on the

temperature dependence of storage modulus

(molecular coefficient of friction), molecular weight and molecular weight distribu- tion, crosslink density and molecular orientation, among others. For semicrystalline polymers, statements can be made as to the degree of crystallinity and crystallite morphology (lamellar thickness). Viscoelastic properties also have great significance for investigating the composition, phase morphology and interface effects of copolymers and polymer blends. Figure 4.19 illustrates the influence of molecular weight, crosslink density and degree of crystallinity on the temperature dependence of storage modulus.

Figure 4.20 illustrates the differences in temperature dependence of the viscoelastic properties of homogenous and heterogeneous polymer systems based on styrene– butadiene copolymers. The two-phase block copolymer (SBS) exhibits two separate glass transitions in the transition temperature regions of the base components polybutene (PB) and polystyrene (PS). However, only one glass transition is detected in the single phase statistical copolymer (SBR) whose temperature position, corresponding to the composition of the mixed phase, is shifted relative to the values of its base components.

104 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

10 E

‘ (P

a )

10

0

1

2

3

T (°C)

PB

PS

SBR

SBS

-150 -100 -50 0 50 100 150 200 250

ta n

9 10

8 10

7 10

6 10

5 10

Fig. 4.20: Comparison of temperature dependence of storage modulus and loss factor of homogenous (SBR) and heterogenous (SBS) styrene–butadiene copolymers with the corresponding homopolymers (PB and PS)

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods

4.3.1 Deformation Behavior of Polymers

By quasi-static test methods, we mean mechanical tests involving strain rates ranging from approx. 10-5 to 10-1 s-1 in which specimen fracture or a predetermined load limit is reached in an economically reasonable time span. It is thereby assumed that loading proceeds slowly, impact-free and increases continuously to fracture. Thus, universal test machines employed in such tests must ensure that the cross-head speed remains constant, regardless of load level and loading speed, when using the preferred conventional test methods. Under these formal conditions, quasi-static test methods such as tensile or flexural tests mainly serve to acquire material values or material characteristic functions. They are also applied in quality assurance, failure analysis and pre-selection of polymers for specified applications, as well as for solving simple design problems [1.38].

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 105

The total deformation of mechanically loaded polymers has the following components, whereby the absolute amount of such components depends on effective loading time and acting temperature:

• elastic deformation, • linear-viscoelastic deformation, • non-linear viscoelastic deformation and • plastic deformation.

In unreinforced plastics, the region of elastic deformation, which corresponds to changes in atomic distance and valency angle in the macromolecule while simultaneously storing elastic potential energy, is typically very small . The molecular links generated in the production process are not released in cases of energy-elastic deformation. In such materials, this region corresponds to a reversible strain of < 0.1 % and, given a linear relation between stress and strain, is completely described by Hooke’s law. In thermosets with network structures or highly filled or reinforced thermoplastic materials, this behavior can be detected especially at short loading times and/or low temperatures up to 40 % of the corresponding stress at break [4.39]. Especially in unidirectional reinforced fiber composites, this deformation behavior is dominant up to break of the specimen used.

Other than in metallic materials, polymers exhibit a mechanically reversible, but time-dependent deformation behavior (viscoelasticity), even on small deformations and at temperatures dictated by application. Based on load level, a principle distinction is made between the linear-viscoelastic and the non-linear viscoelastic deformation component (see Section 4.1.2.3).

Linear-viscoelastic deformation is characterized by mechanically stimulated molecular rearranging processes in which the existing molecular links are not released. This deformation region in thermoplastic polymers lies empirically in an interval between 0.1 and approx. 0.5 % of the total applied strain and passes over into non-linear viscoelastic deformation. The strain occuring as a reaction to loading is reversible, but time- and temperature-dependent, as the diagrams in Fig. 4.21a, b show for static loading. During loading and unloading, it amounts to less than the applied stress. A hysteresis curve (Fig. 4.21c) is created whereby, in cases of quasi-static loading, special initial effects can result, such as zero drift or stress relaxation [4.40].

We define non-linear viscoelastic deformation behavior with the release of molecular entanglements when the polymer properties depend not only on time and temperature, but also on the level of mechanical load. In this deformation region, which is characterized by the beginning of microstructural material damage, molecular migrations take place leading to irreversible yield processes and thereby to

106 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

t

0

a

t

0

b

0

c

0 � �

Fig. 4.21: Linear-viscoelastic deformation behavior of polymers in a diagram illustration of stress-time function (a) and strain-time function (b) given static as well as stress–strain function c) under quasi-static loading

permanent deformation [4.41]. The plastic deformation of polymer products is often mentioned in connection with “cold” yielding and stretching and hardening processes. The polymers then often exhibit clearly definable yield stresses depending on the type of loading selected, as well as on testing speed and temperature. Depending on the mentioned factors and the type of polymer, the dominant deformation mechanisms are crazes and shear band formation, both demonstrable using microstructural investigation methods [4.42], but which are sometimes even macroscopically visible as well.

The great variety of polymers created by chemical modification, mixing, filling and reinforcing leads, due to interaction among the various organic and inorganic components, to new internal top or border surfaces from which numerous different damage mechanisms may result. These mechanisms, such as fiber breaking or debonding, as well as the formation of voids and microcracks, begin to act immediately in the transition range between linear- and non-linear viscoelastic deformation and affect the durability and reliability of such materials in use. Here the problem arises that such effects are not visible on the stress–strain diagram. Therefore, they can only be demonstrated indirectly via stiffness loss in the specimen employed, or using one the hybrid methods of polymer diagnostics (cf. Chapter 9).

Regardless of the deformation behavior described and the occurring damage mechanisms, the production related internal state of the specimen employed has a decisive effect on stress– deformation behavior. Due to their incomparable residual stresses and orientations, specimens produced by different manufacturing methods (e.g. compression and injection molding) have to be considered component parts. That means that molding material properties can only be determined under idealized conditions (cf. Chapter 2). Based on the test conditions in quasi-static test methods, varying residual stresses and orientations affect the E modulus, while varying orientation states especially influence strength and deformation behavior.

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 107

Values acquired by quasi-static test methods are influenced by retardation and/or relaxation behavior overlaying the mechanical experiment, as well as by the particular specimen state, test conditions and any occurring damage mechanisms. When the stress–strain behavior of a hypothetical polymer without the influence of time is considered under this aspect in the tensile test, a stress–strain curve results such as the one presented Fig. 4.22a. If, in the experiment, influence from retardation mechanisms occurs, strain increases due to simultaneously occurring creep (Fig. 4.22b). If in addition, relaxation mechanisms are active, strain at break remains constant, but tensile strength is significantly reduced (Fig. 4.22c). In actual tensile tests, both components occur simultaneously, thus influencing strength, E modulus and deformation (Fig. 4.22d).

Any variation in test conditions regarding temperature and cross-head speed vT (1 to 500 mm min-1), as is sometimes permitted in the common test specifications, leads to a wide spectrum of material values. The occurring relaxation and creep processes over the range of practically relevant temperatures and application times cannot be ignored when dimensioning plastic components and testing polymers. In thermosets and thermoplastics used for design purposes in the glassy state, the real loads do not

without influence of timepure retardation pure relaxation

with influence of time

b a c

d

��

� �

Fig. 4.22: Diagram of the stress–strain behavior under quasi-static loading without time influence (a), with retardation influence (b), with stress relaxation influence (c) and with time influences (d)

usually lie in the immediate neighborhood of the transition regions. Thus, for these materials, defined E modulus values can be given that depend very little on loading time and temperature. However, for many thermoplastic polymers the temperature range of their engineering application is within their transition ranges, thus strongly

108 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

involving dependence of the material values acquired on loading time, ambient temperature and load level (Fig. 4.23). For selected thermoplastic polymers, Fig. 4.23 shows the relationship between the E modulus Et acquired by tensile test, loading time t and test temperature T. Here, an obvious impact on value levels is being measured dependent on the type of polymer and its corresponding transition ranges that can significantly limit the material’s area of application.

The behavior illustrated in Fig. 4.23 can be permanently influenced by adding fillers or reinforcers such as chalk, talc, carbon or glass-fibers [4.43], as well as nanoparticles [4.44].

a

b

t (s)

PS

E

( M

P a

)

10 2

10 3

10101010101010 1010 3210-1-2-3 4-4

PVC

PS-HI

PE-HD

PE-LD

10 2

10 3

T (°C)

40200-20-40 60

PS

PVC

PS-HI

PE-HD

PE-LD

t E

(

M P

a )

t

10 4

10 4

Fig. 4.23: E modulus acquired by tensile test for selected polymers as a function of time (a) and temperature (b)

As can be clearly seen from the functional relationships illustrated, the strength and stiffness behavior of polymers cannot be described by single-point data. These are acceptable only when the test conditions are univocal and reproducible. As a matter of principle, the mechanical values of polymers should be acquired on the basis of time and temperature dependence and be described by functional relationships. In summary, it can be said that every value measured for polymers is influenced by a

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 109

series of factors determined by measurement and test techniques, as well as by the production of test specimens:

• State and properties (M) of the molding material to be tested, such as chemical structure, viscosity, molecular weight and its distribution, as well as fillers and reinforcers employed,

• The process used to produce the specimen and the resulting internal state (S) in the specimen such as morphology, residual stresses, orientation and degree of crystallinity,

• Specimen geometry (G), such as on dumbell specimens or flat specimens, notch stress, dynamic and static weld lines, as well as structural inhomogeneities, such as cavities or agglomerates, and

• Test strategy and test technique that can be subsumed in the concept of test conditions (T ), i.e., type of loading, testing temperature and testing velocity, as well as ambient influences (moisture, UV radiation, etc.).

Consequently, any property P measured on a specimen is a function of the para- meters listed above:

T)G, S, (M,fP (4.75)

Characteristic values can only be measured reproducibly, if these relationships are known and appropriately considered. That means that the prerequisites for reproducible measurements include comparable chemical and physical structure and morphology, as well as identical geometric conditions and identical test methodology.

General tendencies can be stated for the relationship between strength and deformation behavior and internal state:

• Polymer strength increases, for example, with increasing molecular weight, increasing degree of crosslinking, increased orientation or by filling or reinforcing the polymer whereby deformation behavior is generally reduced;

• Strength is reduced by increased moisture, increasing age, degradation or decomposition; by contrast, deformability can increase or decrease depending on various deformation processes.

However, these statements are specific to the material and not generally valid, as for example is shown by positive post-crystallization effects due to ageing.

Based on the relations illustrated between structure and properties, it is clear that values acquired on standardized specimens cannot be carried over directly to plastics components.

110 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

The most important – and in practice most significant – mechanical tests are the tensile test, bend test and compression test, as well as the tear test relevant for foils. Torsional testing, however, bears little relevance for polymers. In addition to these basic tests, there are various test methods based on comparable measurement technology. They serve especially to characterize joints (glued and welded lines), and to determine adhesive strength and interlaminar shear strength. They include the shear tension or shear bend and the peel test [4.46] (see Chapter 10).

4.3.2 Tensile Tests on Polymers

4.3.2.1 Theoretical Basis of the Tensile Test

Among static and quasi-static testing and measuring methods, the tensile test is regarded as the fundamental test in mechanical material testing. In spite of the fact that, in practice, pure tensile loading is rather the exception and in spite of its experimental and interpretive problems, this test ranks high in polymer testing as well. Because of the great variety of modifications available with polymers, various approaches to executing tensile tests are known requiring different specimens, loading conditions and/or clamping devices. The practical objectives are relatively simply measurable, informative material parameters that can be used to evaluate properties for quality assurance, material selection and simple dimensioning tasks. Consequently, the main areas of application in polymers testing include:

• acquisition of tensile properties of molding and extrusion plastics and thermosets, • characterization of tensile properties of polymer sheets and films, • determination of properties of isotropic and orthotropic fiber-reinforced plastics.

The conventional tensile test, i.e., the tensile test with constant cross-head speed, is a quasi-static test with fundamental assumptions regarding testing conditions and technique, as well as the specimens used. Loading must be applied without impact and increase slowly and steadily until fracture of the specimen occurs. A uniaxial loading and stress state should be generated in the specimen. This means that, at a sufficient distance from the top and bottom clamp, there exists a homogenous uniaxial stress state not influenced by Hertzian stress, whereby a homogenous normal stress and strain arises that is evenly distributed over the cross-section (Fig. 4.24). A homogenous, isotropic materials state is assumed with respect to the specimen.

There are no geometric imperfections (e.g., notches or lumps); the specimens are prismatic. Influences from the testing technique have to be eliminated, such as may be due to compliance by the universal testing machine, or setting motions that may affect loading, or strain effects if the adapter slips. Given these prerequisities, the total

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 111

A 0

�(t)

t = 0 t

x

F

cross-head

x

z

y

cross-section

b L

L 1

L (t)

L

L

L

0 1

0 L

traverse path

L

0 2

v T

F

L

0 0

L

L 2

L 3

L 4

L(t)= L + L + L + L1 2 3 4

L (x)

Fig. 4.24: Temporal and local deformation behavior with tensile testing

increase in prismatic specimen length L is obtained at any point in time as the sum of the elongation of equidistant specimen sections Li(x) (Fig. 4.24) and is thus identical with the traverse path.

The reaction force arising in the specimen due to external load F is also longitudinally constant due to the uniform cross-section A0 and therefore only a function of time. If specimens with altered cross-section or length are used, the measured force F and elongation L have to be normalized in order to evaluate material properties. To do so, the acting force is related to the initial cross-section area, whereby stress is obtained as follows:

0A

F (4.76)

The elongation resulting from external load L0 is related to the defined initial gauge length L0 and termed normative strain this can be stated dimensionless or as a percentage:

%100 L

L

0

0 (4.77)

112 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

Thus it is clear that the recorded load–extension diagram is identical with the stress– strain diagram, since both quantities are related to constant initial values. Value Li thereby corresponds to the actual length of the specimen and is a function of time or the duration of the tensile test, respectively. In addition to normal stress, there is a maximum shear stress at less than 45° to the surface normal direction x when the prismatic specimen is loaded. Under certain conditions, this leads to visual deformations (shear bands) on the specimen surface, which are not evaluated. On narrow prismatic specimens in a plane stress state, a transversal contraction in the y and z directions occurs simultaneously with the arising elongation, thus effecting a reduction in the initial cross-section. As a result of the uniaxial load state, there is a tendency for a uniaxial stress state and a three-dimensional strain state to arise. From these statements and the fact that measured elongation should be related to current specimen length, we derive the term “apparent” or “engineering” stress and strain for Eqs. 4.76 and 4.77. Depending on whether the traverse path or the extensometer or a clip gauge is utilized to eliminate compliance effects from the testing machine (grips and load cell), either Eq. 4.77 or 4.78 has to be used to calculate strain:

%100 L

L t (4.78)

The strain given in Eq. 4.77 is called normative strain; the strain given in Eq. 4.78 with index t is called nominal strain. From the derivation of strain with time, one can obtain normative strain rate or nominal strain rate in the deformed volume d /dt:

dt

)L(d

L

1

dt

d 0

0

(4.79)

or

L

v

dt

)L(d

L

1

dt

d Tt t (4.80)

The value acquired from Eq. 4.79 corresponds to the strain rate between the knife edges of the strain measurement system used and can be utilized especially in strain- controlled tensile tests. Nominal strain rate (Eq. 4.80) states the relation between the required testing speed in % min-1 or s-1 and the testing speed of traverse vT to be set on the testing machine. Given the above mentioned requirements for the tensile test and the prismatic specimen corresponding to Fig. 4.24, nominal and normative strain rates are identical, i.e., these values are identical in every section of the specimen.

Prismatic specimens usually break directly at the top or bottom clamping grip. For this reason, so-called dumbbell specimens are used to ensure satisfactory clamping

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 113

F

� (s ) -1

normative strain rate of dumb-

bell specimen

normative = nominal strain

rate of prismatic specimen

average nominal strain rate of dumbbell specimen

L

L L 0

Fig. 4.25: Comparison of strain rates on dumbbell and prismatic specimens

conditions. Due to their geometry, a smaller and non-constant normative strain rate occurs within the clamping length of dumbbell specimens (Fig. 4.25). The differences between the median strain rate of a dumbbell specimen and the nominal strain rate of a prismatic specimen depend on the actual specimen geometries. This circumstance illustrates the problematics for reproducibly determining material values compared to the requirements stated in theory (Fig. 4.24). In addition, we have to consider the intrinsic specimen state, which is especially influenced by processing conditions and generally not isotropic and homogenous, as well as the influence of temperature and testing speed, so that the actual measurement result represents more than just the property of the molding compound.

In order to interpret results of tensile tests as single-point data according to ISO 10350, it must be ensured that the acquired values represent a summary of the properties of the molding material, the processing conditions and the selected test conditions, and that they can therefore only be used for simple material preselection. For a detailed selection of materials, comparable multipoint data (ISO 11403) should be used that represent properties as functions of essential parameters such as temperature, time and environmental conditions.

4.3.2.2 Conventional Tensile Tests

The preferred standard for performing tensile tests on plastics is ISO 527, which includes the testing of molding compounds, films and sheets, as well as fiber composite materials. One essential prerequisite for performing such tests is that suitable polymer-compatible specimens are used, such as those illustrated in Fig. 4.26.

114 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

1A 1B 1BA 5A 2 5 4

1BB 5B

b

r

h

b1

l l 2 l 1 L 03 L

2 Fig. 4.26: Specimens for tensile tests on plastics according to ISO 527

Type 1A and 1B specimens are basic specimens corresponding to ISO 3167 and suitable for use in a variety of testing techniques (see Table 4.2). Specimen 1A, which is generally produced by direct shaping, i.e., injection molding, has the parallel length l1 = 80 mm and is known as a multipurpose specimen. Thanks to its parallel length, this popular specimen can also be used in other types of testing such as the bend test, compression test and impact test where it has the advantage of comparable internal state. Type 1B specimens are normally produced by indirect shaping, e.g., sawing and milling, from semi-finished products in the form of sheets. Versions 1BA and 1BB are

Table 4.2: Specimens type 1A and 1B

Specimen type 1A 1B

Dimensions in mm

L 3

Overall length 150

L 1

Length of narrow portion 80 2 60 0.5

R Radius 20 – 25 60

L 2

Distance between broad parallel portions 104 – 113 106 – 120

B 2

Width at ends 20.0 0.2

B 1

Width of narrow portion 10.0 0.2

H Thickness 4.0 0.2

L 0

Initial gauge length 75.0 0.7 or 50.0 0.5 50.0 0.5

L Initial clamping length (grip distance) 115 1 l 2

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 115

proportional small versions of type 1B to a scale of 1 : 2 and 1 : 5, respectively. This also makes them suitable specimens for characterizing tensile properties when cut from component parts. Specimens 5A and 5B correspond to types 2 and 4, respectively, of ISO 37 and are recommended for tensile tests on rubber and other elastomeric materials. Specimens of type 2 and 4 are recommended for characterizing tensile properties of foils and sheets as per ISO 527-3. Type 5 specimens, also called spoon-like specimens, are preferred for testing of ductile materials with high tensile strain at break (e.g., PE-LD). For fiber-reinforced plastics materials, specimens of type 2 or the similar type 3, with optional center hole or cap strip (load application plate), are used to ensure sufficient clamping conditions according to ISO 527-4 (see also Chapter 10).

For characterizing tensile properties of plastics, we distinguish between two tests with different cross-head speeds: the test for acquiring elastic constants, especially the E modulus, and the tensile test for acquiring strength and deformation properties. For E modulus determination, a cross-head speed of vT = 1 mm min

-1 is specified, approximately corresponding to a 1 % min-1 strain rate at measurement intervals of L0 = 50 mm.

For the actual tensile test according to ISO 527, there exists a wide range of vT from 1 to 500 mm min-1 for testing many very different plastics, so that ISO 10350 requires more specifics. Brittle breaking plastics whose elongation at break is less than 10 % have to be tested at vT = 5 mm min

-1 while most other materials are tested at vT = 50 mm min

-1 [4.47]. According to ISO 527 it is allowed to determine the E modulus for one specimen at vT = 1 mm min

-1 in a first step up to = 0.25 % and then the tensile properties are measured by switching to vT = 50 mm min

-1. But the favoured procedure of the standard includes an unloading of specimen after E modulus determination followed by the tensile test up to the fracture of the sample.

Due to the narrow elastic deformation range of plastics, the E modulus is determined as a secant modulus (Fig. 4.27a). It includes the elastic and linear-viscoelastic deformation range of the stress–strain diagram. Evaluation is then limited to the deformation range between 0.05 % and 0.25 % of the normative strain between strain gauges. The required cross-head speed is related to initial clamping length and calculated according to Eq. 4.80. The E modulus is calculated according to Hooke’s law from force change F = F2 – F1 and strain change = 2 – 1 = 0.2 % = 0.002:

0

12

12

12

A002.0

FF E (4.81)

116 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

a b 0 b�

2

� (M

P a

)

F 2

F 1

Fv

L

� 0

b 1

� q

q2 b

2

1 2

� 1

� 0

F (N

)

F

� = f(�)

L - L0102

Lv 01 L02 L (mm)0

� 1

� 2

� (%)

� = f(�)

� 1

� 2

� (%)

L01 L02 L (mm)0

L - L0102

b

= b

- b

b (

m m

)

q1

� (%

) q

Fig. 4.27: Acquiring elastic constants in tensile tests: stress–strain diagram (a) and transverse strain–

strain diagram (b)

The product of E modulus and cross-sectional area is called tensile stiffness EA0. If pronounced transient behavior occurs during the test, a prestress 0 or a preload Fv can be applied, but should not result in elongation > 0.05 %. The evaluation software in a computer-aided evaluation provides in part for the subsequent correction of such transient effects. If a second strain gauge is used for acquiring change in thickness or, if preferred, width simultaneously with elongation, the Poisson ratio μb (width) or μh (thickness) can be measured (Fig. 4.27b). This elastic parameter should be measured in a linear range within the interval 0.3 % < y and can be calculated in cases of changes in width as follows:

00

0qb b

bL

Lb (4.82)

In order to obtain correct values for tensile loading, the measuring system has to be prestressed during setup at approx. 90 % of the expected nominal load and using a rigid setup specimen compared to the specimen to be measured. This serves to avoid possible setting motion in the load line.

To eliminate any influence from superimposed flexural stress, precise load line alignment has to be monitored at sufficient intervals. When measuring for elastic values, strain gauges with a minimum resolution 1 μm (better: 0.1 μm) should be used together with parallel tensile clamping devices. The use of traverse path to determine E modulus – often seen in practice – leads to decidedly lower values, since the internal deformations of the test system (slipping in clamps or load cell deformation in the measuring path) lead to faulty paths. Such values can only be used under identical

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 117

conditions for quality assurance and are in no way comparable with values acquired using strain gauges.

Tensile tests for determining strength and deformation properties of plastics are usually performed at a testing speed of 50 mm min-1. Typical stress–strain diagrams for various plastics are shown in Fig. 4.28. The parameters derivable from the curves correspond to characteristic points in the diagrams. Diagram (a) can be assigned to brittle material behavior with relatively high tensile strength M, whereby the tensile strain at break B achieved can be as much as 10 %. Typical examples for such material behavior include PS and other brittle thermoplastics, thermosets, as well as filled and reinforced plastics. Stress–strain diagrams of types (b) through (d) represent ductile deformation behavior with strains at break of several hundred percent, but relatively low tensile strengths. Some typical examples for such material behavior include polyolefines and polyamides. Particularly thermoplastics with type (b) and (c) stress– strain behavior exhibit a yield stress y , at which local necking followed by a constant stress plateau occurs, also called cold yielding. The stress plateau is the result of stretching with yield zone formation, whereby the material is stretched and pulls itself simultaneously out of the unstretched part of the specimen. Depending on the testing speed set, the yield zone can extend over the entire prismatic section of the specimen. This process leads to orientation by aligning the molecules in the direction of loading, as can be demonstrated, e.g., by measuring density.

� (%)

� = �

� (M

P a

)

� = �

a

b

c

d

B

y

B

B

x

t

tB

tB tM

� = �B M

y

M

� = �B M

� = �y M

� = �B M

� (%)

e

� = �y M x� � = �B M

� tB

Fig. 4.28: Stress–strain diagrams and parameters of various plastics: brittle materials (a), tough materials with yield point (b and c), tough materials without yield point (d) and elastomeric materials (e)

118 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

In principle, any deformation of a material, besides being a change in its internal energy state, is connected with heat tone that can be shown by video thermography. Since in normal climate (23 °C, 50 % humidity) plastics are in a temperature range where even slight temperature changes can influence their behavior considerably, reactions to their deformation behavior occur due to such heat effects. The above mentioned, irreversible cold yielding thus corresponds to a hot stretching due to internal heating of the plastics material. At very low strain rates close to equilibrium, total orientation in the plane parallel region of the specimen is achieved. At this point load is finally no longer absorbed by intermolecular forces, but by primary valence bonds. Due to this fact, a type of stress known as work hardening increases in these plastics. The second peak in the stress–strain curve in this case is called tensile strength M (type b). If no work hardening occurs (type c), yield stress y is identical with tensile strength M.

Tensile stress at break B and tensile strain at break B rarely provide values that are physically meaningful and applicable in practice. Of these, tensile strain at break exhibits especially high statistical scatter and tensile stress at break is strongly dependent on the degree to which the test software is suited for evaluation. According to the standard B should be determined at the stress level equal to 10 % of M.

The type e stress–strain diagram in Fig. 4.28 corresponds to the typical S-shaped curve of rubbery materials with very low strength and E moduli, but very high tensile strains at break (as much as 1000 %). This materials group includes, for example, PVC-P as well as natural and synthetic rubber.

The region of final break or initial geometric instabilities, such as necking at yield point, is often called the macrodamage limit. Because of local deformation processes, significant changes in specimen cross-section and a markedly inhomogenous strain rate relative to specimen length, the equations listed below actually lose their validity for the parameters. The acquired values thus have only limited use for dimensioning purposes.

Depending on the deformation behavior of the investigated plastic, the parameters listed below can be determined according to ISO 527:

Yield stress y : The first stress value at which an increase in strain occurs without an increase in stress. This value is generally determined via the slope d /d of the stress– strain curve. This value can be identical to tensile strength M.

0

y y

A

F (4.83)

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 119

Tensile strength M : the maximum tensile stress registered during the experiment. Depending on material behavior, this value can be identical to yield stress y or tensile stress at break B.

0

max M

A

F (4.84)

Stress x at x % of strain : If the stress–strain diagram exhibits no macroscopic visual yield stress (type d in Fig. 4.28), this parameter can be used for the comparison of materials. This value, sometimes called offset yield strength, is the stress in MPa at which strain x reaches the defined value x in %. The test software of state-of-the-art universal test machines often allows for the selection of several values for x.

0

x x

A

F (4.85)

Tensile stress at break B : the stress at which the specimen breaks is determined. This value, often called fracture strength in testing practice, depends on machine-related parameters such as break detector threshold as well as sampling rate and can thus be subject to considerable statistical variation. Tensile stress at break B can be identical to tensile strength M.

0

B B

A

F (4.86)

Strains assignable to stress parameters characterize the deformation behavior of a material. According to ISO 527, normative strain for plastics has to be recorded up to yield stress or for brittle materials up to tensile stress at break, or tensile strength has to be recorded using an extensometer or strain gauge (Fig. 4.28 Type (a) and (d) to break, Type (b) and (c) to yield stress). In this case, the measuring distance amounts to L0 = 75 or 50 mm (type 1A) or L0 = 50 mm (type 1B). Beyond yield stress, nominal strain t has to be used for ductile plastics (Fig. 4.29) and the total strain is calculated as sum of = y + t with L = 75 mm. This assumption is valid if no relevant amount of strain is measurend in the range of the shoulders. In case of L0 = 50 mm the total strain is determined in the same way but using the clamping length of L = 115 mm. If customers wish to compare older results of measurements it is also allowed to carry out the measurements without extensometer only using the cross head motion. These conditions make it necessary to use fracture resistant automatic strain sensors and to record cross-head and extensometer elongation simultaneously. According to the standard, tensile test results have to be rejected if the specimen breaks directly at or in the grip. In these cases, nominal strain t is to be preferred in order to ensure

120 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

� (M

P a

)

� = �y M

� B

���

� or � (%)

� = �y M

t � �t

� B

� y

� M

y

t Fig. 4.29: Use of normative and nominal strain according to ISO 527

comparability of the results. The following parameters of strain can be determined:

Yield strain y : the strain at yield stress stated dimensionless or as a percentage.

%100 L

L

0

0 y (4.87)

Strain at tensile strength: this is the strain corresponding to tensile strength M. For materials without deformations above yield strain, either normative strain , or nominal strain t is used:

%100 L

L

0

M0 M or (4.88)

%100 L

LM tM (4.89)

Tensile strain at break B : the strain when tensile stress at break is reached can be stated as a nominal or normative parameter, depending on deformation behavior:

%100 L

L

0

B0 B or (4.90)

%100 L

LB tB (4.91)

For the deformation behavior of plastics, the test conditions, e.g., testing speed, temperature or ambient conditions are extremely important, since they have a lasting influence on the relaxation and retardation mechanisms in progress. Figure 4.30

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 121

� (%)

� (M

P a

)

b 125

100

75

50

25

0 0 50 100 150 200

� (M

P a

)

� increasing

a 125

100

75

50

25

0 0 50 100 150 200

� (%)

T decreasing

Fig. 4.30: Stress–strain diagrams of a thermoplastic material as a function of testing speed (a) and temperature (b)

shows diagrams of the influence of temperature and strain rate on the stress–strain behavior of a ductile thermoplastic. As speed increases or temperature decreases, tensile strength increases and tensile strain at break decreases, thus changing the progression of the stress–strain diagram.

Table 4.3 lists the relevant values for E modulus and tensile strength of selected plastics.

Table 4.3: Modulus of elasticity in tension and tensile strength of selected polymers [1.54]

Material E (MPa) M (MPa) Material E (MPa) M (MPa)

Thermoplastics unreinforced Thermoplastics reinforced

PE-HD 1040 28 PP + 30 wt.-% GF 6200 73

PE-LD 280 - PA 6 + 30 wt.-% GF 6500 110

PS 3200 51 PA + 30 wt.-% CF 18000 190

PA 6 1300 32 PP + talc 3000 32

PC 2300 71 PP + chalk 3000 32

PMMA 3300 74 PVC + chalk 3200 -

PVC-U 3200 50 Thermosets

PVC-P - 21 Phenole resin 8800 -

PP 1300 34 Urea resin 8750 44

ABS 2400 38 Melamine– formaldehyde resin

7000 -

POM 3000 68 Unsaturated polyester resin

3700 53

122 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

Table 4.3: Modulus of elasticity in tension and tensile strength of selected polymers [1.54]

Material E (MPa) M (MPa) Material E (MPa) M (MPa)

Thermoplastics unreinforced Thermosets

PET 2700 40 Epoxy resin 2840 62

PEEK 3900 - Silicone resin 10400 24

PUR 1900 - PUR 1230 26

SAN 3700 76

PBT 2600 53

4.3.2.3 Enhanced Information of Tensile Tests

Macrodamage limits, such as yield stress or tensile strength can be derived from the stress–strain diagram. However, the stress–strain diagram does not give sufficient information on the irreversible material damage, or microdamage, induced at low load levels. Due to structural changes in materials under mechanical loading as well as to machine compliance, the dominant normative strain rate varies constantly within the specimen. Also dependent on the internal state of the specimen, this strain rate differs from cross-head speed by amounts determined by the speed of the plastic deformation component and the stiffness ratio between the specimen and the universal testing machine. Since tensile test values for plastics are strongly influenced by strain rates, knowledge of these metrological and test-technological effects is essential for evaluating and interpreting the results.

Today’s material development requires material-descriptive, structurally or morphologically based parameters that provide information as to the dependence of load limits on loading conditions and that enable the suitable selection and dimensioning of polymers in conformance with the relevant material laws. Conventional tensile testing cannot fulfill these requirements, since in most cases the acquired values cannot be explained structurally or physically and are based on varying testing conditions.

Various methods of tensile testing are available for better adapting properties’ characterization to materials and loads:

• Event related evaluation and interpretation of the stress–strain diagram (Fig. 4.31),

• Qualification of the tensile test by improved measuring and evaluation techniques, such as video or laser extensometry [4.48, 4.49],

• Correction of geometric and technological influencing factors in conventional tensile tests and

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 123

• Load or strain-controlled tensile tests with constant deformation conditions [4.49, 4.50].

The simultaneous coupling of tensile test with damage-sensitive NDT methods is an essential requirement for event-related interpretation of polymer deformation phases (Fig. 4.31a) and for increasing the informational value of conventional materials parameters. This hybrid approach is also called polymer diagnostics (see Chapter 9). Thanks to the coupling of tensile tests, e.g., with acoustic emission analysis [4.51, 4.52], or with modern methods of thermography [4.53], information can be obtained on early microdamage taking place in the plastic. This enables the formulation of damage functions or critical load limits. Taking a ductile, stretched plastic, as in the example in Fig. 4.31b, it can be clearly seen that specimen cross-section decreases with increasing plastic deformation, i.e., there is a discrepancy between nominal and normative strain rates. This reaction of the material to loading shows that polymers do not fulfill the condition of homogenous isotropic and velocity-independent material behavior.

Simultaneous application of volume dilatometry enables the use of defect density QD for quantifying microdamage. Irreversible microdamage occurs in the form of an increase in defect density QD (Fig. 4.31b) at the start of non-linear viscoelastic deformation regions. This decrease is due to stretching and the resulting increase in orientation once yield stress has been exceeded. By using event-related and supplementary morphological examination, material damage can be described as the precursor of ultimate failure, and it becomes possible to formulate material limit states or diagnostic functions [1.17, 4.54].

In conjunction with event-related interpretation of deformation behavior, strain measuring techniques with local resolution are especially required in order to qualify the informational value of conventional material values from tensile tests. These include laser interferometry (electronic speckle-pattern interferometry – ESPI or shearography) [4.55, 4.56] or laser extensometry [4.57] (see Chapter 9). When these contactless and inertia-free measurement methods are used, local deformation fields or strain distributions can be detected that enable statements on near-surface defects, orientation state, or heterogeneity of deformation. They also have special advantages with respect to notch-sensitive plastics.

Various procedures are available for correcting measurement and technological influencing factors arising from the stiffness ratio between the specimen and test machine, the fundamental problems of detecting apparent values in tensile tests, as well as geometric inadequacies. The difference between normative and nominal strain rates (Fig. 4.25), which depends on internal state and specimen geometry, can be reduced by experiments comparing the deformation behaviors of dumbbell and

124 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

71 2 3 4 5 6

elongation without

elongation with necking

� (M

P a

)

� (%)

linear-viscoelastic region linear-elastic region

non-linear viscoelastic region necking region steady-state plastic yielding strain-hardening region ultimative failure – fracture

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

� = f (�)

d e

fe c t

d e

n s it y

Q D

� (%

/m in

)

� = f (�)

Q = f (�)

t

D

� (%)

a

b

necking

Fig. 4.31: Event-related interpretation of deformation phases in tensile testing

prismatic specimens from identical materials. The median strain rate is determined on a flat multipurpose specimen d S /dt and a prismatic specimen d P /dt. To evaluate the influence of specimen geometry, the quotient of strain rates can be included as correction factor k:

S

Pk (4.92)

Taking Eq. 4.92 into consideration, Eq. 4.80 can be expanded:

k L

v T t (4.93)

DIN 53 455 provides an evaluation method that allows for the geometry effect which, however, has lost its validity since the introduction of ISO 527. There the difference of strain rate is corrected by determining reduced clamping length lred (Eqs. 4.94 – 4.97 and Fig. 4.32).

em1 l2l2lL (4.94)

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 125

r2

b 1a 1 (4.95)

r

l arcsin

2

1

1a

r

l arcsin

2

1 tan1a

arctan 1a

a

l b

m

2

m

2

m m (4.96)

2

e

m

m

1

1 1red

b

l2

b

l2

b

l bl (4.97)

In place of Eq. 4.80, the following relation is to be used for calculating nominal strain rate:

red

T t

l

v (4.98)

In the region of elongation without necking (see regions 1 to 3 in Fig. 4.31), cross- section or transverse contraction decreases as deformation increases. The actual measurement length changes constantly, i.e., the apparent parameters of stress and strain turn out to be faulty. In order to acquire true stress, minimal cross-section has to be recorded at all times; this presents a technological problem, especially for prismatic specimens. The measuring equipment to be used must be capable of recording minimum cross-section A regardless of place and time of its occurrence. Given this requirement, true stress w is obtained:

A

F w (4.99)

b 1

b m

b 2

l e l 2

1

lred

L

r

lm

l

Fig. 4.32: Dimensions of the specimen for calculating reduced clamping length

126 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

For large elongations, integrating the infinitesimal strains as per Eq. 4.9 leads to true strain w. If nominal strain, i.e., the faulty traverse path, is used, this equation can be used to calculate true strain. Direct measurement of true strain on the specimen can only be performed by special laser optical measuring systems that trace the variation of surface roughness on two surface regions at a constant distance from each other [4.47, 4.58]. The true strain rate is obtained by the differentiation of Eq. 4.9:

L

L

dt

dL

L

1

L

L ln

dt

d

0

w (4.100)

For nominal strain, the rate dL/dt is identical with cross-head speed vT:

1L

v

LL

v TT w (4.101)

In order to estimate material behavior and machine influence on nominal test speed, Eqs. 4.80 and 4.101 can be expanded, in which case measurement length L0 is identical with clamping length L.

MKAL

v

00

T (4.102)

MKAL1

v

00

T w (4.103)

The factor K corresponds to the test machine compliance in mm kN-1 and is valid only for the particular test configuration chosen. If changes are made, e.g., in the selection of a load cell or an extension joint, compliance has to be redetermined. Value A0 is the initial cross-section area of the specimen and M is the rise in stress– strain diagram d /d . In the elastic deformation region, M corresponds to the modulus of elasticity E. For Eqs. 4.9 as well as 4.101 through 4.103, it must be kept in mind that these are valid only for homogenous deformations in the region of elongation without necking. At neck formation, observations have to be limited to restricted regions of deformation, or strain measurement methods with local resolution have to be used that enable neck fronts to be traced on the specimen surface with sufficient precision.

Regardless of the corrective measures undertaken, rate differences occur in the specimen volume investigated. Depending on the particular material behavior, the strain rate varies during test duration and thereby influences especially the relaxation and retardation behavior overlying the tensile test. Two different versions of the

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 127

controlled tensile test are available for achieving constant load condition using either analogue or incremental closed-loop systems.

The load-controlled test often applied on metallic materials is equivalent to a ramp function with constant load or stress rate. The required control is ensured by variable cross-head speed. For plastics, this type of test method represents the worst possible case, since there is a constant increase in force per unit of time regardless of the dominant deformation mechanism. For this reason, significantly higher tensile strengths are recorded together with reduced strain at break.

The use of strain measurement devices is a prerequisite for the strain-controlled tensile test and determines strain directly on the specimen as the actual value. Analogous to the load-controlled tensile test, deviation from the selected reference value is compensated by changes in cross-head speed. By this type of test procedure, normative engineering strain rate in the specimen volume is controlled at a constant level between the knife edges of the strain sensor. Since the difference between apparent and true strain increases with increasing test duration, Eq. 4.104 can be applied to correct the calculations and alter cross-head speed. Thus, a constant true strain rate is obtained.

00wT LLv (4.104)

Regardless of the type of test procedure, meaningful and useful results can only be obtained in the region of elongation without necking. At very fast changes in strain rate or local formation of neck, instabilities can occur in the control loop requiring the test to be interrupted. The parameter of control loop (PID) and the E modulus of the investigated material are very important for such tests, since rigid plastics normally require proportionally less amplification P than do materials with low E moduli. This can be explained by the fact that the specimen itself, with its load- dependent stiffness changes d /d represents a segment in the control loop. Figure 4.33 provides a comparison between conventional and strain-controlled tensile tests on a PA6 with 20 wt.-% GF at a strain rate of 1 % min-1. The nominal strain rate calculated from traverse motion is constant. The normative strain rate measured by an extensometer directly on the specimen is subject to strong variations (Fig. 4.33a). In the strain-controlled tensile test, the integral normative strain rate does not vary between the measurement sensors of the extensometer (Fig. 4.33b). Due to these constant relaxation conditions, tensile strength in Fig. 4.33b is smaller and strain at break is markedly higher.

Although the loading conditions in the investigated specimen volume are clearly improved in a strain-controlled test method, it can be demonstrated, e.g., with laser extensometry (see Chapter 9), that there are local differences in the strain rate in spite

128 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

� (%) �

(M P

a )

b 100

80

60

40

20

0 0 3 6 9 10 12

� (%

/m in

)

a 1.5

1.2

0.9

0.6

0.3

0 0 2 4 6 8 10

� (%)

� (%

/m in

)

1.5

1.2

0.9

0.6

0.3

0

t

� = f (�)

� = f (�) � = f (�)

� = f (�)

Fig. 4.33: Stress–strain behavior and strain rate of PA6 with 20 wt.-% short-glass-fiber reinforcement in conventional (a) and strain-controlled (b) tensile tests at 1 % min-1 nominal strain rate

of constant integral strain rate. Advanced types of strain control are described in [4.59] that use strain measurement techniques with local resolution.

4.3.3 Tear Test

Technological problems, such as those caused by wrinkle formation at the clamping grips, are the reason why tensile tests fail to provide satisfactory results when used for testing elastomers, soft foam materials and polymer films.

With the goal of describing tear resistance in a manner adequate to the material, the experimental methods for determining tear resistance were introduced in polymer testing. These techniques determine the resistance that a specimen exerts against tear propagation under tensile loading. The test conditions are so complicated and disparate from those of tensile tests that this test has to be regarded as a test of plastic moldings or components, i.e., an engineering test.

Strip, angle and crescent specimens are used in the tear strength test (Fig. 4.34). A special technique for determining tear resistance in small elastomeric specimens (small (Delft) specimens) is covered by ISO 34-2. Cuts are made in the specimens whereby the effective notch stress triggers the tear strength process under tensile load. Depending on the technique, the maximum or median force in N from the load–time or load–elongation diagram is calculated relative to the specimen median thickness according to Eq. 4.105 as tear resistance TS.

B

F TS (4.105)

B specimen thickness in mm

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 129

2525

2 5

120

5 0

15°

75°

notch

clamp mark

notch

100

90°

b

a

R 25

.4

R 12.7

28.4 27

Fig. 4.34: Angle specimen for the tear propagation test according to ISO 34-1 (a) and trapezodial

specimen according to DIN 53363 (b)

The value acquired by this test method provides only for a relative comparison of different materials, however. It is particularly dependent on:

• Material specifications and treating state, • The state of orientation induced by calendering, injection molding or blowing, • Duration of vulcanization in elastomers and • Test temperature and deformation speed.

Since the properties of films may vary greatly due to lateral and longitudinal orientation of the polymer chains relative to the processing direction, at least 5 specimens have to be tested in each direction. Figure 4.35 shows a clamped trapezoidal specimen (Fig. 4.35a) and typical load–deformation diagrams of 50 μm thick PE-LD films produced by film blowing (Fig. 4.35b). Owing to the special form of the trapezoidal specimen, the highest stress concentration appears directly at the notch tip from the beginning of the test. Therefore, ideally no further deformation of the specimen volume away from the notch/crack tip takes place and all deformation energy is expended only for the tear process. This is a precondition for a meaningful analysis of such diagrams.

130 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

a

v

F

F

T

10

12

14 b

Fmax

6

8

10

F (N

)

0

2

4 parallel

perdendicular

to the processing direction

0 10 20 30 40

0

Δl (mm)

Fig. 4.35: Clamped trapezoidal specimen for the tear test with films (a) and typical load–deformation diagrams from tear tests of 50 μm thick PE-LD films produced by film blowing (b)

4.3.4 Compression Test on Polymers

4.3.4.1 Theoretical Basis of the Compression Test

Compression testing is used to evaluate material behavior under uniaxial compression load. Specimens include rectangular prisms, cylinders or pipe sections. Although there is a number of different, mostly material-oriented, standards for testing mechanical properties under uniaxial loading, the compression test has not, with a few exceptions, achieved the same significance as the tensile or bend test or hardness measurement. This is due to the relative irrelevance of compression loading and to practical measurement problems, so that the application of compression testing has been limited to special application cases and/or selected materials. Among these are mainly building materials (concrete, polymer concrete, brick, tile, wood and foams), materials used in dampers, friction bearings or fluid seals (copper alloys, polyamides, polyethylenes or rubber) and packaging materials (cardboard and foams). For polymers, there are a number of different standards defining the conditions for testing elastomers, polymer concrete, foams and fiber-reinforced plastics. In testing practice, ISO 604, which is generally valid for polymers, is the preferred standard in use. This standard can be used for:

• Rigid and semi-rigid thermoplastic injection molding and extrusion molding compounds, including filled and reinforced molding compounds,

• Rigid and semi-rigid thermosetting molding compounds, including filled and reinforced molding compounds and

• Thermotropic liquid-crystalline polymers.

This standard is not appropriate for textile-fiber reinforced materials, rigid foams or layered composites with foam or honeycomb cores. Depending on the material,

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 131

compression testing can be used for characterizing compression properties as well as in quality assurance.

Analogous to the tensile test, identical fundamental conditions are valid for the standardized compression with constant traverse speed. Loading must be impact free and increase slowly to break or to a defined load limit. The specimen should also be homogenous and isotropic, and there must be no influences exerted by the testing method used (see Section 4.3.2.1).

Under these conditions and under compression load, a homogenous uniaxial stress state arises in the specimen at sufficient distance from the top and bottom compression plates that corresponds to normal stress and strain distributed uniformly over the cross-section (Fig. 4.36).

x

z

y

A 0

� (t)

cross-section

b

L

L

0 1

L

0 2

F

upper pressure plate

traverse path L

F

A = b d 0

F

lower pressure plate

L 0

L= L − L02 01

Fig. 4.36: Stress state in the specimen under uniaxial compression load

According to the definition, a negative prefix is assigned to the arising compression stresses and compressions; however, in testing practice only absolute values are assigned. The resulting compression stress can be calculated by analogy to Eq. 4.76:

0A

F (4.106)

When mechanical or optical strain sensors are used, compression results either from path difference as a normative value (Eq. 4.107) or, when traverse path is used, as a nominal value (Eq. 4.108) (Fig. 4.36).

%100 L

L

0

0 (4.107)

%100 L

L c (4.108)

132 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

The presumed uniaxial compressive stress state is influenced by friction between the specimen and the compression plates. This expresses itself in hindered deformation in the y and z directions. Conically deformed elastic zones extend to the center of the specimen, beginning at its base areas. Thus, in ductile materials, the zones of plastic deformation are located mainly in the center of the specimen, and bulging followed by shear fracture occurs. The real stress field is strongly dependent on geometry. Acquired values are comparable only for identical dimensions, and practical applications of this test are limited. To minimize this influence, friction between specimen and compression plates can be reduced by lubricants or with fine sand- paper. The use of such aids has to be expressly stated in the test protocol.

Geometric dimensions are an additional influencing factor in compression test performance. In order to avoid a case of Euler stability, i.e., specimen buckling, there must be a sufficient ratio between specimen length and the dimension determining the axial moment of inertia Iy. Therefore, a slenderness ratio of 10, or at least 6, has to be maintained in order to eliminate buckling. The slenderness ratio is defined as the ratio of specimen length to the smallest radius of inertia i of its base area:

i

l (4.109)

The smallest radius of inertia of base area i of the specimen results from:

0

y

A

I i (4.110)

whereby Iy is the smallest axial inertia moment and A0 is the cross-section area of the specimen in the initial state. The required relations for possible types of specimens are illustrated in Fig. 4.37. Buckling problems can occur in thin-walled pipe-shaped specimens that are caused by stress distribution in the pipe wall.

If the required slenderness ratios are not maintained, specimens can buckle during compression testing with the accompanying danger of shrapnel flying off the specimen. Such effects can also occur if specimens are not positioned precisely in the load line of the compression plate, so that additional bending moments lead to premature break.

Technology related errors in value acquisition can, however, also arise due to excessive production related surface roughness on specimen surfaces or due to inexact plane parallel surfaces. Such errors can lead to strong initial effects or to erroneous E modulus values due to surface roughness or tilting of the specimen.

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 133

x

y

prism cylinder tube

I =y b d

3

12

A = b d0

I =y �d

4

64

A =0 �d

2

4

l = � d

3.46 l =

4

l l

l

d d ib

z

da

� d

I =y �

64 (d − d )a

4 4

A =0 �

4

l = �

4

i

(d − d )a 2 2

i

(d − d )a 4 4

i

(d − d )a 2 2

i Fig. 4.37: Specimen geometry and slenderness ratio of specimens for compression tests

When fiber-reinforced plastics are compression tested, splicing can occur on the specimen, thus rendering value acquisition difficult or even impossible.

4.3.4.2 Performance and Evaluation of Compression Tests

ISO 604 is used for performing compression tests on polymers. In contrast to the statements above, this standard specifies the use of prismatic specimens produced either by direct shaping (injection molding) or indirectly by cutting from finished or semi-finished parts (laminates, extruded or calendered sheet). For the characterization of molding materials, for compression tests, as well as to obtain E modulus under compression load, specimens should be produced that comply with the multipurpose specimen defined in ISO 3167 (Fig. 4.38). This provides the advantage of a comparable internal state (orientation, residual stress) and comparability with other mechanical test methods. The dimensions of the specimen specified in the standard for determining E modulus are 50 10 4 mm3 (Fig. 4.38b). For the compression test for recording the compressive stress–compressive strain diagram, the dimensions are 10 10 4 mm3 (Fig. 4.38c). In contrast to the above rules for the slenderness ratio for specimens in compression tests, ISO 604 specifies Eq. 4.111 for defining an adequate ratio between specimen dimensions and the clamping length between compression plates.

134 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

2

c l

x 4.0 (4.111)

In this equation, c is the maximum dimensionless nominal compression strain occurring during the test, l is specimen length and x is the diameter of a cylinder or the thickness of a prismatic compression specimen.

This standard recommends a ratio of x/l 0.08 for determining compression modulus Ec . For the compression test, x/l 0.4 should be used, corresponding approximately to a compression or negative strain of 6 %. Since Eq. 4.111 was formulated under the assumption of linear-elastic behavior, when compression increases, or ductile materials are tested for c, values have to be used that are 2 to 3 times higher than maximum compression. In anisotropic materials, such as laminates, specimens should always be tested in their particular direction of main orientation, since the results of this test depend, in analogy to other mechanical test methods, very strongly on test direction. According to standard ISO 604 for determining Ec, test speed vT amounts to 1 mm min

-1. For determining compression properties with the specimen in Fig. 4.38c, it also amounts to 1 mm min-1 in most cases. For ductile plastics, the traverse speed should be 5 mm min-1, whereby practical testing experience shows that maximum compression should not exceed 50 % in the test. For different specimen dimensions or shapes, Eq. 4.111 is to be used for checking experimental conditions and, in compliance with the standard, test speed has to be adjusted in the range of 1 to 20 mm min-1.

1 0

10

5 0

50

10

80

10

b

a

c

Fig. 4.38: Specimen preparation for the compression test on a multipurpose specimen according to

ISO 3167 (a); a specimen for acquiring the E modulus (b); and a specimen for determining compressive stress–compressive strain behavior (c)

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 135

�c (%)

� (M

P a

)

�M = �B

�x

�y

�M = �B �y

a

b

c

d

�x

�M = �B

�M = �B

�cM = �cB�cy

� (%)

�M

�B

�M

�cM

�B

�cB Fig. 4.39: Compressive stress–compressive strain behavior of brittle plastics (EP) (a); ductile plastics

with compressive yield stress (PS) (b); ductile plastics without compressive yield stress (PMMA) (c); and ductile plastics without break (PA) (d)

By analogy to the tensile test, Ec is acquired as in Fig. 4.27 and Eq. 4.81 as a secant modulus in the interval of 0.05 to 0.25 % compression. For this, a strain gauge with a resolution of 0.1 μm is specified. In case a preload Fv is used to minimize initial effects, it must not generate a compression greater than 0.05 %. If a specimen as in Fig. 4.38c is used, and taking specific material behavior into consideration, the following parameters can be determined from the compressive stress–compressive strain diagram (Fig. 4.39).

Compressive stress at yield y : the stress value at which a first increase in compression occurs without an increase in stress. This value is also called compressive yield stress or compressive yield point and is determined via the increase d /d from the compressive stress–compressive strain diagram. If microcracks occur when com- pressive yield stress is reached, the result of the experiment may be contaminated.

0

y y

A

F (4.112)

Compressive strength M : the maximum compressive stress recorded during the test. This value can be identical to compressive stress at break (see Fig. 4.39 curves (a) and (c).

0

max M

A

F (4.113)

136 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

Compressive stress at break B : this value results from the compressive stress at the time of break. In cases of material behavior corresponding to diagram (a) in Fig. 4.39, compressive strength and compressive stress at break have the same value. This value depends very strongly on the break detector threshold setting.

0

B B

A

F (4.114)

Compressive stress x at x % strain : this value is determined when the material exhibits no compressive yield stress or when no break occurs during the test (curve (d) Fig. 4.39). The value of x can be taken in compliance with mold material standards, or agreed upon with the customer, whereby x always has to be smaller than the compression corresponding to compressive strength. Common value used in testing practice is 50 %.

0

x x

A

F (4.115)

Compressions assignable to strength values can be determined with mechanical or optical extensometers, whereby normative compressions can be stated. Since specimens have a relatively short length of 10 mm, nominal compression c is mostly used in practice. It results from the change in distance of the compression plates and corresponds to the traverse path. Compressive values can be stated either dimensionless or in percentages.

Compressive yield strain y or cy : the compression value achieved at pressure yield strength y. This value is often called compressive strain at compressive stress at yield.

0

y0 y

L

L (4.116)

l

l y cy (4.117)

Here l is initial specimen length and l is compression in mm.

Nominal compressive strain at compressive strength M or cM : the compression at which compressive strength is reached. For the material behavior in curve (a) of Fig. 4.39 it can be identical with compressive strain at break

0

M0 M

L

L (4.118)

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 137

l

lM cM (4.119)

Compressive strain at break B or cB : this value is determined when break is reached.

0

B0 B

L

L (4.120)

l

lB cB (4.121)

By analogy with tensile tests, the results of compression tests are dependent on loading conditions, especially temperature and test speed. For this reason, only when production and test conditions are identical, are test results comparable. They are not readily applicable to the behavior of components. Special problems can arise in the acquisition of compressive strength or yield stress at break, since specimen break is not always clearly classifiable. For this reason, the visual observation of deformation behavior is very important, while taking appropriate safety precautions. This test is mainly used in quality assurance or for material characterization. Due to the different deformation mechanisms of plastics under tensile and compression loading, clearly deviant – diagrams are obtained. Taking PS as an example (Fig. 4.40), it can be seen that, due to the dominant craze mechanism, no yield point occurs in the tensile test, and material behavior is brittle. Due to shear flow under compression load, strength in the compression test is at 100 MPa almost twice as high as in the tensile test (50 MPa), and recorded strain at break is significantly higher. Compressive strength values are listed in Table 4.4 for selected polymers.

� (M

P a )

�y

a

b

�M = �B

�M

shear bands

crazes

� (%)�y

Fig. 4.40: Deformation behavior of PS in tensile tests (a) and in compression tests (b)

138 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

Table 4.4: Compressive strength of selected polymers [1.48]

Material M (MPa) Material M (MPa)

Thermosets Thermoplastics unreinforced

Phenole resin 170 PMMA 110

Urea resin 200 PTFE 12

Melamine–formaldehyde resin 200 Thermoplastics reinforced

UP resin 150 PP + 30 wt.-% GF 60

EP resin 150 PA 6 + 30 wt.-% GF 160

PUR 110 PA 66 + 30 wt.-% GF 170

4.3.5 Bend Tests on Polymers

4.3.5.1 Theoretical Basis of the Bend Test

Flexural loading is one of the most common types of load encountered in practice. Thus it is highly significant for determining characteristic values of polymers and fiber composite materials. This type of load is used in the following test procedures:

• Bend test for characterizing thermoplastic and thermosetting molding compounds and filled as well as reinforced composite materials,

• Mechanical-thermal flexural loading for measuring heat-distortion resistance in the HDT test, as well as

• Mechanical-environmental flexural loading for measuring environmental stress cracking resistance.

The quasi-static bend test is used especially for testing brittle materials whose failure behavior causes technical problems with tensile tests. For polymers, this test is used on the following materials according to the specifications of test standards:

• Thermoplastic injection and extrusion molding compounds, including filled and reinforced molding compounds, as well as rigid thermoplastic sheets,

• Thermosetting molding compounds, including filled and reinforced composite materials,

• Thermosetting sheets, including laminates, • Fiber-reinforced thermosetting and thermoplastic composite materials containing

both unidirectional and non-unidirectional reinforcements, and • Thermotropic liquid-crystalline polymers.

However, this test method is not suited for rigid foams or sandwich structures with foam cores.

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 139

Under flexural load, as under tensile or compression load, the various deformation components have to be considered that are dependent on time and load. Depending on the type of polymer, linear-elastic, linear-viscoelastic, non-linear viscoelastic and plastic deformation components also occur. The ratio of deformation components to total deformation depends on the particular polymer as well as on loading conditions (temperature and test speed). Therefore, the value acquired in the bend test is a function of deformation, strain rate, load or stress, temperature and the internal state of the specimen. In actual testing practice, three-point and four-point bend test equipment is available for performing bend tests (Fig. 4.41). In view of the occurring loads, the four-point bend test is the fundamentally more suitable method due to the constant bending moment and the freedom from transverse force.

With this arrangement, no corrective measures are required in the case of off-center fracture of the specimen. Its disadvantages are its technically more complicated construction and work-intensive handling; in addition, it requires an extremely precise deflection measuring device. For these reasons in particular, the three-point bend test is specified in ISO 178 as the test method for plastics, even though the four- point bend test produces more precise and reproducible results. Due to structural deficiencies in specimens, eccentric fracture can occur under three-point bend loading; as long as fracture occurs in the median third of the specimen that is acceptable for value acquisition.

The same fundamental requirements hold for performing bend tests as for tensile and compression tests (see also Section 4.3.2.1), i.e., load must be applied without impact and increase steadily. A uniaxial normal stress state should arise in the specimen, whereby influences from test equipment, shearing by transverse force, as well as compression at the supports, have to be negligible. The specimen must also be free of geometric imperfections, such as notches, and its cross-section must remain plane during the test, i.e., no warping is to occur.

With these requirements and the general differential equation of the elastic bending line (Eq. 4.122), the relation between deflection, E modulus and specimen geometry can be derived for the case of three-point bending (Fig. 4.42).

IE

)x(M

xf1

xf b 2/32

(4.122)

In this equation, Mb (x) is local variable bending moment, EI flexural stiffness and df/dx the slope of the bending line. Since this differential equation of the deformed cantilever beam can only be solved numerically, and is thus difficult to handle, the simplified Eq. 4.123 is used in actual practice, being valid for small deflections f and

140 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

specimen

traverse

bending jaw

ll l

F

a ab

Q = 0

support

specimen

F

variable radii

positioning slide

traverse

v

anvil

L

T

L/3

Mmax

v T

b

a

= F L 4

F l

2 a

F 2

Q = F

2 Q = +

bending moment M

transverse force QF 2

Q =

b

F

2 Q = +

support

variable radii

positioning slide

Mmax =

bending moment Mb

transverse force Q

Fig. 4.41: Construction diagram of three- (a) and four-point bend test equipment (b)

slope df/dx 0 [4.60].

IE

)x(M )x(f b (4.123)

The elastic bending line for three-point bending, taking boundary conditions into consideration, yields the following:

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 141

32 x 12

F xL

16

F

IE

1 )x(f (4.124)

For technical measurement purposes, the middle deflection f at point x = L/2 is especially interesting:

IE48

LF f

3

(4.125)

Assuming linear-elastic material behavior, strain and stress are distributed symmet- rically over the cross-section (Fig. 4.42b), whereby an unstressed and unstrained fiber, also called a neutral fiber, appears in the center of the specimen. Since external stress is distributed linearly over the cross-section, the highest tensile or compression stress always occurs in the peripheral fibers of the bend specimen, whereby the sign is generally ignored in actual practice (Eq. 4.126).

2

h

I

Mb f (4.126)

Using the maximum bending moment in the specimen center Mb = FL/4 and the axial moment of inertia in prismatic specimen I (Eq. 4.127), we obtain the equation for calculating flexural stress f in the three-point bend test (Eq. 4.128).

x

z y

-�

+�

x

y

z

h

-�

+�

x

y

z

h

max

maxmax

max

h

b

z y

F EI

L/2

y

�max

b

a

c

f

Fig. 4.42: Three-point bend specimen (a), distribution of normal stress and strain (b), as well as shear

stress distribution (c) over specimen cross-section

142 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

12

hb I

3

(4.127)

2 f

hb2

LF3 (4.128)

This yields a load level varying over specimen height or thickness, whereby the individual deformation components can occur simultaneously in time and location.

When tensile and compression stress deformation behavior are identical, only singular, planar symmetrical layers in the specimen reach yield stress (tensile load) or compressive strain at yield (compression load). Thus the yield stress observed is never as pronounced as in the tensile test. When a yield point is reached, the effects on the actually developing stress and deformation region can be seen particularly in the peripheral fiber of the specimen, in contrast to theoretical compressive behavior. Due to these circumstances, a stress distribution over cross-section results that diverges from linearity, particularly when the yield point, i.e., beginning plastic deformation is reached. If there are significant differences of tensile and compressive behavior for the material investigated (Fig. 4.40), displacement of neutral fibers can occur, leading to asymmetrical stress distribution over the cross-section.

Using Hooke’s law and maximum flexural stress f in Eq. 4.128 we obtain the relationship between measured quantity f and dimensionless peripheral fiber strain f:

2 f

L

hf6 (4.129)

In order to measure traverse path, i.e., to determine the deflection between bend anvil and supports (Fig. 4.42a), the elasticity modulus Ef is obtained as follows:

3

3

f hbf4

LF E (4.130)

The relationship between cross-head speed vT and desired peripheral fiber strain rate d f /dt is important for setting the universal testing machine:

2

Tf f

L

hv6

dt

d (4.131)

Besides normal stress, additional shear stress (Fig. 4.42c) develops in the specimen that can influence the result of the bend test. In order to minimize this effect, the ratio of support length L to specimen height h must be considered when testing plastics:

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 143

h116L (4.132)

For very thick specimens or materials containing coarse fillers, a relatively large L/h ratio may be required to avoid delaminations due to shearing. This is especially true for laminates or other layered plastics, except when testing for interlaminar shear strength (short-beam test). In this case, the ratio L/h should range from 20 to 25 to eliminate the shear stress portion. For very soft plastics, such as PE, the support span can be increased or the support radius altered in order to reduce the amount of indention caused by the supports on the specimen. If only very short specimens are available, deflection can also be determined by strain gauges instead of measuring traverse path (Fig. 4.43).

When measuring middle deflection using a deflection sensor (Fig. 4.43a), the measurement result does not include indenting into the specimen by the bend anvil, i.e., Eqs. 4.125 to 4.131 are still valid. If fork sensors such as in Fig. 4.43b are used, indenting by the supports is also eliminated; however, different equations have to be used to calculate deflection f, peripheral fiber strain and modulus Ef :

G

2 G LL3

IE96

LF f (4.133)

deflection sensor anvil

F

traverse

v T

a

F

traverse

v T

fork sensor

anvil

b

support

support

f f

Fig. 4.43: Use of different strain measurement systems for determining deflection with a deflection

sensor (a) and a fork sensor (b)

144 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

G 2 G

f LL3L

Lhf12 (4.134)

3

G 2 G

f hbf8

LL3LF E (4.135)

If the specimens are very thick or very short, support indentation can become a problem for the measurement technique. To eliminate the problem, larger support radii are used, which, if deflection is considerable, can cause specimen roll-off, resulting in a shortening of the support span and thus influencing the test result. In addition, normal stresses often are generated by friction, bringing about a displacement of neutral fiber and, thereby, stress distribution. More extensive information on numerical correction for such measurement effects is provided by [4.61] among others. When bend tests are being performed, care must be taken, as with other basic mechanical tests, to position the specimens as precisely in the load line as possible; otherwise bending can be skewed, or torsional moment can influence the measurement results. For this reason, no flexible, self-adjusting supports should be used. The forces occurring in actual testing practice are not sufficient to maintain plane position of the specimen. If the test equipment has centering devices, such as arresting stoppers on the supports, these should always be utilized.

By analogy with the tensile or compression test on plastics, pure bending is overlaid by relaxation and creep processes in the quasi-static bend test as well, as exhibited by the strong dependence of test results on test speed and temperature. Strict adherence to test conditions is indispensable to obtain comparable results.

4.3.5.2 The Standardized Bend Test

ISO 178 is used for performing bend tests on plastics. The specimen of preference exhibits dimensions of 80 10 4 mm3 and can be produced directly by injection molding or by removing the shoulders from type 1A multipurpose specimens (Fig. 4.44a, Table 4.2). The latter procedure has the advantage of comparable orientation and residual stress state for evaluating material properties.

When specimens with different dimensions are used, Eq. 4.136 has to be fulfilled:

h120l (4.136)

With thermoplastic or thermosetting sheets or with textile and long-glass-fiber reinforced plastics, the specimen can be up to 80 mm wide and up to 50 mm thick; however, a correspondingly long specimen and wide supports have to be used. When testing anisotropic materials, such as laminates or laminated plastics, specimen types

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 145

(Fig. 4.44b) should be selected such that the main loading direction is used for acquiring values. If the differences in the various directions are considerable, tests are required on specimens with differing orientations, whereby collation of the measurement results with the orientation direction must be assured. For all types of specimens, it is essential that they not exhibit any kinking, edge rounding, scratches or fissures. Specimens with very sharp cooling contraction and shrink marks cannot be used.

Test speed in the bend test is generally set to correspond with the particular product standard; ISO 178 permits test speeds from 1 mm min-1 to 500 mm min-1.

If there are no such specifications, according to the standard, the traverse speed vT is selected so that it is close to the normal flexural strain rate of d f /dt = 1 % min

-1. For preferred specimens with dimensions of 80 10 4 mm3 and a support span L = 64 mm, this yields a cross-head speed of 2 mm min-1 (Eq. 4.131). With materials with pronounced initial behavior, a preload Fv can be used; however, the resulting strains must not exceed 0.05 % with reference to measurement of the E modulus. By analogy with the tensile and compression test, it is recommended that the test apparatus for bend tests be set up with a system prestress of 90 to 95 % nominal load and with rigid set-up specimens to avoid setting motion during the test. Elasticity modulus Ef under flexural loading is acquired under the same conditions as in tensile

a

b

1 0

80

B

D

A C

hb

h

b

h

h

b

width direction of the product

length direction

of the product

(processing direction)

Fig. 4.44: Specimens for the bend test according to ISO 178

146 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

and compression tests, i.e., as a secant modulus (Fig. 4.27a) in a range of 0.05 to 0.25 % peripheral fiber strain (Eq. 4.136). The same test speed is used as in the bend test itself.

002.0 E

1f2f

1f2f f (4.137)

Figure 4.45 shows typical flexural stress–peripheral fiber strain diagrams of various polymers. Diagram (a) in Fig. 4.45 shows the brittle fracture behavior of materials such as PS or PMMA.

a

b

c

s (mm)

� (M

P a )

�x

�fM = �fB

�fM

�f (%)�x �fB

�fB

�fC

f

�fM �fB

sB sM sB sC Fig. 4.45: Typical flexural stress–peripheral fiber strain diagrams of polymers in the bend test

When the material behavior is ductile (curve (b) in Fig. 4.45), the force reaches a peak and fracture occurs prior to reaching so-called conventional deflection sC. In this case, flexural strength can be measured at maximum load. If neither a peak in force, nor fracture occurs prior to conventional deflection, flexural stress at conventional deflection fC is determined at this position; this material behavior is still considered ductile. According to Fig. 4.45, the material parameters explained in the following can be determined for various plastic materials.

Flexural strength fM : the maximum flexural stress tolerated by the specimen during the experiment. In the case of material behavior as shown in diagram (a) in Fig. 4.45, this value is identical to fB.

2

max fM

hb2

LF3 (4.138)

4.3 Quasi-Static Test Methods 147

Flexural stress at break fB : this value is determined if specimen break occurs during the experiment. Of course, it depends to a high degree on the conditions set for the break detector threshold on the universal testing machine.

2

B fB

hb2

LF3 (4.139)

Flexural stress at conventional deflection fC : this parameter is determined if the specimen fails to break, or if no peak force occurs. In this case, the flexural stress is calculated with the recorded conventional deflection sC = 1.5 h. Given a support span of L = 16 h, this deflection value corresponds to a peripheral fiber strain f of 3.5 %.

2

C fC

hb2

LF3 (4.140)

Flexural strain at flexural strength fM : the peripheral fiber strain determined at the position of flexural strength. This value can be stated dimensionless or as a percentile. The value can be identical with flexural strain at break if the material behavior corresponds to curve (a) in Fig. 4.45.

2

M fM

L

hf6 (4.141)

Flexural strain at break fB : the normal flexural strain reached at specimen break.

2

B fB

L

hf6 (4.142)

ISO 178 does not comply with these rules. Here, deflection is not represented by f, but by s. As stated in Section 4.3.5.1, the equations presented here are valid only for deflections that are relatively small compared to geometrical dimensions.

Corresponding to the standard, however, values as high as 6 mm for maximum possible deflection are distinctly higher. Thus under relatively large normal flexural strains and in the presence of inhomogeneities, off-center breaks can occur that corrupt the bend test result.

Figure 4.46 shows flexural stress–peripheral fiber strain diagrams of PP as a function of GF content. Flexural strength increases with fiber content, while tensile strain at break decreases. At the same time, it becomes clear that flexural strength can only be determined for high fiber contents (40 and 50 wt.-% in Fig. 4.46). In PP materials with low fiber content, flexural stress at conventional deflection is reached at 3.5 % peripheral fiber strain or 6 mm deflection, without a peak maximum or specimen

148 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

� (M

P a

)

� f (%)

f

0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

0 wt.-%

10 wt.-%

20 wt.-%

30 wt.-%

50 wt.-%

PP/GF

-%40 wt.

Fig. 4.46: Flexural stress–peripheral fiber strain diagrams of PP/GF composites as functions of GF

content

break occurring. The flexural stress recorded for these materials at conventional deflection fC is not comparable with flexural strength fM. For this reason, the bend test mainly serves for quality control and the determination of material values for simple dimensioning tasks. The use of stress x at x % of strain, which is not explicitly

Table 4.5: Selected characteristic values obtained from bend tests

Material fM

(MPa) fC

(MPa) Material fM

(MPa) fC

(MPa)

Thermoplastics unreinforced Thermoplastics unreinforced

PE-HD 35 SAN 135

PE-LD 10 PBT 85 70

PS 100 Thermoplastics reinforced

PA 6 50 PP + 20 wt.-% GF 90

PC 70 PET + 30 wt.-% GF 220

PMMA 110 PBT + 30 wt.-% GF 210

PVC-U 100 Thermosets

PVC-P 65 Phenole resin 70

PP 35 Urea resin 70

ABS 55 UP resin 60

POM 120 PUR 110

4.4 Impact Loading 149

described in the standard, enables meaningful comparison of these materials. The expected tendency for strength to increase with increasing fiber content ( in Fig. 4.46) and the reduction in peripheral fiber strain ( in Fig. 4.46) is reflected correctly with these parameters. Table 4.5 lists values from bend tests for selected plastics.

4.4 Impact Loading

4.4.1 Introduction

When products made from polymers are utilized in industrial practice, impact loading often occurs in addition to static loading. Examples of this include

• Demolding, • Traffic accidents (crash), • Underground assembly and laying of pipes, • Hail impact on plastic rooves and window profiles, • Stone impact on frontal surfaces of automotives and railroad rolling stock, • Loading on plastic safety films and security glazing, and • Accidents involving two-wheel vehicles (bicycle and motorcycle helmets).

Impact loading results in increased strain rate, significantly altering the strength and break behavior of most plastics. Besides increased strain rate, factors contributing to brittle fracture include low temperatures and multiaxial stress states including residual stresses. Stress concentrations at notches contribute especially to the formation of brittle fracture, so that tests are often performed on notched specimens.

The tests mostly used for evaluating the toughness of plastics under impact loading are the Charpy or notched Charpy impact test, the uniaxial impact or notched impact test, and the biaxial free-falling dart test owing to their relatively simple applicability. On specimens with rectangular cross-sections, plastic sheets and films, conventional toughness values are acquired that generally decrease with increasing strain rate, i.e., the occurrence of macroscopic brittle fracture phenomena is promoted.

The Charpy impact test in various arrangements has gained the greatest importance in the quality control of plastics because of its methodological simplicity, short testing time and relatively low consumption of materials. Although its use in quality assurance is undisputed, its applicability is limited in the area of material development and optimization (cf. Chapter 5).

When thermoplastics are tested, injection molded specimens are preferred because of their simple production technology (cf. Chapter 2). At the same time, internal states

150 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

related to manufacturing process, i.e., varying orientation states of macromolecules, residual stresses and developing morphology have to be taken into consideration. Orientation influence can be reduced by using different manufacturing processes, such as sheet molding.

4.4.2 Charpy Impact Test and Charpy Notched Impact Test

Three different configuration can be distinguished for impact loading with pendulum impact testers. The specimen either lies with its notched side centrally between two supports (Charpy configuration) or it is firmly clamped on one side (Izod configuration) (Fig. 4.47).

CHARPY arrangement IZOD arrangement

support span

support

F

impact direction

F impact direction

specimen

specimen

support

Fig. 4.47: Impact loading in Charpy and Izod configurations

When testing relatively small specimens, the Dynstat configuration is preferred; here, an unnotched specimen is held on one side over its entire width between two supports.

The Charpy impact test is performed on notched and unnotched specimens with three-point support and serves to evaluate the toughness behavior of plastics under impact loading. It is standardized in ISO 179. Prismatic specimens have to be produced according to the corresponding molding material standard. The specimens can be produced directly by injection molding or by cutting from pressed or cast sheets (Table 4.6). The type 1 specimens, mainly used for thermoplastics, can be taken from type 1A multipurpose specimens according to ISO 3167. Type 2 and 3

Table 4.6: Specimen types, dimensions and support spans for impact testing according to ISO 179

Length l

(mm)

Width b

(mm)

Thickness h

(mm)

Support span L

(mm)

Type 1 80 ± 2 10.0 ± 0.2 4.0 ± 0.2 62

Type 2 25 h 10 or 15 3 20 h

Type 3 (11 or 13) h 10 or 5 3 (6 or 8) h

4.4 Impact Loading 151

specimens are used for composite materials exhibiting interlaminar shear fracture, e.g., long-fiber reinforced polymers.

In the notched Charpy impact test, a notch is cut into the specimen. By notching, a stress concentration as well as an increase in crack propagation rate is achieved at the front of the crack tip. In this way, a break can be achieved even on tough plastics that do not break when unnotched specimens are used. When the notch is cut, care must be taken that the margin area is cut on the tensile loaded side of the specimen.

The test standard distinguishes between a configuration in which the direction of impact is parallel to dimension b with impact on the narrow longitudinal surface h l of the specimen (edgewise) and one in which the direction of impact is parallel to dimension h with impact on the broad longitudinal surface b l (flatwise). For the most commonly used Type 1 specimen, the test is performed unnotched on the broad surface especially when surface effects are to be investigated. The test method of preference is designated as ISO 179/1eA. Here, notch shape A is used with notch base radius rN = 0.25 0.05 mm and remaining width bN at notch base of the specimen of 8.0 0.2 mm. There are additional notch types B with rN = 1.00 0.05 mm and C with rN = 0.10 0.02 mm.

For the test, pendulum hammers according to ISO 13802 are used with nominal impact energies of 0.5 J to 50 J and impact velocities of 2.9 m s-1 and 3.8 m s-1, respectively in Charpy configuration, and 3.5 m s-1 in Izod configuration.

When the test is performed, the energy W absorbed by the specimen is calculated from the difference between the pendulum hammer height over specimen before and after impact and the mass mp of the pendulum hammer.

)cos(coslgm)hh(gmWWW 2121 (4.143) W1 pendulum hammer energy before specimen breaking W2 pendulum hammer energy after specimen breaking h1 height of pendulum hammer before impact h2 height of pendulum hammer after impact l distance between the axis of rotation of the pendulum and the center of gravity of the pendulum g local acceleration due to gravity (g = 9.81 m s-2)

starting angle angle of rise

To determine the Charpy impact strength of an unnotched specimen acU, the energy Wc absorbed by breaking the specimen is related to the initial cross-section area of the specimen:

hb

W a ccU (4.144)

152 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

In order to determine Charpy impact strength, the surface quality of the specimens must fulfill special requirements.

Besides the Charpy impact strength of a polymer, its notched Charpy impact strength has special technical relevance, since notches often develop in component parts. These can be surface flaws and sharp-edged cross-sectional borders, such as fins, edges and cut-outs.

To determine notched Charpy impact strength, the notched specimen is positioned centrally on the supports and with the notch on its tension surface. Thus, impact occurs on the side opposite the notch. Notched Charpy impact strength acN ist calculated from the absorbed energy Wc, related to the smallest initial cross-section of the specimen at notch base:

hb

W a

N

c cN (4.145)

bN remaining specimen width at notch base

The difference between Charpy impact strength acU and notched Charpy impact strength acN indicates how sensitive a plastic is to external notches, i.e., takes the problematic of notch effect for the Charpy impact test into consideration and indicates how effective fillers are. Thus, notch sensitivity can be calculated from the quotients of acN and acU:

%100 a

a k

cU

cN z (4.146)

Notched Charpy impact strength is decisively influenced by the notch radius selected and the notching procedure (sawing, milling, planing). Besides such machining methods, the machining parameters, such as feed or cutting speed, affect the measurement of notched Charpy impact strength. The magnitude of difference depends on the particular material, although generally speaking, notched Charpy impact strength increases with increasing notch radius (Fig. 4.48). Differences between the notched Charpy impact strengths measured are most pronounced in the notch radius range dictated by the ISO test standard of 0.1 mm to 1 mm. Figure 4.48a shows that PVC, Nylon (PA) and POM exhibit a qualitatively similar behavior in their dependence on notch radius, whereby the notch radius influence is strongest for PVC. ABS and PMMA show less dependence at a different level of toughness. Within the notch radii range considered, ABS turns out to be the most notch-insensitive material. In Fig. 4.48 the investigated notch radius range was extended downward to notch radii of 2.5 μm by making razor blade notches. At notch radii < 0.1 mm, polyamide 66, impact modified polyamide 66 and PC exhibit brittle behavior, as

4.4 Impact Loading 153

characterized by small Izod notched impact strength values aiN that are independent of notch radius. For high-impact polyamide 66, by contrast, only small influence on Izod notched impact strength was observed for notch sharpnesses from 2.5 μm to 0.25 mm. Due to their different loadings, Charpy and Izod notched impact strengths are not quantitatively comparable. However, similar qualitative tendencies result from their dependence on notch radius. Of the materials mentioned here, ABS and high- impact polyamide 66 prove to be notch insensitive over the entire notch radius range. Loading temperature and velocity are additional parameters that have to be considered.

Measuring the temperature dependence of toughness with the goal of stating material specific brittle-to-tough transition temperatures is meaningful only where sharp notches are involved, as can be seen from Fig. 4.48b.

� (mm)

PVC Nylon

POM

ABS

PMMA

40

30

20

10

0 10 10

0

a

1

a

(

k J m

) c N

-2

A

D B

C

1.6

1.2

0.8

0.4

0

10 10 10 -2 -1

b

� (mm)

0

a

(k

J m

) iN

-2

Fig. 4.48: Dependence of notched Charpy impact strength acN on notch radius for selected plastics (a) and of notched Izod impact strength aiN on for polyamide (nylon) materials (A - PA 66 high impact, B - PA 66 impact, C - PA 66) and PC, curve D (b) [4.62, 4.63]

Analogous statements can be made regarding the dependence of crack toughness on the rate of change of load parameters (cross-head speed of testing machine, impact speed of pendulum or falling hammer or the impact speed of a projectile in an arrest experiment). Thus it is clear that critical notch radii can only be determined by investigatiing the dependence of fracture mechanic values on notch radius.

Table 4.7 lists typical values for Charpy impact strength and notched Charpy impact strength of selected polymers.

154 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

Table 4.7: Charpy impact and notched Charpy impact strengths according to ISO 179 (data taken from CAMPUS [1.51] and FORMAT [1.54]; N = without fracture)

Thermoplastics unreinforced

acU

(kJ m-2)

acN

(kJ m-2) Thermoplastics

reinforced acU

(kJ m-2)

acN

(kJ m-2)

PE-HD N 4.9 PP + GF 45 15

PE-LD N N PA 6 + 30 wt.-% GF 85 19

PP 100 10 PA + CF 70 15

PS 21.5 2.8 PP + 20 wt.-% talc 40 3.5

SAN 19 2.5 PP + 20 wt.-% chalk 40 3.5

ABS 120 20 PVC + chalk 9

PC N 18 Thermosets unreinforced

PMMA 25 2.9 PF resin 8.5 2.9

PVC-U 80 3.2 UF resin 6.3 1.3

PVC-P N 50 MF resin 4.3 1.8

PA N 50 UP resin 11 3

POM N 12 EP resin 22 1.5

PET N 3.9

PTFE N 16

The disadvantage of impact energy measured by the notched Charpy impact test lies in the fact that, due to the relation

cff

0f c dfFE (4.147)

f deflection fc deflection at break F load (force)

it consists of both a strength and a deformation component. Thus, the same impact energy is obtained from very different load and deflection values. For this reason, it is impossible to utilize impact energy as a dimensioning parameter for impact loaded components. The meaningfulness of the notched Charpy impact test can be significantly increased by the electronic recording of load–deflection diagrams or load–time diagrams in the instrumented notched Charpy impact test (cf. Section 5.4.2 and [1.38]). Such curves are presented in Fig. 4.49 to illustrate the fundamental problem using recorded F–f diagrams of two polyolefine materials with comparable notched Charpy impact strengths.

4.4 Impact Loading 155

F (N

)

500

400

300

200

100

0

0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5

acN

a cN

f (mm)

a a cN cN

~~

1

1

2

2

Fig. 4.49: Comparison of load–deflection diagrams for PP/GF and PB-1/GF composites with different material behaviors but comparable notched Charpy impact strengths

Although no conclusions can be drawn regarding the behavior of component parts under impact loading from the results of impact and notched Charpy impact tests, standardized notched Charpy impact tests continue to be routinely used on specially produced specimens in production monitoring and in developmental laboratories, also to evaluate temperature dependence. The relevance of Charpy impact and notched Charpy impact tests ends at the point where, despite notching, the specimens no longer break because of their insufficient stiffness. In such cases, the energy absorbed by the specimen for deformation is just a measure of its flexural stiffness. In order to obtain material values even from these materials, the tensile-impact test can be used.

4.4.3 Tensile-Impact and Notched Tensile-Impact Tests

The conventional tensile-impact test according to ISO 8256 is a uniaxial tensile test with a relatively high strain rate which is used for polymers that, according to ISO 179 or ISO 180, are too flexible or too thin for Charpy impact tests.

For this test, commercial pendulum impact testers with a multiple-member arm for holding the head are used (Fig. 4.50). The standard specifies two procedures for determining the energy required to break plastic specimens under uniaxial impact loading. In procedure A, the specimen lies horizontally and is held at one end in a

156 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

Fig. 4.50: Tensile-impact test device

specimen clamp and at the other end in a cross-head. The cross-head lies loosely on the specimen clamp support. The bifurcate arm impacts the cross-head at the lowest point of pendulum motion. In procedure B, the cross-head moves together with the striker.

For procedure A, specimen strips are used that are notched on both sides and have a length of 80 mm, a width of 10 mm and a thickness of up to 4 mm, or unnotched dumbbell specimens with the same length and a shoulder width of 15 mm and a parallel midsection 10 mm long and 10 mm wide. The notches are either molded in or formed mechanically. Radius at notch base has to be 1.0 0.02 mm, notch angle 45 1°; notch depth is always 2 mm. Narrow tolerances must be maintained for notch profile and radius for most polymers, since these factors decisively determine the stress concentration at the notch base (cf. Fig. 4.48). In addition, it has to be taken into consideration that specimens with molded-in notches tend to provide different results than specimens with mechanically made notches. Special unnotched dumbbell specimens are used in procedure B. The specimens are produced either by injection molding or mechanically from components and semi-finished products, such as extruded parts, foils and laminates, extruded and cast sheets. These procedures are suitable both for production monitoring as well as for quality assurance.

Tensile-impact strength E or notched tensile-impact strength En (Eq. 4.148) is measured. If the cross-head is thrown off (procedure A) or bounces off (procedure B), the test standard precisely specifies methodological corrections.

dx

E EoderE cn (4.148)

Ec corrected impact energy x width of the narrow parallel side-section of the specimen or distance between notches d total specimen thickness

4.4 Impact Loading 157

By analogy, permanent strain bl can be measured with the tensile test. To do so, the change in length lbl measured by fitting the pieces together after the test is related to the initial gauge length l0 :

%100 l

ll

0

0bl bl (4.149)

The test results obtained on specimens with different dimensions do not have to be identical. Just as in the notched Charpy impact test, mechanically cut and directly injection-molded specimens do not provide identical results due to their different internal material states. The experimental results from procedures A and B do not necessarily have to be comparable. Thus it is clear that tensile-impact strengths and notched tensile-impact strengths are not suitable data sources for calculating design components.

Figure 4.51 provides an example for the application of tensile-impact tests in the development of PE-HD/NBR blends [4.64]. Generally, compatibilizers are used in blends to improve phase distribution and/or interaction between the phases. This example illustrates the influence of the compatibilizers maleic acid hydride and carbolic acid, whereby only MAH leads to a significant improvement of tensile- impact strength in the PE-HD/NBR blend. This improvement in toughness is due to the fact that MAH positively influences the size, shape and particle distance of the NBR-phase, as well as the uniformity and especially the adhesion between the phases.

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8

120

160

200

240

280

320

compatibilizer content (wt.-%)

E (

k J m

)

MAH

phenol

-2

Fig. 4.51: Tensile-impact strength of a PE-HD/NBR blend as a function of compatibilizer content for

the compatibilizers MAH (maleic acid hydride) and carbolic acid [4.64]

158 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

This shows the principle suitability of the tensile-impact test for material development, whereby the informational value of this test procedure, too, can be significantly increased by the electronic recording of load–time diagrams (cf. Section 5.5.2).

In addition to impact or notched impact testing with pendulum impact testers, further experimental methods for testing polymers include dynamic tensile tests with servo-hydraulic high-speed test machines, rotary impact testers and free-fall dart testers.

4.4.4 Free-falling Dart Test and Puncture Impact Test

Because of biaxial loading, conventional puncture impact test can be used to test materials under conditions similar to actual use, i.e., better simulating the often complex loading conditions of components than pure impact bending or tensile- impact tests. The procedure is standardized in ISO 6603-1. As test equipment, a device is used that provides for the impact of a guided striker perpendicular to the plane of the specimen (Fig. 4.52). The striker of preference has a polished hemispherical striking surface with a diameter of 20 0.2 mm and can be provided with additional weights. Round or square specimens are used with an edge length or diameter of 60 2 mm, a thickness of 2 0.1 mm using a clamping ring of 40 mm in diameter.

So-called 50 % impact-failure energy E50 is a material parameter measured using a multi-specimen technique. By varying the height of fall or striker mass, a step-by-step

guiding device for the drop weight

arrest and trigger device

drop weight

striker

support

frame

base plate

specimen

clamp

D2 D3 D4

R

H H

Fig. 4.52: Test arrangement for the puncture impact test

4.4 Impact Loading 159

Fig. 4.53: Views of specimen surfaces damaged by penetration (a), breaks (b) and brittle fracture (c)

variation of the energy exerted takes place in the following manner: if damage occurs at the exerted energy selected, the energy exerted on the next specimen is reduced by an amount to be determined in preliminary tests; if no damage occurs, the energy is increased by the corresponding amount.

Depending on the material and test procedure, characteristic damage features occuring are penetration, initial cracks, breaks and brittle fracture (Fig. 4.53). Based on the damage characteristic, behavior in actual use can be estimated for defined impact loads.

When testing sheets and particularly films , electronic recording of the relationships between force and time or deformation can significantly enhance the informational value.

Figure 4.54 illustrates this with a plotted graph obtained from an instrumented puncture impact test on a PE-LD film. Besides the total penetration energy measured by conventional puncture testing, which corresponds to the surface beneath the curve, additional parameters can be determined as they arise due to initial cracking, including peak force Fp or time tp at maximum load and energy to peak load (force).

The instrumented free-falling dart test can also be used as a technical test method to evaluate the behavior of welded pipes under impact loading (Fig. 4.55 left side). This type of investigation requires the use of a special, V-shaped support adjustable to the pipe diameter. With this type of test equipment, the weld seam can be tested under impact loading at various points.

160 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

t (ms)

3.6

3.8

4.0

4.2

F (N

)

H

test speed

energy

load deformation

100

80

60

40

20

0

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

1.0

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2

0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

4.4

E (

J )

s (

m m

)

v

( m

s )

-1

Fig. 4.54: Characteristic force (F)–path (s)–energy (E)–time (t) diagram of a PE-LD film in the instru- mented biaxial puncture impact test

For example, a compound pipe system consisting of an inner and an outer pipe extruded from PE or PE-X and an aluminum core with a wall thickness of approx. 1 mm, we can illustrate the influence of various welding methods (single V-groove weld using TIG and overlapping USW). The different load–deformation behavior for both types of welding can be seen from falling dart tests at position = 0°.

Upon impact by the falling dart on the pipe, force increases and the pipe becomes dented. As loading increases, a second increase in force (curve (a) in Fig. 4.55, right side) occurs due to the limiting effect of the support. Microscopic evaluation of the cut surfaces revealed clearly:

pipe specimen

support

strain

drop weight

F

� = 0°� = 45°� = 90°

test arrangement

0 10 20 30

0

200

400

600

800

F (N

)

t (ms)

welded joints

� = 0°

� = 0°

a

b

gauge

Fig. 4.55: Testing weld seams with the instrumented free-falling dart test

4.5 Fatigue Behavior 161

• for V-seams: mainly failure due to tangential fissures in the root area • for overlapped welds: radial fissures and delaminations

(Fig. 4.55 right side, curve (b)).

4.5 Fatigue Behavior

4.5.1 Fundamentals

In addition to static long-term loading, plastic components are often subject to dynamic loading in practice. Such dynamic loading can lead to component failure at markedly lower stress or deformations than under static load conditions.

When material-dependent limits are exceeded, damage phenomena arise in the region of linear-viscoelastic material behavior, leading to fatigue. This type of material failure can also be observed with fiber-reinforced polymers (FRP) and has to be taken into consideration for their application, since it is the inclusion of reinforcing fibers in composite materials that makes them suitable for load-bearing structural parts.

Fatigue behavior in polymeric materials is essentially determined by the specific behavior of the polymeric structure.

At the start of a periodically alternating, cyclic load sequence there is a deviation from linear-elastic behavior, and a hysteresis loop develops due to the phase shift between forced vibration and deformation. Acting forces and forced deformations occur in staggered sequence, whereby additional energy must be exerted for elastic recovery. As loading increases, the deformation energy absorbed by the material changes, the hysteresis area (loss energy) grows, and an increase in temperature takes place in the polymer material. This increase in temperature is caused in particular by the structurally determined low heat conductivity of plastics – two to three decimal powers lower than that of metals. This heating phenomenon depends on the frequency of cyclic loading, so that early failure can occur due to increased teperature and/or mechanical damage.

The continuous vibration test provides the basis for determining fatigue behavior of plastics [1.38]. For testing polymers, we assume, by and large, the concept definitions and specifications according to DIN 50100, the test standard for continuous vibration tests on metallic materials (Fig. 4.56).

162 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

t

� 0

1 stress cycle

� m

� a

� a

� u

Fig. 4.56: Stress–time diagram under cyclic loading taking the pulsating tensile area as an example ( o maximum stress, u minimum stress, m mean stress, a alternating stress amplitude)

In the continuous vibration test we distinguish between stress-controlled loading, in which a constant alternating stress amplitude a is overlaid by a constant mean stress

m, and strain-controlled loading, in which a constant strain amplitude a is overlaid by a constant mean strain m. Depending upon the load on the material to be tested, this test can be performed in three loading ranges in a total of seven cases of loading (Fig. 4.57). Either mean stress and stress amplitude, or the maximum and minimum stress are predefined as loading values, depending on the test procedure. The parameter stated in the stress-controlled continuous vibration test is the stress ratio R = u / o . Here we distinguish between the

• Range for pulsating compressive stresses: o and u are negative, m a ; 0 R < +1

• Range for alternating stresses: o and u have contrary signs and m < a; 0 > R -1

• Range for pulsating tensile stresses: o and u are positive. m a; 0 R < +1

If a constant mean stress is assumed, the object of the test is to determine endurance strength or fatigue strength D. Fatigue strength D characterizes the largest stress amplitude a that a specimen can sustain indefinitely without unacceptable deformations. Specimen break occurs at all stress amplitudes above D. For a practical determination of D, the Wöhler test can be performed, reflecting the dependence between the magnitude of loading and the established number of cycles until fracture. For plastics, the Wöhler test is performed at stress cycles reaching N 107.

4.5 Fatigue Behavior 163

� >

� m

a

+ te

n si

o n

range for pulsating range for pulsating

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

co m

p re

ss io

n

� =

� m

a

� <

� m

a

� <

� m

a

� =

� m

a

� >

� m

a

� =

0 m

range for pulsating stresses compressive stresses tensile stresses

Fig. 4.57: Loading states during the continuous vibration test

4.5.2 Experimental Determination of Fatigue Behavior

Test specifications and standards are required for determining service life curves for the fatigue behavior of polymers. An overview and evaluation of the current situation has been undertaken by Oberbach [4.65] with emphasis on thermoplastic materials and by Ehrenstein [4.66] for FRP systems. At this time, compulsory standards exist only for a a limited number of special cases.

Wöhler curves (S–N curves) are determined by single-stage flexural fatigue testing, i.e., using load cycles with constant amplitude a and constant mean stress values

m or constant stress ratio s. For several years, DIN 53442 has provided a test standard

f

measurement

rotation axis

specimen directing

drive motion link

zero position

eccentric hub

eccentric drive

supporting bracket of rotating axis

load cell

motion link

spring

Fig. 4.58: Working principle of the flexural fatigue test according to DIN 53442

164 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

for performing flexural fatigue tests on flat specimens under flexural fatigue load. The testing principle is illustrated in Fig. 4.58.

A flat specimen is fastened to both the drive and measurement arms. The specimen is made to bend by the eccentric crank mechanism, whereby the rotation center of the measurement arm is fixed by the specimen and two springs. The test stress is set and the stiffness decrease during duration of load is recorded via a deformation measure- ment unit on the measurement arm (in the simple case: dial gauges). Waisted flat specimens with a thickness of 2 to 8 mm are used for the test. The reduction in cross- section at the specimen center defines the region of expected failure or break.

While the test is being performed, specimen surface temperature is monitored and recorded to check its self-heating. The number of cycles recorded until fracture is represented with S–N curves as functions of their dependence on the gradated initial stresses (Fig. 4.59). Instead of fracture failure, stress drop (generally 20 %; for FRC also 10 %) can also be defined as a damage criterion. The advantage of this test procedure lies in its simplicity and the modest equipment and manpower require- ments. Disadvantages include the limited controllability while the test is being performed, as well as the lack of clarity for defining and checking loading conditions (stress state). S–N curves obtained by this method mainly provide general material information regarding the service life of components [4.67]. Nonetheless, such mechanical pulsators will continue to be used for testing polymers. In this respect, it should be mentioned that changes have been made in the test arrangement according to ASTM D 671 for bending vibration loading on flat specimens with a constant deformation presetting [4.65].

Moreover, thermoplastics are fatigue tested on mechanical pulsators designed as rotary bend test machines with eccentric drive (DIN 50113) [4.65]. The advantages of this method include constant bending moment, as well as good regulation of the loading frequency, providing defined specimen load. A disadvantage lies in the fact that the equipment requires round specimens, otherwise uncommon in polymer testing.

The state-of-the-art for determining fatigue behavior of polymers and FRP is represented by the application of electrical servo-hydraulic test equipment. Practical testing advantages are provided by the defined control engineering of the testing machine or testing system (force, strain, path), variability of types of load (alternating load, pulsating load in the tensile and compression area), presetting of vibration modes (sinus, triangular, trapeze, random, etc.), as well as presetting of test frequencies and defined stress ratios s.

4.5 Fatigue Behavior 165

failure by fracture

S–N curve

temperature

damage line

10 10 10 104 5 6 7

N

160

140

120

100

80

60

40

20

0 10 10 10 10

4 5 6 7

N

80

60

40

20

0

T (°

C )

f = 11.2 Hz �a T

ba T

(° C

)

� (M

P a

) a

� (M

P a

) a

1

11

Fig. 4.59: Initial stress amplitude a1 (N = 1) as a function of the number of stress cycles N (Wöhler curve, S–N curve): plotted according to DIN 53442 (a) using PA as an example (b)

The essential components of such an electro-servo hydraulic (ESH) test system consist of a column test bed with test cylinder, load cell, strain measurement system and digital control system. These are illustrated in Fig. 4.60 (a), which shows a measuring station for flexural fatigue testing as an example. Figure 4.60 (b) illustrates a test arrangement for pulsating tensile testing.

Use of these methods is not limited to standardized specimen shapes; strip specimens, various shaped dumbbell specimens and even compact specimens can also be used (Fig. 4.61).

One test specification requiring the use of ESH technology is DIN standard 65586 for FRP aeronautical applications. This standard is aimed at the fatigue testing of oriented laminates (UD layers, prepregs and woven fabric laminates). Very thin strip specimens are used for testing with a preferential stress ratio of s = -1 or s = 0.1.

a specimen

load cell

strain-controlled

test device

clamp b

controller

Fig. 4.60: Electro-servo hydraulic (ESH) measuring stations for flexural fatigue test (a) and pulsating tensile test (b)

166 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

Fig. 4.61: Specimen shapes for fatigue tests

To keep specimens from buckling under compression load, they are guided on special low-friction buckling columns.

Not only the number of cycles until fracture has to be recorded, but specimen temperature (limiting temperatures of 50 °C or 40 °C, depending on resin system) has to be monitored, and stiffness decrease determined (preferably 20 %). Stiffness decrease is monitored by recording the stress–strain hysteresis periodically. Damage

10 10 10 10 10 10 100 1 2 3 4 5 6

1000 900 800

700

600

500

400

300

200

average curve

P = 90 % - curve c

N

s = -1

� (M

P a )

a

Fig. 4.62: S–N curve according to DIN 65586

4.5 Fatigue Behavior 167

� (M

P a )

p u l

PA/GF

P c10

P c90

P c90

P c10

CFK

260

210

160

110

60

10 10 10 10 10 10 10

2 3 4 5 6 7

N

s = 0.1

Fig. 4.63: Pulsating fatigue strength sch as a function of the number of stress cycles N ( sch = 2 a for

m = a)

progress in fiber-reinforced plastics can be monitored simultaneously using non- destructive testing (ultrasound, X-ray, thermography).

Figure 4.62 shows the graphic illustration provided in DIN 65586 of a mid-range S–N curve, as well as the lower confidence limit (Pc = 90 % curve). The variation can be calculated with a dual-parametric Weibull distribution. The tensile strength values m obtained are included in evaluation as fatigue strength values at N = 1. Once a preset number of stress cycles, e.g., N = 2 106, has been reached, it is recommended that remaining strength be measured on undistroyed specimens (so-called through- runners) as a further indicator value for progressing materials fatigue. S–N curves plotted experimentally on the basis of DIN 65586 are shown in Fig. 4.63 using a PA glass-fiber composite (PA/GF) and a carbon-fiber reinforced polymer (CFRP) as examples. The pulsating fatigue strength plotted represents a special case of fatigue strength for stress oscillating between zero and a maximum value, i.e., u = 0 and

m = a (cf. load case 2 in Fig. 4.57).

4.5.3 Planning and Evaluating Fatigue Tests

Theoretically, a S–N curve can be expressed as two linear curve segments (Fig. 4.64):

Segment 1: linear regressing low-cycle fatigue strength in the preferred presentation in log–log scale log – log N and semi-logarithmic plot – log N

Segment 2: fatigue strength as a stress value sustained for any given number of stress cycles without failure (type I) or connected to a second, often

168 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

tapering S–N curve (type II); for segment 2, K = (type I) and K = Kx (type II).

In the literature [1.38, 4.65, 4.66], the circumstance is well-known that the endurance strength parameter D cannot generally be determined for polymers and FCP, and that, therefore, low-cycle fatigue strength i is stated. Thus the determination of the fatigue behavior is superficially limited to determining, as precisely as possible, the curve of low-cycle fatigue strength as a function of the number of stress cycles. This relationship is expressed as:

k

1

D

i Di NN (4.150)

Ni number of stress cycles ND number of stress cycles at the slope break low-cycle fatigue strength / fatigue strength

i low-cycle fatigue strength k rise of low-cycle fatigue strength-no. of stress cycles curve

lo g

alternating fatigue strength

fatigue strength

N K K log N D

I

II

� D

x Fig. 4.64: Linearized S–N curve represented in log-log scale [4.68]

There are basically two approaches to planning the test:

1. In a procedure known as the “pearl string” method (Fig. 4.65a) the Wöhler curve is determined with Pc = 50 %, i.e., a median Wöhler line with 50 % survival probability. Single tests have to be performed at as many test horizons as possible, i.e., variously alternating stress amplitudes a . As the sample size increases ( 6 to 20), the precision of the Wöhler line being drawn also increases. The testing points of the individual test horizons can be projected onto a median test horizon in order to estimate scatter. This is also the basis for Wöhler curve evaluation according to DIN 65586 (cf. Fig. 4.62), stating a Pc = 90 % Wöhler line.

4.5 Fatigue Behavior 169

arctan k

N K log ND

arctan k

� D

T �

P = 90 %c

50 % 10 %

� a

TN i

a lo

g �

b

� D

� a

� a

iN K log ND i

a lo

g �

i lo

g �

1

2

3

Fig. 4.65: Evaluation of S–N curves (Wöhler curves) from fatigue test using the “pearl string” procedure (a) and for statements at > 50 % survival probability (b) (TN, TG Weibull parameters) [4.68]

2. If specific statements of Pc > 50 % survival probability are to be secured, 6 to 10 single tests have to be performed on three or four stress horizons (Fig. 4.65b). Mean values and scatter can be determined for each stress horizon, enabling the statistical calculation of tapering lines thus secured.

To optimize time, effort and expense, it is advisable, as early as in the planning phase of the investigation, to clearly define goals regarding the desired reliability of the material information to be gathered on fatigue behavior for the particular application

4.5.4 Factors Influencing the Fatigue Behavior and Service-Life Prediction of Service Life for Polymers

Due to the multiplicity and complexity of actual use requirements for polymers, as well as continuing knowledge deficits regarding their fatigue behavior, Oberbach et.al. [4.65] try to formulate evaluation criteria for the shape and position of S–N curves for polymers. This approach has been expanded by [4.66] to include fiber composite materials with polymer matrix (Fig. 4.66).

The shape of the S–N curve of any polymer is influenced by material-related aspects and load criteria. Whereas the influence of processing technology on materials has to be emphasized, load criteria are defined both by testing and application technology. When plastic parts are produced by injection molding, the direction of flow has to be considered, for example. Depending on the direction in which the specimen is removed, significant differences in flexural fatigue behavior result across and parallel to the direction of flow for a composite material such as PA 66 GF 30 (30 wt.-% glass- fiber) (Fig. 4.67).

When transposing test results to service cases, it must be remembered that loading in the compression, tensile and compression/tensile interaction range leads to different fatigue strengths. Figure 4.68 provides an overview over the influence of load types

170 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

material:

fiber reinforcing: CF, GF, AF

matrix material : thermoplastic resin, thermoset

reinforcement : UD, fabric, mat

fiber orientation, positioning

fiber content, filler content

material treatment: post-curing, conditioning

loading:

tensile, compression, bending, load ratio

loading type: sine, rectangle, triangle

frequency

environment: temperature, humidity, medium

S–N curve

following fracture

or failure criteria

thermal failure

fatigue stress failure

stress cycle number N

lo a d l e v e l

Fig. 4.66: Factors influencing fatigue behavior

using PA 66 as an example. Given the complexity of acting influences, as well as their potential interactions, it is impossible to predict the service life of either polymers or fiber-reinforced polymers under dynamic loading. Experimental data for various material groups [1.18, 1.22], further types of loading [1.18, 1.47] and modern fiber- reinforced polymers 4.69] are available to the designer as points of reference for the

� (M

P a )

a

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30 10 10 10 10

3 4 5 6

perpendicular to

flow direction

N

flow direction

Fig. 4.67: Fatigue limit of PA 66 - GF 30 in the pulsating tensile range as a function of the direction of

specimen removal [1.18]

4.6 Long-Term Static Behavior 171

� (M

P a )

a

60

40

20

0 10 10 10 10 10

3 4 5 6 7

N

compressive cyclic loading

tensile cyclic loading

tension - compression loading

Fig. 4.68: Influence of load type on the fatigue limit of PA 66 [1.18]

approximating calculation of components under cyclic loading. Arbitrary reduction factors for the fatigue strength of polymers in the form of a reduced strength level of 30 % – 50 % of initial strength do not represent a practical solution in the sense of a techno-ecological shortcut. Such an approach regularly leads to overdesigning and a loss of innovative approach.

To generalize the overall situation, the following actions are recommended for future cost- and work-intensive research on the fatigue behavior of polymers:

• as comprehensive a characterization of the materials structure and it changes over the entire test period as possible

• collection and documentation of test conditions • description and qualification of damage behavior • as comprehensive information as possible in documentation of test results

(comparability, reproducibility) • creation of knowledge-based material information systems and material data

banks [4.70, 4.71].

4.6 Long-Term Static Behavior

4.6.1 Fundamentals

In order to design long-term loaded component parts and products from polymers for reliability, information is required as to their material behavior under long acting static loading. Long-term experiments can be performed under tensile, compression,

172 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

and flexural loading stress as functions of loading temperature and with environ- mental exposure (see Chapter 7). These investigation methods are especially important for polymers, since these materials clearly exhibit non-linear viscoelastic behavior even at room temperature.

The sudden application of a static load causes plastics to alter their shape, depending on their particular stiffness, at first in a linear-elastic way. At a constant loading level and as the loading time increases, the linear-elastic deformation component becomes overlaid by a second, time-dependent deformation component, i.e., viscoelastic deformation (creep deformation; Fig. 4.9b). Creep behavior (cold flow) qualitatively describes total time and stress-dependent deformation; quantitative characteristic functions of materials are determined by means of creep curves.

By analogy, a gradual, time-determined drop in stress occurs at a given constant deformation to which a particular stress value, called stress relaxation (Fig. 4.9a), is assigned. Thus, the static long-term behavior of plastic components is characterized by retardation and stress relaxation determined by molecular structure. Due to structure differences, e.g,. for thermoplastics with amorphous or semicrystalline structure and three-dimensional crosslinking in thermosets, there are significant differences in static long-term behavior among the individual material groups [4.65].

Material failure in the form of fracture can occur as the result of time-dependent creep activity. Long before creep-rupture failure, the durability or service life of many plastics components is limited, however, by the occurrence of excessive time- dependent creep deformations that can lead to unacceptable deviations in shape and dimensions and thus to the loss of component functionality.

To characterize the creep behavior of plastics, time-dependent material parameters determined on the basis of standardized test specifications (see List of Standards) are used in various calculation guidelines for dimensioning mechanically loaded plastic components.

The goal of creep tests is to establish a multi-parametric relationship between stress, strain and time, that can be presented in the form of a three-dimensional illustration (Fig. 4.69). The relationship = f ( 0, t) described as the objective function of the creep experiments forms a spatial, three-dimensional plane in the deformation– stress–time diagram [4.72, 4.73], illustrating the complex interaction of parameters under loading and measured parameters.

4.6 Long-Term Static Behavior 173

0� = const.

t = const.

� = const.

� = f (� ,t) 0

log t

� 0

Fig. 4.69: Stress–strain–time behavior in a creep experiment [4.72]

4.6.2 Tensile Creep Test

The creep behavior of plastics is determined experimentally by the tensile creep test under static uniaxial tensile loading according to ISO 899-1, which is used most often to determine the long-term mechanical behavior of plastics.

Generally, specimens of the type used in the tensile test according to ISO 527 are used, whereby dumbbell types 1A and 1B are recommended. These specimens correspond to the multipurpose specimens according to ISO 3167 that are mainly used for testing amorphous or semicrystalline thermoplastics. Especially with FCP, strip specimens with cap strips in the clamp zone are preferred.

The main components of creep-test equipment are a base with clamping devices for specimens, loading system and strain measuring arrangement (Fig. 4.70). Further information on test technology is provided by [4.74] and [4.75].

When performing creep experiments, special care must be taken that force is introduced free of impact in the loading phase, that strain on the specimen is measured continuously and without contact, and that ambient conditions are kept constant during the entire test period. The equipment measures the increase in time- dependent elongation:

174 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

specimen

clamping device

base frame

loading device

optical deformation

measurement sensor

mass

Fig. 4.70: Structural drawing of a creep testing station

0LtLtL (4.151)

from which creep strain (t) is determined:

100 L

L)t(L .resp100

L

)t(L )t(

0

0

0

(%) (4.152)

The time-dependent strain values acquired by the creep test under constant load (stress) are called creep curves, from which the relationships illustrated in Fig. 4.71 can be derived:

• Creep curves (creep–time diagram) = f (t) with 0 = const. ( 1, 2 ,...) provide the basis for deriving creep diagrams and isochronous – diagrams (Fig. 4.71a). Creep–time curves are linear when loading is in the linear-viscoelastic range.

• Isochronous stress–strain diagrams result from creep–time curves by adding perpendicular cuts at specified times (Fig. 4.71b). Each of these – curves corresponds to a particular loading period, e.g., 1, 102, 104 h.

4.6 Long-Term Static Behavior 175

t t t t1 2 3 4t t t t1 2 3 4

log t

�1

�2

�3

�4

�1

�2

� 3

�4

� (%

)

�1

�2

�3

�4

log t

t1

t1 < t 2< t 3< t4

� (%)

� 1

�2

� 3

� 4

log t

a b

dc

� (M

P a )

� (M

P a )

E (M

P a )

c

�1 < �2 < �3 < �4

�1 < �2 < �3 < �4

t2

t3

t4

�1 < �2 < �3 < �4

t t t t1 2 3 4

Fig. 4.71: Diagram of the functional relationship in the tensile creep test: creep curves (creep–time

diagrams) (a), isochronous stress–strain diagrams (b), creep diagram (time–stress curves) (c) and creep modulus curves (d)

• Creep diagrams = f (t) for = const. ( 1, 2 ,...) result from the creep–time field by adding horizontal cuts at specified strains (Fig. 4.71c) In extreme cases, the time–stress curve is the creep–rupture curve.

Creep modulus Ec (t) is introduced to describe time-dependent material behavior of plastics (Fig. 4.71d). It is derived as the quotient of applied stress in initial state 0 and time-dependent deformation (t):

)t( )t(E 0c (4.153)

Creep rate d /dt is a further parameter used to describe static long-term behavior; it is calculated from the quotients of deformation increase and time difference:

12

tt

ttt

12 (4.154)

176 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

In order to reach the stated goal of determining material values for design purposes, test standard ISO 899-1 recommends testing over “a wide range of stresses, times and ambient conditions”. Fulfillment of this directive has to be considered during the conception of cost and time intensive creep experiments to be performed. This can succeed if a large number of test stresses with single specimens is given preference over the performance of parallel tests at a single testing stress.

Creep tests have to be conceived in such a way that specimens normally survive a test period of at least 103 h without fracture. 30 to 50 % short-term tensile strength is recommended as a reference value, whereby at least 4, preferably 6 stress steps are to be defined below this stress level [4.76]. Such a procedure increases the informational value of creep experiments, if rigorous test evaluation is done simultaneously on the basis of the functional relationships illustrated in Fig. 4.71.

Various physical-mathematical models have been developed to describe creep behavior over the measured region. They are compiled in, e.g., [4.77] and [4.78]. Most often, Findley’s power law is applied

n 0 tmt (4.155)

m, n materials constant

which is based on a description of the time dependence of experimentally determined measurement data.

A different approach using four parameters is described in [4.77]

G

n G sinh

a

t 1

E t (4.156)

E, G materials parameters for the elastic deformation component A, n materials parameter t test period

that presumes the approximation of stress dependence of the isochronous stress– strain curves obtained in the experiment and then determines the time dependence of the parameters. Creep behavior values obtained in this manner concur in respect to dependencies with the original, experimentally obtained measurement data, in which the creep modulus values Ec(t) are also included. Figure 4.72 illustrates this procedure using as an example the evaluation of systematic creep experiments with PP. The extrapolation of creep data over application-relevant time periods of 10 years requires a basis of experimentally secured creep curves for measurement times of

104 h. However, such tensile-creep experiments generally assume room temperature or standard atmosphere and apply to selected plastics. Under standard atmospheric conditions, extrapolation times of up to twenty years are considered quite realistic,

4.6 Long-Term Static Behavior 177

1.0

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2

0 10 10 10 10 10 10-1 0 1 2 3 4

0� (MPa)

2 4 5

6 8 10

t (h)

2

10 1

8 6

4

2

10 0

2 4 6 810 2 4 6 8 10 0 1

100

10 1

10 2

10 3

104

10 -1

b 5

4

3

2

1

0

10 MPa

8 MPa

6 MPa

2 MPa

4 MPa

5 MPa

10

8

6

4

2

0

3.0 %

2.5 %

2.0 %

1.5 %

1.0 %

0.5 %

� (%

)

t (h)

� (%)

a

dc

� (M

P a )

E (M

P a )

c 0

� (M

P a )

0

t (h)

t (h)

10 10 10 10 10 10-1 0 1 2 3 4

10 10 10 10 10 10-1 0 1 2 3 4

Fig. 4.72: Tensile creep behavior of PP under various loadings: creep curves (a),

isochronous stress–strain diagrams (b), creep diagram (c) and creep modulus curves (d)

assuming of course that material behavior is not significantly affected by aging. A far more critical question is how important the limits of extrapolation are for long-term mechanical behavior under simultaneous temperature and/or environmental loading due to structural material changes in cases of diffusion, hydrolysis, etc. (cf. Chapter 7). In such cases, the expected loading on a plastic component has to be secured by creep experiments under conditions as realistic as possible; for extrapolation, creep experiments over test periods t 2 103 h are regarded as mandatory (Fig. 4.73).

In order to quantify the potential influence of the ambient conditions temperature and environment, it is advisable, parallel to the creep experiments, to store mechanically non-loaded specimens (immersion test) and to test them with regard to mechanical and/or changes in physical-thermal properties at suitably large time intervals.

In order to apply the material data gained from creep experiments, normally a deformation range up to 5 % is considered adequate, in special cases 10 %. For many polymers, especially for semicrystalline thermoplastics, these deformation values lie far below tensile strain at break and fracture strength, so that creep tests do

178 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

10 10 10 10 10 10-1 0 1 2 3 4

b 14

12

8

6

4

0

t (h)

a

t (h)

10 10 10 10 10 10-1 0 1 2 3 4

� (%

)

0 � (MPa)

water 20 °C

23 20 18

15

12

9 6 3

tensile creep strength

wash lye 20 °C

12

9 6 3

15

18

19

20 21�

(% )

10

2

14

12

8

6

4

0

10

2

0 � (MPa)

Fig. 4.73: Creep curves of PP under environmental load in tap water (a) and detergent solution (b)

not require that rupture failure be achieved. Creep-rupture tests represent a special type of creep test for determining tensile creep strength. They should be conceived separately from creep experiments and performed preferably on plastics with low tensile strain at break, e.g., thermosetting mold materials. Deformation measurement is not required; stress-rupture time is the value to be measured.

Since tensile creep strengths are quite prone to error, they have to be determined according to statistical methods of properly designed experiments. Beginning with the assumption of short-term tensile strength, fracture times should be acquired at selected, high loading stresses and at least 3 stress horizons using up to ten specimens, thus securing the shape of the creep curve statistically (Fig. 4.74). Proof of creep strength according to the test principle of the tensile creep test is also used in other test specifications. Here, the proof of stress-cracking resistance under the influence of

� (M

P a

)

10 10 10 10 10 10 1 2 3 4 5 6

t (h)B

� < � < �1 2 3

3

2

1

Fig. 4.74: Determination of the creep-rupture curve (diagram) taking measuring error into

consideration

4.6 Long-Term Static Behavior 179

clamping jig

frame

elongation

specimen

load cell

measurement device

Fig. 4.75: Test arrangement for determining the relaxation behavior of plastics according to DIN 53 441

complex loading conditions (stress level, test temperature, ambient conditions), e.g., according to ISO 6252 (cf. Chapter 7) and by various long-term service-life tests of plastics joints according to DVS guidelines 2203 and 2226, has gained special engineering importance.

Compared to the retardation test under static uniaxial tensile load, the stress relaxation test (cf. Fig. 4.9a) has only secondary significance for actual applications, although the corresponding material parameters are useful for designing bonded joints, for example. According to DIN 53441, a tensile specimen is loaded with a defined deformation which is kept constant over the test period (Fig. 4.75). A time- dependent stress drop occurs due to viscoelastic material behavior of the polymer.

The relaxation modulus is a useful, essential design value, where:

0

r )t(

)t(E (4.157)

To illustrate the analogy between relaxation and creep modulus, Fig. 4.76 shows the dependence of the relaxation modulus Er on loading time using the example of PE- HD.

Since the differences between creep and relaxation behavior are small, creep modulus can be used for approximating calculations [4.78].

180 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

10 10 10 10 10 -1 0 1 2 3

1000

� = 1 %

600

400

200

100

t (h)

� = 2 %

� = 3 %

E (

M P

a )

r

Fig. 4.76: Relaxation modulus of PE-HD as a function of loading duration at T = 23 °C [1.18]

4.6.3 Flexural Creep Test

Creep behavior determination under three-point bend loading is standardized in ISO 899-2. It specifies specimens of the same shape and dimensions as are specified for determining flexural properties according to ISO 178. Under three-point bend loading, the peak in bending moment occurs at the point of application that was described in Chapter 4.3. By contrast to the short-beam test, the change in deflection with time fb (t) is introduced to calculate peripheral fiber strain f (t):

100 L

)t(fh6 )t(

2

b f (4.158)

The statements made in Section 4.6.2 regarding the tensile creep test apply in principle to the performance and evaluation of creep experiments under bending load. Figure 4.77 presents evaluated test results for PVC.

A large amount of practical experience and knowledge in connection with flexural creep behavior is based on the meanwhile withdrawn DIN 54852, which involved three- and four-point flexural loading. Chapter 4.3 covers the advantages and disadvantages of various flexural loads.

Creep fracture tests using three-point bend loading are preferably performed for polymers with low flexural strain at break. Experiments for determining flexural creep strength should be performed analogous to the tensile creep test (cf. Fig. 4.74). However, flexural creep strength curves are not frequently used.

4.6 Long-Term Static Behavior 181

ba

d 4.5

4.0

3.5

3.0

2.5

2.0 10 10 10 10 10 10

-1

t (h)

10 MPa

20 MPa

30 MPa 40 MPa

50 MPa

60 MPa

0 1 2 3 4

t (h)

10 1

80 60

40

20

10 2

10 2 4 6 8 10

�r (%)

100

10 1 10

2

10 3

104

10 -1

2 4

8 6

2.5

2.0

1.5

1.0

0.5

0

60 MPa

50 MPa 40 MPa

10 MPa

20 MPa

30 MPa

10 10 10 10 10 10-1

t (h)

0 1 2 3 4

60

48

36

24

12

0

1.50 %

0.25 %

1.00 %

1.25 %

0.75 %

0.50 %

c

10 10 10 10 10 10 -1

t (h)

0 1 2 3 4

� (%

)

� (M

P a )

E (G

P a )

c 0

� (M

P a )

0

-1 0

Fig. 4.77 Flexural creep behavior of PVC under various loads: creep curves (a), isochronous flexural

stress–peripheral fiber strain diagrams (b), creep diagram (c) and flexural creep modulus curves (d) [4.73]

4.6.4 Creep Compression Test

The creep compression test is used to investigate polymers under long-term compression loading, such as bearing materials, seals, building materials and thermal insulation materials. This test is standardized neither for structurally used thermoplastic and thermosetting polymers, nor for FCM in general, although creep compression tests can be performed quite simply using the equipment for and the analogy of tensile and flexural creep tests.

The specimen shapes specified by DIN EN 826 for the compression test are suitable in principle for determining compression deformation as a function of loading time (creep compression curves). The results from creep compression tests are evaluated and presented analogous to the tensile creep test. Figure 4.78 shows exemplary creep compression curves (a), isochronous compressive stress–compressive strain diagrams (b), creep diagrams (c) and creep compression modulus curves (d) of a PTFE often used as seal and bearing material.

182 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

ba

d 1.0

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2

0 10 10 10 10 10 10

-1

t (h)

0 1 2 3 4

2

0

10 8

4

2

1

6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10

�r (%)

2

10

12.5

10.0

7.5

5.0

2.5

0 10 10 10 10 10 10-1

t (h)

0 1 2 3 4

12.5

10.0

7.5

5.0

2.5

0

c

10 10 10 10 10 10 -1

t (h)

0 1 2 3 4

� (%

)

� (M

P a

) E

(G

P a

) c

0

� (M

P a

) 0

0 1

10 MPa

8 MPa 6 MPa

5 MPa 4 MPa

2 MPa

t (h)

10 0

10 1 10 2

10 3

10 -1

5.0 % 4.0 %

3.0 %

2.0 %

1.0 %

0.5 %

�0 (MPa)

2 4 5

6 8 10

6

Fig. 4.78: Creep compression behavior of PTFE [4.73]

Regardless of the current standards situation, there are product standards for individual material groups that specify test equipment and procedures for determining creep compression behavior, e.g., for insulation materials for the construction industry. Evaluation of long-term creep behavior under compression load of insulation materials for the construction industry is performed according to DIN EN 1606. The principle is based on measurement of specimen deformation (compression strain) in a special test arrangement under constant compression stress and defined conditions of temperature, moisture and time. The various loading steps in the creep test have to be determined either from compression strength m or from compression stress at 10 % compression strain. Creep behavior should be measured at equidistant intervals (e.g., log) over a period of at least 90 days. Essentially, this procedure corresponds to the specifications in ISO 899. Test period is defined by the corresponding product standards. When an appropriate mathematical extrapolation method is used, values can be obtained that are reliable in the long term for up to several times as the test period (e.g., 10 years). In addition to the uniaxial compression test, quality assurance and product certification require parameters for plastics components that take time-dependent behavior under multiaxial loading into consideration. These include, e.g., the vertex compression test on pipe sections to

4.7 Hardness Test Methods 183

establish a minimal creep modulus for pressure pipes and the internal pressure creep rupture test as proof of durability for plastic pipes (cf. Section 11.3, Component Testing).

4.7 Hardness Test Methods

4.7.1 Principles of Hardness Testing

Hardness testing on polymers is based on test methods originally developed for metallic materials, especially for steels, and the material values determined thereby. In 1908, Martens defined the material property technical hardness as resistance against indentation by a harder body; it is a parameter for describing a material and its physical state, respectively. This equally simple and descriptive definition has become standard in spite of a certain fuzziness for practical application [1.38]. In the standardized hardness tests used most often today, a hard indenter is pressed into the surface of the specimens under investigation. A triaxial stress state is thereby formed within the specimen.

The hardness test is among the most often applied methods in mechanical material testing. That is because it can be performed comparatively simply, quickly and, from an equipment point of view, efficiently. Since slight damage to a component surface in the form of one or more relatively small indentations usually has little effect on its function, the hardness test is mentioned among the nearly non-destructive test methods. That makes it possible to test very small components and thin layers that can hardly provide information on the profiles of other properties. This approach is supported by the fact that there are statistically secured correlations between hardness and other mechanical properties, such as yield point or abrasion, at least within one group of materials.

The test methods, individually standardized for particular material groups and areas of application, differ fundamentally with respect to the shape of the indenter (e.g., ball, cone, pyramid), material (stainless steel, hard metal, diamond), load level and loading time, as well as their mode of application (under total test load, after unloading). Hardness values dependent on test methods and test conditions cannot be extrapolated from one to the other, or only to a limited extent. In industrial testing practice, however, a trend can be seen to a few universal procedures.

Hardness testing on plastics is performed taking material-specific behavior into con- sideration. The type of deformation under load can be observed on the indentations, ranging from rubber-elastic (elastomers), viscoelastic-plastic (thermoplastics, e.g.,

184 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

PE-LD) or predominantly plastic (thermosets, even thermoplastics at low temper- atures and e.g. ABS) deformations (Fig. 4.79). Therefore, the following influencing factors have to be noted:

• Nominal test temperature, • Load rise time,

material

behavior

related to

deformation

and time

indentations

after

unloading

mostly

plastic

viscoelastic -

plastic

rubber-

elastic

timet t 1

d e

fo rm

a ti o

n

2 t t 1 2

t t 1 2

Fig. 4.79: Relationship between material behavior and indentation shape

Table 4.8: Overview of conventional hardness test methods for plastics and rubber (see also guideline VDI/VDE 2616 Part 2)

Measurement under load Measurement after unloading

IIndentation depth measurment Hardness value from the indentation surface

Ball indentation hardness

ISO 2039-1 Vickers hardness

IRHD-hardness ISO 48 Buchholz indentation resistance ISO 2815

Rockwell hardness ISO 2039-2 Hardness value from depth of indentation

Shore hardness DIN 53505 Rockwell hardness ASTM D 785

Barcol hardness DIN EN 59 Hardness value from the ratio of test force to projected area of indentation surface

Determination of indentation diagonal

Vickers hardness under load

Special testing methods

Ultrasonic contact impedance (UCI) process

Knoop hardness

4.7 Hardness Test Methods 185

• Full load duration and • Prehistory of the material (processing and storage).

Moreover, the test result is influenced by orientation, residual stresses and morphology (supermolecular structure, fillers and reinforcements).

In principle, it is possible to measure indentation magnitude after unloading or under load (Table 4.8) the latter method being preferable for plastics and, when testing elastomers, unavoidable due to their rubber-elastic redeformation.

4.7.2 Conventional Hardness Testing Methods

4.7.2.1 Test Methods for Determining Hardness Values after Unloading

Vickers Hardness

The Vickers procedure known in metals testing can also be applied to plastics. A square-based pyramid with an angle of 136° between opposite surfaces serves as the indenter. Loading has to be adapted to the particular geometrical and morphological circumstances; testing is generally done at small forces 5 N. The length of the indentational diagonal is defined as measured and the mean indentation diagonal is calculated which is required for calculating Vickers hardness HV according to Eq. 4.159.

2d

F 8544.1

A

F HV (4.159)

HV Vickers hardness value in N mm-2 F test load (force) in N A area of indentation in mm2 d arithmetic mean of the two diagonals in mm

The diagonals are normally measured after unloading by light microscopy; however, they can also be measured under load [4.79]. In this case, the specimen surface and with it the indentation diagonals are observed through the diamond indenter; this allows to make statements on creep behavior virtually in real-time.

The Vickers procedure is not standardized for plastics, but has achieved special significance as a procedure for micro and low-load hardness testing (cf. Section 4.7.3).

186 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

Knoop Hardness

The Knoop procedure is similar in principle to the Vickers procedure, but exhibits two fundamental differences. For one thing, a strongly anisotropical rhombic-based pyramid with a diagonal ratio of 7.114 : 1 is used as the indenter; for another, Knoop hardness HK is calculated with the aid of the projected area of indentation, in contrast to Vickers hardness, in which indentation surface is used for calculation. HK is calculated using the length of the long indentation diagonal (Eq. 4.160).

2l

F 23.14

A

F HK (4.160)

HK Knoop hardness in N mm-2 F test load (force) in N A projected area of indentation surface in mm2 l length of the long indentation diagonal in mm

Since indentation depth is only approx. 1/30 of the long diagonal, this method is especially suited for testing very thin small assembly units and narrow, near-edge areas as well as plastic foils and coatings. It should be noted that the area tested has to be extremely flat to accomodate indenter geometry. Knoop hardness is especially suited for detecting material anisotropies by examining the directional dependence of the hardness values obtained. Figure 4.80 shows the influence of orientation on indentation geometry, illustrating the difference between Knoop and Vickers procedures. In oriented materials, Vickers indentation is no longer symmetric. The resulting long diagonal lies perpendicular, the short one parallel to the direction of orientation. This anisotropy develops after unloading, since the stresses under the indenter are greater in the direction of orientation than perpendicular to it, which

orientation

Vickers

Knoop

Fig. 4.80: Influence of orientation on indentation geometry in Vickers and Knoop hardness tests

4.7 Hardness Test Methods 187

is why this direction rebounds more strongly. Thus higher hardness values are obtained in the direction of orientation than perpendicular to it.

Other conditions are present in the unsymmetrical Knoop pyramid, since the strain field under the indenter is no longer symmetrical; instead, higher strains occur in the direction of the short main axis [4.80]. If the long main axis lies parallel to orientation, maximum strain lies perpendicular to the preferred orientation of macromolecules, leading to increased indentation, i.e., lower hardness values. If the long main axis is oriented perpendicular to the preferred orientation of the macromolecules, maximum strain occurs parallel to molecular orientation, resulting in reduced indentation. Due to these relationships, Knoop hardness reacts more sensitively to material anisotropies than Vickers hardness.

Rockwell Hardness Testing (scales R, L, M, E, K)

Following the wide-spread Rockwell hardness testing of metallic materials, balls with various diameters (scale R: 12.7 mm, scales L and M: 6.35 mm, scales E and K: 3.175 mm) are preloaded with F0. The indentation depth thus achieved serves as a reference level. Due to preloading, surface effects are reduced and defined conditions are obtained for the contact between indenter and specimen, or test indentation. Following a preload exposure time of 10 s, additional test load F1 is applied and, subsequent to a holding time of 15 s, removed. The remaining indentation depth h under effective preload is measured and Rockwell hardness HR can be determined according to the definition given in Eq. 4.161.

mm 002.0/h130HR (4.161) h indentation depth in mm

Rockwell tests using scales R, L, M, E and K cover a wide range of hardness, thereby registering only the remaining deformation component. Unfortunately, the results obtained using different scales lack comparability.

4.7.2.2 Test Methods for Determining Hardness Values under Load

Ball Indentation Hardness

This procedure uses a hardened steel ball 5 mm in diameter which, after being preloaded, is loaded with additional test loads of 49 N, 132 N, 358 N or 961 N (Fig. 4.81). The resulting indentation depth has to range from 0.15 to 0.35 mm in order to ensure a nearly linear relationship between indentation diameter and

188 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

1 2

3

4

specimen

support

steel ball

dial gauge

load step

frameF

h h (

t)

0

F0 F0 + F

D Fig. 4.81: Ball indentation procedure (D - ball diameter, F0 - preliminary test load (preload),

h0 - indentation depth after preloading, F - additional test load, h - indentation depth)

indentation depth, i.e., identical surface pressure. Ball compression hardness HB is determined following a holding time of 30 s:

0.04)(h

F HB (4.162)

prefactor: = 0.0535 mm-1 F total test load (force) in N h actual penetration in mm

The test result is presented in the form HB 132 / 30 = 20 N mm-2, in which the numerical values are stated in this order: additional test load in N, holding time in s and hardness value.

Ball indentation hardness is a measurement method under acting test load that includes elastic and plastic deformation components and is suited for testing inhomogenous and/or anisotropic materials due to its relatively large test indentations.

Table 4.9 lists ball indentation hardness values for various molding compounds.

Ball Indentation Hardness IRHD

This test method was specially developed for soft and medium hard rubber and very soft thermoplastics such as PVC-P. A fundamental distinction has to be made in ball indentation hardness IRHD between method N (normal test, method H (test for high hardness), method L (test for low hardness) and method M (microhardness). Essentially, theses methods differ with respect to the diameter of the indenting ball and load level, whereby the parameters selected have to suit the particular case of application. Ball diameters range from 2.5 mm in method N, 1 mm in method H,

4.7 Hardness Test Methods 189

5 mm in method L and 0.395 mm in method M. After preload has been applied, additional test load is applied to a ball-shaped indenter to create a reference plane: 5.4 N in methods N, H and L and 0.145 N in method M. After 30 s, the additional indentation depth is measured under total test load.

For the particular indentation depth achieved, the corresponding International Rubber Hardness Degree (IRHD) can be read from tables. The hardness scale is selected such that "0" corresponds to the hardness of a material with a Young's modulus of zero and "100" to the hardness of a materials with an infinitely large modulus.

- Rockwell Hardness

In contrast to the Rockwell hardness procedures described above, indentation depth is measured in this procedure under total test load (F0 + F1), thus registering elastic and plastic deformation components. It follows from the definition of -Rockwell hardness HR (Eq. 4.163) and the permissible range of indentation depth of up to 0.5 mm, that at indentation depths > 0.3 mm, negative hardness values are obtained that are permissible.

mm 002.0/h150HR (4.163) h depth of indentation measured under total test load in mm

Due to the 12.7 mm (1/2 in.) ball diameter used, expansive specimen areas are covered.

Shore Hardness

In this procedure, a truncated cone (Shore A) or a truncated cone with a spherical cap (Shore D), is forced into the specimen by a spring (Fig. 4.82). Indentation depth serves as a measure of hardness, whereby Shore hardness is defined as the difference

Shore A

a

Δ l

h

F F

Shore D

a

Δ l

h

Fig. 4.82: Shore A and Shore D hardness tests

190 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

Table 4.9: Hardness values of plastics according to VDI/VDE 2616 (> materials hardness is greater than measurable with this method; < materials hardness is smaller than measurable with this method)

Shore hardness H

(N mm-2) A D HR Barcol hardness

PS 145 to 195 > 80 100 to 110 20 to 30

PMMA 185 to 210 > 87 to 88 110 50 to 55

PC 115 to 135 > 82 to 85 95 to 100 10 to 20

PVC-U 95 to 145 > 75 to 80 75 to 95 to 10

ABS 95 to 120 > 75 to 80 85 to 95 < to 15

PE-LD 10 to 25 95 to > 40 to 50 < to -110 <

PE-HD 40 to 65 > 50 to 70 25 to 55 <

PP 40 to 80 > 65 to 75 30 to 70 <

POM 135 to 175 > 79 to 82 95 to 105 < to 15

PA 66 120 > 80 95 8

PA 610 90 > 78 80 <

PA 612 105 to 120 > 75 to 80 95 <

PA 66/GF 230 > 85 115 40

PP/GF 75 to 115 > 70 to 75 65 to 90 <

UP/GF 300 to 475 > > > 57 to 77

between the number 100 and indentation depth under total test load in mm divided by the scale value 0.025. Shore A is used for soft rubbers and very soft plastics such as plastized PVC; Shore D for hard rubber and thermoplastics such as PTFE (examples in Table 4.9). One advantage of the Shore procedure is its mobile application capability, since hand-held devices are often used.

Barcol Hardness

Barcol hardness is especially suited for testing fiber reinforced thermosets and hard thermoplastics. The Barcol test device is designed exclusively as a hand-held device for use both in laboratories and in any position, including overhead. Test load is applied to the indenter (truncated ball of hardened steel) by a spring. From the indentation depth under load registered by a dial gauge, Barcol hardness is calculated according to Eq. 4.164.

mm 0076.0/h100hardnessBarcol (4.164) h indentation depth measured under load in mm

4.7 Hardness Test Methods 191

Compared to the Shore D hardness test, this procedure has the advantage that it can test plastics of even greater hardness.

4.7.2.3 Special Testing Methods

In addition to the test methods of hardness measurement after unloading and under load, a number of special methods have been developed for engineering applications in which the hardness value is partially or completely determined using different physical parameters.

VDI/VDE guideline 2616 lists more than 30 special methods related to hardness tests on thin layers and coatings in the aerospace and automobile industries. These include pendulum methods for determining “pendulum hardness”, scratch methods for determining “scratch hardness”, as well as special indentation methods. The disadvantage of these methods lies in the fact that they provide no standardized hardness values.

Wide acceptance has been gained by scratch hardness test procedures which, by using a gouging or scratching principle, continuously record the indentation depth of a needle or hardened ball in translational motion either visually or via the measurement of force and indentation depth. Loading is either set or altered in steps. Among the test methods with subsequent visual evaluation are the scratch test with an Erichsen hardness test bar and the cross-cut test. Indentation depth is continuously recorded by special auxiliary equipment in material testing machines or external testing devices (scratch-indenter tester).

The UCI (Ultrasonic Contact Impedance) procedure is another special method for hardness testing. Here a piezoelectric transducer excites a staff-shaped resonator with a Vickers diamond to oscillate freely at a particular frequency. During indentation, the staff no longer oscillates freely, and the occurring resonance shift represents a quantity for the contact surface. The softer the material, the larger the indentation surface and the greater the frequency change. The E modulus and Poisson ratio of the material to be tested and the diamond must be known in order to measure a hardness value. The measured hardness value represents a reference value that has to be identified by its method of measurement whenever stated.

4.7.2.4 Comparability of Hardness Values

As shown by the examples mentioned, hardness measurement methods for plastics differ with respect both to the indenters, test loads, preloads and test times used, as well as to the indentation sizes (under load or after unloading). In order to perform

192 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

S h

o re

A

120

80

40

0 100 200 300 400

HB (Nmm ) -2

100

80

60

40

20 0 10 20 30 40 50

Shore D

ba

H R

Fig. 4.83: Diagram of the relationships between ball indentation hardness HB and Rockwell hardness HR (a) as well as Shore A and Shore D (b)

material comparisons, as well as to save time and expense, it is often necessary to convert the hardness values obtained by one particular method into another hardness scale. This is also the case when available data banks are used for selecting materials and designing components without performing tests on the material. Due to the viscoelastic behavior of plastic materials, two hardness values obtained with different methods can be converted to each other given the following conditions [4.81]:

• Both hardness values have to be determined either under load or after unloading. • The same indentation depth–load functions must apply to both indenters under

the given geometric dimensions. • Loading times must be approximately equal.

In place of identical indentation depth–load functions, similar indentation depth– surface functions can suffice for conversion. Empirical conversion to different hardness scales is possible on this basis.

Between ball indentation hardness and Rockwell hardness relate to each other by (cf. Fig. 4.83a) [4.81, 4.82]:

23.1)HR150(

18279 HB (4.165)

Shore A and Shore D relate to one another as follows (cf. Fig. 4.83b) [4.82, 4.83]:

12.2D Shore

1409 1.116A Shore (4.166)

4.7 Hardness Test Methods 193

4.7.3 Instrumented Hardness Test

4.7.3.1 Fundamentals of Measurement Methodology

To enhance the information gained from hardness measurements on plastics, it is necessary to record both the force required by the indenter to penetrate the specimen and the indentation depth over the entire indenting process [4.84]. For this purpose the indentation process is recorded and information on the viscoelastic-plastic behavior of the polymer is derived by evaluating loading and unloading curves. The testing cycle can be performed either load or indentation depth controlled, or at a constant indentation strain rate (dh/dt )/h. Various indenters are used: rectangular- based Vickers or Knoop pyramids, triangular-based Berkovich pyramids or so-called “cube corners”, conical tips or even specially rounded indenters.

In addition to the ease of automating the procedure, the advantage of instrumented hardness tests lies especially in the comparability of all materials within one hardness scale. Figure 4.84 illustrates the gradation of load ranges and the relationship between Martens hardness and indentation depth for various material groups.

Hardness values, indentation modulus, strain hardening exponents and viscoelastic properties can be measured with the instrumented indentation test. Also measurable are the fracture toughness of brittle materials as well as the influence of residual stress in solid material or thin layers, or the elastic behavior (spring constant) of miniaturized components. The presence of orientations can also be detected [4.85].

10 0

10 -1

10 -2

10 -3

10 -4

10 -5

10 -6

10 0

10 1

10 2

10 3

10 4

HM (MPa)

h (

m m

)

polymers

non-ferrous- metals steels

hard metals ceramics

rubber

2 N > F and h > 200 nm

h < 200 nm

2 N < F < 30 kN

macrohardness

microhardness

nanohardness

0.02 N

lo a d

F

Fig. 4.84: Definition of test load ranges for instrumented hardness tests

194 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

indenter

specimen

load cell adapter

measurement

traverse adapter

specimen

frame

load cell

indenter socket

support

distance

Fig. 4.85: Instrumented hardness measuring devices : for installing in a materials testing machine (left

hand) and a self-contained unit (right hand)

Expanding hardness testing into the area of smallest test loads and indentation depths (h < 200 nm), the so-called nano region, provides experimental access to structural elements and their interfaces with the aim of creating quantitative morphology– hardness correlations. Section 12.3 treats the experimental possibilities for demonstrating interface adhesion by nanoindentation testing.

Figure 4.85 shows a structural diagram of a device for instrumented hardness testing in the microhardness range, which can either be installed in a material testing machine for high stiffness, or is commercially available as a self-contained unit (e.g., Fischerscope®, Fig. 4.86). For the nano range, industrial-size devices, so-called nanoindenters, have been developed. Their schematic structure is comparable with that of microhardness test devices, but the demands placed on their force and indentation depth resolution are significantly higher.

With the instrumented hardness testing devices illustrated in Fig. 4.85, the following functional dependencies can be measured:

Fig. 4.86: Fischerscope® H100C XYp microhardness test station

4.7 Hardness Test Methods 195

• Load as a function of indentation depth during load increase, • Load and indentation depth as functions of time for determining relaxation and

creep behavior • Elastic recovery during reloading.

This enables the separation of the plastic and elastic components of total deformation during hardness measurement.

4.7.3.2 Material Parameters Derived from Instrumented Hardness Tests

There are various approaches for evaluating load–indentation depth curves, all with the goal of describing material behavior precisely and/or acquiring characteristic values [4.86]. Quantities to be measured include: maximum load Fmax and maximum indentation depth hmax from the load curve, point of intersection of the tangent to curve b with the indentation depth-axis hr and indentation modulus, as well as deformation energy components from the load–indentation depth curve (Fig. 4.87). The area between indentation function and h-axis is the total deformation energy of indentation Wtotal.

hr

hmaxhp

S

h

F

Fmax

Wplast

a

b

hc

Welast

Fig. 4.87: Load-indentation depth curve (loading curve a, unloading curve b)

Due to plastic deformation, the unloading function does not pass through the origin, so that there is a difference between indentation and unloading, i.e., plastic energy Wplast. The elastic energy is the difference: Welast = Wtotal – Wplast.

Martens Hardness

Martens hardness is measured under applied test load F and contains the elastic and plastic deformation energy of indentation. It is defined for Vickers and Berkovich

196 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

indenters. Martens hardness HM is the quotient of test load F and the contact area calculated from the corresponding indentation depth h:

2h43.26

F HM (4.167)

F test load in N h indentation depth under applied test load in mm

Plastic Hardness and Indentation Hardness

Plastic hardness Hplast and indentation hardness HIT are measured using maximum load and applying tangents to the unloading curve. They are a measure for resistance to permanent deformation or damage.

2 r

max plast

h43.26

F H (4.168)

Fmax maximum load in N hr point of intersection of the tangent to unloading curve b at Fmax with the indentation depth-axis in mm

At the transition to smaller indentation depths, the contact area changes continuously and with it the contact stiffness dF /dh. This necessitates a correction made by introducing the so-called projected contact area Ap. So-called indentation hardness is the quotient of maximum acting test load Fmax and projected contact area Ap between indenter and specimen.

p

max IT

A

F H (4.169)

Fmax maximum applied load in N Ap projected (cross-sectional) area of contact between indenter and specimen determined from the load–

indentation depth curve and the area function of the indenter in mm2

The projected contact area Ap is a function of contact depth hc (Eq. 4.170) and presumes knowledge of the indenter area function.

rmaxmaxc hhhh (4.170)

hc depth of indenter contact with specimen at Fmax in mm correction factor, dependent on indenter geometry (Vickers and Berkovich: = 0.75)

For indentation depths h > 6 μm, a first approximation to the projected area, Ap, is given by the theoretical shape of the indenter. For a standard Vickers indenter, that is:

2cp h50.24A (4.171)

4.7 Hardness Test Methods 197

For indentation depths h < 6 μm, the area function of the indenter cannot be assumed to be that of the theoretical shape, since all pointed indenters will have some degree of rounding at the tip and spherically-ended indenters (spherical and conical) are unlikely to have a uniform radius. The determination of the exact area function for a given indenter is required for indentation depths < 6 μm, but is beneficial for larger indentation depths.

Elastic Indentation Modulus

The elastic indentation modulus EIT is measured from the slope in the tangent used for calculating indentation hardness.

i

2 i

r

2 S

IT

E

1

E

1

1 E (4.172)

dh

dF

A2 E

p

r (4.173)

S Poisson´s ratio of the specimen

i Poisson´s ratio of the indenter (for diamond 0.07) Er reduced modulus of indentation contact Ei modulus of indenter (for diamond 1.14 106 N mm

-2) Ap projected contact area, value of indenter area function at contact depth

Due to differences in the type of loading and measuring methods, there is no correspondence with the E modulus from the tensile test. There is additional influence on measurement results when bulges and sink holes develop in the material surrounding indentations.

Plastic and Elastic Components of Indentation Work

The total mechanical work of indentation Wtotal is expended only partially for plastic deformation Wplast. The remainder is released during the unloading process as elastic reverse deformation work of indentation Welast. The correlation

IT = Welast /Wtotal 100 % (4.174)

contains material information suitable for characterizing deformation behavior. The plastic component Wplast /Wtotal follows as 100 % – IT .

198 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

4.7.3.3 Examples of Applications

The parameters of the instrumented hardness test describe basic material behavior and are indicators of changes in materials. Their structural sensitivity is illustrated by the example of PP with two different crystalline structures. A semicrystalline, isotactic PP serves as the model material in which the monoclinic phase and a trigonal phase arise parallel during solidification. The phase exhibits low stiffness and hardness, as well as higher ductility than the phase. Toughness is increased under quasi-static as well as impact loading [4.87], i.e., this opens up new areas of application for nucleated PP materials. However, it must be noted that -PP melts at lower temperatures, and its heat-distortion resistance is also lower than that of

-PP. The load–indentation depth curves presented in Fig. 4.88 illustrate their differences in mechanical behavior. Greater indentation depth and indentation depth increase under maximum load as well as a less slope of the unloading curve of

0 100 200 300 0

0.05

0.10

0.15

0.20

h (nm)

F (m

N )

100 μm

Fig. 4.88: Load–indentation depth curve gathered from the and modification of PP with holding

time in maximum loading; spherulitic supermolecular structure of PP: the phase appears bright due to its negative birefringence

the phase are indicators of lower hardness, stronger creep tendency and lower stiffness compared to the phase. This may be due to greater chain mobility, as could be shown by investigations of mechanical loss factor tan [4.86]. The values for indentation hardness HIT and indentation modulus EIT determined from load– indentation depth curves are listed in Table 4.10.

4.7 Hardness Test Methods 199

Table 4.10: Indentation hardness HIT and indentation modulus EIT for - and -PP

HIT (MPa) EIT (MPa)

-phase 108 9 2024 54

-phase 98 11 1943 147

The supermolecular structure of thermoplastics is strongly influenced by their processing conditions and subsequent heat treatments. This is especially the case for semicrystalline polymers. That is why changes in the crystalline phase caused by heat treatment (tempering) and their effects on mechanical properties are quite interesting from an engineering point of view. In order to measure the influence of tempering temperature on crystalline structure, PP was subjected to temperatures of Ta = 80, 100, 120, 140 and 150 °C for one hour. The lamellae thickness distributions taken from melt curves using the Alberola method [4.88] (Fig. 4.89b) are suitable for describing changes occurring in the crystalline phase. The distribution peak shifts from approx. 18 to 19 nm in the original state to approx. 21 nm for PP tempered at140 and 150 °C. Simultaneously, the segment of small lamellae clearly decreases, since the lamellae melt and the molten material absorbs onto the remaining, thicker lamellae. The increased chain movement in the amorphous phase effects additional

H (M

P a )

0 50 100 150 100 1500

2000

2500

3000

T (°C)a

5 10 15 20 25

initial state

140 °C

150 °C

I (nm)theo

E

H IT

120

140

160

180

200

IT

b

a

E (M

P a )

IT

IT

Fig. 4.89: Correlation between parameters gathered in instrumented indentation tests, and lamellae thickness distribution in PP: indentation hardness HIT and indentation modulus EIT as functions of temper temperature Ta (a) and lamellae thickness distributions measured by DSC [4.88] at various temper temperatures (b)

200 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

growth of smaller lamellae. The lamellae thicknesses ltheo of PP tempered at 140 °C are distributed bimodally (Fig. 4.89b), at Ta = 150 °C the distribution curve is relatively narrow. Hardly any lamellae thicknesses less than 14 nm occur, whereas at Ta = 140 °C and in the original state, thinner lamellae are present. Indentation modulus and hardness do not increase until temperatures rise above 100 °C (Fig. 4.89a), i.e., only tempering temperatures that effect a change in crystalline structure can lead to changes in characteristic mechanical property values.

4.7.4 Correlating Microhardness with Yield Stress and Fracture Toughness

Information on the relationship between hardness and other mechanical parameters, such as strength, E modulus and toughness is of enormous practical importance both from the point of view of testing and for understanding macroscopic material behavior. Experimentally discovered empirical relationships enable efficient quality assurance for materials and components. However, it must be noted that these empirical correlations are only valid within particular classes of materials. An estimation of macroscopic yield stress or yield point is known in the hardness testing of metallic materials using the Tabor relation [4.89]. For theoretical polymer material behavior, linear proportionality has the form:

� (MPa)y

H V

(M P

a )

PVC + 35 % DOP PE-LD

PTFE

PE-HD

PP

CA

ABS

ABS

PVC

PC

PPO POM

PS POM-Co

SAN PMMA

250

200

150

100

50

0 0 20 40 60 80 100

HV 2.33 �y

P V

C +

2 5

% D

O P

P A

6 ;

9 %

H

O 2

P A

6 ;

3 %

H O

2

PA6; 0.4 % H O2

Fig. 4.90: Relation between Vickers hardness (test load 2 N) and yield stress derived by tensile test

4.7 Hardness Test Methods 201

C pH

Y

m

Y

(4.175)

pm Indenter/specimen indentation pressure acting perpendicular to contact area (pm = 1.08 HV for a Vickers pyramid)

C Proportionality factor (C 3)

The Tabor equation is the fundamental relation for presenting the relationship between hardness and yield point. Weiler [4.82] determined the empirical relationship between separately measured Vickers hardness and yield stress under tensile load for a number of thermoplastics (Fig. 4.90). The relation HV 2.33 y is derived for the range of materials listed in Fig. 4.90.

When considering such relationships, fundamental methodological and material- related aspects have to be kept in mind. Equation 4.175 defines the relationship between compressive stress at yield and hardness, i.e., correlations between yield stresses from the tensile test and hardness values must lead to deviations from C = 3, since deformation behavior changes due to the emergence of a hydrostatic component under compression loading. This is illustrated in Fig. 4.91 using stress– strain diagrams in tensile and compression tests on the example of E/P copolymers.

� (MPa)y

H (M

P a

)

60

40

20

0 0 20 40 60 80 100

60

40

20

0 0 10 20 30

150

100

50

0 0 20 40 60

� (%)

H = 3.05 �y

H = 1.75 �y

tension

compression

0 mol.-% ethylene 4 mol.-% ethylene 6 mol.-% ethylene 8 mol.-% ethylene

� (M

P a

)

� (M

P a

)

IT

� (%)

a b

c

0 mol.-% ethylene 4 mol.-% ethylene 6 mol.-% ethylene 8 mol.-% ethylene

Fig. 4.91: Tensile stress–tensile strain (a) and compression stress–compression strain diagrams (b) for

E/P copolymers with differing ethylene content; correlation between indentation hardness HIT and yield stress or compressive stress at yield y (c)

202 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

a 0.050

0.045

0.040 0 2 4 6 8

ethylene content (mol.-%) H / E IT

3.0

2.5

2.0

1.5

1.0 0.044 0.046 0.048 0.050

b

IT

H

/ E

IT IT

J

(

N m

m )

IdS T

-1

in c re

a s e

o f

p la

s ti c it y

Fig. 4.92: Dependence of quotient HIT/EIT on ethylene content (a) and relationship between resistance

to unstable crack propagation JId ST and quotient HIT/EIT (b) for E/P copolymers

The corresponding values for yield stress and compressive stress at yield are presented in Fig. 4.91c in correlation to indentation hardness. Clear differences become obvious between tensile load (HIT = 3.05 y) and compression load (HIT = 1.75 y) that can be found in the literature [4.85] for PE materials as well. In cases of elastic–plastic material behavior, the relation to the E modulus must also be considered in addition to the correlation between hardness and yield point. It is generally the case that smaller H/E values mean higher plasticity connected to higher toughness values. In evaluation of the results presented in Fig. 4.91, Fig. 4.92a shows that the quotient HIT /EIT of statistical E/P copolymers decreases with increasing ethylene content. For the JId

ST values (cf. Section 5.4.2.4) measured by instrumented notched Charpy impact test under impact loading, an increase in toughness is observed with increasing ethylene content. In connection with Fig. 4.92a, this means that the smaller the HIT /EIT, the greater the resistance to unstable crack propagation (Fig. 4.92b) [4.86].

A relation has been proposed by Studman [4.99] (Eq. 4.176), based on a model by Johnson [4.91], that enables evaluation of yield stress values with the aid of experimentally measured hardness and E modulus under compression load. This model has proven advantageous when no values can be obtained from the compression stress–compression strain curve, or when these are not experimentally accessible. Equation 4.176 makes clear that yield stress is essentially determined by hardness value; the E modulus is effective only as a corrective factor in the logarithmic term.

4.8 Friction and Wear 203

� (MPa)y

H V

(M P

a )

0 0 20 40 60 80

PE-HD

PP PVC

PMMA

200

150

100

50

PS

Fig. 4.93: Dependence of Vickers hardness under load HV on compression yield stress y

yy

m

3

tanE ln1

3

2 5.0

p (4.176)

contact angle between specimen and indenter ( = 19.7° for a Vickers indenter)

Figure 4.93 illustrates the relationship between hardness under load from the instrumented hardness test [4.92] and yield stress determined by Eq. 4.176 and given the E modulus under compression load for selected thermoplastics. The relationship between hardness and yield stress is described with reference to Eq. 4.175 independent of the material by the relation HV/ y = 2.5.

For calculating yield stress values, the physically relevant values from instrumented hardness tests are to be preferred over those measured conventionally, due to visco- elastic-plastic material behavior that can lead to considerable scattering among conventionally measured hardness values [4.92].

4.8 Friction and Wear

4.8.1 Introduction

Polymers are used increasingly for tribologically stressed components, whereby metallic bearings, gear wheels or sliding elements are replaced by plastic components. The fact that plastics are often rather economical to produce, especially in very complex shapes with good functional integration, explains this trend.

204 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

These polymeric materials are utilized mostly as functionally optimized, i.e., filled composite materials. In order to provide the required properties, reinforcements in the form of particles or fibers and internal lubricants, such as graphite or polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), have to be compounded into the polymeric material. If to the application involves abrasive loading, it may necessary to add hard ceramic particles as fillers to the material. The type of material modification varies widely depending on the ultimate application.

Among polymers in tribologically loaded components, a fundamental distinction is made between slide bearings made from plastics and components with additional, tribologically optimized properties. Plastics slide bearings are subdivided into polymer-coated bearings with metallic supports and solid plastic bearings. Examples for the use of polymers in slide bearing applications for the automotive industry include bearings for shock absorbers, grooved belt wheels in components such as ignitions, alternators or diesel injection pumps. In all these areas, high wear resistance is required at low friction coefficients and ever higher surrounding temperatures. Fundamentally different demands are made on materials that are used, for example, as roller coatings in paper machines or calenders. To be sure, tribological loading is again involved, but here the goal is rather to obtain abrasive wear resistance. This is also the case when designing lubricated pump bearings that must continue to function under extremely abrasive conditions.

The variety of final applications mentioned for plastics and composite materials in tribological applications is an indication of the resulting complexity among the required test methods. No single test method is capable of providing information for prediction and comparison under all different use conditions. Instead, the test conditions for these tribological applications have to be adapted as closely as possible to the ultimate use conditions. Such adaptation has to be done with respect to various criteria. First, the ambient medium must be the same as in actual use. Many plastics are utilized dry and unlubricated; other applications work in the presence of oil or water. This has to be considered when specifying test conditions. Another essential influencing factor is the material and surface structure of bodies encountered by the component. Yet another important point is the mechanical load collective, i.e., the pressure on the bearing material and the occurring sliding velocity. The result of both is an increase in thermal loading in the slide contact area. Besides the slide velocity of counterbodies, the type of relative motion has to be considered. In many cases, continuous slide is involved, such as for a PC ventilator bearing; in other cases, an oscillating relative motion may be involved, such as when used in a shock absorber. The last overriding influencing factor in tribological material testing is the mesh geometry of both friction surfaces and the contact geometry resulting from it. When a spherical surface touches a plane surface, point contact must be presumed for a first

4.8 Friction and Wear 205

approximation. If a cylinder slides on a plane, line contact takes place. When two planes slide against each other, planar contact is made. There is no clear distinction between these fundamental conditions of meshing. For instance, line contact transitions into planar contact in the case of hole faces of a slide bearing. Actual contact area changes with increasing wear.

The following provides a list of the possible material modifications and the various available tribological methods for testing and evaluating. Corresponding test standards are listed at the end.

4.8.2 Fundamentals of Friction and Wear

The science of friction and wear, including lubrication, concerns itself with surfaces acting on each other in relative motion and can be subsumed under the concept of tribology. Physical and chemical processes as well as mechanical and design aspects are involved. It must be remembered that friction and wear properties cannot simply be assigned to a material, but that their properties are dependent on the particular overall system (tribosystem). By tribosystem, we mean all the technical systems in which friction and wear processes take place [4.93]. These are mainly characterized by their conditions under use. For polymeric materials, bearing load, slide velocity, temperature in use and counterbodies have special significance [4.94, 4.95].

Besides system parameters, the tribological behavior of a polymer material is also strongly influenced by its microstructure. This includes molecular structure and degree of crystallinity (in thermoplastics) on one hand, and process-related structure features (morphology) on the other. Moreover, factors such as fiber orientation, filler content and filler distribution can have effects on tribological properties when various fillers and reinforces are added to a polymer matrix [4.96 – 4.100].

Due to the variety of influencing factors, the behavior of one tribosystem usually cannot be extrapolated to another. Thus, if no measurement values are available for the specific application conditions, the tribological behavior of a material can only be estimated using test results obtained under the same or similar conditions. Reliable statements can only be made by testing the case of application [4.101].

4.8.2.1 Frictional Forces

Frictional force is defined as the force that counteracts the relative motion of bodies in contact with one another. In order to maintain the motion of bodies against each other, a force FR is required for overcoming friction. According to Amonton and

206 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

Coulomb, FR is independent of contact area, but proportional to the acting normal force FN at which both bodies press against each other (Eq. 4.176).

NR FF (4.177)

coefficient of friction

As normal force increases, the pressing bodies hook into each other, thus increasing the frictional force. This so-called law of friction holds in principle for plastics as well, regardless of whether a system with one or two plastic friction couples is involved. Nonetheless, analysis is confronted by considerable problems, since heat and deformations, as well as further ambient influences on the frictional process, such as moisture and oxidation, can hardly be disentangled. The relation, however, is considered a good approximation in all cases [1.17, 4.101].

4.8.2.2 Temperature Increase Resulting from Friction

During the frictional process, the work of friction is partially transformed into heat energy (frictional heat). The increase in heat content of the bodies leads to a rise in temperature. This temperature increase T is especially dependent on the relative velocity between the base body and its counterbody (slide velocity), as well as on normal force FN. It can be estimated using the following relation 4.93, 4.101 :

RvFT N (4.178)

whereby R represents a thermal resistance parameter. This is determined as a function of cross-sectional surface A of the heat transfer paths n, their lengths l and their specific thermal conductivity :

1in1i i )l/()A/1(R (4.179)

Frictional heat can lead to the softening of materials, subsequent creep and even to surface melting. This mechanism can be readily observed on polymeric materials. The mechanical properties of polymeric materials, especially thermoplastics, can change substantially with increasing temperature. Moreover, temperature increases are responsible for changes in hardness under tribological loading, i.e., hardness decreases considerably with increasing temperature. On the other hand, friction- dependent temperature increase in surface areas is itself dependent on hardness. In consequence of temperature increases, the morphology and/or structure of polymeric materials can change too.

4.8 Friction and Wear 207

4.8.2.3 Wear as a System Characteristic

By wear we generally mean the progressive loss of material from the surface of a solid body occurring as a result of physical-chemical processes generated by contact and motion relative to a solid, fluid or gaseous counterbody. This can change the shape and mass of a body.

Measurable wear quantities can be subdivided into direct, specific and indirect measured quantities. The specific measurable quantities include, among others, “linear abrasion rate”, also known as (linear) “wear depth” or “depth wear rate”, and specific wear rate.

It must be noted that friction and wear values represent loss quantities that generally cannot simply be assigned to one material, but always have to be considered in relationship to the overall system. By contrast, typical material parameters, such as E modulus, tensile strength, yield point or fracture toughness can be assigned to a material and be directly transferred to the same material in another system. Under tribological loading, however, such a transfer of test results is possible only within very narrow limits. Wear is therefore termed a system characteristic and not a material property [4.93 – 4.95].

4.8.2.4 Wear Mechanisms and Formation of Transfer Film

Wear of polymeric materials can be distinguished by various wear mechanisms explained in the following [4.95, 4.101, 4.102].

In adhesion, the material from one friction partner sticks to the surface of the other partner and is subsequently separated from its base body. Adhesion takes the form of fretting, pitting, cusps and materials transfer. It is the mechanism that appears most often when the counterbody is not particularly rough.

Abrasion means that micro-roughnesses of the harder counterbody plow through softnesses on the other, removing material by microcutting or microcracking. Scratches, grooves, troughs or waves result. Abrasive wear thus occurs especially by rough counterbody surfaces.

Surface fatigue or degradation is local fatigue due to repeated contact with the counterbody and subsurface deformations. Due to repeated counterloading, defects begin to appear on the surface and cracks or dimples develop until wear particles are finally removed.

Due to the frictional process, so-called tribochemical reactions (e.g., corrosion, oxidation, chemical degradation) can be triggered in which reaction products (layers,

208 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

particles) arise, leading to material failure. Such reactions proceed faster under tribological loading than in a static state. Depending on the type and adhesion of reaction products to the surface, either wear intensifying or reducing effects can take place.

Often one of the mechanisms mentioned is dominant and responsible for momentary wear. Any change in slide conditions, however, can lead to a change of mechanism. Then the different mechanisms influence each other reciprocally. For example, hard particles or fiber fragments removed by adhesion can act abrasively (when remaining as a third body in the contact region).

Pure two-body contact is rare in a tribological system. During the wear process, an interim layer forms between the contacting surfaces that sticks to the friction surfaces in the form of compacted wear debris, or it may collect at the plane of tangency in the form of loose wear particles. Such an interim layer separates the friction partners, reduces the real contact area between the bodies and simultaneously supports some of the load. For one, it can function as temporary surface wear protection, reducing friction like a solid lubricant (e.g., PTFE transfer film). On the other hand, if such an interim layer contains hard particles, it can also act abrasively.

It is important to note that different wear mechanisms are activated depending on whether load is uniformly constant, periodically alternating or impacting [4.101].

4.8.3 Wear Tests and Wear Characteristics

Many different wear tests are performed in order to do tribo-technological tasks in research and industry. These range from complex and expensive investigations of complete machines under actual operating conditions down to laboratory tests on simple specimen geometries. Various tasks of wear testing are listed as follows with reference to [4.103]:

• Optimization of components or tribo-technical systems to realize a specified, wear-determined service life

• Determination of wear-determined influences on overall machine function • Monitoring wear-determined functionality of machines • Collection of data for establishment of intervals for inspection and maintenance • Preselection of materials and lubricants for practical application cases • Quality assurance of materials and lubricants • Simulation of wear on tribologically loaded components with the aid of substitute

systems • Wear research and mechanism oriented wear testing.

4.8 Friction and Wear 209

In order to perform these tasks, there must be a basis for decision-making in the form of wear characteristics determined by friction and wear measurements.

Wear tests are classified according to their transferability to real application cases [4.103]. The categories range from the operational test (category I), in which the original tribosystem is tested under real use conditions, down to model tests on simple specimens (category VI). In between lie gradations with a step-by-step reduction in test complexity down to the model test. This reduction of the original tribosystems is accompanied by a reduction in the transferability of results. On the other hand, it is easier to investigate the influence of individual parameters on wear, e.g., in laboratory or component tests, where the loading collective is well-known and controllable. Effort and costs are generally highest in operational tests and smallest in model tests. That is why friction and wear studies usually begin by performing model tests.

The point of departure for every wear test is the tribological system analysis based on which, for example, suitable materials can be preselected, as well as what type (e.g., sliding, rolling) and category (e.g., model test, component test) of wear test can be performed.

Polymers and polymer-composite materials generally exhibit good wear properties. By modifying them with aramid-, glass- or carbon-fibers and/or solid lubricants such as PTFE and molybdenumdisulfide (MoS2), friction and wear properties can be further improved and make it possible to realize dry-running and maintenance-free components for tribological loads. In the following sections, we will deal mainly with non-lubricated wear tests often used for testing plastics. Of course, plastics are also used in lubricated tribosystems. However, due to the variety of different methods, tribological loads and types of wear, an exemplary selection had to be made.

4.8.3.1 Selected Model Wear Tests

The many different wear test methods used in practice are all based on corresponding types of tribological loading, such as sliding, rolling, sliding with rolling or oscillating sliding. Sliding wear test methods, such as pin-on-disc, block-on-ring and “thrust washer“ tests are used widely in the wear testing of plastics. Figure 4.94 illustrates the testing principles of the pin-on-disk and block-on-ring test. In both tests, a specimen is pressed against a rotating ring or a rotating disk made from the selected counterbody material. The “thrust washer” test uses a ring-shaped specimen.

Wear due to vibrations can be investigated with a fretting wear testing machine. The testing principle of such a design is sketched in Fig. 4.95, in which the counter- body often is ball-shaped and g uided over the specimen in oscillating motion.

210 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

FN

specimen

test principle: block-on-ring test principle: pin-on-disc

F

specimen

counter partcontinuous rotation

wear track

wear track

a b

N

v

v

continuous rotation counter part

Fig. 4.94: Test principles of block-on-ring (a) and pin-on-disk (b) wear tests

The counterbody is pressed onto the specimen at a defined normal force FN. The contact conditions in such tests are not constant. At the start, there is point contact between the test body and the counterbody; the contact area grows with continuing wear. With different counterbodies, different contact geometries, such as line contact or planar contact can be realized.

Temperature greatly influences wear of plastics. That is the reason why many wear testing machines have a test chamber for tempering the counterbody. Moreover, a closed test chamber makes it possible to introduce technical gases or create a special climate (humidity and air temperature) with the aid of a climate conditioner.

When wear tests are performed to research wear mechanisms, the loaded test bodies and counterbodies are microscopically examined, since the surface topography often permits inferences to be made as to the essential wear mechanisms. With the aid of surface measurement methods such as profilometry or interferometry, worn-out

F N

specimen

test principle: cyclic wear

counter part oscillation

wear track

dot contact

line contact

area contact

Fig. 4.95: Testing principles of oscillating wear experiments

4.8 Friction and Wear 211

surfaces can be measured three-dimensionally. Thus, precise values can be obtained for the dimensions and depth of wear markings or tracks and it also enables a roughness analysis of the surface.

A comprehensive picture of a tribosystem under specific test conditions is created by the wear parameters measured, subsequent microscopic evaluation of wear surfaces and, in some cases, roughness analyses. All together, this information provides a basis for evaluating different materials and optimizing the selection of materials.

4.8.3.2 Wear Parameters and Their Determination

Several different parameters are in practical use for describing materials with respect to their wear resistance. Almost all wear parameters are based on the measurement of weight loss Wm, material worn away WV , or one of the proportional quantities related to it, e.g., linear wear factor Wl, , based on a change in length. These quantities are called wear factors. Figure 4.96 contains a diagram of wear factor W for two different specimen geometries.

When wear factors are derived according to their reference quantities, such as loading path s or test period t, the results are the so-called wear rates. Specific wear rate involves, in addition to wear path, the load on the specimen. The following equations describe the most commonly used wear rates:

• Wear rate

(derivation of wear factor according to loading time)

dt

dW W lt/l (m h

-1), or in terms of weight dt

dW W mt/m (kg h

-1) (4.180)

W l : linear wear value wear area A V

WV = Wl ·AV volumetric wear value

WV = Wq ·l

volumetric wear value

l

W q : planimetric wear value

Fig. 4.96: Diagram of linear, planimetric and volumetric wear factors [4.103]

212 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

• Wear-path ratio

(derivation of wear factor according to loading path)

ds

dW W ls/l (m m

-1), or in terms of weight ds

dW W ms/m (kg m

-1) (4.181)

• Specific wear rate

(derivation of material worn away according to loading path and loading force)

N

V 2

F,s/V Fs

W W (m3 (Nm)-1) (4.182)

FN, p, A normal force, planar compression, plane (FN = p A) s wear path (s = v t) v slide velocity t test period

WV/s,F is often abbreviated as Ws.

4.8.3.3 Wear Parameters and Their Presentation

When materials are selected, corresponding wear factors or wear rates are determined for the different materials for one or more test-parameter sets. They can be used directly for selecting materials. However, if it is desirable to present a selected material

static load limit

p-v line at defined stationary wear rate

p-v limit

thermal limit

log v

linear wear rate �p v

lo g

p

Fig. 4.97: p–v diagram for dry-running slide bearings [4.104]

4.8 Friction and Wear 213

and its tribological efficiency, this is often done with p–v values or p–v diagrams. Limiting p–v values provide a value in excess of which wear begins to increase disproportionally (Fig. 4.97). The p–v factor states the loading at which a defined wear rate, e.g., 0.5 μm h-1 can be measured.

A p–v diagram (Fig. 4.97) holds only for one particular tribological system. The provided curves constitute the limits within which a polymer can be utilized.

4.8.4 Selected Experimental Results

4.8.4.1 Counterbody Influence

Given the material combination polymer/steel present in many engineering applications (e.g., in slide bearings), tribological behavior is strongly influenced by the surface topography of the metallic friction partner. In general, the friction coefficients measured are higher for very smooth (polished) steel surfaces than for median roughness depths. At higher roughnesses, however, friction coefficients increase. Figure 4.98 illustrates this for PE-HD.

Increasing wear is generally found with increasing counterbody roughness, but here, too, it is possible that there is a range of minimal value. An explanation for the formation of such a minimum may lie in the transition from predominantly adhesive wear at low roughness depths to predominantly abrasive wear at higher roughnesses.

0 0.5 1.0 1..5 0

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

μ

R (μm)

1E-7

1E-6

1E-

1E-4

1E-310 -3

10 -4

10 -5

10 -6

10 -7

friction coefficient

specific wear rate

p = 1.4 MPa

v = 1 m/s

R (μm)a

0.1

W (m

m /N

m )

s 3

Fig. 4.98: Influence of counterbody roughness Ra on the friction coefficient and specific wear rate Ws

of PE-HD [4.105]

214 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

Feinle [4.106] investigated the influence of counterbody roughness on friction coefficients and linear pin-wear rate on friction-paired glass-fiber reinforced polyphenylenesulfide (PPS) and steel 100 Cr 6. In the investigated roughness range of 0.05 to 2.5 μm, friction and wear exhibited opposite behaviors. As the friction coefficient decreased with increasing roughness, a clear increase took place in the linear pin-wear rate. A minimum or optimum roughness – such as discovered for unreinforced PE-HD (Fig. 4.98) – could not be detected.

Besides roughness, the orientation of counterbody grooves also influences the wear behavior of plastics. Grooves in the direction of slide produce less wear than grooves perpendicular to it [4.107].

4.8.4.2 Influencing of Fillers

Although many unfilled polymers exhibit very good tribological properties, the use of appropriate fillers can further improve wear and friction coefficient to suit the particular tribosystem and its loading parameters. To reduce wear, polymer materiales are often enhanced with fibers made from glass (GF) or carbon (CF). They increase stiffness and strength while reducing creep tendency. Low adhesion between friction partners is useful for achieving a lower coefficient of friction . This is realized by using internal lubricants such as PTFE, MoS2 or graphite. Figure 4.99 shows that favorable wear and friction properties can be realized by combining high- performance polymers with fillers made from lubricants and reinforcing materials (range of concentric shading).

The influence of PTFE filler on the tribological values of a PEEK/steel friction pair is illustrated in Fig. 4.100. Both friction coefficient and specific wear rate Ws pass

high- performance

polymer

internal lubricants (PTFE, graphite, ...)

reinforcements (glass fibers, carbon-fibers)

Fig. 4.99: Components for tribologically optimization of a high-performance polymer

4.8 Friction and Wear 215

0 100 0

0.8

R (μm)

10 -3

PTFE (vol. -%)

W (m

m /N

m )

s 3

friction coefficient

specific wear rate

p = 1 MPa

v = 1 m/s

optimal region

10 -4

10 -5

10 -6

μ

0.6

0.4

0.2

20 40 60 80

Fig. 4.100: Influence of PTFE filler on friction and wear on a PEEK/steel friction pair [4.108]

through a minimum range. In this example, the optimum filler content lies between 10 and 20 % by volume. Figure 4.101 illustrates the influence of CF and GF respectively on the specific wear rate of polyether nitrile (PEN) when in frictional contact with a steel partner. Wear clearly decreases with increasing fiber volume content v. Generally speaking, however, wear increases again at higher fiber contents, triggered by the increasing number of abrasively acting broken fiber fragments.

0 25

R

10 -4

W (m

m /N

m )

s 3

matrix glass-fiber carbon-fiber

p v = 1.7 MPa m/s

10 -5

10 -6

10 -7

5 10 15 20

v � (vol. -%)

.

Fig. 4.101: Influence of fiber volume content v on specific wear rate Ws for a PEN/steel friction pair

[4.109]

216 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

4.8.4.3 Influence of Loading Parameters

The tribological values measured for plastics depend largely on the loading parameters planar compression p, sliding velocity v and temperature T. The temperature parameter is distinguished as either the externally applied system temperature or the heat generated by friction. While system temperature is independent of the other loading parameters, pressure and sliding velocity have considerable influence on the temperature arising on the slide surface. This circumstance is enhanced by the very low heat conductivity of plastics.

0 250

R (μm)

0.3

W (m

m /N

m )

s 3

50 100 150 200

friction coefficient

specific wear rate

T (°C)

0

μ

0

2

4

6

8

10

0.2

0.1

Fig. 4.102: Influence of temperature on friction and wear behavior of a PEEK composite when sliding

against steel (p = 1 MPa, v = 1 m s-1) [4.110]

Figure 4.102 shows the dependence of friction coefficient μ and specific wear rate Ws of a PEEK, slide-modified with 10 wt.-% CF, PTFE and graphite, on the system temperature. The friction coefficient decreases with increasing temperature, passes through a minimum in the vicinity of the glass-transition temperature at 143 °C and then increases slightly. A tendentially similar dependence of the friction coefficient of PEEK on temperature has been described by Briscoe [4.111].

By contrast, only a small increase has been observed in specific wear rate at lower temperatures, whereas pronounced increase in wear can be seen at higher temperatures. This behavior has been observed in similar form by Tanaka and Yamada as well [4.112].

The change in the friction coefficient of a PTFE/steel combination, when slide velocity and planar compression are varied, is shown in Fig. 4.103 for two system

4.8 Friction and Wear 217

0

0.1

0.2

μ

10 10 10 10-1 -3 -5

6.2

3.1

0.62

v (m/min)

T 1

T 2

Fig. 4.103: Influence of planar compression and slide velocity on the friction coefficient of a PTFE/steel

pairing for two system temperatures (T2 > T1) [4.113]

temperatures (T1 = 23 °C, T2 = 70 °C). For this particular material combination, planar compression has scarcely any influence on friction coefficient, at least over a very wide range of slide velocities. By contrast, there is a clear dependence of friction values on slide velocity. The lowest friction coefficients are found in a combination of low slide velocity and higher planar compression. An increase of system temperature in this system results in a reduction of the friction coefficient measured.

It should be noted that the dependencies described apply only to the PTFE/steel system under the stated test conditions. For PTFE/steel, an important role is played by the transfer of material onto the steel counterbody by the formation of a so-called transfer film. However, as on other polymer/steel pairings, a general tendency can be observed that slide velocity and planar compression do not affect tribological values to the same degree.

4.8.4.4 Predicting Properties via Artificial Neural Networks

In order to predict tribological properties of a material system, we have to consider the non-linear dependence of the quantities mentioned (e.g., specific wear rate) on parameters that describe the material itself and the test conditions. Compared to methods of multilinear regression, artificial neural networks are capable of dealing with non-linear dependencies and describing them quantitatively. That is why artificial neural networks have been introduced in tribology [4.114 – 4.118].

218 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

0.8

0.6

0.4μ

0 5

10 4 2 0

0.2

0 0.0

5 10 4 2

0 10 15 8 6

4 210 15 8 6

4 2 0

10-30.8

0.6

0.4μ

10

10

10

3

-4

-5 /N

m )

3

0

0.2

0 0.0

μ

10

0 10

5

-6

-7W (m

m s

0 5

10 15 8 6

4 2 0 5 10

15 8 6 4 2

0

10-310

10

10

3

-4

-5

/N m

) 3

10

10

-6

-7W (m

m s

a

b

c

d

Fig. 4.104: Experimental (black points with error bars) vs. predicted (3D mesh) values of the coefficient

of friction μ (average value in steady state) {left column} and the specific wear rate Ws {right column} as a function of SCF- and sub-micro TiO2-volume content: (a) training dataset, (b) validation dataset. The testing conditions were: p = 1 MPa, v = 1m/s [4.118]

A neural network has to be trained to describe a particular function. For scientific investigations on materials, a certain amount of data has to be gathered in order to be able to develop an effective neural network including its architecture, training functions, training algorithms and other parameters. Once the network has learned to solve exemplary problems using existing training data sets, new data can be used from the same set of circumstances in order to obtain realistic solutions from the trained network. The greatest advantage of artificial neural networks lies in their ability to model complex, non-linear and multi-dimensional functions without having to make any assumptions as to the nature of the relationships involved. The network generates itself directly from the experimental data by the power of its self-organizing capabilities.

In the example at hand, a large amount of data, such as material pair, mechanical properties and test parameters were used as input data for the neural network that defines wear properties such as friction coefficient and specific wear rate as output results. A data bank was available with a total of 103 independent wear measurements from fretting research on PA 46 for various test parameters (for details see [4.119, 4.120]).

4.8 Friction and Wear 219

Based on calculations made by the neural network, it was possible, in spite of relatively few real measuring points, to obtain a comprehensive statement on wear behavior under varying test parameters, as examples of which normal force and slide velocity are used in Fig. 4.104.

4.8.5 Summary

Wear is a system property, i.e., it is dependent on all influencing factors affecting the system. In contrast to material properties, such as hardness or E modulus, no generally valid statement can be made for a particular material; instead, the entire system has to be taken into consideration.

The basic components of a tribosystem are the materials to be tested, considering both the specimen and the counterbody. The loading collective, i.e., all test conditions, such as slide velocity, planar compression and temperature, are further parameters of friction and wear as a system property. The system is also defined by structural influences. Particularly for polymeric materials, crystallinity, degree of cure and moisture absorbency have to be mentioned in this connection. These quantities are influenced by processing and storage conditions, among others. In addition, surface roughness and oxidation of wear partners have to be considered.

Due to the complexity of wear processes, tests should be adapted as far as possible to the ultimate application. This ensures good transferability from experiment to actual use. Since the experiment related effort and expense for testing under actual conditions are generally very high, application-specific standardized reference tests are used for developing special wear-optimized materials. The use of neural networks represents a new approach to optimizing materials tribologically. Based on knowledge of the properties of tribosystems, statements can be made on the behavior of similar tribosystems via a mathematical model. Thus the optimum materials’ composition for one of the tribo-partners can be predicted with a high degree of probability.

Recent results on new developments of polymeric tribo-materials, using various kinds of nano-fillers in combination with traditional tribo-reinforcements are described in [4.121] and {4.122].

220 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

4.9 Compilation of Standards

Sections 4.1 and 4.2

ISO 6721-1 (2011)

Plastics–Determination of Dynamic Mechanical Properties – Part 1: General Principles

ISO 6721-2

(2008)

Plastics–Determination of Dynamic Mechanical Properties – Part 2: Torsion-Pendulum Method

ISO 6721-3 (1994)

Plastics–Determination of Dynamic Mechanical Properties – Part 3: Flexural Vibration-Resonance-Curve Method (Technical Corrigendum 1: 1995)

ISO 6721-4 (2008)

Plastics – Determination of Dynamic Mechanical Properties – Part 4: Tensile Vibration – Non-Resonance Method

ISO 6721-5 (1996)

Plastics – Determination of Dynamic Mechanical Properties – Part 5: Flexural Vibration – Non-Resonance Method (AMD 1 – Amendment 1: 2007)

ISO 6721-6 (1996)

Plastics – Determination of Dynamic Mechanical Properties – Part 6: Shear Vibration – Non-Resonance Method (AMD 1 – Amendment 1: 2007)

ISO 6721-7 (1996)

Plastics – Determination of Dynamic Mechanical Properties – Part 7: Torsional Vibration – Non-Resonance Method (AMD 1 – Amendment 1: 2007)

ISO 6721-8 (1997)

Plastics – Determination of Dynamic Mechanical Properties – Part 8: Longitudinal and Shear Vibration – Wave-Propagation Method

ISO 6721-9 (1997)

Plastics – Determination of Dynamic Mechanical Properties – Part 9: Tensile Vibration – Sonic-Pulse Propagation Method (AMD 1 – Amendment 1: Precision 2007)

ISO 6721-10 (1999)

Plastics – Determination of Dynamic Mechanical Properties – Part 10: Complex Shear Viscosity Using a Parallel-Plate Oscillatory Rheometer

ISO 6721-11

(2012)

Plastics – Determination of Dynamic Mechanical Properties – Part 11: Glass Transition Temperature

ISO 6721-12

(2009)

Plastics – Determination of Dynamic Mechanical Properties – Part 12: Compressive Vibration – Non-Resonance Method

Section 4.3

ASTM D 638-10 (2010)

Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics

ASTM D 695-10 (2010)

Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics

ASTM D 790-10 (2010)

Standard Test Method for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electric Insulating Materials

DIN 53363 (2003)

Testing of Plastic Films – Tear Test using Trapezoidal Test Specimen with Incision

4.9 Compilation of Standards 221

ISO 34-1 (2010)

Rubber, Vulcanized or Thermoplastic – Determination of Tear Strength – Part 1: Trouser, angle and crescent test pieces

ISO 34-2 (2011)

Rubber, Vulcanized or Thermoplastic – Determination of Tear Strength – Part 2: Small (Delft) Test pieces

ISO 37 (2011)

Rubber, Vulcanized or Thermoplastic – Determination of Tensile Stress- Strain Properties

ISO 178 (2010)

Plastics – Determination Flexural Properties (Amendment AMD 1: 2013)

ISO 527-1 (2012)

Plastics – Determination of Tensile Properties – Part 1: General Principles

ISO 527-2 (2012)

Plastics – Determination of Tensile Properties – Part 2: Test Conditions for Moulding and Extrusion Plastics

ISO 527-3 (1995)

Plastics – Determination of Tensile Properties – Part 3: Test Conditions for Films and Sheets (Technical Corrigendum TC 1 : 1998 and Technical Corrigendum TC 2 : 2001)

ISO 527-4 (1997)

Plastics – Determination of Tensile Properties – Part 4: Test Conditions for Isotropic and Orthotropic Fibre-Reinforced Plastic Composites

ISO 527-5 (2009)

Plastics – Determination of Tensile Properties – Part 5: Test Conditions for Unidirectional Fibre-Reinforced Plastic Composites

ISO 604 (2002)

Plastics – Determination of Compressive Properties

ISO 3167 (2002)

Plastics – Multipurpose Test Specimen

ISO 6133

(1998)

Rubber and Plastics – Analysis of Multi-Peak Traces Obtained in Determination of Tear Strength and Adhesion Strength

ISO 10350-1 (2007)

Plastics – Acquisition and Presentation of Comparable Single Point Data – Part 1: Moulding Materials (Amendment AMD 1 : 2012)

ISO 10350-2 (2011)

Plastics – Acquisition and Presentation of Comparable Single Point Data – Part 2: Long-Fibre-Reinforced Plastics

ISO 11403-1 (2012)

Plastics – Acquisition and Presentation of Comparable Multipoint Data – Part 1: Mechanical Properties

ISO 11403-2 (2012)

Plastics – Acquisition and Presentation of Comparable Multipoint Data – Part 2: Thermal and Processing Properties

ISO 11403-3 (1999)

Plastics – Acquisition and Presentation of Comparable Multipoint Data – Part 3: Environmental Influences on Properties

Section 4.4

ASTM D 256-10 (2010)

Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics

222 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

ASTM D 1709-09 (2009)

Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free-Falling Dart Method

ASTM D 1822-06 (2006)

Standard Test Method for Tensile-Impact Energy to Break Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials

ASTM D 4812-11 (2011)

Standard Test Method for Cantilever Beam Impact Strength of Plastics

DIN 53373 (1970)

Testing of Plastic Films – Impact Penetration Test with Electronic Data Recording (withdrawn; see ISO 7765-2: 1994)

DIN 53435 (1983)

Testing of Plastics – Bending Test and Impact Test on Dynstat Test Pieces

ISO 179-1 (2010)

Plastics – Determination of Charpy Impact Properties – Part 1: Non- instrumented Impact Test

ISO 180 (2000)

Plastics – Determination of Izod Impact Strength – Amendment AMD 2 : 2013 Precision Data

ISO 8256 (2004)

Plastics – Determination of Tensile-Impact Strength

ISO 3167 (2002)

Plastics – Multipurpose Test Specimen

ISO 6603-1 (2000)

Plastics – Determination of Puncture Impact Behaviour of Rigid Plastics – Part 1: Non-instrumented Impact Testing

ISO 7765-2 (1994)

Plastics Film and Sheeting – Determination of Impact Resistance by the Free- Falling Dart Method – Part 2: Instrumented Puncture Test

ISO 13802 (1999)

Plastics – Verification of Pendulum Impact-Testing Machines – Charpy, Izod and Tensile Impact-Testing (Technical Corrigendum TC 1 : 2000)

Section 4.5

ASTM D 671-93 (1993)

Standard Test Method for Flexural Fatigue of Plastics by Constant- Amplitude-of-Force (withdrawn 2002, no replacement)

DIN 50100 (1978)

Testing of Materials – Continuous Vibration Tests – Definitions, Symbols, Procedure, Evaluation

DIN 50113

(1982)

Testing of Metals – Rotating Bar Bending Fatigue Test

DIN 53442 (1990)

Flexural Fatigue Testing of Plastics Using Flat Specimens

Section 4.6

ASTM D 2990-09 (2009)

Standard Test Method for Tensile, Compressive and Flexural Creep and Creep-Rupture of Plastics

4.9 Compilation of Standards 223

ISO 899 (2003)

Plastics – Determination of Creep Behaviour Part 1: Tensile Creep (DAM 1 – Amendment 1: 2012) Part 2: Flexural Creep by Three-Point Loading (DAM 1 – Amendment 1: 2012)

DIN 65586

(1994)

Aerospace – Fibre Reinforced Plastics – Fatigue Strength Behaviour of Fibre Composite Materials under One-Stage Loading (Draft)

DIN EN 1606 (2013)

Thermal Insulating Products for Building Applications – Determination of Compressive Creep

ISO 6252 (1992)

Plastics; Determination of Environmental Stress Cracking (ESC) – Constant- Tensile-Stress Method (revised by ISO 22088: 2006; see Chapter 7)

DVS 2203-1 (2003)

Testing of Welded Joints of Thermoplastics Sheet and Pipes – Test Methods – Requirements

DVS 2203-4 (1997)

Testing of Welded Joints of Thermoplastics Plates and Tubes – Tensile Creep Test

DVS 2226-4 (2000)

Testing of Fused Joints on Liners of Polymer Materials – Tensile Creep Test on PE

Section 4.7

ASTM D 785-08 (2008)

Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials

DIN 53505 (2000)

Testing of Rubber – Shore A and Shore D Hardness Test (withdrawn; see ISO 868: 2003, ISO 7619-1: 2010 and ISO 7619-2: 2010)

DIN EN 59 (1977)

Glass Reinforced Plastics – Measurement of Hardness by Means of a Barcol Impressor

ISO 868 (2003)

Plastics and Ebonite – Determination of Indentation Hardness by Means of a Durometer (Shore Hardness)

ISO 2039-1 (2001)

Plastics – Determination of Hardness – Part 1: Ball Indentation Method

ISO 2039-2 (1987)

Plastics – Determination of Hardness – Part 2: Rockwell Hardness

ISO 2815 (2003)

Paints and Varnishes – Buchholz Indentation Test

ISO 7619

(2010)

Rubber, Vulcanized or Thermoplastic – Determination of Indentation Hardness

Part 1: Durometer Method (Shore Hardness)

Part 2: IRHD Pocket Meter Method

ISO/DIS 14577-1 (2012)

Metallic Materials – Instrumented Indentation Test for Hardness and Materials Parameters – Part 1: Test Method

ISO 48 (2010)

Rubber, Vulcanized or Thermoplastic – Determination of Hardness (Hardness between 10 IRHD and 100 IRHD)

224 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

VDI/VDE 2616 Part 2 (2012)

Hardness Testing of Plastics and Elastomers

Section 4.8

General Standards for Tribology

ASTM G 40 -12 (2012)

Standard Terminology Relating to Wear and Erosion

GFT work sheet Nr. 7 (2002)

Tribology – Definition, Terms, Testing

ISO 4378-2 (2009)

Plain Bearings – Terms, Definitions and Classification – Part 2: Friction and Wear

VDI 3822 Blatt 5 (1999)

Failure Analysis – Failures Caused by Tribology Working Conditions

Standards for Testing Friction and Wear

ASTM D 1894-11e1 (2011)

Standard Test Method for Static and Kinetic Coefficients of Friction of Plastic Film and Sheeting

ASTM D 2714-94 (2009)

Standard Test Method for Calibration and Operation of the Falex Block-On- Ring Friction and Wear Testing Machine

ASTM D 3389-10 (2010)

Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics Abrasion Resistance (Rotary Platform, Double-Head Abrader)

ASTM D 3702-94 (2009)

Standard Test Method for Wear Rate and Coefficient of Friction of Materials in Self-Lubricated Rubbing Contact Using a Thrust Washer Testing Machine

ASTM D 4103-90 (2009)

Standard Practice for Preparation of Substrate Surfaces for Coefficient of Friction Testing

ASTM G 75-07 (2007)

Standard Test Method for Determination of Slurry Abrasivity (Miller Number) and Slurry Abrasion Response of Materials (SAR Number)

ASTM G 77-05 (2010)

Standard Test Method for Ranking Resistance of Materials to Sliding Wear Using Block-On-Ring Wear Test

ASTM G 83-96 (1996)

Standard Test Method for Wear Testing with a Crossed-Cylinder Apparatus (withdrawn 2005)

ASTM G 99-05 (2010)

Standard Test Method for Wear Testing with a Pin-On-Disk Apparatus

ASTM G 115-10 (2010)

Standard Guide for Measuring and Reporting Friction Coefficients

ASTM G 117-02 (2007)

Standard Guide for Calculating and Reporting Measures of Precision Using Data from Interlaboratory Wear or Erosion Tests

ASTM G 118-02 (2007)

Standard Guide for Recommended Format of Wear Test Data Suitable for Databases

4.9 Compilation of Standards 225

ASTM G 132-96 (2007)

Standard Test Method for Pin Abrasion Testing

ASTM G 133-05 (2010)

Standard Test Method for Linearly Reciprocating Ball-On-Flat Sliding Wear

ASTM G 137-97 (2009)

Standard Test Method for Ranking Resistance of Plastic Materials to Sliding Wear Using a Block-On-Ring Configuration

ASTM G 163-10 (2010)

Standard Guide for Digital Data Acquisition in Wear and Friction Measurements

DIN 51 834-1 (2010)

Testing of Lubricants – Tribological Test in the Translatory Oscillation Apparatus – Part 1: General Working Principles

DIN 52 347 (1987)

Testing of Glass and Plastics; Abrasion Test – Method using Abrasion Wheels and Measurement of Scattered Light

DIN 53 516 (1987)

Testing of Rubber and Elastomers – Determination of Abrasion Resistance (withdrawn; replaced through ISO 4649 : 2006)

DIN 53 528 (1988)

Testing of Rubber–Coated Textiles; Abrasion Test – Determination of Loss in Mass by the Frank Hauser Apparatus (withdrawn)

ISO 4378-2 (2009)

Plain Bearings – Terms, Definitions and Classification – Part 2: Friction and Wear

ISO 7148-2 (2012)

Plain Bearings – Testing of the Tribological Behaviour of Bearing Materials – Part 2: Testing of Polymer-Based Bearing Materials

ISO 4649 (2010)

Rubber, Vulcanized or Thermoplastic – Determination of Abrasion Resistance Using a Rotating Cylindrical Drum Device

ISO 5470-1 (1999)

Rubber – or Plastics-Coated Fabrics – Determination of Abrasion Resistance – Part 1: Taber Abrader

ISO 6601 (2002)

Plastics – Friction and Wear by Sliding – Identification of Test Parameters

ISO 8295 (1995)

Plastics – Film and Sheeting – Determination of Coefficients of Friction

ISO 9352 (2012)

Plastics – Determination of Resistance to Wear by Abrasive Wheels

ISO 14 242-2 (2000)

Implants for Surgery – Wear of Total Hip-Joint Prostheses – Part 2: Methods of Measurement

ISO 17 853 (2011)

Wear of Implant Materials – Polymer and Metal Wear Particles –Isolation, Characterization and Quantification

ISO 23794 (2010)

Rubber, Vulcanized or Thermoplastic – Abrasion Testing – Guidance

226 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

4.10 References [4.1] Lai, W.M.; Rubin, D.: Introduction to Continuum Mechanics. Pergamon, Oxford (1993) [4.2] Haupt, P.; Kurth, J.A.: Continuum Mechanics and Theory of Materials. Springer, Berlin

(2002) [4.3] Ward, I.M.; Hadley, D.W.: An Introduction to the Mechanical Properties of Solid

Polymers. Wiley, Chichester (1993) [4.4] Chen, F.; Saleeb, A.F.: Constitutive Equations for Engineering Materials, Volume 1:

Elasticity and Modeling. Elsevier, Amsterdam (1994) [4.5] Treloar, L.R.G.: The Physics of Rubber Elasticity. Clarendon, Oxford (1975) [4.6] Stavemann, A.J.: Properties of phantom networks and real networks. Adv. Polym. Sci. 44

(1982) 73–101 [4.7] Erman, B.; Mark, J.E.: Structure and Properties of Rubberlike Networks. Oxford

University Press, New York (1997) [4.8] Termonia, Y.; Smith, P.: Kinetic model for tensile deformation of polymers.

Macromolecules 20 (1987) 835–838 [4.9] Bensason, S.; Stepanov, E.V.; Chum, S.; Hiltner, A.; Baer, E.: Deformation of elastomeric

ethylene–octene copolymers. Macromolecules 30 (1997) 2436–2444 [4.10] Macosco, C.W.: Rheology, Principles, Measurements and Applications. Wiley, New York

(1994) [4.11] Krausz, A.S.; Eyring, H.: Deformation Kinetics. Wiley, New York (1975) [4.12] Ferry, J.D.: Viscoelastic Properties of Polymers. Wiley, New York (1980) [4.13] Aklonis, J.J.; MacKnight, W. J.: Introduction to Polymer Viscoelasticity. Wiley, New York

(1983) [4.14] Batzer, H.: Polymer Materials, Bd. 1.: Chemie and Physik. Thieme Verlag, Stuttgart (1984) [4.15] Williams, M.L.; Landel, R.F.; Ferry, J.D.: The temperature dependence of relaxation

mechanism in amorphous polymers and other glass-forming liquids. J. Amer. Chem. Soc. 77 (1955) 3701–3707

[4.16] Leaderman, H.: Elastic and Creep Properties of Filamentous Materials and other High Polymers. The Textile Foundation, Washington DC (1943)

[4.17] Wilhelm, M.; Maring, D.; Spiess, H.-W.: Fourier-transform rheology. Rheol. Acta 37 (1998) 399–405

[4.18] G’Sell, C.; Jonas, J.J.: Determination of the plastic behaviour of solid polymers at constant true strain rate. J. Mater. Sci. 14 (1979) 583–591

[4.19] Ward, I.M.: Review: The yield behaviour of polymers. J. Mater. Sci. 6 (1971) 1397–1417 [4.20] Argon, A.S.: A theory for the low-temperature plastic deformation of glassy polymers.

Philos. Mag. 28 (1973) 839–865 [4.21] Perez, J.: Physics and Mechanics of Amorphous Polymers. A.A. Balkema Publishers,

Rotterdam (1998) [4.22] Bowden, P.B.; Young, R.J.: Deformation mechanisms in crystalline polymers. J. Mater. Sci.

9 (1974) 2034–2051 [4.23] Lin, L.; Argon, A.S.: Structure and plastic deformation of polyethylene. J. Mater. Sci. 29

(1994) 294–323 [4.24] Crist, B.: Plastic deformation of polymers. In: Thomas, E.L. (Ed.): Materials Science and

Technology Vol. 12: Structure and Properties of Polymers. Wiley VCH, Weinheim (2002) [4.25] Peterlin, A.: Plastic deformation of polyethylene by rolling and drawing. Kolloid Z. u. Z. f.

Polymere 233 (1969) 857–862

4.10 References 227

[4.26] Petermann, J.; Kluge, W.; Gleiter, H.: Electron microscopic investigation of the molecular mechanism of plastic deformation of polyethylene and isotactic polystyrene crystals. J.Polym. Sci. B-Polym. Phys. 17 (1979) 1043–1051

[4.27] Bauwens-Crowett, C.; Bauwens, C.J.; Homes, G.: Tensile yield stress behavior of glassy polymers. J. Polym. Sci.A-2–Pol. Chem. Ed. 27 (1969) 735–742

[4.28] Alfrey, T.: Mechanical Behaviour of High Polymers. Wiley-Interscience, New York (1948) [4.29] Krautkrämer, J.; Krautkrämer, H.: Ultrasonic Testing of Materials. Springer, Berlin (1977) [4.30] Deutsch, V.; Platte, M.; Vogt, M,: Ultraschallprüfung. Springer, Berlin (1997) [4.31] Alig, I.: Prüfung der akustischen Eigenschaften. In: Schmiedel, H. (Hrsg.): Handbuch der

Kunststoffprüfung. Carl Hanser, Munich (1992) 391–415 [4.32] Fitting, D.W.; Adler, L.: Ultrasonic Spectral Analysis for Nondestructive Evaluation.

Plenum Press, New York (1981) [4.33] Liu, Y.; Donovan, J.A.: The effect of the secondary relaxations on the fracture toughness of

nylon 6/amorphous nylon 6IcoT blends. Polym. Eng. Sci. 36 (1996) 2345–2351 [4.34] Ferry, D.J.: The relation of viscoelastic behaviour to molecular structure. In: Stuart, H.A.

(Hrsg.): Die Physik der Hochpolymeren, Bd. 4. Springer, Berlin (1956) [4.35] Doi, M.; Edwards, S.F.: The Theory of Polymer Dynamics. Clarendon Press, Oxford

(1986) [4.36] McCrum, N.G.; Read, B.E.; Williams, G.: Anelastic and Dielectric Effects in Polymeric

Solids. Dover Publishers, New York (1991) [4.37] Murayama, T.: Dynamic mechanical properties. In: Mark, H.F. et.al. (Eds.): Encyclopedia

of Polymer Science and Engineering, Vol. 5, Wiley, New York (1985) 299–329 [4.38] Nielsen, L.E.; Landel, R. F.: Mechanical Properties of Polymers and Composites. Marcel

Dekker, New York (1994) [4.39] Menges, G.; Osswald, T.A.: Materials Science of Polymers for Engineers. Carl Hanser,

Munich (2012) [4.40] Roberts, J.: A critical strain design limit for thermoplastics. Mater. Des. 4 (1983) 791–793 [4.41] Menges, G.; Wiegand, E.; Pütz, D.; Maurer, F.: Ermittlung der kritischen Dehnung teil-

kristalliner Thermoplaste. Kunststoffe 65 (1975) 368–371 [4.42] Schreyer, G.W.; Bartnig, K.; Sander, M.: Bewertung von Schädigungseffekten in

Thermoplasten durch simultane Messung der Spannungs-Dehnungs-Charakteristik and der dielektrischen Eigenschaften. Teil 1: Schädigungseffekte während der mechanischenl Belastung and Möglichkeiten der experimentellen Bewertung. Materialwiss. Werkstofftech. 27 (1996) 90–95

[4.43] Bierögel, C.; Grellmann, W.: Evaluation of thermal and acoustic emission of composites by means of local strain measurements. ECF9, European Conference on Fracture, Varna 21.-25. September 1992, Proceedings Vol. I (1992) 242–247

[4.44] Cowley, K.D.; Beaumont, P.W.R.: Modeling problems of damage at notches and the fracture stress of carbon-fiber/polymer composites: matrix, temperature and residual stress effects. Compos. Sci. Technol. 57 (1997) 1309–1329

[4.45] Klapp, O.; Reiling, K.; Schlimmer, M.: Weiterentwicklung des Zugscherversuchs nach DIN 54451 zur Ermittlung der Tau-Gamma-Funktion von Klebschichten in einer einfach überlappten Klebung. Schweißen und Schneiden 52 (2000) 670–674

[4.46] Ebling, A.; Hiltner, A.; Baer, E.: Effect of peel rate and temperature on delamination toughness of PC-SAN microlayers. Polymer 40 (1999) 1525–1531

[4.47] Fahrenholz, H.: Prüfung von Kunststoffen – Der Zugversuch. Zwick Materialprüfung, Anwendungstechnische Information DAI 00703 (2004) 1–20

228 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

[4.48] Spathis, G.: Kontou, E.: An experimental and analytic study of the large strain response of glassy polymers with a noncontact laser extensometer. J. Appl. Polym. Sci. 71 (1999) 2007– 2015

[4.49] G’Sell, C.; Hiver, J.M.; Dahoun, A.; Souahi, A.: Video-controlled tensile testing of polymers and metals beyound the necking point. J. Mater. Sci. 27 (1992) 5031–5039

[4.50] Meddad, A.; Fisa, B.: Fiber-matrix debonding in glass bead-filled polystyrene. J. Mater. Sci. 32 (1997) 1177–1185

[4.51] Bohse, J.: Acoustic emission characteristics of micro-failure processes in polymer blends and composites. Compos. Sci. Technol. 60 (2000) 1213–1226

[4.52] Linag, Y.; Sun, C.; Ansari, F.: Acoustic emission characterization of damage in hybrid fiber-reinforced polymer rods. J. Compos. Constr. 8 (2004) 70–78

[4.53] Predak, S.; Lütze, S.; Zweschper, T.; Stößel, R.; Busse, G.: Vergleichende zerstörungsfreie characterizing. Materialprüfung 44 (2002) 14–15

[4.54] Quatravaux, T.; Elkoun, S.; G’Sell, C.; Cangemi, L.; Meimon, Y.: Experimental characterization of the volume strain of poly(vinylidene fluoride) in the region of homogeneous plastic deformation. J. Polym. Sci. B–Polym. Phys. 40 (2002) 2516–2522

[4.55] Gerhard, H.; Busse, G.: Use of ultrasound excitation and optical-lockin method for speckle interferometry displacement imaging. In: Djordjevic, B.B.; Hentschel, M.P. (Eds.): Nondestructive Characterisation of Materials IX. Springer, Berlin (2003) 525–534

[4.56] Steinchen, W.; Lianxiang, Y.: Digital shearography: Theory and application of Digital Speckle Pattern Shearing Interferometry. SPIE-International Society for Optical Engine (2003)

[4.57] Kugler, H.P.; Drude, H.; Senftleben, K.-U.: Messung der Dehnungsverteilung von Metallen im Zugversuch. Materialprüfung 40 (1998) 231–234

[4.58] Apitz, O.; Bückle, R.; Drude, H.; Hoffrichter, W.; Kugler, H.P.; Schwarze, R.: Laser extensometers for application in static, cyclic and high strain rate experiments. Strain Measurement in the 21st Century, Lancaster (UK) 5.–6. September 2001, Proceedings (2001) 52–55

[4.59] Bierögel, C.; Fahnert, T.; Grellmann, W.: Deformation behaviour of reinforced polyamide materials evaluated by laser extensometry and acoustic emission analysis. Strain Measurement in the 21st Century, Lancaster (UK) 5.–6. September, 2001, Proceedings (2001) 56–59

[4.60] Szabo, I.: Einführung in die Technische Mechanik. Springer, Berlin (2002) [4.61] Käufer, H,; Hesselbrock, B.: Über die Verschiebung der neutralen Linie and ihr

Zusammenhang mit den Randfaserdehnungen bei biegebeanspruchten Polymere. Z. Werkststofftechnik 8 (1977) 92–99

[4.62] Flexman, E.A.: Verhalten von Polyamid 66 bei Schlagbeanspruchung. Kunststoffe 69 (1979) 172–174

[4.63] Vincent, P.I.: Impact tests and service performance of thermoplastics. Plastics Institute, London (1971)

[4.64] George, J.; Prasannakumari, L.; Koshy, P.; Varughese, K. T.; Sabu, T.: Tensile impact strength of blends of high-density polyethylene and acrylonitrile–butadiene–rubber: Effect of blend ratio and compatibilization. Polym. Plast. Technol. Eng. 34 (1995) 561–579

[4.65] Oberbach, K.: Untersuchung des Dauerschwingverhaltens. In: Carlowitz, B. (Ed.) Band 1, Die Kunststoffe. Chemie, Physik, Technologie. In: Becker, G.W.; Braun D. (Eds.) Kunststoff-Handbuch. Carl Hanser, Munich (1990)

[4.66] Ehrenstein, G.W.; Hoffmann, L.: INFACO-Ermüdungsverhalten von Faserverbund- kunststoffen. Lehrstuhl für Kunststofftechnik. Universität Erlangen-Nürnberg (1993/2001)

4.10 References 229

[4.67] Dengel, D.; Bergmann, N.: Über die Eignung der Wechselbiegemaschine „WEBI“ zur Ermittlung von Ermüdungskennwerten. Materialwiss. Werkstofftech. 23 (1992) 217–223

[4.68] IMA-Prüfvorschrift C/1: Planung and Auswertung von Ermüdungsfestigkeitsversuchen. IMA-PV C/1, IMA GmbH Dresden (1996)

[4.69] Degischer, H.-P. (Ed.): Verbundwerkstoffe. Wiley VCH, Weinheim (2003) [4.70] INFACO-database, M-Base Engineering + Software GmbH Aachen, www.m-base.de [4.71] Datenbank WIAM-METALLINFO. Werkstoffinformation and Werkstoffauswahl, IMA

GmbH Dresden, www.wiam.de [4.72] Autorenkollektiv: Langzeitverhalten von Plastwerkstoffen. Thematisches Heft, IfL-

Mitteilungen, Dresden 3 (1980) [4.73] Höninger, H.; Reichelt, E. u.a.: Langzeit-Deformationsverhalten von Plastwerkstoffen.

Schriftenreihe Materialökonomie 32 (1982) [4.74] Pöllet, P.: Automatisierte Zeitstandprüfung – Verfahren mit berührungsloser Dehnungs-

messung. Kunststoffe 75 (1985) 829–833 [4.75] Knauer, B.; Lustig, V.; Bihlmayer, G.: Bewertung and Aussagen der Messergebnisse bei der

Langzeitprüfung am Polymertest LZ 120. 13. wissenschaftlich-technische Tagung „Verstärkte Plaste 90“, Dresden R10 (1990) 1–10

[4.76] IMA-Prüfvorschrift: Kriechverhalten an Kunststoffen. IMA-PV B/2, IMA GmbH Dresden (1997)

[4.77] Reichelt, E.: Langzeit-Deformationsverhalten von Kunststoffen. Kunststoffe 76 (1986) 971–974

[4.78] Höninger, H.; Reichelt, E.: Beeinflussung des Langzeit-Deformationsverhalten von Thermoplasten durch anorganische Zusatzstoffe. Dissertation TU Dresden (1986)

[4.79] Müller, K.: Anwendung einer neuen Härtemeßmethode auf der Basis des Vickers- Verfahrens. Kunststoffe 60 (1970) 265–273

[4.80] Baltá-Calleja, F.J.; Bassett, D.C.: Microindentation hardness of oriented chain-extended polyethylene. J. Polym. Sci. Polym. Symp. 58 (1977) 157–167

[4.81] Fett, T.: Zusammenhang zwischen der Rockwell- -Härte nach ASTM D 785 and der Kugeldruckhärte nach DIN 53456 für Kunststoffe. Materialprüfung 14 (1972) 151-153

[4.82] Weiler, W.W.: Härteprüfung an Metallen and Kunststoffen. Expert, Ehningen (1990) [4.83] Tobisch, K.: Über den Zusammenhang zwischen Shore A und Shore D Härte. KGK-

Kautsch. Gummi Kunst. 34 (1981) 347–349 [4.84] Fröhlich, F.; Grau, P.; Grellmann, W.: Performance and analysis of recording

microhardness tests. Phys. Status Solidi a-Appl. Res. (a) 42 (1977) 79–89 [4.85] Baltá-Calleja, F.J.; Fakirov, S.: Microhardness of Polymers. Cambridge University Press

(2000) [4.86] Koch, T.: Morphologie und Mikrohärte von Polypropylen-Werkstoffen. Dissertation,

Technische Universität Wien (2003) [4.87] Karger-Kocsis, J.; Moos, E.; Mudra, I.; Varga, J.: Effects of molecular weight on the

perforation impact behavior of injection-molded plaques of - and -phase isotactic polypropylene. J. Macromol. Sci. Phys. B 38 (1999) 647–662

[4.88] Alberola, N.; Cavaille, J.Y.; Perez, J.: Mechanical spectrometry of alpha relaxations of high- density polyethylene. J. Polym. Sci. B–Polym. Phys. 28 (1990) 569–586

[4.89] Tabor, D.: The Hardness of Metals. Clarendon, Oxford (1951) [4.90] Studman, C.J.; Moore, M.A.; Jones, S.E.: On the correlation of indentation experiments.

J. Phys. D: Appl. Phys. 10 (1977) 949–956 [4.91] Johnson, K.L.: The correlation of indentation experiments. J. Mech. Phys. Solids 18 (1970)

115–126

230 4 Mechanical Properties of Polymers

[4.92] May, M.; Fröhlich, F.; Grau, P.; Grellmann, W.: Anwendung der Methode der registrierenden Mikrohärteprüfung für die Ermittlung von mechanischen Materialkennwerten an Polymerwerkstoffen. Plaste Kautschuk 30 (1983) 149–153

[4.93] Habig, K.-H.: Verschleiß and Härte von Werkstoffen. Carl Hanser, Munich (1990) 18–141 [4.94] DIN 50321: Verschleiß-Meßgrößen (published 1979, retracted in November 1997). In:

DIN-Taschenbuch – Tribologie. Beuth, Berlin (1990) [4.95] Hornbogen, E.: Werkstoffeigenschaften und Verschleiß. Metall 12 (1980) 1079 [4.96] Beringer, H. P.; Heinke, G.; Strickle, E.: Polymere im Verschleißtest. Technische

Rundschau 25 (1991) 46–50 [4.97] Czichos, Z.; Habig, K.-H.: Tribologie Handbuch – Reibung and Verschleiß. Vieweg,

Braunschweig (1992) [4.98] Friedrich, K.: Advances in Composite Tribology. Elsevier, Amsterdam (1993) [4.99] Song, J.; Maertin, C.; Ehrenstein, G.: The effect of self-reinforcement on the tribological

behaviour of thermoplastics. ANTEC 1988, Society of Plastic Engineers (1988) 587–590 [4.100] Friedrich, K.: Friction and Wear of Polymer Composites. Elsevier, Amsterdam (1986) [4.101] Häger, A. M.: Polyaryletherketone für den Einsatz in Gleitlagern und Gleitelementen.

Shaker, Aachen (1997) 11–22 [4.102] Hübner, W.; Gradt, T.; Börner, H.; Döring, R.: Tieftemperatur-Reibverhalten von

Polymer-Werkstoffen. Tribologie und Schmierungstechnik 42 (1995) 5, 244–251 [4.103] Gesellschaft für Tribologie e.V.: Arbeitsblatt 7 Tribologie: Verschleiß, Reibung,

Definitionen, Begriffe, Prüfung. Ausgabe September 2002, Gesellschaft für Tribologie e.V. (GFT), Ernststraße 12, D-47443 Moers, www.gft-ev.de

[4.104] Lancaster, J.K.: Dry bearings: a survey of materials and factors effecting their performance. Tribol. Int. 6 (1973) 219–251

[4.105] Tanaka, K.; Nagai, T.: Effect of counterface roughness on the friction and wear of polytetrafluoroethylene and polyethylene. In: Ludema, K. C. (Ed.): Wear of Materials- 1985. ASME (1985) 397–404

[4.106] Feinle, P.: Tribologische Untersuchungen an unverstärkten und glasfaserverstärkten Kunststoffen. Amts- and Mitteilungsblatt der Bundesanstalt für Materialprüfung (BAM) 13 (1983) Nr. 2, 156–162

[4.107] Uetz, H.; Wiedemeyer, J.: Tribologie der Polymere. Carl Hanser, Munich (1984) [4.108] Lu, Z.: Geschmierte Hochtemperatur-Verbundwerkstoffe für Anwendungen als

Gleitelemente. In: Deutsche Hochschulschriften No. 527, Hänsel-Hohenhausen, Engelbach (1994)

[4.109] Friedrich, K.; Lu, Z.; Häger, A. M.: Overview on polymer composites for friction and wear application. Theor. Appl. Fract. Mech. 19 (1993) 1–11

[4.110] Friedrich, K.; Karger-Kocsis, J.; Lu, Z.: Effects of steel counterface roughness and temperature on the friction and wear of PE(E)K composites under dry sliding conditions. Wear 148 (1991) 235–247

[4.111] Briscoe, B. J.: Interfacial friction of polymer composites. General fundamental principles. In: Friedrich, K. (Ed.): Friction and Wear of Polymer Composites. Elsevier, Amsterdam (1986) 25-59

[4.112] Tanaka, K.; Yamada, Y.: Effect of temperature on the friction and wear of some heat- resistant polymers. ACS Symposium series: Polymer Wear and Its Control. Washington DC, 287 (1985) 103–128

[4.113] Mittmann, H. U.; Czichos, H.: Reibungsmessungen und Oberflächenuntersuchungen an Kunststoff-Metall Gleitpaarungen. Materialprüfung 17 (1975) 366

[4.114] Jones, S. P.; Jansen, R.; Fusaro, R. L.: Preliminary investigation of neural network techniques to predict tribological properties. Tribol. Trans. 40 (1997) 312–320

4.10 References 231

[4.115] Velten, K.; Reinicke, R.; Friedrich, K.: Wear volume prediction with artificial neural networks. Tribol. Int. 33 (2000) 731–736

[4.116] Friedrich, K.; Reinicke, R.; Zhang, Z.: Wear of polymer composites. Proceedings: Institution of Mechanical Engineers Vol. 216 Part J: J. Eng. Tribol. (2002) 415–426

[4.117] Zhang, Z.; Reinicke, R.; Klein, P.; Friedrich, K.; Velten, K.: Wear prediction of polymer composites using artificial neural networks. Proceedings of the International Conference on Composites in Material and Structural Engineering, Prague 3.–6.6., (2001) 203–206

[4.118] Gyurova, L.A.; Friedrich, K.: Artifical neural networks for predicting sliding friction and wear properties of polyphenylene sulphide composites. Tribol. Int. 44 (2011) 603–609

[4.119] Reinicke, R.; Haupert, F.; Friedrich, K.: On the tribological behavior of selected, injection molded thermoplastic composites. Compos. A-Appl. Sci. Manuf. 29 (1998) 763–771

[4.120] Reinicke, R.: Eigenschaftsprofil neuer Verbundwerkstoffe für tribologische Anwendungen im Automobilbereich. In: Neitzel, M. (Ed.): IVW Schriftenreihe Bd. 21, Institut für Verbundwerkstoffe GmbH, Kaiserslautern (2001)

[4.121] Friedrich, K.; Chang, L.; Haupert, F.: Current and future applications of polymer composites in the field of tribology. In: Nikolais, L; Meo, M.; Miletta, E. (Eds.): Composite Materials. Springer, New York, USA (2011), http://www.springer.com/materials/special+ types/books/978-0-85729-165-3

[4.122] Friedrich, K.; Schlarb, A. K. (Eds): Tribology of polymeric nanocomposites. 2. Edition, Elsevier, Amsterdam (2013)

all articles will be uesed/Mechanochemisty 2020.pdf

PTFE Tribology and the Role of Mechanochemistry in the Development of Protective Surface Films Kathryn L. Harris,† Angela A. Pitenis,‡ W. Gregory Sawyer,†,‡ Brandon A. Krick,§ Gregory S. Blackman,∥

Daniel J. Kasprzak,∥ and Christopher P. Junk*,∥

†Department of Materials Science and Engineering and ‡Department of Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering, University of Florida, Gainesville, Florida 32611, United States §Department of Mechanical Engineering and Mechanics Lehigh University, Bethlehem, Pennsylvania 18015, United States ∥Experimental Station E500/2604B, DuPont Central Research and Development, 200 Powder Mill Road, P.O. Box 8352 Wilmington, Delaware 19803, United States

ABSTRACT: The wear and friction behavior of ultralow wear polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)/α-alumina composites first described by Burris and Sawyer in 2006 has been heavily studied, but the mechanisms responsible for the 4 orders of magnitude improvement in wear over unfilled PTFE are still not fully understood. It has been shown that the formation of a polymeric transfer film is crucial to achieving ultralow wear on a metal countersurface. However, the detailed chemical mechanism of transfer film formation and its role in the exceptional wear performance has yet to be described. There has been much debate about the role of chemical interactions between the PTFE, the filler, and the metal countersurface, and some researchers have even concluded that chemical changes are not an important part of the ultralow wear mechanism in these materials. Here, a “stripe” test allowed detailed spectroscopic studies of PTFE/α-alumina transfer films in various stages of development, which led to a proposed mechanism which accounts for the creation of chemically distinct films formed on both surfaces of the wear couple. PTFE chains are broken during sliding and undergo a series of reactions to produce carboxylate chain ends, which have been shown to chelate to both the metal surface and to the surface of the alumina filler particles. These tribochemical reactions form a robust polymer-on-polymer system that protects the steel countersurface and is able to withstand hundreds of thousands of cycles of sliding with almost no wear of the polymer composite after the initial run-in period. The mechanical scission of carbon−carbon bonds in the backbone of PTFE under conditions of sliding contact is supported mathematically using the Hamaker model for van der Waals interactions between polymer fibrils and the countersurface. The necessity for ambient moisture and oxygen is explained, and model experiments using small molecules confirm the reactions in the proposed mechanism.

1. INTRODUCTION

Surface interfaces are the least understood and by extension perhaps the most critical design element in machines and mechanical assemblies. Tribological phenomena (i.e. friction and wear) at these interfaces are fundamental to system performance, longevity, and reliability. The two most common metrics for tribological interactions are friction coefficient and wear rate. Contrary to rudimentary intuition, they are not material properties and low friction does not equal low wear. Instead, they are a function of numerous system parameters, including material pairing, applied contact pressure, sliding velocity, sliding geometry and environmental conditions. Furthermore, these metrics are temporally variant and depend on a series of seemingly rare interactions that are a function of multiscale mechanics, chemistry, physics and materials phenomena. Solid lubricants are of immense tribological importance at

these interfaces because of the breadth of applications in which they are more desirable than other engineering materials due to

higher operating temperatures and contact pressures, vacuum environments, or reciprocating motions. Polytetrafluoroethy- lene (PTFE) in particular is used in a large number of tribological applications because of its uniquely low coefficient of friction.1−5 However, the neat polymer has very poor wear characteristics (K ∼ 7 × 10−4 mm3/(N·m)).5−9 PTFE composites have been widely studied because the inclusion of fillers improved the wear rate by 1−2 orders of magni- tude.6−8,10−12 Wear abatement of PTFE using fillers of various sizes and chemical composition is mechanistically unique, as PTFE itself has been shown to wear in a manner quite contrary to other engineering polymers and the mechanism thereof has been of interest for decades.5,6,13−15

The inclusion of micrometer-sized metal oxide particles (ZrO2 and TiO2) reduced the wear rate of PTFE by 1 or 2

Received: March 3, 2015 Revised: May 7, 2015 Published: May 26, 2015

Article

pubs.acs.org/Macromolecules

© 2015 American Chemical Society 3739 DOI: 10.1021/acs.macromol.5b00452 Macromolecules 2015, 48, 3739−3745

D ow

nl oa

de d

vi a

U N

IV O

F N

E W

H A

V E

N o

n M

ar ch

2 , 2

02 0

at 1

7: 41

:4 9

(U T

C ).

Se e

ht tp

s: //p

ub s.

ac s.

or g/

sh ar

in gg

ui de

lin es

f or

o pt

io ns

o n

ho w

to le

gi tim

at el

y sh

ar e

pu bl

is he

d ar

tic le

s.

orders of magnitude, and was initially favored over the inclusion of nanoparticles which were thought too small to prevent excessive wear of the polymer.9 At the time, wear reduction via fillers was considered from a largely mechanical standpoint. In the 1990s and 2000s, certain nanoparticles were shown to be relatively effective at reducing the wear rate of PTFE,7,16 in 2002 Li experimented with reducing wear using various loadings of ZnO nanoparticles,17 and in 2006 Burris and Sawyer discovered that five weight percent α-phase alumina particles reduced wear by an additional factor of 100, a total of 4 orders of magnitude improvement compared to the neat PTFE.18 The term “ultralow wear” PTFE composites has been used to describe several exceptional materials with wear rates less than 10−6 mm3/ (N·m).17−24

The ultralow wear behavior of these composites is associated with the formation of a thin, robust tribofilm on both sliding surfaces.20,22,25,26 The mechanism for the formation of these films has yet to be fully described. In fact, some debate exists as to whether the formation of the film is necessary to maintain the ultralow wear of the PTFE/alumina system, or whether it is simply a consequence of the wear debris morphology of the composite. Recent publications have maintained that the effect of the countersurface on low wear is purely mechanical, and the surface chemistry is not a significant factor in the formation of the transfer film.27 Others have proposed structures28,29 and performed computational modeling30−32 in an attempt to describe the formation of new chemical species at the interface, but a clear understanding of the formation of new reactive end groups and how they interact with the metal surface and the filler has not previously been described. Chemical analyses of PTFE/alumina transfer films in various

stages of development, made possible by a “stripe test”,23,24,33

led to a proposed chemical mechanism responsible for the exceptional wear performance of these PTFE/α-alumina composites. The ultralow wear mechanism involves the breaking of PTFE carbon−carbon bonds at the interface. This chain scission occurs even at ambient temperatures, and at relatively low speeds and pressures. The next chemical reactions require oxygen and water from the ambient environment to produce reactive polymer end groups. The recirculation of wear debris eventually leads to thin, robust, and adherent polymeric transfer and running films which protect both the metal surface and the polymer from wear. Upon establishing thin and robust tribofilms the wear of the PTFE/alumina composites falls into the range of 10−7 to 10−8 mm3/(N·m). A deeper understanding of the ultralow wear mechanisms for these exceptional materials could lead to new applications and new design paradigms.

2. MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1. Tribology Test Methods. A “stripe test”23,24,33 was

performed in which the reciprocating stroke length decreased as the number of sliding cycles increased at predetermined cycle intervals (Figure 1a). This pattern of transfer film formation preserved and isolated lower cycle areas of the polymeric film on the metal. These areas acted as snapshots, allowing physical and chemical analyses of the steps involved in transfer film evolution. The stripe test was performed using a linear reciprocating

tribometer with flat-on-flat sample geometry as described by Schmitz.34 A six-axis force transducer measured normal and frictional forces. The polished face of the polymer sample was loaded against the stainless steel countersample at 250 N for a nominal contact pressure of around 6.3 MPa. The contact pressure may be approximated in this way given that the polymer sample wears into conformity with the surface within the first thousand cycles. Initial asperities under much

higher contact pressure are quickly worn away. The steel counter- sample reciprocated at 50.8 mm/s on a linear ball-screw stage. The reciprocating stroke length started at 88.9 mm and was reduced by 10.2 mm after each experiment until the final test which was 27.9 mm long.

2.2. Measurements of Friction. Friction coefficients were calculated as the quotient of the average frictional force and the average normal force.34 The associated uncertainties in the friction coefficient and wear rate calculations are described in greater detail in Schmitz et al.34,35

2.3. Measurements of Wear. The change in mass of the polymer sample after each test, mloss, was measured using a Mettler Toledo scale (±10 μg) and was used in conjunction with the density of the sample, ρ, to calculate the change in volume per test, Vloss. This wear volume, Vloss (mm

3), divided by the product of the normal force, Fn (N), and the sliding distance, d (m), produces a wear rate, K, as described by Archard,36 reported in units of mm3/(N·m) (eq 1). Wear rates are commonly calculated both as total volume lost per total distance slid (single point wear rate), and as volume lost per test per distance slid per test (differential wear rate), Figure 1b. The total wear rate therefore includes the run-in period of relatively high wear before the onset of ultralow wear upon the stabilization of the transfer and running films on the steel countersurface and the polymer sliding surface, respectively. The test wear rate conveniently differentiates between early, higher wear rates, and the ultralow minimums reached at a high number of sliding cycles. A “steady state” wear rate is defined as the wear rate reached and maintained after the run-in period.

ρ = =K

m F d

V F d

loss

n

loss

n (1)

2.4. Polymer Sample Preparation. A polymer composite was made using a DuPont Teflon PTFE 7C resin matrix filled with 5 wt % α-phase alumina (Nanostructured & Amorphous Materials Inc., Stock No. 1015WW).21,23,37,38 The polymer sample was molded and prepared as previously described in Pitenis et al.,23 sonicated in methanol for 30 min, and allowed to dry for 3 h in laboratory air prior to testing.

The powder mixture was sonicated in extra dry 2-propanol using an ultrasonic horn and placed in a fume hood where the solvent was

Figure 1. (a) A stripe test utilized spatial intervals in sliding to expose the stages of transfer film and wear debris evolution from one to one million cycles. (b) Single point and differential wear rates of the composite decrease as sliding progresses. (c) The friction coefficient of the composite decreases as sliding progresses. Error bars indicate the standard deviation of the measurement during each test, dotted lines span the duration of the tests over which averages were measured. Reprinted with permission from ref 23. Copyright 2015 Springer.

Macromolecules Article

DOI: 10.1021/acs.macromol.5b00452 Macromolecules 2015, 48, 3739−3745

3740

allowed to evaporate. The dried powder mixture was compressed in a 440C stainless steel cylindrical mold to approximately 100 MPa in a hydraulic press. The sample was sintered in an oven, ramped at 2 °C/ min to 380 °C, where it was held for 4 h and then cooled to room temperature. It was then machined into a pin (6.3 × 6.3 × 12.7 mm). The square faces of the pin were polished with 800 grit silicon carbide sandpaper to an approximate average roughness (Ra) of 100 nm. 2.5. Metal Countersurface Sample and Preparation. The

countersample used in this experiment was a flat, rectangular (115 × 25 × 3.7 mm) plate of 304 stainless steel finished with a lapping process (Ra ∼ 150 nm), the standard running surface used in previous experiments with the PTFE/alumina composites.19,21,23,25,26,39 The countersample was cleaned with soap and water, rinsed with methanol, and allowed to dry for approximately 20 min prior to experiments. 2.6. Spectroscopy. Infrared spectra used to analyze the worn

metal surfaces and transfer films were obtained using a Thermo Scientific Nicolet 6700 FT-IR spectrometer with a Thermo Scientific Nicolet Continuμm infrared microscope (Thermo Fisher Scientific) in reflectance mode. A 100 μm square aperture defined the area of analysis. Background spectra were collected in a clean area on the metal, away from the fluoropolymer wear track. Transfer film spectra were obtained by reflectance off of the

midpoint of the worn metal surface at three spots along the centerline within each of the seven exposed transfer film areas using an FT-IR microscope with a 100 μm aperture. This triplicate analysis showed consistent results within a given exposed area. The cumulative wear debris from the edge of the 1 M cycles region

was analyzed by attenuated total reflectance infrared (ATR-IR) using a Golden Gate (Specac) horizontal diamond ATR unit. Polymer spectra were collected with pressure applied from the overhead clamping device. Spectra were corrected for the ATR effect (depth of penetration versus wavenumber) to closely resemble transmission spectra. Transfer residue spectra were collected after polymer samples were analyzed and removed from the diamond surface, but before cleaning with ethanol. No pressure was applied from the clamping device for residue spectra. Background spectra were collected with a clean diamond surface. Transmission spectra of the pressed polymer films (PTFE 7C/α-

alumina/C6F13COOH and PTFE 7C/α-alumina) were obtained using a Nicolet Magna 560 FT-IR spectrometer (Thermo Fisher Scientific). A background spectrum was first collected with an empty film card of the type used to mount the films. Spectra were converted to absorbance for comparison, and the end group region (1300−1800 cm−1) was examined. The most effective means to detect changes in this region was to use a C−F overtone peak near 2365 cm−1 as a guide (after spectral subtraction of a PTFE 7C control film). The region below ∼1320 cm−1 was distorted due to the intense C−F stretch region of these thick disk samples.

3. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

The wear and friction performance of the PTFE/α-alumina composite was consistent with previous studies of similar composite materials.19−23,27,40 Over the first 10k cycles a run-in period of moderately high wear was observed, followed by a decrease in wear rate over the next 100k cycles to less than 10−6

mm3/(N·m) (Figure 1b). The coefficient of friction also decreased slightly over the course of the experiment (Figure 1c), remaining near μ ∼ 0.19. Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy (FT-IR) was

performed within the exposed areas of transfer film formed during the 1, 100k, and 1M cycle tests and on the cumulative wear debris for chemical analysis of the evolution of the wear system. FTIR analysis of the 1 cycle transfer film verified that fluoropolymer had been transferred to the metal, yet revealed an unusual set of peaks in the C−F region consisting of the typical PTFE peaks at 1203 and 1149 cm−1 along with a new peak at 1253 cm−1 (Figure 2a). This additional peak, originally

derived from first-principles calculations by Moynihan in 195941 has rarely been observed experimentally. To our knowledge, it has previously been observed for PTFE powder/film,42 PTFE polymer slid against a film of poly- ethylene,43 and PTFE polymer slid against 304 stainless steel.44

Lauer attributed variations in intensity of the peak near 1250 cm−1 to a stretching mode of the polymer molecule, and noted that its intensity varied with respect to the alignment of helical PTFE chains relative to the detector when using a polarizer.44

This observation implied that aligned PTFE chains were transferred to steel after a single sliding pass, which agrees with surface plasmon resonance results from Krick et al.45 and XPS results from Uca̧r.46

Figure 2. Infrared reflectance results from the metal surface after (a) one cycle of sliding, (b) 100k (gray line) and 1M (black line) cycles, and (c) ATR-IR spectrum of cumulative wear debris. Reprinted with permission from ref 23. Copyright 2015 Springer.

Macromolecules Article

DOI: 10.1021/acs.macromol.5b00452 Macromolecules 2015, 48, 3739−3745

3741

Because of its extremely high molecular weight (∼ tens of millions g/mol47), granular PTFE is unlikely to transfer an entire chain to the metal surface, thus C−C backbone bond scission is likely involved. A simple mathematical argument can be made to support the bond breaking and transfer of PTFE chains in the first cycle of sliding. The model is based on a balance between the sum of all the van der Waals attractions between a PTFE fibril aligned to the sliding direction (as has been observed historically8,13,48−51) and the metal surface, and the force required to break a PTFE fibril (Figure 3). In the case of expanded PTFE in which PTFE filaments are highly aligned, the tensile strength of the fibril is approximately 400−700 MPa. The Hamaker solution for the attractive energy between a flat surface and a cylinder is a function of the Hamaker constant, A12 (here, the theoretical value of the Hamaker constant for PTFE-silica (7.6 × 10−20 J) was used52), the radius of the fibril, R, the length of the fibril, L, and the separation distance between the fibril and the surface, d. The energy equation may be differentiated to yield the attractive force, Fadh, per unit length (eq 2). Multiplying the attractive force, Fadh, by the friction coefficient of PTFE (∼0.1) yields the force applied to an aligned fibril in contact over the length, L during sliding. Setting this force equal to the force required to break the fibril, σf, eq 3 allows us to solve for a critical fibril length Lc (eq 4). Any fibril in contact with the countersurface over a length Lc or greater may be broken in sliding. This hypothesis is supported in the literature by Makinson in 19645 and Brainard in 1973,53

and evidence for the transfer of oriented films of PTFE onto a glass substrate during sliding contact has previously been published.54

= ×

F L

A R d8 2

adh 12 5/2 (2)

μ σ π=F Radh f 2

(3)

σ μ

∼L A

d R 36

c f

12

5/2 3/2

(4)

A control spectrum of PTFE was obtained by slicing through the sample using a razor blade, thereby exposing the internal PTFE composite with no sliding history, but the same thermal and environmental history. When the diamond ATR crystal was held in place against this fresh surface, the spectrum contained the expected IR peaks observed for bulk PTFE (Figure 3c-i) at 1203 and 1149 cm−1. After the diamond ATR crystal was removed from contact with the bulk PTFE, the IR spectrum was reacquired in air. Not only were peaks in the C−F region still visible, but the spectrum now included an additional absorbance peak at 1253 cm−1 (Figure 3c-iii), giving a spectrum identical to the one from the 1 cycle sliding experiment (Figure 3c-ii). This is evidence for the transfer of aligned PTFE chains from the cut surface of the composite to the ATR crystal after simple static contact. The same trio of infrared peaks was also

Figure 3. (a) PTFE filament of average radius R at separation distance d from a countersample must be in contact over a length Lc in order to break under tension imposed during sliding. (b) Plot of critical fibril length Lc versus average fibril radius R for separation d = 1, 2, and 10 Å illustrates the increase in Lc as R and d increase. The shaded circles represent aspect ratios as indicated. (c) (i) IR spectra of bulk PTFE, (ii) the 1 cycle transfer film, and (iii) the residue on the ATR crystal after pulling away from the bulk.

Macromolecules Article

DOI: 10.1021/acs.macromol.5b00452 Macromolecules 2015, 48, 3739−3745

3742

obtained from similar polymer transfer to the ATR crystal under static contact from an as-molded PTFE surface, which eliminated the razor cut as the source of the transferred polymer chains. Transfer of PTFE to metal surfaces through static contact in high vacuum has also been observed by Auger photoelectron spectroscopy (AES),53 but to our knowledge this has never been observed in ambient air. Within the 100k cycle region new broad peaks at 3388, 1650,

and 1432 cm−1 were observed, in addition to the PTFE backbone peaks at 1203 and 1149 cm−1, and within the 1 M cycle region these peaks dominate the spectrum (Figure 2b). In perfluoropolymers, carboxylic acid end groups55 are often observed. The peaks are relatively sharp and are assigned to a mixture of both monomer (1775 cm−1) and dimer (1813 cm−1) forms. Much broader and lower frequency carbonyl peaks (1655, 1441 cm−1) have been reported for fluorinated carboxylic acids chelated to metals as shown by Kajdas et al.56,57 In Kajdas’ experiment, perfluorooctanoic acid (C7F15COOH) was coated onto a steel surface and then heated, and the resulting spectrum is reproduced in Figure 4a.

Figure 4c shows the striking similarity between the data from Kajdas and the IR spectrum taken from the 1 M cycle region, indicating similar metal chelation must occur in each case. Note that the peak at 1655 cm−1 also contains an absorbance for water, with other water peaks appearing above 3000 cm−1. In a separate experiment, a small molecule model compound

(C6F13COOH) and the same α-alumina were premixed and dispersed in PTFE 7C. The result was a transmission IR spectrum (Figure 4b) also very similar to that of the ATR-IR spectrum of the running film (Figure 4d). Additionally, the ATR-IR spectrum of the running surface of the polymer was quite similar to that of the transfer film, indicating similar chemical changes in each. A control experiment without α- alumina yielded the expected much sharper monomer and dimer Rf−COOH acid peaks at 1813 and 1775 cm−1, respectively. These IR results suggest that PTFE carboxylate chain ends not only chelate to the steel surface under the transfer film, but also to the surface of the alumina filler particles. Hydrocarbon carboxylic acids are known to react with the amphoteric surface of alumina particles,58 so it is not

surprising that perfluorinated carboxylic acids, which are much stronger Brønsted acids,59 react with and chelate to the alumina surface, even in the absence of heating. The sample for Figure 4b was made by combining α-alumina

from the same source as used for the composite (10 g), tridecafluoroheptanoic acid (C6F13COOH, TCI America, 98%, 0.23 g) and dry isopropyl alcohol (99.9%, 0.010% water, 30 mL) in a drybox. The α-alumina had been predried in a Schenk flask in a 150 °C oil bath for 5 h, which was then backfilled with dry nitrogen and sealed for transportation to the drybox. (Isopropyl alcohol was chosen since it could disperse the alumina and dissolve the acid.) The slurry was stirred briefly in the drybox, moved into the fume hood, then reduced in vacuo (150 Torr) in a 29 °C water bath to minimize vaporization of the acid. Using a roller mill, the acid/alumina mixture (0.53 g) was dispersed in dried PTFE 7C (10 g) over 18 h. A control sample for IR comparison to the PTFE 7C/α-alumina/acid mixture was created in a drybox by dissolving tridecafluor- oheptanoic acid (11 mg) in Freon-11 (trichlorofluoromethane, 99%), which was then added to PTFE 7C, predried in the same manner as previously described. The solvent was removed in a water bath in vacuo as previously described. These polymer mixtures were prepared for IR analysis by

cold pressing into 13 mm circular disks approximately 100 mg each. Duplicate samples were prepared under 2.5−3 tons of force in a hydraulic press at ambient temperature. Pressing resulted in films approximately 350 μm thick. ATR-IR analysis (Figure 2c) of the cumulative wear debris at

the end of the 1 M cycle track (shown schematically in Figure 1a) showed large absorbance peaks for the PTFE backbone, but also contained smaller peaks for monomer and dimer carboxylic acids as well as the chelated salts. The cumulative wear debris contained polymer fragments shed during the entire wear process. As such, the chain-end chemical intermediates were observed here because further chemical modification or chelation was not possible after ejection from the wear track. The analysis of the evolution of the transfer film made

possible by the design of the stripe test, combined with years of laboratory wear test observations, led to the chemical mechanism proposed in Figure 5. Parts a and b of Figure 5 illustrate the first step of the process: mechanochemical breaking of a PTFE carbon−carbon bond5,53 to form perfluoroalkyl radicals. The steps of Figure 5b−e are mechanistically identical to e-beam irradiation of high molecular weight PTFE in ambient air.60−62 The perfluoroalkyl radicals react with atmospheric oxygen to form a peroxy radical (Figure 5c), which further decomposes into the more stable acyl fluoride end group (Figure 5d). The acyl fluoride end group is unstable toward water and will therefore hydrolyze in ambient humidity to form a carboxylic acid (Figure 5e). The dependence of the wear rate of this system on humidity and vacuum environments has been described previously.19,21 The HF produced55 during these steps likely goes on to form metal fluorides at the surface of the countersample. The carboxylic acids are able to chelate to the steel countersurface (Figure 5f), strongly adhering them to the surface to form the thin and robust transfer film.20,37

Jintang and Hongxin28 present a similar mechanism for mechanochemistry of PTFE, but do not mention the critical carboxylate groups which are the cause of the adhesive interaction between the transfer film and the metal counter- surface. Furthermore, the chelation of −COOH ended PTFE chains to the alumina fillers at the interface further reinforces

Figure 4. IR carbonyl-region spectra of the transfer film and running film compared to small molecule model reactions with perfluorinated carboxylic acids: (a) IR spectrum from Kajdas and Przedlacki57 (used with permission) showing the chelated salt of perfluorooctanoic acid on a steel surface; (b) IR spectrum obtained from a PTFE film filled with a mixture of alumina particles and perfluoroheptanoic acid; (c) IR reflectance spectrum of the 1 M cycle transfer film on the metal; (d) ATR-IR spectrum of the running surface of the polymer pin after 1 M cycles.

Macromolecules Article

DOI: 10.1021/acs.macromol.5b00452 Macromolecules 2015, 48, 3739−3745

3743

the running surface of the polymer, which in turn reduces the wear rate and the creep of the system. The mechanochemical interaction between the PTFE/α-alumina composite is the first step in a complex cascade of events. Low wear in this instance is a property of the system created during sliding, and as previously mentioned it is heavily dependent on the environ- ment. Despite much milder conditions than what are typically required for thermal bond cleavage in PTFE,63 similar reaction products are nonetheless detected in both the running and transfer films at the interface (Figure 6). At low sliding speeds, low nominal contact pressure, and a deviation not more than ∼1 °C from ambient temperature, it is the coupling of mechanical and chemical effects that ultimately facilitates the formation of the transfer and running films necessary to

maintain low wear for hundreds of thousands to millions of sliding cycles.

4. CONCLUSIONS Transfer of PTFE to the metal countersurface occurs during the first cycle of sliding as evidenced by FT-IR (Figure 2a) via mechanochemical chain scission supported by a van der Waals model given in Figure 3. As described previously, the wear rate of the composite was high during the run-in period and did not fall below 10−6 mm3/(N·m) until the 100k cycle test. This coincided with the appearance of IR peaks at 1650 and 1432 cm−1 (Figure 2b, Figure 4, parts c and d) which indicated the presence of chelated carboxylate polymer chain ends in the transfer and running films (Figure 5f). The concentration of these species increased significantly during the 1M cycle test (Figure 2b) as more and more chains broke and reacted to form carboxylate chelates with either metal or Al2O3 surfaces. Carboxylic acid chain ends that were not able to chelate to the surface before being ejected as wear debris were the source of the carboxylic acid monomers and dimers seen by IR in the cumulative wear debris (Figure 2c). The formation of an ultralow wear PTFE transfer film on 304

stainless steel is a complex process that involves the chemical interaction between the polymer composite, the embedded alumina particles, the ambient atmosphere, and the metal countersurface. Under reciprocating testing conditions, this is a cycle-dependent process relying on the mechanical input of energy to cause chain scission which initiates the radical-driven mechanism of transfer film formation. The individual reactions proposed have been previously observed in nontribological settings, but put together in this context they provide chemical insight into the observed wear behavior of this filled-PTFE composite. As illustrated in Figure 6, the formation and maintenance of this ultralow wear system arises from a complex set of variables which allow for the chemical modification of both sliding surfaces under relatively mild conditions.

■ AUTHOR INFORMATION Corresponding Author *(C.P.J.) Telephone: (302) 695-4550. E-mail: Christopher.P. Junk@DuPont.com. Notes The authors declare no competing financial interest.

Figure 5. Chain scission of PTFE (a) is caused mechanically by sliding (b). Environmental oxygen reacts with the radicals at the broken chain ends (c). These unstable end groups decompose to form an acyl fluoride (d). Moisture in the air hydrolyzes these groups to make carboxylic acids (e). Carboxylic acid end groups react with and chelate to the surface of the metal and alumina particles (f).

Figure 6. Low wearing tribological system is complex and subject to numerous variables. Radical chemistry at the sliding interface proceeds despite low speed, low nominal contact pressure, and low frictional temperature change. The circulation, rather than ejection, of debris between the transfer and running films is key to the high cycle maintenance of ultralow wear.

Macromolecules Article

DOI: 10.1021/acs.macromol.5b00452 Macromolecules 2015, 48, 3739−3745

3744

■ ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The authors thank the following people for support and helpful technical conversations: Heidi Burch, David L. Burris, Gary Halliday, Timothy Krizan, and Neil Washburn.

■ REFERENCES (1) Renfrew, M. M.; Lewis, E. E. Ind. Eng. Chem. 1946, 38 (9), 870− 877. (2) Shooter, K. V.; Tabor, D. Proc. Phys. Soc., Sect. B 1952, 65 (9), 661−671. (3) King, R. F.; Tabor, D. Proc. Phys. Soc., Sect. B 1953, 66 (9), 728− 736. (4) Flom, D. G.; Porile, N. T. J. Appl. Phys. 1955, 26 (9), 1088. (5) Makinson, K. R.; Tabor, D. Proc. R. Soc. London, Part A: Math. Phys. Eng. Sci. 1964, 281 (1384), 49−61. (6) Blanchet, T. A.; Kennedy, F. E. Wear 1992, 153 (1), 229−243. (7) Gong, D.; Xue, Q.; Wang, H. Wear 1989, 134, 283−295. (8) Tanaka, K.; Uchiyama, Y.; Toyooka, S. Wear 1973, 23 (2), 153− 172. (9) Tanaka, K.; Kawakami, S. Wear 1982, 79 (2), 221−234. (10) Blanchet, T. A.; Kennedy, F. E.; Jayne, D. T. 1993. (11) De-Li, G.; Bing, Z.; Qun-Ji, X.; Hong-Li, W. Wear 1990, 137 (2), 267−273. (12) Lai, S.-Q.; Yue, L.; Li, T.-S.; Hu, Z.-M. Wear 2006, 260 (4−5), 462−468. (13) Wheele, D. R. The transfer of polytetrafluoroethylene studied by X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy. Wear 1981, 66, 355−365. (14) Fischer, D.; Lappan, U.; Hopfe, I.; Eichhorn, K.; Lunkwitz, K. Polymer 1998, 39 (3), 573−582. (15) Yuan, X.-D.; Yang, X.-J. Wear 2010, 269 (3−4), 291−297. (16) Shi, Y. J.; Feng, X.; Wang, H. Y.; Liu, C.; Lu, X. H. Tribol. Int. 2007, 40 (7), 1195−1203. (17) Li, F.; Hu, K.; Li, J.; Zhao, B. Wear 2001, 249 (10−11), 877− 882. (18) Burris, D. L.; Sawyer, W. G. Wear 2006, 260 (7), 915−918. (19) Krick, B. A.; Ewin, J. J.; Blackman, G. S.; Junk, C. P.; Sawyer, W. G. Tribol. Int. 2012, 51, 42−46. (20) Ye, J.; Khare, H. S.; Burris, D. L. Wear 2014, 316 (1−2), 133− 143. (21) Pitenis, A. A.; Ewin, J. J.; Harris, K. L.; Sawyer, W. G.; Krick, B. A. Tribol. Lett. 2014, 53 (1), 189−197. (22) Krick, B. A.; Ewin, J. J.; McCumiskey, E. J. Tribol. Trans. 2014, 57 (6), 1058−1065. (23) Pitenis, A. A.; Harris, K. L.; Junk, C. P.; Blackman, G. S.; Sawyer, W. G.; Krick, B. A. Tribol. Lett. 2015, 57 (1), 4. (24) Urueña, J. M.; Pitenis, A. A.; Harris, K. L.; Sawyer, W. G. Tribol. Lett. 2015, 57 (1), 9. (25) Burris, D. L.; Sawyer, W. G. Tribol. Trans. 2005, 48 (2), 147− 153. (26) Burris, D. L.; Zhao, S.; Duncan, R.; Lowitz, J.; Perry, S. S.; Schadler, L. S.; Sawyer, W. G. Wear 2009, 267 (1−4), 653−660. (27) Blanchet, T.; Kandanur, S.; Schadler, L. Tribol. Lett. 2010, 40 (1), 11−21. (28) Jintang, G.; Hongxin, D. J. Appl. Polym. Sci. 1988, 36 (1), 73− 85. (29) Aderikha, V. N.; Krasnov, A. P.; Shapovalov, V. A.; Golub, A. S. Wear 2014, 320, 135−142. (30) Zuo, Z.; Yang, Y.; Qi, X.; Su, W.; Yang, X. Wear 2014, 320, 87− 93. (31) Onodera, T.; Kawasaki, K.; Nakakawaji, T.; Higuchi, Y.; Ozawa, N.; Kurihara, K.; Kubo, M. J. Phys. Chem. C 2014, 118, 11820−11826. (32) Onodera, T.; Park, M.; Souma, K.; Ozawa, N.; Kubo, M. J. Phys. Chem. C 2013, 117, 10464−10472. (33) Wahl, K. J.; Singer, I. L. The Third Body Concept Interpretation of Tribological Phenomena; Tribology Series; Elsevier: Amsterdam, 1996; Vol. 31. (34) Schmitz, T. L.; Action, J. E.; Ziegert, J. C.; Sawyer, W. G. J. Tribol. 2005, 127, 673.

(35) Schmitz, T. L.; Action, J. E.; Burris, D. L.; Ziegert, J. C.; Sawyer, W. G. J. Tribol. 2004, 126 (4), 802. (36) Archard, J. F. J. Appl. Phys. 1953, 24 (8), 981. (37) Ye, J.; Khare, H. S.; Burris, D. L. Wear 2013, 297 (1−2), 1095− 1102. (38) Junk, C. P.; Sawyer, W. G.; Krick, B. A.; Blackman, G. S.; Wetzel, M. D. Low-Wear Fluoropolymer Composites, World Patent Application WO2012158650A1 (2012). (39) Burris, D. L.; Perry, S. S.; Sawyer, W. G. Tribol. Lett. 2007, 27 (3), 323−328. (40) Sawyer, W. G.; Argibay, N.; Burris, D. L.; Krick, B. a. Annu. Rev. Mater. Res. 2014, 44 (1), 395−427. (41) Moynihan, R. E. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1959, 81 (5), 1045−1050. (42) Zerbi, G.; Sacchi, M. Macromolecules 1973, 6 (5), 692−699. (43) Jain, V. K.; Bahadur, S. Wear 1978, 46 (1), 177−188. (44) Lauer, J. L.; Bunting, B. G.; Jones, W. R. Tribol. Trans. 1988, 31 (2), 282−288. (45) Krick, B. A.; Hahn, D. W.; Sawyer, W. G. Tribol. Lett. 2012, 49 (1), 95−102. (46) Uca̧r, A.; Çopurog ̆lu, M.; Baykara, M. Z.; Arıkan, O.; Suzer, S. J. Chem. Phys. 2014, 141 (16), 164702. (47) Kricheldorf, H.; Nuyken, O.; Swift, G. Handbook of Polymer Synthesis; Marcel Dekker: New York, 2004 (48) Breiby, D. W.; Sølling, T. I.; Bunk, O.; Nyberg, B.; Norrman, K.; Nielsen, M. M. 2005, 2383−2390. (49) Jang, I.; Burris, D. L.; Dickrell, P. L.; Barry, P. R.; Santos, C.; Perry, S. S.; Phillpot, S. R.; Sinnott, S. B.; Sawyer, W. G. J. Appl. Phys. 2007, 102 (12), 123509. (50) Beamson, G.; Clark, D. T.; Deegan, D. E.; Hayes, N. W.; S.-L. Law, D.; Rasmusson, J. R.; Salaneck, W. R. Surf. Interface Anal. 1996, 24 (3), 204−210. (51) Wittmann, J. C.; Smith, P. Nature 1991, 352 (6334), 414−417. (52) Asencio, R. Á.; Cranston, E. D.; Atkin, R.; Rutland, M. W. Langmuir 2012, 28 (26), 9967−9976. (53) Brainard, W. A.; Buckley, D. H. Wear 1973, 26 (1), 75−93. (54) Fenwick, D.; Ihn, K. J.; Motamedi, F.; Wittmann, J.-C.; Smith, P. J. Appl. Polym. Sci. 1993, 50 (7), 1151−1157. (55) Pianca, M.; Barchiesi, E.; Esposto, G.; Radice, S. J. Fluorine Chem. 1999, 95 (1−2), 71−84. (56) Kajdas, C. K. Tribol. Int. 2005, 38 (3), 337−353. (57) Przedlacki, M.; Kajdas, C. Tribol. Trans. 2006, 49, 202−214. (58) Luiz, N.; Filho, D. Encycl. Surf. Colloid Sci. 2004, 1, 209−228. (59) Goss, K.-U. Environ. Sci. Technol. 2008, 42 (2), 456−458. (60) Fischer, D.; Lappan, U.; Hopfe, I.; Eichhorn, K.-J.; Lunkwitz, K. Polymer (Guildf.). 1998, 39 (3), 573−582. (61) Lappan, U.; Fuchs, B.; Geißler, U.; Scheler, U.; Lunkwitz, K. Polymer 2002, 43, 4325−4330. (62) Dorschner, H.; Lappan, U.; Lunkwitz, K. Nucl. Instruments Methods Phys. Res., Sect. B: Beam Interact. Mater. Atoms 1998, 139 (1− 4), 495−501. (63) Puts, G. J.; Crouse, P. L. J. Fluorine Chem. 2014, 168, 9−15.

Macromolecules Article

DOI: 10.1021/acs.macromol.5b00452 Macromolecules 2015, 48, 3739−3745

3745

all articles will be uesed/Preparation and properties of highly oriented-annotated.pdf

ELSEVIER Synthetic Metals 67 (1994) 55-61

Sh" QTflHIrmTfllr I I|TRILS

Preparation and properties of highly oriented polytetrafluoroethylene films

M. Schott Groupe de Physique des Solides, Unit6 Associde au CNRS No. 17, Univcrsitds l~tris 7 et Paris 6, Tour 23, 2 place Jussieu,

75251 Pari* Cedex 05, France

Abstract

Very thin, highly o r ien ted and crystall ine films of polyte t raf luoroethylcne ( P T F E ) can be deposi ted on to smooth surfaces by slowly sliding u n d e r load a piece of bulk P T F E on them at a high enough tempera tu re . They consist of very long, s traight and crystall ine r ibbons, which may almost completely cover the substrate . Film morphologies are presented . Physical proper t ies and possible chemical modif icat ion of these films in order to p r epa re conjugated polymers are briefly discussed, as well as some prob lems re la ted to the deposi t ion of highly or iented organic or polymeric overlayers on these P T F E tilms.

Ke3,words: Films; Polytetrafluoroethylcnc

1. I n t r o d u c t i o n a n d h i s t o r i c a l p e r s p e c t i v e

This paper is concerned with the preparation and some physical properties of highly oriented polytetra- fluoroethylene (PTFE) thin films. Interest in such films has been aroused in the polymer physics community by a recent letter by Wittmann and Smith [1] who showed that they can be used as substrates for preparing oriented films of various molecules and macromolecules. There is a long-standing interest [2] in highly oriented films on polymeric substrates (e.g., for liquid crystals alignment), and this observation opened the prospect of obtaining highly ordered samples which would other- wise be difficult, perhaps impossible, to prepare. Highly oriented conjugated polymer samples may have inter- esting properties. Two examples are the extremely large dichroism in the spectroscopic properties of MEH-PPV in stretched UHMW-PE gels [3a], and the highly anisotropic conductivity of recent stretched and doped polyacetylene films [3b].

In fact, the preparation and study of such PTFE films have already a long history connected to another problem, much older and yet far from being understood: friction [4].

Early investigations of PTFE sliding on smooth sur- faces, such as glass, were conducted by Tabor and co- workers [5,6]. Many relevant results were obtained by them. In particular they showed that, after the sliding

PTFE piece had been properly 'conditioned', its kinetic friction coefficient p~k 1 fell to a very low value, about 0.06 at 20 °C, further decreasing at higher temperatures down to about 0.025 at 150 °C, the highest temperature that they considered (/xk is almost always between 0.5 and 1.5). Under such conditions, a very thin layer of PTFE is transferred from the sliding piece onto the glass surface. This film is highly oriented, strongly dichroic, and seems to consist of parallel fibres. As we shall see, these conclusions based on optical and electron microscopy are fully confirmed by recent force mi- croscopy investigations, which are discussed in section 2.

Such highly oriented PTFE films may be interesting from several points of view:

- As shown already by Wittmann and Smith [1,21, they can be used as substrates for deposition of oriented overlayers, either because their surface shows crystalline order (as we shall see in section 2), or because it contains a large number of parallel steps which can laterally induce the ordering of molecules by a poorly understood process known as 'graphoepitaxy' [7] (see also section 2). We shall return to the preparation of

l~l, k is tile ratio of the tangential torce (parallel to the surface) b" nccdcd to maintain the sliding motion to the load (i.e. normal force) W (perpendicular to the surfacc)~ It is usually independent of tile sliding velocity up to several m/s

0379-6779/94/$07.0(1 (~;~ 1994 Elsevier Science S.A. All rights reserved SSDI /1379-(~779 (94)0224 7- V

01

Hisham Shaldhom

Note

56 ]l/L Schott / Synthetic Metals 67 (1994) 55~61

organic or polymeric oriented films on such substrates in section 5.

- With these films, an almost perfectly ordered phase of PTFE, of macroscopic surface, is obtained for the first time. This is an opportunity for a better under- standing of the physical properties of PTFE itself. Examples are given in section 3. However, these samples have a large surface to volume ratio and, in addition, they have two different surfaces, a free one and the other in close contact with the substrate. Thus, such films may show subtle differences with the bulk material in their physical properties.

- Using these films as orienting substrates may not be the only way for obtaining oriented materials (dif- ferent from PTFE). One can also think of modifying the PTFE itself into a chemically different material. There have been in the past many attempts at modifying PFTE surfaces to increase their very low surface energy, but this idea does not seem to have been seriously investigated to prepare a polymer with interesting elec- tronic properties. We shall consider this question in section 4, where preliminary results are presented, suggesting that electronically interesting materials might indeed be prepared in that way.

2. Morphology of the films: atomic force microscopy (AFM) studies

Local force microscopies - the commonly used ac- ronym is AFM [8,9] - are choice methods for the study of these PTFE films: they can be used in air at room temperature and their spatial resolution (a few tens of angstroms laterally, a fraction of an angstrom vertically are easily obtained) is just what is needed. In the last two years, several short papers have shown images of highly oriented PTFE films deposited on various substrates: glass [10,11], several metals [12]. Other types of experiments on such films deposited on other substrates such as steel [13] or amorphous carbon [14] have also been reported, and this list is certainly incomplete.

Here, we recall some results that we have recently obtained on films deposited onto Si wafers [15]. The aim was to relate the observed morphologies to the deposition conditions, in order to determine the pro- cedures for reproducibly preparing well-defined films.

2.1. Deposition parameters

The observed morphologies depend on several pa- rameters.

A first set of physical parameters, already identified in early work [5,6], is relatively easily defined and controlled: the temperature Td at which the deposition is performed, the speed at which the bulk PTFE piece (usually a sphere or a rod) is sliding onto the substrate,

and the load (i.e. normal force) W applied onto the piece while sliding. Note that it is already difficult to deduce from the latter a pressure applied at the PTFE/ substrate interface, since the actual contact area is unknown; this is a basic question in all friction studies [4], although the peculiarities of PTFE do give hope to solve it in these particular experiments. Thus, we have chosen to indicate the loading conditions as weights, from which nominal pressures are readily de- duced since the 'flat' PTFE areas pressed onto the Si substrate are given as well. In our work [15], substrate and PTFE rod were equilibrated at Td before sliding, so that the deposition temperature was accurately known and could be set between 140 and 270 °C (bulk PTFE melts at 327 °C). The sliding speed was kept tow (0.4 to 2 ram/s) so that sliding was very smooth and regular. It is within the 'low-speed' limit studied in [5,6]. And the load was varied in the range 200 to 2200 g. These values are close to those quoted in other works [10,14].

However, it was realized early on [5,6] that the PTFE surface in contact with the substrate has to be 'con- ditioned', by sliding over another smooth surface in the same direction as will be used for deposition, before the film to be studied is actually deposited. The con- ditioning must involve large structural changes in the PTFE rod region close to the contact area, since it has been claimed that the final films do not depend much on the structure (for instance, the crystallinity) of the starting PTFE material. The exact processes involved in that conditioning are not yet understood, but in our experiments the problem was circumvented by defining a specific conditioning procedure which was applied before each film deposition [15].

In addition, some changes in the film morphology may occur while the film is kept at Td after deposition or is cooled down to room temperature, at which it is studied.

All this remains to be studied, so that the whole set of deposition parameters is still far from having been explored.

2.2. Morphologies

A more thorough discussion can be found in [15]. Here we only recall some data and give the overall picture that emerges. We used oxide-covered Si wafers. Most work has used glass substrates [10,11], which probably amounts to the same. No study of the influence of the chemical nature of the substrate (for instance, a metal versus an oxide) has been done yet.

Figs. 1 to 3 show three different morphologies at increasing values of Td. The same figures as in [15] were chosen, as they are very typical of the three types of morphologies found as Td is increased. Fig.1 cor- responds to Td ~ 160 °C, Fig. 2 to Td ~ 195 °C and Fig. 3 to Td~250 °C. W was 600 g in the first two cases; 1725 g on a smaller area in the third°

02

Hisham Shaldhom

Note

M. Schott / Synthetic Metals 67 (1994) 554)1 57

7 . 5 0

5 . 0 0

2 . 5 0

Fig. 1. P T F E film of 4 × 4 # m area. Td= 160 °C, W = 6 0 0 g; nomina l

contac t surface 10 mm:. Low coverage, r ibbons showing several kinks.

Fig. 2. P T F E film of 10× 10 ~ m area. 7 ' , - 195 °C; W = 6 0 0 g; nomina l contac t surface 10 mm 2.

It is seen that in all cases the films are actually made of ribbons running parallel to the sliding direction. Their dimensions are not very dependent on the de- position conditions (see Table 1), although their average height tends to increase with Ta.

The two main differences are (i) that narrow and wiggly fibres present at lower Td tend to disappear at higher Td, the ribbons becoming very straight and (ii) that the average fraction of substrate surface covered by the ribbons increases. At the highest Te used most of the substrate surface is covered.

0 0 2 . 5 0 5 . 0 0 7 . 5 0

UM

Fig. 3. P T F E film of 7 . 5 x 7 . 5 ,am area. 'll,- 250 °C; W 1725 g;

nomina l contac t surface 3 mm 2,

T a b l e 1

D e p o s i t i o n cond i t ions

F igure T,~ W Ribbons (average) A p p r o x i m a t e

(°C) (g) coverage

He igh l Width (%)

1 160 600 254{I lO/tO low"

2 195 60(I ~ 4 0 1000 2(10(l 5(}

3 250 1725 ~ 70 100(~-2000 > 90

"Also var iab le f rom place to p lace on a scale of less than or equal

to 100 /xm.

It was shown that the ribbons are very long, in any case much longer than any PTFE chain present. At high Td, ribbons seem to extend along the whole length over which sliding of the PTFE rod has occurred. At lower T~, ribbons show kinks and other defects; they are also sometimes seen to split and merge, forming anastomoses, but still keeping the sliding direction as their average direction.

It was also shown in [15], by measuring the average thickness of films by nuclear reaction analysis (NRA) determination of the F content, that the substrate surface between ribbons is bare or at most covered by a very thin PTFE layer. Evidence for such a layer, presumably of monomolecular thickness, was obtained by AFM in some cases, but not all.

The ribbon tops are very smooth (r.m.s. rugosities measured by AFM are in the angstrom range), and it was possible to obtain molecular resolution in AFM, showing that the chains are fully extended along the ribbon axis [10,11,15]. The interchain distance measured

58 M. Schott / Synthetic Metals 67 (1994) 55-61

on AFM images is compatible with that found by X- ray diffraction in the bulk crystalline polymer, but the accuracy is poor.

Clearly, such ribbons do not already exist in the bulk PTFE rods from which the films have been drawn, but are formed during the sliding process itself. Indeed, this must be why films have to be 'conditioned' before satisfactory deposition is obtained. Understanding the process of ribbon formation is a subject for future research.

Overall, all AFM observations are compatible with a completely crystalline order in the films drawn at high enough Td (Td _> 220 °C, this value probably depends somewhat on W, but data on that are still meagre). This crystallinity allows better understanding of severaJ physical properties of PTFE; two examples are now given.

3. Physical properties related to the crystallinity

3.1. Crystal structure

An electron diffraction study of films deposited at Td = 250 °C on glass has been published recently [16]. Results are shown in Fig. 4.

Bulk crystalline PTFE shows a series of phases. Below 19 °C is a highly ordered, probably triclinic crystal, in which right- and left-handed 136 helices are regularly arranged with interhelix distances about 5.6 A at 18 °C. This phase is conventionally called Phase II. Two first-order transitions are observed at 19 and 30 °C with phases named Phased IV in between and Phase I above 30 °C. Disorder sets in at 19 °C and increases progressively as temperature is increased, while inter- helix distances increase. The regular arrangement of right- and left-handed helices is first lost, the helices unwind into 157 helices, twist orientation defects appear and multiply in Phase I. Above 150 °C, the chains are flat on the average and longitudinal order is lost.

The data shown in Fig. 4 are compatible with that series of events. Phases II, IV and I exist in the films. However, differences (not yet studied) might be ex- pected, at least in the transition temperatures since, in a film, a sizeable fraction of helices are not in the bulk: in a 60 ~ thick ribbon, more than about 10% of helices are at the outer surface, and about 10% at the interface with the substrate.

3.2. Vibrational modes

Despite numerous experimental and theoretical stud- ies not all authors agree on the assignment of the observed IR absorption lines to the expected normal modes. Transitions are expected to be polarized either parallel or perpendicular to the helix axis, but un-

Fig. 4. Electron diffraction patterns by an oriented PTFE film (from Rcf. [16], by permission). At - 2 5 °C the film is in phase II (upper left), at +25 °C in phase IV (upper right), at +40 °C (lower left) and +80 °C (lower right) in phase I.

ambiguous data are not easily obtained from poly- crystalline stretched films.

Six intense IR lines are observed at 203, about 510, 638, 1152, 1210 and 1242 cm -1, two of which are certainly parallel polarized modes (510 and 638), and three are perpendicular modes (203, 1152, 1242). In several works [17], including a recent review [18], the 1210 cm--1 line is assigned to a parallel mode, although there is no general agreement on that [19].

Highly oriented films offer the possibility of an un- ambiguous answer. It is given as shown in Fig. 5, which is a preliminary result of a research in progress [20]. The 1152, 1210, and 1242 cm -I modes appear near 1155, 1210 and 1240 (as a shoulder) cm -~ and they are all polarized perpendicular to the chains. This point is important for comparison to dynamical calculations [17,18] and, hence, for determination of mode vectors and force constants.

The IR band frequencies shown in Fig. 5 are in good agreement (_+ 2 cm- z) with literature values, with the exception of the band at about 510 cm- ~ which appears here at 501-502 cm -1. It has been pointed out that in bulk PTFE this band shifts from about 502 to 514 cm -1 with decreasing crystallinity [21]: the present

M. Schott I Synthetic Metals 67 (1994) 55~61 59

i

!I , i

/ yI 1200 XI00 xooo ~ t ~ - t ~ 7 W SOO ~ 0

Fig. 5. Po la r ized I R t r ansmiss ion spect ra , B a n d s 1 and 2 at 501 and

640 cm -~ are po la r i zed pa ra l l e l to the chains ; b a n d s 3 to 5 at 1155,

1210 and 1240 cm -1 are pe rpend i cu l a r ,

results suggest that accurate vibrational analysis of PTFE, including the effects of phase transitions and, perhaps, local modes associated with defects, will be possible using such films: the spectra shown in Fig. 5 were recorded in a simple transmission experiment and much more accurate data could be obtained in multiple reflexion studies•

4. M o d i f i c a t i o n s o f P T F E

The very low surface energy of PTFE is a drawback in several applications and not only for overlayer ori- entation, and one would like to increase it. Attempts at modifying its surface accordingly have a long history, and a general review of the subject cannot be given here. Among many others, one method has been re- duction by solutions of alkali metals in liquid ammonia (see, e.g., [22-24]) or suitable organic solvents [22,24-26]. A primary effect of the reduction is the removal of F atoms, so one can expect the formation of C=C double bonds. Some evidence for that is seen in IR, and the surface region is reported in several cases to show 'metallic-gold luster' after some time [24-26]. One may wonder whether ?r-conjugated polymer may be formed and perhaps even be n-doped by the alkali: some reducing solutions are the same as those used in n-doping of polyacetylene for instance. If so, oriented very thin layers of oriented conjugated polymers might be obtainable.

The first results of a study undertaken to evaluate this possibility [27], though preliminary, are quite en- couraging.

Na metal was deposited in successive amounts of about one monolayer onto the surface of a PTFE film

inside the UHV chamber of the XPS/UPS spectrometer at Link6ping, and the spectra were recorded in situ. The stoichiometric changes of the film, as well as the changes in the chemical state of the C atoms, are clearly seen in XPS. The F(ls) peak at 691 eV dis- appears, while another grows at lower binding energy (BE), 686 eV, with an intensity smaller by a factor of 3-4. The C(ls) peak in pure PTFE is observed at a high BE, 293 eV, due to electron withdrawal by the F substituents [28]. This peak decreases but does not seem to disappear completely, whereas a band covering the energy range 288-284 eV grows, the overall intensity remaining constant within the (still poor) accuracy of the experiment (Fig. 6). Therefore, the majority of the F atoms have been removed, and the stoichiometry is now about CF to C2F. This corresponds to what is known of the early stages of surface chemical modi- fications, and is reminiscent of that observed by XPS in [24] after reaction of a similar polymer with Na solutions.

UPS threshold spectra are also changed. Native PTFE shows an abrupt well-defined threshold at about 3.5 eV below the Fermi level Ev, typical of a pure wide- gap insulator. Deposition of Na has two effects. First, EF shifts away from the original valence band. Secondly, occupied states appear above the top of the valence band, forming a tail which extends up to Ev. The corresponding density of states increases as the Na amount is increased, then saturates (Fig. 7).

These XPS and UPS results indicate that conjugated segments or possibly rings or combinations of both have been formed and doped, consistent with the new states seen in UPS. In XPS, the C(ls) BE in undoped po- lyacetylene is 284 eV (and not very different in other conjugated systems [29]) and is increased by p-doping [30l. But if one F atom is linked to such a C atom,

. I

E

v

• l

3 Y .... t -

- 3 0 0 - 2 9 6 - 2 9 2 - 2 8 8 - 2 8 4 - 2 8 0 Binding Energy eV

Fig. 6. XPS spec t ra in the C ( l s ) region. Top curve is unmodi f ied

PTFE, The o the r curves co r respond to inc reas ing amoun t s of depos i t ed Na.

03

Hisham Shaldhom

Note

6 0 M. Schott I Synthetic Metals 67 (1994) 55-61

. . . . I , . I . . . . [ . . . . [ . . . . I , r , , I . . . . ] ~ r , ,

ill / / ", v I I \ X

/ "\,

° y -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2

Binding Energy eV Fig. 7. Valence band threshold as seen in UPS. Lowest curve corresponds to unmodified PTFE; second lowest to the smallest amount of Na (about 1 monolayer). A density-of-states tail extends from the valence band edge up to the Fermi level at zero energy.

the BE increases by 2.5 eV [28] so the occurrence in the spectrum of a C species with BE as low as 284 eV suggests that extra electron density is coming from charge transfer from Na. Na is indeed in an ionic, not metallic state. If so, a new type of conjugated polymer (which should have, among other properties, a higher surface energy) has been formed. Several other PTFE surface modification methods have been reported: glow discharge [31,32], radiation, etc. Their effect on P TF E film surface or electronic properties should be inves- tigated. Combination of these methods with chemical modification might also be interesting.

5. Overlayer deposition problems

This was the original aim of Wittmann and Smith [1,2]. An example of study of such an overlayer, by angle-resolved UPS, showing that orientation is ob- tained, is given by Fahlmann et al. in these Proceedings [33]. Another potentially interesting case is the prep- aration of crystalline layers which can yield oriented and/or crystalline layers of polymers, either immediately upon deposition, as for poly(para-xylylene) [2], or sub- sequently via a topochemically controlled chemical re- action as for diacetylenes: there are very few methods yielding thin single-crystal films of conjugated polymers [34,35].

Organic molecules can be deposited from the liquid phase (usually a solution) or, if the molecular weight is low enough and the thermal stability high enough, from the vapour. In both cases, one encounters problems related to the low PTFE surface energy, so (although feasibility has been clearly demonstrated [1,2,33]) it has been difficult to obtain reproducibly highly oriented and/or crystalline overlayers over large surface areas,

Fig. 8. Fluorescence spectra from a submonolayer (average) of didecylsexithienyl deposited onto PTFE at 15 K: - - , spectrum at 15 K immediately after deposition; . . . . , spectrum at 200 K. The spectrum at 15 K after annealing at 200 K is very similar to the latter one.

so most results are still unpublished. It is then too early to attempt a review, so only some problems are pointed out here.

Deposition on PTFE from a liquid is made difficult by de-wetting. Less commonly realized is that, for the same reason, isolated molecules may by quite mobile on the PTFE surface, even below room temperature. Surface diffusion coefficients of molecules on a mo- lecular crystal have never been measured, but exper- iments on self-diffusion of aromatic hydrocarbons along a grain boundary in a polycrystalline sample have yielded large diffusion coefficients [36].

Hence, for instance, when a submonolayer of sub- stituted sexithienyl molecules is deposited onto PTFE at 15 K, the resulting fluorescence emission spectrum is that of isolated molecules, showing three well-defined peaks forming a vibronic progression with a frequency about 1460 c m - 1 (Fig. 8). But annealing at a temperature as low as 200 K produces irreversible changes: the fluorescence yield drops and the emission spectrum is now a broad almost structureless band [37]. This change is irreversible. A subsequent AFM study at room tem- perature shows that island growth has occurred, with islands several molecules thick. Most of the PTFE surface seems bare. Still, the crystallites may well be oriented, possibly by the 'graphoepitaxial' influence of the ribbon sides.

This has not been checked yet in the oligothienylenes, but thicker layers of the diacetlyene 4BCMU show evidence of orientation: the prismatic crystallites are seen aligned in AFM, and the polymer layer formed by irradiation of the monomer film is dichroic [38].

6. Conclusions

The study of the morphology of thin PTFE oriented layers, in relation to the deposition conditions, and

M. Schott / Synthetic Metals 67 (1994) 55~61 ~1

that of their physical properties are still in an early stage. Clearly however, these films open the prospect of obtaining oriented layers of other materials, either by using the PTFE layer as an orienting substrate for 'epitaxial' growth of other materials, or possibly by controlled modification of PTFE itself.

Acknowledgements

The work done in Paris and reported in this paper owes very much to collaboration with P. Bod6 on force microscopies, and also with M. Rei Vilar on IR spec- troscopy and other topics, P. Dannetun on XPS/UPS and IR, and J.L. Fave on luminescence of oligomer overlayers. The author is very grateful to them for continuing and pleasant collaboration. This work is performed within and supported by a European Union Contract SCIENCE 0661 POLYSURF together with the Universities of Link6ping (Sweden) and Mons (Bel- gium), and Daresbury Laboratory (UK). The author also acknowledges fruitful discussions with Dr J.C. Wittmann, Professor W. Salaneck and Dr G. Beamson.

References

[1] J.C. Wittmann and P. Smith, Nature, 352 (1991) 414. [2] J.C. Wittmann, B. Lotz and P. Smith, Prog. Colloid Polym. Sci.,

92 (1993) 32. [3] (a) T.W. Hagler, K. Pakbaz, K.F. Voss and A.J. Heeger, Phys.

Rev. B, 44 (1991) 8652; (b) D.R. Gagnon, F.E. Karasz, E.L. Thomas and R.W. Lena, Synth. Met., 20 (1987) 85; S.Y. Oh, K. Akagi and H. Shirakawa, Synth. Met., 32 (1989) 245; A. Andreatta, S. Tokito, P. Smith and A.J. Heeger, Mol Cryst. Liq. Cryst., 189 (1990) 169.

[4] For an in-depth review, see, e.g., F.P. Bowden and D. Tabor, The Friction and Lubrication of Solids, Parts I and II, Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1950 and 1964. For a very good introduction for the layman: F.P. Bowden and D. Tabor, Friction, Anchor Books, Garden City, 1973. For a more applications-oriented monograph: I,M. Hutchings, Tribology, E. Arnold, London, 1992.

[5] K.R. Makinson and D. Tabor, Proc. R. Soc. London, Ser. A, 281 (1964) 49.

[6] C.M. Pooley and D. Tabor, Proc. R. Soc. London, Ser. A, 329 (1972) 251.

[7] H.I. Smith, M.W. Geis, C.V. Thompson and H.A. Atwater, J. Cryst. Growth, 63 (1983) 527.

[8] G. Binnig, C.F. Quate and C. Gerber, Phys. Rev. Lett., 56 (1986) 930

[9[ D. Sarid, Scanning Force Microscopy, Oxford University Press, London, 1991.

[10] H. Hansma, F. Motamedi, P. Smith, P. Hansma and J.C. Wittmann, Polymer, 33 (1992) 647.

[11] P. Dietz, P.K. Hansma, K.J. Ihn, F. Motamedi and P. Smith, J. Mater. Sci., 28 (1993) 1372.

[12] P. Bod6, Ch. Ziegler, J.R. Rasmusson, W~R. Salaneck and D.T. Clark, Synth. Met., 55-57 (1993) 329.

[13] E.H. Yang, J. Mater. Res., 7 (1992) 3139. [14] E.H. Yang and J.P. Hirvonen, Thin Solid Films, 226 (1993)

224. [15] P. Bod6 and M. Schott, submitted for publication. [16] M. Kimmig, G. Strobl and B. Stiihn, Macromolecules, 27 (1994)

2481. [17] G. Zerbi and M. Sacchi, Macromolecules, 6 (1973) 692; G.

Masctti, F. Cabassi, G. Morelli and G. Zerbi, Macromolecules, 6 (1973) 700.

[18] D.I. Bower and W.F. Maddams, The Vibrational Spectroscopy of Polymers, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1992, p. 185.

[19] D.J. Cutler, PJ. Hendra, R.R. Rakalka and M.E.A. Curby, Polymer, 22 (1981) 726.

[20] M. Rei Vilar, P. Dannetun and M. Schott, in preparation [21] H.W. Starkweather, Jr., R.C. Ferguson, D.B. Chase and J.M.

Minor, Macromolecules, 18 (1985) 1684. [22] H. Brecht, F. Mayer and H. Binder, Angew. Makromol. Chem.,

33 (1973) 89. [23] N. Chakrabarti and J. Jacobus, Macrornolecules, 21 (1988) 3011. [24] D.W. Dwight and W.M. Riggs, .L Colloid Interface Sci., 47

(1974) 650. [25] K. Yoshino, S. Yanagida, T. Sakai, T. Azuma, Y. lnuishi and

H. Sakurai, Jpn. J. Appl. Phys., 21 (1982) L301. [26] C.A. Costello and T.J. McCarthy, Macromolecules, 17 (1984)

2940; 20 (1987) 2819. [27] P. Dannetun, unpublished results. [28] K. Siegbahn, C. Nordling, G. Johansson, J.H. Hedman, P.F.

Heddn, K. Hamrin, U. Gelius, T. Bergmark, L.O. Werme, R. Manne and Y. Baer, ESCA Applied to Free Molecules, North- Holland, Amsterdam, 1969.

[29] W.R. Salaneck, in T. Skotheim (ed.), Handbook of Conducting Polymers, Vol. II, Marcel Dekker, New York, 1986, p. 1337.

[30] W.R. Salaneck, H.R. Thomas, C.B. Duke, A. Paton, E.W. Plummet, A.J. Heeger and A.G. MacDiarmid, J. Chem. Phys., 71 (1979) 2044.

[31] M. Kusabiraki, Jpn. Z Appl. Phys., 29 (1990) 2809. [32] R.K. Wells, M.E. Ryan and J.P.S. Badyal, J. Phys. Chem., 97

(1993) 12 879. [33] M. Fahlmann, J. Rasmusson, K. Kaeriyama, D.T. Clark, G

Beamson and W.R. Salaneck, submitted for publication. [34] M. Thakur and S. Meyler, Macromolecules, 18 (1985) 2341. [35] J. Berrdhar, C. Lapersonne-Meyer and M. Schott, Appl. Phys.

Lett., 48 (1986) 630. [36] J.N. Sherwood and D.J. White, Philos. Mag., 15 (1967) 745;

16 (1967) 975. [37] J.L. Fave, unpublished results. [38] J.C. Wittmann, personal communication.

4-5 2 notes:

Note
Note

Annotations

Preparation and properties of highly oriented polytetrafluoroethylene films

Schott, M.

01 Hisham Shaldhom Page 1

20/4/2020 17:24

02 Hisham Shaldhom Page 2

20/4/2020 17:23

03 Hisham Shaldhom Page 5

20/4/2020 17:27

04 Hisham Shaldhom Page 7

20/4/2020 17:28

05 Hisham Shaldhom Page 7

20/4/2020 17:28

all articles will be uesed/quantitative 2014.pdf

Quantitative characterization of solid lubricant transfer film quality

J. Ye, H.S. Khare, D.L. Burris n

Department of Mechanical Engineering, University of Delaware, Newark, DE 19716, USA

a r t i c l e i n f o

Article history: Received 31 January 2014 Received in revised form 21 April 2014 Accepted 22 April 2014 Available online 4 May 2014

Keywords: Polymer Transfer film Wear Solid lubricant

a b s t r a c t

Solid lubricant materials have become necessary in applications for which traditional lubrication approaches become impractical. These materials are often mated against a harder metallic counter surface (counterface) of higher surface energy. During sliding, wear fragments from the solid lubricant transfer to the counterface to form a protective barrier known as the transfer film. Historically, the coverage attributes of these transfer films have correlated strongly to the tribological performance of the solid lubricant. Although transfer film quality is often identified as a critical contributor to the success of a candidate solid lubricant, the community lacks a quantitative means to measure quality. Transfer film cohesion and adhesion are likely very important but they are also difficult to measure and not necessarily related to the visual features that have motivated the use of adjectives like ‘quality’, ‘thin’, ‘uniform’, and ‘tenacious’. Area fraction and film thickness are more easily quantified, but to date, they have not proven to be robust predictors of tribological success. A recent visual study of transfer film evolution for a successful alumina–PTFE nanocomposite suggests that the characteristic size of domains of exposed counterface may correlate more closely with wear performance. This paper presents a method for quantifying transfer film quality based on this metric, which we call the free-space length (Lf). To illustrate the application of the method, we study the connection between the wear rate and free- space length for the transfer film of a well-studied alumina–PTFE system. The correlation to wear was best for the free-space length and worst for area fraction.

& 2014 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved.

1. Introduction

Solid lubricant materials are necessary in applications for which cost, complexity, contamination, and environmental con- straints preclude more traditional fluid and grease lubrication strategies. Molybdenum disulfide, graphite, hexagonal boron nitride, and polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) are notable examples. Although bulk polymers generally lack sufficient lubricity or wear resistance for bearing applications, their tribological properties can be improved dramatically with the incorporation of fillers [1]; polymer composite solid lubricants with a wide range of physical properties are now commercially available and used in a variety of challenging industrial applications (e.g. space, mining, harvesting equipment, and wind turbines).

These materials are often mated against a harder metallic counter surface (counterface) of higher surface energy. During dry sliding, fragments of the solid lubricant adhere to and transfer to the counterface. As these fragments accumulate, they eventually form a film that protects the bulk solid lubricant from counterface

asperities [2,3]; this film is known as the transfer film. The rate of transfer film removal and re-deposition represents the lower limit of the system wear rate [4], and the wear reducing effect of fillers is often discussed in terms of their ability to improve transfer film adhesion and otherwise reduce transfer film wear [3–8].

Most wear studies of filled polymers include some form of transfer film analysis. Bahadur et al. [9] found that the most successful wear-reducing fillers were those that promoted thin, uniform, and strongly adhered transfer films through mechanisms that include filler decomposition and mechanical interlocking of filler particles into counterface scratches. To our knowledge, only Schwartz and Bahadur have attempted to measure the bond strength of the transfer film [10]. They bonded a copper tab to the transfer film with cyanoacrylate and found that the wear rate decreased as the bond strength increased. The authors described poor performing transfer films as ‘patchy’, and ‘non-uniform’, while successful transfer films were described as ‘uniform’ and ‘continuous’. Wang et al. found that various nanofillers signifi- cantly reduced the wear of polyetheretherketone (PEEK) and concluded that the wear reduction mechanism was tied to the filler's ability to improve characteristics of the transfer film [11–13]. The authors described the improved films as thin, uniform and tenacious. Li et al. [14], Chen et al. [15], Sawyer et al. [16], and

Contents lists available at ScienceDirect

journal homepage: www.elsevier.com/locate/wear

Wear

http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.wear.2014.04.017 0043-1648/& 2014 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved.

n Corresponding author. Tel.: þ1 302 831 2006. E-mail address: dlburris@udel.edu (D.L. Burris).

Wear 316 (2014) 133–143

Bhimaraj et al. [17] made similar observations and drew similar links between the effects of nanofillers, wear resistance and transfer film quality. Krick et al. showed that the absence of environmental moisture disrupted transfer film formation and prevented an otherwise low wear alumina–PTFE nanocomposite from achieving low wear [18]; in other words, wear resistance required the high quality transfer film that forms in humid air.

Most transfer film analyses involve qualitative assessment using optical or electron microscopy [1,3,6,8,11,19–21]. However, there have been a number of efforts to quantify transfer film quality and correlate it to tribological performance. Wheeler used XPS to quantify the transfer film thickness of PTFE on steel in vacuum at varying speeds [22]. Jain and Bahadur [23] used infrared spectroscopy to quantify the transfer of low surface energy polymers to higher surface energy polymers. Blanchet et al. [24] used XPS to distinguish the transfer behaviors of unfilled and filled PTFE and Yang et al. [25] used X-ray yield measurements to quantify transfer film thickness of PTFE on stainless steel as a function of temperature. It could be argued that these methods were quantitative but indirect measures of transfer film thickness. Burris and Sawyer used optical profilometry to make direct measurements of transfer film thickness for PTFE, a PTFE micro- composite, and two PTFE nanocomposites [20]. The steady-state wear rate of these PTFE-based materials varied over three-orders of magnitude and was proportional to the cube of the transfer film thickness. Blanchet et al. made consistent observations with stylus profilometry on similar systems [26]. Laux and Schwartz used optical profilometry to correlate transfer film thickness to the wear resistance of unfilled PEEK [27,28]. They found no significant correlation between the two, and suggested that film discontinuity might be more strongly related to wear. Bowden et al. [29] proposed that friction is a linear function of the boundary film area fraction and it would therefore be reasonable to expect a similar relationship for wear. To our knowledge, only Bhimaraj et al. has conducted a quantitative study of the effect transfer film area fraction on wear [30]; there was no significant correlation

between transfer film area fraction and wear rate of polyethylene terephthalate (PET) nanocomposites.

Ye et al. [31] used quasi-in-situ methods to study the morpho- logical evolution of a PTFE nanocomposite transfer film as the wear rate decreased by more than three orders of magnitude during run-in. The transfer film, which was initially thick, patchy, removed and replenished on a cycle-by-cycle basis, became thinner, more continuous, and longer lasting as the system transitioned to low wear. The results suggest that the character- istic size of ‘transfer film-free’ domains of the counterface may correlate more closely to wear performance than thickness or area fraction; this is one possible measure of film ‘discontinuity’ as discussed by Laux and Schwartz [27]. This paper presents a method for quantifying transfer film quality based on this metric, which we call the free-space length (Lf). To illustrate the applica- tion of the method, we study the connection between the wear rate and free-space length of the transfer film for a well-studied alumina–PTFE system.

2. Method

Transfer films lubricate by effectively modifying the mechanical and chemical properties of the counterface. Imagine a typical patchy transfer film like that shown in Fig. 1(a). The transfer film covered regions have reduced surface energy and hardness, which mitigate adhesive and abrasive wear, respectively. The bare or uncovered regions have high surface energy and will adhere most strongly to the solid lubricant. The size of this uncovered region limits the size of the potential adhered debris particle and, as Rabinowicz showed, smaller debris particles have increased ratios of surface energy to elastic energy, and are therefore less likely to be removed from the counterface [32]. Although thickness also reflects debris size, the lateral dimensions are more closely related to common visual cues (e.g. uniformity, coherence, homogeneity and continuity).

100 μm 100 μm

100 μm100 μm

0 0

0.06

1.0

pr ob

ab ili

ty d

en si

ty

0 255

0 255

0 85 170 255

fre qu

en cy

fre qu

en cy

fre qu

en cy

color intensity

height(μm)

Red

Green

Blue

Lf=106 μm

Lf =102 μm

μ-3σ

μ+3σ

μ-3σ

μ-3σ

R: 209 G: 165 B: 104

R: 180 G: 141 B: 86

0

0.5

1.0

1.5

he ig

ht (μ

m )

Fig. 1. Illustration of the conversion of a height map (a) or optical image (c) of a transfer film into black and white using thickness and color intensity (RGB or grayscale) thresholds, respectively. The corresponding height and color histograms are shown for reference. Each distribution is bimodal with one mode corresponding to the counterface and the other corresponding to the film. Transfer film in (a) is any pixel higher than 3s above the mean, or (μþ3s)thickness; the same strategy is used for the optical image but the film has a lower intensity.

J. Ye et al. / Wear 316 (2014) 133–143134

The aim of this paper is to develop a simple quantitative means of measuring the characteristic size of these uncovered regions, which we call the ‘free-space length’, Lf, based on a previous effort to characterize nanocomposite dispersion [33]. For application to existing literature, we have developed the method so it can be used on optical micrographs, electron micrographs, and profilo- metric maps. The first step is to convert the micrograph or height map into a binary pixel matrix; black represents film and white represents uncovered counterface as shown in Fig. 1(b) and (d). Fig. 1a and c shows a profilometric map and an optical image, respectively, for the same region of a transfer film. The height and color histograms accompany each image. There is clear evidence of two distinct peaks in each case, but locating the exact cutoff between film and counterface requires a judgment call that can affect the results.

We have written a MATLAB script to standardize the selection of the cutoff point; these resources can be found at our website: http://research.me.udel.edu/�dlburris/publicationsOther.html or by email request to the corresponding author. The user is asked to choose a statistically significant number of random pixels where transfer film is known to be absent. The averages (m) and standard deviations (s) of the R, G, and B channel values (or height for a height map) for these points are then computed. For the optical images, the film is less intense than the steel and a pixel is declared to be covered if the value of any channel is more than a user-selected number of standard deviations (ns) below the means of the channel corresponding to the film-free regions (statistically, 3s falsely includes less than 0.2% of the uncovered counterface). If the number of standard deviations used is much larger, covered pixels will be falsely rejected; too small and uncovered pixels will be falsely included. We find that n¼3–5 consistently provides optimal detection for various polymers in various stages of sliding. The conversion is successful when the converted image is visually indistinguishable from the parent image. Using profilometry requires inversion since transfer films are elevated and generally have greater intensity in topographic maps; the code asks the user to indicate if the film is more or less intense than the counterface. This film-detection strategy is conceptually identical to that described by Laux and Schwartz in their efforts to quantify transfer film area fraction and height [28].

Once the binary image is created, the script performs a Monte Carlo simulation to quantify the free-space length, Lf, as described previously [33]. The simulation is illustrated in Fig. 2. The code places a statistically significant number of fixed-length squares randomly across the image. It counts the number of intersecting transfer film pixels in each box and evaluates the most likely number of intersecting transfer film pixels for that particular observation window. The program iterates the box size until it finds the free-space length, which is the largest window for which the most likely number of intersecting transfer film pixels is zero. We refer the reader to Khare and Burris [33] for a more thorough description of this method.

The researcher has freedom in selecting the size-scale of the total observation window, but analysis quality depends on the selection of an appropriate scale; large images lack resolution and small images lack statistical power, just as is the case for disper- sion characterization. We have conducted a sensitivity study to determine the best practice for selecting size-scale; the results for one representative film are shown in Fig. 3. When the image is 50 times larger than free space length, Lf is artificially large and unfavorably sensitive to the number of standard deviations used in thresholding (ns) due to a lack of resolution (see Fig. 3(c)). When the image is 2 times larger than free space length, Lf is insensitive to ns but is biased (downward in this case) by the effects of heterogeneity and small sample size. The most reliable results are obtained in our experience when the image is roughly 10 times larger than the free space length; Lf becomes statistically robust and is insensitive to ns used in thresholding (notice that the curve is flat in the recommended range of 3–5s). We use and recom- mend 10:1 as the appropriate ratio for characterizing Lf.

3. Method demonstration

3.1. Rationale for the materials system

While fillers typically reduce polymer wear by 10� , they typically reduce the wear of Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) by 100� through hypothesized mechanisms involving mechanical load support, crack arresting and transfer film adhesion. It was

oc cu

re nc

e

thousands pixels/square box

oc cu

re nc

e oc

cu re

nc e

30 µm mode = 0

100 µm mode = 1200

200 µm mode = 4000

50 μm

Fig. 2. An illustration of the calculation of the free space length. Here, an initial guess of Lf¼200 μmwhen placed randomly across 10,000 locations within the image yields a mode of 4000 px/box (i.e. the most likely number of intersecting pixels for a randomly placed box). Iteration yields Lf¼30 μm; this is the largest box for which the mode is zero.

J. Ye et al. / Wear 316 (2014) 133–143 135

recently discovered that specific nanoparticles can reduce PTFE wear by 10,000� with as little as 0.1% nanofillers [34]. This system exemplifies the promise of nanoscale reinforcement and, to our knowledge, represents the most extreme improvement in any mechanical property of a polymer using nanoscale reinforce- ment. As a result, this specific material has been the subject of numerous independent investigations into potential wear reduc- tion mechanisms [18,20,21,26,34,35]. Although specific mechan- isms remain unclear, thin, uniform and tenacious transfer films are the foundation of most hypotheses.

We use this low wear α-alumina–PTFE nanocomposite as a tribological standard to help demonstrate the method. This mate- rial is characterized by high initial wear rates (k�10�4 mm3/N m), lower run-in and transition wear rates (k�10�4–10�7 mm3/N m), and an ultra-low steady state wear rate (k�10�7 mm3/N m). In our previous work [31], we studied the transient wear behavior in detail along with the transfer film development. Qualitatively, we found correlation between the free-space length of the transfer film and the wear rate. The aim of current study is to demonstrate the method of transfer film characterization described above by quantifying this correlation.

3.2. Materials

The nanocomposite material used here was the same as in the authors' previous work [31] and closely replicates materials in the literature [18,20,21,26,34,35]. Teflon™ 7C from DuPont (�30 mm) was used as the polymer resin and alpha phase alumina nano- particles (27–43 nm) were obtained from Nanostructured &

Amorphous Materials Inc. Powders were premixed (5 wt% alumina) in dry conditions to obtain global homogeneity and then dispersed in ethanol (which wets PTFE reasonably) under ultra- sonication to promote local homogeneity. The mixture was dried in a heated vacuum desiccator. The dried nanocomposite resin was cold-pressed into a 25 mm long, 12.5 mm diameter cylinder under a pressure of 170 MPa. The compacted sample was sintered at 365 1C for 3 h.

3.3. Wear testing

Prior to testing, each composite sample was machined into a pin with a 6.4 mm�6.4 mm test surface. The rectangular 440C stainless steel counterface (38 mm�25 mm) was lapped to an average surface roughness of 10 nm (Ra); the polished surface improved background uniformity to facilitate transfer film detec- tion using optical microscopy. The wear test was conducted on the linear reciprocating pin-on-flat tribometer previously reported [31]. Before sliding, the pin's sliding surface was polished on the reciprocator against SiC paper to create a parallel surface and a uniform contact pressure distribution during run-in. The tribolo- gical sliding conditions were selected to match those in previous related studies with a normal load of 250 N (Fn), contact pressure of 6.3 MPa (P), reciprocating length of 25.4 mm (s) and sliding speed of 50.8 mm/s (v), which was held constant over 465% of the wear track with a stepper motor/ball screw drive system. The test was interrupted periodically and mass-loss measurements of the polymer pin were used to quantify wear on a mass balance (710 mg). The counterface was removed and located on a

L f (μ

m )

number of σ ‘s

fre qu

en cy

color intensity

fre qu

en cy

color intensity

fre qu

en cy

color intensity

200 μm 40 μm

40 μm

10 μm

RGB RGB RGB μ-3σ

1 0

80

120

40

160

3 5 7 9Lf = 35 μm

100X Mag

image width:estimated Lf = 50:1 10:1 2:1

500X Mag 2000X Mag

50:1

10:1

2:1

0 255 0 255 0 255

Fig. 3. Results of a sensitivity study of the effects of image size-scale on free-space length. The lateral dimension of image should be roughly 10 times free space length to avoid resolution (larger than 10:1) and heterogeneity (smaller than 10:1) effects on the calculation of Lf. (a) Example images of different magnifications and corresponding color intensity histograms; (b) converted black and white image; (c) Lf versus ns used in image thresholding for each image.

J. Ye et al. / Wear 316 (2014) 133–143136

kinematic mount beneath a Nikon optical microscope (Nikon MM- 400/S) with a digital camera. The light intensity and exposure time for image collection were optimized for each magnification to best distinguish the transfer film from the counterface. The resulting images were used to quantify Lf of the transfer film as described earlier.

3.4. Transfer film characterization

The optical characterization of a representative transfer film is illustrated in Fig. 4. Individual images were collected and stitched together to obtain a single image of the entire wear track (Fig. 4(a)). Due to the reciprocating nature of the experiment, the wear tracks exhibited preferential deposition of transfer films toward the center of the track in the run-in period. This deposition was found in the constant-speed region of the wear track (as determined from

variable track-length experiments and LVDT speed measurements) and correlated to reduced friction. As we described previously, the run-in period is characterized by poorly (or not at all) adhered debris that are constantly removed and replenished. We believe preferential deposition and reduced friction in this regime are due to the dynamics of third body flow, a phenomenon unique to run-in of this system. Films become more uniform (except at reversals) once debris become adherent at the beginning of the transition period.

The central 50% of the wear track was used in the analysis to eliminate the reversal effect on run-in film deposition (Fig. 4(d)). Three locations along the width and five locations along the length were used in the analysis; all 15 images were used to evaluate statistics for varying regions of the film and the film in whole. The mean value and variation in Lf tended to decrease toward the center of the wear track (Fig. 4(e)) along with the friction

Lf = 516 μm

Lf = 212 μm

Lf = 653 μm Lf = 588 μm Lf = 189 μm Lf = 306 μm Lf = 264 μm

Lf = 306 μm Lf = 265 μm Lf = 265 μm Lf = 511 μm

Lf = 220 μm Lf = 196 μm Lf = 380 μm Lf = 438 μm

1 mm 1 mm

2 mmx

y

Lf mean = 354 μm u(Lf) = 146 μm

Lf mean+2u(Lf )

Lf mean - 2u(Lf)

region of interest

x position(mm)x position(mm) 00

0

0.15

-0.15

25 10 15 -2-4-6-10-15 -5 4 6 0

800

L f (μ

m )

Fig. 4. (a) Image of the entire wear track (25.4 mm) after 0.8 m of sliding. Representative images of transfer film are captured at 15 locations at the center of the wear track where transfer films are most reliably deposited by reciprocated sliding. (b) The fifteen images used to analyze free-space length of this film. (c) Converted black and white images with squares overlaid to represent Lf. (d) Friction loop corresponding to one cycle of sliding just before the test was interrupted. The center portion of data is highlighted where images are taken and analyzed. (e) Distribution of Lf versus wear track position. Each data point corresponds to the mean and standard deviation of three measurements at the same x-position. The average Lf of these fifteen measurements is 354 μm with a standard deviation of 146 μm.

J. Ye et al. / Wear 316 (2014) 133–143 137

coefficient (Fig. 4(d)). The free-space length (overall) of this particular transfer film (0.8 m of sliding) was Lf¼354 mm7146 mm.

3.5. Wear rate characterization

Wear volume is plotted versus the product of normal force and sliding distance for the run-in period in Fig. 5. The measurement at 0.8 m (Fig. 4) is shown with a filled marker for reference (with a wear volume of 0.042 mm3). Traditionally, the wear rate is defined as a steady-state or overall value, both of which reflect the entire dataset. To correlate the free-space length to the wear rate, we must determine a representative value for the wear rate at a specific point of interest. To center the analysis on the data point at 210 N m, for example, we might choose one data point earlier and one data point later. To compute the mean wear rate and its uncertainty, we use the Monte Carlo technique described by Burris and Sawyer [34] and illustrated in Fig. 5(c). In this case, since there was no mass change among these three data points the meanwear rate is zero and the actual wear rate is just as likely to be positive as it is to be negative. If we consider our midpoint plus and minus five data points as shown in Fig. 5(b), Monte Carlo analysis give k¼9�10�5 mm3/N m75�10�5 mm3/N m; based on these sta- tistics, we can say that the wear rate exceeds zero with a 95% confidence. As in this example, we compute each single point wear rate using the least number of data points within the regime of interest (i.e. run-in, transition or steady state) to give a statistically positive wear rate with 95% confidence (μ/s4 1.65). The data are selected symmetrically about the point of interest unless the selection window meets the adjacent regime boundary (e.g. it is inappropriate to use run-in data to calculate wear rate during the transition period). In such a case, the selection window only extends in the direction away from the boundary to avoid

biasing the measurement with data from a fundamentally differ- ent tribosystem.

4. Results

Wear data and transfer film morphologies from the run-in period (first 10 m of sliding) are shown in Fig. 6. The test was interrupted every one or two sliding cycles in order to capture the details of the wear process during run-in. Transfer film morphol- ogies were analyzed after 0.4, 0.8, 2 and 3.5 m of sliding; the morphologies of these four transfer films in the central 12.5 mm region are shown in Fig. 6(c) along with their mean free-space length. After 0.4 m of sliding, the transfer film consisted of large plate-like debris, which only covered a small fraction (�17%) of the wear track. The free-space length of this film was 810 mm. This transfer film morphology is not unlike that of unfilled PTFE and the in-situ wear rate at this point (2.6�10�4 mm3/N m) was similar to that of unfilled PTFE (5�10�4 mm3/N m) at these conditions [36]. At 0.8 m of sliding, the transfer film covered a larger fraction (�38%) of the counterface and comprised smaller platelets, which were more uniformly distributed. The free-space length of the transfer film was reduced by more than a factor of two to 354 mm and the wear rate was reduced by a factor of three to 9.4�10�5 mm3/N m (see Figs. 4 and 5 for reference). At 2 m of sliding, the transfer film comprised more numerous and finer debris. The free-space length and wear rate both decreased by more than a factor of three. Interestingly, the transfer film area fraction decreased to 24% at this point. At 3.5 m of sliding, debris size decreased further and higher magnification images were required to capture images with 10:1 length scales (see Fig. 3 for reference); the free-space length and wear rate decreased by another factor of 2 at this location. The results clearly demonstrate

K = 9.35x10-5 mm3 /Nm

u(K) = 4.75x10-5 mm3/Nm

result from Monte Carlo regression analysis

wear rate calculation window

Fn•D(Nm) 0 1000 2000

Fn•D(Nm) 170130 210 290250

Fn•D(Nm) 170130 210 290250

3000 0

0.04

0.06

0.08

0.1

0.02

0.04

0.06

0.08

0.02

0.04

0.06

0.08

0.02

w ea

r v ol

um e

(m m

3 ) w

ea r v

ol um

e (m

m 3 )

w ea

r v ol

um e

(m m

3 )

Fig. 5. (a) Wear volume versus normal load times sliding distance for the first 3000 N m (or 12 m) of the sliding experiment. A data range of 210770 N m is used to calculate in situwear rate at the 210 N m position, which is highlighted by the black data marker. Uncertainty of Vloss and Fn �D are calculated from the listed experimental conditions and associated uncertainties following the law of propagation of uncertainty. (b) Plot of the eleven interrupted measurements with graphical representation of uncertainties at each point. (c) Simulated data set for Monte Carlo analysis using the selected measurements. Regression analysis gives an average slope of 9.35�10�5 mm3/Nmwith an uncertainty of 4.75�10�5 mm3/Nm based on 1000 simulations.

J. Ye et al. / Wear 316 (2014) 133–143138

a monotonic relationship between wear rate and free-space length of the transfer film.

Wear data and representative transfer film morphologies dur- ing the transition period of sliding are shown in Fig. 7. We define the “transition” period by the first observation of an persistent/

adherent transfer film [31]; it also coincides with an apparently abrupt transition to a low wear rate (after �7 m of sliding in this case). Changes in mass in this region increment positively and negatively at the resolution of our scale (10 mg). Consider our first transition measurement at 9.2 m of sliding, for example. Expanding

1 mm1 mm 1 mm1 mm

1 mm1 mm 1 mm 50 μm

1 mm

sliding distance(m)

x position(mm) y position(mm)

0 2 4 6 8 10 sliding distance(m)

0 2 4 6 8 10

0

4x10-4

0

800

D = 0.4 m, K = 26 ± 5 x10-5 mm3/Nm Lf = 810 μm ± 255 μm D = 0.8 m, K = 9.4 ± 4.8 x10-5 mm3 /Nm Lf = 354 μm ± 146 μm

D = 2 m, K = 2.7 ± 1.5 x10-5 mm3 /Nm Lf = 102 μm ± 12 μm D = 3.5 m, K = 1.34±0.64 x10-5 mm3 /Nm Lf = 45 μm ± 9.4 μm

K

Lf 0

0.1 w

ea r v

ol um

e( m

m 3 )

0

0 2-2 0 1.6-1.6-4-6 4 6

1200

L f (μ

m )

0

1200

L f (μ

m )

L f (μ

m )

w ea

r r at

e (m

m 3 /N

m )

D = 0.4 m

D = 0.8 m

D = 2 m

D = 3.5 m

D = 0.4 m

D = 0.8 m

D = 2 m

D = 3.5 m

Fig. 6. (a) Wear volume versus sliding distance for the run-in period of the sliding experiment. The wear rate was 2�10�4 mm3/N m at 0.5 m of sliding and decreased monotonically over the next 9.5 m. The data markers corresponding to the transfer film images shown are highlighted in gray. (b) Wear rate and free space length versus sliding distance at positions where transfer films were measured over the first 10 m of sliding. Both wear rate and free-space length decreased by over an order of magnitude for the first 4 m of sliding experiment. (c) Optical images of the transfer films. Images correspond to gray data markers in (a) and (b). (d) Distribution of Lf versus wear track position along the length (x direction). Data markers and error bars represent the mean and standard deviation of three measurements. (e) Distribution of Lf versus wear track position along the width (y direction). Variations as a function of distance were significantly larger than variations within a given film. Also note the scratches on each image. Such scratches may affect the results if they are artificially treated as transfer film. When scratches were indistinguishable from film in the histogram, we shifted our observation window to remove the scratches from the analysis.

J. Ye et al. / Wear 316 (2014) 133–143 139

the data set to achieve a statistically positive wear rate requires the use of run-in wear data, which would artificially bias the wear rate to higher values. In this case, we were forced to select an asymmetric analysis window (from 6.7 m to 238 m). The same was true for the data point at 27 m. These were the only two measurements in the study needing asymmetric analysis windows. In each case, the wear rate was approximately k¼10�7 mm3/N m.

Transfer films during this period comprised nanoscale frag- ments; scanning electron microscopy suggests an average thickness of �10 to 20 nm and lateral dimension of �100 to 1000 nm [31]. At 9.2 m of sliding, these fragments had initiated a transfer film with Lf¼1.5870.29 mm. At 27 m, the free-space length decreased to Lf¼0.4670.14 mm and was darker in appearance. The wear rate at this point was three orders of magnitude lower than it was at 0.4 m of sliding. At 67 m, the wear rate decreased while free-space length increased slightly to Lf¼0.8070.39 mm.

Wear data and representative transfer film morphologies for the steady-state period are shown in Fig. 8. At 260 m of sliding, the transfer film comprised a mixture of pre-existing nanoscale frag- ments and numerous island-like features with lateral dimensions of 1–20 mm as shown in Fig. 8(c). The free-space length initially increased, reaching Lf¼3.171.2 mm (Fig. 8(b)), while the Wear rate decreased to below 1�10�7 mm3/N m. These small islands remain adhered to the counterface but migrate to merge with

other islands. This migration tends to leave larger uncovered regions as shown for 1016 m. At this distance, the free-space length had increased to Lf¼1777 mm and the wear rate increased correspondingly (Fig. 8(b)). At 4572 m of sliding, the transfer film became more continuous (80–90% coverage), the free-space length decreased to 6 mm and the wear rate decreased to 10�7 mm3/N m, the value typically cited for this material [1].

5. Discussion

The lack of standards for quantifying transfer film quality is a critical barrier to understanding how they mitigate wear. Transfer film area fraction is perhaps the most intuitive quantitative metric for describing transfer film lubricity and wear protection. Blanchet and Sawyer, for example, used differential wear analysis to predict the friction and wear response of fractional films like those described here [37]. Bahadur and Tabor, on the other hand, proposed that small debris promote robust transfer films via mechanical interlocking with surface roughness [6]. This hypoth- esis motivated Burris and Sawyer to quantify transfer film thick- ness as a measure of debris size [20]; while the friction coefficient showed no relationship with transfer film thickness, wear rate increased with the cube of thickness. Other studies have shown

D = 9.2 m, K = 1.2 ± 0.6 x10-7 mm3/Nm Lf = 1.58 μm ± 0.29 μm D = 27 m, K = 1.2 ± 0.6 x10 -7 mm3/Nm Lf = 0.46 μm ± 0.14 μm

D = 67 m, K = 1.0 ± 0.6 x10 -7 mm3/Nm Lf = 0.80 μm ± 0.39 μm

L f (μ

m )

1x10-3

1x10-5

1x10-7

1x10-9

w ear rate (m

m 3/N

m )

2 μm1 mm 2 μm1 mm

2 μm1 mm

sliding distance(m) 0 20 6040 80 100

sliding distance(m) 0.2 2 20 200120 140

0

0.1 100000

1000

10

0.1

w ea

r v ol

um e(

m m

3 )

Lf

K

Fig. 7. (a) Wear volume versus sliding distance for the transition period of the sliding experiment. Mass losses were at the 10 μg resolution limit of the scale after 7 m of sliding. Wear rate and transfer film morphology were analyzed at selected positions, which are highlighted with gray data markers. (b) Wear rate and free space length versus sliding distance at selected positions for the first 140 m of sliding. Both wear rate and free-space length decreased one order of magnitude further at 9.2 m from the previous run-in period and another order of magnitude reduction was found at 27 m and 67 m of sliding. (c) Images of entire transfer film image capture area and example images used for Lf calculation at one single location. Much smaller areas of transfer film (10�7.5 μm2) were used for image analysis following the 10:1 image:Lf recommendation presented earlier. Transfer film images correspond to gray data markers in (a) and (b).

J. Ye et al. / Wear 316 (2014) 133–143140

that neither area fraction nor transfer film thickness correlates to general wear behavior of polymers [27,28,30].

We propose here that the size of the exposed regions of the counterface may dominate wear rate more generally because these regions dictate the debris size, which determines the probability the particle will adhere once liberated [32]. This progression is consistent with the evolution we observed throughout the

tribological development of a well-studied polymer nanocompo- site [31]. We therefore expect that that transfer film quality and wear resistance correlate most directly with the length-scale of these uncovered regions, the so-called free-space length (Lf). In fact, the results of this study provide compelling evidence that feedback between transfer film morphology, free-space length, debris size, and wear rate is a primary wear resistance mechanism of this system.

The results (Figs. 6–8) showed a strong correspondence bet- ween the free-space length and the wear rate; decreasing Lf was accompanied by decreasing wear rates. Interestingly, changes in Lf preceded those in k (Fig. 8(b)) suggesting that changes in the transfer film caused changes in the wear rate. To examine potential improvements of this metric over the existing metrics, area fraction and thickness, we measured the area fraction and thickness of every transfer film reported in the results section using standard profilometry measurements. The wear rate is plotted versus area fraction (X), thickness (t), and free-space length (Lf) in Fig. 9(a), (b), and (c), respectively. Because there is no theory

to predict any particular relationship a priori, we fit each complete dataset of 10 measurements by a power-law function. Globally speaking, the wear rate decreased with increased film area fraction, decreased thickness, and decreased free-space length, each of which agrees with intuition. The coefficients of determina- tion for the power-law fits were R2¼0.43, R2¼0.66, and R2¼0.88, respectively. The correlation is quite reasonable for the free-space length, especially considering that data were collected from three distinct periods (run-in, transition, steady-state) with fundamen- tally different transfer film morphologies [31].

This study was conducted to illustrate a newmethod of transfer film characterization based on our hypothesis of its role in wear prevention. The results are favorable for the use of the free-space length as a potential metric of transfer film quality. However, this work investigated a single solid lubricant system and is therefore limited in its ability to forecast the appropriateness of the free- space length metric as a measure of general transfer film quality; clearly similar studies of other materials would be required before general statements about applicability can be made.

Strictly speaking, we would not expect wear rate to follow the power-law relationship used for correlation. Our hypothesis essen- tially suggests a composite of two wear rates; a high transfer film- free wear rate and a low transfer film protected wear rate. There will be an upper bound such that larger and larger exposed areas have no effect on wear. Interestingly we did not see any evidence of a tail at large Lf, but we would not expect the wear rate to

10 μm 50 μm

D = 260 m, K = 0.7 ± 0.4 x10-7 mm3/Nm D = 1016 m, K = 3.4 ± 1.8 x10 -7 mm3/NmLf = 3.07 μm ± 1.23 μm Lf = 17.11 μm ± 7.2 μm

D = 4572 m, K = 1.2 ± 0.4 x10 -7 mm3/Nm Lf = 6.41 μm ± 4.23 μm

1 mm 1 mm

50 μm1 mm

sliding distance(m) 0 2000 4000 6000

sliding distance(m) 0.1 101 100 1000 10000

0

0.4

0.2

w ea

r v ol

um e(

m m

3 )

L f (μ

m )

100000

1000

10

0.1

1x10-3

1x10-5

1x10-4

1x10-7

1x10-6

1x10-8

w ear rate (m

m 3/N

m )Lf

K

Fig. 8. (a) Wear volume versus sliding distance for the steady-state period of the sliding experiment. The steady state region begins after 2 km of sliding; the total volume loss remained below 0.3 mm3 over the 6 km test. Wear rate and transfer film morphology were analyzed at selected positions which are highlighted with gray data marker. (b) Wear rate and free-space length plotted versus sliding distance at selected positions over the entire test. Both wear rate and free space length increased at 1 km. (c) Images of the transfer films and example images used for Lf calculation at one single location. Transfer film images correspond to gray data markers in (a) and (b).

J. Ye et al. / Wear 316 (2014) 133–143 141

exceed that of unfilled PTFE, k¼10�3 mm3/N m; one could obtain this limiting value using a spiraling or rastering motion path to prevent the introduction of transfer film into the contact. Similarly, at very small Lf, we would expect a lower bound for the self-mated composite. There is evidence of a tail at small size-scale, suggest- ing that k¼10�7 mm3/N m is a characteristic wear rate of the self- mated composite; this value is consistent with steady-state wear rates from the literature [18,20,21,26,34,35]. This lower bound could explain the rapid transition to low wear and the relative insensitivity of wear rate to changes of Lf thereafter. This binary behavior is consistent with the results from Blanchet et al. who observed low wear (k¼10�7 mm3/N m) below a critical roughness and moderate wear (k¼10�5 mm3/N m) above it.

Finally, the challenges in employing this method deserve some comment. At its core is the ability to distinguish between the transfer film and counterface. This task becomes more difficult as films become thinner and surfaces roughen. Optical microscopy, though accessible and easy to implement, is particularly sensitive to surface roughness because scratches reflect less light and can become indistinguishable from the film. This detection problem is general to all forms of transfer film characterization, quantitative or not, and presented itself in this study despite our efforts to remove roughness with polishing. Although the counterface was much harder than the sample, it was abraded during the run-in period as evidenced by the sudden appearance of scratches in Fig. 6. These scratches had reduced reflectivity, were indistinguishable from the film, and

free space length, Lf (μm)

X (%)

0.1 1 10 100

0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100%

1000 1x10-8

1x10-7

1x10-6

1x10-5

1x10-4

1x10-3

w ea

r r at

e( m

m 3 /N

m )

w ea

r r at

e( m

m 3

/N m

)

1x10-8

1x10-7

1x10-6

1x10-5

1x10-4

1x10-3 run in transition steady state

run in transition steady state

6×10-8X-3.0 R2=0.43

run in transition steady state

t (μm) 0.01 0.1 1 10

w ea

r r at

e( m

m 3 /N

m )

1x10-8

1x10-7

1x10-6

1x10-5

1x10-4

1x10-3

1×10-5t1.6 R2=0.66

6×10-8Lf1.2 R2 =0.88

Fig. 9. in situ wear rates versus the characteristics of the transfer film: (a) area fraction, (b) thickness, and (c) free-space length. Data labels are filled to the corresponding sliding regime. The least-squared error power-law fits are shown for reference.

200 μm 200 μm grey scale intensity

Lf =233 μm

μ±4σ

counterface and scratches

-2

0

1

2

-1

3

0 0

0.04

255

pr ob

ab ili

ty d

en si

ty

he ig

ht (μ

m )

Fig. 10. Example of the method applied to a rough surface: (a) profilometry map of an area of interest showing the film in areas of high intensity and scratches in areas of low intensity; (b) intensity histogram showing the surface height interval μ74s used to define regions of transfer film; and (c) converted black and white image with a shaded box representing Lf.

J. Ye et al. / Wear 316 (2014) 133–143142

appeared in the converted binary matrices. To prevent the scratches from artificially reducing Lf, we shifted our observation windows to remove the scratches from the analysis. Roughness is a practical concern since engineering surfaces are inherently rough. Profilome- try offers the most general solution to the challenges of roughness in transfer film characterization [28]. Fig. 10 illustrates the characteriza- tion of the free-space length on a rough surface using profilometry for film detection. On especially rough surfaces with thin films, even profilometry techniques may be unable to detect the films. In this case, electron microscopy may provide the best discrimination since electron contrast is dominated by atomic weight. No single technique addresses every potential challenge and the investigator will need to establish the most appropriate method of film detection on a case- by-case basis.

6. Conclusions

1. A new transfer film quality assessment metric was proposed to quantify the representative size of uncovered, or transfer film- free areas (free-space length, Lf). It is hypothesized that these domains dictate the size of adhered regions, which dictates the size of the wear debris.

2. A method was presented to determine the free-space length from standard optical micrographs and height maps.

3. For the well-studied alumina–PTFE system used to illustrate the method, the wear rate correlated most strongly with free- space length and least strongly with area fraction.

Acknowledgments

The authors gratefully acknowledge financial support from the AFOSR (YIP FA9550-10-1–0295) for financial support of this work.

References

[1] D.L. Burris, et al., Polymeric nanocomposites for tribological applications, Macromol. Mater. Eng. 292 (4) (2007) 387–402.

[2] S. Bahadur, The development of transfer layers and their role in polymer tribology, Wear 245 (1–2) (2000) 92–99.

[3] B. Briscoe, Wear of polymers—an essay on fundamental-aspects, Tribol. Int. 14 (4) (1981) 231–243.

[4] T. Blanchet, F. Kennedy, Sliding wear mechanism of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and PTFE composites, Wear 153 (1) (1992) 229–243.

[5] S. Bahadur, D. Gong, The action of fillers in the modification of the tribological behavior of polymers, Wear 158 (1–2) (1992) 41–59.

[6] S. Bahadur, D. Tabor, The wear of filled polytetrafluoroethylene, Wear 98 (1–3) (1984) 1–13.

[7] D. Gong, Q. Xue, H. Wang, ESCA study on tribochemical characteristic of filled PTFE, Wear 148 (1) (1991) 161–169.

[8] D. Gong, Q.J. Xue, H.L. Wang, Physical models of adhesive wear of polytetra- fluoroethylene and its composites, Wear 147 (1) (1991) 9–24.

[9] S. Bahadur, D.L. Gong, J.W. Anderegg, The role of copper-compounds as fillers in transfer film formation and wear of nylon, Wear 154 (2) (1992) 207–223.

[10] C. Schwartz, S. Bahadur, Studies on the tribological behavior and transfer film- counterface bond strength for polyphenylene sulfide filled with nanoscale alumina particles, Wear 237 (2) (2000) 261–273.

[11] Q. Wang, Q. Xue, W. Shen, The friction and wear properties of nanometre SiO2 filled polyetheretherketone, Tribol. Int. 30 (3) (1997) 193–197.

[12] Q.-H. Wang, et al., The effect of nanometer SiC filler on the tribological behavior of PEEK, Wear 209 (1–2) (1997) 316–321.

[13] Q.-H. Wang, et al., The friction and wear characteristics of nanometer SiC and polytetrafluoroethylene filled polyetheretherketone, Wear 243 (1–2) (2000) 140–146.

[14] F. Li, et al., The friction and wear characteristics of nanometer ZnO filled polytetrafluoroethylene, Wear 249 (10–11) (2001) 877–882.

[15] W. Chen, et al., Tribological behavior of carbon-nanotube-filled PTFE compo- sites, Tribol. Lett. 15 (3) (2003) 275–278.

[16] W. Sawyer, et al., A study on the friction and wear behavior of PTFE filled with alumina nanoparticles, Wear 254 (5–6) (2003) 573–580.

[17] P. Bhimaraj, et al., Effect of matrix morphology on the wear and friction behavior of alumina nanoparticle/poly(ethylene) terephthalate composites, Wear 258 (9) (2005) 1437–1443.

[18] B.A. Krick, et al., Environmental dependence of ultra-low wear behavior of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and alumina composites suggests tribochem- ical mechanisms, Tribol. Int. 51 (2012) 42–46.

[19] K. Friedrich, Z. Lu, A. Hager, Recent advances in polymer composites' tribology, Wear 190 (2) (1995) 139–144.

[20] D. Burris, W. Sawyer, Tribological sensitivity of PTFE/alumina nanocomposites to a range of traditional surface finishes, Tribol. Trans. 48 (2) (2005) 147–153.

[21] S.E. McElwain, et al., Effect of particle size on the wear resistance of alumina- filled PTFE micro- and nano-composites, Tribol. Trans. 51 (3) (2005) 247–253.

[22] D. Wheeler, The transfer of polytetrafluoroethylene studied by x-ray photo- electron spectroscopy, Wear 66 (3) (1981) 355–365.

[23] V.K. Jain, S. Bahadur, Material transfer in polymer–polymer sliding, Wear 46 (1) (1978) 177–188.

[24] T. Blanchet, F. Kennedy, D. Jayne, XPS analysis of the effect of fillers on PTFE transfer film development in sliding contacts, Tribol. Trans. 36 (4) (1993) 535–544.

[25] E.L. Yang, J.P. Hirvonen, R.O. Toivanen, Effect of temperature on the transfer film formation in sliding contact of PTFE with stainless-steel, Wear 146 (2) (1991) 367–376.

[26] T.A. Blanchet, S.S. Kandanur, L.S. Schadler, Coupled effect of filler content and countersurface roughness on PTFE nanocomposite wear resistance, Tribol. Lett. 40 (1) (2010) 11–21.

[27] K.A. Laux, C.J. Schwartz, Effects of contact pressure, molecular weight, and supplier on the wear behavior and transfer film of polyetheretherketone (PEEK), Wear 297 (1–2) (2013) 919–925.

[28] K.A. Laux, C.J. Schwartz, Influence of linear reciprocating and multi-directional sliding on PEEK wear performance and transfer film formation, Wear 301 (1– 2) (2013) 727–734.

[29] F.P. Bowden, J.N. Gregory, D. Tabor, Lubrication of metal surfaces by fatty acids, Nature 156 (3952) (1945) 97–101.

[30] P. Bhimaraj, et al., Tribological investigation of the effects of particle size, loading and crystallinity on poly(ethylene) terephthalate nanocomposites, Wear 264 (7–8) (2008) 632–637.

[31] J. Ye, H.S. Khare, D.L. Burris, Transfer film evolution and its role in promoting ultra-low wear of a PTFE nanocomposite, Wear 297 (1–2) (2013) 1095–1102.

[32] E. Rabinowicz, Friction and Wear of Materials, 2nd ed., John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1995.

[33] H.S. Khare, D.L. Burris, A quantitative method for measuring nanocomposite dispersion, Polymer 51 (3) (2010) 719–729.

[34] D.L. Burris, et al., A route to wear resistant PTFE via trace loadings of functionalized nanofillers, Wear 267 (1–4) (2009) 653–660.

[35] D. Burris, W. Sawyer, Improved wear resistance in alumina–PTFE nanocom- posites with irregular shaped nanoparticles, Wear 260 (7–8) (2006) 915–918.

[36] T. Schmitz, et al., Wear-rate uncertainty analysis, J. Tribol.—Trans. ASME 126 (4) (2004) 802–808.

[37] T.A. Blanchet, W.G. Sawyer, Differential application of wear models to frac- tional thin films, Wear 251 (2001) 1003–1008.

J. Ye et al. / Wear 316 (2014) 133–143 143

  • Quantitative characterization of solid lubricant transfer film quality
    • Introduction
    • Method
    • Method demonstration
      • Rationale for the materials system
      • Materials
      • Wear testing
      • Transfer film characterization
      • Wear rate characterization
    • Results
    • Discussion
    • Conclusions
    • Acknowledgments
    • References

all articles will be uesed/Quantitative in situ 2008.pdf

A

s s t t n ©

K

1

w c f l s q b f fl H o v o c c

M

0 d

Available online at www.sciencedirect.com

Wear 264 (2008) 731–736

Short communication

Quantitative in situ measurement of transfer film thickness by a Newton’s rings method

Kathryn J. Wahl a,∗, Richard R. Chromik a,b,1, Gun Young Lee a a Code 6176, U.S. Naval Research Laboratory, Washington, DC 20375-5342, United States

b Department of Physics, North Carolina State University, Raleigh, NC, United States

Received 19 December 2006; received in revised form 8 March 2007; accepted 10 April 2007 Available online 23 May 2007

bstract

We present a method, based on a Newton’s rings analysis, to monitor and quantify the thickness of a solid lubricant transfer film during in itu tribological studies. The evolution of transfer film buildup was monitored by optical microscopy and recorded by videography through a tationary transparent hemisphere during reciprocating sliding. By monitoring the relative position of interference fringes (Newton’s rings) outside

he contact zone, the relative separation of the ball and track surface can be measured. The implementation of this technique is demonstrated hrough examples of sliding experiments with sapphire against a solid lubricant coating. Ex situ measurements of transfer film thickness using on-contact interferometry were consistent with in situ measurements from the Newton’s rings method.

2007 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved.

nterfe

n fi l s s r o p b

2

p i

eywords: Newton’s rings; In situ tribology; Transfer film; Solid lubrication; I

. Introduction

The study of third body lubrication effects on friction and ear, especially for solid lubricated contacts, can be aided

onsiderably by simple optical observation of the buried inter- ace [1–7]. While in situ measurement of elastohydrodynamic ubricated (EHL) contact thickness has been studied with con- iderable sophistication [8–11], relatively few in situ studies uantifying interfacial film thickness of solid lubricants have een carried out [12,13]. The most typical and simplest geometry or visualization of a pin-on-disk contact is through a transparent at, which results in the least optical distortion of the interface. owever, since most solid lubricants and coatings used in tribol- gy are not transparent at visible wavelengths, this method is not iable. By employing transparent hemispherical counterbodies f glass or sapphire, optical microscopy and spectroscopy of the

ontacts to coated surfaces is possible, including solid lubricant oatings [5–7].

∗ Corresponding author. Tel.: +1 202 767 5419; fax: +1 202 767 3321. E-mail address: kathryn.wahl@nrl.navy.mil (K.J. Wahl).

1 Present address: Department of Mining Metals and Materials Engineering, cGill University, Montreal, Quebec, Canada.

c i s b D s ( r

043-1648/$ – see front matter © 2007 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved. oi:10.1016/j.wear.2007.04.009

rometry

This paper describes application of a Newton’s rings tech- ique to monitor and quantify the evolution of interfacial transfer lm thickness in solid lubricated contacts. Using simple white

ight illumination, interference fringes (Newton’s rings) can be een before and during the tribological testing against specular pecimens. By monitoring the relative motion of the Newton’s ings outside the contact zone as sliding progresses, the thickness f interfacial transfer films is quantified in real time. Non-contact rofilometry confirms the thickness of transfer films measured y the in situ Newton’s rings method.

. Experimental

Our in situ tribometry instrumentation has been described reviously [5–7]. Briefly, a stationary (transparent) hemisphere s mounted on a lever arm that is dead-loaded to provide a oncentrated contact against a specimen of interest. The spec- men is mounted to a plate housing a quartz piezoelectric ensor for friction sensing. Reciprocating motion is provided y dc servomotors, a linear motion stage and computer control.

uring friction tests, optical microscopy through the hemi-

phere is observed on a computer monitor and recorded directly 30 frames/s) to a Digital Versatile Disk (DVD) recorder or ecorded and transcribed from S-VHS video tape to DVD

732 K.J. Wahl et al. / Wear 264 (2008) 731–736

F ed Mo o

f r d f m

h m i fi t m n t p r p e e H t m

fl m a m

h

w t F t

w n

h

a

w

d t o b d m

a

w E

c and Poisson’s ratios, υ, of the counterbody (hemisphere) and substrate. For conditions where the sphere deforms elastically outside the contact zone, Cameron and Gohar [16] showed that

ig. 1. In situ optical images of a sapphire hemisphere in contact with a Ti-dop f the camera.

ormat. A record of the friction coefficient and cycle number is ecorded with the video to allow easy reference between friction ata and video frames. Individual frame captures are performed rom the video to analyze images for transfer film thickness easurements. Fig. 1a shows an example of a contact between a sapphire

emisphere loaded to 6.4 N and a smooth, specular sample illu- inated with white light. The dark circular region in the center

s the zeroth order destructive interference fringe, with three to ve Newton’s rings typically visible. For our instrument, con-

act radii are typically 50–100 �m, and are usually within a few icrometers of the predicted Hertzian diameters [5,6,14]. We

ote that a polarizer in the optical path is necessary to obtain he image presented in Fig. 1(a). The same contact without the olarizer is presented in Fig. 1b, where ghost (double) images esult from the birefringence of sapphire; to eliminate these the olarizer is simply rotated until the image is optimized. This ffect depends on sapphire crystal orientation, with some ori- ntations resulting in less distortion than presented in Fig. 1(b). owever, for commercially purchased, polished hemispheres

he price is much cheaper if the orientation is not specified, aking a polarizing filter a simple solution. For optical observation through a hemispherical lens on a

at, the positions of the rings are readily calculated by deter- ining the height, h, of the gap between the hemisphere surface

nd specimen as depicted in Fig. 2(a). Assuming a rigid sphere odel, the height is determined by the position, x, of the rings:

= R − √

R2 − x2 (1)

here R is radius of the hemisphere and x is the distance from he center axis of the hemisphere to the spot on the surface. ig. 2(a) is the condition for no deformation (zero load) and

he height difference between neighboring dark fringes is λ/2,

n i f m m

S2 coating (a) with and (b) without polarizing filter in the optical path in front

here λ ∼ 546 nm for white light illumination.1 Since there is o gap at the contact area, the zeroth order fringe height is zero:

0 = 0, x ≤ a0 nd the heights at the rings are

h1 = 1 × λ 2 , at x = a1,

h2 = 2 × λ 2 , at x = a2, . . . , hn = n × λ

2 , at x = an (2)

here an is the radius of the nth ring. Under loaded conditions, both the Hertz contact size and the

eformation of the surfaces must be accounted for in determining he positions of the Newton’s rings. When the hemispherical lens f radius R is placed against the plane surface with a normal load elow the elastic limit, the circular contact area, whose radius is enoted as ao in Fig. 2(b), is determined using Hertzian contact echanics [15],

0 = (

3PR

4Er

)1/3 (3)

here P is the normal load, and Er is the reduced modulus,

r = [(1 − ν21)/E1 + (1 − ν22)/E2] −1

. For thin coatings (where oating thickness �2ao), Er is estimated from the modulus

1 We note that monochromatic illumination will markedly improve the sharp- ess of the interference fringes. In our experiments, recording color video mages (with white light illumination) strongly aids us in interpreting the inter- acial tribology processes from videography. A high-resolution camera, with onochromatic illumination, would provide an ideal situation for quantitative easurements.

K.J. Wahl et al. / Wear 264 (2008) 731–736 733

Fig. 2. (a) Schematic drawing of a hemispherical lens placed on a plane surface. (b) Optical image of concentric interference fringes (Newton’s rings) around the c o

t w

h

w t i a S n

x

Fig. 3. (a) Side view of the loci of Newton’s rings with a transfer film separating the contact (t �= 0). Also shown are estimated Newton’s ring position (normal- i w

F h

ontact, and schematic side view of Hertzian contact. (c) Expanded side view f the contact with the loci of dark (destructive interference) fringes.

he height of the air gap at a distance x from the center can be ritten

= h∗ + a 2 0

πR

⎡ ⎣ (

x2

a20 − 1 )0.5

− (

2 − x 2

a20

) cos−1

a0

x

⎤ ⎦ (4)

here h* is a film of uniform thickness separating the contact in he contact zone. The bracketed portion of Eq. (4) is approx- mated with 3.81(x/a0 − 1)1.5 for a0 ≤ x ≤ 2a0 [16], allowing n analytical solution for Newton’s rings positions at hn = nλ/2. olving Eq. (4) for x at h* = 0, the Newton’s rings positions for = 1, 2, . . . are approximated by

n ≈ a0 [

1 + (

hn R

1.21a02

)2/3] for hn = nλ/2. (5) x

zed to contact radius) vs. transfer film thickness (normalized to illumination avelength), outside the contact for loads (b) P = 6.4 N and 24 N.

or contacts separated by a transfer film of uniform thickness *, ring positions are found at

n ≈ a0 ⎡ ⎣1 +

( {hn − h∗} R

1.21a20

)2/3⎤⎦ . (6)

734 K.J. Wahl et al. / Wear 264 (2008) 731–736

F er film a

E r f c i fi w

f c P i n T p p t r a t t r o F s c

b m o i n d

t

m m f o 2 l f i fi fi f d i t t a b 5

m o o f t n N

3

(

ig. 4. In situ images showing the buildup and depletion of an interfacial transf nd could be monitored up to 300 cycles.

q. (6) shows that as the transfer film thickness increases, the adii of the Newton’s rings will decrease. Vice versa, if the trans- er film thins, the concentric rings will move outward. Thus, the hange of thickness at the contact can be monitored by measur- ng the change in the radii of the Newton’s rings. If the transfer lm thickness changes by λ/2, the rings will have shifted by one hole position each. The calculated positions of the first five Newton’s rings as a

unction of transfer film thickness are shown for typical contact onditions used in our sliding tests in Fig. 3(b) and (c) for loads = 6.4 N and 24 N, respectively. The Newton’s rings position

s normalized to the contact radius and the transfer film thick- ess is normalized to the wavelength of the illuminating light. o quantify the film thickness from contact images, the initial osition of any concentric ring is used as the primary reference oint. However, by using the rings near the zeroth order fringe, he separation of neighboring rings is largest, providing good esolution. For this reason, the initial position of the first ring, 1, is used as the reference point and tracking of the motion of he second ring, a2 (see Fig. 3(a)) is used to measure transfer film hickness. We also note that the separation between Newton’s ings is governed by load as well as reduced modulus and radius f curvature. For contact conditions that differ only in load (e.g. ig. 3(b) and (c)), the contacts at lower load have more broadly paced rings. This results in greater sensitivity to film thickness hanges for the same microscope and camera pixel resolution.

As a simple example, when the transfer film thickens or thins y an integer multiple, n, times λ/2, there will be no fractional ovement of the ring positions. All of the rings move inward

r outward by n orders (i.e. aj±n goes to aj). For this case, the mage would look the same before and after the change in thick-

ess. However, by observing test videos, these changes are still etectable through the motion of the rings.

For fractional movement of rings (changes in transfer film hickness �= nλ/2), we define p = l/m, where 0 ≤ p ≤ 1 and l and

i o i u

between sapphire and a Ti-doped MoS2 coating. Newton’s rings were visible

are defined by Fig. 3(a). The thickness change can be esti- ated from this fractional ratio using a linear approximation

or the thickness as a function of ring position relative to its riginal position (the linear regression fit to the curve for the nd ring, a2 = x2 is good to R = 0.9997 between the two vertical ines as shown in Fig. 3(b)). Thus, the film thickness change or a fractional change in ring position a2 inward relative to a1, s simply pλ/2. Higher order rings also yield confident linear ts over the range defined in Fig. 3(b). Thus, when the transfer lm is thicker than λ/2, the higher order rings are used to track ractional changes. In this case, the same ring tracking proce- ure is used where a higher order ring replaces the 2nd ring and ts position is monitored with respect to the original position of he first ring (same region defined in Fig. 3(a)). This is consis- ent with measuring fractional movement of the rings with an dded thickness of (n − 2) λ/2 (i.e. tracking the 3rd ring would e for 273 < h* < 546 nm, tracking the 4th ring would be for 46 < h* < 819).

An example for reciprocating sliding tests against a Ti-doped olybdenum disulphide coating on steel [17,18] with P = 24 N

n a sapphire hemisphere of R = 3.125 mm, and sliding speed f 1 mm/s at ∼50–60% relative humidity is presented in the ollowing section to demonstrate the technique. Afterwards, he hemispheres were photographed and transfer film thick- ess determined using non-contact optical profilometry (Zygo ewView 5000).

. Results and discussion

Fig. 4 shows six in situ optical microscope images still images taken from video) at five selected cycles dur-

ng a sliding test whose average friction as a function f sliding cycle is shown in Fig. 5. By monitoring the nstantaneous position and movement of the Newton’s rings sing the recorded video, we were able to determine the

K.J. Wahl et al. / Wear 264 (2008) 731–736 735

F v

t (

i i b t t o t f t 2 t t

t t i s p d c a i T o f i g i t t f t

g

Fig. 6. (a) Average friction coefficient and transfer film thickness measured in situ using Newton’s rings method. (b) Optical profilometry trace across transfer film and grayscale image from optical profiler. The image has been flattened by r w

n d s t i w f t l s s t t cult to see through the MoS transfer films, but that the Raman

ig. 5. Average friction coefficient and transfer film thickness measured from ideo analysis using the method described in the text.

ransfer film thickness at various times throughout the test see Fig. 5).

In this test, a transfer film attached to the hemisphere formed mmediately upon sliding (e.g. cycle 32 in Fig. 4). By cycle 163, t had begun to thin slightly, and from cycle 263 on the track can e seen through the center of the transfer film which remained hin thereafter. The Newton’s rings analysis was manageable up o ∼300 cycles, after which the debris surrounding the contact bscured the rings. This test continued to 1000 cycles. After esting, the ball was examined using non-contact optical inter- erometry. The center of the transfer film was immeasurably hin (not shown), with some debris patches of between 120 and 20 nm thick. This is consistent with the video micrographs at he end of the test, which showed no observable transfer film in he contact, like that shown at cycle 437.

To demonstrate that the thickness measured in situ is consis- ent with ex situ measurements, we stopped a duplicate sliding est at 150 cycles. Fig. 6(a) shows the friction coefficient and n situ Newton’s rings thickness measurement. This test was topped before the transfer film had thinned completely. The rofilometry trace and accompanying image shown in Fig. 6(b) emonstrate that the transfer film was fairly uniform across the ontact (in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction) nd approximately 400–500 nm thick. This is consistent with the n situ measure from the Newton’s rings estimation of ∼400 nm. he interferometry image shows pileup at the edges. Such debris n the ball (and debris or roughness on the track) results in con- ormational changes in the contact as debris passes through or s trapped in the contact. Both situations (transfer film inhomo- eneities, and track debris or scratches) can result in “jagged” nterference rings (see e.g. Fig. 5 in Ref. [7]). These deforma- ions appear to be remarkably localized, and we therefore infer hat the average measurement provided using this simple inter- erence technique is quite representative of the interfacial film

hickness.

This Newton’s rings technique is one of two methods our roup has demonstrated for quantitatively determining the thick-

m i s

emoving the radius of the hemisphere and the grayscale is in arbitrary units ith brighter regions showing thicker transfer film.

ess of solid lubricant transfer films in situ. The other method, emonstrated by Scharf and Singer [12], used the intensity of ignature Raman peaks to determine transfer film thickness; here, the intensity of the transfer film Raman peaks must be cal- brated using ex situ profilometry. The latter technique worked ell for diamond-like carbon coatings where the optical mean

ree path of visible wavelength photons is of the same order as he transfer film thickness (200–500 nm). For MoS2-containing ubricants, we note that the optical mean free path is much maller [19], on order of 20–30 nm. While transfer films for ome MoS2 coatings can be thin under dry air sliding condi- ions [20], humid conditions can result in formation of quite hick transfer films. This means that it is not only more diffi-

2 ethod simply would not be sensitive to thickness changes typ-

cally observed for MoS2 transfer films. Fortunately, for these urfaces, the Newton’s rings method works quite well. Ulti-

7 ear 26

m d

4

o t s c a f f

A

( a ( w R p N g A

R

[

[

[

[

[

[

[

[

[

[19] K.J. Wahl, L.E. Seitzman, R.N. Bolster, I.L. Singer, Low-friction, high-

36 K.J. Wahl et al. / W

ately, the choice of method will depend on the optical (and ebris generating) properties of the interface under study.

. Conclusions

We have demonstrated the utility of a simple method, based n Newton’s rings interference fringes, to monitor and quantify ransfer film thickness during in situ tribological testing. The in itu measure of transfer film thickness was demonstrated to be onsistent with ex situ measure of transfer film thickness. Thus, real time record of the transfer film thickness, and its relation to

riction changes during sliding, can be made and used to interpret riction and wear behavior of solid lubricant coatings.

cknowledgements

We acknowledge the support of the Office of Naval Research ONR) and the Naval Research Laboratory (NRL). G. Lee cknowledges support through the National Research Council NRC) postdoctoral research associate program. R.R. Chromik as supported through the Air Force Office of Scientific esearch (AFOSR) sponsored “Extreme Friction” Multidisci- linary University Research Initiative #FA9550-04-1-0381 at orth Carolina State University. We gratefully acknowledge the ift of the Ti–MoS2 (MoST) coating from Dennis Teer (Teer ssociates).

eferences

[1] H.E. Sliney, Dynamics of Solid lubrication as observed by optical microscopy, ASLE Trans. 21 (1977) 109–117.

[2] Y. Berthier, D. Play, Wear mechanisms in oscillating bearings, Wear 75 (1982) 369–387.

[3] A. Jullien, M.H. Meruisse, Y. Berthier, Determination of tribological

history and wear through visualization in lubricated contacts using a carbon-based composite, Wear 194 (1996) 116–125.

[4] S. Descartes, Lubrification solide a partir d’un revetement de MoSx: Conséquences de la rhéology et des débits de troisième dorps sur let frottement, Doctoral Thesis, INSA de Lyon, Lyon, France, 1997.

[

4 (2008) 731–736

[5] S.D. Dvorak, K.J. Wahl, I.L. Singer, Friction behavior of boric acid and annealed boron carbide coatings studied by in situ Raman tribometry, Tribol. Trans. 45 (2002) 354–362.

[6] T.W. Scharf, I.L. Singer, Role of third bodies in friction behavior of diamond-like nanocomposite coatings studied by in situ tribometry, Tribol. Trans. 45 (2002) 363–371.

[7] I.L. Singer, S.D. Dvorak, K.J. Wahl, T.W. Scharf, Role of third bodies in friction and wear of protective coatings, J. Vac. Sci. Technol. A 21 (2003) S232–S240.

[8] R. Gohar, A. Cameron, The mapping of elastohydrodynamic contacts, ASLE Trans. 10 (1967) 215–225.

[9] P.M. Cann, H.A. Spikes, J. Hutchinson, The development of a spacer layer imaging method (SLIM) for mapping elastohydrodynamic contacts, Tribol. Trans. 39 (1996) 915–921.

10] P.M. Cann, H.A. Spikes, Measurement of pressure distribution in EHL—development of method and application to dry static contacts, Tri- bol. Trans. 48 (2005) 474–483.

11] R.P. Glovnea, A.K. Forrest, A.V. Olver, H.A. Spikes, Measurement of sub- nanometer lubricant films using ultra-thin film interferometry, Tribol. Lett. 15 (2003) 217–230.

12] T.W. Scharf, I.L. Singer, Quantification of the thickness of carbon transfer films using Raman tribometry, Tribol. Lett. 14 (2003) 137–145.

13] R.R. Chromik, C.C. Baker, A.A. Voevodin, K.J. Wahl, In situ tribome- try study of lubricating nanocomposite coatings, Wear 262 (2007) 1239– 1252.

14] R.R. Chromik, A.L. Winfrey, R.J. Nemanich, K.J. Wahl, In situ tribometry of nanocrystalline diamond coatings, Wear, Submitted for publication.

15] K.L. Johnson, Contact Mechanics, Cambridge University Press, Cam- bridge, 1985 (Chapter 4).

16] A. Cameron, R. Gohar, Theoretical and experimental studies of the oil film in lubricated point contact, Proc. R. Soc. Lond. A 291 (1966) 520– 536.

17] D.G. Teer, J. Hampshire, V. Fox, V. Bellido-Gonzalez, The tribological properties of MoS2–metal composite coatings deposited by closed field magnetron sputtering, Surf. Coat. Technol. 94/95 (1997) 572–577.

18] N.M. Renevier, V.C. Fox, D.G. Teer, J. Hampshire, Coating characteris- tics and tribological properties of sputter-deposited MoS2 metal composite coatings deposited by closed field unbalanced magnetron sputter ion plat- ing, Surf. Coat. Technol. 127 (2000) 24–37.

endurance, ion-beam-deposited Pb–Mo–S coatings, Surf. Coat. Technol. 73 (1995) 152–159.

20] K.J. Wahl, I.L. Singer, Quantification of a lubricant transfer process that enhances the sliding life of a MoS2 coating, Tribol. Lett. 1 (1995) 59–66.

  • Quantitative in situ measurement of transfer film thickness by a Newtons rings method
    • Introduction
    • Experimental
    • Results and discussion
    • Conclusions
    • Acknowledgements
    • References

all articles will be uesed/Sliding surface of polytetrafluoroethylene an investigation with the electron microscope 1968 [10].pdf

Wear - Elsevier Sequoia S.A., Lausanne - Printed in the Netherlands 193

THE SLIDING SURFACE OF POLYTETRAFLUOROETHYLENE: AN INVESTIGATION WITH THE ELECTRON MICROSCOPE

R. P. STEIJN

Engineering Materials Laboratory, Engineering Research Division, Engineering Department, E. I. du Pont de Nemours 6 Co., Inc., Wilmington, Del. 19898 (U.S.A .)

(Received July3,1g68)

SUMMARY

Simple sliding experiments with hardened steel sliders on flat polytetra- fluoroethylene were carried out. The sliding tracks were examined with the electron microscope by means of surface replicas and thin film extractions. Selected area diffraction (SAD) was used to investigate molecular orientation. Much of the electron micrography was done in stereo. The light microscope was used to verify the reliability of the replication technique used.

In the case of steel sliding against PTFE surfaces, thin films of drawn PTFE, their chains oriented along the sliding direction, were observed below the slider. Where two tracks intersected, the SAD pattern was of the top track. The results indicate that sliding against PTFE involves drawing thin, highly-oriented films. It is suggested that the dynamic friction of PTFE is related to this drawing process.

INTRODUCTION

The role of transferred films in the friction and wear behavior of materials in sliding contact has been recognized for some time. For a soft material sliding against a hard one, as when certain plastics slide on steel, beneficial effects often accrue from such transfer. In the case of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) sliding against steel, the formation of a film of transferred PTFE on the steel surface is a requisite for optimum sliding conditions.

The technical literature contains references to the actual transfer of a thin film of PTFE during sliding of this plastic against steel. BOWERS, CLINTON, AND ZISMAN~,~ established this transfer conclusively from friction measurements and also reported that electron diffraction of the film showed the PTFE molecules to be oriented along the direction of sliding. More recent work by UETZ AND BRECKEL~ with flat annular sliding surfaces confirms that, when PTFE is rubbed against hard chrome plate, the sliding combination soon becomes essentially PTFE against PTFE-coated metal, with a corresponding improvement in friction. These same investigators also observed that rubbed-on PTFE particles appeared on the sliding surface of the PTFE ring itself.

The most extensive investigation of PTFE transfer was made by MAKINSON AND TABoR~. These investigators slid small spheres of PTFE over flat PTFE slabs

Wear, rz (1968) Ig3--212

I94 Ii. 1’. STEIJN

and clean glass slides at vastly diffe; ent sliding speeds and then examined the friction tracks under the microscope. They found abundant evidence of transfer and made the interesting observation that at high sliding speeds, characterized by high friction values, the transferred particles were lumps and large fragments; at low sliding speeds, characterized by low friction values, the transferred material was in the form of thin (IOO-4ooA) oriented films of PTFE. This suggested to MAKINSON AND TABOR that different shear mechanisms operate at low and high sliding speeds.

It is felt, however, that the above investigations indicate a need for microscopic examinations of sliding surfaces at considerably higher resolution. Based on our ex- perience, electron microscopy definitely offers promise to reveal details of the PTFE sliding surface that cannot be seen with the light microscope. After some initial work by the author proved this to be indeed entirely feasibles, a more detailed and thorough investigation was carried out.

The report below deals specifically with the examination, by light and electron microscopy, of the sliding surface of PTFE after a smooth, highly-polished spherical slider of steel has slid across it. Ordinary transmission electron microscopy was used extensively in spite of the reluctance often felt in this area to have to rely entirely on surface replicas. However, we have found, as the work below shows, that single-stage carbon replicas stripped mechanically from the surface, extract thin films and frag- ments of PTFE, without distortion, and that these extraction replicas can then be used for studying the sliding interface both by bright-field electron microscopy and selected area electron diffraction. In addition, extensive use was made of stereo electron micrography, a technique that has proved invaluable in the interpretation of micrographs of the sliding track.

EXPERIMENTAL

To produce suitable sliding tracks in PTFE, a modified Bowden-Leben friction apparatus was used with 3/16- and r/z-in.-diam. spheres as sliders and with loads up to 8 kg. Sliding speeds were 0.001, 0.005, and 0.010 cmjsec. Friction was continuously I-ecorded on a strip chart.

For higher sliding speeds, a “three pins-on-a-flat-disc” type apparatus was used. With this apparatus, a circular track of I in.-diam. is made on the flat PTFE face. The maximum sliding speed is 50 cmjsec. The load used was 5 kg. The three sliders were I/4-in.-diam. pins of hardened steel with hemispherical ends of r/8-m. radius. For more details on this apparatus, see ref. 5.

The flat PTFE specimens for both friction apparatus were machined from either molded or extruded “Teflon” @ TFE-fluorocarbon resin sheet and bar stock with crystallinities of 65 and 55 “,/o, respectively. Their sliding surfaces were prepared by wet abrasion with silicon carbide paper, Nos. 240 through 600, rinsed in tap and distilled water, and dried in warm air. The surface finish measured perpendicular to the final abrasion direction was about 12 ,uin. AA.

The sliders used in the Bowden-Leben apparatus were commercial ball- bearing balls of hardened SAE 52100 steel with a surface finish better than I pin. r.m.s. They were either solvent-cleaned in methanol or lightly abraded with No. 600

6 Du I’ont trade-mark.

SLIDING SURFACE OF PTFE =95

silicon carbide paper and then blown dry and clean in a jet of warm air. The hemispherical steel sliders of the “three-pins-on-a-flat-ring” apparatus were also prepared by dry- abrasion with No. 600 papers and blown clean in a warm air stream. In a few instances, PTFE specimens cut from r/16-in-thick molded sheet stock were used in the as- received condition except for washing in a solvent and drying.

To produce tracks suitable for microscopic examination, friction traverses in one or several directions with respect to the final abrasion pattern were made. Most of the tracks were arranged in one of the following ways :

(I) A uniderectional track at right angles to the abrasion direction (Fig. I(A)).

Abrasion

FtictiWl track

Primary track

Secondary track

(0 101 4El

Fig. I. Friction tracks in flat specimens of FTFE. Important sites for replication shown by black clots.

(2) Two mutually perpendicular tracks placed at 45 and 315 degrees to the abrasion direction. The track made first is referred to as the primary track. The track at right angles to the primary track is called the secondary track (Fig. I(B)).

(3) The PTFE surface is vacuum-coated with a heavy metal (Cr, Pt, or Au) prior to the friction test. A unidirectional track is then made with a new steel ball at right angles to the abrasion direction, similar to Fig. x(A), (see Fig. I (C)).

(4) Two mutually perpendicular tracks on unabraded, as-received PTFE sheet (Fig. I(D)).

(5) Figure x(E) shows the circular track on a PTFE ring made with the “three- pins-on-a-disc” sliding apparatus. Sites for replication may be chosen at will along the track. As can be seen, at site i in Fig. I(E), the sliding direction is approximately at right angles to the final abrasion direction.

Selected points of interest were: (i) sites outside the track area, (ii) sites cen- trally located in the track, and (iii) sites on the edge of the track. These sites are also indicated in Fig. 1.

Single-stage carbon replicas were obtained by vacuum coating the PTFE specimen with carbon from various directions, placing a drop of polyacrylic acid (PAA) on the chosen site, and allowing it to harden overnight. The carbon-PAA replica was then lifted from the PTFE surface with sharp tweezers and floated in distilled water. After the PAA was dissolved, the carbon replica was placed on a screen and dried to make it ready for insertion in the specimen holder of the microscope. In a few in-

Wean, 12 (1968) 1g3-2x2

stances, shadowing with Pt and Cr was done to enhance contrast. The electron microscopes used were a Philips EM-zoo* and a JEM-7**.

Electron diffraction patterns were obtained from extractions that were stripped off the specimen surface with the carbon replica. Very low beam intensities had to be used to avoid thermal degradation. Rright-field microscopy had to be done afterward, since this would cause sufficient thermal degradation to jeopardize subsequent dif- fraction.

Electron microscopy studies

The examination of friction tracks perpendicular to and at a 45” angle to the preparatory abrasion can best be described with the aid of electron micrographs. Of several hundred, only a few will be presented here. They are typical of the informa- tion obtained.

The chief result of this investigation is the confirmation of streched and drawn films of PTFE on the track. Figure 2 is an electron micrograph taken in the center of a track (site i in Fig. r(A)) that was made on PTFE molded sheet with a smooth, un- abraded I/a-in.-diam. steel ball under a load of 4000 g and at a sliding speed of 0.005

lg. 2. Lenter Of traclr WI1

erection of final abrasion.

* Product of Philips Gloeilampen Fabriek N.V., Eindhoven, The Netherlands. ** Product of Japan Electron Optics Laboratory Co., Ltd. (Jeolco), Tokyo, Japan.

Wear, 12 (1968) 1gj--212

Parallel with

SLIDING SURFACE OF PTFE I97

cm/set. The track was made at right angles to the abrasion direction. The friction coefficient was o.o~-0.06. The sliding direction is well-defined in the micrograph by the sliding marks visible across the replica. The furrow that cuts diagonally across the field of view at right angles to the sliding direction is what is left of an abrasion groove that was too deep to be entirely erased by the moving slider. It can be seen that films and bands of an obviously plastic material are stretched from one side of the groove to the other, like bridges spanning a ravine. This became very clear by using stereo electron microscopy. It is believed the plastic material is PTFE. More detail, especially of the edges of these films, is shown in Fig. 3.

Fig. 3. Films spanning abrasion groove. a. Parallel with sliding direction. b. Parallel with abrasion direction.

Examination of many more track replicas confirmed that, whenever a small depression or groove is left by the preparatory abrasion on the track, it is spanned by these films. Because of the sliding geometry of a sphere on a flat, such bands or films are expected erz masse at the sides of the track where the abrasion marks begin to emerge and where the ball slider has grazed the top of the abrasion ridges. This is illustrated by Fig. 4 (site j in Fig. (A)). The bands are often so long and narrow that they may be termed fibers. The PTFE in this case was from extruded rod.

The same films and bands were also found on friction tracks made at higher sliding speeds. Figure 5 shows an area near the periphery of a track made at a linear speed of 40 cm/set, which is nearly ten thousand times faster than in Fig. 2. The total load on the three sliders was 5000 g. The friction coefficient was 0.18.

Close examination of films and bands, such as shown in Figs. 2-5, brought out

the fact that th~yusuallylla~re rolled-up or curled edges. Therefore, at higher magnifica- tion, film thickness t marked in Fig, 6 can he estimated. Thus, it was found that the films are zoo-300 A thick.

Films and fibers stretched across abrasion grooves are also found on tracks that run at 45” to the final abrasion as in track configuration r(B). Figure 7 is typica of an

Fig. 4. PTFE bands near edge of track in extruded PTFE specimen. a. Parallel with sliding direction. b. Parallel with abrasion direction.

area close to the track edge (site i in Fig. I(B)). The films and fibers lie in the direction of sliding across the abrasion grooves. Figure 8 is the same track crossing another one at right angles. This particular specimen had been shadowed with Pt, and the shadows of one set of bands and fibers can be seen on the bands of the other set, distinguishing the primary track from the secondary. Another electron micrograph of the crossing of two mutually perpendicular friction tracks is shown in Fig. 9. It was taken at a site close to the edges of both tracks (site j).

Results of the work with PTFE specimens that had been previously coated with Cr, Pt, or Au (see Fig. r(C)) showed that the thin vacuum-evaporated metallic film estimated at 700-1000~ thick, had, surprisingly, little or no effect on the friction.

Wear, 12 (1968) r93--21~

SLIDING SURFACE OF PTFE I99

This also became clear from friction measurements with sliders that were started on a clean PTFE surface and then crossed over into a Cr-, Pt-, or Au-metallized section. At and beyond the cross-over point, little or no change in friction was measured.

In the electron microscope, thesemetal-coated surfaces show thesame profusion of thin films spanning the abrasion grooves as non-metallized PTFE (see Fig. IO), but

Fig. 5. Area in circular friction track made at high sliding speed. a. Parallel with direction of final abrasion.

the track itself appears relatively clean except for some isolated patches of the metal. However, as Fig. IO shows, the walls of the abrasion grooves are heavily coated with Pt, and in stereo it can be seen that the films bridging overhead, are clear films and do not support any metallic particles. While it may appear from micrographs, such as Fig. IO, that the track is swept clean from metal by the slider, it turns out by inspec- tion of the original PTFE specimen that this is not so, and that themetallic film is still present on the track. Apparently, the metal on the track is not being extracted when the replica is stripped from the surface. It stays behind on the original specimen and, therefore, does not show in the replica.

Wear, rz (1968) 193-212

--- ---- ~ ..- --- Fig. 6. Thigh magnification of PTW films indicating curled edges and film thickness 1

Fig. 7. Area in friction track drawn at an angle of 45’ with remaining abrasion marks. a. Parallel with sliding direction. b. I’arnllcl with direction of final abl-asion.

SLIDING SURFACE OF PTFE 201

Fig. 8. PTFE bands in area of intersection of two mutually perpendicular fric Parallel with primary track. b. Parallel with secondary track. c. Parallel with abr;

:tion tracks. a. zsion marks.

Fig. 9. As Fig. 8 but site near track edges. a. Parallel with primary track. b. Parallel track. c. Parallel with abrasion marks.

with secondary

wear, 12 (1g68) 1g3-2x2

The use of stereo electron microscopy in this work was indispensable. It showetl unmistakably how the films and fibers were lying on top of the abrasion grooves and how they were related to the surface topography in general. Fibers pulled off tire surface during the stripping procedure and therefore located on the other side of thra replicated topography were, by using stereo techniques, readily recognized as artifacts thus avoiding possible misinterpretation.

Fig. IO. Area in friction track made on Pt-metallized PTFE surface. a. Sliding direction.

Light microscopy

In addition to verifying the existence of thin films and fibers stretched out on the track, optical microscopy was used to check the reliability of the replication technique. To do so, the PTFE specimen was vacuum-coated with carbon-platinum to enhance reflectivity after the sliding tracks were made, and then examined on a Zeiss Ultraphot* microscope equipped for illumination with transmitted and incident light.

Figure II is an optical micrograph taken at an orginal magnification of 650 x

* Product of Carl Zeiss, Obarkochen/Wiirtt., Gcrmanp, J3.R.D.

Wear, 12 (1968)‘Igj--212

SLIDING SURFACE OF PTFE ,203

with transmitted light, near the edge of a friction track (one single sliding pass) in PTFE, The track is approximately at right angles to the final abrasion grooves, like Fig, r(A). Numerous thin fibers lying across the abrasion mooves in the direction of sliding can be clearly seen. Pictures taken in reflected although with less clarity, except, of course, that the to white-black.

lighi show basically the same, black-white image is inverted

Fig. I I. Optical micrograph of edge area of friction track. a. Sliding direction. b. Parallel to remaining abrasion grooves.

After the photomi~rograph of Fig. 11 was taken, the same area was then re- plicated by the technique described before, and the mechanically-striped replica examined in the electron micsoscopy. Figure 12(A) is one of several bright-field elec- tron micrographs taken of this replica. In order to compare corresponding sites in detail, the areas in question were enlarged to the same linear magnification of 2600 x . They are, reduced for printing, shown together in Fig. 12.

Finally, a.n effort was made to find thin films in the center of a friction track directly below the slider and lying across the remainder of an abrasion groove, similar to Fig. 2. The result is shown in the top part of Fig. 13. This optical micrograph was taken with transmitted light through a PTFE specimen r/4-in. thick at an original m~~fication of 1500 x . A dry objective was used. The exposure time was 46 min.

Fig. ‘3. Comparison of optical and electron micrograph of I’TIKE films found to span remainder of abrasion grooves in center of a friction track on PTFE. Top : Enlargctl optical micrograph. Bottom : Electron micrograph. a. Slidin g tlircction. ( Y _tooo; rctluccd in rrprodoction i: 5)

Fig. 14. Electron diffraction patterns from: (A) Abraded area outside trac a. Parallel with direction of final abrasion. (B) Area inside track (site i in with direction of sliding.

.k (site k in Fig. II :A)). Fig. I(A)). b. Par allel

W ear, 12 (1968) Ig3- -212

Fig. 1.5. Electron micrograph and corresponding electron diffraction photogram of interrupted by abrasion groove. (.I) Electron micrograph with approximate dif indicated by square window. a. Parallel with sliding direction. b. Parallel with dirt abrasion. (B) Electron diffraction photogram. a. Parallel with sliding direction. b. direction of final abrasion.

sliding track ‘fraction area xtion of final Parallel with

SLIDING SURFACE OF PTFE 207

After replication, the same site was examined in the electron microscope. Figure 13, at 4000 x before printing, shows the corresponding optical and electron-microg;aphs for comparison.

Electron diffkxtion studies Electron diffraction patterns of the films extracted with the replicas from areas

inside and outside the tracks all show fiber structures of PTFE of varying degrees of molecular orientation. For the areas outside the tracks, the fiber axis was found to lie clearly in the direction of the final abrasion. For areas inside the track, the molecular orientation was along the sliding direction. Figure 14(A) and (B) are typical of these findings. The track in question was produced by a short sliding pass of a x/z-in.-diam. steel ball at 0.005 cmjsec sliding speed. The load was 4000 g. The abrasion and sliding directions are indicated in the illustration. They were obtained from corresponding transmission electron micrographs. In no case did we obtain patterns intermediate between the abrasion and the sliding track patterns. However, in just a few instances a pattern was found that appeared to show both patterns superimposed. An example of this is shown in Fig. 15. It can be seen that the area from which it was taken is the site of an abrasion groove spanned by relatively wide films of PTFE.

Electron diffraction patterns, such as shown in Fig. 14, were identified by checking the characteristic spacings of PTFE against an Al or Au pattern as calibra- tion standards. Once several or all of the (IOO), (200)~ (x07), (108)) and (0015) spacings were confirmed for one pattern, congruent patterns were also assumed to be oriented PTFE.

Fig. 16. Electron diffraction patterns taken in: (A) Area of primary track, m parallel with primary track. (B) Area of intersection with secondary track, n parallel with secondary track.

Efforts to obtain electron diffraction patterns from replicas of the surface of molded PTFE sheet in the as-received condition met with marginal success. Appar- ently the carbon replica did not strip off PTFE films or fragments from these as readily as from sliding tracks or abraded surfaces. When eventually a few patterns were obtained, they showed several rings belonging to unoriented PTFE. After a friction track was put on the surface by one or several passes with a steel slider, the electron diffraction pattern became highly oriented. When a secondary friction track

Wear, ra (1968) rg3-2x2

F ig

‘/.

tr

a1

E le

ct ra

n

m ic

ro gr

ap h

ta

k en

in

c en

te r

of

a fr

ic ti

on

tr ac

k in

P T F E

w

it h

n

o ab

ra si

on m

ar k s

le ft

. In

se rt

sh

ow s

d if fr

ac ti

on

p at

te rn

ar

e ‘a

o f

el ec

tr on

m

ic ro

gr ap

h ,

ap p ro

xi m

at el

y I&

f l

sq u

ar e.

a .

P ar

al le

l w

it h

sl

id in

g d ir

ec ti

on .

SLIDING SURFACE OF PTFE 209

was then put on, in the manner depicted in Fig. I(D), the area of intersection gave a distinct fiber pattern oriented in the direction of the secondary track.

This rapid change-over of orientations appeared to be the universal case when sliding tracks cross one another in the manner depicted in Fig. (IB). In a typical example, both primary and secondary tracks were made by I/2-in.-diam. polished steel balls under a load of 4000 g. Electron diffraction patterns of the primary track and of the area of intersection with the secondary track are given in Fig. 16(A) and (B), respectively. Thus, the original fiber structure of the abraded surface was first re- oriented in the direction of the primary track. This involves a 45” change of the fiber direction. Then this orientation was changed another 90’ when the slider crossed the primary track at right angles.

Finally, Fig. 17 shows another electron micrograph of an area in the center of a friction track. In this case, a higher normal load, 6000 g, was used on the slider to guarantee that all polishing grooves in the track were erased. Therefore, no films in the form of bridges spanning former abrasion grooves, were found in the track. In other experiments, the same result, at lower loads, was obtained by leaving finer abrasion marks in the surface by polishing with finer abrasives.

In diffraction, the central area of Fig. 17 exhibits a distinct PTFE fiber struc- ture with the (100) and (200) equatorial reflections, and the (107), (ION), and (0015) layer line reflections well defined. This is shown in the insert to Fig. 17. It can be seen again that the high degree of molecular orientation lies along the sliding direction.

Work with other plastics Work in this laboratory with the optical and electron microscope is also being

carried out on other plastics. The results are preliminary but so far have failed to furnish evidence that similar films, as in PTFE, are formed on the sliding surfaces of Nylon 6.6, polyoxymethylene, high-density polyethylene and an ABS-plastic. Only in the case of another perfluorocarbon polymer, the copolymer of tetrafluoroethylene and hexafluoropropylene, did we find weak indications that such films may exist.

Thus it appears that the phenomenon is peculiar to PTFE only and is another indication of the now well-recognized uniqueness of PTFE among plastics in sliding behavior and other aspects as wells.

DISCUSSION OF RESULTS

The results of the electron microscope examination strongly imply that, when a clean steel ball slides over a flat surface of PTFE, a thin film of this plastic is formed and stretched across the topographical features of the original surface. At first sight, this seems obvious from the numerous electron micrographs that were studied. However, one becomes more cautious when it is realized that the type of electron microscopy performed depends entirely on how good the replication technique is, and what it has or has not done to the real surface.

Nevertheless, there is little doubt that the films and fibers which bridge across the abrasion marks in Figs. 2-10 are there because of the sliding process. If they were not, they would also have been found in areas outside the track. The question then is how and by what mechanism they were formed.

It is conceivable that, when a heavy slider moves across a deep but narrow

Wear, ra (1968) rg3-21z

scratch, the opposite sides of the groove might be pushed together and the groove closed. Then, after the ball has passed, the walls may separate again but, because of the tendency to stick, fibers or even films may be drawn across the gap. Fibers and films formed in this fashion would not be expected to line up exactly in the sliding direction but rather at right angles to the grooves. This, as Fig. 7 shows, is contrary to our observations; we therefore rule out this mechanism.

It is also conceivable that these films were not pulled across the abrasion scratches during sliding but were formed afterward during replication and are the results of mechanically stripping a replica off a friction track. This, of course, is now refuted for one good reason. This is that the larger bands and films across abrasion grooves can be seen with ordinary light microscopy, as the Figs. 11-13 have shown. In addition, the fact that many films and fibers show distinct shadows (see especially Figs. 5, 7-9) proves they were there before stripping. Finally, that these films are actually drawn films of PTFE is evident from the diffraction patterns shown in the Figs. 14-17. The molecular chains are clearly oriented in the direction of sliding.

The Figs. 12 and 13 show one more important aspect of this work. By comparing Fig. 12(A) with 12(B), and Fig. 13(A) with 13(B), it is shown that the PTFE films are not only extracted by the replica and adhere tightly to the carbon backing, but are also transferred to the replica undamaged and without distortion. Therefore, what is seen on the replica with electron microscopy and electron diffraction both, is a true and exact picture of the original surface. The shape and identity of the extracted PTFE films are entirely maintained.

Therefore, we feel confident to assume that the films, as seen in this investiga- tion, were formed by the ball at the time of sliding. The mechanism involved would be a two-step process of (I) forming adhesion junctions, followed by (2) drawing out the junctions into thin films or fibers across the topography of the sliding surface. This is the same mechanism suggested by MAKINSON AND TABOR~ for high-friction sliding of PTFE against PTFE and suspected by these investigators for the low- friction regime as well.

Nevertheless, there are interesting questions that these electron micrographs pose. For instance, how extensive are these films? Is a film drawn over the entire surface and becomes visible only where an abrasion groove runs underneath, or is the film limited to the area above and adjacent to these grooves? After having examined many tracks under the microscope and having studied several hundred electron micrographs, we believe that there is good evidence of a continuous film of PTFE over large areas of the track. Where the ball is in intimate contact with the surface, as in the central region of the track, this will certainly be the case. Electron diffraction has shown this, and examination of smooth tracks; i.e., completely free from former abrasion grooves, such as illustrated in Fig. 17, strongly support this belief.

It is also believed that when a film is drawn across an abrasion groove, it may split up for thermal and mechanical reasons right after the slider has moved on. The splits will further grow to release stresses. This might give the appearance of a series of parallel films and bands of PTFE spanning former abrasion grooves, but actually it is a film that has broken up. This can be easily imagined from many electron micrographs, such as those of Figs. 2, 4, 6, IO and 13. However, closer to the edges of the track the contact between ball and surface becomes poorer and a whole film cannot be stretched across the track. Thus, at these sites, we find only long and rela-

Wear, 12 (1968) 1g3--212

SLIDING SURFACE OF PTFE 211

tively thin fibers drawn along the sliding direction, as shown in the Figs. 5,7,9, and 12. The data from the tests on Cr-, Pt- and Au-metallized surfaces with clean

sliders support also the existence of continuous films of PTFE. That PTFE films and fibers were found spanning the abrasion grooves indicates that the metal coating was too thin and mechanically too weak to prevent the PTFE underneath from entering into the sliding mechanism. Probably during the ensuing sliding motion of the ball, the metallic film, perhaps already in a slightly flocculated condition, was broken up and pressed into the surface, exposing PTFE to the slider. Thus, the experiment became essentially the same as all other ones, namely, a clean steel ball sliding on PTFE and drawing thin films of PTFE over the metal particles. The incident carbon, therefore, was separated from the metal by a thin, parting layer of PTFE. This could be the reason why no Pt came off the track when the replica was stripped, and also why the thin PTFE films that cross the abrasion grooves in Fig. IO are clear films. As pointed out before, the latter finding is not obvious from Fig. IO unless these tracks are examined in stereo.

Returning to the work with electron diffraction, the chief benefit of it was the identification of oriented PTFE on the tracks and, in particular, the finding that the orientation was along the sliding direction. This is additional reason for assuming that these films have relevance to the sliding process. Another interesting result was the observation of how effectively these films are oriented and re-oriented when the sliding direction is changed. It seems especially noteworthy that, when two mutually per- pendicular tracks intersect, the orientation in the area where the tracks cross is flipped around by 90 degrees, without any indication of intermediate orientations. Only where the ball has traversed a groove, can the orientation of the abraded material underneath be detected in the same diffraction pattern, as shown in Fig. 15. This ability of PTFE to orient and re-orient implies a high degree of lateral mobility and ease for the molecular chains to slip past one another. We believe that this character- istic is also an important aspect of the friction behavior of PTFE. It is interesting that many years ago the chemist alluded to the low-strength interchain bonding forces of PTFE as a direct consequence of the structure of the -CF&F2- (ref. 7). According to this view, the large fluorine ion would effectively screen the charge on the carbon atom, thereby minimizing bonding forces between neighboring molecules. It seems that this viewpoint and the capacity of PTFE to orient and re-orient are in basic agreement.

With respect to the sliding mechanism, two factors seem to be important: first, there must be sufficient adhesion between the slider and the sliding surface to initiate the drawing of films and fibers. And secondly, the slippage of molecular chains must be relatively easy. If this slippage takes place as easily as is suggested by the ready orientation and re-orientation of the PTFE molecules, the adhesion need not be very high. On this point we may not agree with MAKINSON AND TABOR~ who comment that adhesion between clean surfaces and PTFE is strong. The overriding factor in the low-friction mechanism of PTFE is the low shear strength of the inter- face which stems directly from easy chain slippage in highly oriented films of only a few hundred angstrom thick. Thus, the drawing of these films may constitute the bulk of the frictional energy. As long as the adhesion, even though low in a funda- mental sense, is strong enough to initiate and sustain shear in the interfacial films, friction will be low. Furthermore, since the drawing of films and fibers is in essence a

Wear, ~a (1968) Igp-212

deformation process that is strongly dependent on temperature and strain rate, the

known effects of temperature, and especially of sliding velocity on the frictional

characteristics become plausibles.

CONCLUSIONS

The chief aim of this investigation has been to substantiate by electron micros- copy in stereo and by electron diffraction that when a smooth ball slides over PTFE, thin films and fibers of PTFE with a high degree of molecular orientation are drawn from the surface and stretched across the topography. Selected area diffraction showed that when the sliding direction is changed, the oriented PTFE film has the capacity to re-orient itself very readily along the new sliding direction. Apparently the molecular chains in the highly oriented thin films of PTFE can do so by slipping past one another with great ease.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

It is a pleasure to acknowledge the work by E. V. CARR in our friction labor- atory and by E. D. NICHOLSON and W. E. GRESHAM who prepared the replicas and took the electron micrographs. Discussions With D. H. RENEKER and N. A. NIELSEN

of Du Pont’s Central Research Department and the Engineering Materials Laboratory,

respectively, were very helpful and are much appreciated.

REFERENCES

I R. C. BOWERS, W. C. CLINTON AND W. A. ZISM~N, Frictional properties of plastics, Mod. Plastics, 31 (1954) 131.

2 R. C. BOWERS AND W. A. ZISMAN, Frictional properties of polyethylene and perfluorocarbon polymers, NRL Rept. 5945, Washington, D. C., June, 1963.

3 H. UETZ AND H. BRECKEL, Reibungs und Verschleissversuche mit PTFE, Weav, IO (1967) 185. 4 K. RACHEL MAKINSON AND D. TABOR, The friction and transfer of polytetrafluoroethylene,

Proc. Roy. Sac. (London), Ser. A, 281 (1964) 49. 5 R. P. STEIJN, Sliding experiments with polytetrafluoroethylene, ASLE Trans., II (1~68) r-12;

ASLE Pveprilat No. 68 AM 6D-I, May, 1968. 6 R. P. STEIJN, Friction and wear of plastics, AS&f Met& E%g. @cwt., 7 (2) (1967) g-21. 7 W. E. HANFORD AND R. M. JOYCE, Po~ytet~~~t~oyoethyi~e, J. Am. Chews. Sac., 68 (1946) 2082.

Wear, rz (1968) 1g3--212

all articles will be uesed/Sliding wear mechanism of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and PTFE composites 1992.pdf

Wear, 153 (1992) 229-243

Sliding wear mechanism of pol~etra~uoroethylene (PTFE) and PTFE composites

229

‘I’. A. Blanchet and I?. E. Kennedy Thayer SchooI of Engineer& Dartmouth College, Hanovm, NH 03755 (USA)

(Received June 12, 1991)

Abstract

The previous literature regarding the wear of ~l~etr~uor~thylene (PTFE) is discussed, as are the mechanistic theories proposed to date for wear reduction via Wers. The mild-severe transition for unfilled FIFE is investigated as a function of sliding speed and temperature, and guidelines for maintenance of mild wear are developed. A fracture-based model describes the onset of severe wear and attendant changes in debris morphology. The wear-reducing effectiveness of three fillers is investigated as a function of speed. Under severe sliding conditions (when fillers are most effective) it is proposed that fillers reduce wear by interrupting subsurface deformation and crack propagation which would otherwise lead to large wear sheets.

1. Introduction

The high melting point of polytetrafluoroethylene (FIFE) of about 327 “C and its low coefficient of friction make this polymer useful as a solid lubricant in a variety of dry sliding tribosystems. The desirable frictional characteristics of PTFE result from the low shear strength surface fihns which it generates while sliding against smooth counterfaces 11, 21. However, the transfer films which form atop such counterfaces are easily removed as sliding continues. The repetitive, cyclic process of film formation and removal results in unacceptably high rates of PTFE transfer wear [3]. These rates can be decreased by over three orders of magnitude through incorporation of any of a variety of fillers [4]. (It should be noted that fillers can actually harm the abrasive wear resistance of PTFE if sliding against mugher surfaces, by reducing its ductility [5, 61.) The mechanism by which fillers impart transfer wear resistance to IT’FE in sliding contact with smooth counterfaces remains unclear and thus is the focus of this research.

2. Background

Lancaster [6] initially proposed that hard inorganic fillers reduce the wear of PTFE by preferentially supporting the applied load. High aspect ratio tilers should therefore provide the best wear resistance [4]. However, particulate or iameilar fillers (aspect ratios approxhnateiy unity and zero respectively) have also been shown to provide reasonable performance [7J Even other soft polymers have been incorporated

0043-1648/92/35.00 0 1992 - Elsevier Sequoia. All rights reserved

230

as fillers to reduce wear [S], but they do not impart any additional hardness to PTFE

PI* Briscoe et al. [lo], on the other hand, demonstrated that a lead oxide-copper

oxide filler reduced the wear of high density polyethylene (HDPE) (another linear, low friction polymer which suffers similar wear} by increasing the adhesion of its transfer films to the counterface, halting the repetitive transfer wear process. Briscoe et al. [ll] invoked the same argument to describe the wear-reducing effect of carbon fillers on PTFE, though the adhesion mechanism was unclear. Brainard and Buckley [12] observed that PTFE fragments remained adherent to a tungsten field ion microscope (FIM) tip following static contact and concluded that the strength of this adhesion was likely due to chemical bonding directly between carbon atoms on the polymer backbone and the metal tip. Subsequent spectroscopic studies of chemical interactions between PTFE and various filler and counterface materials revealed the generation of various metal fluorides [13-17]. However, it is not clear that bonds to fluorine, being monovalent, could provide adhesion between the counterface and the rest of the PTFE molecule [18]. Additionally, the effect of the excitation radiation upon PTFE in these spectroscopic studies has not been fully considered [lQ].

Briscoe et al. [lo] based their theory of reduced wear via transfer film adhesion on the observation that the wear rate of HDPE could be reduced by 75% if sliding took place atop a predeposited filled transfer film. For PTFE, however, Bahadur and Tabor ]20] and Gong et al. [21] have shown that this theory does not hold. The insensitivi~ of the wear process of PTFE to predeposited films [20, 211 or the chemical composition of the counterface is due to the layering of transfer films. The locus of failure during transfer film removal is not at the interface between the counterface and the first layer of PTFE transfer; therefore the adhesion at this interface is not rate determining [21, 221.

Tanaka [23] proposed a theory which focuses on PTFE’s banded structure. Makinson and Tabor [24] found that the 20 nm thickness of transfer films formed by PTFE corresponded to the thickness of crystalline slices which comprise this banded structure and inferred that film formation occurred via slip between these slices. Tanaka et al+ [3] thought this to be the cause of PTFE’s unusually high rate of transfer wear and proposed that the filler’s wear-reducing role was the prevention of large-scale destruction of this special structure [23]. The banded structure has, however, been called into question [2], as has its relevance to the transfer process, after observation of films with dimensions considerably smaller than the proposed slice thickness [2, 18, 25, 261. PTFE instead forms its low shear strength surface films via orientation of individual molecules 11, 23. Although fillers accumulate at the PTFE wear surface [7, 27, 281, film formation still occurs atop these fillers and across the counterface, providing low friction similar to that of the unfilled polymer 14,211. ~though fillers do not completely prevent surface film formation, their effect on the initial removal of PTFE from the surface warrants further study.

3. Experimental details

Sliding tests were performed in air on a pre-existing oscillatory pin-on-disk rig, previously described in detail [29, 301. The PTFE composite pins were placed in a stationary specimen holder, which was dead-weight loaded against a metallic flat specimen held in place against an oscillating disk. Thermoelectric modules placed beneath the metallic flat and against the pin holder control the bulk temperatures of

231

those components. The disk was driven at a preset amplitude and frequency by an accurately controlled d.c. motor through a crank-rocker linkage. Friction force was measured continuously by a piezoelectric transducer and linear wear by a linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) which monitored changes in height of the wearing polymer pin.

The four commercially produced pin materials tested were (1) unfilled PTFE, (2) 15% graphite-filled PTFE, (3) 25% glass-filled PTFE and (4) 40% bronze-filled PTFE. These were the same compositions used earlier by Tanaka [4]. The graphite flakes, bronze particles and discontinuous glass fibers each had diameters of several tens of micrometers, with the glass fiber length ranging between 50 and 100 pm. The pins had a 2 mm~4 mm cross-section, with the 4 mm dimension oriented along the sliding direction. The contacting end of the pin was final machined flat while in the pin holder using a clean end mill. A 2.5 mm length of the pin was left extending from the holder.

Flat counterface specimens were 316 stainless steel, an alloy containing nickel, an element often supposed to take part in tribochemical reactions with PTFE [15, 171. The samples, 12.5 mm x 25 mm x 6 mm thick, were ground flat and polished using 0.3 pm alumina particles in water. Polishing was quickly followed by cleansing, water rinsing, air-blown drying and ultrasonic bathing in methanol. The resulting roughness of R,=0.02 pm allowed adhesive mechanisms to predominate over any abrasion by the counterface.

Each test used new or resurfaced pin and flat specimens. A 52.4 N load was placed atop the pin holder to cause an average contact pressure of 6.55 MPa. The pins were allowed to creep in place for at least 36 h, while thermal equilibrium was allowed to develop at the desired test temperature, until the initially high creep rate diminished to a low steady state value (on the order of 0.001 mm h-r for the 2.5 mm length of pin extending from the pin holder). The drive motor was then turned on to a preset speed, yielding a desired oscillation frequency of the flat at an amplitude of 4 mm. This amplitude produced a wear track 12 mm long, large enough relative to the 4 mm length of the pin in the sliding direction that no region on the steel counterface was constantly overlapped by the pin (no mutual overlap). At such an amplitude the tribological behavior of unfilled PTFE was similar to that seen in unidirectional contacts and was not overwhelmed by oscillatory kinematical effects [31]. Average oscillatory sliding speeds ranged up to 0.2 m s-l,

Instantaneous friction force was displayed on a storage oscilloscope, while its filtered magnitude was recorded along with wear measurements from the LVDT. Test durations were at least long enough for a steady state, linear wear rate to be easily recognizable, as determined by the correlation coefficient of the wear volume ZW. sliding distance data. Average friction coefficients were also determined for this steady state region, with 95% confidence intervals determined for both wear rate and friction coefficient.

4. Results

Steady state wear rates (volume per unit sliding distance per unit normal load) and kinetic friction coefficients measured as a function of speed at 23 “C are displayed in Figs. l(a) and l(b) respectively. For unfilled PTFE, friction steadily increases with increasing speed while wear remains relative$ mild, generally at a rate of about lo-’ mm3 N-r m- 1 for speeds up to 8 X lob3 m s-l. At this point wear goes through a mild-severe transition, with higher speeds (and correspondingly higher kinetic friction)

232

.Ol .I 1

average speed, m/s

n

n

l

0.0 , I I I ,001 .Ol .I 1

0) average speed, m/s

Fig. 1. (a) Wear rate and (b) coefficient of kinetic friction of unfilled as well as graphite-, glass- fiber- and bronze-filled PTFE as a function of average oscillatory sliding speed at 23 “C. 0, unfilled PTFE; 0, 15% graphite; n , 25% glass; 0, 40% bronze.

yielding severe wear with rates approaching 10m3 mm3 N-’ m-l. A similar monotonic increase in friction and transition to higher wear, brought on by increasing speed, has been demonstrated for unfilled P’IFE in unidirectional contacts [3]. The frictional behavior is thought to be a reflection of the viscous nature of the film-drawing process, since sliding speed is closely related to strain rate within these surface Glms and the kinetic friction pk is proportional to V”. At a critical velocity the shear stresses associated

233

with the film-drawing process at the sliding surface become great enough to cake failure in the ETFIZ subsurface, leading to the more severe wear prowess [3].

The frictional behavior of the filled PTFEs is less systematic (Fig, l(b)). All three composites have friction coefficients near 0.2 at a sliding speed of 0.01 m s-l, in the vicinity of the wear transition speed for the unfilled polymer. As speed is increased from that value, friction tends to increase for the glass-filled, decrease far the bronze- filled and remain fairly constant for the graphite-filled PTFE.

At speeds just below the transition the mild wear rate of the unfilled polymer is not too much greater than that observed for the filled materials (Fig. l(a)). Wear reduction by fillers is most evident above unfilled PTFE’s transition speed, since the wear rates of the filled PTl?Es generally remain below 1Oa5 mm’ N”’ m-‘. (Wear rates of the glass- and bronze-filled polymers actually tend to decrease with increasing speed within this range.) The role of fillers must therefore be related to the obstruction of processes which cause the transition to severe wear in the unfilled PTFE.

Figure 2(a) shows the wear vs, speed behavior of unfilled PTFE at temperatures ranging up to 66 “C. At each temperature a similar mild-severe wear transition is observed, with mild rates of about 10m5 mm3 N-l m-l below the transition speed and nearly 10s3 mm3 N-’ m -I above the transition speed. Lines have been included to highlight these transitions. As the temperature increases, a higher speed is needed to induce the transition to severe wear. Increases in temperature reduce the viscosity associated with the surface-film-drawing process (reflected in the coefficient of pro- portionaiity relating & to v”); thus a higher speed is needed to attain the high wear condition of failure within the subsurface. (Frictional heating affects the transition speeds very little compared to bulk temperature, since analytical and thin film ther- mocouple measurements show that the dissipation ~ntr~bution to the average contact temperature at the transition speed will be less than 2-3 “C eveR at about 0.1 m s-’

[3%) The tribological behavior of m is closely related to its viscoelastic properties

(and therefore rate- and temperature-dependent properties). For a semicrystalline polymer below its glass transition temperature the tribological behavior (as a function of speed or shear rate) for many temperatures can be represented by a single master curve by use of a shift factor (a(T)) with an Arrhenius temperature dependence 1321

where T is the absolute temperature, T0 is a reference temperature (the temperature at which the shift factor is unity and no &ii occurs, 296 “C in this case), R is the universal gas constant and AH is the activation energy. The master curve for wear rate VS. shifted speed (Fig. 2(b)) was constructed using an activation energy calculated to be approximately 9.2 kcal mol -I [31]. Tanaka et al. [3] constructed a very similar curve, having determined a slightly lower activation energy of 7 kcal mol’l. Both values are within the 7-10 kcal mole-’ range proposed for tribological process in which only van der Waals bonds are broken [33].

In a unidirectional contact the sliding speed exponent n describing kinetic friction was found to be 0.26 for unfilled P’ITB for test temperatures ranging from 23 to 100 “C [3]. For the oscillatory results presented here that exponent is closer to R =0.4. Since the friction data for several temperatures could also be represented on a master curve (Fig. 2(c)) using the same shift factor as employed for the wear data, kinetic friction can be generally described over the range of tests speeds as

234

I I

.Ol .l

shifted speed (a(t)‘V), m/s

‘;

:E 0.2 l l c g I O* 0

:, .= u.1 v 23C

2 0 4oc LL m 54c

0 66C

0.0 ,001 .a1 .I

(c) shifted speed (a(T)*V), m/s

Fig. 2. (a) Wear rate of unfilled PTFE as a function of speed at temperatures of 23, 40, 54 and 66 “C. At each temperature a line has been included to denote transition to severe wear. (h), (c) Master curves of wear rate and ftiction coefficient superimposed as a function of shifted speed, using an Arrhenius factor with AHx9.2 kcal moi-‘.

where c has a value of appr~ately 0.7 when describing speed with units of meters per second.

235

5. Discussion

Figure 3 illustrates the drawing of strips of oriented low shear strength film across the surface of an unfilled PTFE pin after a short sliding duration at low speed. With increased sliding distance a surface film fully develops atop the bulk PTFZ, with a corresponding transfer film upon the counterface. Under these mild wear conditions the cyclic process of formation of strips of transfer film, followed by the eventual detachment, discards these strips as debris primarily at the ends of the wear track (Fig. 4(a)). The strips of debris still show surface striations running along their length, having previously been in sliding contact with the pin.

The filled PTFEs tested here share this mild wear process, with similar strip debris discarded at wear track ends (Figs. 4(b)+(d)). Strips of transfer are not produced as generously by the filled PTmE as they are by the unfilled polymer. The fillers! which accumulate at the sliding surface of the pin as the wear process continues [4: 28, 341, slow the transport of the neat matrix polymer to the sliding interface and thus cause wear to take place at a slightly lower rate. However, as previously mentioned, the resulting differences in wear between the filled and unfilled PTFEs are less than dramatic in this mild regime (Fig. l(a), V-Z8 mm s-l).

Since increasingly higher speeds induce severe wear of unfilled FIFE, a simultaneous change in the morphology of the transferred material is observed. This change is a result of the shear strain rates associated with surface fihn formation becoming large relative to the reciprocal of the relaxation time of the polymer, which has a temperature dependence of the form &a e~(~/R~. The constant Ei which relates shear strain rate to speed (dy/&aV/@, under the assumption of occasional instants of stick at the sliding interface, would approximately be equal to the thickness over which relative sliding displacement is being accommodated (likely the sum thickness of the transfer film on the counter-face and the running film on the PTFE pin surface). The drawing of surface films in the mild regime is overwhelmed in the severe regime by subsurface deformation and fracture processes which result in more massive transfer [35, 24, 18, 3, 31, 341. The fragmented sheets of transfer (Fig. 5(a)) are quickly removed from the contact and deposited about the periphery of the wear track as flakes of debris

Fig. 3. Secondary electron image of thin fdm of PTFE drawn over sliding surface of unfilled pin following a very short sliding duration. (Machine grooves from the milling operation, running from upper left to lower right, are not yet worn away, helping to illustrate the drawing process as the film spans these grooves.)

236

Fig. 4. Secondary electron images of (a) strips of PTFE transfer and debris upon the counterface following mild wear of unfilled PTFE; also wear tracks from (b) graphite-, (c) glass-fiber- and (d) bronze-filled PTFE.

(Fig. S(b)). Such sheets can be several hundred micrometers in diameter, easily visible with the naked eye.

Profilometric traces across the wear track showed these transferred wear sheets to range in thickness from a few micrometers to 20 pm, raising the lightly loaded profilometer stylus by such a dimension above the rest of the wear track (Fig. 6). This sheet thickness, which is about the same as that found by Bahadur and Tabor [20], should correspond to a depth at which subsurface processes responsible for the

Fig. 5. (a) Optical image of transferred sheet of untiled PTFE upon counterface. (b) Secondary electron image of transferred sheets as well as wear sheet debris existing about the periphery of a severe wear track.

Fig. 6. Stylus profilometry trace along counterface following severe wear, as stylus climbs over transferred sheet several micrometers in thickness.

severe wear of the unfilled polymer are activated. Sections of the unfilled pins (about 20 pm in thickness) were microtomed at room temperature normal to the sliding surface following severe wear. These sections revealed the existence of a worked layer, which in some locations was separated from the bulk PTFE by cracks running parallel to the sliding surface (Fig. 7). The thickness of the transferred sheets is indeed similar to the thickness of this worked layer and may result from the propagation of these subsurface cracks. (Worked layers were not observed in thin sections of unfilled PTFE after mild ‘wear tests.) These observations suggest severe wear is a consequence of delamination, a process discussed with increasing frequency relative to polymer wear [36-G].

Figure 8 is a crude repre~ntation of a subsurface crack parallel to a sliding surface subject to kinetic friction, with a friction coefficient (0.1) similar to that found for unfilled PTFE. For such a situation the uniform resultant loads imposed at the sliding surface deviate from being normal to that surface by only a small angle CY (note that &=tan CT). If these uniform resultant loads are considered to be applied over a relatively wide contact length, the smaller crack will therefore be considered

Fig. 7. Cross-polarized optical thin section of unfilfed FTFE pin following severe wear: section taken normal to sliding surface, dispIaying formation of deformed layer and subsurface cracking.

Fig. 8. Schematic drawing of crack at a deptb d below a sliding surface subject to a widely distributed load and having a coefficient of kinetic friction of about 0.10.

239

in a state of compression-shear, yielding a mode II problem studied in detail by Rosenfield [42-45]. (Note that with a friction coefficient of 0.1 any tensile region existing behind the load will be very shallow and will increase in depth only slightly with increasing distance behind that load. The load would have to move considerably beyond the crack before that crack passed from the compressive to the tensile zone. Since the stress associated with tensile crack opening decreases with increasing distance from the load, it is anticipated that mode I contributions will be overshadowed by mode II contributions.) Shieh [46] experimentally demonstrated that cracks can propagate under such combinations of compression and shear. This mode of propagation with a trajectory that is parallel to the sliding surface is greatly favored by the anisotropy of the near-surface region [42], resulting from the molecular orientation process.

Crack-sliding displacement is resisted by static friction between the opposing crack faces, described by the coefficient pcF. Under conditions of low kinetic friction the shear stress existing between the crack faces will equal that found at the sliding surface y= 0 under the wide uniform load (7;1= TO>. The normal stresses are appro~mately equal under all conditions for the stated geometry, ad=ao= 01 This situation will persist as long as & < pcf (such that TV < p& under the stated assumptions). Therefore all shear stress on the crack faces in compressive contact is equilibrated by static friction and thus the effective shear stress causing stress intensification at the tips is zero. However, since Q on the crack faces cannot exceed ~~a, sliding conditions where fik> k result in rO>r& (Several crack lengths away, the far-field shear stress on the plane y=d, 7&R; is still equal to that imposed at the sliding surface, TV.) The effective shear stress contribution between the crack faces which cannot be supported by static friction,

Ten = 70 - l&f 0. (3)

must instead be supported by stress intensifications at the crack tips (note the convention that compressive u is positive):

where a is the crack ham-len~h. A&, which is twice this value for oscillatory motion, may lead to propagation of such a shear crack parallel to the sliding surface. This trajectory would be favored by the texture of the near-surface material which can develop by the molecular orientation processes, and delamination of wear sheets results.

The friction existing between the crack faces should be similar to that measured in static contacts between J?TFE and itself. Makinson and Tabor [24J measured such friction to have a coefficient between 0.10 and 0.16, within the range of kinetic values measured (0.03-0.35). More precise measurements indicative of p& are difficult owing to the effects of an unknown environment existing within the subsurface crack [47] and the degree of roughness and molecular orientation generated on its faces. gcf may also have a temperature dependence 121, though it is likely to be slight relative to the dependence of the kinetic friction. In the severe wear criterion &@, T) = h, any slight temperature dependence of per could likely be lumped with that of the kinetic term when determining an empirical value for crack face friction. Such a value can be estimated from Fig. 9, since at all test temperatures the mild-severe wear transition occurs approximately at a value of kinetic friction of ,.&k= 0,105 f 0.015. Using this value as clef and eqns. (1) and (2), design guidelines of maximum speed or minimum temperature to maintain mild wear of unfilled PTFE can be developed (since increases in speed or decreases in temperature can bring about severe wear by causing the kinetic friction to rise above the threshold level):

240

10.6, 0.0

8 I 0.1 0.2 0.3

friction coefficient

Fig. 9. Wear rate of unfilled PTFE at several temperatures as a function of kinetic friction.

-1

(6)

The values of AH, pd, n and c (9.2 kcal mol-‘, 0.105, 0.4 and 0.7 respectively) quoted here apply strictly to this specific tribosystem. For example, in the unidirectional contact of Tanaka et al. [3] where AH=7 kcal mol-’ and n=0.26, the values for c~cf and c estimated from the published figures are instead approximately 0.2 and 0.45 (when speed is expressed as meters per second and the reference temperature To=296 “C).

Analysis using deformation properties quoted from Bilik 1481 reveals that the real area of contact for these test conditions will be a fraction of the apparent area. As a result, the actual stress at the sliding surface will be somewhat higher than the apparent stress and will be distributed over finite contact lengths, yielding stress ~st~butions r&y) and c&y), Contact length effects have been coupled with crack face friction analysis on such mode II wear problems by Hills and Ashelby 147, 491. Finite contact lengths imply that free surface outside of the contact should be accounted for, though ignorarice of this matter yields errors which are small [45] relative to other problems inherent in trying to apply fracture mechanics to cracks with sizes on the order of the microstructure in a plastically strained material 1421. The simplified model for the onset of wear of unfilled RIFE presented here should, however, remain self- consistent, since the constants for the model ought to be determined empirically using data obtained directly from the tribosystem of interest.

As presented in Fig. l(a), the wear-reducing role of the filler must be a preventive one in light of the severe wear that is induced without the filler. In spite of other previously published theories, Ricklin [50] suggested that the wear-reducing role of

241

fillers within PTFE was merely to prevent the production of larger wear particles. Bahadur and Tabor 1203 similarly stated that the reduced wear rate of filled FTFE was attributable to the filler’s ability to govern the size and shape of the wear fragments. These viewpoints are backed further by the diRerentia1 scanning calorimetry (DSC) analysis of the molecular weights of PTFE debris by Arkles and Schireson [35]. Under mild sliding the characterization of unfilled PTFE debris was similar to that found upon its sliding surface, while the characterization of debris under severe sliding was more similar to the bulk PTFE, since deeper subsurface failure was activated. Under severe conditions, however, the debris formed by glass-filled FTFE retained mild wear characteristics, since failure at greater depths within the surface was prevented.

In light of the model proposed here to describe the onset of severe wear of unfilled PTFE, it is suggested that the role of the filler is to prevent this onset by retarding subsurface crack propagation which would otherwise lead to the larger wear sheets as previously descnied {Figs. 5(a) and 5(b)). This process is observed upon the sliding surface of glass-fiber- and bronze-filled pins shown in Figs. 10(a) and 10(b). As a subsurface crack encounters a large filler particle, the trajectory turns to the sliding surface. This in turn leads to the finer debris observed in Figs. 4(c) and 4(d), considerably smaller than the several hundred micrometer scale of wear sheets of unfilled PTFE. The accumulation of fillers at the composite’s sliding surface during the initial stages of sliding likely accentuates the role of these fillers. Additionally, the presence of these fillers at -the sliding surface may also limit the contact area

Fig. 10. Secondary electron images of (a) glass-fiber-, (b) bronze- and (c} ~ap~ite-pied pin surfaces.

242

within which frictional tractions are applied directly to the PTFE matrix. As a result of these smaller traction areas, the worked surface layer will not be as deep [51] and the wear debris will in turn be thinner than that generated by unfilled PTFE.

Tanaka [23] claimed that lamellar fillers were not as effective at reducing wear because they do not remain embedded deeply within the sliding surface. The explanation of less effective wear reduction, as evidenced in Fig. l(a), is also valid within the context of this model. Flakes of graphite tend to lay atop the plane of the sliding surface (Fig. 10(c)) and wiI1 not interfere with subsurface crack propagation as effectively as spherical or fiber fillers. Along these same lines, Sung and Suh I.521 found wear of fiber-filled PTFE to be lowest when fibers were primarily oriented normal to the sliding surface, and highest when fibers all lay in planes parallel to the sfiding surface. Instead of invoking the load support theory often cited to explain such wear-fiber orientation relationships [6], the authors noted that with the latter geometry cracks can still propagate parallel to the sliding surface under cyclic loading, resulting in large-scale fiber separation and higher rates of wear.

6. Conclusions

(1) The mild sliding wear of unfilled PTFE gives way to severe wear upon an increase in sliding speed or a decrease in temperature. This transition is related to kinetic friction reaching a threshold value. The effects of sliding speed and temperature are intermingled through the viscoelastic shear properties of this polymer and can be superimposed using an Arrhenius shift factor.

(2) Severe wear of unfilled PTFE occurs via subsurface cracking, which generates wear sheets several micrometers thick and several hundred micrometers in diameter. A fracture-based model is presented to describe the onset of severe wear, and design limitations of maximum sliding speed and minimum temperature are developed for the maintenance of mild wear of PTFE.

(3) While PTFE wear is greatly reduced by fillers under severe conditions, their effect is not dramatic under mild sliding conditions. It is therefore proposed that the role of the filler must be preventive in nature and is associated with interrupting subsurface deformation and crack propagation that would otherwise produce large wear sheets.

Acknowledgment

The authors wish to thank the NASA Graduate Student Researchers Program for support funding.

References

1 R. P. Steijn, Wear, 1.2 (1968) 193. 2 C. M. Pooley and D. Tabor, Pzoc. R Sot. Land. A, 329 (1972) 251. 3 K. Tanaka, Y. Uchiyama and S. Toyooka, Wear, 23 (1973) 153. 4 K. Tanaka and S. Kawakami, Wear, 79 (1982) 221. 5 J. Bijwe, C. M. Logani and U. S. Tewari, Wear, 138 (1990) 77. 6 J. K. Lancaster, J. Phys D: Appf. Phys., I (1968) 549. 7 K. Tanaka, Y. Uchiyama, S. Euda and T. Shimizu, in T. Sakurai (ed.), Proc. Joint ISLE-ASLE

ht. Lubrications Co&, Tokyo, 1976, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1976, p. 110. 8 B. Arkies, J. Theberge and M. Schireson, Lubr. Eng., 33 (1977) 33.

243

9 M. Hong and S. Pyun, Wear, 143 (1991) 87. 10 B. J. Briscoe, A. K. Pogosian and D. Tabor, Weur, 27 (1974) 19. 11 B. J. Briscoe, M. D. Steward and A. Y. Groszek, Wear, 42 (1976) 99. 12 W. A. Brainard and D. H. Buckley, Wear, 26 (1973) 75. 13 G. Pocock and P. Cadman, Wear, 37 (1976) 129. 14 1.5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

24 25 26 27 28 29

30

31

32 33 34 35 36

37

38

39 40 41 42

43 44 45 46 47

P. Cadman and G. M. Gossedge, Wear, 51 (1978) 57. P. Cadman and G. M. Gossedge, Wear, 54 (1979) 211. P. Cadman and G. M. Gossedge, /. Mater. Sci., 14 (1979) 2672. J. Gao and H. Dang, J. Appl. PoZym. Sci., 36 (1988) 73. D. R. Wheeler, Wear, 66 (1981) 355. D. R. Wheeler and S. V. Pepper, J. Pac. Sci Technol., 20 j1982) 226. S. Bahadur and D. Tabor, Wear, 98 (1984) 1. D. Gong, B. Zhang, Q. Xue and H. Wang, Weur, 137 (1990) 25. D. Gong, B. Zhang, Q. Xue and H. Wang, Wear, 137 (1990) 267. K. Tanaka, in K. Friedrich (ed.), Friction and WearofPo&ner Composites~ Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1986, p, 137. K. R. Makinson and D. Tabor, Proc. R Sot. Lond. A, 281 (1964) 49. J. L. Lauer, B. C. Bunting and W. R. Jones, Triboi. Trans., 31 (1988) 282. S. V. Pepper, J. Appl. Ph&, 45 (1974) 2947. K. Tanaka, J. Lubr. Technol,, 99 (1977) 408. M. N. Gardos, Lubr. Eng., 37 (1981) 641. F. E. Kennedy, L. Smidhammar and D. Play, Eurotrib 85, Proc. 4th Eur. Tribological Conf, Lyon, 1985, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1985, p. 51.2. V, R. Evans and F. E. Kennedy, Proc. Znt. Conf: Wear of Mater&, 1987, ASME, New York, 1987, p. 427. T. A. Blanchet, F. E. Kennedy and X. Tian, Proc. Znt. Conf Wear of Materials, 1991, ASME, New York, 1991, p_ 689. K. G. MacLaren and D. Tabor, Natuq 197 (1963) 856. R. P. Steijn, ASLE Trans., 11 (1968) 235. T. A. Bfanchet and F. E. Kennedy, Tribal. Trans., 134 (1991) 327. B. C. Arkles and M. J. Schireson, Wear, 39 (1976) 177. N. P. Suh, in D. A. Rigney (ed.), Fundamentals of Friction and Wear of MateriaZs, ASM, Metals Park, OH, 1980, p. 43. M. Clerico, in N. P. Suh and N. Saka (eds.), Fundamentals of Tribology, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA, 1978, p. 769. J. R. Youn and N. P. Suh, Proc. Society of Plastics Engineers, 39th AhXEC, Boston, MA, 1981, p. 20. P. S. Walker, M. Ben-Dw, M. J. Askew and J. Pugh, Eng. Med., 10 (1981) 33. M. M. Landy and P. S. Walker, J. Arthrophzsty, Suppl., (October 1988) S73. T. C. Qvaert and H S. Cheng, J. T&o& If3 (1991) 150. A. R. Rosenfield, in D. A. Rigney (ed.), Funda~nta~ of Friction and Wear of ~ute~u~, ASM, Metals Park, OH, 1980, p. 221. A. R. Rosenfield, Wear, 61 (1980) 125. A. R. Rosenfield, Wear, 72 (1981) 97. A. R. Rosenfield, Wear, II6 (1987) 319. W. T. Shieh, Eng. Fract. Mech., 9 (1977) 37. D. A. Hills and D. W. Ashelby, Weur, 54 (1979) 321.

48 G. M. Bartenev and V. V. Lavrentev, Friction and Wear of Polymers, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1981, p. 75.

49 D. A. Hills and D. W. Ashelby, &g. Fmcture Mech., 13 (1980) 69. SO S. Rictiin, Lubr. Eng., 33 (1977) 487. 51 F. E. Kennedy and L. P. Grotelueschen, J. AppZ. Mech., 51 (1984) 687. 52 N. Sung and N. P. Suh, Wear, 53 (1979) 129.

all articles will be uesed/sliding wear mechanism of PTFE.pdf

Wear, 153 (1992) 229-243

Sliding wear mechanism of pol~etra~uoroethylene (PTFE) and PTFE composites

229

‘I’. A. Blanchet and I?. E. Kennedy Thayer SchooI of Engineer& Dartmouth College, Hanovm, NH 03755 (USA)

(Received June 12, 1991)

Abstract

The previous literature regarding the wear of ~l~etr~uor~thylene (PTFE) is discussed, as are the mechanistic theories proposed to date for wear reduction via Wers. The mild-severe transition for unfilled FIFE is investigated as a function of sliding speed and temperature, and guidelines for maintenance of mild wear are developed. A fracture-based model describes the onset of severe wear and attendant changes in debris morphology. The wear-reducing effectiveness of three fillers is investigated as a function of speed. Under severe sliding conditions (when fillers are most effective) it is proposed that fillers reduce wear by interrupting subsurface deformation and crack propagation which would otherwise lead to large wear sheets.

1. Introduction

The high melting point of polytetrafluoroethylene (FIFE) of about 327 “C and its low coefficient of friction make this polymer useful as a solid lubricant in a variety of dry sliding tribosystems. The desirable frictional characteristics of PTFE result from the low shear strength surface fihns which it generates while sliding against smooth counterfaces 11, 21. However, the transfer films which form atop such counterfaces are easily removed as sliding continues. The repetitive, cyclic process of film formation and removal results in unacceptably high rates of PTFE transfer wear [3]. These rates can be decreased by over three orders of magnitude through incorporation of any of a variety of fillers [4]. (It should be noted that fillers can actually harm the abrasive wear resistance of PTFE if sliding against mugher surfaces, by reducing its ductility [5, 61.) The mechanism by which fillers impart transfer wear resistance to IT’FE in sliding contact with smooth counterfaces remains unclear and thus is the focus of this research.

2. Background

Lancaster [6] initially proposed that hard inorganic fillers reduce the wear of PTFE by preferentially supporting the applied load. High aspect ratio tilers should therefore provide the best wear resistance [4]. However, particulate or iameilar fillers (aspect ratios approxhnateiy unity and zero respectively) have also been shown to provide reasonable performance [7J Even other soft polymers have been incorporated

0043-1648/92/35.00 0 1992 - Elsevier Sequoia. All rights reserved

230

as fillers to reduce wear [S], but they do not impart any additional hardness to PTFE

PI* Briscoe et al. [lo], on the other hand, demonstrated that a lead oxide-copper

oxide filler reduced the wear of high density polyethylene (HDPE) (another linear, low friction polymer which suffers similar wear} by increasing the adhesion of its transfer films to the counterface, halting the repetitive transfer wear process. Briscoe et al. [ll] invoked the same argument to describe the wear-reducing effect of carbon fillers on PTFE, though the adhesion mechanism was unclear. Brainard and Buckley [12] observed that PTFE fragments remained adherent to a tungsten field ion microscope (FIM) tip following static contact and concluded that the strength of this adhesion was likely due to chemical bonding directly between carbon atoms on the polymer backbone and the metal tip. Subsequent spectroscopic studies of chemical interactions between PTFE and various filler and counterface materials revealed the generation of various metal fluorides [13-17]. However, it is not clear that bonds to fluorine, being monovalent, could provide adhesion between the counterface and the rest of the PTFE molecule [18]. Additionally, the effect of the excitation radiation upon PTFE in these spectroscopic studies has not been fully considered [lQ].

Briscoe et al. [lo] based their theory of reduced wear via transfer film adhesion on the observation that the wear rate of HDPE could be reduced by 75% if sliding took place atop a predeposited filled transfer film. For PTFE, however, Bahadur and Tabor ]20] and Gong et al. [21] have shown that this theory does not hold. The insensitivi~ of the wear process of PTFE to predeposited films [20, 211 or the chemical composition of the counterface is due to the layering of transfer films. The locus of failure during transfer film removal is not at the interface between the counterface and the first layer of PTFE transfer; therefore the adhesion at this interface is not rate determining [21, 221.

Tanaka [23] proposed a theory which focuses on PTFE’s banded structure. Makinson and Tabor [24] found that the 20 nm thickness of transfer films formed by PTFE corresponded to the thickness of crystalline slices which comprise this banded structure and inferred that film formation occurred via slip between these slices. Tanaka et al+ [3] thought this to be the cause of PTFE’s unusually high rate of transfer wear and proposed that the filler’s wear-reducing role was the prevention of large-scale destruction of this special structure [23]. The banded structure has, however, been called into question [2], as has its relevance to the transfer process, after observation of films with dimensions considerably smaller than the proposed slice thickness [2, 18, 25, 261. PTFE instead forms its low shear strength surface films via orientation of individual molecules 11, 23. Although fillers accumulate at the PTFE wear surface [7, 27, 281, film formation still occurs atop these fillers and across the counterface, providing low friction similar to that of the unfilled polymer 14,211. ~though fillers do not completely prevent surface film formation, their effect on the initial removal of PTFE from the surface warrants further study.

3. Experimental details

Sliding tests were performed in air on a pre-existing oscillatory pin-on-disk rig, previously described in detail [29, 301. The PTFE composite pins were placed in a stationary specimen holder, which was dead-weight loaded against a metallic flat specimen held in place against an oscillating disk. Thermoelectric modules placed beneath the metallic flat and against the pin holder control the bulk temperatures of

231

those components. The disk was driven at a preset amplitude and frequency by an accurately controlled d.c. motor through a crank-rocker linkage. Friction force was measured continuously by a piezoelectric transducer and linear wear by a linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) which monitored changes in height of the wearing polymer pin.

The four commercially produced pin materials tested were (1) unfilled PTFE, (2) 15% graphite-filled PTFE, (3) 25% glass-filled PTFE and (4) 40% bronze-filled PTFE. These were the same compositions used earlier by Tanaka [4]. The graphite flakes, bronze particles and discontinuous glass fibers each had diameters of several tens of micrometers, with the glass fiber length ranging between 50 and 100 pm. The pins had a 2 mm~4 mm cross-section, with the 4 mm dimension oriented along the sliding direction. The contacting end of the pin was final machined flat while in the pin holder using a clean end mill. A 2.5 mm length of the pin was left extending from the holder.

Flat counterface specimens were 316 stainless steel, an alloy containing nickel, an element often supposed to take part in tribochemical reactions with PTFE [15, 171. The samples, 12.5 mm x 25 mm x 6 mm thick, were ground flat and polished using 0.3 pm alumina particles in water. Polishing was quickly followed by cleansing, water rinsing, air-blown drying and ultrasonic bathing in methanol. The resulting roughness of R,=0.02 pm allowed adhesive mechanisms to predominate over any abrasion by the counterface.

Each test used new or resurfaced pin and flat specimens. A 52.4 N load was placed atop the pin holder to cause an average contact pressure of 6.55 MPa. The pins were allowed to creep in place for at least 36 h, while thermal equilibrium was allowed to develop at the desired test temperature, until the initially high creep rate diminished to a low steady state value (on the order of 0.001 mm h-r for the 2.5 mm length of pin extending from the pin holder). The drive motor was then turned on to a preset speed, yielding a desired oscillation frequency of the flat at an amplitude of 4 mm. This amplitude produced a wear track 12 mm long, large enough relative to the 4 mm length of the pin in the sliding direction that no region on the steel counterface was constantly overlapped by the pin (no mutual overlap). At such an amplitude the tribological behavior of unfilled PTFE was similar to that seen in unidirectional contacts and was not overwhelmed by oscillatory kinematical effects [31]. Average oscillatory sliding speeds ranged up to 0.2 m s-l,

Instantaneous friction force was displayed on a storage oscilloscope, while its filtered magnitude was recorded along with wear measurements from the LVDT. Test durations were at least long enough for a steady state, linear wear rate to be easily recognizable, as determined by the correlation coefficient of the wear volume ZW. sliding distance data. Average friction coefficients were also determined for this steady state region, with 95% confidence intervals determined for both wear rate and friction coefficient.

4. Results

Steady state wear rates (volume per unit sliding distance per unit normal load) and kinetic friction coefficients measured as a function of speed at 23 “C are displayed in Figs. l(a) and l(b) respectively. For unfilled PTFE, friction steadily increases with increasing speed while wear remains relative$ mild, generally at a rate of about lo-’ mm3 N-r m- 1 for speeds up to 8 X lob3 m s-l. At this point wear goes through a mild-severe transition, with higher speeds (and correspondingly higher kinetic friction)

232

.Ol .I 1

average speed, m/s

n

n

l

0.0 , I I I ,001 .Ol .I 1

0) average speed, m/s

Fig. 1. (a) Wear rate and (b) coefficient of kinetic friction of unfilled as well as graphite-, glass- fiber- and bronze-filled PTFE as a function of average oscillatory sliding speed at 23 “C. 0, unfilled PTFE; 0, 15% graphite; n , 25% glass; 0, 40% bronze.

yielding severe wear with rates approaching 10m3 mm3 N-’ m-l. A similar monotonic increase in friction and transition to higher wear, brought on by increasing speed, has been demonstrated for unfilled P’IFE in unidirectional contacts [3]. The frictional behavior is thought to be a reflection of the viscous nature of the film-drawing process, since sliding speed is closely related to strain rate within these surface Glms and the kinetic friction pk is proportional to V”. At a critical velocity the shear stresses associated

233

with the film-drawing process at the sliding surface become great enough to cake failure in the ETFIZ subsurface, leading to the more severe wear prowess [3].

The frictional behavior of the filled PTFEs is less systematic (Fig, l(b)). All three composites have friction coefficients near 0.2 at a sliding speed of 0.01 m s-l, in the vicinity of the wear transition speed for the unfilled polymer. As speed is increased from that value, friction tends to increase for the glass-filled, decrease far the bronze- filled and remain fairly constant for the graphite-filled PTFE.

At speeds just below the transition the mild wear rate of the unfilled polymer is not too much greater than that observed for the filled materials (Fig. l(a)). Wear reduction by fillers is most evident above unfilled PTFE’s transition speed, since the wear rates of the filled PTl?Es generally remain below 1Oa5 mm’ N”’ m-‘. (Wear rates of the glass- and bronze-filled polymers actually tend to decrease with increasing speed within this range.) The role of fillers must therefore be related to the obstruction of processes which cause the transition to severe wear in the unfilled PTFE.

Figure 2(a) shows the wear vs, speed behavior of unfilled PTFE at temperatures ranging up to 66 “C. At each temperature a similar mild-severe wear transition is observed, with mild rates of about 10m5 mm3 N-l m-l below the transition speed and nearly 10s3 mm3 N-’ m -I above the transition speed. Lines have been included to highlight these transitions. As the temperature increases, a higher speed is needed to induce the transition to severe wear. Increases in temperature reduce the viscosity associated with the surface-film-drawing process (reflected in the coefficient of pro- portionaiity relating & to v”); thus a higher speed is needed to attain the high wear condition of failure within the subsurface. (Frictional heating affects the transition speeds very little compared to bulk temperature, since analytical and thin film ther- mocouple measurements show that the dissipation ~ntr~bution to the average contact temperature at the transition speed will be less than 2-3 “C eveR at about 0.1 m s-’

[3%) The tribological behavior of m is closely related to its viscoelastic properties

(and therefore rate- and temperature-dependent properties). For a semicrystalline polymer below its glass transition temperature the tribological behavior (as a function of speed or shear rate) for many temperatures can be represented by a single master curve by use of a shift factor (a(T)) with an Arrhenius temperature dependence 1321

where T is the absolute temperature, T0 is a reference temperature (the temperature at which the shift factor is unity and no &ii occurs, 296 “C in this case), R is the universal gas constant and AH is the activation energy. The master curve for wear rate VS. shifted speed (Fig. 2(b)) was constructed using an activation energy calculated to be approximately 9.2 kcal mol -I [31]. Tanaka et al. [3] constructed a very similar curve, having determined a slightly lower activation energy of 7 kcal mol’l. Both values are within the 7-10 kcal mole-’ range proposed for tribological process in which only van der Waals bonds are broken [33].

In a unidirectional contact the sliding speed exponent n describing kinetic friction was found to be 0.26 for unfilled P’ITB for test temperatures ranging from 23 to 100 “C [3]. For the oscillatory results presented here that exponent is closer to R =0.4. Since the friction data for several temperatures could also be represented on a master curve (Fig. 2(c)) using the same shift factor as employed for the wear data, kinetic friction can be generally described over the range of tests speeds as

234

I I

.Ol .l

shifted speed (a(t)‘V), m/s

‘;

:E 0.2 l l c g I O* 0

:, .= u.1 v 23C

2 0 4oc LL m 54c

0 66C

0.0 ,001 .a1 .I

(c) shifted speed (a(T)*V), m/s

Fig. 2. (a) Wear rate of unfilled PTFE as a function of speed at temperatures of 23, 40, 54 and 66 “C. At each temperature a line has been included to denote transition to severe wear. (h), (c) Master curves of wear rate and ftiction coefficient superimposed as a function of shifted speed, using an Arrhenius factor with AHx9.2 kcal moi-‘.

where c has a value of appr~ately 0.7 when describing speed with units of meters per second.

235

5. Discussion

Figure 3 illustrates the drawing of strips of oriented low shear strength film across the surface of an unfilled PTFE pin after a short sliding duration at low speed. With increased sliding distance a surface film fully develops atop the bulk PTFZ, with a corresponding transfer film upon the counterface. Under these mild wear conditions the cyclic process of formation of strips of transfer film, followed by the eventual detachment, discards these strips as debris primarily at the ends of the wear track (Fig. 4(a)). The strips of debris still show surface striations running along their length, having previously been in sliding contact with the pin.

The filled PTFEs tested here share this mild wear process, with similar strip debris discarded at wear track ends (Figs. 4(b)+(d)). Strips of transfer are not produced as generously by the filled PTmE as they are by the unfilled polymer. The fillers! which accumulate at the sliding surface of the pin as the wear process continues [4: 28, 341, slow the transport of the neat matrix polymer to the sliding interface and thus cause wear to take place at a slightly lower rate. However, as previously mentioned, the resulting differences in wear between the filled and unfilled PTFEs are less than dramatic in this mild regime (Fig. l(a), V-Z8 mm s-l).

Since increasingly higher speeds induce severe wear of unfilled FIFE, a simultaneous change in the morphology of the transferred material is observed. This change is a result of the shear strain rates associated with surface fihn formation becoming large relative to the reciprocal of the relaxation time of the polymer, which has a temperature dependence of the form &a e~(~/R~. The constant Ei which relates shear strain rate to speed (dy/&aV/@, under the assumption of occasional instants of stick at the sliding interface, would approximately be equal to the thickness over which relative sliding displacement is being accommodated (likely the sum thickness of the transfer film on the counter-face and the running film on the PTFE pin surface). The drawing of surface films in the mild regime is overwhelmed in the severe regime by subsurface deformation and fracture processes which result in more massive transfer [35, 24, 18, 3, 31, 341. The fragmented sheets of transfer (Fig. 5(a)) are quickly removed from the contact and deposited about the periphery of the wear track as flakes of debris

Fig. 3. Secondary electron image of thin fdm of PTFE drawn over sliding surface of unfilled pin following a very short sliding duration. (Machine grooves from the milling operation, running from upper left to lower right, are not yet worn away, helping to illustrate the drawing process as the film spans these grooves.)

236

Fig. 4. Secondary electron images of (a) strips of PTFE transfer and debris upon the counterface following mild wear of unfilled PTFE; also wear tracks from (b) graphite-, (c) glass-fiber- and (d) bronze-filled PTFE.

(Fig. S(b)). Such sheets can be several hundred micrometers in diameter, easily visible with the naked eye.

Profilometric traces across the wear track showed these transferred wear sheets to range in thickness from a few micrometers to 20 pm, raising the lightly loaded profilometer stylus by such a dimension above the rest of the wear track (Fig. 6). This sheet thickness, which is about the same as that found by Bahadur and Tabor [20], should correspond to a depth at which subsurface processes responsible for the

Fig. 5. (a) Optical image of transferred sheet of untiled PTFE upon counterface. (b) Secondary electron image of transferred sheets as well as wear sheet debris existing about the periphery of a severe wear track.

Fig. 6. Stylus profilometry trace along counterface following severe wear, as stylus climbs over transferred sheet several micrometers in thickness.

severe wear of the unfilled polymer are activated. Sections of the unfilled pins (about 20 pm in thickness) were microtomed at room temperature normal to the sliding surface following severe wear. These sections revealed the existence of a worked layer, which in some locations was separated from the bulk PTFE by cracks running parallel to the sliding surface (Fig. 7). The thickness of the transferred sheets is indeed similar to the thickness of this worked layer and may result from the propagation of these subsurface cracks. (Worked layers were not observed in thin sections of unfilled PTFE after mild ‘wear tests.) These observations suggest severe wear is a consequence of delamination, a process discussed with increasing frequency relative to polymer wear [36-G].

Figure 8 is a crude repre~ntation of a subsurface crack parallel to a sliding surface subject to kinetic friction, with a friction coefficient (0.1) similar to that found for unfilled PTFE. For such a situation the uniform resultant loads imposed at the sliding surface deviate from being normal to that surface by only a small angle CY (note that &=tan CT). If these uniform resultant loads are considered to be applied over a relatively wide contact length, the smaller crack will therefore be considered

Fig. 7. Cross-polarized optical thin section of unfilfed FTFE pin following severe wear: section taken normal to sliding surface, dispIaying formation of deformed layer and subsurface cracking.

Fig. 8. Schematic drawing of crack at a deptb d below a sliding surface subject to a widely distributed load and having a coefficient of kinetic friction of about 0.10.

239

in a state of compression-shear, yielding a mode II problem studied in detail by Rosenfield [42-45]. (Note that with a friction coefficient of 0.1 any tensile region existing behind the load will be very shallow and will increase in depth only slightly with increasing distance behind that load. The load would have to move considerably beyond the crack before that crack passed from the compressive to the tensile zone. Since the stress associated with tensile crack opening decreases with increasing distance from the load, it is anticipated that mode I contributions will be overshadowed by mode II contributions.) Shieh [46] experimentally demonstrated that cracks can propagate under such combinations of compression and shear. This mode of propagation with a trajectory that is parallel to the sliding surface is greatly favored by the anisotropy of the near-surface region [42], resulting from the molecular orientation process.

Crack-sliding displacement is resisted by static friction between the opposing crack faces, described by the coefficient pcF. Under conditions of low kinetic friction the shear stress existing between the crack faces will equal that found at the sliding surface y= 0 under the wide uniform load (7;1= TO>. The normal stresses are appro~mately equal under all conditions for the stated geometry, ad=ao= 01 This situation will persist as long as & < pcf (such that TV < p& under the stated assumptions). Therefore all shear stress on the crack faces in compressive contact is equilibrated by static friction and thus the effective shear stress causing stress intensification at the tips is zero. However, since Q on the crack faces cannot exceed ~~a, sliding conditions where fik> k result in rO>r& (Several crack lengths away, the far-field shear stress on the plane y=d, 7&R; is still equal to that imposed at the sliding surface, TV.) The effective shear stress contribution between the crack faces which cannot be supported by static friction,

Ten = 70 - l&f 0. (3)

must instead be supported by stress intensifications at the crack tips (note the convention that compressive u is positive):

where a is the crack ham-len~h. A&, which is twice this value for oscillatory motion, may lead to propagation of such a shear crack parallel to the sliding surface. This trajectory would be favored by the texture of the near-surface material which can develop by the molecular orientation processes, and delamination of wear sheets results.

The friction existing between the crack faces should be similar to that measured in static contacts between J?TFE and itself. Makinson and Tabor [24J measured such friction to have a coefficient between 0.10 and 0.16, within the range of kinetic values measured (0.03-0.35). More precise measurements indicative of p& are difficult owing to the effects of an unknown environment existing within the subsurface crack [47] and the degree of roughness and molecular orientation generated on its faces. gcf may also have a temperature dependence 121, though it is likely to be slight relative to the dependence of the kinetic friction. In the severe wear criterion &@, T) = h, any slight temperature dependence of per could likely be lumped with that of the kinetic term when determining an empirical value for crack face friction. Such a value can be estimated from Fig. 9, since at all test temperatures the mild-severe wear transition occurs approximately at a value of kinetic friction of ,.&k= 0,105 f 0.015. Using this value as clef and eqns. (1) and (2), design guidelines of maximum speed or minimum temperature to maintain mild wear of unfilled PTFE can be developed (since increases in speed or decreases in temperature can bring about severe wear by causing the kinetic friction to rise above the threshold level):

240

10.6, 0.0

8 I 0.1 0.2 0.3

friction coefficient

Fig. 9. Wear rate of unfilled PTFE at several temperatures as a function of kinetic friction.

-1

(6)

The values of AH, pd, n and c (9.2 kcal mol-‘, 0.105, 0.4 and 0.7 respectively) quoted here apply strictly to this specific tribosystem. For example, in the unidirectional contact of Tanaka et al. [3] where AH=7 kcal mol-’ and n=0.26, the values for c~cf and c estimated from the published figures are instead approximately 0.2 and 0.45 (when speed is expressed as meters per second and the reference temperature To=296 “C).

Analysis using deformation properties quoted from Bilik 1481 reveals that the real area of contact for these test conditions will be a fraction of the apparent area. As a result, the actual stress at the sliding surface will be somewhat higher than the apparent stress and will be distributed over finite contact lengths, yielding stress ~st~butions r&y) and c&y), Contact length effects have been coupled with crack face friction analysis on such mode II wear problems by Hills and Ashelby 147, 491. Finite contact lengths imply that free surface outside of the contact should be accounted for, though ignorarice of this matter yields errors which are small [45] relative to other problems inherent in trying to apply fracture mechanics to cracks with sizes on the order of the microstructure in a plastically strained material 1421. The simplified model for the onset of wear of unfilled RIFE presented here should, however, remain self- consistent, since the constants for the model ought to be determined empirically using data obtained directly from the tribosystem of interest.

As presented in Fig. l(a), the wear-reducing role of the filler must be a preventive one in light of the severe wear that is induced without the filler. In spite of other previously published theories, Ricklin [50] suggested that the wear-reducing role of

241

fillers within PTFE was merely to prevent the production of larger wear particles. Bahadur and Tabor 1203 similarly stated that the reduced wear rate of filled FTFE was attributable to the filler’s ability to govern the size and shape of the wear fragments. These viewpoints are backed further by the diRerentia1 scanning calorimetry (DSC) analysis of the molecular weights of PTFE debris by Arkles and Schireson [35]. Under mild sliding the characterization of unfilled PTFE debris was similar to that found upon its sliding surface, while the characterization of debris under severe sliding was more similar to the bulk PTFE, since deeper subsurface failure was activated. Under severe conditions, however, the debris formed by glass-filled FTFE retained mild wear characteristics, since failure at greater depths within the surface was prevented.

In light of the model proposed here to describe the onset of severe wear of unfilled PTFE, it is suggested that the role of the filler is to prevent this onset by retarding subsurface crack propagation which would otherwise lead to the larger wear sheets as previously descnied {Figs. 5(a) and 5(b)). This process is observed upon the sliding surface of glass-fiber- and bronze-filled pins shown in Figs. 10(a) and 10(b). As a subsurface crack encounters a large filler particle, the trajectory turns to the sliding surface. This in turn leads to the finer debris observed in Figs. 4(c) and 4(d), considerably smaller than the several hundred micrometer scale of wear sheets of unfilled PTFE. The accumulation of fillers at the composite’s sliding surface during the initial stages of sliding likely accentuates the role of these fillers. Additionally, the presence of these fillers at -the sliding surface may also limit the contact area

Fig. 10. Secondary electron images of (a) glass-fiber-, (b) bronze- and (c} ~ap~ite-pied pin surfaces.

242

within which frictional tractions are applied directly to the PTFE matrix. As a result of these smaller traction areas, the worked surface layer will not be as deep [51] and the wear debris will in turn be thinner than that generated by unfilled PTFE.

Tanaka [23] claimed that lamellar fillers were not as effective at reducing wear because they do not remain embedded deeply within the sliding surface. The explanation of less effective wear reduction, as evidenced in Fig. l(a), is also valid within the context of this model. Flakes of graphite tend to lay atop the plane of the sliding surface (Fig. 10(c)) and wiI1 not interfere with subsurface crack propagation as effectively as spherical or fiber fillers. Along these same lines, Sung and Suh I.521 found wear of fiber-filled PTFE to be lowest when fibers were primarily oriented normal to the sliding surface, and highest when fibers all lay in planes parallel to the sfiding surface. Instead of invoking the load support theory often cited to explain such wear-fiber orientation relationships [6], the authors noted that with the latter geometry cracks can still propagate parallel to the sliding surface under cyclic loading, resulting in large-scale fiber separation and higher rates of wear.

6. Conclusions

(1) The mild sliding wear of unfilled PTFE gives way to severe wear upon an increase in sliding speed or a decrease in temperature. This transition is related to kinetic friction reaching a threshold value. The effects of sliding speed and temperature are intermingled through the viscoelastic shear properties of this polymer and can be superimposed using an Arrhenius shift factor.

(2) Severe wear of unfilled PTFE occurs via subsurface cracking, which generates wear sheets several micrometers thick and several hundred micrometers in diameter. A fracture-based model is presented to describe the onset of severe wear, and design limitations of maximum sliding speed and minimum temperature are developed for the maintenance of mild wear of PTFE.

(3) While PTFE wear is greatly reduced by fillers under severe conditions, their effect is not dramatic under mild sliding conditions. It is therefore proposed that the role of the filler must be preventive in nature and is associated with interrupting subsurface deformation and crack propagation that would otherwise produce large wear sheets.

Acknowledgment

The authors wish to thank the NASA Graduate Student Researchers Program for support funding.

References

1 R. P. Steijn, Wear, 1.2 (1968) 193. 2 C. M. Pooley and D. Tabor, Pzoc. R Sot. Land. A, 329 (1972) 251. 3 K. Tanaka, Y. Uchiyama and S. Toyooka, Wear, 23 (1973) 153. 4 K. Tanaka and S. Kawakami, Wear, 79 (1982) 221. 5 J. Bijwe, C. M. Logani and U. S. Tewari, Wear, 138 (1990) 77. 6 J. K. Lancaster, J. Phys D: Appf. Phys., I (1968) 549. 7 K. Tanaka, Y. Uchiyama, S. Euda and T. Shimizu, in T. Sakurai (ed.), Proc. Joint ISLE-ASLE

ht. Lubrications Co&, Tokyo, 1976, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1976, p. 110. 8 B. Arkies, J. Theberge and M. Schireson, Lubr. Eng., 33 (1977) 33.

243

9 M. Hong and S. Pyun, Wear, 143 (1991) 87. 10 B. J. Briscoe, A. K. Pogosian and D. Tabor, Weur, 27 (1974) 19. 11 B. J. Briscoe, M. D. Steward and A. Y. Groszek, Wear, 42 (1976) 99. 12 W. A. Brainard and D. H. Buckley, Wear, 26 (1973) 75. 13 G. Pocock and P. Cadman, Wear, 37 (1976) 129. 14 1.5 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

24 25 26 27 28 29

30

31

32 33 34 35 36

37

38

39 40 41 42

43 44 45 46 47

P. Cadman and G. M. Gossedge, Wear, 51 (1978) 57. P. Cadman and G. M. Gossedge, Wear, 54 (1979) 211. P. Cadman and G. M. Gossedge, /. Mater. Sci., 14 (1979) 2672. J. Gao and H. Dang, J. Appl. PoZym. Sci., 36 (1988) 73. D. R. Wheeler, Wear, 66 (1981) 355. D. R. Wheeler and S. V. Pepper, J. Pac. Sci Technol., 20 j1982) 226. S. Bahadur and D. Tabor, Wear, 98 (1984) 1. D. Gong, B. Zhang, Q. Xue and H. Wang, Weur, 137 (1990) 25. D. Gong, B. Zhang, Q. Xue and H. Wang, Wear, 137 (1990) 267. K. Tanaka, in K. Friedrich (ed.), Friction and WearofPo&ner Composites~ Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1986, p, 137. K. R. Makinson and D. Tabor, Proc. R Sot. Lond. A, 281 (1964) 49. J. L. Lauer, B. C. Bunting and W. R. Jones, Triboi. Trans., 31 (1988) 282. S. V. Pepper, J. Appl. Ph&, 45 (1974) 2947. K. Tanaka, J. Lubr. Technol,, 99 (1977) 408. M. N. Gardos, Lubr. Eng., 37 (1981) 641. F. E. Kennedy, L. Smidhammar and D. Play, Eurotrib 85, Proc. 4th Eur. Tribological Conf, Lyon, 1985, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1985, p. 51.2. V, R. Evans and F. E. Kennedy, Proc. Znt. Conf: Wear of Mater&, 1987, ASME, New York, 1987, p. 427. T. A. Blanchet, F. E. Kennedy and X. Tian, Proc. Znt. Conf Wear of Materials, 1991, ASME, New York, 1991, p_ 689. K. G. MacLaren and D. Tabor, Natuq 197 (1963) 856. R. P. Steijn, ASLE Trans., 11 (1968) 235. T. A. Bfanchet and F. E. Kennedy, Tribal. Trans., 134 (1991) 327. B. C. Arkles and M. J. Schireson, Wear, 39 (1976) 177. N. P. Suh, in D. A. Rigney (ed.), Fundamentals of Friction and Wear of MateriaZs, ASM, Metals Park, OH, 1980, p. 43. M. Clerico, in N. P. Suh and N. Saka (eds.), Fundamentals of Tribology, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA, 1978, p. 769. J. R. Youn and N. P. Suh, Proc. Society of Plastics Engineers, 39th AhXEC, Boston, MA, 1981, p. 20. P. S. Walker, M. Ben-Dw, M. J. Askew and J. Pugh, Eng. Med., 10 (1981) 33. M. M. Landy and P. S. Walker, J. Arthrophzsty, Suppl., (October 1988) S73. T. C. Qvaert and H S. Cheng, J. T&o& If3 (1991) 150. A. R. Rosenfield, in D. A. Rigney (ed.), Funda~nta~ of Friction and Wear of ~ute~u~, ASM, Metals Park, OH, 1980, p. 221. A. R. Rosenfield, Wear, 61 (1980) 125. A. R. Rosenfield, Wear, 72 (1981) 97. A. R. Rosenfield, Wear, II6 (1987) 319. W. T. Shieh, Eng. Fract. Mech., 9 (1977) 37. D. A. Hills and D. W. Ashelby, Weur, 54 (1979) 321.

48 G. M. Bartenev and V. V. Lavrentev, Friction and Wear of Polymers, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1981, p. 75.

49 D. A. Hills and D. W. Ashelby, &g. Fmcture Mech., 13 (1980) 69. SO S. Rictiin, Lubr. Eng., 33 (1977) 487. 51 F. E. Kennedy and L. P. Grotelueschen, J. AppZ. Mech., 51 (1984) 687. 52 N. Sung and N. P. Suh, Wear, 53 (1979) 129.

all articles will be uesed/Surface properties of polyethylene Effect of an amphipathic additive 1958.pdf

J O U R N A L O F C O L L O I D S C I E N C E 14, 206-221 (1959)

SURFACE PROPERTIES OF POLYETHYLENE: EFFECT OF AN A M P H I P A T H I C ADDITIVE

A. J. G. Allan 1

Polychemicals Department, E. I. du Pont de Nemours & Company, Inc., Du Pont Experimental Station, Wilmington, Delaware

Received November 3, 1958

ABSTRACT

Previous studies have shown that small amounts of amphipathic (i.e., polar non- polar) molecules, in particular oleamide, cause a marked lowering of the coefficient of friction between thin films of polyethylene. In this paper the surface chemical properties of the aging film and the nascent film (i.e., during the fiat film extrusion process) have been studied. The wettability (contact angle) and friction of the aging film at room temperature show that the friction is reduced only when sufficient addi- tive is present to form a weakly held monomolecular layer. This monolayer is formed by almost complete exudation of the additive from the bulk. Contact angle measure- ments show that the molecules become oriented on the surface such that the polar groups are in contact with the polyethylene and the hydrocarbon chains project into the air. The stability of the monolayer to water condensation is much improved by flame treatment of the film immediately on extrusion. On preparing film by extrusion through a water-quenching bath it has been found that water adheres more easily to films containing oleamide. By suitable adjustments, the water bath was modified to form a "dynamic" Langmuir trough. Contact angle measurements on the emerging film and studies on the effect of sweeping the water surface around the emerging film show that the surface tension of the water is lowered by the amphipathic molecule being quantitatively stripped off the film as it emerges through the water/air inter- face. From surface pressure/area relationships, the surface concentrations of the spreading molecules are calculated. It is found that there is a surface concentration about one hundred times greater than would be expected from a uniform distribution of the additive throughout the polymer. This large surface excess is approximately proportional to the bulk concentration and implies a pronounced adsorption at the polymer melt/metal or polymer melt/air interface.

INTRODUCTION

I n the product ion of h ighly t r anspa ren t films of polyethylene, undesi r - able increases in fr ict ion sometimes occur be tween cont iguous surfaces. To reduce this friction, var ious empirical approaches have been tried, includ- ing the appl ica t ion of a solid size or addi t ion of a surface-active agent to the quenching ba th (1) used in flat film extrusion. Both these techniques

: Present address: European Office, E. I. du Pont de Nemours & Company, Inc., Bush House, Aldwych, London, W.C. 2.

206

SURFACE PROPERTIES OF POLYETHYLENE FILM 2 0 7

separate the polymer surface: in the first case by a ball-bearing action, and in the second case by a lubricating action. A third and most successful ap- proach made in these laboratories (2) has been to incorporate a variety of amphipathic molecules (i.e., polar nonpolar) into the raw polymer before fabrication of the film. These materials exude to the surface to form a thin layer, effectively preventing much direct polyethylene-to-polyethylene con- tact.

In industrial application, we need to know how much additive is required to reduce friction to an acceptable level and what effect the additive has on the processes of heat sealing (3) and preprinting treatments (4, 5). Con- versely, these processes affect the friction when additives are used. Again, when films containing additives are made by extruding the molten polymer into a water quenching bath (the flat film extrusion process), these films pick up drops of water more easily than films without additives.

To study these problems, various well-known techniques of surface chem- istry have been adapted to the study of both nascent and aging films. In any particular instance, the information has not been sufficient to present a complete analysis, but a survey of the diverse experiments and observa- tions shows that the processes can largely be understood and discussed in relation to well-accepted theories. In addition, there is evidence to suggest that the amphipathic molecules are surface-active at the molten polymer/ air and/or molten polymer/metal interface.

I. EXPERIMENTAL

A. Materials

Film-grade polyethylene resin of density 0.923 was used throughout these experiments. Stearamide and oleamide were either milled into the poly- ethylene for friction and extrusion studies or made up into a 0.1% solution in a mixed solvent of petroleum ether (b.p. 60°-70°C.)/isopropyl alcohol for surface balance studies.

B. Apparatus and Methods

1. Extrusion. A diagram of the apparatus is shown in Fig. 1. The film A emerges from the die B into the water in the bath C and under a roll D near the bottom. (When required, the edges of the film can be removed by razor blades fixed at E.) From this roll the film passes under a second roll F (the cut-off edges being deflected to the narrow section of the roll) and then upwards, vertically over a bar G fixed about 6 inches above the liquid surface, to the take-up rolls H. The peripheral speed of these rolls can be adjusted from 5 cm./sec, to 100 cm./sec. The quench tank is placed on three laboratory jacks (J) so that it can be leveled and the distance be- tween the die and the water surface adjusted.

208 ALLAN

~H

(a.)

0 II O'

/[ f I

(c,)

B

D A I C

Illl

I i

M

lb.}

t

FIG. 1. Extrusion apparatus for measuring contact angles and spreading rates from moving film.

2. Contact Angle of Moving Films. To measure the receding contact angle between the film and the water, the water level is raised above the quench bath rim by making the latter hydrophobic. Polyethylene tubing, Fig. lb, is split along its axis, pushed over the tank rim, and coated with paraffin wax. With a light source K and lens L (Fig. lc), a magnified image of the meniscus is projected onto a screen M. By placing a moving picture camera at N, the receding contact angle can be recorded and later measured from individual frames of the film. In this way, the effect of vibration is reduced to a minimum.

Overflow at a desired place is achieved by cutting a notch in the poly- ethylene rim and regulating the liquid supply so that the level is maintained at a suitable height above the rim.

3. Sweeping the Quench Liquid Surface. To measure changes taking place when sections of the trough were isolated from the overflow or, alterna- tively, to make a new surface by sweeping, glass strips were coated with

SURFACE PROPERTIES OF POLYETHYLENE FILM 209

paraffin wax and placed across the trough rim (0, O' Fig. 1). To sweep a section, the barriers were placed close together on either side of the film, lowered across the trough, and caused to slide apart on the rims until the desired area was swept, maintaining the slides parallel to each other and at right angles to the trough.

4. Contact Angle of Stationary Films. A simple projection technique pre- viously described (6, 7) was used in these experiments.

5. Film to Film Coe~cient of Kinetic Friction. The simple strain gauge technique has been described elsewhere (8), the films being supported on a table of polytetrafluoroethylene.

6. Surface Tension Lowering: The Film Balance. The surface pressure/ area relation of spread monolayers at the air/aqueous interface was meas- ured with a standard "Cenco Hydrophil" tray and torsion balance, but using Vaselined silk threads and the simplified float described by Allan and Alexander (9).

I I . THE AGING FILM

Additives which improve frictional properties are typical amphipathic molecules, e.g., stearamide, oleamide, palmitamide, and myristamide. Of these, oleamide has been found to be most effective in commercial practice. These molecules should orient themselves at the hydrocarbon film/air in- terface so that the polar group is in contact with the medium of higher di- electric constant--in this case polyethylene--and the free surface energy of the system is a minimum (10). I t is well known that metallic friction is reduced most effectively when a close-packed monolayer of the amphipathic molecule is formed which has a high lateral adhesion between the hydro- carbon chains and firm anchorage to the metal by the formation of soaps (11). There is no such soap formation in the case of polyethylene, but it seems reasonable to suppose that friction will be reduced to a low value (ca. 0.1) only when a close-packed monolayer is formed. Assuming that the additive exudes to the surfaces with no losses in the preparation of the film, the minimum concentration of additive required in the original poly- mer, CB, in parts per million by weight is given by

CB = 2 X 101°" M [1] ptNA '

where M = molecular weight of the additive, g;

p = density of the polyethylene, g./c.c.;

t = film thickness, cm.;

N = Avogadro's number -- 6.023 X 1023; and

A = minimum area in the close-packed monolayer from film bal- ance studies (28 A?/molecule, Fig. 10).

210 ALLAN

For example, this relationship shows that, from a polymer containing 100 p.p.m, of oleamide, films of 50 ~ thickness will have a close-packed monolayer present, whereas films of 25 ~ thickness will not. To illustrate the importance of this, Fig. 2 shows the effect of concentration of oleamide on the coefficient of kinetic friction of films of 38 tL thickness prepared by the blown film extrusion process. By calculation, the monolayer is com- pleted at A and higher concentrations show a marked reduction in friction. The various curves refer to increasing times after extrusion. For low con- centrations of the additive, the friction is apparently erratic. With film ex- truded by the flat film process, a similar effect was observed. Figure 3 shows the variation of coefficient of kinetic friction with time for a poly- ethylene into which was milled 180 p.p.m, of ole~mide. I t is seen that the thin film (38 ~ thickness) reaches a low friction after some 500 hours, whereas the thick film reaches its lowest value after only 3 hours.

These results are consistent and suggest that the monol~yer requirement seems reasonable and, further, the rate of diffusion or exudation of tile amphipathic molecule at room temperature is slow, since even with films of 100 tL thickness some hours elapse before a complete close-packed mono- layer is formed on the surface.

I t is interesting to speculate why the friction with incomplete monolay- ers is erratic and occasionally higher than the friction of the polymer with no additive (Figs. 2 and 3). I t is possible that a certain proportion of the amphipathic molecules emerge polar head first, thereby increasing the sur- face energy and friction. (This would be analogous to the results of Zisman and his co-workers (12), who found marked increases in friction of high polymers when the concentration of polar groups on the high-polymer chain increased.)

.,= 1.0< = . \

Z

o r- O.B

8 WEEKS

o .',, ~ 0.6~

v

t.L 0.~ I WEEK O I..- Z tel

o_- 0 . 2 - b- b.

0 0

0

"--5 -

MONOLAYER C O M P L E T E D )

50 I00 150 200 250 500 CONC. OF OLEAMIDE IN BASE RESIN, PARTS / MM

FIG. 2. Effect of oleamide concentrat ion on the coefficient of kinetic friction.

SURFACE PROPERTIES OF POLYETHYLENE FILM 211

o O C u *;-, 38p

0.5 __

,~, 0.2 •

o o . , ~ 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 7.0 I0 20 40 70 I00 200 400 I000

TIME AFTER EXTRUSION, HOURS

FIG. 3. Ef fec t of t i m e on t he coeff ic ient of k i n e t i c f r i c t i o n for v a r i o u s f i lm t h i c k -

nesses of a p o l y e t h y l e n e c o n t a i n i n g 180 p .p .m, of o l e a m i d e .

o@

.J LI= Z 0 IlE 1.1.1

LI. 0 tlJ J Z b- {D

Z 0 (.3

90 ¢l

< 80

70

1.0 2.0

~]k,lN~-,.,Lu I ~ '

:2= m -t

m Q IZO0 r I ,ooo

(I r-

800

=o 600 m Z 400

~ 200 ©

4.0 7.0 I0 20 40 70100 200 400 I000

TIME AFTER EXTRUSION, HOURS

FIG. 4. Ef fec t of t i m e on (a) c o n t a c t angle , (b) hea t sea l peel s t r e n g t h for a p o l y - e t h y l e n e c o n t a i n i n g 180 p .p .m, of o l e a m i d e a nd of 50 ~ t h i c k n e s s . @ d r y ; • 50% rela- t i ve h u m i d i t y ; (]) 90-100% r e l a t i v e h u m i d i t y .

The work of Rideal and Tadayon (6) with stearic acid suggests that such a condition of high polarity is metastable and the molecules are capable of overturning into their configuration of lowest free surface energy (i.e., non- polar end outwards toward the air). This should be detectable by contact angle studies.

Changes in contact angle with time after extrusion of polyethylene film

212 ALLAN

containing 180 p.p.m, of oleamide are shown in Fig. 4a. There is seen to be no significant effect of relative humidity under these conditions where no liquid water condensed onto the film. The contact angle shows a marked reduction between 10 and 40 hours, being restored to a value greater than 90 ° after 40 hours. This change in the surface was confirmed by measure- ments on heat sealing (3) of two surfaces together. Figure 4b shows the heat seal peeling strength at a given temperature of sealing. There is seen to be a temporary reduction in strength of the heat seal (overcome by rais- ing the sealing temperature) which can be attributed to the presence of polar heterogeneities which hinder the coalescence of the hydrocarbon.

The presence of an oriented monolayer is further suggested by the dra- matic effect on the stability of the low friction surface when the polyethyl- ene substrate has been flame treated to make it printable (7). Film con- taining oleamide and treated with a flame on one surface to make it printable was stored at 72°F. in an atmosphere of 50 % relative humidity. On removing this film to an atmosphere of high humidity and high tem- perature (ca. 90°F.) the friction of the treated surface remained low but a high friction was produced on the untreated surface, typical of films not containing additives. This effect was reversible (13).

We can summarize what can be learned from these diverse experiments by reference to the diagram, Fig. 5. The additive in the bulk (a) exudes to the surface (b) and at equilibrium produces a weakly held oriented mono- layer (c) which takes 1-500 hours to form, depending on the concentration of the additive and the surface-to-volume ratio of the film (i.e., film thick- ness). In the early stages of the extrusion, some of the polar heads are ex-

(o) (b) [c)

FLAME FLAME FLAME TREATED TREATED TREATED

WATER LAYER (d) (e) I f )

FIG. 5. The exudation of amphipathic molecules from polyethylene.

SURFACE PROPERTIES OF POLYETHYLENE FILM 213

posed, causing higher friction and lower contact angles, and requiring slightly higher heat-sealing temperatures. The treatment of the surface to render the film printable results in the deposition of relatively firmly an- chored polar groups (7, 14), as at (d), so that the monolayer of additive is more firmly held (e). Removing the film to a warmer atmosphere of high humidity, producing condensation on the cold film, easily disrupts the mon- olayer on the untreated side, whereas the monolayer on the treated side remains stable (f).

At the present time, this simple picture seems to explain all the diverse observations made on aging films.

III. THE NASCENT FILM

In the flat film extrusion process described above films prepared from polymers containing amphipathic additives pick up drops of water from the bath more easily than films without additives. Experiments on the moving film enable this phenomenon to be understood.

A. Contact Angles and Water Pickup with Overflow

The receding dynamic contact angle (Or) was measured for a variety of film thicknesses, speeds of withdrawal, and additive concentrations. A se- lection of the results is shown in Figs. 6a and 6b. For a constant film thick- ness (Fig. 6a) it can be seen that the plot of cosine ~ versus film speed be- comes progressively more convex to the abscissa at lower speeds as the bulk concentration of additive is increased. Since it can be shown (Appendix) that the speed at which water is picked up depends only on the static re- ceding contact angle and the surface tension of the quench bath liquid, these results imply a reduction in surface tension of the liquid as speed is increased, this reduction at any given speed clearly depending on the con- centration of oleamide in the polymer. Thus, appreciable quantities of the additive spread onto the water surface as the film emerges.

Figure 6b shows that, at any particular additive concentration and film speed, the contact angle decreases as the film thickness increases. Again, the speed at which water is picked up is critically dependent on film thick- ness when the additive is present, but independent of film thickness when the films are free from additive (Fig. 7). These are important and interest- ing results since they show that even prior to the film emerging from the quench bath, an excess of oleamide has emerged onto the surface; other- wise, film thickness would have no effect on the contact angle or on the speed at which water was picked up.

B. Sweeping Experiments

It had been found that stopping the overflow resulted in rapid pickup of water on the film. With the sweeping technique described above, this

214 ALLAN

l.O

0.8 //me

i FILM THICKN ESS=5Op-

°i/ I l l l 0 I0 20 30 40 50 60 70

SPEED OF FILM, CM / SEC.

FzG. 6a

0.6

Z

o o.4 t)

1.0

0.8

(D 0.6 LI.I Z

o 0.4 ¢.)

0.2

. . . .

I OLEAMIDE CONC. =

i I

® 2 5 ~ ¢ 5 0 ~ (D 75/a e lO0~ o 125 ~1 r

240 PARTS / M M t I

0 I0 20 30 40 50 SPEED OF FILM, CM/SEC.

FIG. 6b FIG. 6. The relation between speed and receding contact angle. (a) effect of ole-

amide concentration (in p.p.m.) (film thickness 50 t~) (b) effect of film thickness (ole- amide concentration 240 p.p.m.).

could be examined quantitat ively. The t ime taken from commencing the sweep to water pickup on the film was measured for several speeds, film thicknesses, and additive concentrations. I t was found tha t in all cases the t ime taken for water pickup to commence was proportional to the area of water surface swept out and decreased as the speed increased. An example of the results is shown in Fig. 8. This suggests tha t the additive spreads on to water at a quanti tat ive rate governed by the concentration of mole- cules on the film surface.

I t was observed tha t even after water pickup commenced from a closed area, the oleamide continued to spread on the s tagnant surface until crys- tals were formed. However, long before this point of crystal formation and

SURFACE PROPERTIES OF POLYETHYLENE FILM 215

d

• -. 50

(..)

~ " 4O I

¢.s,

E ,., 30 ¢J

Z h l

~: 20 (D f j

0

b~

oi- L" I i=i 1-41i :.ON I I

\ \ , '

.001 . 0 0 2 . 0 0 3 .005

I -175 PP=I

5 7 5 pp,.

I I .01 .02 .03 .04

FILM THICKNESS, CM.

FIG. 7. Effect of film thickness on speed at which water pickup commences for films from polymers containing various concentrat ions of oleamide (in parts per mil- lion).

0 3 a Z

o o 15 LIJ ( 0 a."

1 0 - ( J D_

Z I , I =z =z 0

O k -

0 1,= =Z I - -

I

0 27.9 C M / S E C . • 29.4 ,, ,,

53.0 . . . . 35.5 ,, ,,

S I00

f $I

2 0 0 5 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 0 0 AREA SWEPT OUT, CMS 2

FIG. 8. Effect of t rough area swept out on t ime to commence water pickup at con- s t an t film thickness.

long after water pickup commenced, a few talc particles sprinkled on the surface and gently blown about suddenly appeared to "freeze" showing that a solid invisible gel-like film was formed. With the sweeping technique, this surface gel point was measured for several speeds, film thicknesses, and swept areas. The time was again found to be reproducible, proportional to the area of clean surface originally swept out and decreasing as film speed or thickness increased (Fig. 9). This again suggests that the additive spreads quantitatively from the film onto the water surface. In fact, the reproduci-

216 ALLAN

O3

I.¢t O3

d (.9

IJJ

,,< r r

O3 =E

I . I -

I l l 3E I . -

8 0

60

40

20

T "F T FILM SPEED 31.8 CM/SEC.

0 I00 200 300 400 500 600 AREA SWEPT OUT, CM ~'

Fla . 9. Effect of area swept out on t ime to form a surface gel a t constant speed.

bility of both the surface gel point and the time to start the water pickup from a clean surface over a wide range of conditions suggests that every molecule free on the polyethylene surface is stripped off onto the water surface as the film emerges.

C. Film Balance Studies

To calculate the concentration of molecules on the water surface, and thus on the film surface, it is necessary to know the surface area/surface tension lowering characteristics of monolayers of this class of compounds spread on water. These curves are shown in Fig. 10. The results are in good agreement with earlier work by Adam (15, 16), who showed that the presence of a double bond in the hydrocarbon chain caused an expansion of the film. In the case of oleamide, the area at collapse is 28 A.2/molecule. At this point, however, the film remains a two-dimensional liquid and only at about 9 A?/molecule does the film become solid (Ag in Fig. 10). Further, the area of solidification is quite reproducible and implies a uniform col- lapsed layer three molecules thick. A reproducible gel point in collapsed monolayers does not seem to have been observed before, and should be studied further with more carefully controlled conditions of pH and a si- multaneous study of surface potential and surface viscosity. (It is interest- ing to note that the gel point was observed in the extrusion studies dis- cussed above before the surface balance studies were made.)

D. Concentration of Oleamide on the Emerging Film Surface

From the various types of data above, the concentration of oleamide on the film surface can be calculated, provided the conditions for water pickup are specified. In general, it is suggested that the surface concentration is frequently lowest at the film periphery, since there is an effective mechani-

S U R F A C E P R O P E R T I E S O F P O L Y E T H Y L E N E F I L M 217

¢n b.I Z >-

LIJ

¢/) ¢t) I,m n-" a.

bJ

n.-

t~

5O

3 0 ".

20

TEARAMIDE-~:

~o I

0 I0 2 0

- - O L E A M I D E

\ I

3 0 4 0 5 0

- - , . / 6O

AREA, ~2 / MOLECULE

FIG. 10. Surface pressure/urea relationship for amides.

cal pumping action of water moving down the meniscus which pushes the spreading molecules to the edge of the trough where they either go over the weir or are compressed into a monolayer of appreciable surface pres- sure. In all cases, the contact angle and thus the approach to water pickup will be affected by the surface tension at the film periphery.

1. Time to Start Pickup from a Closed, Initially Clean Surface. Assuming that pickup occurs when the surface tension at the film periphery is low- ered from that of pure water and that this commences at an average area on the water surface of 59 A?/moleeule (A1 in Fig. 10), we can determine the time taken to fill a unit area of surface from the slopes of the plots of time to pick up water (t~) vs. area of surface swept (Aw). If every molecule is stripped from the film the concentration on the film surface C[ is related to the concentration on the water surface C w as follows:

A~ C TM X -~ = CI j X 21S, [2]

where l is the film width and S is the speed. I t is more reasonable to suppose that the surface tension at which water

is picked up varies with the speed. By determining the speeds at which water is picked up (Sp) from a clean flowing surface and from a saturated stagnant surface and assuming that these conditions refer to surface ten- sions of 72 dynes/cm, and 42 dynes/cm., respectively, we can determine the surface tension at pickup for any intermediate speed from a simple equation, %, -- asp -5 b, a and b being estimated from the limiting condi-

218 ALLAN

tions. We can then determine approximate values of C w from the surface- pressure vs. area curves and hence from Eq. [2] a second set of values of C1 s.

2. Time to Form a Surface Gel. Since the gelation occurs only when there is a trimoleeular layer present (Fig. 10), the area per molecule on the water surface is now 9 A3 or C ~ = 1 >( 1015 moleeules/em3, and hence, as in Eq. [2], we have

C ~ A w _ C21.21S, [3] tg

where tg is the time to form a surface gel over the area Aw (see Fig. 9). 3. Time to Pickup with a Weir Overflow. The rate of draining away of

the compressed monolayer will have a marked effect on the lowering of surface tension close to the film. In these experiments, the velocity over the weir was sufficient to cope with the spreading monolayer so that the limiting rate of spreading (i.e., when pickup occurs) of the oleamide from the polyethylene film is given by the speed of spreading of a monolayer at some relatively stationary point midway between the film and the weir. Accumulation of the monolayer will result in surface tension lowering close to the film. The speed of spreading of oleamide was approximately 10 cm. / sec., similar to the value for oleic acid obtained by Cary and Rideal (17). If C w close to the film is again 1.7 × 1014 molecules/cm. 2, we can obtain a value for Ca: from

CwS,~ = CJ .Sp , [4]

where Sm is the monolayer speed and Sp is the film speed at pickup. I t is important to note tha t this equation is true only when water pickup oc- curs.

In Table I are summarized the concentrations of molecules on the film surfaces when water pickup commences calculated from data similar to those shown in Figs. 7, 8, and 9 for films of 50 ~ thickness, and compared with the values to be expected from a uniform distribution of additive, i.e., CB 2/3.

We m a y note that (a) there is fair agreement between the surface con- centrations calculated from the three types of experiment, (b) basing the calculation on uniform distribution of the additive we get a surface concen- tration one hundred times too low to account for the observed effects, and (c) approximately 10%-20% of the close-packed monomolecular film is present on the surface of the film and is completely stripped off on to the water surface as the film emerges.

From the experiments on film aging at room temperature, it seems un- likely that such a marked exudation could occur in so short a lifetime of the solid (i.e., < 5 sec.); and it is therefore suggested that most, if not all,

S U R F A C E P R O P E R T I E S OF P O L Y E T H Y L E N E F I L M

TABLE I Comparison ~ Calculations ~rtheConcentration ~ OleamideontheFilm

Surfaceat Water Pickup Speed (Film T~ckness = 5~)

219

Concentration on film surface molecules/cm~ X I0-1~

Concentration of oleamlde in bulk C ,¢

(p.p,m.) 1

7p = Const 7 p = aS~-}- b

C~ C~ CB ~

100 1 .9 2 . 0 - - 3 . 3 0 . 0 3 7

175 4 . 4 6 . 1 - - 3 , 8 0 . 0 5 4

240 6 . 0 5 . 5 6 . 0 4 , 0 0 .0 6 7

575 6 . 7 7 , 0 - - 6 , 5 O. 120

of the molecules stripped off the cold emerging film are present on the sur- face of the molten film as it enters the water. This necessarily implies a surface adsorption either at the molten polymer/metal or molten polymer/ air interface.

Surface activity in molten polymers is a new concept and analogous to the studies of surface activity at the oil/air interface at room temperatures recently discussed by Ellison and Zisman (18). In this particular case, the relation between the surface tension lowering and the bulk concentration is not known, and there is also a complex surface aging phenomenon in- volved. However, if we assume that a gaseous monolayer is formed on the surface of the molten polymer and that equilibrium is reached before the film is stretched appreciably, then it can be shown that the surface excess is proportional to the bulk concentration (19). From Fig. 7 and Eq. [4], the surface concentration (C, ~) for unstretched film (250 ~ thickness) can be determined approximately by extrapolation and is found to be directly proportional to the bulk concentration (C~ u = 4 X 10nCB, where C~ ~ is in molecules/cm. 2 and C8 is in parts per million of additive in the polymer).

From this calculation and Table I, it is evident that a marked surface excess has been demonstrated and related to the bulk concentration. In conclusion, it may be suggested that the rate of diffusion of solute molecules in this molten hydrocarbon polymer is not drastically lower than the diffu- sion in a liquid hydrocarbon of low molecular weight at room temperature.

Appendix

Considering the polyethylene film/air/water junction, water pickup will occur as soon as it is necessary to do more work to remove the water from the film than to break the water surface. Two factors must be considered: the relation between the free surface energies of the components of the system and the relative motion of the two materials, polyethylene and liquid. When the film emerges from the liquid at some speed S, the forces

220 AnLAN

)iT FIG. 11. The air/emerging film/water junction.

involved are those shown in the diagram Fig. 11. The surface free energies of the interfaces liquid/air, solid/air, solid/liquid are given by ~,~.~, ~/sA, and ~,s~, respectively, and the receding contact angle between the solid and the liquid is 0r. The relative motion of the solid through the a i r /water interface imparts an acceleration to the liquid mass which results in an additional stretching force on the liquid. This will be some function of the speed of withdrawal, the liquid viscosity, and density. Let us assume that this force is kS ~, where n is less than one. The well-known equation (refer- ence 19, p. 41)

3's~ = 3 '~ cos 8r ° + ~sL [5]

becomes

3's~ -4- k S '~ = ~/sL -4- ~'La cos 8r, [6]

where 82 is the static receding contact angle and 0~ the receding contact angle when the film is moving at a speed S. Substituting for ~'sA from [5] in [6], we have

k S n = ~LA (COS 0r -- COS Or0), [7]

o r

k S ~ cos 0r = - - + cos O~ °, [7a]

7LA

and if, when water is picked up on the film, 8~ = 0, then

kS~ ~ = 7L~(1 - cos ~r°), [8]

where Sp is the speed at which water is picked up on the film. Similarly,

SURFACE PROPERTIES OF POLYETHYLENE FILM 221

water is picked up on the film when

k&~ + W~L = We, [9]

where Wc is the work of cohesion of the liquid = 2~'LA and W s L , the work of adhesion, is given by the Dupr4 equation (19)

WsL ="YsA + ",'Lx - "YsL. [10]

By substituting for Ws~ and Wo in [9] and using Eq. [5], we again obtain Eq. [8], suggesting that at this point of pickup of water the receding contact angle is indeed zero, and that the speed at which water is picked tip is de- termined solely by the static receding contact angle and the surface ten- sion of the quench bath liquid.

~:~EFERENCES

1. HULL, D. R., U.S.P. 2,324,397. 2a. SYMONDS, A. E., U.S.P. 2,770,609. b. BARKER, H. C., LEWIS, E. E., AND HAPPOLDT, W. B., U.S.P. 2,770,608.

3. JENKINS, S. H., Paper presented at the National Meeting of the American Chemi- cal Society, New York, 1957.

4. BLOYER, S. F., Modern Plastics 32 (July), 105 (1955). 5. K~C}IEVER, V., U.S.P. 2,683,894. 6. RIDEAL, E. K., AND TADAYON, J., Proe. Roy. Soc. (London) A225, 346 (1954). 7. ALLAN, A. J. G., J. Polymer Sci. (in the press). 8. ALLAN, A. J. G., J. Polymer Sci. 24,461 (1957). 9. ALLAN, A. J. G., AND ALEXANI~ER, A. E., Trans. Faraday Soc. 50, 863 (1954).

10. HARDY, W. B., Proc. Roy. Soc. (London) A88, 330 (1913). 11. BOWDEN, F. P., AND TABOR, D., "The Friction and Lubrication of Solids." Ox-

ford University Press, Oxford, 1954. 12. BOWERS, R. C., CLINTON, W. C., AND ZISMAN, W. A., Modern Plastics 31 (Febr.),

131 (1954). 13. DARDEN, E. T., Private comraunication. 14. HINES, R. A., Paper presented at American Chemical Society meeting, New York,

September, 1957. 15. ADAM, N. K., Proe. Roy. Soc. (London) t l01, 516 (1922). 16. ADAM, N. K., Proe. Roy. Soe. (London) A106, 694 (1924). 17. CARy, R. F., AND •IBEAL, •. K., Proc. Roy. Soc. (London) A109, 310 (1925). 18. ELLISON, A. II., AND ZISMAN, W. A., J. Phys. Chem. 60, 416 (1956). 19. ADAM, N. K., "Physics and Chemistry of Surfaces," 3rd ed., Oxford University

Press, Oxford, 1941.

all articles will be uesed/The Effect of the transfer film on the friction and wear 1979.pdf

Wear, 52 (1979) 347 - 363 0 Elsevier Sequoia S.A., Lausanne - Printed in the Netherlands

347

THE EFFECT OF THE TRANSFER FILM ON THE FRICTION AND WEAR OF DRY BEARING MATERIALS FOR A POWER PLANT APPLICATION

M. B. J. LOW

Central Electricity Generating Board, South Western Region, Scientific Services Depart- ment, Portishead, B-istol BS20 9DH (Gt. Britain)

(Received June 30,1978)

Summary

Friction and wear tests have been carried out for a number of commer- cial dry bearing materials containing polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), MoSa or graphite for a specific turbogenerator application. The effect of operating temperatures up to 300 “C has been investigated. The performance of the materials was strongly related to the formation and stability of a transferred film. PTFE-containing materials offered the most favourable performance over a wide temperature range; the wear rate obeyed a modified form of Archard’s adhesive wear law. A simple model for the running-in behaviour of these materials is proposed.

1. Introduction

The 500 and 660 MW turbogenerators currently used in power plants in the United Kingdom measure up to 60 m long and are supported on a num- ber of flat bearing supports, usually greased, to enable thermal expansion. The supports, 14 - 16 in number, are located in the horizontal centre line plane with a gross loading of about 1200 t. These supports, combined with a series of transverse and axial keys, enable casing thermal expansion to take place whilst maintaining clearances of about 0.5 mm between rotating and stationary components (Fig. 1). Operating temperatures range from ambient under the condenser up to 300 “C under the high pressure steam casing. Axial thermal movements vary up to 5 cm for each start-up and accumulated sliding distances are expected to be short (about 0.15 km) in the life of the machine. However, plant experience on certain designs suggests that vibra- tion-induced movement can arise with amplitudes up to 5 I.tm cycle-’ at 50 Hz, giving a total movement of about 15 km a-l.

Design constraints do not permit ready access for maintenance and with the poor performance of grease lubrication on these bearing surfaces a

Fig. 1. The turbine casing arrangement.

change to dry bearing materials appeared attractive. Ideally, wear lives equiv- alent to machine life and low friction coefficients are desirable. Low friction is essential to minimize the rotational forces on casings about a vertical axis which are induced by unequal bearing loads. These are due to the torque reaction between stationary and moving turbine blades.

A number of well-known commercial dry bearing materials containing polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), MO& or graphite as the solid lubricant were tested. The supporting matrix in these materials included an asbestos fibre reinforced resin, glass fibres, sintered bronze and lead, sintered iron, cloth fabric reinforced phenolic resin and metal powders. The purpose of this work was to provide friction and wear data for suitable materials in this application and to gain an understanding of the mechanisms involved.

2. Experimental apparatus

A reciprocating wear test rig was used which employed a sandwich of two moving test plates made of dry bearing material loaded hydraulically be- tween heated mild steel plates (Fig. 2). The test plates, 2.5 cm X 3.7 cm in area, were spherically mounted on a carrier block and were of the maximum area possible for this rig in an attempt to avoid geometry effects [l] . Sheathed thermocouples were attached to the steel surfaces and a compres- sion-tension load cell continuously monitored the friction force for the two interfaces. Normal loads of up to 14 kN were required to produce the design stresses and the rig had a shear load capacity of 28 kN which enabled friction coefficients of up to 1.0 to be accommodated at this normal loading. This was provided using a 0.25 m oil-filled cylinder energized by air at 100 lbf in2 through oil reservoirs and flow valves. With pneumatic control circuits the system proved economical and reliable with virtually the same stiffness as a hydraulic system. Sliding velocities of up to 1 cm s-l gave no significant frictional heating, yet were at least an order of magnitude higher than those

349

Fig. 2. The test rig: 1, test material; 2, steel plates; 3, carrier block; 4, hydraulic rams; 5, hydropneumatic pump; 6, load cell; 7, oscillator; 8, linear d.c. supply; 9, chart recorder; 10, actuator (0 - 5 cm stroke); 11, flow control valves; 12, reservoirs; 13, four-way con- trol valve; 14, displacement control valves; 15, filter/pressure control; 16, heating plates; 17, insulation; 18, thermocouples; 19, cooling coil; 20, water-cooled supports.

obtained in service to give a reasonable acceleration in life. All friction coef- ficients are kinetic values. Sliding amplitudes between 12 and 37 mm were used.

Mating steel surfaces were ground transverse to the sliding direction with a surface roughness of 0.3 - 0.4 E.trn c.1.a. Wear was monitored by weight and thickness measurement throughout the 8 h test run. Depth of wear is of greatest concern with bearing materials the life limit of which is governed by matrix exposure at a finite depth below the surface. In addition, wear depth data are essential for the assessment of bearing height tolerances for turbine supports. Specific wear rate data have also been generated as a guide for de- sign calculations. Dark field optical microscopy and scanning electron micro- scopy (SEM) were used for transfer film studies in addition to profilometry and conventional metallography to assess wear and structural damage to bearing materials.

3. Results

The performance of all materials tested proved to be strongly temper- ature dependent for a given load and sliding distance. In all tests a running- in period of rapid wear corresponded to the formation of a transferred film on the steel counterface, followed by a period of linear steady state wear. Friction coefficients generally fell with temperature for the steady state wear period. Both friction and specific wear rates are plotted for all materials in Figs. 3 and 4. The superior performance of certain PTFE-containing mat-

350

Spccilic war rate m m=/t+J M i

10-4 .

/

-&VP 0

Io-s .>.

1

10-6 t 1

loo 200 300 -c Temprroturc

Fig. 3. Variation of the specific wear rate with temperature for several dry bearing materials: 0, MoSz coating (cured); X , graphite/bronze sinter; A, graphite/phenolic/fibres; 0, PTFE glass fibre/epoxy ; 0, PTFE/bronze sinter.

0.4 -

0.3 -

0

0.2. \

100 200 300

Trmpwalure OC

Fig. 4. Variation of friction (kinetic) with temperature for several dry bearing materials: 0, MoSz coating (cured); X , graphite/sintered bronze; A, graphite/pheno!ic/fibres; 0, PTFE/glass fibre/epoxy; 0, PTFE/sintered bronze.

J

erials, which had wear rates up to two orders of magnitude lower than the other materials and consistent with other reported figures [ 2 - 41, is clear from this comparison.

Fig. 5. Graphite transferred film for an asbestos fibre reinforced epoxy/graphite material.

Fig. 6. MO& transfer film for an oven-cured coating.

3.1. Graphite and MoSz Where graphite and MoS, were the solid lubricant base of a material,

the running-in wear was characterized by a significant amount of loose wear debris and a longer period of sliding than PTFE to reach a steady state wear. At no stage in the wear process was a continuous graphite or Moss film pro- duced (Figs. 5 and 6). It is worth noting that the transfer film for pure elec- trographite against the same steel surface produced no significant increase in film coverage. Thus interference by the supporting matrices of our test mat- erials can be discounted.

Loose debris was produced under steady state wear and the wear pro- cess comprised removal and repair of discrete areas of transfer film. Failure of this film was preceded by blistering and flaking in the wake of the test plate. Film formation occurred by a nucleation and growth process with islands of film developing from more pronounced surface features or build- up of loose wear debris. The islands of film were not confined to the same position on the wear track with repeated sliding.

Above 100 “C! both groups of materials exhibited greater transfer with thicker film build-up. Again a discontinuous film was formed with repeated failure and repair of discrete areas. Wear rates were correspondingly higher. After a period of running, several materials exhibited mild-severe wear transitions accompanied by bulk failure of the bearing material. The Moss coating at this stage revealed the underlying steel surface, which had been phosphated, and galling rapidly followed.

3.2. Polytetrafluoroethylene Two of the PTFE-containing materials were tested. One contained addi-

tions of lead with a sir&red bronze supporting matrix and the other was re- inforced with glass fibres in a high temperature resin. Both produced similar

352

Fig. 7. Graph of friction (kinetic) against temperature and sliding distance for a PTFE material reinforced with a bronze sinter and steel backed.

results with wear rates as low as 10m6 mm3 N-l m-l at room temperature compared with approximately 10e5 mm3 N-l m-l for the MoSz- and graph- ite-based materials. During running-in wear there was a rapid rise in wear depth for the first few metres sliding distance during which friction levels fell by up to 40% and rose again to a terminal level which was always below 0.1 (Fig. 7). This was accompanied by the formation of fibrous wear debris at the periphery of the wear track. The variation of wear depth with sliding dis- tance and temperature is given in the isometric plot in Fig. 8 with specific wear rates in Fig. 3.

The characteristic fall in friction during running-in wear produced a minimum at an earlier stage in the wear life as the temperature increased (Fig. 7). The variation of kinetic friction with temperature is best shown by plotting it as friction shear stress, as calculated from the apparent wear track contact area (Fig. 9). Comparison with the results of work by Pooley and Tabor [ 51 for pure PTFE against glass clearly suggests that the sliding inter- face lies within the PTFE layer for these reinforced materials and that the matrix has not influenced the friction mechanism. However, for advanced wear, exposure of the matrix due to depletion of the PTFE will arise, at which time both friction and wear increase together. This stage determines the life limit of the material when insufficient solid lubricant is available to prevent matrix-counterface contact, thus producing higher interfacial shear stress and possible break-up of the surrounding matrix. In PTFE reinforced by sintered bronze this arises at a matrix exposure of about 60%.

353

Fig. 8. Graph of wear depth against temperature and sliding distance for a PTFE material reinforced with a bronze sinter and steel backed.

I ‘ loo 200 300

Temperature PC

Fig. 9. Graph of friction shear stress against temperature for pure PTFE and glass (after Pooley and Tabor [ 51) compared with PTFE reinforced with a bronze sinter: X , pure PTFE/glass (after ref. 5); 0, PTFE/sintered bronze/mild steel.

3.2.1. Formation of transfer film Between room temperature and 50 “C the transfer film on the steel sur-

face was only discernible as a slight dulling of the metal surface texture (Fig. 10(b)). As the temperature increased up to 300 “C coverage of the steel track increased to form a continuous film obliterating the original machining marks (Fig. 10(b) - (d)). During the steady state linear wear period localized

(a) (b)

(cl (d)

Fig. 10. Transfer film formation (PTFE fibrelglass fibre and epoxy resin). (a) Unworn. (b) - (d): load, 15.4 MN m -‘; sliding distance, 230 m; (b) at 50 “C;(c) at 150 “C; (d) at 250 “C. All magnifications 50 x .

damage and repair of the film appeared to govern the wear process. An ex- ample is shown in Fig. 11 for a test at 11 kN load, 300 “C and 230 m sliding distance. At low glancing angles in the scanning electron microscope the edges of the damaged layer were resolvable with a measured thickness of 1 pm. Beneath the detached film a thin lumpy film of PTFE is present with the steel machining marks resolvable through it (Fig. 12).

Early work by Makinson and Tabor [6] suggested that transfer film thickness varied in the range 50 - 500 nm and was formed of slabs, lumps and streaky fibres. Pooley and Tabor subsequently found that a thinner film (5 - 20 nm) was interspersed between these lumps and streaks. They also stated that increased coverage took place with higher temperature but did not find it possible to build up thicker films with repeated sliding. This con- flicts with the observations here and further work was carried out to clarify this point. Transfer films were produced on ground steel surfaces at 300 “C

355

Fig. 11. Damaged PTFE film formed after 230 m sliding at 300 “C and 15.4 MN me2 con- tact stress. The exposed edge is shown at a tilt angle of 85”. Magnification 1400 X .

Fig. 12. Damaged PTFE film after 230 m sliding at 300 “C and 15.4 MN rnm2, The prima- ry film is still apparent. Magnification 1400 X .

Fig. 13. PTFE film formation at 300 “C at 15.4 MN me2 contact stress: (a) for the first traversal; (b) after 100 traversals (0.3 m). Magnifications 40.X.

and 11 kN load for 1,lO and 100 traversals (3.7,37,370 cm) sliding both parallel and normal to the surface machining marks. In the first traversal (Fig. 13) a very thin transparent film dotted with islands of thicker film was produced. Repeated sliding thickened this film with greater coverage arising from growth of the thicker islands. Both orientations produced the same ef- fect, but elongation of the islands occurred when sliding was parallel to the machining marks. By damaging the transfer film surface with a knife edge, normal to the sliding direction, filaments of the transfer film could be lifted from the surface and peeled away for considerable lengths (Fig. 14). Exam- ination of this surface by SEM enabled direct observation and thickness esti- mates of the film to be made. Prolonged observation at high magnification produced severe damage to the film (Figs. 15 and 16) and limited accurate measurement to give much less than 100 nm in the first traversal rising to 500 nm in 100 traversals.

356

Fig. 14. Filaments of PTFE film stress. Magnification 40 x .

formed after 100 traversals at 15.4 MN me2 contact

Fig. 15. A single filament of PTFE transfer film. Magnification 1400 x .

to a PTFE filament. Magnification 1400 X

The friction and wear behaviour of the materials studied in this work falls into basic patterns related to the formation and stability of a transfer film. Transfer film formation has been investigated by various workers [4 - 91 but little work has been carried out to relate the film behaviour to the friction and wear performance over a range of temperatures. Although this work was confined to commercial dry bearing materials, there is evidence that the sliding interface was dominated by the solid lubricant component and direct comparisons can therefore be made.

4.1. MO& and graphite The materials containing MO& and graphite suffered abrasive wear on

initial sliding leading to the formation of thick discontinuous transfer films

357

which appeared to be unstable. The areas of film were formed by a nuclea- tion and growth mechanism around the more prominent surface features. It is thought that during build-up of the film plates of graphite and MO& orient at the sliding interface to give low shear [ 1,9] . However, transfer of unfavourably oriented material could disturb the established films, perhaps by an abrasive wear process. If sufficient damage takes place the interfacial shear stress will increase above the combined adhesive and mechanical lock- ing to the metal surface, causing film failure. This mechanism was observed; discrete areas of film became roughened and blistered and flakes of film were removed as loose wear debris. For graphite-filled materials frictional heating in this process will cause desorption of water molecules from the edges of the lamellae producing an increase in interfacial adhesion [l] which again could lead to failure at the film-metal interface.

At elevated temperatures (above 100 “C) both groups of materials suf- fered enhanced wear with greater transfer and therefore a larger volume of wear involved in the film formation and repair process. In several materials, mild-severe wear transitions were observed. For graphite this was presum- ably caused by an increase in the adhesion of lamellae owing to desorption of intercalated molecules as described above. However, for MO& this transi- tion corresponded to a total loss of the MoSz coating and metal-to-metal contact. It is interesting to note that MO& wear debris maintained low fric- tion coefficients even when the wear depth exceeded twice the coating thick- ness. Presumably sufficient MO&, debris remained at the sliding interface, even during metal-metal wear, to retain low friction (0.1 - 0.2).

Although the running-in wear period is followed by a linear steady state wear, which also varies linearly with load, the discontinuous film and prolific loose wear debris suggest that both abrasive and adhesive wear mechanisms are involved. However, the linear relations between volume worn, load and sliding distance enables a specific wear rate to be defined following Archard’s adhesive wear law [lo]. Brief examination of the effect of surface roughness revealed a proportionate increase in abrasive running-in wear with a smaller increase in steady state wear for rougher surfaces. As discussed above this suggests that abrasive wear partly contributes to the steady state wear.

The overall performance of these two groups of materials restricts their use to low temperature and lightly loaded areas of the turbine support sys- tem to obtain optimum wear life.

4.2. Poly te trafluoroe thylene 4.2.1. Running-in wear Initially the wear of the PTFE-based materials was confined to abrasion

by the mating steel surface. As this surface becomes clogged a transfer film is formed with the sliding interface above the metal asperity tips and low steady state adhesive wear predominates. With most commercial dry bearing materials the supply of PTFE is concentrated at the surface to a depth of only 50 - 100 pm [ 11,121. Below this depth large areas of supporting ma- trix become exposed and the material is regarded as worn out at this point.

358

After a displaccmrnt 1 ) 1’

(a)

Ground steel surface

PT F E Surface

Slidection

Fig. 17. An idealized model surface for the abrasive wear mechanism.

Therefore the volume of wear to produce a transfer film should be mini- mized and the following model indicates how this can best be achieved. Most commercial dry bearing data recommend ground surfaces to 0.3 - 0.4 pm c.1.a. Surface profiles of the ground steel test plates in this work indicated a topography which approximates to a series of parallel ridges roughly triangu- lar in section (Fig. 17).

When stationary, these asperity ridges will penetrate to a depth X0 into the polymer surface and under sliding conditions the vertical load will be supported on the projected area A of the front faces of the indented ridges where

RDX,

A=-K- (1)

For fully plastic contact W = PAN where W is the vertical load, P the yield pressure or hardness and N the number of ridges in the length of the bearing pad. Therefore

X0 = HW_ NPRD

The volume rate of wear at the start is A V/Al, where 1 is the sliding distance, and is given by

AV ac- = NDX,, = ;; (3)

359

By integration

HWl V=__._ (4)

PR

This linear wear is directly related to the surface roughness by the shape parameter H/R. Linear wear continues until the depressions in the surface become clogged and the ridges are filled to a depth H - Xc. The total vol- ume worn at this stage is given by V* where

NRD V” = -+-x,)2

From eqns. (3) and (4) this is achieved in a sliding distance

j* = ;-&-- (H -X,)2 (‘3) 0

The volume wear rate with sliding distance from this point is given by

AV A- = ND(X, - X)

where X is an increment of filling beyond the depth H - X0 (Fig. 1’7). Once the displacement exceeds 2R the surface will continue to indent depending on the degree of clogging (Fig. 17). If all the worn debris is retained by the surface the volume worn for an increase of X in the depth of filling is given by

NRD V= H- {H - (X0 -X))’ - V*

Substituting eqn. (7) in eqn. (8) and assuming {(Xc - X)/H}2 << 1 gives

AV V=NRDH-2R--VV”

Al (9)

Integrating this result gives

NRDH-Vv”--V

NRDH - V* = exp (--!_I$)

Then the volume worn under clogging conditions where all the worn material is retained falls exponentially as

V= (NRDH-_*)\I -exp (-$)I (11)

This relation is similar to that assumed by ~ulhe~ and Samuels [ 131. This predicts a maximum wear depth on the polymer surface of H/2 for abrasive wear, which in these experiments falls between 0.6 and 0.8 pm. At present

360

no data exist for the maximum volume of abrasive wear or the sliding dis- tance to the transition from abrasive to adhesive wear. There is presumably a period where both mechanisms operate. However, an estimate of the abrasive wear depth from the data gives a value of 3 - 5 pm depending on temper- ature, greater wear occurring at higher temperatures. This discrepancy arises from the production of loose wear debris which is expelled at the perimeter of the bearing area. Therefore the total volume of material worn will be given by

v, = v/o,

where $r is the total fraction of wear debris which clogs the surface. In this work it would appear that @r varies from about 0.1 to 0.3 depending on sur- face roughness and temperature. During the abrasive wear period the instan- taneous volume fraction of wear debris retained by the surface will be a function of surface profile, bearing area and the height X, more material being retained when X is small.

Although this model involves a gross simplification of surface geometry, it enables an analysis of the effect of surface geometry during running-in wear to be carried out. By implication the smoother the surface the less the volume worn, and this is consistent with the findings of Pooley and Tabor [ 51 who obtained lower friction and thinner transfer films with reduced sur- face roughness. However, if the transfer film formation relies on some me- chanical keying, in addition to adhesion, then there will be a limit on the value of reducing surface roughness [l] .

4.2.2. Steady state wear The steady state adhesive wear rate has been used for design data in the

form of specific wear rates. It can be assumed that if during sliding the inter- facial shear stress is greater than the bulk shear stress (good adhesion) then bulk transfer will occur. If, however, the bulk shear stress is higher than the interfacial shear stress, sliding at the interface would occur with orientation of the long PTFE chains in the sliding direction accompanied by much reduced transfer. Strong chemical bonding of PTFE to metallic surfaces in addition to van der Waals forces for atomically clean surfaces has been pro- posed to explain this [ 141. However, PTFE is relatively inert with low cohe- sion owing to screening of the carbon chain by the fluorine atoms and, short of chain fracture producing free radicals, chemical bonding seems unlikely. Brainard and Buckley [ 141 have shown that even on oxidized surfaces good adhesion is achieved and assumed that van der Waals forces were the only explanation.

Once the abrasive wear period is complete and the surface irregularities filled, bulk shear occurs on further sliding because of this adhesion and pro- duces the thin lumpy film observed. Within the first traversal surface chains become oriented in the sliding direction and the interfacial stress falls below the bulk stress with no further bulk transfer resulting. The adhesion at the sliding interface is thought to be just adequate to draw out slight additions of

361

film without exceeding the adhesion to the metal surface. Continued sliding at room temperature appears to increase coverage, but not thickness of film, by a growth process with extra film being drawn out by the thicker streaks produced on initial sliding. The wear of the PTFE from the bearing material involves this increase of coverage and extra drawing of films as well as repair of any damaged areas formed in the sliding process.

With increasing temperature bulk transfer is increased in the early stages owing to lower bulk shear strength. Again this appears to produce thickened zones which act as nuclei for further transfer and coverage of the surface. With repeated traversals these islands grow to give complete coverage of the mating surface with a thicker film at higher temperatures, e.g. 500 - 1000 nm at 300 “C. The growth of the thickest film reached 500 nm in the first 7 m of sliding. It is suggested that drawing of films by these islands results from higher adhesion on the boundaries of these islands where the sliding process has probably been least effective in orienting the PTFE chains. Wear rates are increased at higher temperatures primarily because of the thicker films in- volved and the greater volume of material required to repair damaged areas. Unlike graphite or Moss, film failure still leaves a thin protective layer of material on the steel surface and even at 300 “C the transfer film was re- markably stable.

The depth of wear plotted against temperature and sliding distance in Fig. 7 clearly shows the early rise from abrasive wear followed by a linear relation of adhesive wear rate with distance up to the point where matrix exposure affected the sliding interface. Both abrasive and adhesive wear periods varied linearly with load and it is valid to define a specific wear rate

K by

K= ‘--* -- W(1 -I*)

(12)

where V* and 1* define the limits of the abrasive wear running-in period. This relation is obtained from the adhesive wear law K = V/WI [lo] ., Plots of specific wear rate against temperature (Fig. 3) have proved a useful guide for design life calculations and there is no doubt that the PTFE materials exam- ined here offer the best performance for this application.

Friction coefficients have proved encouragingly low (less than O.l), falling below design figures (p = 0.3) and thus reducing potential differential friction forces on a running machine. The marked drop in friction during running-in wear (Fig. 8) appears to shift to an earlier time in the wear life with increased temperature. The drop relates to the initial orientation of PTFE chains in the sliding process and the subsequent rise probably relates to an increase in real contact area as a film forms and spreads over the sur- face. The shift to shorter distances with increased temperature presumably results from the greater early transfer and more rapid build-up of a film. The comparison of friction shear stress with pure PTFE on glass [ 51 clearly shows that the matrix has no influence on the sliding interface in the useful life of these materials.

It has been suggested [ 111 that additions of lead enhance PTFE trans- fer film adhesion and hence the friction and wear properties by some un- known chemical reaction. Comparing the lead-free and lead-filled materials investigated here gives no such indication, and it is argued that the benefit only relates to conditions where frictional heating can be a problem, in which case the increase in the thermal conductivity by lead additions would be beneficial.

In addition to the experimental work reported here, one of the PTFE materials tested has been in service on a number of 500 MW turbogenerators. After 11 000 h service these were examined and the wear rates were com- puted from the operating conditions. In certain locations vibration-induced movements at 50 Hz had been experienced in addition to thermal move- ments, yet specific wear rates compared well with the experimental results [ 151. This observation suggests that the wear rates for these materials are unaffected by a reduction in amplitude from gross sliding of 37 mm down to fretting amplitudes of about 5 pm. This implies that much published data on dry bearing materials could be applied to fretting problems where a sacrifi- cial medium could be employed as a solution. Further work to confirm this point is required.

Although wear rates of PTFE materials were acceptable at elevated tem- peratures no data on time-dependent behaviour are available. No significant creep of the bulk composites occurred during testing, but the exposures to elevated temperatures were short and more work is needed to assess the per- formance at high temperature for periods of 2 - 30 years. A programme of creep testing in compression has commenced.

The work described here only covers a very narrow range of dry bearing materials, based on the more common solid lubricants used commercially, which had potential application to this turbine problem. Subsequently, other dry bearing problems have arisen in power plant, and the above data have been used and other materials considered where operating environments were less hostile. The full potential of dry bearings in industry has yet to be realized, and it is hoped that further work on the basic mechanisms of fric- tion and wear when related to specific plant problems will broaden the field of application.

5. Conclusions

(1) The wear rates of certain commercial dry bearing materials contain- ing MoSz and graphite were higher than for PTFE owing to the poor adhe- sion and stability of their transfer films.

(2) Increased wear rates with increasing temperature were found for all the materials owing to changes in transfer film formation. Generally thicker films were formed and the repair of damage involved a greater volume of material transfer for higher temperatures.

(3) Only PTFE-filled materials satisfied the design requirements over

363

the full temperature range for turbogenerator support bearings. Specific wear rate data are given for design life assessment.

(4) Running-in wear for all the materials was essentially abrasive. For PTFE a model of abrasive wear predicts a linear period dependent on load, surface profile, hardness and sliding distance followed by an exponential fall to a terminal value. The fall is caused by clogging of the surface depressions by wear debris. Above this terminal value adhesive wear predominates and obeys Archard’s adhesive wear law.

(5) For all materials the supporting matrix did not appear to influence the sliding interface within the useful life of the material.

(6) For PTFE, friction coefficients were reduced by a factor of 4.5 for a temperature rise from 25 to 300 “C.

(7) In service performance of PTFE under small-amplitude wear (about 5 pm) suggests that the wear rates are similar to those for gross sliding wear (about 37 mm amplitude).

Acknowledgments

This work was carried out in the SW Region Scientific Services Labora- tory of the Central Electricity Generating Board. The author gratefully acknowledges the support given by his Department, the help of his col- leagues and the permission of the Director General to publish this work.

References

1 J. K. Lancaster, J. Lubr. Tecbnol., (April 1975) 187. 2 J. K. Lancaster, Tribology, 6 (1973) 219. 3 Materials Optimiser, Vol. 1, Fulmer Research Institute Ic-2AZ, 1974. 4 Engineering Sciences Data Unit, No. 68018, 1973. 5 C. M. Pooley and D. Tabor, Proc. R. Sot. London, Ser. A, 329 (1972) 251. 6 K. R. Makinson and D. Tabor, Proc. R. Sot. London, Ser. A, 281(1964) 49. 7 A. I. Sviridyonok, V. A. Bely, V. A. Smurgov and V. G. Markin, Wear, 25 (1973)

301. 8 R. P. Steijn, Wear, 12 (1968) 193. 9 F. P. Bowden and D. Tabor, Friction and Lubrication of Solids, Part II, Oxford Univ.

Press: Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1962. 10 J. F. Archard, J. Appl. Phys., 24 (1973) 981. 11 G. C. Pratt, Tribology, 6 (1973) 135. 12 Glacier Metal Company and Ampep Ltd, personal communications, 1976. 13 T. 0. Mulhearn and L. Samuels, Wear, 5 (1962) 478. 14 W. A. Brainard and D. H. Buckley, Wear, 26 (1973) 75. 15 M. B. J. Low, unpublished.

all articles will be uesed/Thin solid lubricant films in space.pdf

Thin solid lubricant films in space

E. W. Roberts*

Solid lubricant films of thickness one micrometre or less are to an increasing extent being employed in spacecraft applications. This is particularly so where conditions dictate the use of solid lubricants (as opposed to fluids) and where the component to be lubricated is of a precision that precludes the use of thick films. A further advantage is that the thinness of such lubricants actually promotes low friction when the substrates involved are o f high hardness.

This paper reviews the tribological properties of thin, solid film lubricants as determined in vacua typical of those encountered in spacecraft environments. Further, it attempts to describe or predict (where no data exist) the performance of such films under specific spacecraft conditions whose effects on thin, solid film lubricants have, until recently, been unknown to the space tribologist. Such conditions include in vacuo cryogenic environments of spaceborne infrared telescope mechanisms and high flux, atomic oxygen environments of low earth orbits.

Keywords: space tribology, solid lubricants, thin fi lms

Introduction

The environmental conditions experienced by space- craft mechanisms encompass temperatures which range from cryogenic to several hundred Kelvin and pressures which range from atmospheric to ultra-high vacuum. Such conditions dictate that in many instances the only practicable means of lubrication is by the use of solids. Increasingly this requirement is being met using solid lubricants in the form of thin films.

Solid film lubrication can be effected by essentially one of two ways It can be transferred by rubbing from a solid made from, or containing, the dry lubricant--as, for example, with self-lubricating cages in ball bearings. Alternatively it can be applied to one counterface in the form of a film, as with techniques such as sputter deposition.

The former method gives rise to a transfer film which is discontinuous, uneven in its thickness and poorly adherent. Thc lubrication it provides is in consequence characterized by appreciable variations in friction coefficient (thus, for example, ball bearings so lubri- cated exhibit a noisy torque). An advantage, however, is that this method of lubrication makes available a relatively plentiful supply of lubricant which, in turn, renders it suitable for applications of long duration and high duty.

The second method, in contrast, yields a thin, continu- ous lubricant film of uniform thickness which, if

* European Space Tribology Laboratory, United Kingdom Atomic Energy Authority, Risley, Warrington WA3 6AT, UK

correctly applied, is well adhered to the substrate. Such films are used in spacecraft mechanisms because:

• Low shear strength materials confer their lowest friction when present as films of thickness in the order 1 Ixm. Such low-friction films (and those of low frictional noise) are necessitated in applications which call for low power dissipation and low torque noise, such as in cryogenic devices and precision pointing mechanisms respectively.

• Because of their thinness they can be applied to the most finely machined tribo-components without detracting from the components' precision.

A disadvantage is that the durability of such films is relatively short, and once the films are worn through they cannot be replenished. The useful lifetime of the tribological component to which such films are applied is thus limited by the lifetime of the lubricant film itself. The type of spacecraft mechanism that can be lubricated solely by means of thin solid films is thus limited to those of short-to-medium term duration or those of low duty. To a degree this limitation can be overcome by combining both the lubrication methods described above. Thus, for example, the balls and races of a ball bearing may be lubricated with solid lubricant films and the bearing fitted with a self- lubricating cage.

In this paper we will principally be concerned with the tribological properties of thin, continuous films of dry lubricants as they relate to space applications and environments. We shall define a thin film as one whose thickness is in the order 1 ~m.

TRIBOLOGY INTERNATIONAL 0301-679X/90/040095-10 © 1990 Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd 95

E. W. Roberts--thin solid lubricant films in space

Space-compatible solid lubricants

Solid lubricants fall into one of three generally recognized categories. These are: lamellar solids, soft metals and polymers. Not all solid lubricants are effective in vacuum, the classic example being graphite, whose low friction properties appear in the presence only of water vapour 1 and other condensable gases. Table 1 identifies examples of solids which are effective lubricants in vacuum. The tribological properties of some of these lubricants, such as MoS2 2 and certain polyimides 3 are, unlike graphite, appreciably superior in the absence of water vapour and are therefore more effective under vacuum than in air.

Thin-film friction

The friction arising between solid-lubricated bodies is described by the equation 4

sA Friction coefficient = ~ (1)

where s is the shear strength of the lubricant film, A the true contact area and W the normal contact load.

Thus low friction (at a given load) requires that the contact area be small and the lubricant film be of low shear strength.

Small contact areas can be achieved by ensuring that the lubricant is applied in the form of thin (in the order 1 Ixm) films onto substrates of high elastic modulus and hardness. Under these conditions the contact load will largely be supported by the hard contact materials (rather than the film) and the true contact area will, in consequence, be small. For a smooth sphere sliding under elastically loaded (hertzian) conditions against a smooth, flat substrate coated with a thin film we have 5

s Friction coefficient = ~ [~E~ ] (2)

where R is the radius of the sphere and E* is the effective (reduced) elastic modulus of the contact materials. Thus for a given contact geometry Eq (2) shows that:

Table 1 Space compatible solid lubricants

Lamellar solids T Dichalcogenides

Intercalated graphite

.•.•... Gold Soft Silver metals [ - - L e a d

~ l n d i u m

~ - - " PTFE Polymers ---~Phenolic and epoxy

[ resins Polyimides

E MoS2 NbSe2 WS2

a) friction varies linearly with film shear strength b) friction decreases with increasing contact load c) friction is determined by the substrate material to which the film is applied such that the higher the elastic modulus of the substrate materials the lower the friction.

The behaviour of many space lubricants is observed to be in accordance with the above predictions. Thus it has been demonstrated that the initial friction coefficients obtained with thin films of lead, indium and silver are in proportion to their respective shear strengths 6. Further, it is known that the friction of soft metal films 6 and sputtered MoSe 2 decreases with increasing contact load. More recently it has been established 7 that molybdenum disulphide films, when applied to a range of substrate materials of different elastic modulus, exhibit frictional properties in line with (c).

Methods of applying thin films

There are several methods of applying solid lubricants in the form of thin films to substrates. The simplest method is to burnish, i.e. rub dry lubricant powders onto the surface to be lubricated. This can be done by hand using a burnishing cloth but the technique is crude and it is difficult to obtain films of the required thickness reproducibly. More refined methods have been devised in which the lubricant is applied in a controlled manner by mechanical means ~.

A widely used method for the lubrication of, in particular, non-precision components involves the application of bonded lubricants. These are films in which the lubricant powder is attached to the substrate by means of binder materials. In general, the binding agent and lubricant powder are suspended in a solvent, the dispersion then being applied by spraying, painting or dipping. Resin-bonded lubricants require curing following application. Whereas films utilizing cellulosic and acrylic resins are air-cured, those containing thermosetting resins call for heat-curing. Resins which come into this latter category include epoxies, phe- nolics, polyimides, alkyds, silicones and polyphenyl sulphide. Because bonded lubricant films tend, in general, to be applied to thicknesses which exceed 10 ~m they lie outside the scope of the present paper. Details of commercially available resin-bonded lubricants that are suited to spacecraft applications can be found in Reference 9.

Finally there are the techniques of physical vapour deposition in which films are formed by deposition from a physically generated vapour. These are superior to the techniques already described in two ways: first, they give improved film-to-substrate bonding and secondly, film thicknesses can be controlled very accurately such that very thin films (sub-micrometre) can be readily produced. The most widely employed techniques are thermal or electron beam evaporation, sputtering and ion-plating.

Ion-plating ") is preferred for the deposition of soft metals as it gives rise to strongly adherent films. In this technique atoms of the chosen soft metal are thermally evaporated into an argon ion plasma where some become ionized. These ions are then accelerated

96 April 90 Vol 23 No 2

E. W. Roberts--thin solid lubricant films in space

towards a negatively biased substrate where film growth occurs. The substrate bias also ensures that during its growth the film is continuously bombarded by argon ions which help keep the developing film free of contamination.

In sputtering 11, the vapour is created by ion-bombard- ment of the source material. There are essentially two modes of sputtering, DC and RF: so called because of the manner in which bias is formed on the target (and occasionally the substrate). RF sputtering is the more versatile of the two in that it allows deposition of electrically insulating materials. Higher deposition rates can be effected by the use of magnetron sources. Sputtering is commonly employed for the deposition of molybdenum disulphide and other metal dichalco- genides.

In both ion-plating and sputtering, film adhesion can be improved by ion-cleaning the substrate prior to film deposition.

Tribological properties of thin solid films

Soft metal films produced by PVD

The frictional properties of soft metal films in vacuum change with film thickness, load (contact stress), sliding speed and surface roughness. Optimum lubrication is obtained at thicknesses of about 1 Ixm. In general we observe that the friction coefficient decreases with load 6 and surface roughness, but increases at very low sliding speed. These trends are observed with ion- plated lead films as shown in Fig 1, the data of these curves having been obtained by means of a pin-on- disc apparatus operating under high vacuum. The effects of load (Fig 2) and surface roughness persist in air, as demonstrated elsewhere 6, 12. At sliding speeds two orders of magnitude higher than those of Fig 1, the friction coefficient increases with increasing sliding speed 13. However, it should be noted that the sliding speeds of Fig 2 represent more closely those speeds

0.4

0.3

0.2

10N; Polished

o

; Ground

0.1

I I I I 2 3

1

- - X O

Sliding speed, rams -1

Fig 1 Friction coefficient of lead films, in vacuum, as a function of sliding speed (substrate: 52100 steel)

TRIBOLOGY INTERNATIONAL

0.1

8 t - O

u

L LL

0.01

Lead in air (see Ref 12)

MoS 2 in vacuo (see Ref 18)

I I I 1 10 100

Contact load

Fig 2 Friction coefficient as a function of load for thin films of three commonly employed space lubricants (steel substrates )

occurring in the microslip areas of ball bearings TM in spacecraft applications and are thus more pertinent to the theme of this paper.

Whilst the melting point of lead places an upper limit on its temperature range of operation there is evidence to suggest that lead films retain their lubricating properties down to very low temperatures. This has been demonstrated at the European Space Tribology Laboratory (ESTL) where it has been shown that lead- lubricated bearings operate equally well in vacuum at cryogenic temperatures (20 K) as at room temperature (see section on in vacuo cryogenic environment).

Although ion-plating gives rise to a well-adhered film the in vacuo endurance of such films under pure sliding conditions is still poor in relation to films of molybdenum disulphide produced by sputtering (see below). Gerkema ~5 has studied this problem and has brought about improvements in the life of lead films through the introduction of metallic interlayers and dopants. Lead films were deposited (using the tech- niques of sputtering or electroplating) on steel sub- strates which had been previously coated with thin (0.1 Ixm) films of metal (Ag, Cu, Ta, W, Mo). Most of the metallic interlayers produced little or no improvement. However, the use of copper effected a five-fold increase in endurance. This enhancement is thought to arise because the soft copper interlayer decreases the likelihood of steel-to-steel asperity con- tacts, thereby delaying the onset of film failure.

Lamellar solids--sputtered molybdenum disulphide Sputtering is the preferred method of applying MoS216 as it gives rise to film durabilities longer than those

97

E. W. Roberts--thin solid lubricant films in space

achieved with films produced by burnishing and resin- bonding 7. The tribological properties of sputtered MoS2 are dependent on its composition, structure and morphology: and these in turn are observed to be critically dependent on the sputtering conditions.

A study of films produced by magnetron sputtering ~7' 18 has shown that film composition in terms of the ratio of sulphur to molybdenum atoms varies with deposition rate. At low deposition rates (<150 A min -1) the films were found to be sulphur-deficient whilst higher deposition rates (>450 A min 1) prod- uced either stoichiometric or sulphur-rich films. The latter films proved tribologically superior when tested under vacuum. These observations are consistent with those of Buck 19' 2o who demonstrated that the purity of UoS 2 films is dependent upon the relative deposition rates of MoS2 and the gaseous contaminants (particularly water vapour) present in the deposition chamber. The findings imply that at high UoS 2 deposition rates and low partial pressures of water vapour stoichiometric films are obtained, whereas when the deposition rate is low and the H20 partial pressure is high the films are sulphur-deficient and contaminated with oxygen. Again it was observed that sulphur-deficient films are tribologically inferior to those that are stoichiometric.

Most sputtered MoS2 films exhibit a characteristic columnar structure corresponding to crystallite growth in which the 0001 basal planes are aligned perpendicular to the substrate surface. From a tribological viewpoint this is not ideal since the preferred orientation would be with the easy-shear, 0001 planes arranged parallel to the substrate surface. It is reported 21 that 0001- orientated films can be fabricated by sputtering, although there is some uncertainty regarding the conditions under which this occurs. An advantage of growing films oriented in this manner, in addition to that gained tribologically, is that the 0001 surface is much less reactive than the edge sites which are exposed by the 'columnar' films 22 and which oxidize readily in air, thereby degrading the film's lubricating qualities.

As with lead films it is found that the behaviour of sputtered UoS2 films varies with contact load, substrate surface roughness and sliding speed. In general, however, much lower friction coefficients (in the order 0.01) are obtained with MoS2 in vacuo.

The effects of load (Fig 2) and sliding speed are qualitatively similar to those observed with lead films in that the friction coefficient decreases with load and increases at low sliding speeds 2. However, the influence of the surface roughness of the substrate is quite unlike that applying in the case of lead films in that for substrate surface roughnesses up to 0.15 p.m cla, the friction coefficient decreases with increasing surface roughness. The friction coefficient of 0.01 seen in Fig 2 at loads of about 10 N was obtained for MoS2 films sputtered onto 52100 steel substrates having a surface roughness of 0.10-0.15 p,m cla. When applied to smoother steel surfaces (0.04 p.micron cla) the run-in friction coefficient approximately doubles, to about 0.02, given the same conditions of load, sliding speed and vacuum level. More recent evidence suggests that

for a 1 ~m thick film there exists an optimum level of substrate surface roughness at which friction is minimized and film endurance maximized 23.

The tribological properties of molybdenum disulphide further differ from those of lead films in that the lubricity of MoS2 is highly sensitive to the presence of water vapour. This is most pronounced when MoS2 is operated in humid air, whereupon friction coefficients of between 0.15 and 0.30 are observed iv. The effects of water adsorption persist, albeit to a lesser extent, under vacuum conditions. Thus, for example, it is observed that when molybdenum disulphide films are allowed to dwell (that is, not subjected to sliding for a defined period) the friction coefficient is higher on the recommencement of sliding (Fig 3). The increase in friction is thought to result from the adsorption of sub-monolayer quantities of water molecules TM. With continued sliding these are removed (probably by desorption induced by frictional heating) and the friction coefficient decreases. The recovery time is also observed to be a function of the dwell period (Fig 3).

The tribological properties described above relate to MoS2 applied by sputtering to steel (52100) substrates. Recent work has shown that the friction and wear properties of sputtered MoS2 films are strongly depen- dent on the substrate materials to which they are applied 7. Films were applied to substrates made of titanium alloy, steel (440C and 52100) and ceramic (silicon nitride). In vacuo friction coefficients varied in a manner that was consistent with Eq (2) in that the lowest friction occurred with films applied to the highest modulus substrate (silicon nitride) whereas the highest friction was observed with films applied to the substrate of lowest modulus (titanium alloy). This study also demonstrated that magnetron-sputtered MoS2 when applied to silicon nitride gives rise not only to low friction, but also high endurance.

Pressure=8xl0 -7 torr

0.04 -- 103

E ._~ u k= ~- 0.03-- u

g

& 0 . 0 2 -

E -- - ~ / "Recovery 0.01]-----~/ time 1

I I I I 101 102 103 104 105 106

Dwell time, s

Fig 3 Initial friction coefficient of magnetron-sputtered MoS2 and recovery time as a function of dwell time in high vacuum '~

t~

10 2 ~ ' ' ~

ul

> _1 101 ~

98 April 90 Vol 23 No 2

The low durability of MoS2 on titanium alloys was attributed to poor adhesion, as occurs with some other metal substrates. For example, it has been known for some time that the sputtering of MoS2 onto metals that readily form sulphides (copper, silver etc.) yields poorly adherent films of negligible durability. In such cases the use of interlayers can prove remedial 24.

Co-deposited and multi-layered films The tribological properties of sputtered MoS2 can be enhanced by either co-deposition with other materials or through the use of thin, hard interlayers.

Adding small amounts of metals to MoS2 films has been shown to lengthen their durabilities and effect lower and more stable friction. Stupp 25 has shown that these improvements are brought about when the concentration of the metal component is between 5% and 7%. The most favourable results were obtained with the addition of the metals nickel and titanium. Elsewhere it has been shown that films produced by co-sputtering MoS2 and PTFE perform better in moist air than do films of pure MoS226. The inclusion of PTFE, a water repellant, is believed to make the film less sensitive to moisture. In air the PTFE-containing films gave a friction coefficient of 0.1 as opposed to 0.2-0.3 obtained with pure MoS2 films. Film durability was increased by at least a factor five.

The use of hard interlayers to prolong the life of sputtered MoS2 films was demonstrated initially by Spalvins 27. Since then it has been shown that dual layers of TiC and MoS2 applied to 440C balls increases the low-torque lifetime of ball bearings 28 over and above that achieved with single-layer MoS2 lubrication. More recently ion-beam assisted deposition (IBAD) and fast-atom techniques have been used to produce multilayer films 29 comprising a hard interlayer (such as TiB2 and BN) and MoS2. Such films are of interest since they apparently display low friction in air.

Polymers There is practically no published information on PTFE or other polymeric films produced by PVD techniques such as sputtering. There is evidence 3° that sputtered films of PTFE have been used in Japanese space mechanisms and PTFE films prepared by sputtering were reported by NASA 31. Also, as reported above, PTFE has been successfully co-sputtered with MoS2 z8 However, there appears to have been little systematic study of the in vacuo, tribo-properties of sputtered PTFE.

Some data exist, however, on the tribological properties of polymeric films produced by rubbing transfer. Fig 2 shows how the friction coefficient of PTFE films applied to steel substrates changes with contact load ~2. As with other dry lubricants friction is seen to decrease with increasing load. PTFE has the advantage that its lubricating properties are similar in both air and vacuum. A disadvantage is that PTFE's load-carrying capacity is low such that it should not be employed in applications where contact stresses exceed 1200 MPa.

Certain polyimide films exhibit considerably lower friction in vacuum than in air 3. Such films gave rise to

E. W. Roberts--thin solid lubricant films in space

run-in friction coefficients of 0.04 (load and stress conditions unspecified) and exhibited appreciably longer lifetimes in vacuum than in air. The higher friction observed in air is attributed to water adsorption and its retention on those polyimide sites that offer free hydrogen bonds. It is postulated that on removal of the water molecules by desorption (under vacuum) the polymer's shear strength is reduced and friction therefore decreases.

Performance of spacecraft components lubricated with thin, solid films

Ball bearings Ion-plated lead is probably the solid lubricant most commonly employed on precision spacecraft com- ponents. The use of such films for the lubrication of ball bearings is extensive (particularly in Europe). Their employment in ball bearings is usually undertaken in conjunction with leaded bronze cages which provide supplementary sources of lead. In Europe this combi- nation has been extensively applied, as for example in the despin bearings of GIOT-FO 32 and the bearings of the solar array drive mechanism on OLYMPUS 133 .

Increasingly, bearing lubrication with sputtered MoS2 is being considered for space applications, in particular where there exists a need for low torque and low torque noise. The torque performance, however, is related to the number of bearing parts lubricated 17. Thus it is observed that the lowest torques are obtained when only the bearing races are coated (i.e. no coatings on the balls). When in addition the balls are coated the torque is increased (though still remaining low compared to that obtained with other solid lubricants). This torque increase is compensated to a degree by a five-fold increase in bearing lifetime.

Fig 4 compares the torque behaviour of three bearing pairs (20 mm bore, angular contact) operated under high vacuum at an axial loading of 40 N. Lubrication was by means of three types of thin solid film: ion- plated lead34; ion-plated gold34; and sputtered MoSz (races only) 17. The mean torques observed on bali bearings lubricated by soft metals (Pb and Au) show similar behaviour, whilst that of the MoS2-coated bearings is appreciably lower. Even greater variations in performance can be discerned from the plots of torque noise, which show that MoS2 confers exceptionally low torque noise properties. The highest torque noise, which is observed on gold-plated bear- ings, probably reflects the generation of gold wear debris in which case the presence of gold particles, together with their tendency to work harden, would account for the observed torque perturbations.

Torque generation within a solid-lubricated ball bear- ing, the Coulombic torque, can be predicted with reasonable accuracy given applicable values of friction coefficient. Data on the friction of thin solid films under a variety of operating conditions are now available (as we have seen above) thus allowing ball bearing software to be used with greater confidence. Such computations 35 allow the prediction of Coulombic torque in steady-state motion and non-steady-state

TRIBOLOGY INTERNATIONAL 99

E. W. Roberts--thin solid lubricant films in space

x 10 .4

50

E 4O Z

30

E 2

20

101

Lead

Gold MoS 2

0 I I I I I I 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400

R e v o l u t i o n s , t h o u s a n d s

x 1 0 -q

600

Gold

o

z E 5OO

~ 400 +" 300 I

CL

o 20o

Lead 1 0 0 - _ . . - - - . - - - + ~ + +_____

0 ~ " - - - * ~ *-- ~ MOS2 I I * I * I ' *

200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400

R e v o l u t i o n s , t h o u s a n d s

Fig 4 Comparison of mean and peak-to-peak torques of ball bearings lubricated with thin films of lead, gold and MoS2 (in vacuum)

motion, such as the torque hysteresis encountered during small-angle oscillation of bearings.

Gears

The use and tribological behaviour of thin, solid lubricant films on satellite gears is not well documented. It is known, however, that thin films of lead and molybdenum disulphide produced by PVD have been employed in several space applications 36, 37

In a study 38 of the in vacuo, tribo-behaviour of lead- coated steel satellite gears it was shown that a film thickness of 1 ~,m gave the longest durability (range examined: 0.25 to 4 ~m). Examination of gear teeth prior to film failure indicated that the lead coating had been squeezed under the combined actions of sliding and rolling to form an ultra-thin film of thickness approximately 10 nm. Evidently the film, even at this thickness, was still providing effective lubrication. In the same study it was shown that sputtered MoS2 films gave rise to improved gear transmission efficiencies (gear torque about half that obtained with lead films) but with a slightly reduced lifetime.

Screws, cams, collars, journal bearings and slides

These are components whose tribological surfaces are subjected to purely sliding motion (that is, there is no rolling motion). Where precision requirements or other

factors dictate the use of thin solid lubricants the preference is for MoS2 as its durability under pure sliding is far greater than that of soft metal films.

Environmental influences on solid lubricant film behaviour

The environmental conditions (vacuum level, compo- sition of vacuum gases, temperature, etc.) to which a spacecraft component is exposed vary according to many factors. These include: orbital height; the location and role of the component; and whether the component is sealed, partially enclosed or fully exposed to space.

We examine below how exposure to these various space environments, and indeed that encountered during ground testing, affect the performance of solid lubricant films.

Earth-orbit environments

The vacuum level at geostationary orbital height is in the order 10 -13 torr. However, a geostationary spacecraft and its mechanisms will experience vacuum pressures that are appreciably higher than this. These higher pressures--about 10- ~(~ torr close tO the space- craft's exterior surfaces and between 10 -6 torr and 10 ~ torr within partially sealed mechanisms located inside the spacecraft--arise as a result of the outgassing of materials that emit gases such as water vapour and carbon monoxide 39.

Components located on the exterior of the spacecraft will be subjected to proton and electron bombardment. The latter may damage some polymers, including PTFE, and careful consideration should be given to their use in long-term missions.

There are two environments that are peculiar to mechanisms of spacecraft in earth orbit and these call for special attention. These are firstly, in vacuo cryogenic environments and secondly, atomic oxygen environments.

In v a c u o cryogenic environment

The development of spaceborne infrared telescopes as used for example on the Infrared Space Observatory (ISO), the Far Infrared Space Telescope (FIRST) and the Space Infrared Telescope Facility (SIRTF) has led to a requirement for lubrication at cryogenic temperatures in vacuum. This requirement has arisen because infrared astronomy calls for the cooling of solid-state detectors to cryogenic temperatures to achieve an acceptable level of signal-to-noise ratio. Infrared detection systems employ devices such as interchange wheels (to position filters, mirrors, polari- zers etc.), cameras and interferometers (Fig 5), all of which are mechanical assemblies that contain tribological components. These assemblies, by virtue of their proximity to the detectors, are required to operate at very low temperatures. It follows that there is a need for lubrication at cryogenic temperatures under conditions of high vacuum. Indeed the vacuum conditions are more likely to be akin to UHV since cooled surfaces act as cryo-pumps and are thus capable of reducing the pressure of the local environment.

100 Apri l 90 Vol 23 No 2

E. W. Roberts--thin sofid lubricant films in space

Fig 5 Fabry-Perot interchange mechanism for ISO's Long Wavelength Spectrometer. Ball bearings within the motor and supporting the interchange wheel are lubricated with sputtered MoS2. The teeth on the interchange gear wheel are also coated with sputtered MoS2 (photo courtesy of Tom Patrick, Mullard Space Science Lab.)

Lubrication is needed not only to minimize wear and prevent seizure of moving parts but also to minimize the generation of frictional heat, since any heat generated within the spacecraft promotes evaporative loss of liquid helium upon which most spacecraft IR detectors rely for cooling.

Lubrication under in vacuo, cryogenic conditions is only practicable using solid lubricants. Fluid lubricants cannot be used because they solidify and become glass- like at temperatures well above the cryogenic range. Furthermore liquid cryogens cannot be employed for hydrodynamic lubrication since they are not sufficiently viscous to generate the necessary load carrying capa- bility.

For these reasons solid lubricants and, in particular, thin solid film lubricants have been examined as potential means of bringing about effective lubrication in spaceborne IR telescopes. To this end ball bearings lubricated with ion-plated lead and sputtered MoS2 have been torque tested in vacuum at temperatures as low as 20 K a°" 4~. The bearings in question were of type ED20 (bore 20 mm) and made from 52100 steel. Torque measurements were made on pairs of bearings of this type. Lubrication of the bearings was as follows:

a) films of sputtered MoS2 (0.5 Ixm in thickness) applied to raceways, balls and steel cage. b) 0.5 txm thick films of lead deposited by ion-plating onto raceways only; balls uncoated; cage made from leaded bronze. c) films of sputtered MoSz (0.5 I~m in thickness) applied to balls and raceways. Cage made from PTFE/ MoS2/glass fibre composite.

Each ball bearing pair, with the exception of pair (a), was run in vacuum for 1 million revolutions at room temperature. The temperature was then decreased to

achieve a bearing housing temperature of 18 K and the bearings rotated over a further 2 million revolutions. Bearings (a) were operated at cryogenic temperature only. The results of these tests are shown in Fig 6.

These results indicate that:

• Bearings lubricated solely by sputtered MoS2 main- tain their low torque performance at cryogenic temperatures.

• The torque of bearings lubricated with ion-plated lead is essentially unchanged at 20 K.

• MoS2-coated bearings fitted with PTFE composite cages gave low torques at room temperature but significantly higher torques at cryogenic tempera- tures.

It is encouraging to note that all lubrication systems tested were effective, albeit to different degrees, in providing lubrication over the full 2 million revolutions undertaken at cryogenic temperature.

It is planned that sputtered MoS2 be used to lubricate tribological components on a number of mechanisms on ESA's Infrared Space Observatory (ISO), including an interchange mechanism 42 (Fig 5), and a camera mechanism 43. Previously, in possibly the first recorded use of thin solid film lubrication for an in vacuo cryo- application, it had been demonstrated that ion-plated lead films (300 nm thickness) act as an effective bearing lubricant in a movable stop mechanism intended for the Space Infrared Experiment 44.

Atomic oxygen environment in low earth orbit

Atomic oxygen is the principal gaseous species present in low earth orbit. Whilst the pressure of the atomic oxygen is not high (less than 10 -7 torr) the flux incident upon an exposed and forward-facing surface can, as a result of the spacecraft's high velocity, be significant (about 1 monolayer s-l) . As a result of the spacecraft's speed the relative velocity of atomic O at impact with the spacecraft is high and is equivalent to the bombardment of a stationary surface with particles of approximate energy 5 eV 45.

Interactions of atomic O with solids under these conditions can cause chemical degradation leading to erosion of exposed material. Degradation can occur through oxidation, and erosion by sputtering or loss, through evaporation, of volatile oxides. Clearly, solid lubricants are at risk, particularly when in the form of thin films, since even a low erosion rate would cause their removal in a comparatively short time. The susceptibility of solid lubricants to attack by atomic O has been addressed by Leger and Dufrane 45. Table 2 summarizes the reaction efficiencies, in terms of volume of material lost per incident oxygen atom, of some selected tribo-materials.

Whilst the data available hitherto on solid lubricants are limited, it is clear from Table 2 that perfluorinated polymer lubricants, some soft metals, and epoxy- bonded lubricants will be affected.

Leger and Dufrane 45 have calculated the expected lifetimes of epoxy-based bonded solid lubricant films when exposed to a low earth orbit (LEO) environment. Assuming a reaction rate of 1.7×10 -24 cm 3 atom -~,

TRIBOLOGY INTERNATIONAL 101

E. W. Roberts--thin solid lubricant films in space

x10 -4

60

50

E Z

o" 40

~ 3o

20

10

Room temperature ,,= ...

T=293_+2K P< 10 -5 mbar

Cryogenic temperature

T (housing) = 18 + 1 K; T (shaft) = 35 + 5K p< 10-8 mbar

_1 -I

Preload = 38N Rotation rate=100rev/min; (measurements made at 1/2rev/min)

Solid lubricant

A • MoS2/PTFE - composite cage x Lead/lead - bronze cage • MoS2(A){not run at room temperature)

x

.x x / / % / -x--xjX- x/X x/X x/X

0 [ I I I I I 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0

Revolutions, millions

Fig 6 Mean torque of solid lubricated ball bearings operating at room temperature and at cryogenic temperature (in vacuo)

Table 2 React ion efficiencies of t r ibo-mater ie ls w i th a tomic oxygen in low earth orbit (selected f rom Reference 45)

M a t e r i a l R e a c t i o n e f f i c i e n c i e s ( x 10 -24 c m 3

a t o m - l )

P o l y s u l p h o n e 2.4 E p o x y 1.7 C a r b o n ( v a r i o u s f o r m s ) 0 . 9 - 1 . 7 P e r f l u o r i n a t e d p o l y m e r s < 0.5 ( T e f l o n TFE, FEP) S i l v e r h e a v i l y a t t a c k e d

an O-atom fluence of 1.5×1023 atoms cm -2 (on a forward-facing surface) and a film thickness of 2.5 I~m, they predict that the lubricant film would be either eroded away completely or rendered ineffective within 10 days.

To date, the most extensive study of atomic O effects on solid lubricants has been carried out on molybdenum disulphide46, 47. In these laboratory tests films of MoS2 produced by sputtering were exposed to a 1.5 eV source of atomic oxygen at a flux of 1017 O-atoms s -1 cm -2. Such exposure led to the formation of molybdenum oxides and the release of sulphur dioxide.

The oxides comprised MoO3 and, to a lesser extent, M002 and were restricted to a surface layer of 10 nm in thickness. It was further shown, by exposing MoS2 samples to atomic O of low (thermal) energy, that the ready growth of surface oxide was not a consequence of the high energy of the oxygen species but, rather, arose as a consequence of its atomic state.

In vacuo, pin/disc measurements made on MoS2 films before and after atomic-O exposure indicated that untreated films gave rise to friction coefficients of 0.03, whereas oxidized films conferred initial coefficients of 0.25 (Fig 7). The friction of oxidized samples decreased with repeated sliding such that values approaching 0.03 were obtained after about ten cycles. Recent Japanese data 48 are consistent with this pattern of tribological behaviour exhibited by MoS2 following irradiation with atomic oxygen.

The implications of the above observations with regard to the use of sputtered MoS2 in low earth applications would appear to be as follows. MoS2 films will oxidize upon exposure to a low earth orbit environment. The rate of oxidation will depend upon the location and orientation of the lubricated component relative to the spacecraft and the extent to which the lubricated surface is exposed. The highest oxidation rate will occur on forward-facing exposed surfaces, but even shielded surfaces will be prone to oxidation from scattered atomic oxygen. Tribological components enclosed in a fully sealed system will not be at risk.

102 Apr i l 90 Vol 23 No 2

E. W. Roberts--thin sofid lubricant films in space

0 . 2 5

0 . ;

• ~ 0 . 1 5

8 r- .9

0.1 t . LL

+. \

U H V

- - -B - - B e f o r e e x p o s u r e

- - + - - A f t e r e x p o s u r e

+ + 0.05

0 1 I I I l l l ~ l I I I I J i l l [ I i i i l l l i 10 100 1000

C y c l e s

Fig 7 In vacuo friction of sputtered MoS2 films before and after exposure to atomic oxygen 47

It is known that MoS2 films operated in humid air oxidize and that such films not only exhibit higher friction but also wear at a greater rate than occurs in vacuum t7. Thus, for example, the rate of wear of sputtered MoS2 in air of 50% RH increases a hundred- fold above that of the same film in high vacuum. Thus it is reasonable to assume that MoS2 films oxidized as a result of exposure to atomic O will exhibit higher friction and a higher rate of wear than in a non- oxidizing environment. The values of friction and wear will be determined by the rate of oxidation and the duty cycle of the exposed component.

Table 2 indicates that silver, a soft metal lubricant, is heavily attacked by atomic O. Again the resulting chemical product is an oxidized metal which is then lost by flaking and spallation 45. Indeed, any metal with a susceptibility to oxidation seems likely to suffer in similar fashion. For this reason thin films of lead would seem to be unsuitable lubricants. Gold, however, being relatively inert, is more likely to survive the hostile low earth orbit environment, and the use of thin gold films may well prove to be one of very few methods capable of providing adequate lubrication in the presence of high fluxes of atomic oxygen.

Organic compounds would appear to be particularly susceptible to atomic O-induced degradation 45. This susceptibility may prohibit the use of those organic compounds that are used as lubricants or as binders of solid lubricants. Additionally certain polymeric lubricants (e.g FEP Teflon) show a much enhanced reactivity to atomic O when exposed simultaneously to ultraviolet radiation 49.

Clearly there is much that has to be learnt about the ability of solid lubricants to withstand LEO environments. In view of the long-term requirements (up to 30 years) of programmes such as Space Station

TRIBOLOGY INTERNATIONAL

Freedom there will inevitably be created a strong demand for information of this nature.

Deep space environments

Mechanisms on long-term missions into deep space often remain dormant for some considerable time. In such cases there is concern regarding the ability of tribo-components to function correctly after protracted periods of inactivity. Exposure of thin solid film lubrication to vacuum environments for periods of several years should lead to no appreciable chemical degradation and therefore no detrimental effects in lubricating ability should occur.

Ground testing and storage

All components and mechanisms are subjected to some ground testing prior to, and during, spacecraft integration. Often, such testing is carried out in uncontrolled environments and can lead to the irrevoc- able degradation of solid lubricant films.

Thus MoS2 films will give relatively high friction and form oxides when run in moist air. Whilst the film is likely to recover its low friction properties in vacuum the durability of the film will be shortened to a degree commensurate with the amount of in-air running ~8. Components lubricated with thin films of MoS2 and lead (which also oxidizes) should therefore be tested either under thermal-vacuum conditions or in an inert atmosphere. Storage of components thus lubricated should similarly take place in an inert atmosphere to minimize film oxidation.

Future trends

Currently, considerable attention is being paid to the development of new, thin, solid lubricating films and the improvement of existing lubricant films. Many of these developments are highly relevant to space lubrication. Foremost in this respect are: the develop- ment of carbon-based films (diamond and diamond- like carbon films 5°'5~) and ion-beam mixing and compaction of thin films 52. The application of the latter technique to films of sputtered MoS2 has been shown to enhance film durabilities (by a factor five) without detracting from the film's low-friction propertiesSL The assessment of tribo-components lubricated with ion- modified films has yet to be carried out, but the pace and promise of these developments are such as to suggest the early insertion of this technology into forthcoming space programmes.

Acknowledgements

The author gratefully acknowledges the assistance of J. Cross (Los Alamos National Lab.), T. Patrick (Mullard Space Science Lab.); T. Spalvins (NASA Lewis Research Centre) and all colleagues at ESTL.

References 1. Savage R.It. Graphite lubrication. J. Appl. Phys. 1948, 19, 1

2. Roberts E.W. The tribology of sputtered molybdenum disul- phide. Proc. 1 Mech. E. Tribology-Friction, Lubrication and Wear, Fifty Years On, London, July 1987

103

E. W. Roberts-- th in sol id lubricant f i lms in space

3. Fusaro R.L. Tribological properties of polymer films and solid bodies in a vacuum environment. NASA TM 88966, 1987

4. Bowden F.P. and Tabor D. The friction and lubrication of solids. Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1958

5. Roberts E.W. Ultra-low-friction films of MoS2 for space applications. Proc. Int. Conf. Metallurgical Coatings, San Diego, 1989, Thin Solid Films, 1989, 181, 461--473

6. Sherbiney M.A. and Hailing J. Friction and wear of ion-plated soft metallic films. 1977, Wear 45, 211-220

7. Roberts E.W. and Price W.B. ln-vacuo, tribological properties of high-rate sputtered MoS2 applied to metal and ceramic substrates. MRS Symp. Proc. 140, 1989

8. Fusaro R.L. How to evaluate solid-lubricant films using a pin- on-disc tribometer. Lubrication Eng 1987, 43, 5, 330-338

9. McMurtrey E.L. Lubrication handbook for the space industry-Part A-solid lubricants. NASA TM-86556, 1985

10. Mattox D.M. Film deposition using accelerated ions. Electro- chemical Technology Sept/Oct, 1964, 295-298

11. Maissel L.I. and Glang R. (Eds) Handbook of thin film technology. McGraw-Hill, 1970

12. Todd M.J. and Stevens K.T. Frictional torque of angular contact ball bearings with different conformities. ESA TRIB/I Sept. 1980

13. Arnell R.D. The effects of speed, film thickness and substrate surface roughness on the friction and wear of soft metal films in ultrahigh vacuum. Thin Solid Films, 1978, 53, 333-341

14. Todd M.J. Spin division and estimation of Coulomb torque in angular contact ball bearings. Proc. l Mech. E. Tribology-Friction, Lubrication and Wear, Fifty Years On, London, July 1987

15. Gerkema J. Lead thin film lubrication Wear 1985, 102, 241

16. Spalvins T. Lubrication with sputtered MoS2 films. ASLE Trans. 1972, 14, (4) 267-274

17. Roberts E.W. Towards an optimised sputtered MoS2 lubricant film. 20th AMS, NASA Conference Publ. 2423, 1986

18. Roberts E.W. The lubricating properties of magnetron sputtered MoS2 ESA(ESTL)76, 1987

19. Buck V. A neglected parameter (water contamination) in sputtering of MoS2 films. Thin Solid Films, 1986, 139, 157

20. Buck V. Morphological properties of sputtered MoS2. Wear 1983, 91, 288

21. Fleisehauer P.D. and Bauer R. Chemical and structural effects on the lubrication properties of sputtered MoS2 films. Proc. ASLE Ann. Meeting, May 1987

22. Fleischauer P.D. Effects of crystallite orientation on environmen- tal stability and lubrication properties of sputtered MoS2 thin films. Aerospace Report No. ATR-82(8435)-l, March 1983

23. Roberts E.W. and Williams B.J. to be published

24. Spalvins T. Influence of various surface pretreatments on adherence of sputtered MoS2 to silver, gold, copper and bronze. NASA Tech. Note D-7169, 1973

25. Stupp B.C. Synergistic effects of metal co-sputtered with MoS2. Thin Solid Films 1981, 84, 257-266

26. Niederhauser P., Hintermaun H.E. and Maillat M. Moisture- resistant MoS2-based composite lubricant films. Thin Solid Films 1983, 108, 209-218

27. Spalvins T. NASA Tech. Memo. TM-X-71742, June 1975

28. Menoud C., Zeming G., Kocher H.R. and Hintermann H.E. Morphology and lifetime investigations of dry-lubricated MoS2- based composite films deposited by RF sputtering. IPAT '87, Brighton, UK, May 1987

29. Kuwano H. and Nagai K. J. Vac. Sci. Tech. 1986, A4, 2993

30. Nishimura M. Tribological problems in the space development

in Japan. JSME Int. J. Series HI, 1988, 31, 4

31. Spalvins T. Friction characteristics and lubrication with sputtered solid films. Proc. 2nd German Sputtering School, MRS-spon- sored, Munich, May 1971

32. Todd M. J. and Parker K. Giotto's antenna de-spin mechanism: its lubrication and thermal vacuum performance. Proc. 21st Aerospace Mechanisms Symp., NASA Conf. Proc. 2470, 1987

33. Sbeppard S. Design and development of an advanced solar array drive mechanism. Proc. 1st European Space Mechanisms and Tribology Symposium, ESA-SP •96, 1983, 19-26

34. Thomas A., Garnham A.L. and Todd M.J. Current status of lead lubrication of ball bearings. Proc. 2nd Space Tribology Workshop, ESA SP-158, Risley, 1980

35. Todd M.J. Models for steady state and non-steady Coulomb torque in ball bearings. Proc, 3rd European Space Mechanisms & Tribology Symposium, Madrid, ESA-SP 279, 1987

36. Sbeppard J.S. Some tribological problems in spacecraft. 1 Mech. E Seminar-Tribology in Aerospace and its relation to other industries, London, January 1985

37. Leblanc J.M. Speed regulator for space appendages deployment. Proc. 2nd European Space Mechanisms & Tribology Symposium, ESA-SP-231, Meersburg, 1985, 105-111

38. Rowntree R.A. and Vine M.K. Thin solid films for satellite gears. Proc. 3rd European Space Mechanisms and Tribology Symposium, ESA-SP-279, Madrid, 1987

39. Robbins E.J. Tribology tests for satellite application: simulation of the space environment. Proc. 1st European Space Tribology Symposium, ESA-SP 111, Frascati, 1975, 101-113

40. Gould S.G. and Roberts E.W. The in-vacuo torque performance of dry-lubricated ball bearings at cryogenic temperatures. NASA CP-3032, May 1989, 319

41. Gould S.G. and Roberts E.W. The performance of PTFE, lead and MoS2 as lubricant films for ball bearings operating in vacuum at 20K. Proc. 4th ESMA TS, Cannes, 1989

42. Patrick T.J. et al. Further development of the cryogenic Fabry- Perot interchange mechanism for ISO LWS. Proc. 4th ESMATS, Cannes, 1989

43. Luciano G. Cryogenic mechanism of ISO camera. Proc. 3rd European Space Mechanisms and Tribology Symposium, ESA SP-279, Dec. 1987

44. Tweedt R.E. and Poulsen R.N. A movable stop mechanism for the SIRE telescope. Proc. 16th AMS, NASA Conference Publ. 2221, 1982

45. Leger L.J. and Dufrane K. Space station lubrication consider- ations. Proc. 21st AMS, NASA Conf. Publ. 2470, 1987

46. Martin J.A., Cross J.B. and Pope L.E. MoS2 interactions with 1.5 eV atomic oxygen. In New Materials Approach to Tribology: Theory and Applications, vol. 140, Materials Research Society, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, 1989

47. Cross J.B., Martin J.A., Pope L.E. and Koontz S.L. Atomic oxygen-MoS 2 chemical interactions. Proc. Int. Conf. Metallurgi- cal Coatings, San Diego, CA, April 1989

48. Aita M. et al. Investigations of tribological characteristics of MoS2 films in space environment. Proc. 4th ESMATS, Cannes, Oct. 1989

49. Koontz S., Leger L., Albyn K. and Cross J. The role of vacuum ultraviolet radiation in the atomic oxygen reactivity of candidate space station materials. Submitted to J. Spacecraft Rockets

50. Gardos M.N. and Ravi K.V. Tribological behaviour of CVD diamond films. Proc. Electrochemical Soc., L.A., May 1989

51. Miyake S., Takahashi S., Watanabe I. and Yoshihara H. ASLE Trans., 1987, 30, 1221

52. Kobs K., Dimigen H., Hubsch H., Tolle H.J., Leutenecker R. and Ryssel H. Enhanced endurance life of sputtered MoS2 films on steel by ion beam mixing. Mat. ScL Engng., 1987, 90

104 April 90 Vol 23 No 2

all articles will be uesed/Transfer film evolution and its role in promoting ultra-low wear.pdf

Wear 297 (2013) 1095–1102

Contents lists available at SciVerse ScienceDirect

Wear

0043-16

http://d

n Corr

E-m

journal homepage: www.elsevier.com/locate/wear

Transfer film evolution and its role in promoting ultra-low wear of a PTFE nanocomposite

J. Ye, H.S. Khare, D.L. Burris n

Department of Mechanical Engineering, University of Delaware, Newark, DE, United States

a r t i c l e i n f o

Article history:

Received 23 July 2012

Received in revised form

23 November 2012

Accepted 6 December 2012 Available online 19 December 2012

Keywords:

Solid lubricant

Polymer nanocomposite

Transfer film

Low wear

PTFE

48/$ - see front matter & 2012 Elsevier B.V. A

x.doi.org/10.1016/j.wear.2012.12.002

esponding author. Tel.: þ1 302 831 2006. ail address: dlburris@udel.edu (D.L. Burris).

a b s t r a c t

Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) is an important solid lubricant with an unusually high wear rate. For a

half-century, fillers have been used to reduce PTFE wear by 4100� with 410% loading through hypothesized mechanisms involving mechanical load support, crack arresting, and transfer film

adhesion. More recently it was discovered that specific nanoparticles provide a unique nanoscale

reinforcement mechanism enabling unprecedented wear reductions of 10,000� with as little as 0.1% nano-fillers. Although the mechanisms responsible for this dramatic improvement remain unclear,

there is substantial evidence that the transfer film plays a critical role. This paper uses interrupted

microscopy measurements to investigate the evolution of transfer film development for an ultra-low

wear PTFE nanocomposite. The run-in wear rates were similar to those of more traditional PTFE

composites and transfer films consisted of large plate-like debris. Although the run-in wear rate and

debris size decreased monotonically with distance, the run-in transfer films were removed each cycle.

Detectible debris vanished and wear rates approached zero at an abrupt transition. During this ultra-

low wear transition period, nanoscale and oxidized fragments of PTFE were transferred to the

counterface. Most of these fragments persisted for the duration of the test and initiated the transfer

film by progressively scavenging trace material from the bulk, growing into small islands, and merging

with neighboring islands. The results of this study reflect a complex interplay involving elements of

transfer film adhesion, chemistry, debris morphology, and mechanics.

& 2012 Elsevier B.V. All rights reserved.

1. Introduction

Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) is an important solid lubricant with a unique combination of beneficial frictional, thermal, and chemical properties. At sliding speeds well below 5 mm/s, PTFE friction coefficients are low (m�0.05) and wear rates are moder- ate (k�10�5 mm3/N m) [1–3]. The low friction of PTFE is often associated with low adhesion, but Makinson and Tabor [2] rejected this hypothesis based on the observation of molecularly thin, highly oriented, and strongly adhered transfer films follow- ing low friction sliding. They concluded that low friction results from easy shear of PTFE lamellae at low shear rates. At more typical speeds above 50 mm/s, friction coefficients are moderate (m¼0.15–0.3), wear rates are high (k�10�3 mm3/N m), and transfer films consist of large platelets of poorly adhered debris fragments [2,4,5].

The addition of 20–50 wt% microscale fillers (e.g. glass fiber, carbon fiber, bronze particles) can reduce PTFE wear rates by 4100 X at higher speeds [6–11]. However, large hard fillers can

ll rights reserved.

abrade protective transfer films which limits wear resistance. Nano-fillers have been studied for their potential to reduce wear without abrading the beneficial transfer film. Although an initial study by Tanaka and Kawakami indicated that nano-fillers were ineffective fillers because they were too small to disrupt the generation of large-scale debris [10], a series of studies from 2001 to 2003 showed that nanoscale ZnO, SWCNT’s, and Al2O3 reduced wear rates by 4100� at a fraction of the typical filler loading (5–10 wt%) [12–14]. In 2006, Burris and Sawyer [15] discovered a unique PTFE nanocomposite which demonstrated 41000� reductions in wear rates with o1% filler loading. This change in wear rate relative to the filler loading remains unprecedented in the field of tribological polymer nanocomposites today [16]. As a result, this particular material has been the subject of numerous follow-up studies of nanoscale polymer reinforcement mechanisms [17–23].

The role of the filler in preventing wear of PTFE and other polymer composites remains an important topic of debate. Blanchet and Kennedy [24] describe two general wear rate determining factors for PTFE composites: (1) the prevention of initial removal of material from the composite; (2) the prevention of the secondary removal of material from the transfer film. Lancaster proposed that fillers reduce primary wear of the matrix

J. Ye et al. / Wear 297 (2013) 1095–11021096

by preferentially supporting the normal force [25]. Briscoe [26] proposed that fillers reduce secondary removal by inducing polymer degradation which increases adhesion between the transfer film and the counterface. Ricklin [27], Tanaka et al. [10], and Bahadur and Tabor [28] suggested similar mechanisms of primary wear reduction involving the prevention of large-scale debris generation. Blanchet and Kennedy supported this hypothesis and determined that the specific mechanism of debris size reduction involved the interrup- tion of subsurface crack propagation [29]. Bahadur and Gong [30] made two overarching observations in reviewing the literature: (1) PTFE composite wear rate and filler hardness do not correlate as would be expected for the load support hypothesis; (2) wear rate is strongly dependent on filler chemistry which conflicts with the purely mechanical debris size regulation hypotheses. They sup- ported Briscoe’s hypothesis but concluded that filler decomposition rather than polymer degradation increases bonding to the counter- face [30]. Gong et al. [31] and Blanchet et al. [24] showed that fillers had no effect on the chemistry at the counterface and independently concluded that the wear behavior is independent of counterface adhesion. Gong et al. [32] suggested that fillers served to improve transfer film cohesion and therefore reduce secondary wear by arresting failure within the transfer film. Blanchet et al. [24] note that severe wear of PTFE only occurs at high speeds and argues that the primary role of the filler must be most closely related to the prevention of primary removal [4,27,28]; this hypothesis is sup- ported by two independent observations that pre-deposited low wear transfer films do not reduce the wear rate of high wear PTFE- based materials [28,33].

Despite opposing viewpoints about the specific wear reducing roles of filler decomposition, polymer degradation, transfer film adhesion, and transfer film cohesion, there is a broad agreement that transfer films play a very important role in the tribology of polymers. Thin and uniform transfer films always accompany low wear sliding of polymers and transfer film adhesion arguments persist today as a causative explanation for low wear rates [34–36]. The purpose of the present study is to elucidate the relationships between wear rate, debris size, and transfer film morphology via direct in situ observations of debris generation and transfer film formation. A well-documented PTFE-alumina nanocomposite was chosen as a model of effective reinforcement due to its exceptional wear reduction with low filler loading [17–20].

2. Materials and methods

2.1. Materials

The PTFE nanocomposite materials used in this study replicate, as closely as possible, the preparation conditions from existing literature [15,17–20,37]. The polymer resin is TeflonTM 7C from DuPont (�30 mm diameter particles). The alpha phase aluminum oxide nanoparticles had a reported diameter range of 27–43 nm and were acquired from Nanostructured & Amorphous Materials Inc.1

2.2. Sample preparation

Aluminum oxide nanoparticles and polytetrafluoroethylene resin were weighed to 0.5 g and 9.5 g, respectively, combined in

1 It is important to note that only particular alpha phase alumina particles

activate the ultra-low wear response of interest in this paper. The initiating

mechanism likely involves surface-chemistry (and history) dependent interactions

between particle and polymer. Prior studies used 27–43 nm particle from Alfa

Aesar which are no longer available. Efforts to locate a suitable surrogate

demonstrated wide variability in wear rates between suppliers. The particles in

this study exhibited the same wear response and have the same reported

size range.

a PET container of 10 times the batch volume and pre-mixed by hand shaking for 60 s. The powder ensemble was suspended in 80 mL of anhydrous ethanol which wets PTFE reasonable well [38]. An ultrasonic horn (Sonic Ruptor 400, OMNI International) was pulsed with a 50% duty cycle of 400 W for 5 min. Immedi- ately after ultrasonication, the suspension was transferred to a petri dish placed within a heated vacuum desiccator. Two hours of rough vacuum drying at 110 1C removed the ethanol and prepared the dispersed nanocomposite resin for subsequent compression molding. The dry powder was cold pressed into a 25 mm long, 12.5 mm diameter cylinder using a cylindrical die. Each preform was held at a pressure of 170 MPa for 20 min to eliminate porosity. Following cold compaction, samples were held at 6 MPa pressure and heated to 365 1C at 120 1C per hour, held for 3 h, and cooled at the same rate.

2.3. Wear testing

Prior to testing, each cylindrical specimen was machined into a pin of 6.4�6.4 mm testing cross-section and 12 mm height. Grade 304 stainless steel plates (38�25 mm) with an average surface roughness of 20 nm (Ra) were used as counterfaces. Wear tests were conducted on the linear reciprocating pin-on-flat tribometer shown in Fig. 1; the tribometer is nominally identical to those reported in previous studies [15,37]. Prior to testing, the sample was preconditioned with 100 mm of sliding at 0.7 MPa of pressure against 600 grit SiC paper to create a uniform pressure distribution for testing. During the test, the applied normal force was 250 N, the contact pressure was 6.4 MPa, the reciprocating length (one direc- tion) was 25.4 mm, and the sliding speed was 50 mm/s. Initial length and mass measurements were used to determine sample density. Mass measurements were then used to quantify mass loss; the volume loss is the ratio of mass loss and density. Friction coefficients, wear rates, and uncertainties were determined using previously described methods [39–41].

Tests were interrupted periodically for analysis. Following interruption, the sample was removed from the mounting fixture and weighed on a balance with a resolution of 0.01 mg. The counterface was removed and located on a kinematic mount beneath a Nikon microscope with a digital camera. Images were captured at a single location in the center of the counterface to follow the morphological evolution of the transfer film. The primary test was interrupted every few cycles to capture the details of the run-in process; interruption intervals increased as the distance between distinct events at the interface increased. Repeat tests with three independent samples were conducted with less frequent interruptions to determine repeatability and the effects of test interruption interval on the results.

3. Results

3.1. Wear behavior of a-aluminum oxide PTFE nanocomposites

This PTFE nanocomposite material is known to exhibit a transient period of moderate wear followed by a transition to a low steady state wear rate [15]. A mass loss measurement taken after 0.2 m revealed an initial wear rate of k¼4�10�4 mm3/N m. This high initial wear rate suggests that the direct mechanical reinforcement effect of the nanoparticles (e.g. preferential load support, crazing, crack arresting) is initially limited. Wear volume is plotted as a function of sliding distance for the first 300 m of the primary test in Fig. 2a. There is an obvious run-in period during the first 20 m of sliding where the wear rate decreases monotonically with distance. The wear rate at the end of the run- in period is typical of other PTFE composites and nanocomposites

J. Ye et al. / Wear 297 (2013) 1095–1102 1097

at k¼6�10�6mm3/N m. An abrupt transition in wear rate occurred at 20 m and the mass loss over the next 145 m was at the resolution of the scale (10 mg). This nearly zero-wear period is referred to here as the transition period. This behavior is repea- table as nearly identical features were observed in the five preliminary measurements used to develop the experimental protocols for this paper (preliminary results not shown). The wear increased at 165 m and the system reached steady-state at a wear rate of k¼2�10�7 mm3/N m shortly thereafter.

Comparative plots of friction coefficient and wear volume for primary and repeat tests are shown in Fig. 2b. The three repeat tests exhibit similar trends in their evolutions of friction coefficient and wear rate indicating that the general tribological features are characteristics of this system. A comparison between primary and repeat test results indicates that the test interruptions had a significant friction reducing effect. Oxidation accompanies decreased

Fig. 1. Pin on flat tribometer used for friction and wear testing. A flat pin of the bulk nanocomposite is loaded (6.3 MPa, 250 N) against a linearly reciprocating

304 stainless steel counterface with an average roughness of Ra¼20 nm. A six- channel load cell is used to measure normal and frictional forces during the test.

The sliding speed is 50.8 mm/s and the reciprocation cycle is 50.8 mm long.

Fig. 2. (a) Wear volume versus sliding distance for the first 300 m of the sliding expe monotonically over the next 20 m; this is referred to here as the run-in phase. The mass

The transition phase is highlighted by black data labels (a). (b) Friction coefficient and w

frequency interruptions and repeat measurements with more typical interruption frequ

Friction coefficient was reduced by high interruption frequency while the wear behavi

wear and leads to increased friction as shown in the discussion. A series of follow-up experiments suggested that ambient moisture passivates the oxidized surfaces during interruptions and subse- quently reduces friction. The wear rate on the other hand was unaffected by the high frequency test interruptions. Although the wear response of this material has not been documented previously at this level of detail, the general run-in and steady-state responses are consistent with the results in the literature. The characteristic features of this tribo-system are discussed in the context of transfer film evolution in the following sections.

3.2. Transfer film development

In situ observations of the transfer film evolution revealed three unique transfer film morphologies; these are used to define the run-in, transition, and steady-state sliding periods. Represen- tative optical images of the transfer film in each period are shown in Fig. 3.

During the high wear run-in period, the transfer film comprises large plate-like debris not unlike those characterizing the dela- mination wear of PTFE and some of its composites. Plates have in-plane dimensions of 100–500 mm as compared to 1–5 mm for neat PTFE suggesting that the nanoparticles do compartmentalize damage after only a few meters of sliding. In the transition period, the transfer film is extremely thin and shows no evidence of loosely adhered debris. In the low wear steady-state period, the transfer film has an island-like morphology.

3.3. Run-in period

Images of the transfer film during the run-in period are shown in Fig. 4 after 2.4, 4.6, 6.1, and 8.1 m of sliding. After 4.6 m of sliding, the transfer film consists of large plate-like debris showing evi- dence of tearing and fibrillation at the debris edges. In some cases, especially early in the test, debris were layered (left side, 2.4 m). Transferred material only rarely remained for multiple passes; therefore, the transfer film reflects the wear debris. During this period, the debris were generated, deformed by the contact, left behind, removed, and replenished. Debris size and wear rate decreased as distance increased. This data supports a previous

riment. The initial wear rate was k¼4�10�4 mm3/N m. The wear rate decreased loss in the following transition phase was at the 10 mg resolution limit of the scale. ear volume plotted versus sliding distance for the primary measurement with high

ency (800 m of sliding). At steady-state, the wear rate was k¼2�10�7 mm3/N m. or was nominally unaffected.

Fig. 3. (a) Representative images of the transfer film morphology for the run-in, transition, and steady-state phases. The stainless counterface appears bright. (b) Wear volume is plotted versus distance for the first 800 m of sliding. The images correspond to the black data labels. Each image has the scale shown.

Fig. 4. (a) Images showing the transfer film development at a single location during the run in period; (b) wear volume versus distance for the first 800 m. Images correspond to the black data labels.

J. Ye et al. / Wear 297 (2013) 1095–11021098

hypothesis that reduced debris size causes transfer film thinning [33]. It is not clear, however, to what extent thin transfer films affect debris size; clearly there is an opportunity for positive feedback between reduced film thickness and reduced debris size. At 8.1 m, debris within the film were as small as a few microns and wear rates are similar to those of more typical PTFE composite and nanocomposite materials.

3.4. Transition period

Images of the transfer film during the transition period are shown in Fig. 5. The transition period is characterized by the absence of the loose debris characterizing the run-in transfer film. The wear rate abruptly decreased in the transition period and maintained a value of k¼1.2�10�8 mm3/N m 7k¼2.4�10�7 mm3/N m.

Fig. 5. (a) Representative images of the transfer film morphology during the transition period. Higher resolution imaging reveals that the film consists of discrete regions of transferred material. AFM imaging reveals that the regions have submicron lateral dimensions and are 5–10 nm thick. (b) Wear volume versus distance for the first

800 m. Images correspond to the black data labels.

J. Ye et al. / Wear 297 (2013) 1095–1102 1099

Electron and atomic force microscopy revealed that the film com- prises discrete regions of transferred material with 100–1000 nm width and 5–10 nm height, respectively; we call these regions seeds because they appear to nucleate the transfer film. In stark contrast to the single cycle residence time of transferred material in the run-in period, the residence time of a seed appears to be the length of the test with seed removal being a rare event. The film darkened over time due to an increase in the size and number density of the seeds.

3.5. Steady-state period

Images of the transfer film during the steady state period are shown in Fig. 6. At 172 m, a thick streaked transfer film compris- ing small islands with lateral dimensions of �1–20 mm was deposited suddenly. Interestingly, this initial event occurred in the absence of detectable mass loss (163 m and 172 m, Fig. 5). However, this thicker film appeared to initiate the transition to steady state as significant mass loss was observed on the next measurement (178 m, Fig. 5). The wear rate remained steady for the remainder of the test at 2�10�7 mm3/N m, a value that is an order of magnitude or more lower than that of a typical PTFE composite or nanocomposite at the same conditions. These films were tenacious, persisting for the entire test in most areas. At 525 m of sliding, the film covered a larger fraction of the view field and exhibited an island-like morphology with islands being in the 20–50 mm range. At 800 m the island size and density increased. The transfer film was nearly continuous at 5600 m.

The details of the steady-state transfer film development process are illustrated in Fig. 7. Initiating seeds and the beginnings of the transfer film are visible at 485 m. At 505 m, the seeds remained well adhered and enlarged in some cases. At 515 m, the growth process continued, clearly distinguishing the evolution in the steady-state phase as a nucleation and growth process as opposed to the direct debris deposition process characterizing the run-in phase. At 536 m the growing seeds merge into a single island. These islands have very long residence times; they remain well adhered, grow with distance,

connect with other islands, and eventually form a continuous transfer film as shown in Fig. 6a.

4. Discussion

The high initial wear rates suggest that 2.5% nanoparticles provides negligible preferential load support [42] and debris size regulation [10,28,29]. Additionally, transfer films were removed by each pass of the pin which suggests that wear rate was unaffected by any potential benefits of improved transfer film adhesion [26,30] or cohesion [32]. Energy dispersive x-ray spectroscopy (EDX) and nano-indentation measurements (Fig. 8) showed that the composi- tion and mechanical properties of the run-in transfer film were indistinguishable from those of the bulk. The wear rate and debris size decreased monotonically with increased sliding distance in the run-in phase (Fig. 4) despite the fact that the transfer film was completely removed and replenished with each pass. Therefore, the reduction in wear with increased sliding was due to a reduction in primary removal (reduced debris size) not to a reduction in secondary removal (transfer film adhesion and cohesion). Interest- ingly, debris regulation and the responsible properties improved over time. Compact tensile tests (unpublished) have shown that these low wear PTFE nanocomposites have a unique fibrillation response to stress concentration at a sharp crack (neat PTFE blunts but doesn’t fibrillate). Extensive fibrillation has also been observed on worn pins and transfer films [16,21,33]. Easy fibrillation at subsurface crack tips may interrupt crack propagation, substantially change the mechanical properties of the near surface polymer, and improve debris size regulation with increased sliding distance. The lack of oxidation and poor residence time of run-in transfer films suggest that the nanoparticles did not directly induce polymer degradation [30], enhance counterface adhesion [26,30], or enhance wear resistance through transfer film cohesion [31,32].

The transition period is characterized by nanoscale debris frag- ments which appear to nucleate the transfer film; unlike run-in

Fig. 6. (a) Representative images of the transfer film morphology during the steady state period. (b) Wear volume versus distance. Images correspond to the black data labels.

Fig. 7. (a) Images showing the ‘‘seed-growing’’ process for one island within the transfer film; (b) corresponding data points on the wear curve.

J. Ye et al. / Wear 297 (2013) 1095–11021100

Fig. 8. (a) Images showing transfer film’s characteristic feature at different periods; (b) EDX analysis of the oxygen and aluminum content at different stages. The aluminum reflects filler contributions while oxygen reflects de-fluorination and oxidation of the PTFE. (c) Film hardness at different stages measured using atomic force

microscopy (AFM). Hardness was calculated as force over projected contact area. The bulk nanocomposite is shown for reference. Each data set contains at least 15

independent measurements and error bars represent statistical 95% confidence intervals. There are significant increases in oxidation and hardness during the test

(substrate effects were present during transition hardness measurements and artificially increased the magnitude).

J. Ye et al. / Wear 297 (2013) 1095–1102 1101

films, transition films were extremely well adhered. EDX results show little evidence of aluminum which suggests that filler accu- mulation and preferential load support were not responsible for the gradual reduction in wear or the abrupt transition to low wear [43]. Further, it shows that alumina was not directly involved in anchor- ing the seeds to the counterface. Rather, EDX (Fig. 8b) demonstrates that the PTFE-rich transition film is highly oxidized in accordance with Briscoe’s transfer film adhesion hypothesis. However, given the lack of oxidation following sintering at 362 1C and high wear sliding, it can be concluded that the alumina nanoparticles did not directly induce polymer degradation. Prior XPS studies of this system have demonstrated de-fluorination, conjugation, and oxidation of PTFE during low wear sliding. The results consistently suggest that the residence time of the interface becomes sufficiently long (due to ultra-low wear rates) that frictional energy initiates the degradation process; this is interesting given the low temperatures involved and the notable inertness of the polymer. Polymer degradation promotes adhesion while transfer film continuity and thinness reduces the mechanical interaction with the pin. The results suggest that debris size, transfer film uniformity, and residence time feedback positively to initiate the abrupt decrease in wear rate and the increase in transfer film residence time. At steady state, the transfer film remains extremely stable, highly oxidized, and harder than the parent nanocomposite. A significant increase in aluminum content suggests accumulation of the filler [43]. While the role of filler accumulation is unclear, it does not appear to be a primary mechanism of wear reduction for this system.

Thin continuous transfer films consistently accompany low wear sliding of polymers. Previous studies have shown that the wear rate correlates strongly with transfer film thickness [37,44]. One of the greatest remaining questions is whether thin well-adhered transfer films are the cause of low wear or the consequence of low wear. The

results of this study show that there is a coupling of debris size and transfer film morphology but they provide little direct insight into the cause and effect relationship leading to the transition to low wear. One clue comes from the fact that the transfer film accumulated mass while the pin lost mass at steady-state. Thus, primary wear occurs with or without secondary wear; this explains the observation that pre-deposited low wear transfer films do not reduce the wear rate of unfilled PTFE or high wear nanocomposites [28,33]. We interrupted the steady state test and replaced the worn pin with a fresh pin. Interestingly, the presence of the low wear transfer film actually increased the initial wear rate and the volume lost before reaching steady state. Thus, the low wear transfer film is insufficient for low wear in agreement with observations from Bahadur and Tabor [28] and Burris et al. [33]. Next, a worn pin was slid against a fresh counterface to determine if the transfer film is necessary to sustain low wear. The initial wear rate was 100� lower (2�10�6

mm3/N m) and quickly dropped another order of magnitude once the transfer film reformed to restore steady-state conditions. Thus, while low wear transfer films are necessary for low wear sliding, the mechanics of the near surface region and the regula- tion of debris are primarily responsible for ultra-low wear rates in this material system.

5. Conclusion

1.

Three distinct transfer film morphologies define the sliding regimes and wear response of an ultra-low wear PTFE nano- composite: run-in, transition, and steady state.

2.

In the run-in period, debris are chemically and mechanically identical to the bulk. They are generated, transferred, and quickly removed from the counterface. Debris size, transfer

J. Ye et al. / Wear 297 (2013) 1095–11021102

film thickness, and wear rate decrease monotonically despite poor adhesion and residence time of transfer films.

3.

The transition period is denoted by the sudden absence of gross mass loss and poorly adhered debris, and the presence of a transfer film comprising 20 nm thick seeds of highly oxidized PTFE with long residence times. The transition period appears to begin at a point when debris size and adhesion are sufficient to survive multiple passes of the pin without removal.

4.

The steady state period begins with the deposition of small islands of oxidized debris (�1 mm in diameter). These islands are persistent and grow radially with increased sliding by progressively scavenging material from the bulk. Over time, individual islands meet, merge, and form a continuous transfer film.

5.

The filler does not play a direct role in promoting adhesion of the transfer film. The filler appears to change the mechanical response of the polymer to concentrated stresses. A progres- sive reduction in debris size reduces the wear rate and increases residence times of the surfaces. Debris size, resi- dence times of surfaces, polymer degradation, and adhesion are interrelated.

6.

The transfer film does not cause low wear; it evolves in response to the wear debris morphology and chemistry.

Acknowledgments

The authors gratefully acknowledge financial support from the AFOSR (YIP FA9550-10-1–0295) for financial support of this work.

References

[1] D. Breiby, et al., Structural surprises in friction-deposited films of poly(tetra- fluoroethylene), Macromolecules 38 (6) (2005) 2383–2390.

[2] K. Makinson, D. Tabor, The friction and transfer of polytetrafluoroethylene, Proceedings of the Royal Society of London Series A 281 (1384) (August 1964) 49–61.

[3] C. Pooley, D. Tabor, Friction and molecular structure – behavior of some thermoplastics, Proceedings of the Royal Society of London Series A: Math- ematical and Physical Sciences 329 (1578) (1972) 251–274.

[4] T.A. Blanchet, F.E. Kennedy, Sliding wear mechanism of polytetrafluoroethy- lene (PTFE) and PTFE composites, Wear 153 (1) (1992) 229–243.

[5] K. Tanaka, Y. Uchiyama, S. Toyooka, The mechanism of wear of polytetra- fluoroethylene, Wear 23 (2) (1973) 153–172.

[6] S. Bahadur, D. Tabor, The wear of filled polytetrafluoroethylene, Wear 98 (1–3) (1984) 1–13.

[7] J. Khedkar, I. Negulescu, E. Meletis, Sliding wear behavior of PTFE composites, Wear 252 (5–6) (2002) 361–369.

[8] B. Menzel, T. Blanchet, Effect of particle size and volume fraction of irradiated FEP filler on the transfer wear of PTFE, Lubrication Engineering 58 (9) (2002) 29–35.

[9] N. Sung, N. Suh, Effect of fiber orientation on friction and wear of fiber reinforced polymeric composites, Wear 53 (1) (1979) 129–141.

[10] K. Tanaka, S. Kawakami, Effect of various fillers on the friction and wear of polytetrafluoroethylene-based composites, Wear 79 (2) (1982) 221–234.

[11] T. Blanchet, Y. Peng, Wear resistant irradiated FEP unirradiated PTFE composites, Wear 214 (2) (1998) 186–191.

[12] W. Chen, et al., Tribological behavior of carbon-nanotube-filled PTFE compo- sites, Tribology Letters 15 (3) (2003) 275–278.

[13] F. Li, et al., The friction and wear characteristics of nanometer ZnO filled polytetrafluoroethylene, Wear 249 (10–11) (2001) 877–882.

[14] W. Sawyer, et al., A study on the friction and wear behavior of PTFE filled with alumina nanoparticles, Wear 254 (5–6) (2003) 573–580.

[15] D. Burris, W. Sawyer, Improved wear resistance in alumina-PTFE nanocom- posites with irregular shaped nanoparticles, Wear 260 (7–8) (2006) 915–918.

[16] D.L. Burris, et al., Polymeric nanocomposites for tribological applications, Macromolecular Materials and Engineering 292 (4) (2007) 387–402.

[17] S.S. Kandanur, et al., Suppression of wear in graphene polymer composites,

Carbon 50 (9) (2012) 3178–3183. [18] S. McElwain, et al., Effect of particle size on the wear resistance of alumina-

filled PTFE micro- and nanocomposites, Tribology Transactions 51 (3) (2008) 247–253.

[19] D.L. Burris, et al., A route to wear resistant PTFE via trace loadings of functionalized nanofillers, Wear 267 (1–4) (2009) 653–660.

[20] B.A. Krick, et al., Environmental dependence of ultra-low wear behavior of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and alumina composites suggests tribochem- ical mechanisms, Tribology International (2012) 42–4651 (2012) 42–46.

[21] S.E. McElwain, Wear Resistant PTFE Composites via Nano-Scale Particles, Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, Troy, NY, 2006.

[22] D.L. Burris, Effects of nanoparticles on the wear resistance of polytetrafluor- oethylene, Mechanical Engineering, University of Florida, Gainesville, FL,

2007. [23] S.S. Kandanur, The role of filler size & content and countersurface roughness

in the wear resistance of alumina-PTFE nano-composites, Rensselaer Poly- technic Institute, Troy, NY, 2010.

[24] T. Blanchet, F. Kennedy, D. Jayne, XPS analysis of the effect of fillers on PTFE transfer film development in sliding contacts, Tribology Transactions 36 (4) (1993) 535–544.

[25] J.K. Lancaster, Polymer-based bearing materials – role of fillers and fiber reinforcement in wear, wear 22 (3) (1972) 412–413.

[26] B. Briscoe, Wear of polymers – an essay on fundamental-aspects, Tribology International 14 (4) (1981) 231–243.

[27] S. Ricklin, Review of design parameters for filled PTFE bearing materials, Lubrication Engineering 33 (9) (1977) 487–490.

[28] S. Bahadur, D. Tabor, The wear of filled polytetrafluoroethylene, Wear 98 (1984) 1–13.

[29] T. Blanchet, F. Kennedy, Sliding wear mechanism of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) and PTFE composites, Wear 153 (1) (1992) 229–243.

[30] S. Bahadur, D. Gong, The action of fillers in the modification of the tribological behavior of polymers, Wear 158 (1–2) (1992) 41–59.

[31] D. Gong, Q. Xue, H. Wang, ESCA study on tribochemical characteristics of filled PTFE, Wear 148 (1) (1991) 161–169.

[32] D. Gong, Q.J. Xue, H.L. Wang, Physical models of adhesive wear of polytetra- fluoroethylene and its composites, Wear 147 (1) (1991) 9–24.

[33] D.L. Burris, et al., Polytetrafluoroethylene matrix nanocomposites for tribo- logical applications, in: K. Friedrich, A.K. Schlarb (Eds.), Tribology of poly- meric nanocomposites, 2010, pp. 403–438.

[34] S. Bahadur, C. Sunkara, Effect of transfer film structure, composition and bonding on the tribological behavior of polyphenylene sulfide filled with

nano particles of TiO2, ZnO, CuO and SiC, Wear 258 (9) (2005) 1411–1421. [35] M.H. Cho, S. Bahadur, A.K. Pogosian, Friction and wear studies using Taguchi

method on polyphenylene sulfide filled with a complex mixture of MoS2, Al2O3, and other compounds, Wear 258 (11–12) (2005) 1825–1835.

[36] A. Dasari, Z.Z. Yu, Y.W. Mai, Fundamental aspects and recent progress on wear/scratch damage in polymer nanocomposites, Materials Science and Engineering R: Reports 63 (2) (2009) 31–80.

[37] D. Burris, W. Sawyer, Tribological sensitivity of PTFE/alumina nanocompo- sites to a range of traditional surface finishes, Tribology Transactions 48 (2)

(2005) 147–153. [38] L.X. Shi, et al., Wetting and evaporation behaviors of water–ethanol sessile

drops on PTFE surfaces, Surface and Interface Analysis 41 (12-13) (2009) 951–955.

[39] D.L. Burris, W.G. Sawyer, Measurement uncertainties in wear rates, Tribology Letters 36 (1) (2009) 81–87.

[40] D.L. Burris, W.G. Sawyer, Addressing practical challenges of low friction coefficient measurements, Tribology Letters 35 (1) (2009) 17–23.

[41] T. Schmitz, et al., The difficulty of measuring low friction: uncertainty

analysis for friction coefficient measurements, Journal of Tribology – Trans- actions of the ASME 127 (3) (2005) 673–678.

[42] J.K. Lancaster, Polymer-based bearing materials: the role of fillers and fibre reinforcement, Tribology 5 (6) (1972) 249–255.

[43] T.A. Blanchet, A model for polymer composite wear behavior including preferential load support and surface accumulation of filler particulates, Tribology Transactions 38 (4) (1995) 821–828.

[44] T.A. Blanchet, S.S. Kandanur, L.S. Schadler, Coupled effect of filler content and counter surface roughness on PTFE nanocomposite wear resistance, Tribology

Letters 40 (1) (2009) 11–21.

  • Transfer film evolution and its role in promoting ultra-low wear of a PTFE nanocomposite
    • Introduction
    • Materials and methods
      • Materials
      • Sample preparation
      • Wear testing
    • Results
      • Wear behavior of alpha-aluminum oxide PTFE nanocomposites
      • Transfer film development
      • Run-in period
      • Transition period
      • Steady-state period
    • Discussion
    • Conclusion
    • Acknowledgments
    • References

all articles will be uesed/TRANSFER OF SEMICRYSTALLINE POLYMERS SLIDING AGAINST A SMOOTH STEEL SURFACE.pdf

Wear, 75 (1982) 183 - 199 183

TRANSFER OF SEMICRYSTALLINE POLYMERS SLIDING AGAINST A SMOOTH STEEL SURFACE*

KYUICHIRO TANAKA

Faculty of Engineering, Kanazawo University, Kanazawa 920 (Japan)

(Received May 27,198l; in revised form July 30,198l)

Summary

The interrelationships between transfer and wear in polymers were studied using a pin-disk-type wear testing apparatus. The wear rates of polymers except polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) were high for up to about the first 100 revolutions of the disk and decreased gradually until the steady low wear rates which generally occurred after about 2000 revolutions. How- ever, PTFE exhibited an almost constant high wear rate throughout the wear process. The thickness of transferred polymer increased rapidly with increas- ing number of revolutions in the initial wear stage but after about several hundred revolutions remained constant. A coherent transfer fihn was formed in most parts of the friction track after about 100 revolutions. It was found that polymer wear could occur in polymers sliding on a transferred polymer layer. All polymers except PTFE exhibited smaller wear rates when sliding on the transferred layer. The load dependence of the thickness was very small compared with that of the wear rate. PTFE produced a very dense and coher- ent transferred layer compared with that of other polymers. However, there was no clear relationship between friction and the thickness of the transferred polymer layer.

1. Introduction

It is well known that polymer transfer to the countersurface occurs during sliding of polymers and that the transferred material plays an impor- tant role in the wear characteristics of polymers. Makinson and Tabor [l] explained the friction and transfer characteristics of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) on the basis of its morphology, which is characterized by a banded structure. It was found [ 21 that long fibres about 30 nm thick were produced on PTFE frictional surfaces during the wear process at engineering speeds (0.1 - 2.5 m s-l), that the film transferred to the countersurface and that the

*Paper presented at the International Conference on Wear of Materials 1981, San Francisco, CA, U.S.A., March 30 - April 1,198l.

0043-1648/82/0000-00001$02.50 0 Elsevier Sequoia/Printed in The Netherlands

184

wear characteristics of PTFE were explained on the basis of the banded structure. Pooley and Tabor [ 31 found that the friction and transfer prop- erties of PTFE and high density polyethylene (HDPE) were different from those of other polymers having bulky side groups in the molecular chain. They observed the transfer of an extremely thin PTFE film, about 2.5 nm thick, and suggested that the low friction and light transfer of PTFE and HDPE during sliding were essentially due to their smooth molecular profiles. However, it has been reported [ 41 that the transfer properties of HDPE were different from those of PTFE and were similar to those of other polymers having a spherulitic structure. In order to measure the thickness of transferred polymer, Sviridyonok et al. [ 51 rubbed a polymer roller against a film made of different polymers and determined the thickness by IR spectroscopy applied to the film after rubbing. They found that the thickness of the trans- ferred layer increased gradually as the sliding time increased and then fluctuated around an average value. Jain and Bahadur [ 61 also studied the thickness of the transferred layer in polymer-polymer sliding by a similar technique to that of Sviridyonok et al. [ 51 and found that the layer thick- ness increased with sliding speed and time but decreased with load. Although previous studies have provided much useful information on polymer transfer, no investigation has been made on the relationship between wear rate and transfer in the wear process of polymers.

Eiss and coworkers [ 7, 81 studied the transfer of polymers to rough metal surfaces using neutron-activation analysis. The wear of polymers in their experiments, however, was due to the abrasive action of the penetrating metal asperities. They consider that for smooth surfaces the polymer wear rate drops to zero after a certain number of passes. Briscoe et al. [9] also considered that continuous sliding of a polymer over the transferred film of a similar polymer does not cause further transfer. Therefore, the wear rate of polymer may be expected to reach zero after a certain number of passes when a polymer rubs on a smooth surface for multiple passes. However, it has been shown [ 41 that the transfer of PTFE occurs on previously transfer- red PTFE film in the sliding of PTFE on glass plate at very low speed. It is also well known that the wear rate does not reach zero in a polymer wear process but that the wear rate generally decreases significantly following the initial higher wear rate. It is, therefore, desirable to carry out further work on the transfer of polymers in the wear process.

In this paper the results of an investigation of wear and transfer in pin- disk-type wear experiments are presented. The thickness of the polymer layer transferred to the smooth steel disk was determined by an electrical capacitance technique.

2. Experimental details

2.1. Apparatus and experimental procedures To measure friction and wear of polymers simultaneously, the pir-

disk-type wear testing apparatus previously used [lo] was employed,

185

although modified to allow examination of the properties of the transferred polymer layer. Measurements of the frictional force and wear depth are made continuously during the wear process. Experiments were carried out at a sliding speed of 0.1 m s-l under loads of 10 and 50 N at room temperature (about 24 “C). The flat ends of the polymer pins, which were 3 mm in diam- eter, were rubbed against mild steel disks. The frictional surface of the disk was polished with 5 m alumina powder to a roughness less than 0.02 pm centre-line average. The diameter of the frictional tracks on the disks was 5 cm, which corresponded to an entire track length of 15.7 cm.

Aft,er the polymer pin specimen was mounted onto the specimen holder, the pin was initially rubbed against 1000 grade emery paper placed on the disk and then rubbed against the disk surface for 1000 revolutions. This prerubbing treatment allowed uniform contact between the pin and the disk. Before the start of the transfer experiment, the disk surface was again polished to remove transferred material produced in the prerubbing treat- ment and then was made as clean as possible by rubbing under ethyl alcohol with a cloth. In the transfer experiments, the polymer pins were generally rubbed on the disk for 1, 10, 100, 1000 and 10 000 revolutions. Measure- ments of frictional force and wear depth during sliding were made on the pins for experimental runs of 10 000 revolutions. With a load of 50 N, how- ever, rubbing for some polymers having a high wear rate was limited to less than 10 000 revolutions. The wear depth after a small number of revolutions was too small to measure accurately.

After rubbing with the polymer pin, an electrode was pressed on the frictional track on the disk under a load of 3 N to measure the thickness of transferred polymer layer. Measurements were made at 15 positions on the entire length of track. After these measurements, a smooth steel sphere 2.38 mm in radius was slid over the entire length of the track at a speed of 1 mm s-l under a load of 0.2 N and the friction coefficient pt obtained. The electrical resistance between the steel sphere and the disk was also measured during sliding of the steel sphere. Measurements of the friction and electrical resistance were carried out to examine the properties of transferred material. Optical and electron microscopy examinations of the frictional track with transferred material were also made.

2.2. Electrical measurement of the thickness of the transferred polymer layer The thickness of the transferred polymer layer was determined by the

electrical capacitance between the electrode and the disk as shown in Fig. l(a). The electrode was constructed by vacuum evaporating a thin gold film on a planoconvex glass lens with a radius of curvature of 7.8 cm. The spherical surface of the electrode was also coated with a thin polyethylene film, about 300 nm in thickness, by dipping it in a solution of polyethylene in xylene. The coated electrode was initially pressed on the disk surface without transferred polymer under a load of 3 N and the electrical capaci- tance between the electrode and the disk was measured (Fig. l(b)). In this case, the measured capacitance Ci is composed of the stray capacitance C,,

186

lZmrn-I

(4

&l---l (b) 7iT cf

(c) TTT :’ -J-J-$

Fig. 1. Electrical measurement of the thickness of transferred polymer layer (C,, stray capacitance; CL, capacitance between the noncontact part of electrode and the disk; Cf, capacitance of the polyethylene film in contact region; C, capacitance of the transfer- red polymer layer in the contact region): (a) the electrode on the disk: 1, metal plate; 2, glass lens; 3, gold film; 4, polyethylene film; 5, transferred polymer layer; 6, steel disk; (b) the capacitance measured for an electrode on the disk without the transferred polymer layer; (c) the capacitance measured for an electrode on the disk with the transferred polymer layer.

the capacitance CL between the non-contact region of the spherical part of the electrode and the disk surface and the capacitance Cr of the coated poly- ethylene film in the contact region. The area of contact may be estimated by applying the Hertz equation, which gives a value of 146 pm as the radius of contact under a load of 3 N. The value of Cf was determined using the area of contact, the dielectric constant of polyethylene and the thickness of the polyethylene film. When the coated electrode was pressed on the frictional track with transferred polymer layer, the capacitance Cz measured is shown in Fig. l(c), where C is the capacitance of the transferred polymer layer in the contact region. The thickness t was obtained from the equations

C= cp -__c Cl -c2 *

(1)

and

EE07rr 2 t=

C

where e. = 8.855 X lo-l2 F m-l, r is the radius of contact (146 /.un) and E is the dielectric constant of the polymer transferred onto the disk. Values of 2.1, 2.3, 2.3 and 17 were taken as the dielectric constants for PTFE, HDPE, low density polyethylene (LDPE) and nylon 6 respectively. Although the value for nylon 6 is much greater than the value seen in the literature, the value of 17 was determined by measuring the dielectric constant of nylon used as the specimen in work under similar environmental conditions.

2.3. Polymer specimens The polymer pins used in the transfer experiments were shaped by

turning small blocks cut from polymer plates of about 5 mm thickness. The materials used were PTFE (Teflon, Du Pont Co.), HDPE (Hi-zex 5000H,

187

Mitsui Petrochemical Industries Ltd.), LDPE (Sumikathen G201, Sumitomo Chemical Co. Ltd.) and nylon 6 (CM-1001, Toray Industries Inc.),

3. Experimental results

3.1. Wear characteristics Figure 2 illustrates the variations in wear depth h and the coefficient 1-1

of friction under a load of 10 N as functions of the number N of disk revolu- tions. Polymers except PTFE exhibited a low wear rate after an initial transient wear stage with a higher wear rate. The steady wear stage generally appears after about 2000 revolutions. In the transient wear stage, the wear rate decreases gradually with increasing number of disk revolutions while the wear rate during the initial 100 revolutions is extremely high. PTFE seems to exhibit a slight initial transient wear stage and its wear depth seems to increase linearly with the number of disk revolutions even for a relatively small number of revolutions. The variation in wear depth under a load of 50 N with the number of revolutions was similar to that under 10 N, while the wear depth was greater under a load of 50 N than that under the lower

number of disk revolution N

Fig. 2. Variation in wear depth h and friction coefficient /.L for various polymers with the number N of disk revolutions (load, 10 N): (a) PTFE; (b) HDPE; (c) LDPE; (d) nylon 6.

188

load. The wear rate of PTFE is much higher than the wear rates in the steady wear stages of other polymers and is about an order of magnitude as much as the wear rate in the initial wear stages of other polymers. The coefficient of friction generally varied with the number of revolutions in the transient wear stage, while it did not vary with the number of revolutions in the steady wear stage. With LDPE, the friction in the initial wear stage generally decreased as the number of revolutions increased, in marked contrast to the frictional behaviour of other polymers.

3.2. Thickness of transferred polymer layer Figure 3 shows the variations in thickness of transferred material for

various polymers as functions of the number of disk revolutions. The average thickness is plotted and the range of measured values is also shown. The thickness increases rapidly with the number of disk revolutions and after about 100 revolutions there is little increase in thickness with further increase in the number of revolutions. The thickness generally reaches a certain stationary value after several hundred revolutions. The variation in thickness over the entire length of the frictional track is considerable, indicating that polymer transfer does not occur uniformly over the track. The initial increase

(4

z (b) +-

F 5 t-

Cc)

7 T

100 r _____-

t+-+

_____-

f ?

I

50 - ___---., L

I 3c$ ’ 10 100

J too0 10000

100 r______ ____+ Iti =

- _ _____ T _-----’ * p 50 L

I j ‘0 I

I

20001 10 100 1000 KaIl

-1000

-te-+z"

: 500 ~ ___--- __-___ I

_/--- ~

4-

(d) 1od i Ib 160 I 1000 1ooco number of disk revolution N

Fig. 3. Variation in the thickness t of the transferred polymer layer for various polymers with the number N of disk revolutions under loads of 10 N (0) and 50 N (0): (a) PTFE; (b) HDPE; (c) LDPE; (d) nylon 6.

189

in thickness of PTFE is much greater than that in other polymers. The stationary value of the thickness of PTFE is in the range 250 - 300 nm and is much greater than that of HDPE and LDPE. HDPE exhibited the smallest value of stationary thickness, while the thickness of nylon 6 is much greater than that of the other polymers.

Figure 3 shows that generally the thickness of transferred material increases when the rubbing of polymers against a smooth steel surface is- performed under a higher load. However, the thickness increase due to the increase in the rubbing load is generally much smaller than the increase in the wear rate due to the increased load. For example, the wear rate of PTFE increased by a factor of about 6.8 as the load was increased from 10 to 50 N, while the increase in the stationary thickness corresponding to this load change was by a factor of only about 1.2.

3.3. Friction of a steel sphere sliding against the disk with a transferred polymer layer

Figure 4 shows variations in the coefficient ~_c~ of friction between a smooth steel sphere and the disks with transferred polymer with the number of disk revolutions. The average friction value over the entire length of the

number of disk revolution N

Fig. 4. Variations in the friction coefficient pt for the steel sphere sliding against disks with a transferred polymer layer with the number N of disk revolutions under loads of 10 N (0) and 50 N (0): (a) PTFE; (b) HDPE; (c) LDPE; (d) nylon 6.

190

friction track is plotted and the range of friction coefficient measured over the track is also shown. The variation in friction on the track was very large. This suggests that polymer transfer does not occur uniformly over the track. The friction with PTFE transferred under a load of 10 N and with LDPE transferred under loads of both 10 N and 50 N decreases gradually as the number of disk revolutions increases. In other cases, however, friction generally increases with increases in the number of revolutions above ten, although the friction at ten revolutions is generally lower than that at one revolution. The value of the coefficient of friction in the transferred LDPE is similar to that in PTFE transferred under a load of 10 N and it is as low as 0.1 after a large number of revolutions. In addition, the friction of trans- ferred LDPE is much lower than that of an LDPE pin sliding against a steel disk. The coefficient ~_c~ of friction observed at large numbers of revolutions is sometimes as low as 0.065 for PTFE and LDPE. There was great variation in the friction of a steel sphere on the transferred polymer with the number of revolutions in spite of the approximately similar thickness of transferred material. This may suggest that the structure of the transferred polymer layer varies with the number of disk revolutions even when the average thick- ness is similar.

3.4. Electrical resistance between a steel sphere and the disk with a transferred polymer layer

With the apparatus used to measure electrical resistance, it was impos- sible to determine the value of the resistance when the resistance was greater than 3 MQ and smaller than 1 ka. Therefore, the resistances above 3 MC2 are considered infinite and below 1 kC2 are considered to be zero. Fractions L,/L and LO/L of track length showing infinite resistance L, and zero resistance LO respectively were obtained, where L was the entire length of the frictional track. The values of these fractions varied greatly in some experimental runs under the same conditions. With HDPE and nylon 6, the value of L,/L was generally exactly or approximately zero and that of LO/L was generally exactly or approximately 100%. With LDPE, the value of LO/L was generally about 10% for above 100 revolutions while the value of L,/L was generally zero. Figure 5 shows the relationships between the fractions and the number of disk revolutions for PTFE. L,/L increases and LO/L decreases as the number of revolutions increases. L,/L seems to become greater as the load increases. This is consistent with the result that the thickness of the transferred PTFE increases with increasing in load. Figure 5 shows that L,/L is exactly zero at one revolution even with PTFE and that LO/L approaches zero after a large number of revolutions. The electrical resistance of PTFE is different from that of other polymers. This must be due to the fact that PTFE has excellent film formation ability by sliding [ 41. In electrical resistance measurements, the resistance very often was between 1 kC2 and 3 MS2. With PTFE, the friction between the steel sphere and the disk was generally lower on the part of the track where the resistance was higher. Figure 6 shows typical traces for the friction coefficient

191

(b)

number of disk revolution N

Fig. 5. Variations in the friction of the proportion Lo/L (0) showing zero resistance and of the proportion L,/L (0) showing infinite resistance of the length L of the frictional track with the number N of disk revolutions (transferred material, PTFE): (a) load, 50 N; (b) load, 10 N.

Fig. 6. Typical traces for the friction coefficient /.L~ and the electrical resistance R over a part of the frictional track: transferred material, PTFE; load, 10 N; number of disk revolutions, 1000.

pt and the electrical resistance R over a part of the frictional track with a transferred film of PTFE. Friction is generally lower in the regions of infinite resistance and it tends to be higher in the regions of low resistance. However, the relationship between friction and resistance for LDPE was generally the opposite to that of PTFE. Figure 7 shows an example of traces for friction and resistance over a part of the friction track with a transferred film of LDPE. Friction tends to be higher in regions of greater resistance and is generally lower in regions of zero resistance. High friction also appears in a region showing zero resistance. These results indicate that the higher friction of PTFE is due to metallic contacts where surface asperities penetrate the transferred polymer and that the higher friction of LDPE is mainly due to the small thick lumps of transferred material.

192

2 lo” Y 50 El00

F m o,4r

Fig. 7. An example of traces for the friction coefficient rut and the electrical resistance R over a part of the frictional track: transferred material, LDPE; load, 10 N, number of revolutions, 10 000.

3.5. Microscopic examinations of the transferred polymer layer To study the structure of transferred materials, optical and electron

microscopy examinations were made of friction tracks with transferred materials. Although optical microscopy examination was carried out using the Nomarski interference contrast microscope, it was difficult to observe clearly transferred material with less than ten revolutions of the disk. How- ever, the transferred material was clearly observed after a larger number of revolutions. Figure 8 shows optical micrographs of frictional tracks after 100 and 10 000 revolutions for various polymers. With PTFE and LDPE, the thickness of the transferred material after 10000 revolutions seems to be greater than that after 100 revolutions, although electrical capacitance mea- surements indicated similar thicknesses. Traces of polishing scratches in the disk surface are seen even after 10 000 revolutions with HDPE and LDPE, indicating a relatively thin transferred layer. This is consistent with electrical capacitance thickness measurements. The thickness of transferred nylon 6 after 100 revolutions is greater than that of transferred layers of other polymers since no polishing scratches are seen. This is also consistent with the electrical thickness measurements. Optical microscopy indicated that polymer transfer to the counter-surface did not occur uniformly over the surface (Fig. 8). With PTFE and LDPE, many small lumps were scattered over the film-like transferred polymers. However, there were few lumps with HDPE and nylon 6.

Figure 9 shows electron micrographs of frictional tracks after 1,lO and 100 revolutions under a load of 10 N. It was generally difficult to see clearly transferred polymer after one revolution. However, a small amount of thin transferred material seems to be laid across the polishing scratches on the disk surface with PTFE and nylon 6 even after one revolution. With LDPE, there are only very small lumps on the track after one revolution. Electron microscopy shows that the transferred material generally forms a film-like layer after 10 revolutions (Fig. 9). However, traces of scratches can be seen after 10 revolutions for all polymers except nylon 6, which indicates that the transferred film of nylon 6 is much thicker than that of other polymers.

(a)

(b)

(d) Fig. 8. Optical micrographs of frictional tracks rubbed against various polymers under a load of 10 N (left-hand photographs, N = 100; right-hand photographs, N = 10000): (a) PTFE; (b) HDPE; (c) LDPE; (d) nylon 6.

fb)

(4

Fig. 9. Electron micrographs of frictional tracks rubbed against various polymers under a load of 10 N (left-hand photographs, N = 1; central photographs, N = 10; right-hand photographs, N = 100): (a) PTFE; (b) HDPE; (c) LDPE; (d) nylon 6.

Features of the frictional tracks after 1000 and 10 000 revolutions were similar to those after 100 revolutions. Figure 9 shows that a relatively coher- ent transferred film can be produced on the frictional track after 100 revolu- tions. However, film transfer does not occur uniformly even on an electron microscopic scale.

Figure 10 shows electron micrographs of transferred PTFE after 1,lO and 100 revolutions under a load of 50 N. A relatively coherent film was produced even after one revolution. The thicknesses of transferred PTFE after 1 and 10 revolutions under a 50 N load are greater than those under a

(a)

(cl

(b)

Fig. 10. Electron micrographs of frictional tracks rubbed against PTFE under a load of 50N:(a)N=l;(b)N=10;(c)N=100.

10 N load. This is consistent with the result for electrical thickness measure- ments of transferred PTFE.

4. Discussion

4.1. Significance of the thickness of the transferred polymer layer measured by means of electrical capacitance

The thickness of transferred polymer layer, shown in Fig. 3, was derived from eqn. (2) using the same value for the contact area between the electrode and the disk with transferred material in all cases. It was assumed in the mea- surement of thickness that the contact area was covered perfectly with transferred polymer. Electron microscopy examinations (Fig. 9), however, indicated that the transferred polymer existed only on a small part of the contact area after one revolution. Optical microscopy examination also indicates that the con&t area is not always covered perfectly with transfer- red polymer layer even after 100 revolutions. Such an imperfect cover of

196

transferred polymer results in an overestimate of the value of the thickness. The overestimate due to imperfect cover must be greater after smaller numbers of revolutions. Thus, the true thickness after one revolution must be much smaller than the thickness shown in Fig. 3 and thus the thickness must increase more rapidly up to about 100 revolutions compared with that shown in Fig. 3.

Furthermore, the measured thickness must be affected by the irregular thickness of transferred material. When the electrode is pressed onto the disk with transferred material, contact may occur only at thicker portions of the transferred layer in the contact area of a diameter of about 300 pm. Therefore, the measured value of the thickness in this work is probably somewhat greater than the true average thickness of the transferred polymer layer over the contact area. However, the average thickness measured after a large number of revolutions is probably not far from the true average value.

The mean contact pressure in the contact area of an electrode is about 45 MN rnp2 and this is much greater than that in the contact of a polymer pin rubbed on the disk. Therefore, the transferred polymer layer is compres- sed when the electrode is pressed on it. However, this may slightly affect the thickness measurement since the layer is very thin.

4.2. Structure of transferred polymer layers When polymers were slid on glass plates at a very low speed, the transfer

of polymers other than PTFE contrasts with the very thin film-like transfer of PTFE, being generally in the form of small lumps or short streaks [4] . However, electron microscopy examinations as shown in Fig. 9 indicate that a coherent transfer film is generally produced even with other polymers as well as with PTFE after 100 passes. The thickness of the transferred film is not uniform and with PTFE and LDPE many small lumps are scattered over the film. To study the structure of the transferred polymer layer, a smooth steel sphere 2.38 mm in radius was slid under a load of 0.2 N over the entire length of the friction track with a transferred polymer layer. The electrical resistance and friction were measured during this sliding. Under the sliding condition of the steel sphere, the radius of the contact area was estimated to be 14.4 pm using the Hertz equation, resulting in a contact pressure of about 300 MN rnp2. Since the specific resistance of polymers is generally greater than 1Ol3 R cm, the electrical resistance must be infinite in the apparatus even when the steel sphere is covered with a polymer film of 1 nm thickness. However, no infinite resistance was observed even after 1000 and 10 000 revolutions for any polymers except PTFE. Although the thickness of transferred nylon 6 is much greater than that of PTFE, no infinite resis- tance was observed in nylon 6. However, the resistance of polymers except PTFE was generally exactly or nearly zero even after a large number of revolutions, indicating some metallic contact between the sliding steel sphere and the disk. This indicates that the transferred films of HDPE, LDPE and nylon 6 cannot generally prevent some metallic contacts when the steel sphere is loaded on the film under a high contact pressure. The results for

197

the electrical resistance show that the transferred film of PTFE is much more coherent than that of other polymers. This is consistent with the fact that PTFE has excellent film formation ability. It was sometimes observed that the resistance was between infinity and zero. This was very often observed with PTFE. A resistance between infinity and zero means that a very small amount of metallic contact occurs over the contact area and the resistance may be due to a spreading resistance [ 111.

In the traces for friction and resistance with LDPE (see Fig. 7) high friction occurs generally in regions of high resistance, suggesting the presence of a thick lump in the region of high resistance. In addition, Fig. 7 shows that the friction is generally low in regions of zero resistance. Therefore, a considerable amount of coherent transferred film is produced even if the resistance is zero.

4.3. Relationships between transfer and wear in polymers With all polymers except PTFE, variation in wear depth with the

number of disk revolutions is very large up to about 100 revolutions and decreases gradually until a very low wear rate appears in the steady wear stage. This stage generally appears after 2000 revolutions. Although the exact wear depth after 100 revolutions was difficult to determine, the mean wear rates during sliding up to 100 revolutions were of the order of 10-l pm rev-l and the wear rates in the steady wear stages were in the range (1.3 - 0.6) X lop3 lun rev- ’ for HDPE, LDPE and nylon 6 under a load of 10 N. However, PTFE exhibited an approximately constant wear rate of about 1.3 X 10-l pm rev-’ under a load of 10 N throughout the wear process. Although the thickness of transferred polymer also increased rapidly up to about 100 revolutions, it reached an approximately constant value after several hundred revolutions. Therefore, the initial high wear rate corre- sponded to the initial high transfer rate. However, the steady wear stage does not correspond exactly to the constant thickness stage of transferred polymer. In the initial wear stage of high wear rate, polymer transfers to portions where no transfer occurred in previous passes of the polymer pin. The initial high wear rate may be mainly due to a higher transfer rate of polymer on the metal surface. The fact that the thickness of the transferred polymer layer increases during the wear process indicates clearly that polymer wear can occur on the transferred film of similar polymer. With electron microscopy, the friction track after 100 revolutions was similar to that after 10 000 revolutions. However, polymer wear occurs even after 100 revolu- tions, which indicates that polymer wear occurs on the transferred film of similar polymer.

Although the initial wear rates of all polymers except for PTFE are greater than the wear rates in the steady wear stages, those values are similar to the wear rate of PTFE. ,Therefore, the transfer rate of PTFE to the metal surface seems to be near to that of other polymers on metal. However, the experimental results indicate that the wear rate of PTFE does not decrease

198

during the sliding of PTFE on the transferred PTFE layer. This is a marked contrast to the wear processes of other polymers.

Estimation of the thickness of a transferred polymer layer on the basis that the total worn volume of the polymer pin contributes to the formation of a uniform transfer layer over the frictional track gives a much greater thickness than the measured thickness. This shows that the transferred film must be removed continuously from the friction track in the wear process by the front edge of the polymer pin. It is usually observed that polymer wear debris accumulates at both sides of the friction track. The fact that the thickness of the transferred polymer layer increases in the initial wear stage suggests that the removing action on the transferred polymer layer by the front edge of the polymer pin does not separate perfectly the transferred layer from the countersurface but removes only a part of the transferred layer. Therefore, it is reasonable to consider that a constant thickness of transferred polymer layer is determined as the result of the balance between the removing action of the front edge of the polymer pin and replenishment of the polymer film by transfer.

The thickness of the transferred polymer layer generally seems to increase as the rubbing load increases. Although the thickness obtained under a 50 N load is smaller than that under a 10 N load with nylon 6, this may be insignificant with respect to the accuracy of thickness measurement. The load dependence of the transferred polymer thickness is small. Although the wear rates under a load of 50 N increased considerably compared with those under a 10 N load, the constant values of the thickness increased only by a factor of about 1.2. This suggests that the removal of transferred polymer by the front edge of the polymer pin is enhanced with increased load, Jain and Bahadur [6] reported that the thickness of the layer of trans- ferred polymer decreased with load. Although the present result for the effect of load on thickness is different from their result, this must be due to a difference in experimental conditions.

5. Conclusion

The interrelationships between transfer and wear in several semi- crystalline polymers were studied using a pin-disk-type wear-testing apparatus. The wear rates of HDPE, LDPE and nylon 6 were large up to about 100 revolutions of the disk and decreased gradually until steady low wear rates appeared after about 2000 revolutions. With PTFE, however, the wear rate was almost constant throughout the wear process and the wear rate was of the order of the magnitude of the initial wear rates of other polymers. The thickness of transferred material generally increases rapidly with the first several tens of revolutions while after several hundred revolu- tions there was little increase in the thicknesses of the transferred polymer. The thickness became approximately constant before the steady wear stage appeared. A relatively coherent transferred film is formed in some

199

portions of the frictional track even after 10 revolutions. After about 100 revolutions most parts of the friction track are covered with a coherent transferred film. The approximate thicknesses of the transferred polymer layer after a large number of revolutions are 280 nm, 100 nm, 120 nm and 720 nm for PTFE, HDPE, LDPE and nylon 6 respectively. The transferred polymer layer is not uniform in thickness and many small lumps exist in the PTFE and LDPE layers. Polymer wear can occur during sliding of a polymer on the transferred material of a similar polymer. Polymers other than PTFE exhibit very small wear rates on the coherent transferred film. Although the thickness of the transferred polymer layer seems generally to increase with increasing rubbing load, the increase is small compared with the increase in the wear rate caused by the load increase.

Electrical resistance results indicated that PTFE produced a very dense and coherent transferred layer compared with that of other polymers. LDPE seems to produce a more coherent transferred layer than HDPE and nylon 6. The steel sphere sliding on the transferred polymer layers exhibited a coefficient of friction of about 0.1 or less with PTFE rubbed under a 10 N load and LDPE rubbed under loads of both 10 N and 50 N. In other cases, however, the friction was generally higher and increased with increasing number of revolutions when the thickness increased or remained approxi- mately constant.

Acknowledgment

The author thanks Messrs. S. Ueda and E. Nishioka for their assistance.

References

1 K. R. Makinson and D. Tabor, Proc. R. Sot. London, Ser. A, 281 (1964) 49. 2 K. Tanaka, Y. Uchiyama and S. Toyooka, Wear, 23 (1973) 163. 3 C. M. Pooley and D. Tabor,Proc. R. Sot. London, Ser. A, 329 (1972) 261. 4 K. Tanaka and T. Miyata, Wear, 41 (1977) 383. 5 A. I. Sviridyonok, V. A. Bely, V. A. Smurugov and V. G. Savkin, Wear, 25 (1973) 301. 6 V. K. Jain and S. Bahadur, Wear, 46 (1978) 177. 7 N. S. Eiss, Jr., and J. H. Warren, On the influence’of degree of crystallinity of PCTFE

on its transfer to steel surfaces of different roughnesses. In D. Dowson, M. Godet and C. M. Taylor (eds.), The Wear of Non-Metallic Materials, Institution of Mechanical Engineers, London, 1978, p. 18.

8 N. S. Eiss, Jr., K. C. Wood, J. A. Herold and K. A. Smyth, J. Lubr. Technol., 1 OI (1979) 212.

9 B. J. Briscoe, A. K. Pogosian and D. Tabor, Wear, 27 (1974) 19. 10 K. Tanaka and Y. Uchiyama, Friction, wear and surface melting of crystalline

polymers. In L. H. Lee (ed.), Advances in Polymer Friction and Wear, Vol. 5B, Plenum, New York, 1974, p. 499.

11 F. P. Bowden and D. Tabor, The Friction and Lubrication of Solids, Clarendon, Oxford, 1954, p. 25.

all articles will be uesed/Tribological behaviour of unfilled and composite polyoxymethlene.pdf

Wear, 148 (1991) 363-376 363

Tribolog~cal behaviour of unfilled and composite polyoxymethylene

(Received October 23, 1990; revised and accepted January 31, 1991)

Abstract

The wear and friction response of unfilled and composite polyoxymethylene (POM) sliding against hardened steel have been studied. A twin-transducer technique, wherein the thermal effects usually associated with wear measurements are compensated for, was used to determine the wear. The relationship between the formation of a transfer film and the sfiding speed and counterface surface topography were been examined for each polymeric material. It was found that unfilled POM did not transfer to a steel countersurface, while the composites of the POM tested did transfer. The friction and wear behaviour of unfilled POM depend strongly on the counter-face topography. For the composites of POM, the surface topography of the counterface does not markedly affect the coefficient of friction. The wear of the composites of POM, however, does depend on the surface topography of the counterface. Friction and wear results of POM + 15% polytetra~uoroethylene (PTFE) showed that this material would probabIy perform excehently under dry running conditions.

1, Introduction

When measured over a limited range of surface roughness values, the coefficient of friction of polymers can be relatively insensitive to roughness. The same is found for polymers fined with glass or carbon fibres;.see, for instance, refs. I and 2. Tanaka and Yamada f.l] found that for a specific load-speed condition, polyoxymethy- lene-polytetrafluoroethylene ~POM-PTFE) and POM-carbon materials loaded against steef exhibited this friction insensitivi~ with surface topography. POM-glass and unfilled POM, however, showed a considerable friction increase when roughness Ra <0.2 pm. The results of Kar and Bahadur [3], on the other hand, showed that friction increases linearly with surface roughness for pure and PTFE-filled POM. ft is fikely that their conclusion applies only to a given range of operating conditions.

Earlier work [4] on the effect of speed on friction revealed an initial rise in friction at low speeds, dropping off as speed increases, far unfilled POM and for its carbon- and glass-filled varieties. A substantial decrease in friction with filling was evident.

The relationship between wear rate and counterface roughness for PUM-based composites is more complex than that of friction. It is filler-dependent. While the

*Permanent address: Department of Me~haRical Engineering, Rivers State Wniversi~ of Science and Technology, PMB 5080, Port Harcourt, Nigeria.

Q 1991 - Efsevier Sequoia, Lausanne

364

wear of unfilled POM and POM-PTFE rises rapidly with increase in roughness, the wear of POM-glass and POM-carbon is virtually insensitive to roughness over a wide range [l].

Predictive methods have been developed by Kar and Bahadur [3] who applied a dimensional analysis to obtain a wear equation. The applicability of the equation, which is based on the adhesive wear model, seems to be restricted. The same holds for the wear equations by Jain and Bahadur [5] and Kragelskii et al. [6], which were based on the fatigue theory of wear.

The reduction in wear rate that may occur after running against steel for a certain period of time has long been attributed to material transfer onto the surface during the initial transient period. Such transfer film formation has been attributed to several mechanisms: the formation of adhesive junctions, followed by drawing of thin films across the counterface [7]; the easy destruction of the special structure [8]; easy slipping of crystalline slices [9]; and a smooth molecular profile [IO]. WhiIe this applies to typical semic~staliine thermoplastics such as PTFE, the behaviour of POM is still not well understood. Whereas some experimental evidence [ll] indicates the presence of a POM transfer film on steel, others [12] report no such evidence. Yet other reports remain silent on the subject.

Recently a group of eighteen high-temperature-resistant polymers, based on six pure polymers, was characterized by Mens and de Gee [133. Under test conditions, pure POM showed a relatively low wear rate. The present work follows from that study, and aims to achieve a better understanding of the friction and wear characteristics of POM and its composites. The effect of steel counterface roughness and sliding speed on material transfer has also been studied.

2. Materials

Four polymeric materials were tested, namely POM (unfilled copolymer), P0M-t 15% PTFE; POM-t- 15% PTFE-t-20% carbon; and POM+ 15% PTFE+20% glass. The fillers, carbon (non-graphitic) and glass, are long fibres with a diameter of 0.01 mm dispersed randomly through the matrix. Typical physical and thermal properties of POM are given in ref. 14. The density and hardness of the materials are given in Table 1. Each specimen had a rubbing surface area of 5 X 5 mm and was 18 mm long.

The counterface ring, with dimensions 100 mm diameter X 10 mm thick, was an AISI-52100 hardened steel, hardness 63 HR, (7.6 GPa). Two different surface roughness conditions were applied, i.e. (a) random surfaces (isotropic roughness texture) with CLA surface roughness values of Ra =0.03 pm and 0.1 pm, respectively, obtained by

TABLE 1

Density and hardness at 25 “C for POM and its composites

POM POM + 15% POM + 15% PTFE POM + 15% PTFE PTFE + 20% carbon + 20% glass

Density

(kg me31 Hardness (MPaI

1390 1550 1560 1670

114 113 132 112

365

pofishing; and (b) non-random surfaces (transverse roughness texture with respect to sliding direction) with Ra of 0.1 pm and 1.0 pm, respectively, obtained by grinding. The roughness values chosen cover the range of machining techniques, polishing and grinding, used in practice.

3. Experimental set-up and procedure

A pin-on-disc machine was used during the entire test programme. Figure 1 shows schematically the set-up of the test rig. Friction was measured through a force transducer, while wear was monitored using a system of displacement transducers. A constant load of 62.5 N (corresponding to an average contact pressure of 2.5 MPa) was maintained throughout the tests; the diameter of the frictional track was 80 mm. All tests were conducted in air at an average room temperature of 21 “C and at 70%-S% relative humidity.

The wear depth was obtained by employing a twin-transducer system, which mrn~~n~~+pr fnr thP thetmot onA mnirttsr,a shcnrrrtinn mfTm~tr ~rrtr~llxr swu-n~rnt~r~rt in ““*“yY”“Y’w? 1”. c1.w .‘l”l.“Ul “ll.‘ ‘.‘“.Yl”l” ““u”.yL’“.‘ YI‘“~L.7 u*uu,., “.I”“U*II”s”Y 1.1 wear measurements. The wear measuring principle is shown in Fig. l(a), in which transducer I detects the displacement resulting from wear, while transducer II records the GTGi ;..+..,.rl.*,.,rt t.rr .a., ,,...,.":+:, ,Llh,+- ,.I^__ TX- ,.A+..-% **.e-- A..-rl. . IIIII""UbGU "J L11G p"'eatr& Ij,LcA,LD Q1"I“z. xs*cr PC-LULII w~:ax usput iS the difference between the two transducer outputs. The instantaneous wear rate is derived from the slope at any point on the wear curve. If a differentiating circuit is incorporated into the system, in situ values of wear rate can be given as the test is in progress. Details of the technique are explained elsewhere [15].

Two types of tests were run: short tests (approximately 2 h) and long tests (20-24 h). The short tests were conducted to establish friction characteristics and transfer film formation in steady-state conditions, with respect to roughness and sliding speed. The range of conditions for these tests were: sliding speeds 0.1, 0.3 and 1.0 m s-l, roughness vaiues Ra 0.03 and (7.1 pm (randomiyj and 0.1 and 1.0 pm (non-randomly}. The long tests were designed to produce values of wear rate after the contact would

(4 @I Fig. 1. Test rig. (a) Top view; (b) front view. I, Pin; 2, disc; 3, pin-holder system; 4, flexible rod system; 5, frame; 6, air cylinder; 7, force transducer; 8, stabilizer; 9, dummy pin. I and II, displacement transducers.

have attained steady-state conditions. Discs ofRa = 0.1 pm (randomly and n~~n-randorn~~~ were used for this program at sliding speeds of 0.1 and 0.3 m 5”‘.

Before and after each test, both the steel and polymer specimens were cleaned in methanol and dried. The polymers were dried at 40 “C for about 24 h, and later transferred to a desiccator to acclimatize them to the laboratory temperature. As a check on the wear depth data, weight loss measurements of the polymer specimens were taken after each run.

4. Results and dh!RssioR

Figure 2 shows friction, wear depth and roern temperature as a function of time for a test in which PUM+ 15% PTFE is sliding at 1 m s-r against a randomly prepared @&shed) disc with a surface roughness of 0.03 Frn. It can be seen that a steady- state friction situation is established within a sliding time of approximately 1 h. The same was found to be true for unfilled POM and POM+ 15% PTFE+ 20% glass. POM+ 15% PTFE+20% carbon needed a somewhat longer sliding time, i.e. 2-3 h. The steady-state friction values for POM and its composites are given in Tables 2 and 3. The values are an average of two to three experiments.

These results show that the surface preparation, i.e. the roughness texture, does not markedly affect the coefficient of friction, although there may be a slight tendency for the non-randomly prepared surfaces to give somewhat tower values. With the elrception of pure POM, the coefficient of friction iends to increase with decreasing surface roughness. The coefficient of friction appears To be independent of &ding velocity, which contradicts the results reported by Tanaka [4].

POM, however, does show a rather large variation in the obtained coefficients of friction. The reason for this behaviour can be given in terms of transfer, as wift be seen below.

4.2. Muter-id traqfcr and surface examination As stated in Section 1, transfer films have long been known to reduce the wear

rate in polymer-metal contacts. For the present materiais the occurrence, or otherwise, of a transferred fiIm is given qualitatively in the Tabfes 4 and 5. After initial optical examination, the discs were observed using a Phifips scanning electron microscope (SEM) S35M. Figures 3-f) ilfustrate typic& SEM images of the frictional tracks on the discs.

The d~s~ni~nuous layer indicated in Tables 4 and 5 consists mostly of ~ntinuous ridges in the circumferential direction, as shown in Fig. 4(b). Lumps and platelets were found to exist an the 1 pm non-randomly prepared discs, because of its transverse roughness texture.

It was found that the films, when present, were generally thinner than 100-200 A, which was beyond the sensitivity of the microscope. Consequently, the disc surfaces were scratched across the track. This ‘scratch test’ provided definitive evidence of a transferred layer.

trnfilled POM, however, did not generate a discernible transfer film on the countersurface. Examination of the disc surface in the track resulted in the pictures shown in Figs. 4(a) or 5(a).

PO&i--PTFE transferred under the test conditions. Figure 3 shows the scratched area, curnprjs~~g both the track and part of the original surface,

3611

0 1 2

Sliding time. h

~~~-P~~~~bo~ transferred very w&l. Figures 4(a) and 4(b) give a dear contrast of the surface. Figure 4171) further shows a b~i~d-~~ of ~r~~s~~r~~~ materiat along the ‘ridges’, but smeared out between them. Their dark-gray colour suggest that they are thicker than 200 A.

POWPTFE-glass transferred onto the disc surface, Figures .5(a) and S(b) clearly show the presence: of a transferred layer, Thus, in this case it was not ~ec~ssa~ to perform a scratch test. Figures S(a) and Is@) show a ~ou=~a~do~Iy prepared Ra -0.1 pxn disc where transfer debris has filled the ~acb~~i~~ grooves, Cracks are ~ot~~ab~e on the debris as well as on &he transfer layer cowering the ridges.

The layers were too thin to examine their content; however, they ~~o~ab~~ consist mainly of PTFE.

368

TABLE 2

Coefficient of friction, randomly prepared countersurface

Coefficient of friction

Material POM POM + 15% PTFE

POM+15% PTFE + 20% carbon

POM + 15% PTFE + 20% &3SS

Ra (v4 0.03 0.1 0.03 0.1 0.03 0.1 0.03 0.1 V (m s-l) 0.1 0.36 0.46 0.23 0.24 0.43 0.38 0.33 0.28 0.3 0.53 0.69 0.26 0.24 0.39 0.36 0.37 0.33 1.0 0.38 - 0.27 - 0.50 - 0.35 _

TABLE 3

Coefficient of friction, non-randomly prepared countersurface

Coefficient of friction

Material

Ra km) V (m s-t) 0.1 0.3 1.0

POM

0.1

0.37 0.46 0.51

1.0

0.40 0.34 0.38

POM + 15% PTFE

0.1 1.0

0.26 0.20 0.25 0.20 0.24 0.25

POM + 15% POM + 15% PTFE f 20% PTFE + 20% carbon glass

0.1 1.0 0.1 1.0

0.35 0.34 0.28 0.20 0.34 0.37 0.36 0.23 0.46 0.33 0.33 0.24

TABLE 4

Results of examination of transfer films

Transfer film on the randomly prepared countersurface

Material

Ra (Km) I/ (m s-‘) 0.1 0.3 1.0

POM

0.03 0.1

No No No No No -

POM + 15% PTFE

0.03 0.1

Yesb Yesb Yes? Yes” Yes’ -

POM + 15% POM + 1.5% PTFE f 20% PTFE + 20% carbon glass

0.03 0.1 0.03 0.1

Yesb Ye? Yesb Yesb Yes” Yes” Yes” YCSb Yes” - Yes” _

‘Continuous layer. bDiscontinuous layer.

(a) (13) Fig. 5. Photographs of (a) original surface and (b) frictional track. POM i 15% I’WEi- 20% glass, p =2.5 MPa, V=O.3 m s -’ and Ra =0.03 pm (randomly).

(a) 0’) Fig. 6. Photographs of (a) original surface and (b) frictional track. POM+ 15% PTPE+ZO% glass, p=2.5 MPa, V=l m s-l and Ra=O.l pm (non-randomly).

In most cases only a ‘scratch test’ revealed the presence of a transferred layer. This might be the reason why, in the literature, conflicting results are reported with respect to the existence of a transferred layer.

The SEM analyses showed that all composites of POM transfer to the countersurface. This is the reason for the frictional behaviour of POM with respect to surface preparation and speed.

4.3. Wear Figure 7 shows friction, temperature of the laboratory and wear depth, measured

during a 22 h test, where POM + 15% PTFE was sliding against a non-randomly 0.1 pm prepared disc under conditions of p=2.5 MPa and V=O.l m s-‘.

The results of these tests for POM and its composites as a function of roughness texture and sliding speed are shown in Figs. 8 and 9, in which the measured wear depth is shown as a function of the sliding distance. The friction and wear results of these experiments are summarized in the histograms of Figs. 10 and 11, respectively. The wear presented in Fig. 11 is expressed in terms of instantaneous wear rate. The instantaneous wear rate Kikri,,* is obtained from (see also Fig. 11(a))

dV 1 rr,,,, = - _i - hi-hi_,

F;ds p‘ sj-sj_,

f 9 X r: c-4 II

w 9

PQ

a

373

(4

@I

Nan+?Mdamly gralmd ln8ah R8 0.1 um p - 2.6 Wa and V - 0.1 ml*

PCM+PTFE+ GLASS

PCM+PTFE+ CARBON

POM+PTFE

800

640

480

320

160

0

0 2 4 6 8 10

(Thousards) Slhlill~ dhtrnce. m

Non-Randomly grolmd laoe8# Ra 0.1 Ian p - 2.6 Wa and V - 0.3 m/o

0 5 10 15 20 25

(Thousands) SHdh~ dhtmlce. m

PCfvl+PTFE+ GLASS

POM+PTFE+ CARBON

PCM+PTFE

Fig. 9. Wear depth as a function of sliding distance for non-randomly prepared countersurfaces. (a) 0.1 m s-l and (b) 0.3 m SC*.

Table 6 compares the wear rates obtained by wear depth measurement with those obtained by weight loss measurement. Table 6 shows that the two methods used to obtain the wear rate are in quite good agreement. The wear rate obtained by weight loss measurement, however, is consistently lower than that obtained by wear depth measurement. This is because of the ‘bulge at the outlet’ of the worn contact area of the pin.

The results of the present study are in good agreement with those of Mens and de Gee [13]; see Table 7.

374

0.60 1m

21

30

41

0.1 m/s Non-Randomly

0.3 m/s Non-Randomly

0.1 m/s Randomly

0.3 m/s Randomly

POh4 POM PCM

PTFE PTFE PTFE

CARBON GLASS

Fig. 10. Coefficient of friction as a function of surface preparation and sliding velocity.

h

/

s-1 L-.__S s

12.50

10.00

7.50

Non-Rardomly

Non-Randomly

Randomly

0.00 POM PChl POM P&l

PTFE PTFE PTFE

CARBON GLASS

Fig. 11. (a) Instantaneous wear rate (schematic). (b) Instantaneous wear rate as a function of surface preparation and sliding velocity.

375

TABLE 6

Wear rate obtained by weight loss and wear depth measurement. p=2..5 MPa, Y=O.3 m SC’, non-randomly Ra = 0.1 pm

Wear rate (lo-” mm3 Nm-‘)

Weight loss Wear depth

POM 11.9 12.4 POM-i- 15% PTFE 0.6 0.75 POM + 15% PTFE+ 20% carbon 1.6 2.0 POM + 15% PTFE + 20% glass 8.3 9.3

TABLE 7

Friction and wear results from ref. 13 and this study

Mens and de Gee [13]”

K (IO-" mm3 Nm-‘) p

This studyb

K (lo-” mm3 Nm-‘) p

POM 2.1 0.45 1.3 0.69 POM + 15% PTFE 0.4 0.21 0.6 0.24 POM+ 15% PTFE+ 20% carbon - 2.3 0.36 POM + 15% PTFE + 20% glass 4.1 0.23 6.7 0.33

ap=5 MPa, V=O.25 m s-l and Ra=O.l pm. “p= 2.5 MPa, 1/=0.3 m s-’ and J&r =O.l pm (randomly).

5. Conclusions

(1) Under the present test conditions POM does not transfer to a steel counterface surface. The composites of POM all transferred to the countersurface in the form of a continuous or discontinuous layer.

(2) POM+ 15% PTFE+Xl% glass is probably unsuitable as a bearing material. Under certain operational conditions POM + 15% PTFE + 20% carbon may be suitable as a bearing material. POM+ 15% PTFE proved to be superior to POM and all the other composites of POM. It will perform excellently under dry running conditions.

(3) A randomly prepared countersurface is preferable with respect to wear. (4) Surface preparation has an enormous influence on both friction and wear for

POM, whereas for the composites surface preparation does not show such an influence. (5) The coefficient of friction is arbitrarily affected by the sliding velocity and

therefore it is unlikely to depend on surface temperature.

Acknowledgments

The authors wish to thank Professor A.W.J. de Gee as we11 as Mr. J. W. M. Mens of the Dutch Organization for Applied Research (TNO) for their stimulating interest, and Mr. N. Drost, also of TNO, for his assistance in operating the SEM. Furthermore, the assistance of Mr. A. J. Hoevenaar of the Delft University of Technology is gratefully acknowledged.

316

References

4

6

8

9

10

11

12

13

K. Tanaka and Y. Yamada, Influence of counterface roughness on the friction and wear of polytetrafluorthylene- and polyacetal-based composites,Proc. IMech.E., CZ38187 (1989) 219-226. J. K. Lancaster, Friction and wear, in A. D. Jenkins (ed.), Polymer Science: A Material Science Handbook, Elsevier, New York, 1972. M. K. Kar and S. Bahadur, The wear equation for unfilled and filled polyoxymethylene, Wear, 30 (1974) 337-348. K. Tanaka, Friction and wear of glass and carbon-fibre filled thermoplastic polymers, Trans. ASME JOT, 99 (1977) 408-414. V. K. Jain and S. Bahadur, Development of a wear equation for polymer-metal sliding in terms of fatigue and topography of the sliding surface, Wear, 60 (1980) 237-248. I. V. Kragelskii, M. N. Dobychen and V. S. Kombolov, Fricfion and Wear Calculation Methods, Pergamon, Oxford, 1982. R. P. Steijn, The sliding surface of polytetrafluorethylene. An investigation with electron microscope, Wear, 8 (1968) 193-212. K. Tanaka and Y. Uchiyama, Friction, wear, and surface melting of crystalline polymers, in L. H. Lee (ed.), Advances in Polymer Friction and Wear, Vol. SB, Plenum, New York, 1974, pp. 499-530. R. K. Makinson and D. Tabor, The friction and viscoelastic properties of polymeric solids, Wear, 9 (1966) 329-348. B. J. Briscoe, C. M. Pooley and D. Tabor, Friction and transfer of some polymers in unlubricated sliding, in H. Lee (ed.), Advances in Polymer Fricdon and Wear, Polymer Science and Technology, Vol. 5a, Plenum, New York, 1974, pp. 191-204. S. K. Rhee and K. C. Luderna, Transfer films and severe wear of polymers, Proc. 3rd Leeds-Lyon Symposium, Leeds, U.K., Mechanical Engineering, London, 1976, pp. 11-17. D. C. Evans and J. K. Lancaster, Discussion in the wear of non-metallic materials, Proc. 3rd Leeds-Lyon Symposium, Leeds, U.K., Mechanical Engineering, London, 1976, p. 288. J. W. M. Mens and A. W. J. de Gee, Friction and wear behaviour of eighteen polymers in contact with steel in environments of air and water, Wear, 149 (1991) in the press.

14 J. Brandrup and E. H. Immergut, Polymer Handbook, Wiley, New York, 197.5. 1.5 D. J. Schipper and S. Odi-Owei, A twin-transducer system for measuring wear, submitted

to Trib. Int.

all articles will be uesed/Zygo/ZeGage 2015.pdf

Robust 3D Optical Surface Metrology

Production Surface Profi lers

and ZeGage™ Plus

ground metal surface fuel pump plate polished prosthetic knee

The ZeGage™ and ZeGage™ Plus profi lers are Coherence Scanning Interferometers (CSI) that provide 3D optical surface profi ling for the measurement of precision surfaces. Unlike other optical surface profi lers, this system maintains high resolution

at all of its magnifi cation options. It’s also not aff ected by the environment it operates in. You can take it out of the QA lab, place it directly beside your production equipment, and still get precise 3D surface metrology.

Fast, dependable industrial metrology in a compact, cost-eff ective package

Vibration resistant, for metrology and process control on the production fl oor.

ISO 25178 compliant texture results ensure confi dence in your metrology.

Mx™ software— simple to use, easy to learn. All the powerful analysis of an industry standard.

Stable system with SureScan™ technology requires no

vibration isolation

Area-based measurement is insensitive to part lay.

A D V A N C E D D E S I G N

Powerful non-contact optical profi lers for precise and robust 3D form and roughness measurements in the lab and on the factory fl oor.

MEMS device in true color

ZeGage™ and ZeGage™ Plus product highlights

Non-contact technology prevents part damage.

Optical gage requires no consumables.

Interactive Analysis The ZeGage™ profi lers with

Mx™ software provide area and slice based interactive plots

and quantitative results of measurements, like this wear scar

on a ball bearing.

Open structure for great part fl exibility

Available with single optical zoom or automated 4-position objective

turret for maximum versatility

Motorized or manual XY stage options

Illumination and imaging are completely controlled through

the software

Two confi gurations provide the right level of precision at the right price.

Mx software is ZYGO’s proven platform for instrument control and data analysis. Using a simple workfl ow based concept, users easily navigate the metrology experience from setup through analysis and reporting.

The standard in metrology software: Mx™ control and analysis

A metrology system with intuitive software

Powerful Visualization Detailed three dimensional imaging of this banknote surface shows individual fi bers and texture in a rotatable and zoomable model which enables easy investigation and characterization.

Automated region analysis Separate discrete regions by height, intensity, masking, and more, to perform analysis of multi-regional surfaces like this granular surface in which each grain has been separated. Each region can be individually analyzed in the region tool and summary stats are instantly computed.

Quantitative Results Surface results compliant with ISO 25178 and profi le slice results are computed instantly for each measurement and can be tracked in real time with run charts and automatic logging features.

Interactive tools Live updating plots enable quick analysis of surfaces such as this semiconductor packaging bump array.

Interactive and detailed plots show full 2D or 3D data; profi le slices, material ratio, slope analysis, and PSD views. With built-in SPC, pass/fail indication, data reporting and run charts, production quality analysis is simple.

A D V A N C E D A N A L Y S I S

Mx software on ZeGage is cross platform and backwards compatible with all your ZYGO tools.

Powerful Performance Proprietary SureScan™ technology makes the ZeGage

profi ler resistant to vibration; no vibration isolation platforms or enclosures necessary.

Quantitative surface metrology with nanometer- level precision on the standard ZeGage profi ler and sub-nanometer precision on the ZeGage Plus profi ler provides superior gage capability.

Correlation to 2D and 3D standards, and compliance to ISO 25178 surface roughness parameters.

Versatility Measures a wide variety of surface materials and

parameters, including 2D and 3D profi ling of surface texture, form, step-height and more.

Included Mx software provides comprehensive tools for surface data visualization, analysis and reporting.

Optional motorized part stage enables fully automated measurement sequences and fi eld stitching for high resolution inspection of large areas.

ZeGage™ optical profi ler advantages

System Options Options

Manual or auto; with or without extended head position

Objectives 1.4X – 50X magnifi cation; standard and long working distance (See Nexview™/NewView™/ZeGage Objective Chart for more details)

Objective Mounting Options Direct objective thread (standard) Single objective dovetail (option) Manual or motorized 4 objective turret

Software ZYGO Mx™ software running under Microsoft Windows® 7 (64 bit)

Physical Characteristics Dimensions (H × W × D)

156 x 127 x 76 cm (ZeGage on workstation) 82 × 53 × 53 cm (ZeGage) 74 × 127 x 76 cm (Workstation)

System Weight ZeGage: 54 kg Workstation: 37 kg

Utility Requirements 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

ZYGO CORPORATION 21 Laurel Brook Road Middlefi eld, Connecticut 06455 Voice: 860 347-8506 www.zygo.com • inquire@zygo.com

©2015 Zygo Corporation. Data subject to change without notice. Covered by US and foreign patents. ZYGO, and the ZYGO logo, are registered trademarks of Zygo Corporation. ZeGage, NewView, Nexview, SureScan, and Mx are trademarks of Zygo Corporation. SB-0347A 05/15

THIS DOCUMENT AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT OR DISCLOSED BY IT ARE THE PROPERTY OF ZYGO CORPORATION AND ARE ISSUED IN STRICT CONFIDENCE TO THE INTENDED RECIPIENT ONLY. ALL REPRODUCTION AND DISTRIBUTION RIGHTS ARE RESERVED BY ZYGO CORPORATION.

Comparison of Benefi ts/Features

and ZeGage™ Plus

Benefi t/Feature ZeGage™ ZeGage™ Plus

Surface Topography Repeatability 3.5 nm 0.15 nm

Repeatability of RMS 0.1 nm 0.1 nm

Maximum Data Scan Speed 35 m/sec 73 m/sec

Illuminator Integrated Long life white light LED with computer controlled light level

Scanner Long range Z scan

Measurement Technique Non-contact 3D Coherence Scanning Interferometry (CSI)

Stage Control USB Puck

Safety Integrated Emergency Motion Stop

The ZeGage™ Plus is an expansion version of the ZeGage profi ler. It provides improved precision and a faster top measurement speed. It also increases the range of measurable surfaces and features. ZeGage Plus retains the ease of use, vibration robustness, and small footprint of the standard ZeGage.

With ZeGage Plus, measurements with sub-nanometer precision are possible. With

Higher resolution and faster measurements with ZeGage™ Plus profi ler

the tool’s higher precision, measurement of optical surfaces, and polished metallic components such as orthopedic implants, and superfi nished surfaces are all just as easy to characterize as the rougher surfaces measured by the standard ZeGage profi ler.

For high speed form measurements, the ZeGage Plus system scans up to 2X as fast as the standard system, providing faster time to data and increased throughput for production metrology. The chart below highlights the common and distinct features of the two platforms.

all articles will be uesed/Zygo/ZYGO-Mx-Surface-Texture-Parameters.pdf

   

MxTM Surface Texture Parameters

      

 

Contents Standards ..................................................................................... 2  Terminology ................................................................................. 3  Filtering ........................................................................................ 4 

Choosing Cutoffs (λc) ............................................................... 4  Profile ISO Parameters ................................................................. 5 

Profile ISO Height Parameters ................................................. 5  Profile ISO Functional (Material Ratio) Parameters ................ 7  Profile ISO Hybrid Parameters ................................................. 9 

Profile Parameters ....................................................................... 9  Profile Area Parameters .......................................................... 9  Profile Dimension Parameters .............................................. 10  Profile Hybrid Parameters ..................................................... 11  Surface/Profile Height Parameters ....................................... 11 

Areal ISO Parameters ................................................................. 15  Areal ISO Height Parameters ................................................. 15  Areal ISO Functional Parameters ........................................... 17  Areal ISO Functional (Material Ratio) Parameters ................ 18  Areal ISO Functional (Volume) Parameters ........................... 20  Areal ISO Spatial Parameters ................................................. 21  Areal ISO Hybrid Parameters ................................................. 22 

Surface Parameters ................................................................... 23  Angle Parameters .................................................................. 23  Spatial Parameters ................................................................ 24  Volume Parameters ............................................................... 26  Legacy Parameters ................................................................ 27 

 

© Copyright 2018 by Zygo Corporation. All rights reserved.   Information in this document is subject to change without notice. No  liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information  contained in this documentation or software, or for damages in  connection with this information.  

OMP‐0608B  April 2018 

Standards ZYGO is an industrial leader in surface texture metrology and  complies with numerous international standards, including the  following:    ANSI/ASME B46.1 ‐ Surface Texture (Surface Roughness,  Waviness and Lay)  ISO 4287 ‐ Geometric products specifications (GPS) ‐ Surface  texture: Profile method ‐ Terms, definitions and surface texture  parameters  ISO 4288 ‐ Geometric products specifications (GPS) ‐ Surface  texture: Profile method ‐ Rules and procedures for the  assessment of surface texture  ISO 13565 ‐ Geometric products specifications (GPS) ‐ Surface  texture: Profile method ‐ Surfaces having stratified functional  properties  ISO 16610 ‐ Geometrical product specifications (GPS) ‐ Filtration   ISO 25178 ‐ Geometrical product specifications (GPS) ‐ Surface  texture: Areal 

  Both form remove (F operator) and filtering are implied  by some of the above listed standards.  It is the user’s  responsibility to apply these software functions.  

Terminology Areal‐ A three dimensional surface area.  Autocorrelation‐ A mathematical tool for finding repeating  patterns, such as the presence of a periodic signal obscured  by noise. 

Cutoff Filter‐ Determines the wavelength at which the surface  structure is differentiated between roughness and waviness  data.  Proper selection of the correct filter cutoff in software  is critical to measurement accuracy. (c) 

Evaluation Length‐ The 2D or 3D area from which data is  obtained. 

Isotropic‐ the surface presents identical characteristics  regardless of the direction of measurement. 

Mean Line‐ A straight line that is generated by calculating a  weighted average for each data point resulting in equal areas  above and below the line.  Also known as center line. 

Profile‐ A two dimensional slice through an area.  Sampling Length‐ The area selected to analyze having a  particular cutoff; irregularities spaced farther than the  sampling length are considered waviness. 

Surface Texture‐ The topography of a surface composed of  certain deviations that are typical of the real surface.  It  includes roughness and waviness. 

  Lay‐ direction of finish pattern.  Form‐ general shape of the surface (inaccurate  machine, stressed part).  Waviness‐ widely spaced irregularities (vibration,  chatter).  Roughness‐ closely spaced irregularities (cutting tool  marks, grit of grinding wheel). 

Filtering A filter cutoff is used to separate the roughness and waviness  components of a surface.  Shorter wavelengths become part  of the roughness data; longer wavelengths are part of the  waviness data. 

Choosing Cutoffs (λc)    The (high‐pass filter) cutoff must be short enough to 

exclude long wavelengths (waviness).   The cutoff must be long enough for a valid sample (at least 

10 tool‐marks per cutoff).  Spacing  (periodic) 

Roughness  (non‐periodic) 

Cutoff  Sampling Length/  Evaluation Length 

Sm (mm)  Rz (µm)  Ra (µm)  c (mm)  Lr / Ln (mm) 

> 0.013…0.04  > 0.025…0.1  > 0.006…0.02  0.08  0.08 / 0.4  > 0.04…0.13  > 0.1…0.5 > 0.02…0.1 0.25 0.25 / 1.25 > 0.13…0.4  > 0.5…10  > 0.1…2  0.8  0.8 / 4  > 0.4…1.3  > 10…50  > 2…10  2.5  2.5 / 12.5  > 1.3…4  > 50…200  > 10…80  8  8 / 40 

 

Profile ISO Parameters Profile ISO Height Parameters   These are amplitude results based on ISO 4287. 

Ra  Arithmetic mean deviation of the roughness  profile defined on the sampling length. Ra does  not indicate the spatial frequency of the  irregularities or the shape of the profile. Ra is  meaningful for measuring surfaces that are sand  blasted, milled, or polished. 

Ra 1 | |  

Rku  Kurtosis of the roughness profile. It is a measure  of the randomness of heights, and of the  sharpness of a surface.    A perfectly random surface has a value of 3; the  farther the result is from 3, the less random and  more repetitive the surface is.  Surfaces with  spikes are higher values; bumpy surfaces are  lower.   

Rku 1 1  

Rmax  Maximum peak‐to‐ valley profile  height.  The  greatest peak‐to‐ valley distance  within any one  sampling length. 

 

 

Profile ISO Height Parameters (continued)  Rpm  Mean peak profile 

height.  The mean  peak height based  on one peak per  sampling length.   The single highest  peak is found in  five sampling  lengths and then  averaged. 

 

Rsk  Skewness of the roughness profile. It is a measure  of symmetry of the profile about the mean line.   An Rsk value of 0 depicts normal distribution  about the average line.  Negative values  correspond to high peaks spread on a regular  surface while positive values are found on surfaces  with openings and scratches. 

Rsk 1 1  

Rvm  Mean valley profile depth.  The mean valley depth  based on one peak per sampling length.  The  single deepest valley is found in five sampling  lengths and then averaged. 

 

Rz  Average peak‐to‐valley profile roughness.  The  average peak‐to‐valley roughness based on one  peak and one valley per sampling length.  The  single largest deviation is found in five sampling  lengths and then averaged. 

Profile ISO Functional (Material Ratio) Parameters   These 2D ISO results evaluate the plateau structure of the  surface.  These are suitable for evaluation of adhesion  performance, surface treatability, wear resistance, and  lubrication performance. Profile functional parameters are  based on ISO 13565. 

 

A1  Peak area defined by Rpk.  A2  Valley area defined by Rvk.  Mr1  Peak Material Component.  The upper limit of 

the core roughness profile.  This parameter is  derived from the bearing ratio plot. 

Mr2  Valley Material Component.  The lower limit  of the core roughness profile.  This parameter  is derived from the bearing ratio plot. 

Rk  Core roughness depth.  The vertical difference  in the core section.  It is the difference  between the upper level and lower level in  the core section. 

Rk  Midpoint 

The middle point of the Rk region; it is an  absolute height. 

 

Profile ISO Material Ratio Parameters (continued)  Rpk  Reduced Peak Height. Peak height above the 

core roughness. During a running‐in  operation, Rpk is the nominal height of the  material that may be removed. 

Rpk  Threshold 

The threshold between the Rpk and Rk  regions; it is an absolute height.   

Rvk  Reduced Valley Depth.  Valley depth below  the core roughness. Rvk impacts a surface’s  ability to trap debris and retain lubricant.  

Rvk  Threshold 

The threshold between Rk and Rvk regions; it  is an absolute height. 

c1  Height (or depth) at profile material ratio  control 1. 

c2  Height (or depth) at profile material ratio  control 2. 

c2‐c1  Height Difference.  Pmr(c1)  Profile Material Ratio percentage at height 

c1. The ratio (expressed as a percentage) of  the cross sectional area of the profile as a  height (c1) relative to the evaluation cross  sectional area.  

Pmr(c2)  Profile Material Ratio percentage at height  c2. The ratio (expressed as a percentage) of  the cross sectional area of the profile as a  height (c2) relative to the evaluation cross  sectional area.  

Pmr(c2)‐ Pmr(c1) 

Profile Material Ratio Difference. 

 

Profile ISO Hybrid Parameters  These are 2D ISO spacing parameters, typically useful for  surfaces having periodic or pseudo‐periodic motifs, such as  turned or structured surfaces.  

S  The average spacing  between local peaks  over the evaluation  length.  A local peak is  the highest point  between two adjacent  minima.  

S 1 2… 66  

  Sm  The average spacing between peaks at the mean 

line over the evaluation length.  A peak is the  highest point between an upwards and downwards  crossing of the mean line.  It is calculated by  summing all the peak spacing and dividing by the  number of spaces. 

 

Profile Parameters Profile Area Parameters  These are general 2D area parameters. 

Area  Above 

Area Above is the  area of the profile  data above the  mean.  Instrument  calibration is  required for this  result.  The mean is  the best fit surface  to the data. 

 

 

10 

Profile Area Parameters (continued) 

Area  Below 

Area Below is the  area of the profile  data below the  mean.  Instrument  calibration is  required for this  result.  The mean is  the best fit surface  to the data. 

 

Area  Net 

Area Net is the overall area of the profile data.  It  is equal to the Area Above minus the Area Below.   Instrument calibration is required for this result. 

Area  Total 

Area Total is the sum of the Area Above and the  Area Below the mean of the profile data.   Instrument calibration is required for this result.   The mean is the best fit surface to the data. 

 

Profile Dimension Parameters  These are general 2D dimensional parameters. 

Length  Circum 

The length or circumference of the slice. 

NPoints  The number of points or pixels in a slice.  Radius  The radius of a circular slice.  Size  The overall extent of the profile plot. 

11 

Profile Hybrid Parameters 

Correlation  Length 

Correlation Length is the length along the x‐ axis where the Autocovariance (ACF)  function first crosses zero. Autocovariance  is used to determine the periodicity of a  surface; it shows the dominant spatial  frequencies along a cross section of the test  surface.  ACF is a measure of “self‐ similarity” of a profile ‐ the extent to which  a surface waveform pattern repeats.  If the  surface is random, the plot drops rapidly to  zero.  If the plot oscillates around zero in a  periodic manner, then the surface has a  dominant spatial frequency.   

ACF  

 

Surface/Profile Height Parameters  These are general parameters that apply to both profile and  areal surfaces. 

H  Swedish height.  The roughness between two  predefined reference lines.  The upper line  exposes 5% of the data, and the lower line  exposes 90%.  H is less sensitive to data  spikes than peak‐to‐valley. 

 

12 

Surface/Profile Height Parameters (continued) 

Mean  The arithmetic average of a set of values.  It  is calculated by summing the data and  dividing by the number of points. The mean  is often quoted along with the standard  deviation‐ the mean describes the central  location of the data, and the standard  deviation describes the spread. 

X 1  

Peak  Peak is the maximum distance between the  center line and the highest peak point within  the sample.  The center line is defined as the  best‐fit surface selected with the remove  function.  Peak is the value of the highest  data point. 

Peak  Location  X 

The x‐axis location in camera coordinates of  the highest point. 

Peak  Location  Y 

The y‐axis location in camera coordinates of  the highest point. 

PV  (Peak‐to‐Valley) The distance between the  highest and lowest points within the sampled  data area.  PV is the worst case point‐to‐ point error in the data set.  PV compares the  two most extreme points on the surface;  thus, it is possible for two very different  surfaces to have the same PV value.   

13 

R3z  Base roughness depth.  The distance  between the third highest peak and the third  lowest valley.  A peak is a portion of the  surface above the mean line and between  center line crossings. Only applicable to  profile data. 

RadCrv  RadCrv is the overall radius of curvature.  Convex surfaces are positive numbers,  whereas concave surfaces are negative  numbers. 

RadCrv X  RadCrv X is the radius of curvature in the  x‐axis. 

RadCrv Y  RadCrv Y is the radius of curvature in the  y‐axis. 

RMS  (Root‐Mean‐Square) The root‐mean‐square  deviation from the center line.  This is a  method of calculating an average by squaring  each value and then taking the square root of  the mean.  The center line is defined as the  best‐fit surface selected with the remove  function. The RMS result is the root‐mean‐ square of surface figure error or transmitted  error relative to a reference surface.  The  RMS result is an area weighted statistic;  when used for optical components, it more  accurately depicts the optical performance of  the surface being measured than the PV  statistic because it uses all the data in the  calculation. 

rms … /  

14 

Surface/Profile Height Parameters (continued) 

Rtm  Mean peak‐to‐valley roughness.  It is  determined by the difference between the  highest peak and the lowest valley within  multiple samples in the evaluation area.  For  profile data it is based on five sample  lengths.  Only applicable to profile data. 

Rtm 1 2…  

StdDev  (Standard Deviation) A simple measure of the  variability or dispersion of a data set.  A low  standard deviation indicates that the data  points tend to be very close to the same  value (the mean), while high standard  deviation indicates that the data are “spread  out” over a large range of values. 

Valley  The maximum depth between the center line  and the lowest point within the sampled  data.  The center line is defined as the best‐ fit surface selected with the remove function.   Valley is the value of the lowest data point. 

Valley  Location   X 

The x‐axis location in camera coordinates of  the lowest point. 

Valley  Location   Y 

The y‐axis location in camera coordinates of  the lowest point. 

 

15 

Areal ISO Parameters Areal ISO Height Parameters 

ISO  Flatness 

Areal flatness deviation.  The measure of surface  deviation from perfectly flat.  It is the distance  between two parallel planes obtained by  applying a Chebychev fit to the surface data.    The Chebychev fit is a mathematical technique  that effectively uses two parallel planes to  “squeeze” the surface data points from both  inside and outside, adjusting the angle to  minimize the distance between the planes. 

Sa  Average  roughness  evaluated  over the  complete  3D  surface. 

Sa 1 | , |  

  Sku  Kurtosis of the areal surface.  

This indicates the presence of inordinately high  peaks or deep valleys (Sku>3.00) or lack thereof  (Sku<3.00) making up the surface. 

Sku 1 1 ,  

Sku 4.57 

ISO Flatness  68.045 µm

Sa 12.894 µm 

16 

Areal ISO Height Parameters (continued) 

Sp  Maximum  peak  height of  the areal  surface. 

Sp max ,  

  Sq  Root 

mean  square  roughness  evaluated  over the  complete  3D  surface.  

Sq 1 ,  

Ssk  Skewness of the areal surface.   This represents the degree of symmetry of the  surface heights about the mean plane. The sign  of Ssk indicates the predominance of peaks  (Ssk>0) or valley structures (Ssk<0) comprising  the surface. 

Ssk 1 1 ,  

Ssk ‐0.88 

Sp 35.550 µm 

Sq 15.233 µm 

17 

Sv  Maximum  valley  depth of  the areal  surface.  

Sv min ,  

Sz  Maximum  height of  the areal  surface.  It  is the  peak to  valley  height.  

Sz Sp Sv 

 

Areal ISO Functional Parameters  These areal parameters are used to evaluate the lubrication  performance of a 3D plateau structured surface.  

Smq  The material ratio at which the line‐fits of the  two characteristic linear regions of the material  probability curve intersect. 

Spq  The root‐mean‐square average of the height  deviations in the peak or plateau portion of the  Material Probability plot. 

Svq  The root‐mean‐square average of the height  deviations in the valley portion of the Material  Probability plot.  This result is useful as a  predictor of original surface roughness before  the removal of more material in subsequent  processes. 

Sxp  Peak Extreme Height.  A measure of the  difference in heights on the surface from the  areal material ratio value of "p" and the areal  material ratio of “q”.  According to the ISO  standard, the default value for p is 2.5% and  the default value for q is 50%. 

Sv ‐34.638 µm 

Sz 70.189 µm 

18 

Areal ISO Functional (Material Ratio) Parameters   Areal functional parameters are based on ISO 25178. 

  Sa1  The peak surface area between the upper 

intersection line and the Material Ratio  Curve. 

Sa2  The valley surface area between the lower  intersection line and the Material Ratio  Curve. 

Sk  Core Roughness Depth. A measure of the  “core” roughness (peak‐to‐valley) of the  surface with the predominant peaks and  valleys removed.  This is a measure of the  nominal roughness (peak‐to‐valley) and  may be used to replace parameters such as  Sz when anomalous peaks or valleys may  adversely affect the measurement. 

Spk  Reduced Peak Height. The area above the  region of the material ratio curve which  delimits the core roughness. A measure of  the peak height above the core roughness.  During a running in operation, Spk is the  nominal height of the material that may be  removed. A large Spk implies a peak  dominant surface.  

Spk  Threshold 

The threshold between the Sk and Spk  regions; it is an absolute height. 

19 

Sr1  Peak Material Component.  Sr1 represents  the upper limit of the core roughness  profile.  This parameter is derived from the  bearing ratio plot. 

Sr2  Valley Material Component. Sr2 represents  the lower limit of the core roughness  profile.  This parameter is derived from the  bearing ratio plot. 

Svk  Reduced Valley Depth. A measure of the  valley depth below the core roughness. Svk  impacts a surfaces ability to retain lubricant  and trap debris. 

Svk  Threshold 

The threshold between the Sk and Svk  regions; it is an absolute height. 

c1  Height (or depth) at surface material ratio  control 1. 

c2  Height (or depth) at surface material ratio  control 2. 

c2 – c1  Height Difference.  Smr(c1)  Surface Material Ratio at height c1. The 

ratio (expressed as a percentage) of the  cross sectional area of the surface as a  height (c1) relative to the evaluation cross  sectional area. 

Smr(c2)  Surface Material Ratio at height c2. The  ratio (expressed as a percentage) of the  cross sectional area of the surface as a  height (c2) relative to the evaluation cross  sectional area.  

Smr(c2) ‐  Smr(c1) 

Surface Material Ratio Difference. 

20 

Areal ISO Functional (Volume) Parameters 

  V1  The material ratio control setting where Vmp and 

Vmc meet. Default value is 10% (ISO 25178‐ 3:2008); however, it is user adjustable. 

V2  The material ratio control setting where Vmc and  Vvv meet.  Default value is 80% (ISO 25178‐ 3:2008); however, it is user adjustable. 

Vmc  Core Material Volume.   The volume of material  bound by  the surface texture between heights of  “V1” and “V2”.   The default values of V1 and V2  are 10% and 80% respectively (ISO 25178‐2:2012). 

Vmp  Peak Material Volume.  The volume of material  bound by the surface texture at a height of V1 to  the highest peak (Tp = 0%). The default value of V1  is 10% (ISO 25178‐2:2012).  

Vvc  Core Void Volume.  The void volume enclosed  from V1 to V2 of surface material ratio and  normalized to the unit sampling area. 

Vvv  Valley Void Volume. The volume of space bound  by surface texture at a height of V2 to the lowest  valley (Tp = 100%). The default value of V2 is 80%  (ISO 25178‐2:2012).  

 

21 

Areal ISO Spatial Parameters 

Sal 427.9 µm   Std 30.7°   Str 0.19  

  Sal 68.8 µm   Std 0.0°  Str 0.17 

  Sal  Shortest autocorrelation length.  It is a measure 

of the distance over the surface such that the  new location will have minimal correlation with  the original location. The direction over the  surface chosen to find Sal is the direction which  yields the lowest Sal value. 

Std  Surface texture direction. A measure of the  angular direction of the dominant lay comprising  a surface. Std is defined relative to the Y axis.  Thus a surface with a lay along the Y axis has a  Std of 0 deg.  Std is useful in determining the lay  direction of a surface relative to a datum by  positioning the part in the instrument in a known  orientation. 

Str  Texture aspect ratio.  It is a measure of the  spatial isotropy or directionality of the surface  texture.  Str is useful in determining the presence  of lay in any direction and has a range from 0 to  1.  A surface with a dominant lay (anisotropy) will be  less than 0.5; Str greater than 0.5 indicates strong  isotropy. 

 

22 

Areal ISO Hybrid Parameters 

  Sa 0.63 µm   Sdq 230.9 µm/mm  Sdr 0.05 

Sa 0.02 µm   Sdq 21.1 µm/mm  Sdr 0.00 

  Sdq  Root mean square gradient of the surface.  Sdq is 

a general measurement of the slopes which  comprise the surface and may be used to  differentiate surfaces with similar average  roughness (Sa).    Sdq is affected both by texture amplitude and  spacing. Thus for a given Sa, a wider spaced  texture may indicate a lower Sdq value than a  surface with the same Sa but finer spaced  features. 

Sdr  Developed interfacial area ratio.  Expressed as  the percentage of additional surface area  contributed by the texture as compared to an  ideal plane the size of the measurement region.  Sdr may differentiate surfaces of similar  amplitudes and average roughness. Typically, Sdr  increases with the spatial intricacy of the texture  whether or not Sa changes. Sdr is useful in  applications involving surface coatings, adhesion,  and lubricants. 

 

23 

Areal ISO Birmingham Parameters  These areal functional index parameters deal with bearing  and fluid retention. 

Sbi  Surface Bearing Index. For Gaussian surfaces  Sbi=0.61; good bearing surfaces have a high Sbi  value. 

Sci  Core Fluid Retention Index. For Gaussian surfaces  Sci= 1.56; the smoother the surface the smaller  the Sci value. 

Svi  Valley Fluid Retention Index.  For Gaussian  surfaces Svi= 0.11; surfaces with good fluid  retention have a larger Svi value. 

Surface Parameters These are general parameters that apply to 3D surfaces.    See also Surface/Profile Height Parameters. 

Angle Parameters 

Tilt  Angle 

The direction of tilt in the data.  Tilt Angle is the  direction that water would flow if it was poured  onto the plane. 

Tilt  Mag 

Tilt Magnitude.   The overall  angle of  inclination  between the  reference and  test beams of  the interfero‐ meter.  If  measuring a  surface, tilt is  the angle  between the  reference and  test surface. 

Tilt Mag  

 

Tilt  PV 

The PV of a surface defined by a plane with the  same tilt as the data, and masked by the valid  data pixels. 

24 

Angle Parameters (continued)    Tilt X  The tilt of the 

part relative to  the reference  surface in the X  direction.   Lateral  calibration is  required.  

 

Tilt Y  The tilt of the  part relative to  the reference  surface in the Y  direction.   Lateral  calibration is  required.  

 

Spatial Parameters  Centroid 

Centroid  X 

Dimension in the x‐axis to the center of all  valid data points.  Centroid X x1 x2 x3 ... Xn /n

Centroid  Y 

Dimension in the y‐axis to the center of all  valid data points.  Centroid Y y1 y2 y3 ... Yn / n

Size  Area  Area is a quantity that expresses the extent of a 

two‐dimensional surface. 

Mean  Size X 

This is the mean dimension of the data set in  the x‐axis of the live display.  This result is the  average width based on every row of data in  the data set.  If a test mask is defined and  applied, it is the dimension in the test mask  area.  Lateral calibration is required. 

25 

Mean  Size Y 

This is the mean dimension of the data set in  the y‐axis of the live display.  This result is the  average width based on every column of data  in the data set.  If a test mask is defined and  applied, it is the dimension in the test mask  area. Lateral calibration is required. 

NPoints  The number of points or pixels in a valid areal  region. 

S2A  S2A is the lateral area of tiling following the ISO  standard.  Both S2A and S3A tile the data with triangles in  the manner prescribed via ISO 25178‐2.  S3A  and S2A are the numerator and denominator,  respectively, of the ratio used as the definition  of Sdr.   S3A is the surface area of the triangle  tiling, and S2A is the lateral area of this tiling.  Both S2A and S3A tend to report a slightly  smaller area than the Area result because data  samples are considered between valid points in  space rather than as pixels. This results both in  a domain smaller than the pixel domain by a  half‐pixel on all sides, and also effectively  widens, with respect to the pixel model, the  holes introduced by missing data. 

S3A  Surface Area of the triangular tiling following  the ISO standard. See S2A. 

Size X   The size or  extent of the  data in the x‐ axis.  Lateral  Calibration  required to  display units.   

Size Y  The size or extent of the data in the y‐axis.   Lateral Calibration required to display units. 

26 

Volume Parameters 

Volume  Down 

Volume Down is the volume of the test area  which is lower than the reference area.   Positive Volume Down can be thought of as the  space occupied by pits on the test area; a  negative Volume Down result would protrude  above the reference area. 

Volume  Net 

Volume Net  is the overall  volume of  the test area.   It is equal to  the Volume  Up minus the  Volume  Down. 

 

Volume  Up 

Volume Up is the volume of the test area which  is higher than the reference area.  Positive  Volume Up can be thought of as the space  occupied by bumps on the test area; a negative  Volume Up result would extend below the  reference area. 

27 

Legacy Parameters 

  For SR ISO parameters, a surface area is analyzed by  fitting a minimum enclosing rectangle and applying a  5 x 5 sampling grid, for a total of 25 sampling areas. All  sampling areas together make up the evaluation area. 

SR3z  Base roughness areal depth. The height of the  3rd highest peak from the 3rd lowest valley per  sampling area. The base roughness depth is  found in each sampling area and then averaged. 

SRmax  Maximum peak‐to‐valley height over the entire  areal evaluation area. 

SRtm  Mean peak‐to‐valley areal roughness.  The mean  peak‐to‐valley roughness based on one peak and  one valley per sampling area.  The single largest  deviation is found in each sampling area and then  averaged. 

SRvm  Mean valley areal depth.  The mean valley depth  based on one peak per sampling area.  The single  deepest valley is found in each sampling area and  then averaged. 

SRz  Average radial peak‐to‐valley areal roughness.   The average of the largest half of many individual  Rz results determined by slicing the areal data  array about its center through 360 degrees.  The  Rz results are sorted by magnitude and SRz is  calculated by averaging the largest 50% of the Rz  values.  A line‐generation algorithm is used to  determine the actual pixel‐to‐pixel path of each  slice; there is no interpolation between pixels.  SRz covers the entire array, and due to its radial  generation it is lay independent.   

  Many Rz results are analyzed by radial  slicing data; the largest half are averaged. 

     

28 

 

 

 

 

Zygo Corporation United States

Phone: 860-347-8506 E-mail: inquire@zygo.com

See www.zygo.com for a complete list of locations and contact information

See what you’re missing

  Instruments for precision metrology

w w w .zygo.com

 

all articles will be uesed/Zygo/ZYGO-NexviewNX2,NewView9000,ZeGagePro_Objectives.pdf

  Nexview TMNX2 / NewViewTM 9000 / ZeGageTM Pro Objective Chart 

 

Specifications subject to change without prior notice.   

 

ZYGO CORPORATION LAUREL BROOK ROAD • MIDDLEFIELD, CT 06455

VOICE: 860 347-8506 • FAX: 860 346-4188 WWW.ZYGO.COM • EMAIL: inquire@zygo.com

SS-0122 10/18 © 2018 Zygo Corporation. All rights reserved.  

  Standard 

Magnification  1.4X  2.75X  5.5X  10X  20X  22X  50X  100X 

Design  ZWF  Michelson  Michelson  Mirau  Mirau  Michelson  Mirau  Mirau  NA  0.04  0.08  0.15  0.30  0.40  0.10  0.55  0.85  Working Dist  (mm)  4.0  4.5  8.0  7.4  4.7  4.2  3.4  0.5 

Optical Res (µm)  7.13  3.56  1.90  0.95  0.71  2.85  0.52  0.34  Slope Limit (deg)  1.85  3.71  7.27  14.53  21.80  4.84  28.13  40.36  Parfocal Dist (mm)  60.0  60.0  60.0  60.0 w/ inc. adapter  60.0 w/ inc. adapter  60.0  60.0 w/ inc. adapter  60.0 

Thread  M25  M25  M25  0.8 RMS  M25 w/ inc. adapter 

0.8 RMS  M25 w/ inc. adapter  M25 

0.8 RMS  M25 w/ inc. adapter  M25 

Turret Mountable  Yes  Yes  Yes  Yes  Yes  Yes  Yes  Yes 

ZYGO P/N  6401‐0179‐01  6401‐0100‐03  6401‐0101‐02  6300‐0194‐01  6300‐0595‐01  6300‐0596‐01 (LR)  6401‐0135‐02  6300‐0597‐01  6401‐0124‐01 

Field of View (mm) based on Zoom and Camera Array Size  1600 x 1200 Full FOV    0.5X Zoom will vignette for full FOV; image stitching is not supported  1000 x 1000 Square FOV  All Zoom optics are compatible with 1000 x 1000 FOV  0.5X 

6300‐0522‐02  ‐‐‐  12.38 x 12.38 

‐‐‐  6.30 x 6.30 

‐‐‐  3.15 x 3.15 

‐‐‐  1.75 x 1.75 

‐‐‐  0.87 x 0.87 

‐‐‐  0.80 x 0.80 

‐‐‐  0.35 x 0.35 

‐‐‐  0.17 x 0.17 

0.75X  6300‐0523‐02 

13.12 x 9.84  8.21 x 8.21 

6.68 x 5.01  4.18 x 4.18 

3.34 x 2.51  2.09 x 2.09 

1.86 x 1.39  1.16 x 1.16 

0.93 x 0.70  0.58 x 0.58 

0.84 x 0.63  0.53 x 0.53 

0.37 x 0.28  0.23 x 0.23 

0.19 x 0.14  0.12 x 0.12 

1.0X  6300‐0524‐02 

9.82 x 7.37  6.15 x 6.15 

5.00 x 3.75  3.13 x 3.13 

2.50 x 1.88  1.56 x 1.56 

1.39 x 1.04  0.87 x 0.87 

0.69 x 0.52  0.43 x 0.43 

0.63 x 0.47  0.39 x 0.39 

0.28 x 0.21  0.17 x 0.17 

0.14 x 0.10  0.09 x 0.09 

1.5X  6300‐0525‐02 

6.56 x 4.93  4.11 x 4.11 

3.34 x 2.51  2.09 x 2.09 

1.67 x 1.25  1.04 x 1.04 

0.93 x 0.70  0.58 x 0.58 

0.46 x 0.35  0.29 x 0.29 

0.42 x 0.32  0.26 x 0.26 

0.19 x 0.14  0.12 x 0.12 

0.09 x 0.07  0.06 x 0.06 

2.0X  6300‐0526‐02 

4.95 x 3.71  3.08 x 3.08 

2.52 x 1.89  1.57 x 1.57 

1.26 x 0.94  0.79 x 0.79 

0.70 x 0.82  0.44 x 0.44 

0.35 x 0.26  0.22 x 0.22 

0.32 x 0.24  0.20 x 0.20 

0.14 x 0.10  0.09 x 0.09 

0.07 x 0.05  0.04 x 0.04 

Spatial Sampling based on Zoom (µm/pixel) 

0.5X  12.38  6.30  3.15  1.75  0.87  0.80  0.35  0.18  0.75X  8.21  4.18  2.09  1.16  0.58  0.53  0.23  0.12  1.0X  6.15  3.13  1.56  0.87  0.43  0.40  0.17  0.09  1.5X  4.11  2.09  1.04  0.58  0.29  0.26  0.12  0.06  2.0X  3.08  1.57  0.79  0.44  0.22  0.20  0.09  0.04 

  Notes:   Optical Res is based on Sparrow Criteria =0.5/NA, where = 570 nm.     Slope Limit in degrees based on 1X field zoom lens; note that slope values are listed for specular surfaces; rougher surfaces can be measured at much higher slope limits.    Parfocal Dist is the distance from the objective shoulder to objective focal plane; standard 10X, 20X, and 50X parfocal distance assumes use of included 3.53 mm adapter ring.    The 100X and 1X SLWD objectives are not compatible with the ZeGage Pro.     

  Nexview TMNX2 / NewViewTM 9000 / ZeGageTM Pro Objective Chart 

 

Specifications subject to change without prior notice.   

 

ZYGO CORPORATION LAUREL BROOK ROAD • MIDDLEFIELD, CT 06455

VOICE: 860 347-8506 • FAX: 860 346-4188 WWW.ZYGO.COM • EMAIL: inquire@zygo.com

SS-0122 10/18 © 2018 Zygo Corporation. All rights reserved.  

  Long Working Distance (LWD)  Super Long Working Distance (SLWD)  Glass Compensated (GC) 

Magnification  1X  2X  5X  10X  1X  5X  2X  5X  10X  Design  Michelson  Michelson  Michelson  Michelson  Michelson  Michelson  Michelson  Michelson  Michelson  NA  0.03  0.055  0.14  0.28  0.03  0.12  0.055  0.14  0.28  Working Dist (mm)  8.0  21.0  21.0  19.0  40.0  40.0  18.5  19.0  18.0  Optical Res (µm)  9.50  5.18  2.04  1.02  9.50  2.38  5.18  2.04  1.02 

Slope Limit (deg)  1.34  2.66  6.30  13.13  1.34  5.81  2.66  6.30  13.13 

Parfocal Dist (mm)  122.8  120.0  120.0  120.0  181.5  120.0  120.0  120.0  120.0  Thread  M25  M25  M25  M25  N/A  M25  M25  M25  M25  Turret Mountable  Yes  Yes  Yes  Yes  No  Yes  Yes  Yes  Yes  ZYGO P/N  6300‐0318‐01  6401‐0126‐02  6401‐0127‐02  6401‐0128‐02  6300‐0307‐01  6401‐0131‐02  6401‐0115‐01  6401‐0112‐01  6401‐0106‐01  Field of View (mm) based on Zoom and Camera Array Size  1600 x 1200 Full FOV    0.5X Zoom will vignette for full FOV; image stitching is not supported  1000 x 1000 Square FOV  All Zoom optics are compatible with 1000 x 1000 FOV; 1x will be clipped to Ø 22.0 mm  0.5X 

6300‐0522‐02  ‐‐‐  17.49 x 17.49* 

‐‐‐  8.75 x 8.75 

‐‐‐  3.50 x 3.50 

‐‐‐  1.53 x 1.53 

‐‐‐  17.49 x 17.49 

‐‐‐  3.50 x 3.50 

‐‐‐  8.75 x 8.75 

‐‐‐  3.50 x 3.50 

‐‐‐  1.53 x 1.53 

0.75X  6300‐0523‐02 

18.57 x 13.92  11.60 x 11.60 

9.28 x 6.96  5.8 x 5.8 

3.71 x 2.78  2.32 x 2.32 

1.62 x 1.22  1.01 x 1.01 

18.57 x 13.92  11.60 x 11.60 

3.71 x 2.78  2.32 x 2.32 

9.28 x 6.96  5.8 x 5.8 

3.71 x 2.78  2.32 x 2.32 

1.62 x 1.22  1.01 x 1.01 

1.0X  6300‐0524‐02 

13.89 x 10.42  8.68 x 8.68 

6.95 x 5.21  4.34 x 4.34 

2.78 x 2.08  1.74 x 1.74 

1.21 x 0.91  0.76 x 0.76 

13.89 x 10.42  8.68 x 8.68 

2.78 x 2.08  1.74 x 1.74 

6.95 x 5.21  4.34 x 4.34 

2.78 x 2.08  1.74 x 1.74 

1.21 x 0.91  0.76 x 0.76 

1.5X  6300‐0525‐02 

9.28 x 6.96  5.80 x 5.80 

4.64 x 3.48  2.90 x 2.90 

1.86 x 1.39  1.16 x 1.16 

0.81 x 0.61  0.51 x 0.51 

9.28 x 6.96  5.80 x 5.80 

1.86 x 1.39  1.16 x 1.16 

4.64 x 3.48  2.90 x 2.90 

1.86 x 1.39  1.16 x 1.16 

0.81 x 0.61  0.51 x 0.51 

2.0X  6300‐0526‐02 

7.00 x 5.25  4.37 x 4.37 

3.50 x 2.62  2.19 x 2.19 

1.40 x 1.05  0.87 x 0.87 

0.61 x 0.46  0.38 x 0.38 

7.00 x 5.25  4.37 x 4.37 

1.40 x 1.05  0.87 x 0.87 

3.50 x 2.62  2.19 x 2.19 

1.40 x 1.05  0.87 x 0.87 

0.61 x 0.46  0.38 x 0.38 

Spatial Sampling based on Zoom (µm/pixel) 

0.5X  17.49  8.75  3.50  1.53  17.49  3.50  8.75  3.50  1.53  0.75X  11.60  5.80  2.32  1.01  11.60  2.32  5.80  2.32  1.01  1.0X  8.68  4.34  1.74  0.76  8.68  1.74  4.34  1.74  0.76  1.5X  5.80  2.90  1.16  0.51  5.80  1.16  2.90  1.16  0.51  2.0X  4.37  2.19  0.87  0.38  4.37  0.87  2.19  0.87  0.38 

  Notes:   Optical Res is based on Sparrow Criteria =0.5/NA, where = 570 nm.     Slope Limit in degrees based on 1X field zoom lens; note that slope values are listed for specular surfaces; rougher surfaces can be measured at much higher slope limits.    Parfocal Dist is the distance from the objective shoulder to objective focal plane; standard 10X, 20X, and 50X parfocal distance assumes use of included 3.53 mm adapter ring.    The 100X and 1X SLWD objectives are not compatible with the ZeGage Pro.